Audiobook: Tagalog Texts with Grammatical Analysis by Bloomfield, Leonard

The Project Gutenberg EBook of Tagalog Texts with Grammatical Analysis, by Leonard Bloomfield

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you'll have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this ebook.

Title: Tagalog Texts with Grammatical Analysis

Author: Leonard Bloomfield

Release Date: December 30, 2015 [EBook #50797]

Language: English

Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1

*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK TAGALOG TEXTS ***

Produced by Jeroen Hellingman and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net/ for Project Gutenberg (This book was produced from scanned images of public domain material from the Google Books project.)

UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS STUDIES IN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE

Vol. III May-November, 1917 Nos. 2-4

Board of Editors

George T. Flom William A. Oldfather Stuart P. Sherman

Published by the University of Illinois Under the Auspices of the Graduate School Urbana, Illinois

Copyright, 1917 By the University of Illinois.

TAGALOG TEXTS WITH GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS

PART I: TEXTS AND TRANSLATION PART II: GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS PART III: LIST OF FORMATIONS AND GLOSSARY

BY

LEONARD BLOOMFIELD

UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS

1917

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART I PAGE Preface 9 List of Books and Articles consulted 13 Texts in Phonetic Transcription and Translation 16

PART II--GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS

A. PHONETICS 134

1. Distinctive sounds 134 2. Syllabication 138 3. Accentuation 141

B. SYNTAX 146

1. Sentence and word 146

a. Syntactic relations 146 b. Parts of speech 146 c. Static and transient words 147 d. Personal names 147 e. The object construction 148 f. Expressions of indefinite quantity 150

2. Subject and predicate 151

a. Non-predicative sentences 151 b. The subject 153 c. The predicate 153 d. Subordinate predications 159 e. Omission of predicate 160

3. Attributes 160

a. Conjunctive attributes 162 b. Disjunctive attributes 170 c. Local attributes 177 d. Absolute attributes 180

4. Serial groups 205

C. MORPHOLOGY 210

1. Composition 210 2. General features of word-formation 211 3. Description of formations 218

I. Primary groups (zero, pag-, pang-) 218

A. Simple static forms 218

(1) Root-words 218 (2) Doubling 223 (3) Reduplication 224 (4) Prefix pang- 224

B. Transients, abstracts, and special static words 226

(1) Active with -um- and abstract with pag- 226 (2) Active with mag- and abstract with pag- r 231 (3) Active with mang- and abstract with pang- r 239 (4) Special static words 241 (5) Direct passive, with -in 243 (6) Special static words 247 (7) Instrumental passive, with i- 247 (8) Special static words 250 (9) Local passive, with -an 250 (10) Special static words 257

II. Secondary groups 262

1. Prefix si- 262 2. Prefix paki- 263 3. Prefix ka- 265

(1) Simple static forms 265 (2) Normal transients, abstracts, and special static forms 268 (3) Additional transients, abstracts, and special static forms 280

4. Prefix pa- 298

(1) Simple static forms 299 (2) Normal transients, abstracts, and special static forms 301 (3) Transients and abstracts with pa- and ka- 309

5. Prefix pati- 313

III. Irregular derivatives 314

PART III

LIST OF FORMATIONS 317 INDEX OF WORDS 320 CORRIGENDA 406

PREFACE

This essay is purely linguistic in character and purpose.

In taking phonetic notes on Tagalog I noticed that the pronunciation of the speaker to whom I was listening, Mr. Alfredo Viola Santiago (at present a student of architectural engineering in the University of Illinois) presented certain features of accentuation not mentioned in the descriptions familiar to me. With the intention of briefly describing these features, I took down more extensive notes and asked Mr. Santiago to tell me in Tagalog the stories of "The Sun" and "The Northwind and the Sun," used as models by the International Phonetic Association.

The data so obtained showed that the features of accentuation I had observed were in part distinctive (expressive of word-meaning), and, further, that certain other features, which were but imperfectly described in the treatises I knew (so especially the use of the "ligatures"), appeared in Mr. Santiago's speech in a regular and intelligible manner. A more extensive study was thus indicated.

The results of this study were subject to two obvious limitations. The utterances I had transcribed were either translations or isolated sentences, and I could not determine to what extent the features of Mr. Santiago's speech which I had observed were general in Tagalog.

The former of these limitations was fully overcome when I asked Mr. Santiago to tell me connected stories. In addition to fortunate endowments of a more general kind Mr. Santiago possesses, as I found, that vivacity of intellect and freedom from irrelevant prepossessions which we seek and so rarely find in people whose language we try to study. This latter quality may be due in part to the fact that, as Mr. Santiago's education has been carried on entirely in Spanish and English, his speech-feeling for his mother-tongue has not been deflected by the linguistic, or rather pseudo-linguistic training of the schools, so familiar to us. However this may be, I cannot be grateful enough to Mr. Santiago (and I hope that the reader will join me in this feeling) for the intelligence, freshness, and imagination with which he has given us connected narratives in his native language,--stories he heard in childhood and experiences of his own and of his friends. It is to be hoped that some of these will be of interest to students of folk-lore (as, for instance, Nos. 9, 10, 11, the old Hindu fable in No. 4, and the Midas story, much changed, in No. 5); the texts are here given, however, only for their linguistic interest.

The second limitation could not be overcome. As there exists at present no adequate description of the dialectal differentiation of Tagalog, nor even an adequate description of any one form of the language, I can make no definite statement as to the relation of Mr. Santiago's speech to other forms of Tagalog.

What is here presented is, then, a specimen of the speech of an educated speaker from Mr. Santiago's home town, San Miguel na Matam�s, Bulac�n Province, Luz�n. It would have been possible to include in the description the speech of at least one other educated Tagalog from a different region (uneducated speakers are unfortunately not within my reach), as well as such data as might be gathered from printed Tagalog books: I have refrained from this extension because, at the present state of our knowledge, a single clearly defined set of data is preferable to a necessarily incomplete attempt at describing the whole language in its local and literary variations. Comparison of literary Tagalog (chiefly the translation of Jos� Rizal's "Noli me Tangere" by Patricio Mariano, Manila, Morales, 1913 [1]) shows that Mr. Santiago's speech is not far removed from it. In most cases where my results deviate from the statements of the Spanish grammars, the evidence of printed books (and not infrequently the internal evidence of the grammars themselves) shows that the divergence is due not to dialectal differences but to the fact that the grammars are the product of linguistically untrained observers, who heard in terms of Spanish articulations and classified in those of Latin grammar.

This study presents, then, the first Tagalog texts in phonetic transcription and the first scientific analysis of the structure of the language [2]. Although the nature of the problem forbade the use of any material other than that obtained from Mr. Santiago, I have examined all the treatises on Tagalog accessible to me. No experience could show more clearly than the reading of these books the necessity of linguistic and especially phonetic training for anyone who wishes to describe a language. Not one of the works in the following list [3] contains an intelligible description of the pronunciation of Tagalog. The only general work of scientific value is the excellent second volume of P. Serrano Laktaw's dictionary. Much as one may admire the pioneer courage of Totanes and the originality of Minguella, these venerable men were as little able to describe a language as one untrained in botany is to describe a plant. Among the authors of monographs are several good names and one or two of the greatest in our science: nearly all of these authors mention the difficulty under which they labored for want of an adequate description of the language.

LIST OF BOOKS AND ARTICLES CONSULTED

Alter, F. C., �ber die tagalische Sprache. Wien 1803.

Blake, F. R., Contributions to comparative Philippine Grammar. (Journal of the American Oriental Society, vols. 27, 28, 29, 30).

Brandstetter, R., Tagalen und Madagassen, Luzern 1902. (= his Malayo-polynesiche Forschungen, ser. 2, no. 2).

Conant, C. E., The names of the Philippine languages. (Anthropos, vol. 4).

The pepet law in the Philippine languages. (Anthropos, vol. 7).

de Coria, J., Nueva gram�tica tagalog. Madrid 1872.

Cue-Malay, G., Frases usuales para la conversacion en espa�ol tagalo � ingles. Manila 1898.

Doherty, D. J., The Tagalog language. (Educational Review, vol. 24).

Dur�n, C. G., Manual de conversaciones en castellano tagalo � ingl�s. Manila 1900.

Fernandez, D. E., Nuevo vocabulario � manual de conversaciones en espa�ol, tagalo y pampango. Binondo 1901.

Francisco [Blancas] de San Josef, Arte y Reglas de la lengua Tagala. Manila 1832.

Garcia, F., at Herrera, V., Manga onang turo sa uikang ingl�s. Maynila 1902.

Gaspar de San Agustin, Compendio de la Lengua Tagala. Manila 1879.

H�via Campomanes, J., Lecciones de gram�tica Hispano-Tagala. Manila 1872. 3d ed. 1883. 4th ed. 1888.

von Humboldt, W., Die Kawi-Sprache, vol. 2, pp. 315 ff., 347 ff. (= Berlin Academy Transactions, 1832, vol. 3).

Kern, J. H. C., Over zoogenaamde verbindingsklanken in het Tagala. (Bijdragen tot de taal-, land- en volkenkunde van Nederlandsch-Indi�, ser. 3, vol. 11).

Sanskritsche woorden in het Tagala. (ib., ser. 4, vol. 4).

Kirk, May, The Baldwin primer. Tagalog edition. New York [1899 and 1902 copyright].

Lendoyro, C., The Tagalog language. Manila 1902.

MacKinlay, W. E. W., A handbook and grammar of the Tagalog language. Washington 1905.

Marre, A., Grammaire tagalog (Bijdragen, ser. 6, vol. 9).

Merrill, E. D., A dictionary of the plant names of the Philippine Islands. Manila 1903. (Publications of the Bureau of Government Laboratories, Department of the Interior, Philippine Islands, no. 8).

Miles, J., M�todo te�rico-pr�ctico y compendiado para aprender el lenguaje Tag�log. Barcelona 1887.

Minguella, T., Ensayo de gram�tica Hispano-Tagala. Manila 1878.

M�todo pr�ctico para que los ni�os y ni�as de las provincias tagalas aprendan � hablar Castellano. Manila 1886.

Neilson, P. D., English-Tagalog Dictionary. Manila 1903.

Tagalog-English Dictionary. Manila 1903.

Nigg, C., Tagalog English and English Tagalog Dictionary. Manila 1904.

de Noceda, J., y de Sanlucar, P., Vocabulario de la lengua Tagala. Manila 1860.

Paglinawan, M., Balarilang Tagalog [on cover: Gramatikang Tagalog] Maynila 1910.

Pardo de Tavera, T. H., Consideraciones sobre el origen del nombre de los n�meros en Tagalog (La Espa�a oriental 1889).

El S�nscrito en la lengua Tagalog. Paris 1887.

Rizal, Jos�, Die Transcription des Tagalog. (Translated by F. Blumentritt, Bijdragen, vol. 42).

de los Santos, Domingo, Vocabulario de la lengua Tagala. Manila 1835 (reimpreso).

Serrano, R., Diccionario de terminos comunes Tagalo-Castellano. Ed. 3. Binondo 1869.

Nuevo diccionario manual Espa�ol-Tagalo. Manila 1872.

Serrano Laktaw, P., Diccionario Hispano-Tagalog. Primera parte. Manila 1889.

Diccionario Tagalog-Hispano. Segunda parte. Manila 1914.

de Totanes, S., Arte de la lengua Tagala. Manila 1745. Sampaloc 1796. Manila 1850. Binondo 1865 (reimpreso).

Wolfensohn, L. B., The infixes la, li, lo in Tagalog. (Journal of the American Oriental Society, vol. 27).

I. TEXTS IN PHONETIC TRANSCRIPTION

1. ANG UL�L NA UNGG�` AT ANG MAR�NONG NA PAG�NG.

M�nsan ang pag�ng h�bang nal�l�go sa �log, ay nak�k�ta sy� nang isa ng p�no-ng-s�ging na lum�l�tang at tin�tang�y nang �gos. Hin�la niya sa pas�gan, d�tapwat hind� nya madal� sa l�pa`. D�hil d�to tin�wag nya ang kayb�gan niya ng ungg�` at iniy�lay ny� ang kap�tol nang p�no-ng-s�ging kung it�tanim ny� ang kany� ng kapart�. Tumang�` ang ungg�` at hin�te nil� sa gitn�` mul� sa magk�bila ng d�lo ang p�no nang s�ging. Inangk�n nang ungg� ang kap�tol na m�y manga d�hon, d�hil sa panuk�l� nya na iy�n ay t�t�bo na mab�ti k�y sa kap�tol na wala ng d�hon.

Nang makara�n ang ila ng �raw, ang p�no nang ungg�` ay namat�y, y�mang ang sa pag�ng ay tum�bo hangg�ng sa magb�nga. Ang manga s�ging ay nahin�g, d�tapwat hind� maaky�t nang pag�ng. Dahil d�to tin�wag ny� ang kanya ng kayb�ga ng ungg�` at iny�lay nya ang ila ng b�nga nang s�ging kung �akyatin ny� ang p�no`. Ang ungg�` ay umaky�t at kum�in nang mak�k�ya.

Sin�bi nang pag�ng: "Hul�gan mo ak�."

D�tapuwat isinag�t nang ungg�`: "Balat m�n at malinamn�m ay hind� kita h�hul�gan."

Ang pag�ng ay nag�lit at nags�bug sya nang tin�k sa pal�gid nang p�no`. Nang lumuks� ang ungg� ay n�tinik sy�. Pinagbintangan ny� ang pag�ng at kanya ng hin�nap �pang parus�han niy�. N�h�li nya ang pag�ng sa kabil� nang isa ng to�d.

Sin�bi nya sa pag�ng: "Kit� ay �ki ng par�rus�han. Mam�li ka sa dalaw�. Dikdik�n kit� sa lus�ng o lun�rin kit� sa �log?"

Ang mar�nong na pag�ng ay nagumpis� nang pagsisig�w at hinil�ng nya sa ungg�` na, kung ma��re`, ay dikdik�n siya sa lus�ng.

D�tapwat isinag�t nang ungg�`: "Ib�bigay k� sa iy� ang par�sa na hind� mo gust�."

At inih�gis nya sa �log ang pag�ng.

Nang dum�po ang pag�ng sa t�big ay nagsisig�w sya at sin�bi ny� sa ungg�`: "Sal�mat, kayb�gan. It� ang �ki ng t�r�han!"

2. ANG PAGTATAKB�HAN NANG US� AT NANG SUS�`.

Is� ng us� ng nang�ngin�in sa g�bat ay nak�tagp� nang isa ng sus�` na gum�g�pang sa d�hon nang b�ho`. Ang us� ay naghint� nang pangingin�in at pinagmasd�n ny� ang mab�gal na pagg�pang nang sus�`.

Makara�n ang ila ng sandal�` ay sin�bi ny� sa sus�`: "Ano ng h�na mo ng lum�kad! B�kit hind� ka mag�ral na lum�kad nang mat�lin? G�ya ko, ak� y par�ti ng n�h�h�bul nang manga �so, d�tapwat ang mat�lin ko ng pagtakb� ay sya ng nagl�ligt�s sa �kin nang �ki ng b�hay. D�tapwat g�ya m�, kung ik�w ay hab�lin nang k�hit an� ng ka�way, pap�no ang mangy�y�ri sa iyo ng b�hay? P�ho ng ik�w ay m�p�pat�y."

Pagk�rinig nang sus�` sa manga salit� ng it� ay tiningn�n nya ang us� at kanya ng pinagar�lan ang ma�nam nya ng pangangataw�n, ang kanya ng mahah�ba ng pa�, at ang malalak�s nya ng lam�n. In�big nya na siya m�n ay gaya r�n nang us� �pang siy� ay makatakb� nang mat�lin. D�tapwat kany� ng inak�l�` na, kung pil�tin nya na sya y tumakb�, ay hind� sya m�h�hul� nang malak� sa us�.

Sa gay�n ay isinagot ny� sa us�: "Ik�w ay mapangmat�. Hind� mo hin�hin�l�` kung an� ang mag�gawa nang isa ng may mat�bay na paggust�. Hin�h�mon kit� na makipagtakb�han sa �kin mula r�to hangg�ng sa �log na n�sa band� ng kalun�ran mul� r�to."

Ang us� ay tum�wa nang malak�s at isinag�t sa sus�`: "B�kit mo inak�la ng t�tal�nin mo ak�? Sig�ro ng ik�w ay magd�d�ya`!"

Isinag�t nang sus�`, na hind� siya magd�d�ya`, at, �pang m�y-roo ng tuming�n sa kanil� at mag�ng huk�m sa kanila ng pagtatakb�han, ay sin�bi ny� na tum�wag sil� nang is� sa manga kayib�gan nil�, na sya ng mag�ging huk�m.

Ang us� ay pum�yag, at tin�wag nil� ang isa ng k�law, �pang siya ng mag�ng huk�m.

Nang magumpis� sil� nang pagtakb� ay malak� ang nag�ng pagk�huli nang sus�`. Sa kany� ng pagtakb� ang us� ay nak�ra�n nang isa ng may�bung na dam�han. Naghint� sya �pang mangin�in, y�mang malak� ang pagk�una nya sa sus�`. Bin�lak ny� na pagk�tanaw nya na dum�rating ang sus�` ay t�takbo sy� ng mul�`. D�tapuwat, nang sya y makapangin�in, ay sinump�ng sya nang kat�m�ran. Nat�lug sya sa panuk�l� na m�g�gising sy� b�go dumat�ng ang sus�`.

D�tapwat, h�bang sya y nat�t�log, ay nakara�n ang sus�`. Nang m�gising sy� ay mal�lim n� sa h�pon. Tumakbo sy� nang �bus-lak�s pat�ngu sa �log, at do�n ay sinal�bong sya nang sus�` at nang kanila ng huk�m na k�law.

"Ik�w ay tal�nan," win�ka pagd�ka nang kanila ng huk�m.

3. IS� NG BIY�RNES-S�NTO.

Si Hw�n at ang kany� ng kayb�ga ng si P�dro ay nam�mangk� sa �lug pat�ngo sa b�ya-ng-Bal�wag. Sa bangk�` ay m�y-roon sil� ng is� ng lar�wan nang Kr�sto na kanila ng inih�hatid sa p�re`, �pang mag�mit sa pagdad�us nang isa ng Pit� ng W�ka`. Si Hw�n ay sin�sigl�n nang t�kot.

Sin�bi nya kay P�dro: "Ang t�wu n�tin sa bangk�` ay tadt�d nang s�gat at hind� hum�hing�. Sa ak�l� ko y pat�y ang t�o ng iy�n. Bak� t�yu ang pagbintang�n nang p�ri ng �ti ng pagh�hatd�n sa kany�."

Isinag�t ni P�dro: "S�sab�hin n�tin sa kany� na, nang m�l�lan sa �ti ng bangk�` ang t�o ng it� y ganyan n� ang kanya ng any�`. T�yu y mar�mi ng tagapagpatoto�, kany� hwag k� ng mat�kot."

Nang dumat�ng sila sa p�re`, ay ibinig�y nila ang lar�wan. Pinagsab�han sil� nang p�re` na pumaro�n sila sa simb�han kin�buk�san nang h�pon, �pang makin�g nang s�rmon.

Si Hw�n ay sinigl� ng mul� nang t�kot, sapagk�t hind� nya m�pagk�ro kung b�kit �big nang p�re` na sil� ay p�sa simb�han. Par�ti sya ng nak�rinig nang manga t�o ng kinumbid� sa simb�han at do�n ay hin�li nang gw�rdya-sib�l. D�tapuwat hind� sya nagw�ka nang anu m�n kay P�dro, sapagk�t n�k�k�ta nya na it� y wal� ng t�kot.

Kin�buk�san nang h�pun ay naparo�n sila sa simb�han, at do�n ay n�k�ta nil� ang isa ng Kr�sto ng n�p�p�k� sa kr�s.

Win�k� ni Hw�n: "Ang t�u ng ya�n, kung iy� ng nat�tanda�n, ay sya n�ti ng inihat�d sa p�re`. Mab�ti t�yo y dumo�n sa isa ng lug�r na hind� ma�abut nang mat� nang p�re`."

Kany� sil� ng dalaw� ay naparo�n sa il�lim nang p�lpito, �pang do�n nil� pakingg�n ang s�rmon. Nagumpis� ang Sy�ti-Pal�bras, at ang p�r� ay dum�rating n� sa band� ng hul� nang kanya ng s�rmon.

Win�k� nang p�ri sa kanya ng s�rmon: "Mags�si kay� sa iny� ng manga kasal�nan, malulup�t na t�o. Masd�n niny� ang manga s�gat na hin�wa niny� sa kataw�n nang �ti ng M�nan�kop."

Pagk�rinig nit� ni Hw�n ay sya y sinigl� ng mul� nang t�kot, sapagk�t inak�l� nya na siya y n�p�pagbintang�n.

Kany�` ang ginaw� nya ay umal�s sya sa il�lim nang p�lpito, hinar�p nya ang p�re`, at sin�bi nya: "�mong, hind� po kam� ang sum�gat sa t�o ng iy�n. Nang sya y il�lan sa �mi ng bangk�`, ay sugatan n� sya antim�no."

Pagkaw�k� nya nit� ay bumal�k sya sa il�lim nang p�lpito. Hind� pinans�n nang p�r�` ang manga n�rinig nya ng salit�`, at ipinat�luy nya ang kanya ng s�rmon.

"Dumating n� ang �raw na kay� ng manga makasal�nan ay d�pat magsipags�si. Ang manga pint�an nang l�ngit ay n�buksan n� sa pagkamat�y nang �ti ng M�nan�kop, at k�hit na s�nu ng makasal�nan ay makap�p�suk sa l�ngit, kung sila y magsipags�si. D�tapwat, kung hind� kayo magsipags�si, ay m�p�parus�han kay� nang h�rap na wala ng hangg�n sa manga ap�y sa infy�rno, dahil�n sa manga h�rap na ipinas�kit niny� sa �ti ng M�nan�kop. Masd�n niny� ang kany� ng kataw�n na pum�p�wis nang dug�`, ang kanya ng pa� t kam�y na n�p�p�ko sa kr�s, at ang kany� ng manga s�gat mul� sa pa� hangg�ng �lo. Wala ng ib� ng nagp�pah�rap sa kany� at sum�gat sa kany� ng mah�l na kataw�n, kung hind� kay�, manga t�wo ng makasal�nan, at, kung hind� kayo magsipags�si, ay mah�h�lug kayo sa infy�rno!"

Si Hw�n ay hind� m�palag�y, at inak�l� nya na ang p�ri ay sin�silakbuh�n nang g�lit l�ban sa kany�.

Kany�` hinarap ny� ng mul� ang p�re`, at sin�bi nya nang �bus-lak�s: "�mong, sin�bi ko na p�` sa iny� kan�na na hind� ako kas�le ng sum�gat sa t�o ng iy�n, kany� hwag p� ninyo ak� ng ipadal� sa impy�rno."

Ang p�ri ay sinigl�n nang malak� ng g�lit, kany� sin�bi nya sa mang� nak�kin�g: "Anu ba kay�, manga ung�s na t�o? Wal� baga n� isa sa iny� na makah�wak sa t�o ng it� �pang bigtih�n?"

Pagk�rinig nit� ni Hw�n ay tumakbo sy� nang �bus-lak�s at sinagas�a ng wal� ng patumangg� ang manga t�o ng n�l�luh�d at um�iy�k sa pagsis�si nang kanil� ng kasal�nan. Sinundan sy� ni P�dro at sil� ng dalaw� ay nagtakb�han nang wala ng hint� hangg�ng sa dumat�ng sila sa kanila ng b�yan. At do�n ay ipinamal�t� nila ang b�tas-kar�yum na niligtas�n nil�.

4. ANG K�BA` AT ANG BUL�G.

Isa ng k�ba` at isa ng bul�g ay mat�lik na magkayb�gan. Kung sila y nagl�lak�d ang k�ba` ang um��kay sa bul�g. Ang bul�g nam�n ay sy� ng pum�pas�n sa k�b� kung m�y-roon sil� ng mah�rap na nil�lak�ran, sapagk�t ang k�ba` ay mah�na` ang kataw�n.

M�nsan sila y nak�ra�n nang is� ng p�no-ng-ny�g. �big nila ng pumit�s nang b�nga, d�tapuwat hind� nila m�l�man kung s�no sa kanil� ng dalaw� ang �aky�t sa p�n�`. Sin�bi nang bul�g na hind� sya maka�aky�t, sapagk�t hind� nya m�k�k�ta kung al�n ang p�pitas�n, y�mang m�y-roo ng manga m�ra ng b�nga. Ang k�ba` ay hindi r�n �big umaky�t, dahil�n sa kany� ng kahin�an. D�tapuwat malak� ang pagk�gusto ny� na kum�in nang ny�g. Kany�`, sa katapus�n ay sin�bi nya na siy� ang �aky�t.

"�pang huwag k� ng m�nak�wan nang manga il�laglag k� ng b�nga, ay b�bil�ngin mo nang malak�s ang kalab�g sa l�pa nang manga b�nga na il�laglag k�, �pang �ki ng matanda�n ang b�lang."

Ang k�ba ay nagumpis� nang pagaky�t, d�tapwat pangangalah�t� nya ay nah�lug sy�.

"Is�!" ang s�bi nang bul�g.

Sin�bi sa kany� nang k�b�` na siy� ang kumalab�g at hind� ang b�nga nang ny�g.

Umaky�t sya ul�`. Pagkara�n nang ila ng sandal�` ay nah�log ul� sya.

"Dalaw�!" isinig�w nang bul�g.

Ang k�ba ay nag�lit, at sin�bi nya sa bul�g na sy� ay ma�lit.

Win�k� nya: "Iyo ng �na ng kumalab�g ay ak�, ang ikalaw� ay ako r�n. Kany�`, wala p� ng niy�g ak� ng n�p�pit�s."

D�tapuwat ang bul�g ay nagak�la ng gaw� ng katatawan�n ang pagkah�log nang k�ba`. Kany� bin�lak nya na, kung mak�rinig sy� ul� nang kalab�g, ay s�sigaw sy� nang "Tatl�!"

Ang k�ba ay umaky�t na mul�`, d�tapwat nah�log d�n sy�. Ang bul�g ay sumig�w nang "Tatl�!" at tum�wa sya. Ang k�ba ay nag�nit nang g�lit. Nilap�tan nya ang bul�g at kany� ng sinamp�l sa mukh�`. Ang samp�l ay tum�ma sa manga mat� nang bul�g, at d�hil d�to ay nad�lat ang kany� ng manga mat�.

�pang manghigant� sya ay sin�p� nya ang k�ba`. Tinamaan ny� it� sa lik�d at d�hil d�to ay n��nat ang kanya ng k�ba`.

Sil� ng dalaw� ay natw� sa nangy�ri at l�lo ng tum�bay ang kanila ng pagkakayb�gan sa lug�r nang magkasir� sil�.

5. ANG H�RI NG MAY S�NGAY AT SI HW�N.

Sa is� ng kapuluw�n nagh�h�ri ang isa ng t�wu ng may dalaw� ng maiikl� ng s�ngay na n�t�t�g� sa malag� nya ng buh�k. Hind� it� n�l�l�man nang kanya ng manga pinagh�har�an. D�tapwat ang l�him na yt� y nagumpis� ng n�ibady� sa madl�` sa pamamag�tan nang manga manggug�pit na nak�p�tul nang kany� ng buh�k.

Kany� sya y nagkaro�n nang malaki ng g�lit sa manga barb�ro, at inak�l� nya ng lip�lin ang manga barb�ro sa kanya ng kahary�n. Iniy�tus nya ng hum�kay nang �pat na mal�lim na bal�n sa harap�n nang kanya ng t�r�han, at sa gitn� nang �pat na h�kay na yit� ay nagpalag�y sya nang isa ng �p�an. Isa ng �raw naup� sya sa tabur�te sa gitn� nang �pat na h�kay, at b�wat t�o ng nagda�n ay tinan�ng nya kung mar�nung manggup�t. Ang b�wat sumag�t nang "�o" ay pinahint� nya �pang bigy�n nya nang gunt�ng at sy� y gupit�n. Pagkara�n nang il� ng sandal�` ay itinan�ng nya sa b�wat manggug�pit kung an� ang n�k�k�ta nya sa �lo nang h�re`. Ang manga manggug�pit ay nagsipags�bi nang katotoh�nan at b�wat is� sa kanil� ay sumag�t nang s�ngay ang kanila ng n�k�k�ta. Ang b�wat sumag�t nang ganit� ay ibinul�d nang h�re` sa is� sa manga h�kay sa pal�gid niy�.

Nakara�n ang ila ng �raw at ang dalaw� ng h�kay ay napun� n� nang manga barb�ro at pinatab�nan na ny�. Dum�lang ang manga tao ng nagd�da�n na mar�nung manggup�t, at ang h�re ay nagak�la ng n�patay n� niya ng lah�t ang manga barb�ro sa kany� ng kahary�n.

Isa ng �raw ay naghint�y sya sa kanya ng �p�an hangg�ng katanghal�an b�go nagda�n ang isa ng t�o na nags�bi ng sya y mar�nung gumup�t nang buh�k.

Itinan�ng sa kany� nang h�re`: "An� ang pang�lan mo?"

Isinag�t nang t�o: "Ang pang�lan ko p�` ay Hw�n."

"Gupit�n mo ak�, Hw�n," iniy�tus nang h�re`.

Lum�pit si Hw�n sa h�re` at inumpisahan ny� ang panggugup�t.

Makara�n ang ila ng sandal�` ay itinan�ng nang h�re`: "An� ang n�k�k�ta mo sa �lo ko, Hw�n?"

Ang kanya ng sag�t ay ganit�: "Ang iyo p� ng Kam�h�lan, n�k�k�ta ko sa �lo niny� ang kor�na."

It� ay ikinatuw� nang h�re`. Kany� nagtindig sy� sa �p�an at in�kay nya si Hw�n sa kanya ng pal�siyo at ginaw� nya si Hw�n na barb�ro nang h�re`. Malak� ang suw�ldu na ibinig�y nya kay Hw�n, at pinatab�nan nya ang manga n�t�tir� ng h�kay.

6. TATL� NG ESTUDY�NTE.

Si Hw�n, si P�dro, at si Andr�s ay tatl� ng magkakayib�ga ng estudy�nte ng magkabab�yan. Nang dumat�ng ang pagbubuk�s nang manga p�aral�n ay n�l�man nil� na sil� ay magk�kahiw�-hiwal�y. Iba t ib� ng b�yan ang kap�patung�han nang b�wat is� sa kanil�. B�go sil� naghiw�-hiwal�y ay nagt�p�nan sil� nang pagt�tagpu�n nila ng lug�r paguumpis� nang bakasy�n.

Nakara�n ang isa ng ta�n at dumat�ng ang pagsasar� nang kl�se at ang manga estudy�nte ay naguw�an sa kan�-kanil� ng b�yan, at ang tatl� ng magkakayb�ga ng si P�dro, si Hw�n, at si Andr�s ay nagtatagp� sa b�ya ng tinub�an ni P�dro, �pang do�n sila magpal�pas nang bakasy�n.

Nang sil� y magkik�ta, pagkara�n nang iba t ib� ng b�gay na kanil� ng pinagus�pan, ay nagsiy�sat sil� kung gan� ang n�tut�han nang b�wat is� sa kanila ng paga�ral nang w�ka ng Kast�la`. Sin�bi ni P�dro na sy� ay mar�mi ng n�l�l�ma ng salit� ng Kast�la`, d�tapuwat ang ma�gi nya ng nat�tanda�n ay ang salit� ng "B�mos."

Sumag�t nam�n si Hw�n: "Ako m�n ay mar�mi r� ng n�l�l�man, d�tapuwat sa ngay�n ang n��ala�la ko ay ang salit� ng 'Mat�r.'"

Si Andr�s nam�n ay nagw�ka ng wal� sya ng n�tut�han kung hind� ang salit� ng "S�."

Makara�n ang kanila ng pagsas�lit�an ay nagyay� si P�dro na sila ay mamangk� sa �log at magsipal�go tul�y. Nang sila y nam�mangk� na sa �log, sa pangp�ng ay nak�tanaw sil� nang is� ng Kast�l�` na �big mal�go`. Sin�bi ni P�dro na mab�ti ay makipag�sap sil� sa Kast�la`, �pang sa gay� y m�ipak�ta nil� ang kan�-kanil� ng d�nong.

Nagumpis� si P�dro at sin�bi nya ng "B�mos!"

Si Hw�n nam�n ay sumag�t: "Mat�r!"

At sa hul� ay si Andr�s ang kanya ng "S�!"

Nang m�rinig it� nang Kast�la`, ay sinigl�n sya nang t�kot, sapagk�t inak�l� nya na p�pata�n sya nang tatl� ng nam�mangk�`. Kany�, k�hit na hind� sya mar�nung lumang�y, ay nagtal�n sya sa �log at sya y nal�nod.

7. ISA NG SUND�LU NG MAR�NUNG NANG LAT�N.

Tatl� ng magkakayib�gan, isa ng p�r�`, isa ng manggag�mut, at isa ng sund�lu, ay magkakas�ma ng nagsipamar�l nang mai�lap na h�yup sa is� ng mal�wak na g�bat. Ang g�bat ay mal�y� sa b�yan. Kany�` sil� ay nagdal� nang mar�mi ng b�on, �pang hwag sil� ng gut�min.

Nakara�n ang ila ng �raw, d�tapuwat wal� pa sila ng n�h�h�li k�hit an�. Ang kanila ng b�on ay umunt� nang umunt�` hangg�ng sa wal� ng n�tira kung hind� isa ng hil�w na itl�g. Dumat�ng sa kanil� ang �raw nang malaki ng g�tom, d�tapuwat sila ng tatl� ay wal� ng pagk�in kung hind� ang itl�g l�mang na n�t�tir�.

Sin�bi nang p�re` na, kung paghat�an nil� ang isa ng itl�g, ay hind� makab�b�ti sa kanil�, sapagk�t hind� makap�p�wi` nang kan�-kanila ng g�tom. Kaniy�` ipin�yu nang p�r�` na is� l�mang sa kanil� ng tatl� ang kum�in nang itl�g na n�t�tir�,--at sa kanya ng kasakim�n ay ipin�yu nya na kung s�nu sa kanil� ang pinakamah�say na magsalit� nang Lat�n ay sya l�mang k�k�in nang itl�g. Inak�l� nya na ang sund�lu ay hind� mar�nung nang Lat�n at ang m�diko l�mang ang sya ny� ng m�k�kat�lo, at ang d�nong nit� y kanya ng min�mat�.

Ang m�diko y um�yun sa h�tul nang p�r�`, d�tapuwat ang sund�lu ay �yaw pum�yag, sapagk�t hind� sya nag�ral na g�ya nang p�ri` at nang m�diko; ng�nit wal� sya ng magaw�`.

Kin�ha nang p�r�` ang itl�g at itinukt�k nya sa isa ng bat�. Nang mab�sag ang itl�g ay sin�bi ny�: "Koron�tum est," at tiningn�n ny� ang dalaw� nya ng kas�ma.

Inab�t nang m�diko ang bas�g na itl�g, inalis ny� ang bal�t na bas�g at nilagyan ny� nang as�n at kanya ng sin�bi: "S�ltum est."

Iniyab�t nang manggag�mot sa sund�lu ang itl�g, at ang p�re at siy� ay naghint�y nang s�sab�hin nang sund�lo. It� y wal� ng m�l�ma ng sab�hin, sapagk�t katun�ya ng wal� sya ng n�l�l�man k�hit isa ng h�ta tungk�l sa Lat�n. Sa kanya ng pagiis�p ay n�ala�la nya na, m�nsan pum�suk sya sa simb�han �pang makin�g nang Sy�ti-Pal�bras, ay n�rinig ny� sa p�r�` na ang kahulug�n nang salit� ng "Konsum�tum est" ay "Tapus n� ang lah�t."

Kany� ibin�hos nya sa kany� ng bib�g ang itl�g, at pagkalaguk ny� ay kanya ng sin�bi: "Konsum�tum est."

Ang dalaw� nya ng kas�ma ay n�pag�lat nang malak� sa hind� nila hinin�la ng d�nung nang sund�lo.

8. ANG PIT� NG DW�NDE.

Is� ng magas�wa ay m�y-roo ng pit� ng an�k na dw�nde. Ang am� ay wal� ng trab�ho at hind� r�n siya mak�k�ta nang trab�ho. Ang in� nam�n ay hind� kum�k�ta nang salap�`, sapagk�t mah�na` ang kany� ng kataw�n at par�ti sa sak�t.

Isa ng tangh�li` sila y n��up� sa isa ng bangk�` at pinag�us�pan nil� ang kanila ng pamum�hay na pinagd�daan�n. Itinan�ng nang lal�ke kung an� ang mab�te nila ng gaw�n sa kanila ng mar�mi ng an�k. Ipin�yu nang bab�ye na kanil� ng ih�nap nang trab�ho ang manga b�ta`, �pang kum�ta sil� nang kwalt�. D�tapuwat isinag�t nang lal�ki na sa ak�l� nya ay hind� sila mak�k�k�ta nang trab�ho, sapagk�t siya r�n ay wala ng m�k�ta. Kany�` ipin�yu ny� na ang mab�ti ay it�pun nil� ang manga b�ta`.

It� y ikinalungk�t at ikin�iy�k nang bab�ye. �yaw sya ng pum�yag na it�pon ang manga b�ta`. D�tapuwat ipinak�ta sa kany� nang kany� ng as�wa na, kung hind� nila gaw�n iy�n, sila ng lah�t ay mam�matay nang g�tom. Sa kala�nan ay pum�yag ang bab�e at pinagk�sundu�n nila na dalh�n nila ng magpasy�l ang manga b�ta` at kanila ng �wan sa da�n.

H�bang pinag�us�pan nil� it�, ang ikapit� ng b�t� ay n�sa is� ng bit�k nang bangk� na kanila ng in�up�n at n�rinig nya ng lah�t ang g�gawin sa kanil� nang kanila ng mag�lang. Pagkara�n nang kanil� ng s�lit�an ay hin�nap pagd�ka nang b�ta ang kany� ng manga kapat�d at ibinal�t� nya ang kanya ng n�rin�g. Sil� ay nag�y�kan, sapagk�t hind� ipina�lam sa kanil� nang kanila ng mag�lang na sil� ay nakab�bigat sa kanila ng pamum�hay. Inak�l� nila na, kung it� y n�l�man nil�, k�hit na pap�no t�t�long sila ng magh�nap nang kabuh�yan. D�tapuwat pinagk�sunduwan nil� na sil� y sum�ma pag niy�y� sila ng magsipagpasy�l at palig�w sil�.

Kin�buk�san hin�nap sil� nang kanil� ng am�, pinapagb�his sila, binigy�n sila nang manga p�to, at sin�bi ng sila y mags�sipagpasy�l. Nang sil� y magumpis� ang ikapit� ng b�ta ay hind� kin�in ang kanya ng tin�pay, d�tapuwat magmul� sa kanila ng t�rangk�han ay din�rog nya ang tin�pay at ibinudb�d nya sa da� ng kanila ng nilak�ran. Nang sila y m�lay� n� ay naub�san sya nang tin�pay, kany� nanghing� sya sa kanya ng manga kapat�d. D�tapwat hind� nila sy� binigy�n. It� nam�n ay hind� sin�bi sa kanil� kung b�kit sya naub�san ag�d nang tin�pay. Nang hind� sya mak�hing� nang tin�pay ay nam�lot sya nang manga bat�, at it� y sya ny� ng isa-is� ng inilagl�g sa kanila ng pinagda�nan.

Nang dumat�ng sila sa isa ng g�bat ay in�wan sil� nang kanil� ng mag�lang at pinagsab�han sil� na hantay�n sila do�n, at sil� y b�balik ag�d. Sil� y na�wan, d�tapwat n�l�l�man nil� na hind� sila pagb�balik�n nang kanila ng mag�lang.

Nang makara�n ang ila ng sandal�`, ay nak�rinig sil� nang isa ng �ngay. Pinuntah�n nil� ang lug�r na pinangg�gal�ngan nang �ngay. Do�n ay n�k�ta nil� ang isa ng malak� ng hig�nte na nal�l�go sa tabi nang isa ng bal�n. Tiningn�n nila ang pal�gid-l�gid nang lug�r, at sa tab� nang isa ng k�huy ay n�k�ta nil� ang pananam�t nang hig�nte. Ang ikapit� ng b�ta ay pinaal�s ang kanya ng manga kapat�d at sin�bi nya na magt�go sil� at kany� ng n�nak�win ang sap�tos nang hig�nte. It� ay kanila ng ginaw�`, at nin�kaw nang b�ta ang sap�tos.

Nang makapal�go` ang hig�nte at siy� y nagb�b�his ay hind� nya m�k�ta ang kanya ng manga sap�tos. Sya y nag�lit at nagmur�. Tum�wag sya nang t�long. Nang it� y m�rin�g nang num�kaw nang sap�tos ay dali-d�li sya ng dumal�. Nang m�k�ta sya nang hig�nte ay hind� sya pinagbintang�n, sapagk�t dahil�n sa kanya ng kaliit�n ay inak�l� nang hig�nte ng hind� nya mad�dala ang sap�tos.

Sin�bi tul�y nya na sya y hind� nakal�l�kad nang wala ng sap�tos, kany� sya y magmadal�`. Nang m�k�ha nya ang s�pot nang kwalt� ay ipinang�k� nya ng b�balik sy� ag�d. D�tapwat, nang m�layo sya, ay tin�wag nya ang manga n�t�t�g� nya ng kapat�d, at nang sila y ma�pon ay nagyay� sya ng umuw�`. D�tapwat isinag�t nang kanya ng manga kapat�d na hind� nila n�l�l�man ang da� ng pauw�`. Ng�nit kany� ng isinag�t na t�tuntun�n nil� ang kanya ng inilagl�g na bat� at tin�pay sa da�n.

Sin�bi nang is� ny� ng kapat�d na, kung n�l�man nya kung an� ang kanya ng ginaw�` sa tin�pay, ay binigy�n s�na nya sy� nang sy� y manghing�`. Kanil� ng ikinalungk�t ang ipinak�ta nila ng karam�tan sa kanila ng kapat�d.

Kany�` it� y nagw�ka sa kany�: "Kung iyo ng d�dalh�n ito ng s�pot ko nang kwalt� sa �ki ng as�wa at pabilh�n mo sy� nang sap�tos at ihat�d nya sa �kin, ay �up�han kit� nang mar�mi ng kw�lta."

Hind� nal�on at n�tagpuan nil� ang hil�ra nang manga bat� sa da�n. It� y tinunt�n nila at nakarat�ng sila sa kanila ng b�hay, dal� nil� ang s�pot nang kwalt� na kanila ng ibinig�y pagd�ka sa kanila ng mag�lang. Sil� y nangatw� at nangalungk�t dahil�n sa kanil� ng mal� ng in�sal sa manga an�k,--sila y natw� sapagk�t m�y-roon sila ng ikab�b�hay sa mal�o ng panah�n.

9. IS� NG PUL�S NA NAGASW�NG-ASW�NGAN.

No� ng tag�raw nang ta� ng m�le-nobisy�ntos-d�s, h�bang ang manga hin�g na b�nga nang k�hoy ay nangakabiy�bit sa manga sang�, lumag�nap ang bal�ta sa boo ng b�yan nang San-Ant�nyo na m�y-roo ng asw�ng na nagl�libot sa b�yan.

Ang manga t�o-ng-San-Ant�nyo sa manga ta� ng iy�n ay may paniniw�la` sa manga n�no`, asw�ng, dw�nde, at iba p� ng katatakut�n. Karam�han sa kanil� y hind� nagkap�lad na makapag�ral, d�tapwat, k�hit na ganit� ang kal�g�yan nila, sila y manga t�wo ng mababa�t, matah�mik, at masis�pag.

Ang manga b�hay sa b�ya ng it� ay malili�t at nay�y�r� nang p�wid at kaw�yan. M�y-roon d� ng ila ng b�hay na tabl�. Karam�han ay n�t�tay� sa malalak� ng bak�ran, at ang dul�han nang bak�ran ay n�t�tamn�n nang manga p�no-ng-k�hoy na masasar�p ang b�nga, g�ya nang ts�ko, s�ha`, sant�l, mab�lo, mangg�, at iba p�.

Kasaluk�ya ng nagk�kahin�g ang manga b�nga-ng-k�huy na yt� nang lumag�nap ang bal�ta na may-ro�n n� ng ila ng gab� na n�mat�an nang ila ng bab�e ang asw�ng sa ib� t iba ng dul�han. Ang manga b�ta at manga bab�e ay sinigl�n nang malak� ng t�kot, kany� pagkag�t nang dil�m ay agad-ag�d sil� ng nagsipanah�mik sa lo�b nang b�hay. Karam�han nang manga lal�ki ay nangat�kot d�n, d�tapwat m�y-roo ng ila ng nagsipags�bi na sila y hind� nat�t�kot, sapagk�t hind� pa sila nak�tagpo nang asw�ng, at sa ganit� y hind� nila n�l�l�man kung d�pat katak�tan ang asw�ng.

Ang asw�ng ay isa ng t�o ng malak� ang kapangyar�han. Nakapag�iba-t-ib� sya nang pangangataw�n. Kung m�nsan ay may kataw�n siya ng p�ra ng t�o, d�tapwat mait�m, kung m�nsan siya y isa ng malak� ng �so o b�boy. Sya y nang�ng�in nang t�o, l�l� n� nang manga b�ta`. D�tapuwat ang l�lo ng mahalag� nya ng pagk�in at sya r�n nam�n ny� ng karany�a ng kin�k�in ay ang b�ta ng hind� pa naipang�ngan�k at n�s�sa tiy�n pa l�mang nang kanya ng in�. Kany� ang manga bunt�s na bab�ye sa b�ya ng ya�n ay l�lo ng malak� ang t�kot. Hind� nila pinat�log ang kanila ng as�wa sa pagbabant�y sa kanila ng tab�. Ang asw�ng ay mah�rap m�patay nang patal�m o bar�l, sapagk�t m�y-roon sya ng �isa l�mang na lug�r na d�pat m�tama�n o masug�tan �pang sya y m�pat�y, at ang lug�r na yt� ay lih�m. Ang b�gay l�mang na kanya ng in�il�gan ay ang b�wang. Kany� it� y malak� ng kagamit�n sa pagpapal�yas nang asw�ng.

D�tapwat is� ng b�gay na nakapagt�tak� sa asw�ng na iy�n ay ang kany� ng inug�li ng pagtitir� sa manga dul�han nang bak�ran. Katak�-tak� r�n ang b�gay na manga dal�ga ang karam�han nang nagsipags�bi ng n�mat�an nil� sa dul�han sa ita�s nang s�ha` o iba p� ng p�no-ng-k�hoy ang asw�ng na iy�n. Ila ng t�o ng matal�no ay nags�bi ng ang bint�ng nil� y isa ng magnan�kaw at hind� asw�ng ang pinagk�katakut� ng iy�n.

Isa ng pol�s na may hind� karany�a ng t�pang ay siya ng tumikt�k sa asw�ng na it� sa dul�ha ng b�go ng kinakit�an sa kany�. Pagdil�m ay n�roon na sy� sa kanya ng kubl�han. Hind� nala�nan at dumat�ng ang asw�ng, umaky�t sa isa p�no-ng-s�ha`, at n�rinig niya ng pumit�s nang mar�mi ng b�nga. It� y bum�ba` at umal�s, d�tapwat sya y sinund�n nang pul�s hangg�ng sa b�hay na kanya ng pinas�kan.

Malak� ang nag�ng pagk�g�lat nang pol�s, nang d�to n�m�las nya ng ang k�pwa nya pol�s nab�b�lot nang mait�m na k�mot, at ang s�pot na it�m na pun� nang s�ha` ay kasaluk�yan pa l�mang niya ng inil�lap�g.

Niy�y� nya sa munis�pyo ang k�pwa nya pol�s, at do�n kin�buk�san ipinagsumb�ng ny� sa presid�nte. Ang pol�s na nagaswang-asw�ngan ay n�bilangg� dahil�n sa s�la ng pagnan�kaw.

10. IS� NG ASW�NG NA N�PAT�Y.

Is� ng gab� sa is� ng b�hay na p�ngaserah�n nang il� ng manga nags�sipag�ral sa b�ya-ng-Mal�los ay n�rinig ko ng isinalays�y nang is� ng matand�` na may g�lang na siy�m na p� ng ta�n sa is� ng ump�kan ang sum�sun�d.

No� ng sya y b�go ng t�wu pa l�mang ay sa b�kid sya nagt�tir�. �ilan l�mang sil� ng magkak�pit-b�hay. Isa ng �raw ay namatay�n ang isa ny� ng k�pit-b�hay. Sa pagsun�d sa isa ng matand� ng kaugali�n ay dumalo sy� sa k�pit-b�hay na may h�pis.

Nang dumat�ng sya do�n ay hind� nala�nan at n�balit�an ny� na may asw�ng sa kanila ng lug�r. Sy� ay may malak� at katut�bo ng g�lit sa manga asw�ng, kaniy� inak�l� nya ng magbant�y nang gab� ng iy�n.

Nang mal�lim n� ang gab� ay nan�og sya sa b�hay at sa isa ng karit� ng d� mal�yo sa b�hay, do�n sya nahig�`. Kabil�gan nang bw�n nang gabi ng iy�n, kany� mal�naw ang pagk�k�ta nya sa manga b�gay sa pal�gid-l�gid. Wal� sya ng n�m�las na m�pagh�hinal�a ng isa ng asw�ng, kany� sya y nat�log.

Kin�h�ti-ng-gabih�n ay n�gising sy� at ang �na ng tinama�n nang kany� ng manga mat� ay is� ng b�gay na mait�m sa bubung�n nang b�hay nang kinamatay�n. Ang mait�m na iy�n ay wal� roon b�go sya nat�log, kaniy� nagbintang sy� na iy�n ay ang asw�ng na n�balit�an ny�. Ang asw�ng ay nang�ng�in nang pat�y na t�o, kany� sinapant�h� nya na ang pat�y ang sady� do�n nang asw�ng na iy�n.

Pumanh�k sya sa b�hay at dal� ny� ang isa ng g�lok. Ang manga t�o y nat�t�log. Sa ita�s ay may-roon sy� ng n�k�ta ng isa ng b�gay na nakalaw�t mul� sa bubung�n nang b�hay. It� y g�ya nang bit�ka nang man�k. Hum�b� nang hum�ba`, hangg�ng sa ang d�lo y pum�sok sa bib�g nang pat�y. Ang pat�y ay nagtind�g sa kany� ng kin�l�lagy�n pagkap�sok sa kanya ng bib�g nang b�gay na iy�n.

Ang ginaw� nang b�go ng t�o ay lum�pit siya sa nakatind�g na pat�y at sa pamamag�tan nang dala ny� ng g�lok ay pin�tol niya ang b�gay na iy�n na p�ra ng bit�ka nang man�k. Nang it� y map�tol ay may kumalab�g sa tab� nang b�hay. Nan�og siya at do�n ay n�k�ta nya ang pat�y na asw�ng.

11. ANG MANGKUK�LAM.

Sa il� ng po�k sa Filip�nas ay may lub�s na paniniw�l� sa mangkuk�lam ang manga t�o. �yon sa kanila ng paniw�la` ang mangkuk�lam ay isa ng t�o ng may malak� ng kapangyar�han at ang kapangyar�ha ng it� y g�ling sa dim�niyo o kay� y m�na sa mag�lang. B�go m�kamt�n ang kapangyar�ha ng iy�n ang is� ay d�pat m�na ng makipagkayib�gan at magsilb� sa dim�niyo. D�tapwat may ilan d� ng nan�niw�la ng n�p�p�lot o na��gaw ang kapangyar�ha ng iy�n sa g�bat o il�ng na lug�r na mah�rap puntah�n at karany�wa y pinagk�katakut�n.

Ang k�lam ay siy� ng na��gaw, n�m�m�na, o ibin�bigay nang dim�niyo, at iy� y sya ng pinangg�gal�ngan nang kapangyar�han nang nagm�me-�re`. Ang hits�ra nang k�lam ay hind� par�-par�ho. Kung m�nsan ay isa ng bat� o isa ng man�ka ng mali�t at masam�` ang hits�ra. Kung madil�m ang k�lam na it� y nagn�ningn�ng na p�ra ng alitapt�p, d�tapwat ang ningn�ng na it� y naw�wal� nam�n pag in�big nang k�lam. Ang k�lam at ang t�o, k�hit lal�ki o bab�e, na nag��ri sa kany� ay hind� nagh�hiwal�y k�hit is� ng sandal�` at k�hit na sa pagpal�go` ay din�dala nang mangkuk�lam ang kanya ng k�lam. D�hil d�to ang manga t�o ng mapagsy�sat, pag �big nil� ng m�pagkil�la kung mangkuk�lam ng�` o hind�` ang isa ng t�o ng kanila ng pinagh�hinal�an, ay sin�sub�kan nila it� sa kany� ng pagpal�go`. Kung hind� ma�ngat at wal� ng hin�l� ang mangkuk�lam na sy� y sin�sub�kan, kung m�nsan ay nagk�kap�lad ang nan�n�bok na m�k�ta nya ang k�lam.

Ang mangkuk�lam ay may kapangyar�han d� ng it�go` sa lo�b nang kany� ng kataw�n ang k�lam, at hindi bih�ra` ang manga t�o ng nak�k�ta nang mangkuk�lam sa kanya ng pagkamat�y. Sa k�hul�-hul�ha ng sandal�`, b�go malag�t ang hining�, inil�luwa nil� ang k�lam.

It� y nangy�y�ri l�mang kung �yaw ipam�na nang mangkuk�lam ang kany� ng k�lam. Kung ipinam�m�na nam�n it�, malwat p� b�go mamat�y ang mangkuk�lam ay tin�t�wag na ny� ang kany� ng �big paman�han, at d�to y l�him na l�him nya ng ibin�bigay ang k�lam.

Ang malak� ng kapangyar�han nang mangkuk�lam ay gin�g�mit nya l�ban sa kanya ng manga ka�way, sa manga t�o ng kany� ng kinag�gal�tan, o kay� y sa manga h�yop nil�, kung siya ny� ng �big panghigantih�n. Gayon d�n gin�g�mit nya ang kanya ng kapangyar�han sa pangbib�ro` sa isa ng t�o o h�yop na kanya ng m�katwa�n.

Ang kany� ng pinas�sak�tan kadalas� y nag�anyo ng p�ra ng ul�l. Kung m�nsan ang kanya ng kin�k�lam ay dum�daing na masak�t ang kanya ng bu� ng kataw�n, nags�sisig�w, at hind� m�tah�mik k�hit is� ng sandal�`. Sa h�yop nam�n karany�wa y ang b�buy na pinakamahalag� sa may �ri`, ang kanya ng ibin�bigay na par�sa ay g�ya nang sak�t na k�lera, d�tapuwat l�lu ng mabags�k k�y sa r�to. Ang pagdum� nang h�yop ay wala ng pat�d, at pagkara�n nang il� ng �ras, k�hit na g�no katab�` ang h�yop, ay nag�ging but� t bal�t. Ang t�o ng n�k�k�lam nya ay malak�s kum�in, katimb�ng nang dalaw� kat�o, at mapanghil�ng nang masasar�p na pagk�in. D�hil d�to ang paniw�la nang manga t�o y kas�lo ng kum�k�in nang m�y sakit ang mangkuk�lam na nagp�par�sa sa kany�.

Ang mangkuk�lam ay may kapangyar�ha ng pumalo�b sa kataw�n nang kany� ng kin�k�lam. It� y sya ng paniw�la`, d�tapuwat kung pap�no ang para�n nang pagp�sok nang mangkuk�lam at kung sa�n sya pum�p�sok sa kataw�n nang kanya ng kin�k�lam ay wal� ng nak��al�m. Ng�nit ang kanya ng nil�labas�n ay ang hintut�ro`. Ang b�gay na it� ay malak� ng kabuluh�n �kol sa paggam�t sa n�k�k�lam at gayon d�n sa pagpapar�sa sa mangkuk�lam.

K�hit na malak� ang kapangyar�han nang mangkuk�lam ay mayroon d�n sya ng kinat�tak�tan, karany�wa y ang manga t�o ng malalak�s, mat�pang, at wala ng paniw�l� sa kapangyar�han nang mangkuk�lam at iba p� ng pinagk�katakut�n nang manga iba ng t�o. D�hil d�to y hind� bih�ra` na ang is� ng t�o y pamagat� ng "m�diko-ng-mangkuk�lam" pagkara�n nang �na o ikalaw� nya ng pagpapagal�ng nang t�o sa sak�t na it�.

M�nsan ay n�rinig ko ng magbal�ta` ang isa ng t�o ng nak�k�ta nang panggagam�t nang t�o ng n�k�k�lam. Ang t�o ng it� y may isa ng k�pit-b�hay na may an�k na dal�ga. Sa dal�ga ng it� y mar�mi ng manglil�gaw, at ang is� sa kanil� y pinagh�hinal�a ng mangkuk�lam. Sa kasama�-ng-p�lad nit� ay nag�ng isa sy� sa manga hind� n�tangg�p. Sa malak� nya ng g�lit ay magkasun�d nya ng kin�lam ang bab�ye at lal�ki ng magka�b�gan.

In�na nya ang bab�ye at ito nam� y ag�d na itin�wag nang m�diko-ng-mangkuk�lam nang kany� ng manga mag�lang. Nang dumat�ng ang m�diko at n�k�ta nya ang m�y sak�t, ay sin�bi nya ng n�k�k�lam ng�` ang bab�ye.

Sin�bi nya sa manga t�o do�n na hw�g pa�al�man sa n�k�k�lam na sy� y n�r�ro�n sa b�hay. Pag it� y n�l�man nang m�y sak�t, ay m�l�l�man d�n nang mangkuk�lam na n�sa lo�b nang kanya ng kataw�n, at maka�alis ag�d ang mangkuk�lam. Ang m�diko y lum�pit na hind� n�mal�yan nang bab�ye, at pagd�ka y tinangnan ny� nang mahigp�t ang dalaw� ng hintut�ro` nang bab�ye. It� y l�lo ng inilak�s ang pagsig�w, at kumin�g na p�ra ng isa ng nat�t�kot.

Ang mangkuk�lam, �yon sa paniw�l� nang manga t�o, ay sya ng nak�r�ramd�m nang ano m� ng pas�kit na ibig�y sa kataw�n nang kany� ng kin�k�lam h�bang sya y n�s�sa lo�b nang kataw�n nit�. Gayon d�n, kung kaus�pin ang m�y sak�t, ay siy� ang sum�sag�t.

D�hil d�to y itinan�ng pagd�ka nang m�diko: "An� ang gin�gaw� mo r�to, salb�he?"

Ang m�y sakit ay hind� kumib�`, d�tapwat nagp�lit na magkawal�`. Ang ipinak�ta nya ng lak�s ay hind� karany�wa ng lak�s nang bab�ye.

D�tapuwat hind� sya pinawal�n nang m�diko, at it� y tuman�ng na mul�`: "An� ang gin�gaw� mo r�to? B�kit ka napar�to? Pag hind� ka sumag�t, ay pah�hir�pan kit�."

Ang bab�ye ay nagm�maka�wa ng sumag�t: "Wal� po`, hind� na po` �ul�`, pawalan p�` ninyo ak�, at ak� y nah�hir�pan n�."

"Pawal�n kit�?" itinan�ng ag�d nang m�diko, "Mang�k� ka m�na sa �kin na hind� ka na b�balik."

"Hind� na p�` ak� b�balik," ang sag�t nang bab�ye.

"Pag n�h�le kit� ul�` d�to, ay p�patay�n kit�. Hwag k� ng salb�he. Tumah�mik ka sa iy� ng b�hay."

"� po`, � po`, hind� na p�` ak� b�balik. Pawal�n na p� ninyo ak�!"

H�bang ang s�lit�a ng it� y nangy�y�ri ang bab�ye ay nagp�p�lit na magkawal�`, �big nya ng mabit�wan nang m�diko ang kanya ng hintut�ro`. Pagkapang�ko nang bab�ye ay binit�wan nang m�diko ang dalaw� nya ng hintut�ro`. Ang mukh� nang bab�ye na d�ti ay nagp�pakil�la nang malak� ng paghih�rap ngay� y n�h�say, at sya y p�ra ng g�ga na pinagsa-ul�n nang pagi�sip. Sya ay tumah�mik, pin�tol ang pagsisig�w, at n�ka�sap nang matw�d.

Ang lal�ki nam�n ay n�t�tir� sa isa ng b�ya ng mal�pit. Nang sya y kin�k�lam n� ay itin�wag sya nang manggag�mot nang kanya ng kapat�d na lal�ke. Sa kalakh�n nang g�lit nang kapat�d na yt� ay sya ny� ng tin�wag ang manggagam�t na mabags�k at malup�t sa pagtar�to nya sa mang� mangkuk�lam.

L�him na dumat�ng ang manggag�mot sa b�hay nang m�y sak�t. Mul� sa kanya ng kubl�han ay pin�ho m�na nya kung ang mangkuk�lam ay n�s�sa kataw�n ng�` nang m�y sak�t. It� y n�pagk�kil�la sa pagsisig�w, pagk�los, at pananalit� ng hind� tul�-tul�` nang m�y sak�t. Ang manggagam�t ay nagpatal�m nang is� ng g�lok at pagkat�pos ay maligs� sya ng tumakb� sa tab� nang m�y sak�t. Tinangnan ny� ang dalaw� ng hintut�ro nit�, dinagan�n nya ang kataw�n, at tinag� nya ng mak�ilan ang mukh� nang m�y sak�t. It� y nagsisig�w at nagkawal�`, d�tapwat nang makawal� sya y may manga s�gat na ang kany� ng mukh�` at ang dug� y um��gos na wala ng pat�d. Wal� ng kib� sya in�wan nang manggagam�t. Hin�nap nit� ang kapat�d nang sugat�n at kanya ng sin�bi na hwag pansin�n ang manga s�gat nang kanya ng kapat�d, at kin�buk�sa y maw�wala` iy�n at m�l�l�pat sa mangkuk�lam, sapagk�t dinatn�n nya it� sa kataw�n nang kany� ng kapat�d. Kin�buk�san ay pinarun�n nang m�diko ang kanya ng ginam�t nang patal�m, at malak� ang tuw� nya nang it� y m�k�ta nya ng mah�say at wala ng bakas-s�gat sa mukh�`. Pagkara�n nang ila ng �raw n�balit�an nil� na isa ng mangkuk�lam sa k�pit-b�yan nil� ay malubh�` ang lag�y dahil�n sa pagdudug� ng hind� maamp�t nang manga s�gat nya sa mukh�`.

M�y-roon d�n nam� ng mangkuk�lam na maligs� at hind� na paa�bot sa manggagam�t. Ang manggagam�t nam�n ay kin�kayil�nga ng bih�sa` at maligs�. Ang k�hit s�no y ma��ri ng gumam�t sa is� ng n�k�k�lam, y�mang wal� nam� ng ib� ng panggam�t kung hind�` ang pagpapah�rap sa kataw�n nang n�k�k�lam. D�tapuwat malak� ang pang�nib, sapagk�t, kung hind� maligs�, dahil�n sa kawal�n nang s�nay, ang gum�gam�t, ma��ri ng makawal�` ang mangkuk�lam. Kung magk�gayo y ang n�k�k�lam m�smo ang magh�h�rap dahil�n sa par�sa. M�nsan ay m�y n�bal�ta ng nangy�ri na g�ya nit� ng sum�sun�d.

Ang is� sa dalaw� ng magkapat�d na lal�ki ay kin�lam nang kanya ng karib�l sa pagl�gaw. Wal� ng m�t�wag na m�diko-ng-mangkuk�lam. Sa malak� ng �w� sa kany� nang kanya ng k�ya ay tinalag� nit� ng gamut�n sya k�hit na wal� sya ng pagkas�nay. Hind� ng� sya san�y, d�tapwat madal�s nya ng n�pakingg�n sa manga manggagam�t ang para�n nang paggam�t. Isa ng h�pon, nang inak�l� nya ng n�sa lo�b na nam�n nang kataw�n nang kany� ng kapat�d ang mangkuk�lam, ay sinunggab�n nya ag�d ang isa ng g�lok at pagk�lapit ny� sa kanya ng kapat�d ay tinag� nya it� nang wal� ng tu�s. Kin�buk�san sa lug�r nang m�k�ta nya ng magal�ng at wala ng s�gat ang kany� ng kapat�d it� y bangk�y na l�mang. Ang mangkuk�lam ay nakawal�`.

12. ANG LARO NG S�PA` SA FILIP�NAS.

Ang laro ng s�p� sa Est�dos-Un�dos at sa Filip�nas ay lubh� ng malak� ang pagkak�ib�. Sa lug�r nang dalaw� ng pangk�t na nagt�t�lo ang nags�sipaglar�` na g�ya nang f�tbol, sa s�p� ay is� ng pangk�t l�mang ang nagl�lar�`. Sa s�p� ang hang�d nang nags�sipaglar� ay hind� ang tal�nin ang isa ng ka�way, d�tapuwat ang huw�g bay�a ng lumagp�k sa l�p� ang b�la o s�pa`.

Ang b�la ng g�mit ay malak� ng malaki r�n ang kaibh�n. It� y nay�y�r� nang yant�k na tinil�d at nil�la ng pabil�g. Wal� ng lam�n ang lo�b, at ang manga mat� nang sulihiy� ay malalak�. D�hil d�to ay maga�n ang s�pa`, hind� g�ya nang b�la ng g�mit sa b�sbol.

Mul� sa dalaw� hangg�ng sa dalaw� ng p�` ang b�lang nang nags�sipaglar�`. Kung sil� ay mar�mi ang �yos ay pabil�g. �pang umpisah�n ang paglalar�` is� sa manga kas�le ay ihin�hits� ang s�pa na paita�s at pat�ngo sa is� sa manga nags�sipaglar�`, karany�wa y sa is� ng katap�t ny�. Ang t�o ng hinitsah�n nang s�pa` ay ipinab�balik it� sa nagh�gis sa kany�, hind� nang kanya ng kam�y, d�tapwat nang kanya ng pa�.

Kung ang manga nags�sipaglar� ay marur�nong, napap�punta nil� ang pel�ta sa k�hit na s�no sa manga kas�le, kay� t b�wat is� sa kanil� ay nakaab�ng at nagh�hintay nang pagdat�ng nang s�pa`. Ang b�wat is� ay nag��ngat na hw�g bay�a ng lumagp�k sa l�pa ang pel�ta. Kadalas�n ang manga nags�sipaglar� ay nagp�pak�ta nang sar�-s�ri ng �yus nang pags�pa`. Ang manga magand� ng pagbabalukt�t nang pa� sa harap�n o likur�n, ang maligs� at maga� ng lund�g, ang ban�yad at maga� ng pags�p� sa pel�ta, at ang pagpapadal� nang s�p� sa k�hit na al� ng band� ay manga b�gay na nagp�pagand� sa laro ng s�pa`. Hindi r�n bih�ra na ang bal�kat, ang s�ko, ang t�hod, o ang kam�y ay sya ng gin�g�mit sa pagpapabal�k nang pel�ta.

Pap�no ang pagkakatal� sa lar� ng it�? It� y ma��ri l�mang sa pagpap�tag�lan nang hind� paglagp�k nang s�p� sa l�pa`.

Kung halimb�wa y �big makipagl�ban nang isa ng pangk�t nang manga m�nin�pa o sip�ros sa yb� ng pangk�t, ang �na y mangh�h�mon sa alin m� ng pangk�t na kanila ng m�p�le`. Kung it� y tanggap�n, ang �raw, �ras, at lug�r nang paglalar� ay agad n� ng n�b�bal�ta sa manga p�hayag�n.

Sa �ras nang paglalar�` ay hind� �ilan l�mang na l�bo ng t�o ang nags�sipano�d. Ang manghah�mun karany�wa y um��pa nang isa ng b�nda-ng-m�sika at tin�tugtug�n ang b�wat pangk�t sa kanil� ng paglalar�`. Karany�wa y dalaw� ng b�nda ang m�sika, sapagk�t, kung ang hin�mon ay may kaunt� ng g�las, ay �big d�n nam�n nil� ng ipak�ta, at d�hil d�to y nagd�dala sil� nang sar�le nil� ng b�nda nang m�sika.

Pagkara�n nang lar�` ang huk�m ay sy� ng nagp�pah�yag sa manga nan�no�d kung al� ng pangk�t ang nan�lo. Pagk�rinig nil� nang pah�yag nang huk�m ay agad-ag�d in�umpisah�n ang pagis�g�wan at manga pagp�ri sa nan�lo ng pangk�t. Ang m�nanal� ng pangk�t at ang kanila ng manga kayb�gan magkakas�ma ng tin�tugtug�n nang kanila ng b�nda nang m�sika ay ag�d-ag�d na nagp�pas�yo sa manga lug�r na mal�pit sa kanil� ng pinaglaru�n. Kin�buk�san ang lah�t nang nangy�ri ay n�k�k�ta sa manga p�hayag�n.

Ang ganit� ng manga paglalar� nang s�pa ay hind� karany�wan sa manga b�ya ng malili�t sa prov�nsiya, d�tapuwat sa malalak� l�mang na b�yan, g�ya nang Mayn�la` at iba p�.

13. ANG K�RA NG SI PAT�PAT.

Sa b�ya-ng-San-Mig�l ay m�y-roo ng nagtir� ng isa ng t�o no� ng manga hul� ng �raw nang panah�n nang Kast�la`. Ang t�o ng it� y nag�ral at sa kanya ng katalin�han ay n�intindihan ny� ang manga masam� ng pal�kad nang manga k�ra na sya ng manga malili�t na h�re sa kanila ng bay�n-bay�n.

Sa San-Mig�l ang k�ra ng n�dist�no ay isa ng mabags�k at ma�nit ang �lo. Ang t�wag sa kany� nang manga t�o ay "si Pat�pat."

Isa ng linggo ang t�wu ng n�bangg�t sa ita�s nit� ay naparo�n sa simb�han �pang makin�g nang s�rmon nang p�re`. Sapagk�t ang p�ri ng it� ay nagak�la ng manga wal� ng pinagar�lan ang kany� ng sin�s�rmunan ay hind� sya nagp�lit na makapagsalit� ng matw�d nang Tag�log. Ang kanya ng pananalit�` ay wal� ng p�no t d�lo, at hal�-h�lo ng p�ra ng kal�may. Gayon d�n ang kanya ng isin�s�rmun ay hind� n��ib� sa infiy�rno, purgat�riyo, manga salb�hi ng t�o-ng-b�yan, at katapus�n nang mund�.

Nang ang s�rmon nya ay nagumpisa n�, pum�sok sa simb�han ang �ti ng kayb�ga ng si Prans�sko.

G�ya nang karany�wan inumpisah�n nang k�ra ang kanya ng s�rmon sa ganit� ng pananalit�`: "Man� kapat�r-konkristy�nos!"

May �pat na pu ng ta�n na sya sa l�pa ng Katagal�gan, ay hind� pa nya n�tut�ha ng sab�hi ng matw�d ang "Mang� kapat�d-Kongkristy�nos."

Si Prans�sko ay n�t�tay� sa isa ng lug�r na mal�pit sa p�lpito, pinakingg�n nya ng mab�te ang s�rmon na no� y wala ng ib� kung hind� ang mak�l�l�bo n� ng in�lit nang p�ri ng it�, at iy� y �kul sa manga h�rap sa infiy�rno at purgat�riyo at pagtut�lus nang kand�la` at pagbibig�y nang kw�lta sa simb�han �pang m�ligtas�n ang manga h�rap na iy�n. Si Prans�sko ay sinigl�n nang malak� ng g�lit, sapagk�t n�pagkil�la nya na nil�l�ko nang p�re ang kany� ng manga t�o, at wal� sya ng ib� ng p�kay kung hind� ang tak�tin l�mang ang manga nam�m�yan �pang kanil� ng payam�nin ang simb�han at manga k�ra.

Pagkara�n nang s�rmon ay hind� umw� si K�ko na g�ya nang karany�wan, d�tapuwat hinant�y nya ng mat�pus ang m�sa. Pagkara�n nit� y nagp�iwan sy� sa simb�han. Kum�ha sya nang manga pap�l at sum�lat sya sa p�re nang ganit�:

"�mong, n�rin�g ko p�` ang inyu ng s�rmon kan�na ng um�ga. N�pagk�kil�la ko na kay� y nan�niw�la ng may infiy�rno at may purgat�riyo. Ak� y wal� ng paniw�la d�to. Sa linggo ng d�rating, kung �big mo, prubah�n mo sa iyo ng s�rmon sa manga t�o na m�y-roo ng infy�rno at purgat�riyo. Pagkat�pos p�prubah�n k� nam�n sa kanil� na wal� ng infiy�rno ni purgat�riyo. Kung ik�w ang paniwal�an nang manga t�o hind� b�li ng ipab�tay mo ak� dahil�n sa �ki ng pagkat�lo at hind� paniniw�la`. D�tapuwat, kung ak� y man�lo ang hin�hiling ko l�mang sa iy� ay pabaya�n mo ak� ng makapags�bi sa madl�` na wal� ng infy�rno ni purgat�ryo."

Ang il� ng k�pya nang s�lat na yt� ay idinik�t nya sa manga pad�r nang simb�han at ang is� y ipinaab�t nya sa k�ra.

Nang it� y m�b�sa ni Pat�pat sumub� ang kanya ng dug�`, at wal� ng pagk�syah�n ang kanya ng g�lit. Ipinat�wag nya ang manga gw�rdya-sib�l, at sa gabi d�n nang lingg� ng iy�n ay pinapanhik�n at pinahan�pan nya ang manga bah�y-bah�y sa boo ng b�yan, �pang hul�hin si K�ko`. D�tapuwat si K�ko ay hind� nila n�h�le. Nang h�pon d� ng iy�n ay ibinal�ta ni K�ko sa il�n nya ng mat�lik na kayb�gan ang kany� ng ginaw�`, at sil� y nang�pamangh�`. Itinan�ng nil� kung b�kit niya ginaw� iy�n at kung hind� nya napagk�k�ro ang mangy�y�ri sa kany�.

Ang is� sa kanil� y nags�bi nang ganit�: "Magbal�t ka n� nang dam�t, at umal�s ka ngayon d�n, kung hind� mo gust� ng m�h�li ka nang manga sund�lo ni Pat�pat at maipabar�l ka kin�buk�san."

Si K�ko ay �yaw sumun�d sa kany� ng p�yo, sapagk�t inak�l� nya ng t�tanggap�n ni Pat�pat ang kanya ng h�mon tungk�l sa pagpapakil�la sa manga t�o na wal� ng infiy�rno ni purgat�riyo at ang manga it� y pangh�le l�mang nang manga p�re nang kw�lta. Kany� sya y nagpa�bot nang gab� sa b�hay nang isa ny� ng kayb�gan.

Nang dumilim n� at ang b�ya y nag�gulo dahil�n sa paghahan�p nang manga gw�rdya-sib�l ay sak� pa l�mang nya n�pagkil�la ang malak� ng pang�nib na kany� ng kin�b�bing�tan. Sapagk�t it� y n�balit�an nya ag�d, kany� nagkaro�n sya nang panah� ng makapagt�go sa isa ng l�him na s�lok sa b�hay nang kanya ng kayb�gan.

Nang makara�n ang manga paghahanap�n sya y lumab�s sa kanya ng tagu�n, umw� sya, nagbal�t nang il� ng dam�t, nagpasingk�w nang isa ng karum�ta, at pagkak�ha nya nang manga b�la nang bar�l, binitb�t nya ang bar�l, sumak�y sya sa karum�ta, at napahat�d sa lab�s nang b�yan. Pagkara�n nang ila ng �raw ay namundok sy�, kas�ma nang il� ng manga t�o-ng-b�yan na hind� makatir� sa lo�b nang b�yan, sapagk�t n�kagal�tan sila nang k�ra o nang iba p� ng Kast�la ng may katungk�lan sa b�yan.

D�to sa pamumundok ny� sya y inab�tan nang paghih�mags�kan l�ban sa manga Kast�la` nang ta� ng isa ng l�bo walo ng da�n wal� ng pu t �nim.

14. SI MARY�NO AT ANG P�RI NG SI PAT�PAT.

Si Mary�no ay is� sa �ila ng botik�riyo sa b�ya-ng-San-Mig�l. Sya y nag�ng is� sa manga nasawi-ng-p�lad dahil�n sa pagsw�y sa manga kautus�n nang k�ra ng si Pat�pat. Sya y may fam�liya; buk�d sa as�wa ay may dalaw� sya ng an�k, is� ng dadalaw�hi ng ta�n at is� ng kab�b�gu ng pangan�k pa l�mang.

Isa ng �raw ang kany� ng al�la ay nagkasak�t. Sya y may bay�w na m�diko, kany� ang al�la` ay ipinagam�t nya d�to na wal� ng b�yad, at ang gam�t nam�n ay ibinig�y nya na wal� ng b�yad sa al�la`. Nang makara�n ang il� ng �raw ay gumal�ng ang al�la` at it� y nagak�la ng magpahing� ng sandal�` sa b�kid. Kany�` binay�ran nya ang kanya ng �tang at napa�lam sya kay Mary�no �pang magtir� sa b�kid. Hind� nala�nan ang pagtitira ny� sa b�kid at ang al�la ng it� y nagkasak�t na mul�`, at ang naging d�lo y ang kanya ng pagkamat�y.

Sa Filip�nas nang manga panah� ng ya�n ay hind� ma��ri ng huw�g pabendisyun�n ang isa ng pat�y b�go m�ba�n. It� y hind� ipinah�hint�lot nang manga k�ra, d�tapuwat ang pagsas�ma na hind� kas�l nang isa ng bab�ye at lal�ki ay hind� nila masy�do ng pin�pans�n, palibh�sa y gaw� rin nam�n nil�.

Ang pat�y na al�l� ni Mary�no ay lubh� ng mah�rap at ang kany� ng manga kamag�nak ay mahih�rap d�n at wal� ng ikak�ya ng magb�yad sa halag� na sin�sing�l ni Pat�pat. D�hil d�to y wal� ng magpaba�n sa kataw�n nang al�la`.

Nang m�l�man it� ni Pat�pat ay ipinat�wag nya si Mary�no at sin�bi nya ng siy� ang d�pat magpaba�n sa pat�y at siy� ang magb�yad nang g�stos. Sa ak�l� ni Mary�no ay lum�lamp�s ang kasalbah�han ni Pat�pat. Kany� sin�bi nya na hindi ny� sya b�bay�ran sa pagbaba�n nang pat�y, k�hit na an� ang mangy�re.

Si Pat�pat ay sinubh�n nang g�lit. Ipinaba�n niya ang pat�y at sa �raw di ng iy�n ay naparo�n sya sa h�k�man at ipinagsakd�l nya si Mariy�no �pang pagbay�ran siy� nang g�stos sa pagbebendisy�n sa pat�y.

Nang dumat�ng ang paghuh�k�man si Mary�no y naparo�n at nang itinan�ng nang huk�m kung an� ang �big nya ng sab�hin tungk�l sa sakd�l na iy�n, ay sin�bi nya it� ng sum�sun�d:

"Gino� ng Hw�s, ang namat�y na iy�n ay wal� na sa �ki ng kapangyar�han, sapagk�t hind� ku n� sya al�la nang sya y namat�y. Noo ng sy� y m�y sakit pa l�mang ay ipinagam�t ko sy� ng wala ng b�yad, at binigy�n ko sy� ng wala ng b�yad nang gam�t. Nagaw� ku n� ang �ki ng katungk�lan sa �ki ng k�puwa t�o at ang katungk�la ng iniy�tas sa �kin ni Bath�la`. Is� sa manga katungk�lan nang manga p�r�` ay ang magpaba�n nang manga pat�y. Ngay� ng ang t�o ng iy�n ay patay n�, b�kit nam�n hind� magaw� nang p�ri ng it� ang kanya ng katungk�lan na wal� ng �pa, y�mang ito nam�n ay hind� mangy�y�ri kung may k�ya ang manga kamag�nak nang namat�y?"

Pagkara�n nang manga ilan p� ng manga tan�ng nang huk�m sa k�ra at kay Mariy�no ay tin�pus nya ang paghuh�k�man, at ipinah�yag nya ng si Mariy�no ay n�sa katw�ran at ang k�ra y d�pat magpasy�nsya sa pagk�bendisyon ny� nang pat�y na wala ng �pa.

Nang makara�n it� y l�lu ng lumak� ang g�lit ni Pat�pat kay Mary�no, at pagkara�n nang il� ng �raw ay ipinagsakd�l niya ng mul� si Mariy�no. Ngay�n ay iba nam�n ang kanya ng sakd�l. Isinakd�l niya sa h�k�man na si Mary�no ay is� ng Mas�n, sapagk�t sya y hind� nags�simb� n� hind� nang�ngumpis�l n� hind� rin nagm�m�no sa p�re`. Ang manga Mas�n ay ka�way nang Roman�smo at sa makatw�d ay ka�way d�n nang p�mahala�n sa Filip�nas nang manga panah� ng iy�n, at d�hil d�to y kanya ng ipin�yo na si Mary�no y ipat�pon sa ib� ng lupa�n.

Nang m�balit�an ni Mary�no ang sakd�l na yit� ni Pat�pat ay inak�l� nya ng wal� na sya ng pag�sa kung hind� ang magtag� o um�lag sa mang� manghuh�li sa kany�. Kany�` ang ginaw� nya ay lumw�s sya sa Mayn�la` at do�n sya nagtag�`.

D�tapuwat doon m�n ay n�h�li r�n sy� nang manga gw�rdya-siv�l. Kas�ma nang pit� o wal� ng taga iba t ib� ng b�yan sya y inil�lan sa is� ng bap�r at dinal� sila sa ibab� nang kapulu�-ng-Filip�nas. At do�n pagdat�ng nil� ang ib� sa kanila ng magkakas�ma ay pinagb�bar�l nang manga sund�lo ng naghat�d sa kanil�, sapagk�t iy�n ang �tos nang pin�no ng nagpat�pon sa manga t�o ng iy�n.

D�tapuwat si Mary�no y hind� naging is� sa manga n�baril na iy�n. Do�n sya n�tir� hangg�ng sa panan�lo nang manga Amerik�no ay nagkaro�n sya nang kalay�a ng makab�balik sa kanya ng fam�liya. Nang it� y datnan ny� ang isa ny� ng an�k ay pit� na ng ta�n ang g�lang at ang ikalaw� nam�n ay lim� na ng ta�n.

15. ANG INTS�K NA M�NGANG�TAM.

Si Hw�n ay isa ng alw�ge na may k�pit-b�hay na Ints�k na aluw�ge r�n. Ang Ints�k na yt� ay isa ng magal�ng na alw�ge at ang kanya ng k�nis ay n�pagk�kil�la sa magal�ng nya ng pagg�mit nang kat�m. Isa ng �raw nak�bili sy� nang isa ng pir�so-ng-k�hoy na may �pat na pu ng pa� ang h�ba`. It� y kanya ng nil�nis. Sinub�kan nya kung makak�k�ha sy� nang pinagkatam�n na wal� ng pat�d sa bo� ng h�b� nang k�hoy. Dahil�n sa h�say nang kany� ng kasangk�pan at sa kany� ng kabut�han sa pagaalw�ge, ang b�gay na y�n ay nag�ng p�ra ng wal� ng ano m�n sa kaniy�. Tw� ng is�s�lung niya ang kat�m ay nakak�k�ha nang pinagkatam�n na wal� ng pat�d, �pat na pu ng pa� ang h�ba`. �pang ipakil�la nya sa k�pit-b�hay niya ng aluw�gi ng Tag�log ang kany� ng gal�ng, it� y kany� ng pinadalh�n nang isa ng pinagkatam�n �raw-�raw.

Ang aluw�gi ng Tag�log na si Hw�n ay n�pag�lat sa gal�ng nang Ints�k. �pang gantih�n nya ang kany� ng manga tinangg�p na pinagkatam�n, sinub�kan d�n ny� ng kumat�m at ipadal� sa Ints�k ang pinagkatam�n. D�tapuwat ang pinakamah�b� nya ng n�k�ha na pinagkatam�n ay may-roon l�mang na lab� ng lim� ng pa�. It� y kahy�-hiy� ng ipadal� sa Ints�k.

Si Hw�n ay magal�ng gum�mit nang dar�s at siya y nakapagp�pak�nis nang tabl� sa pamamag�tan l�mang nang dar�s. Hind� na kayil�nga ng gam�tan nang kat�m ang ano m� ng k�hoy na kanya ng daras�n, d�tapuwat ang pinagdaras�n ay manga t�tal na maiikl� l�mang, hind� s�kat pagk�kilanl�n nang kany� ng gal�ng, at hind� nya m�ipadal� sa Ints�k.

H�bang si Hw�n ay wal� ng m�l�ma ng gaw�n, ang Ints�k nam�n ay hind� nagl�lub�y nang pagpapadal� nang pinagkatam� ng mahah�ba`. Sinigl�n si Hw�n nang g�lit. Sinunggab�n nya ang kanya ng dar�s at pinarun�n nya ang Ints�k. It� y n�pag�lat at nat�kot nang m�k�ta si Hw�n.

Sin�be nit�: "An� ang gustu mu ng sab�hin sa manga ipinagpapadal� mo ng pinagkatam�n sa �kin? Ak� y binuw�sit mo at it� y iyo ng pagb�bay�ran. P�put�lin ko ang buhuk m� sa pamamag�tan nang dar�s na it�."

Ang Ints�k ay nat�kot, sapagk�t, pag ang �lo nya y tinama�n na nang dar�s na iy�n, ay p�ho ng hind� sya mab�b�hay. Sya y nagk�kawal�`, d�tapuwat sinunggab�n sya ni Hw�n, igin�pus sya sa bangk�`, at inumpisah�n nya ng dinar�s ang �lo nang Ints�k.

Ang dar�s ay isa ng kasangk�pa ng malak�, g�ya nang is� ng p�ko, at mabig�t, d�tapuwat sa magal�ng na kam�y ni Hw�n it� y naging p�ra ng isa ng gunt�ng l�mang. Ang lagp�k nang dar�s sa �lo nang Ints�k ay lubh� ng ban�yad, at ang manga buh�k l�mang ang pin�p�tol nang patal�m.

Sa t�kot nang Ints�k it� y nagsisig�w na sin�be: "Wap�lo! Daluh�n niny� k�, masam� t�o si Hw�n, hind� Kilisty�no!"

It� y n�rinig nang manga k�pit-b�hay at ib� ng nags�sipaglak�d.

Kany� pum�sok sil� sa g�w�an nang Ints�k at do�n ay sin�bi sa kanil� ni Hw�n: "Hwag kay� ng makial�m d�to! Ang Ints�k na yit� y hind� ko sin�sakt�n. �kin l�mang pin�putl�n nang buh�k."

At pat�luy d�n ang kany� ng pagdar�s.

Nang map�tul na nya ng lah�t ang buh�k nang Ints�k ay malak� ang nag�ng pagk�mangh� nang nags�sipano�d, sapagk�t ang buh�k nang Ints�k ay p�ra ng ginup�t nang gunt�ng nang isa ng bihas� ng barb�ro. Ang Ints�k nam�n, nang m�k�ta nya sa salam�n na wala ng s�gat ang kanya ng �lo, ay malaki r�n ang nag�ng pagk�mangh�`, at hind� mapat�d ang pagp�ri nya sa gal�ng ni Hw�n sa pagg�mit nang dar�s.

16. ISA NG T�O NG MAY BIRT�D NANG US�.

M�nsan sa isa ng b�yan sa kapulu�-ng-Filip�nas ay n�hay�g ang pang�lan nang isa ng t�o sa kanya ng manga kabab�yan at manga k�pit-b�yan, dahil�n sa hind� karany�wa ng lak�s nya sa pagtakb� at pagluks�.

Sya y isa ng t�o ng hind� may�bang, d�tapuwat may kaunt� ng tal�no sa paghah�nap at gayon d�n may kaunt� ng t�pang. Ang kanya ng hind� karany�wa ng kapal�ran ay hind� nya ipinagmayab�ng n� hind� nya ipinagkayil�` kung an� ang pinangg�gal�ngan nang kany� ng d� karany�wa ng lak�s. Sin�bi nya sa mang� mapagus�sa` na ang pinangg�gal�ngan nang kanya ng lak�s ay ang angk�n niya ng birt�d nang us�. Hind� nya sin�be kung pap�no ang pagk�pasa kany� nang birt�d na iy�n, d�tapuwat siya y hind� mar�mot sa pagbibig�y-lo�b �pang ikat�lung niya sa mang� kakil�la o hind�` ang kanya ng lak�s.

Sya y may pag�big na yum�man, g�ya nang karam�han nang t�o, at d�to nya gin�mit ang kanya ng lak�s. Par�ti sya ng nak�kipagtakb�han, at ang manga takb�ha ng it� y l�g� na ng pinagkatalun�n nang mar�mi ng salap�`. Sya ay l�g� na ng may malak� ng pust�. Wal� sya ng itin�ng� na pinak�kipagtakbuh�n. Kung m�nsan nak�kipagtakb�han sya sa k�pwa t�o, kung m�nsan ay sa kab�yo, sa �so, at sa iba p� ng h�yop na mat�li ng tumakb�.

Pagkara�n nang ila ng �raw ay dum�mi ang na�pon nya ng salap�` na pinanal�nan sa pust�han. Gayon d�n ang kanya ng manga kayb�gan na nagsipust� sa kany� ay nagkaro�n nang mar�mi ng kw�lta. Nang m�pagal�man nang manga t�o na sy� y may birt�d nang us� ay hind� na sya �big lab�nan sa takb�han. D�hil d�to y �pang hwag m�hinto` ang kanya ng panan�lo at pagk�ta nang kwalt�, ay nagb�bigay sy� nang malalak� ng pal�git sa kanya ng kin�kal�ban. D�hil sa kalakh�n nang manga pal�git na ibinigay ny� ay mar�mi r� ng t�o ng lum�ban sa kany�. D�tapuwat tuw� n� y sya ang nag�ng m�nanal�. Gayon d�n sa manga pakikipagluks�han par�ti n� ng sy� ang nan�n�lo.

D�tapuwat, kung malaki m�n ang kabut�ha ng n�kamtan ny� sa birt�d na yt�, ay m�y-ron d� ng il� ng kahir�pan na n�kamtan ny� dahilan d�to. Dahilan d�n sa kahir�pa ng it� ay hind� nya natagal� ng angkin�n h�bang b�hay nya ang birt�d na iy�n. Dahil�n sa birt�d na iy�n sya y nag�ng lubh� ng magugulat�n. Ang manga kalab�g, �ngay, at tah�l nang �so kung gab� ay hind� nagpat�lug sa kany�. Dahil�n sa manga �ngay na yit�, kung nat�t�lug sya ay pal�gi ng n�p�paluks�. L�l� na, kung isa ng tah�l nang �so, halimb�wa`, ang mak�g�sing sa kany�, sya y n�p�paluks� nang lubh� ng mata�s sa kany� ng hihig�n, at b�go sya pagsa-ul�n nang sar�le, ay nagt�tatakb� na sy�. Sa pagluksu ny� ng it� na hind� sin�sadya` ay wal� sya ng nag�ging pagi�ngat at karany�wa y um�abot sy� sa itukt�k nang bubung�n, at sa kabab�an nit� y l�gi ng nal�lamog ang kanya ng kataw�n o kay� y nagk�kab�kul sy� sa �lo, dahil�n sa pagk�hampas ny� sa bubung�n. Gayon d�n sa kanya ng hind� sin�sadya ng pagtakb� pagk�gising ny� dahil�n sa pagk�g�lat, ay nagk�kaump�g-ump�g ang bo� ng katawan ny� sa manga dind�ng nang kanya ng b�hay.

It� y is� ng mah�rap na t��sin, at inak�l� nya ng hind� sya mab�b�hay n� ng malw�t dahil�n sa hind� pagk�kat�log kung gab�. Kany� inak�l� nya ng it�pon ang birt�d na yt� pagkara�n nang il� ng �raw. Nang sum�pit ang ikapit� ng �raw nang kanya ng paga�re` sa birt�d ay sya y lubh� ng hirap n� at inak�l� nya ng sya y mam�matay n� sa h�rap. Ang �lu nya ay bukul�n. Ang mukh� nya ay mar�mi ng pas�` at k�hit na hind� sya nabal�an nang but�, ang manga lam�n nam�n nya ay lubh� ng lam�g.

D�hil d�to y wal� ng kib� sya ng naparo�n sa isa ng p�rang at itin�pon nya do�n ang birt�d na n�p�lut nya, y�mang mar�mi na r�n l�mang siya ng salap� ng pinanal�nan.

17. ANG AL�LA NG UNGG�`.

Siy Andr�s ay m�y-roo ng isa ng al�la ng ungg� na kany� ng lubh� ng min�mah�l, sapagk�t ang unggu ng it� y nagb�bigay sa kany� nang malak� ng serb�syo. Kung gab� ipinagl�l�tag sya nang ban�g nang unggo ng it�; kung um�ga ay inih�hand�` ang kany� ng panghil�mos, at ang ano m� ng kanya ng iy�tos ay sin�sunod nang ungg�`.

Gab�-gab� ang unggu ng it� y nat�t�log sa il�lim nang k�tri ng tin�tul�gan nang kanya ng pangino�n. It� y hind� gust� nang kanya ng pangino�n, sapagk�t, dahil�n sa kanya ng malak� ng kabuluh�n, ay �big ni Andr�s na sy� y bigy�n nang isa ng mab�te ng lug�r na tulug�n. D�tapuwat, k�hit na g�nu ng pagp�lit ang gaw�n ni Andr�s, ay hind� nya mapat�log sa ib� ng lug�r ang kanya ng al�la ng ungg�`.

Siy Andr�s ay isa ng t�wu ng may t�kot at pag�big sa Dy�s. Kany� gabi-gab� b�gu sya mat�log ay nagk�kurus sy� at tum�t�wag sya sa Dy�s. Sa �ras nang kanya ng paghig� gabi-gab� ay din�ratnan n� ny� na n�sa il�lim nang kanya ng k�tri ang ungg�`. M�nsan m�n ay hind� sya n�una sa paghig�` sa unggu ng it�.

Isa ng �raw ang p�r� sa b�yan ay dum�law kay Andr�s sa kanya ng b�hay. Pagkara�n nang il� ng sandal� ng pagsas�lit�an ay ibinal�t� niy Andr�s sa p�re` na sya y m�y-roo ng is� ng al�la ng ungg� na lubh� ng malak� ang kabuluh�n, sapagk�t sya y pinags�silbih� ng mab�te, at k�hit na an� ang iy�tos nya ay sin�sunod, at sin�bi pa ny� ng mas�pag pa k�y sa manga iba ny� ng al�la` ang unggo ng iy�n.

Malak� ang nag�ng pagtatak� nang p�re`, at hiniling ny� ng ipak�ta sa kany� ang ungg� ng iy�n. Kany� tin�wag ny Andr�s ang ungg�`. Hind� g�ya nang d�ti, na sa is� ng t�wag l�mang niy Andr�s ay lum�l�pit agad-ag�d ang ungg�`, ngay�n mak�sa-m-pu ng t�wag n� ay wal� pa sy�. Siy Andr�s ay nag�lit, nagtind�g, at hin�nap nya sa manga sulok-sul�k nang b�hay ang ungg�`.

Ito y n�k�ta nya sa isa ng s�lok at nakak�pit na mab�te sa isa ng hal�ge. Tin�wag nya at kanya ng pina�alis sa s�lok, d�tapuwat ang ungg� y �yaw umal�s do�n, k�hit na an� ang gaw�n sa kany�. D�hil d�to ay tin�wag nya ang p�re`, �pang it� y do�n tingn�n sa s�lok ang al�l� nya ng ungg�`.

Pagk�lapit nang p�re` ang ungg� y kumin�g sa t�kot. Nagkaro�n nang hin�l� ang p�r�` na ang ungg� ng iy�n ay is� ng dim�nyo. Kany�` ang ginaw� nya y nagkur�s sya at pagkabendisy�n nya nang kaunt� ng t�big ay niwisik�n nya ang ungg�`.

Pagd�po` sa kataw�n nit� nang t�big ay pumut�k na p�ra ng isa ng bar�l, at sa lug�r nang ungg�` ay wal� sil� ng n�k�ta kung hind� asu l�mang na ag�d nawal�`.

Pagkara�n nit� siniy�sat nang p�re si Andr�s tungk�l sa kanya ng paniniw�la sa Diy�s. Sin�bi ny Andr�s na hind� nab�b�go ang mat�bay nya ng paniniw�la` at gabi-gab� nagd�dasal sy� b�go mat�log. Siniy�sat d�n nang p�re` kung sa�n tum�t�log ang ungg�`. Sin�be ni Andr�s na it� y tum�log gabi-gab� sa il�lim nang kany� ng k�tri ng tulug�n.

Pagkara�n nit� y ipinakil�la sa kany� nang p�re` na ang ungg� ng iy�n ay is� ng dim�nyo na um�ab�ng sa kany�, at kung sy� y sum�la nang pagt�wag sa Diy�s b�gu mat�log, sa gab� di ng iy�n ay ih�h�lug sya nang dim�nyo sa infy�rno.

18. ANG MATAND� SA PUNS� SA LIW�NAG NANG �RAW.

Si P�dro ay is� ng mat�pang na lal�ke. Par�ti sya ng nak�rinig nang manga kw�nto tungk�l sa asuw�ng, duw�ndi, mangkuk�lam, at mang� matand� sa puns�, d�tapuwat ang ipinagt�tak� ni P�dro ay kung b�kit hind� sya mak�tagpo n� k�hit is� nang mang� b�gay na it�. �big niya ng mak�k�ta nang isa man l�mang sa kanil�, �pang m�l�man nya kung t�nay ng�` na sil� y m�y-roo ng manga kapangyar�ha ng hind� karany�wan sa karam�han nang t�o.

Sya y nagl�lak�d na isa ng gab� sa is� ng lug�r na madil�m at pinagk�katakut�n, sapagk�t d�to y mar�mi ng nak�k�ta nang matand� sa puns�.

Ang tab�ko nang matanda ng it� y nakat�t�kot ang lak�, at kung it� y hititin ny� ang liw�nag na nangy�y�ri ay p�ra ng liw�nag nang is� ng sig�`.

Sa gabi ng iy�n sa kany� ng paglalak�d mal�y� pa sy� y nak�k�ta na sy� nang is� ng liy�b. Ang buhuk ny� y nagsitind�g at inak�l� nya ng bumal�k, d�tapuwat n�pig�lan nya ang kany� ng t�kot at ipinat�loy din ny� ang kanya ng pagl�kad.

Sya y sinal�bong nang nagt�tab�ko. Pagk�lapit nya y inan�naw nya ang kataw�n nang matand� ng iy�n, d�tapuwat hind� rin nasyah�n ang kanya ng pagsisy�sat, kanya in�big nya ng m�k�ta sa s�kat nang �raw ang matand� ng iy�n. �pang it� y mangy�ri d�pat nya ng pig�lin ang matand�`, sapagk�t ang manga isp�ritu ng it� ay bum�balik sa kanil� ng t�h�nan sa impy�rno o iba pa m� ng lug�r sa pagl�pit nang um�ga.

Kany�` ang ginaw� nya y hinaw�kan nya ag�d ang matand�`. Ito y nakipagbun� sa kany�. Kung m�nsan sya y n�sa il�lim, kung m�nsan sya y n�sa ib�baw, d�tapwat hind� nya pinakawal�n ang matand�`. Mahigp�t na mahigp�t ang kanya ng k�pit at tinalaga ny� ng sum�ma k�hit na sa�n sya dalh�n nang matand� kung it� y malak�s k�y sa kany�.

Sil� y nagbun� hangg�ng alastr�s. Si P�dro sa �ras na it� ay pag�d na pagod n� at malak� ang panglalat�`, d�tapuwat hind� rin nya binit�wan ang kany� ng kabun�`. Nang mag�alaskw�tru n� ay naglub�y nang pagk�los ang kanya ng h�wak. Nang makara�n ang kalah�ti-ng-�ras ang s�nag nang �raw ay nagumpisa n� nang pagtangl�w sa kanil�, d�tapuwat hind� pa r�n lubh� ng maliw�nag �pang m�pagkil�la ni P�dro kung an� ang kany� ng t�ngan. Nang dumat�ng ang alas�ngko ay malaki ny� ng pagk�mangha`, nang m�k�ta nya ng sya y n���kap sa is� ng hal�gi ng hind� lubh� ng mata�s k�y sa kany�, d�tapuwat n�t�t�lus sa l�p� at sun�g na sun�g.

19. ANG TIY�NAK NI HW�N.

Isa ng gab� si Hw�n ay tumaw�d sa �log sa kanya ng paglilib�t. Nang sya y n�sa pas�gan pa l�mang, nak�ramdam sy� nang s�buy nang buh�ngin sa kanya ng lik�d, nang sya y m�tuntung n� sa kabuhang�nan.

Nang �na ng gab� it� y hind� nya inin�. Nang ikalaw� ng gab�, nang magda�n sya ng ul� sa pas�ga ng it�, nak�ramdam sya ng mul� nang s�buy nang buh�ngin sa kanya ng lik�d. Inak�l� nya ng sub�kan at hul�hin ang nags�s�buy sa kany� nang buh�ngin, kany�` sa kanya ng pagl�kad ay pam�nsan-m�nsan sya ng pum�p�hit na pabigl�` sa kanya ng likur�n, d�tapwat wal� sya ng m�k�ta k�hit na an�.

D�hil d�to y sinigl�n siya nang kaunti ng t�kot at inak�l� nya ng bak� kung an� ng matand� sa puns� o tiy�nak ang kanya ng n�k�kat�ngo. Kany�` tinul�nan nya ang pagtakb�, d�tapuwat h�bang nagt�t�lin sya ay l�lu nam� ng dum�dalas ang pagd�p� nang buh�ngin sa kanya ng lik�d. Lumak� ang kanya ng t�kot at d�hil d�to y bumalik sy� sa kanya ng b�hay na patakb� nang �bus-lak�s.

Nang dumat�ng sya do�n ay hin�h�bul nya ang kanya ng hining� at hind� sya maka�sap. Nang sya y makapaghinga n� nang kaunt�` ay sak� pa l�mang sya nakasag�t sa mar�mi ng manga tan�ng nang kanya ng am� at iba p� ng kasa-ng-bah�y. Sin�bi nya sa kanya ng am� na sya y sin�sund�n nang manga dw�nde sa kanya ng paglalak�d at sin�sab�yan sya nang buh�ngin.

Itinan�ng nang kanya ng am� kung sa�n ang lug�r na iy�n at sin�bi nya ng sa pas�gan nang �log. Ang kanya ng am� ay n�pahalakh�k nang t�wa at sin�bi nya ng iy�n ay hind� dw�nde, d�tapuwat ang kany� l�mang pa� ang nagt�tang�y nang buh�ngin sa kanya ng lik�d sa b�wat kanya ng paghakb�ng.

D�tapuwat si Hw�n ay �yaw maniw�la` at m�y ila ng �raw na hind� sya nan�og nang b�hay. D�hil d�to y in�big nang kanya ng am� na m�ipakil�la sa kany� ang katotoh�nan nang kanya ng sin�be, at isa ng gab� ay sin�bi nya kay Hw�n na sya y magpasy�l at magda�n sa lug�r di ng iy�n at sya y kany� ng s�sam�han.

Pum�yag si Hw�n at sila ng dalaw� y naparo�n sa pas�gan. Nang dumat�ng na sila do�n ay nagpah�le ang ama ni Hw�n. Nang itu nam�n ay nagl�lakad n� sa kabuhang�nan at nang sya y nak�ramdam nang s�buy nang buh�ngin sa lik�d, sinigl�n sya ng mul� nang t�kot at isinig�w nya sa kanya ng am� na nagumpisa n� nang pags�buy nang buh�ngin sa kanya ng lik�d.

Pinabal�k nya si Hw�n at kanya ng pinal�kad na mul�`. Ngay�n ay sin�sundan ny� sa likur�n. D�hil d�to y n�k�ta nang ama ni Hw�n na tw� ng sya y h�hakb�ng ang sin�las na so�t nya ay nagt�tang�y nang buh�ngin, at sa pagaals� nit� nang pa� ang buh�ngi ng tang�y ay nap�pas�buy sa lik�d ni Hw�n.

Ang ginaw� nang kanya ng am� ay ipinaal�s ang so�t nya ng sin�las at pinal�kad sya ng mul�`. Ngay�n, k�hit na g�no kal�yo` ang lak�ran ni Hw�n ay wal� na sya ng n�r�ramdam� ng s�buy nang buh�ngin sa kanya ng lik�d.

Mul� noon ay nawal�n sya nang t�kot sa manga matand�`, duw�nde, asuw�ng, at iba p� ng pinagk�katakut�n.

20. SI HW� NG MANGLIL�GAW.

Ang dal�ga ng si Mary� ay bal�ta nang gand� sa kanya ng b�riyo. D�tapuwat wal� ng manglil�gaw sa kany�, l�ban na l�mang kay Hw�n. Ng�nit ang am� ni Mary� ay malak� ang pagk�ayaw kay Hw�n. Hind� m�ka�sap ni Hw�n ang nil�lig�wan kung hind� palih�m, sapagk�t pag n�l�man nang am� ni Mary�, it� y sin�saktan sil� k�pwa` sa pamamag�tan nang pam�l�`. Kung m�nsan at malak� ang g�lit nang am� ay bamb� ang gin�g�mit nya kay Hw�n, at sa ganit� y mal�pit sya ng mabal�an nang but� k�ylan man at sila y m�h�li sa pagu�sap.

Isa ng gab� ng madil�m ang am� ni Mariy� ay naglib�t. Nang it� y m�l�man ni Hw�n pinarun�n nya si Mariy� �pang kaus�pin. Nalib�ng sila sa pagu�sap, kany� sila y dinatn�n nang am� ni Mary� sa kanya ng pagw�`.

Sinigl�n sya ag�d nang g�lit at pasig�w nya ng kina�sap si Hw�n: "Anu k�, salb�he? Sin�bi ku n� sa iy� ng hwag k� ng t�tuntong d�to sa �ki ng pamam�hay. Ano ang �big mo t n�r�rito k�?"

At pagkas�be nit� y sinunggab�n nya ang isa ng bis�g nang kaw�yan at inakma�n nya ng bambuh�n si Hw�n. Sa malaki ng t�kot nit� ay nagtal�n sya sa bint�n�`, d�tapuwat sinund�n din sy� nang am�. Kany� ang ginaw� nya y tumakb� sya nang �bus-lak�s.

Ang gab� ay madil�m na p�ra ng �ling, at hind� nya m�tumpak�n kung sa�n ang parun�n, d�tapuwat pat�loy rin sya nang pagtakb�. Nagkangdad�p� sya sa pagtakb�, d�tapwat maligsi sy� ng nagb�b�ngon at pat�luy din sa pagtakb�.

Hind� nal�on at nak�daan sya nang is� ng malak� at mait�m na b�gay. N�kil�la nya ng iy�n ay isa ng kalab�w, kany� sya y lumund�g ag�d sa lik�d nit�, at kanya ng pinatakb�.

Ang pagsak�y sa kalab�w ay hind� lubh� ng mah�rap sa kalap�ran nang lik�d nit� at sa kahin�an nang takb�. Kany�`, k�hit na wal� ng pamit�k si Hw�n ay d� nat�kot na sumak�y. Sa kadilim�n nang gab� sa kanya ng pagsak�y ay nangy�ri ng n�harap sya sa bunt�tan nang kalab�w at hind� sa uluh�n.

Pinat�lin nya ang kalab�w. Nangy�ri nam� ng ang kalab�w na it� ay �r� nang am� ni Mary�. Hind� nala�nan at nak�tanaw sya nang b�hay na ma�law sa pinat�tung�han nang kalab�w. Ang bo� ng �sa ny� ang b�hay na iy�n ay sa kanya ng k�pit-b�hay. Kany� bumab� sya sa kalab�w at patakbo sy� ng pumanh�k sa b�hay.

Malak� ang nag�ng pagkalit� nya at pagkat�kot nang pagk�panhik nya y sinal�bong sya nang am� ni Mary�, at binamb� sya sa kataw�n at sin�bi: "An� t nagbal�k ka p�? Hind� ba pinal�yas na kit�, wala ng hy�`?"

Nang pagsa-ul�n si Hw�n nang kanya ng sar�li ay nagtal�n sya sa batal�n at tumakb� sya ng mul� pat�ngo sa kanya ng b�hay, d�tapuwat ngay� y hind� na sya sumak�y sa k�hit an� pa m�n.

21. SI MARIY� NG MAR�MOT.

Nang nab�b�hay pa si Mariy� ay n�tira sy� sa kanya ng ma�nam na b�hay sa gitn� nang isa ng mal�wak na bak�ran na may magagand� ng hard�n at manga p�nu-ng-k�hoy. Sya y lubh� ng may�man, kany�` ang b�hay nya y isa ng pan�y na kaginhaw�han.

Hind� sya nakarat�ng nang �pat na pu ng ta�n sa g�lang at sya y namat�y. Ang lah�t nang kanya ng y�man ay hin�t� nya sa kanya ng kapat�d at sa simb�han. Hind� nya n�ala�la ang mahih�rap nya ng kakil�la at il� ng k�pit-b�hay.

Ang kapat�d na na�wan ay nagpam�sa nang sun�d-sun�d sa lo�b nang pito ng �raw, �pang ang k�luluwa ni Mariy� ay papas�kin ni Sam-P�dro sa pint�an nang l�ngit.

Nang ang kanya ng kapat�d ay nab�b�hay pa it� y bal�ta ng bal�t� sa karam�tan. Siya m�smo ay bih�ra ng magpam�sa o magpat�los nang kand�la`. Ang manga pul�bi ng nagp�palim�s, kung tum�wag sa kany�, ay pinal�l�yas nya at hind� nil�limus�n. Kadalas�n ay ipinah�h�bul pa ny� sa �so. Ang kanya ng manga kasam� ay pinapagt�trab�ho nya nang wal� ng �pa, at kung kanya ng pak�nin, ay wala ng �lam,--as�n at k�nin l�mang. Sa panun�yo sa kany� nang kanya ng manga kasam�, twi ng sil� y nags�siuw�` ay nagd�dala sila nang manga man�k, itl�g, bi�k, at manga b�nga nang g�lay o hal�man, �pang ibig�y kay Mary�. Ang manga ala�la ng it� ay hind� nila ibin�bigay dahil�n sa kanil� ng pagmamah�l kay Mary�, d�tapwat p�ra ng isa ng s�hol, �pang sila y hwag masiy�du ng alipusta�n sa kanil� ng pagparo�n sa kanya ng b�hay. Kung si Mary� nam�n ay lum�labas sa b�kid sa kanya ng manga kasam�, ang b�wat m�k�ta nya sa pamam�hay nila na kanya ng m�gustuh�n ay kin�k�ha nya nang wala ng kib�` at hind� nya bin�bay�ran. Kung halimb�wa y mak�k�ta sya sa kanya ng manga kasam� nang is� ng b�gu ng y�ri ng b�kol, bil�o, bist�y, bay�ng, ban�g, palay�k, lumb�, sand�k, kal�n, o iba p� ng kasangk�pan sa b�hay, ay kin�k�ha ny� at ipinad�dala ny� sa kanya ng b�hay. Kung hind� nya mag�mit ang manga pinagk�kuha ny� ay ipinagb�bili ny�. Gayon d�n ang gaw� nya sa manga h�yop nang kanya ng manga kasam�. D�hil d�to y yum�man sya ng ag�d.

Nang sya y m�y-roon n� ng tatlu ng �raw na nam�mat�y, ang kany� ng kapat�d ay n�r�ro�n sa kany� ng b�hay at do�n nagp�pal�pas nang pagdadalamh�te`. Isa ng h�pun nang sya y nagl�lakad sa h�laman�n, n�tabi sy� sa bal�n na n�sa bak�ran. N�pag�lat sya, sapagk�t sa il�lim nang bal�n ay may n�rinig sy� ng tum�t�wag sa kanya ng pang�lan. Itinungu ny� ang kanya ng �lo sa bal�n at do�n ay l�lu ng n�rinig ny� ng mab�te ang pagt�wag, d�tapuwat wal� sya ng m�k�ta ng t�o na k�hit an�.

Sin�bi nang b�ses: "�ki ng kapat�d, ak� ay si Mariy�. Ang ginaw� ku ng pamum�hay na karam�tan, kasakim�n, at kalupit�n ay �ki ng pinagb�bay�ran ngay�n. Ak� ay n�r�rin� sa p�rusah�n ni Bath�l� sa lah�t nang makasal�nan. Kung ma��r� ay hw�g mu ak� ng tul�ran, at ikaw s�na y hum�nap nang para�n �pang mah�ngo mo ak� d�to sa kum�kulu ng lang�s na �ki ng t�r�han ngay�n."

Ang kanya ng kapat�d ay lubh� ng malak� ang nag�ng pagkah�pis, at sya y naparo�n ag�d sa p�re`, �pang ipagtan�ng kung pap�no ang para� ng mag�gaw� ny� �pang mah�ngo nya sa infy�rno ang kany� ng kapat�d. Ipin�yo nang p�ri` na sya y magsady� sa isa ng b�yan na m�y-roo ng lar�wan ni Sam-P�dro na milagr�so. Ang lar�wa ng it� ni Sam-P�dro ay nak�kipag�sap sa manga t�o at nagh�h�tol nang sar�-s�ri ng para�n �pang makap�sok sa l�ngit. Iy�n ang kanya ng mil�gro.

Ang kapat�d ni Mary� ay nagsady� agad-ag�d sa b�ya ng kin�d�roon�n nang Sam-P�dro ng milagr�so. Nang dumat�ng sya ro�n at nak�kipag�sap na sy� kay Sam-P�dro, sin�bi nya ang lah�t-lah�t. Sin�bi nya ng ang s�bi sa kany� nang kany� ng kapat�d ay ang kanya ng ginaw� ng karam�tan, kasakim�n, at kalupit�n ay sya ny� ng ikinah�log sa infy�rno.

"Kung gay�n," ang w�k� ni Sam-P�dro, "hum�nap ka nang k�hit �isa ng t�o, h�yop, o hal�man na ginawa�n nang iyo ng kapat�d nang is� ng kab��tan. Kung ik�w ay mak�k�ta n�, bumalik k� ng mul� sa �kin, at b�bigy�n kit� nang para� ng ikah�h�ngo mo sa h�rap sa iyo ng kapat�d."

Ang kapat�d ni Mary� ay umuw� ag�d sa kanila ng b�yan, at d�to y nagus�s� sya sa lah�t nang nam�m�yan kung s�no ang may �tang na lo�b sa kanya ng kapat�d o kay� kung s�no ang kanya ng ginaw�n o pinagsalita�n nang mab�ti. D�tapuwat k�hit is� ay wal� ng makasag�t. Ang manga h�yop nam�n sa manga k�pit-b�hay at sa bak�ran ni Mary� ang kanya ng pinagusis�`, d�tapuwat wal� rin sy� ng n�k�ta na ginawa�n nang mab�ti nang kany� ng kapat�d.

Ang isa ng �so ng buto t bal�t ay nags�bi sa kany�: "Isa ng h�pon ak� y gut�m na gut�m. Nak�daan ak� sa kany� ng bak�ran nang isa ng but�. It� y kinagat k� at �ki ng din�dala, nang m�k�ta nya ak�. Ipinah�bol nya ak� ng ag�d, at nang bit�wan ko ang but� it� y ipinabaon ny� sa l�pa`. Iyan b� y isa ng kab��tan?"

L�lu ng lumak� ang h�pis nang kapat�d ni Mariy� at unt�-unt� ng naw�wal� ang kanya ng pag�sa na mah�ngo sa h�rap ang kanya ng kapat�d. Inumpisahan ny� ng usis�in ang manga hal�man sa bak�ran nang kanya ng kapat�d. Inisa-is� nya ng lah�t ang manga kalab�sa, �po, pip�no, s�le, mil�n, singkam�s, man�`, tal�ng, s�taw, at sib�yas, b�wang, at iba p� ng g�lay. Sa kanil� y wal� sya ng n�k�ta nang kanya ng hin�h�nap. Isinun�d nam�n ny� ang manga p�no-ng-k�hoy. Siniy�sat nya is�-is� ang manga p�n� nang s�ko, an�nas, �tis, mab�lo, s�h�`, daland�n, d�yap, at bal�bad. Ng�nit wal� ri ng nag�ng katutur�n ang kanya ng p�god; �isa na l�mang pangk�t nang manga hal�man ang hind� pa nya na�us�sa`, at kung d�to y hind� sya mak�k�ta nang kanya ng h�nap, ay wal� sya ng mag�gaw� sa pagdud�sa nang kanya ng kapat�d. Nal�bot nya sila ng lah�t, d�tapuwat wal� ng nakapags�bi na tumangg�p sila nang is� ng gaw� ng kab��tan sa kay Mary�.

Sa k�huli-hul�han pumaro�n ang kapat�d sa tab� nang bal�n, at do�n inus�s� nya ng lah�t ang manga dam�. Nang dumat�ng ang gab� ay �isa na l�mang na p�nu-ng-dam� ang hind� nya na�us�sa`. It� y nilap�tan nya na pun� ng pun� nang t�kot at pag�sa.

Itinan�ng nya sa p�no nang dam� na n�t�tan�m sa tab� nang bal�n: "Nang nab�b�hay ba ang �ki ng kapat�d, ay ginaw�n ka ny� nang is� ng kab��tan?"

Isinag�t nang dam�: "�! Ang iyo b� ng kapat�d? Siy� ng�`, siy� ang nagbig�y sa �kin nang b�go ng b�hay. No� ng tag�raw na nagda�n, lant� ng lanta n� ang �ki ng manga d�hon at ak� y mal�pit na ng mamat�y, d�tapuwat ang iy� ng kapat�d ay nal�go` isa ng h�pon sa tab� nang balo ng it�. Sa kanya ng pagpal�go` ay n�wisikan ak� nang t�big at d�hil d�to y lumak�s ako ng mul�`, at ang manga lant� ku ng d�hon ay nanar�wa ng muli`."

Wala ng pagk�syah�n ang naging tuw� nang kapat�d ni Mary�, at sa gab� ri ng iy�n ay nagbal�k sya kay Sam-P�dro. Binigyan sy� ni Sam-P�dro nang isa ng d�s�lan, at sin�bi sa kany� na umuw� sya at il�wit nya sa bal�n ang d�s�la ng iy�n. Taw�gin nya si Mary� at pakap�tin nya sa d�s�lan, at d�hil d�to y mah�h�ng� nya sa h�rap ang kanya ng kapat�d.

Nagbal�k sya ng ag�d at sum�s�kat pa l�mang ang �raw nang sya y dumat�ng sa bak�ran ni nas�ra ng Mary�. Lum�pit sya sa bal�n, inilawit ny� ang d�s�lan, at tin�wag nya ang kanya ng kapat�d. It� y lumit�w sa ib�baw nang t�big at hum�wak sa d�s�lan. Inumpisah�n nang kany� ng kapat�d ang pagh�tak sa d�s�lan at sya y n�taas n� unt�-unt�`.

Sa pagh�ngo ng it� sa kany� ay m�y-roo ng ib� ng k�luluwa na �big di ng makaal�s sa infy�rno. Kany� sil� y nagsik�pit sa pa� ni Mary�, nang m�k�ta nil� na it� y nah�h�ng� sa h�rap. D�tapuwat nang ang pa� ni Mary� ay sya na l�mang n�l�lub�g sa t�big ang ginaw� nya y ikinaw�g nya ang dalawa ng pa�, �pang ang manga k�luluwa ng n�k�k�pit sa kany� ay mang�kabit�w.

Nang it� y gawin ny� ay napat�d ang d�s�lan at agad-ag�d sya ng lumub�g sa bal�n, at mul� noon ay hind� n� sya n�ka�sap nang kanya ng kapat�d.

Bumal�k it� kay Sam-P�dro at ibinal�ta` ang nangy�re, d�tapuwat sin�be ni Sam-P�dro na wal� na sila ng mag�gawa �pang mah�ngo sa infy�rno ang kany� ng kapat�d.

22. TATL� NG K�LULUWA NG TUM�WAG KAY SAM-P�DRO.

Si Hw�n ay isa ng b�gu ng t�wu ng mak�sig. D�tapuwat nang dumat�ng sya sa g�lang na dalawa ng p� t dalaw�, sya y nagkasak�t nang malubh�` at d� nala�nan at namat�y siy�. Ang kanya ng k�luluwa ay naparo�n sa l�ngit at tumukt�k sa pint�an nit�.

Si Sam-P�dro ay sumag�t sa kanya ng pagtukt�k at itinan�ng nit�: "S�nu ka? An� ang sady� mo r�to?"

Isinag�t nang k�luluwa ni Hw�n: "Ak� ang k�luluwa ni Hw�n. Buksan m� ang pint�`, at �big ko ng pum�sok."

Binuks�n nang bantay-pint�` ang pint�an, at b�gu nya binay�a ng makap�sok ang k�luluwa ni Hw�n ay siny�sat m�na nya nang ganit�: "Ano ang d�hil at napar�to ka? Ano ang kab�n�la ng ginaw� mo sa l�pa` at nagak�l� ka ng n�b�b�gay sa y� ang kaginhaw�han sa l�ngit? Ik�w bag� y may in�wa ng as�wa?"

Ang k�luluwa ni Hw�n ay nags�bi: "Nang ak� y n�sa l�p� pa, madal�s aku ng magsimb�, magdas�l, at maglim�s, d�tapuwat hind� ako nagkap�lad na magas�wa."

Isinag�t nang bantay-pint�`: "Hind� ka d�pat magtam� nang kaginhaw�han sa l�ngit."

At pagk�s�bi nya nit� ay isinara ny� ang pint�`. Ang k�luluwa ni Hw�n ay hind� nakap�sok sa l�ngit.

Pagkaal�s ni Hw�n ay dumat�ng nam�n ang isa pa r� ng k�luluwa.

"S�nu ka? At b�kit mo gust� ng pum�sok sa l�ngit? Ikaw b� y nagas�wa nang n�s�sa l�p� p�?" ang manga tan�ng nang bantay-pint�`.

Isinag�t nang k�luluwa: "Ak� y ang k�luluwa niy Andr�s. Nagas�wa ak� nang ak� y n�s�sa l�p� pa. Buksan m� ang pint�` at �big ko ng pum�sok."

Agad-ag�d na binuks�n ni Sam-P�dro ang pint� nang l�ngit at pagk�k�ta nya sa k�luluwa niy Andr�s ay sin�bi nya: "�! K�w�wa ng k�luluwa! Sa mang� g�ya mo n�t�ta�n at n�r�r�pat ang manga kaginhaw�han sa l�ngit. Pum�suk ka!"

Ang k�luluwa ni Andr�s ay tuwa ng tw� at pum�sok sa masay� ng t�h�nan.

Pagk�sara nang pint� ay m�y-roon na nam� ng tumukt�k.

"S�nu ka?" ang tanong ul� nang bant�y.

"Ak� y ang k�luluwa ni Mariy�no," ang sag�t nang tumukt�k.

"B�kit ka napar�to? B�kit ka nagak�la ng mar�pat ka ng magtam� nang l�ngit? Ik�w bag� y nagas�wa nang n�s�sa l�pa ka p�?"

Sa manga tan�ng na it� y isinag�t nang k�luluwa ni Mariy�no: "Nang ak� y n�s�sa l�p� pa madal�s ak� ng magpam�sa. Ang kalah�t� nang y�man ko ay ibinigay k� sa simb�han sa pagpapam�sa at manga pagpapatugt�g nang kamp�na`. Ang n�ipat�lus k� ng kand�l� ay hind� mah�h�la nang tatl� ng kalab�w, at kung sa pagaas�wa nam�n," idinugtung ny�, "ak� y nagkaro�n nang dalaw�. Nab�o ak� at nagas�wa ng mul�`."

"�ki ng ikinal�lungkot ang hind� ko pagka�ri ng papas�kin kit�. Ang manga l�ku ng g�ya mo ay wala ng lug�r d�to sa kahariy�n nang l�ngit."

At isinara ny� ang pint�`.

23. SI HW� NG BANGK�RO.

Isa ng �raw isa ng Kast�la` ay napat�taw�d kay Hw�n sa kanya ng bangk�` sa ib�yo nang �log. Ang Kast�la ng sakay ny� ay mar�nung magsalit� nang Tag�log. Kany�`, nang sil� y n�l�lay� na sa pas�gan, ay nagumpisa sy� nang pakikipag�sap kay Hw�n.

Ang Kast�la ng it� ay isa ng mar�nong na t�o, sig�ro ng isa ng gur� ng bal�t� sa Esp�nya, at it� y n�pagk�kil�la sa pagsasalit� nya kay Hw�n tungk�l sa heyugraf�ya, aritm�tika, at iba t ib� ng w�k� sa Ewr�pa.

Nang mat�pus ang kanya ng pagsasalit�`, ay nagtan�ng sy� kay Hw�n nang ganit�: "Ik�w ba y nag�ral nang hewgraf�ya?"

"Hind� p�`," ang sag�t ni Hw�n,--at katun�ya y uwal� ng mw�ng si Hw�n, sapagk�t sya y lumak� sa h�rap at sa gay� y pan�y na pagtatrab�ho l�mang ang pinagd�daanan ny� ng b�hay.

Ang Kast�l� ay n�pag�lat sa sag�t ni Hw�n at sin�be niya ng ag�d: "Din�ramdam ko, kayb�gan, ang hind� mu pagk�alam nang hewgraf�ya, sapagk�t d�hil d�to y p�ra ng nawal�` ang kalah�t� nang iyo ng b�hay."

Si Hw�n ay hind� kumib�` at pat�luy d�n ang pagsagw�n.

Hind� nala�nan at tuman�ng nam�n ang Kast�la`: "Nag�ral ka b� nang aritm�tika?"

"Hind� p�`," ang sag�t ni Hw�n.

"Kung gay�n, kayb�gan, ay p�ra ng nawal� sa iy� ang ik�pat na bah�ge nang iyo ng b�hay."

Si Hw�n ay nat�kot nang kaunt�`, sapagk�t hind� nya m�pagk�ro ang �big sab�hin nang Kast�la`.

Sin�bi nya sa kanya ng sar�li: "K�w�w� ka, Hw�n, wal� n� ng n�t�tir� nang iyu ng b�hay, kung hind� isa ng ik�pat na part� l�mang."

Nang ang bangk� nila ay n�s�sa mal�lim na lug�r na nang �log, at h�bang ang Kast�l� nam�n ay pinagk�k�ro ang malak� ng kamangmang�n nang manga t�o ng trabahad�r sa Filip�nas, si Hw�n ay tuman�ng nang ganit� sa kanya ng sak�y: "Mar�nong p� ba kayo ng lumang�y?"

"Hind�`!" ang sagut ag�d nang Kast�la`.

"Kung gay�n," ang sagot ni Hw�n, "ay hind� l�mang p�ra kay� ng nawal�n nang bo� ng inyo ng b�hay, d�tapwat nawal� na ng� ng t�nay."

At sinabay�n nya it� nang pagtata�b nang bangk� ng sin�sakyan nil�. Si Hw�n ay lumang�y sa pas�gan at ang Kast�l� nam�n ay tinang�y nang �gos.

24. ANG KAB��TAN SA MANGA H�YOP.

Is� ng gab� ng madil�m ay nagl�lakad si Hw�n sa manga kapar�nga ng malal�yo` sa manga b�yan. Sya y pat�ngo sa kanya ng b�yan. B�gu sya makarat�ng d�to ay kin�kayil�nga ng magda�n sya sa manga il�ng na lug�r.

Isa ng gab� na sya y nagl�lakad sa ganit� ng lug�r bigl� sya ng n�pag�lat sa pagdat�ng nang isa ng p�sa ng it�m na hum�ni at kin�mot ang kanya ng pa�. Ang ginaw� nya y �bus-lak�s nya ng sin�pa ang p�sa`, at it� y n�pahits� nang mal�yo`. Ipinat�luy nya ang paglalak�d, d�tapuwat hind� nala�nan at nagbal�k na nam�n sa kany� ang p�sa`. L�lu ng lumak� ang kanya ng g�lit at sin�p� nya ng mul�` ang p�sa`. Inak�l� nya ng ang p�sa ng iy�n ay is� ng laruw�n nang ty�nak o asuw�ng. Ipinat�luy nya ang pagl�kad. Hind� naluwat�n at ang p�sa ng it�m ay nagbal�k na mul� sa kany�. Ngay�n, sa lug�r nang sip�in nya ang p�sa`, it� y hinaw�kan ny� at dinala ny� sa kanya ng bis�g, kanya ng hinag�d, at pinagt�tap�k, at sin�bi nya sa p�sa`: "Maba�t na p�s�`, an� ang gusto m�? S�s�ma ka ba sa �ki ng paglalak�d?" at ipinat�luy ny� ang kany� ng pagl�kad.

Hind� nala�nan at sya y sinump�ng nang ant�k. Sa da�n ay m�y n�k�ta sya ng isa ng b�hay, d�tapuwat ang manga t�o sa b�yan ay may paniw�la ng ingkant�do ang b�hay na iy�n. D�tapuwat wal� ng iba ng m�tul�gan si Hw�n, kaniy�` ang ginaw� nya y pumanhik sy� sa b�hay �pang do�n mat�log.

Sya y n�himb�ng, d�tapuwat nang nagh�h�ti-ng-gabi n� ay n�gising sya sa k�lusk�san nang manga dag�`. Ang ginaw� nya y pinagsisip� nya at pinagdadaguk�n ang manga dag�` �pang kanya ng patay�n o kay� y palay�sin. D�tapuwat ang manga dag�` ay dum�mi nang dum�mi hangg�ng sa napun�` ang kuw�rto at sya y kanil� ng pinagkakag�t.

Ang ginaw� ni Hw�n ay kin�ha nya ang kanya ng p�sa ng it�m at sin�bi nya r�to ng patain ny� ang manga dag�`. Ang p�s�` ay ngumiy�w at inumpisah�n ang pagh�bol sa manga dag�`. Malak� ang nag�ng t�kot nang manga dag�`, at ang manga hind� n�patay nang p�sa ay nagsipagtakb� sa kan�-kanil� ng lungg�`. Nang m�k�ta ni Hw�n na wal� na ng n�t�tir� sa manga dag� kung hind� d�dalawa l�mang, ay pinapaghint� nya ang p�sa`. Kanya ng hin�li ang dalawa ng dag�` at kanya ng in�mo` at inak�l� nya ng is�ma r�n sil� na g�ya nang p�s� sa kanya ng paglalak�d.

Kin�buk�san ay ipinat�luy nya ang kanya ng paglalak�d. Inab�tan sya nang gab� sa isa ng lug�r na wala ng b�hay, kany� ang ginaw� nya y ipinat�luy nya ang paglalak�d papunt� sa isa ng b�hay na �r� nang isa ng matand�`. Nagk�taon nam�n na ang matanda ng it� y is� ng engkantad�r. Pinat�luy nya si Hw�n at pinat�log nya sa isa ng sil�d. Si Hw�n ay nat�log nang wal� ng paghihin�l� nang anu m�n.

D�tapuwat, nang m�gising sy� kin�buk�san, ay n�pag�lat sya at nat�kot nang m�k�ta nya ng sya y n�k�kul�ng sa isa ng kah�n na wal� ng b�k�san. Pinagsip� nya ang manga dingd�ng nang kah�n, d�tapuwat wal� sya ng magaw�`, it� y hind� nya mabuks�n. Malak� ang kanya ng pagdadalamh�te` at wal� sya ng m�l�ma ng gaw�n, nang m�ala�la nya ng sya y may kas�ma ng is� ng p�sa at dalaw� ng dag� sa kanya ng k�l�ngan. Kin�ha nya ang dalawa ng dag�`, inam�-am� nya, at sin�bi nya ng bum�tas sil� sa kah� ng kanila ng kin�k�kulung�n. Ang manga dag� ay nagumpis� nang pagkag�t sa tabl� at unt�-unt� sila ng nakagaw� nang h�kay sa makap�l na tabl�, hangg�ng sa it� y nab�tas. Nang makab�tas na sil� ay bumal�k sil� ng mul� kay Hw�n at si Hw�n nam�n ay pinab�tas sil� ng mul�` sa dind�ng nang k�l�ngan. Sa pagu�lit-�lit nang kanila ng paggaw� nang manga b�tas, sa kala�nan ay nakagaw� sil� nang is� ng malaki ng b�tas, at si Hw�n ay nakawal�`.

Ang matand� ay hin�nap ni Hw�n, d�tapuwat it� y hind� nya m�k�ta k�hit sa�n. Kany� ipinat�luy ny� ang pagw�`, at do�n nang dumat�ng sya ay ipinamal�t� nya ang malak� ng serb�syo na ginaw� sa kany� nang kanya ng tatl� ng kayb�ga ng is� ng p�sa` at dalawa ng dag�`.

25. SI HW� NG MANGDUD�KIT.

N�b�sa ku sa isa ng nob�la ng Kast�la` na ang pamag�t ay "La t�mba de y�rro" ang sum�sun�d.

Si Hw�n ay isa ng b�ta ng lilim�hi ng ta�n, an�k nang is� ng kasam� nang may�ma ng si Andr�s. Si Hw�n mul� pa sa pagkab�t�` ay p�pe, d�tapuwat hind�` bing�. Gayon d�n ang pagkap�pe nya ay hind� malubh�`, sapagk�t kadalas�n sya y nakas�sig�w, d�tapuwat hind� ng�` l�mang g�ya nang tin�g nang karany�wa ng b�ta` ang sa kany�.

Isa ng gab� si Andr�s ay dum�law sa b�hay nang kany� ng kasam� na ama ni Hw�n, at sa kanya ng pagd�law na yt� y isin�ma nya ang kanya ng an�k na bab�ye, lilim�hin d� ng ta�n ang g�lang. K�hit na p�pe si Hw�n ay nakipagkayib�gan sya sa an�k nang kanya ng pangino�n, at sil� ng dalaw� y nagsipaglar�` h�bang ang kanil� ng manga am� ay nags�s�lit�an nang tungk�l sa panan�m. Ipinak�ta nya kay Mary� (na sya ng pang�lan nang kanya ng kalar�`) ang manga larwan ny� na gaw� nang kanya ng sar�li ng kam�y at tal�no.

Ang kanya ng manga laruw�n ay sar�-s�ri ng mukh� nang t�o na ginaw� nya at nay�y�r� nang p�tik. Mar�mi rin d�to ang manga bu� ng t�o na may sar�-s�ri ng any�`. Ang ib� y nagt�tan�m, ang ib� y nags�say�w, ang ib� y nakahig�`, at gayon d�n may manga nagb�bun�`, nagt�takb�han, at iba t iba p� ng any�`. Gayon d�n m�y manga h�yop sy�; ang ib� y nay�y�r� nang p�tek at ang ib� y nay�y�ri nang k�hoy.

Tum�lik ang pagkakayb�gan nang dalawa ng b�ta` at n�w�li sila sa paglalar�`. Nang makat�pus n� ang kanila ng am� sa pagsas�lit�an ay tin�wag ni Andr�s si Mary� �pang umw� na sil�, d�tapuwat niy�y� m�na ni Mary� ang kanya ng am� sa lug�r na kin�l�lagy�n nang manga larw�n ni Hw�n, at �pang it� y m�k�ta ny�. Nang m�masdan ny Andr�s ang manga larwa ng y�n ay n�pag�lat sya sa lak� nang tal�no na ipinak�kil�la nang dum�kit sa manga tao-ta�ha ng iy�n. Sin�bi ny Andr�s sa ama ni Hw�n na it� y matal�no at d�pat ipadal� sa p�aral�n. D�tapwat isinag�t nang ama ni Hw�n na sy� y wala ng kw�rta �pang ipapag�ral kay Hw�n.

"Kung gay�n," sin�bi ni Andr�s, "ay ak� ang ��pa sa may�stro. B�kas ay p�paroon sa �mi ng b�hay ang gur� ni Mary�. Sya y papagt�tuluy�n ku d�to sa iy�, �pang umpisah�n nya ang pagtut�ro` at pagbubuk�s nang �sip ni Hw�n."

Napasal�mat nang mar�mi ng mar�mi ang ama ni Hw�n at sil� y naghiwal�y. Malak� ang ikinalungk�t ni Hw�n nang umalis n� ang kany� ng kalar�`.

Mul� sa �raw na it� kadalas�n si Hw�n ay ipinas�sund� nang ama ni Mary� �pang do�n siy� sa kanya ng b�hay makipaglar�` kay Mary�.

Isa ng h�pon na sil� ng dalaw� y nagl�laro sa h�lamanan nang mal�wak na bak�ran ni Andr�s ay nagda� ng lum�lip�d sa tab� nang dalawa ng b�ta` ang isa ng parupar�. It� y kanila ng hin�bol. N��un� si Mary� at sum�sun�d si Hw�n. Sa pagtatakb� nil� ay nah�log si Mary� sa isa ng s�pa ng mab�baw na p�by�yan nang manga isd�` niy Andr�s. Si Hw�n ay n�pasig�w nang malak�s at pagsig�w nya ng it� y napatir�n sya nang lam�n sa lalam�nan at nagdudug�` ang kanya ng bib�g. Hind� nya it� inalint�na at tumal�n din sya sa s�pa` �pang iligt�s si Mary� sa pagkal�nod. Sa kabab�wan nang s�pa` ay hind� nangal�nod ang dalaw� ng b�ta`, d�tapuwat sinigl�n l�mang si Mary� nang malaki ng t�kot na sya ny� ng ipinaghimat�y nang n�s�sa t�big na sy�. Kany�` ang ginaw� ni Hw�n ay hinaw�kan nya si Mary� sa lik�d at itinaas ny� �pang hw�g mak�inom nang t�big, h�bang sy� ay n�s�s�sid sa t�big. Ganit� ang any� nila nang m�datnan sil� nang isa ng al�la ny Andr�s at sil� y hin�ngo sa s�p�`. Malak� ang pagk�g�lat niy Andr�s at malak� ang naging tw�` nang ama ni Hw�n nang si Hw�n ay m�rinig nila ng magsalit�` at ibal�t� sa kanil� ang nangy�ri.

D�hil sa pagsasalit� ni Hw�n ay l�lu ng lumak�s ang kanya ng pags�long sa paga�ral, at gayon d�n l�lu ng tum�lik ang pagkakayb�gan nila ni Mary�. Dumat�ng ang �raw na sin�bi nang gur� nya na sya y d�pat lum�pat nang b�yan �pang ipat�luy ang paga�ral, sapagk�t sya y wal� na ng m�it�ro sa kany�. It� y sin�bi rin ny� kay Andr�s. Ang ginaw� ny Andr�s ay ipinadal� si Hw�n sa isa ng eskw�lhan nang pangdud�kit, at d�to sya nag�ral na may �nim na ta�n.

Si Hw�n at si Mary� ay nagsilak� at ang kanila ng pagkakayb�gan ay nag�ng pagi�b�gan. Tw� ng bakasy�n ay umuw�` si Hw�n sa kanil� ng b�hay sa b�kid ni Andr�s at do�n sya nagp�pal�pas nang �raw sa p�ling ni Mariy�.

Dumat�ng ang isa ng �raw nang pagtatany�gan nang manga din�kit nang manga art�sta, at d�hil d�to y pinagar�lan ni Hw�n ang isa ng �yos na kanya ng d�pat duk�tin par� sa �raw na it�. Ang man�lo sa manga kas�le ay b�bigy�n nang isa ng ganti ng p�l� na may malaki ng kas�ma ng kw�lta, buk�d sa pagdir�wang sa kar�ng�lan nang m�nanal�. May is� ng ta� ng nagtrab�ho si Hw�n sa kanya ng kumpusisy�n.

Dumat�ng ang �raw nang pagtatany�g nang manga din�kit. Si Hw�n, ang kanya ng am�, si Andr�s, at si Mary� ay naparo�n sa b�hay na kin�d�roon�n nang manga din�kit. Lubh� ng mar�mi ang manga t�o, d�tapuwat ang pinagk�kalipumpun�n nil� ay ang din�kit ni Hw�n. Si Mary� ay n�paiy�k sa tw�` sa gand� nang din�kit ni Hw�n. Si Andr�s nam�n ay wal� ng m�l�ma ng sab�hin sa pagp�ri. Dumat�ng ang �ras nang pagpapah�yag nang manga huk�m kung s�no ang nan�lo, at ang din�kit ni Hw�n ay sya ng binangg�t na nakak�ha nang gant� ng p�la`.

It� y isa ng gr�po ng m�y-roo ng isa ng bab�ye ng nakatind�g. Ang kaliw� ng kam�y ay may h�wak na isa ng sul�` at ang k�nan nam�n ay isa ng kor�na ng d�hon. Sa banda ng k�nan nang bab�e at sa il�lim nang kor�na ng ol�va ay may is� ng bin�ta ng n�l�luhod ang k�na ng pa�. Sa kanya ng kaliw�` ay may h�wak sya ng libr� at sa k�nan ay isa ng pamukp�k. Sa kanil� ng pa�nan ay n�s�s�bug ang iba t iba ng kasangk�pan nang isa ng nag��ral.

Nang sil� y umuw�` ipinagtap�t nang dalawa ng nagk�k�ib�gan sa kanila ng manga mag�lang ang kanila ng l�him. Ang ama ni Hw�n ay nalungk�t l�mang, sapagk�t n�l�l�man nya na ang pagkakas�l sa kanila ng dalaw� ay hind� ma��ri`, sapagk�t ang kanila ng lag�y ay g�ya nang sa isa ng bus�bos o al�pin at isa ng pangino�n o h�re`. Pagk�alam ni Andr�s sa b�gay na it� ay sinigl�n sya nang malaki ng g�lit. Ipinat�wag nya si Hw�n at kanya ng min�ra. Sin�bi nya ng sya y wal� ng hy�` at hind� mar�nong tuman�w nang �tang na lo�b, hind� mar�nong kumil�la sa nagpar�nong sa kany�, at sin�bi nya ng hind� sya ma��ri ng m�pakas�l kay Mariy�. D�hil d�to y sya y umal�s agad-ag�d na wal� ng nak��al�m k�hit s�no nang kanya ng pat�tung�han.

Nagda�n ang lim� o �nim na ta�n at si Hw�n sa kanya ng pangdud�kit ay k�ylan ma y hind� nal�lim�tan si Mary�.

Si Mariy� nam�n ay nagpal�pas nang �nim na tao ng it� sa kanya ng b�hay. N�l�lugmok sy� h�bang panah�n sa isa ng mal�lim na kalungk�tan at tuw� na y si Hw�n ang kanya ng n��ala�la. Si Mary� y nagkasak�t nang malubh�` at mal�pit na ng mam�mat�y.

Ipin�yu nang manggag�mot nya kay Andr�s na, kung �big nya ng m�ligtas ang kanya ng an�k, ay sund�n nya ang gusto nit� tungk�l sa pagaas�wa kay Hw�n. D�tapuwat nang pum�yag siy Andr�s ay lubh� ng huli n�. Palal� nang palal�` ang sak�t ni Mary�, at si Hw�n nam�n ay hind� nya n�l�l�man kung sa�n ang kin�d�roon�n. Mar�mi sya ng inut�san sa malalaki ng b�yan �pang han�pin si Hw�n, d�tapuwat nakaraan n� ang mar�mi ng �raw ay wal� pa ng nagkap�lad k�hit is� sa kanil� na mak�tagp�` kay Hw�n.

Sa kala�nan ang isa sa kanil� y n�tagpuan it� sa b�ya-ng-Kam�lig sa kanya ng g�w�an. Nang m�balit�an nya na ipinas�sundo sy� ni Andr�s �pang ipakas�l sila ng dalaw� ni Mary�, ay lubh� ng malak� ang kany� ng naging tw�`. D�tapuwat gayon d�n malak� ang kanya ng t�kot na bak� hind� nya ab�ta ng buh�y ang kanya ng in��big. Sya y mat�li ng mat�li ng umw�` at nang dumat�ng sya sa b�hay niy Andr�s ay n�k�ta nya do�n ang but� t bal�t na pangangataw�n ni Mary� n�l�l�tag sa kanya ng hihig�n. Nang sandal� ri ng iy�n ay nagpasund� si Andr�s nang isa ng p�re`, at si Hw�n at si Mary� y ipinakas�l. H�bang ang pagkakas�l ay idin�daos nang p�re` ang hining� nam�n ni Mary� ay pum�p�naw. Nang m�kasal na sil� ay nagkaro�n l�mang si Hw�n nang panah� ng mahagk�n ang kanya ng as�wa, at it� y pinan�wan nang hining� na ang mukh� y masay� at n�ng�ngit� ang bib�g.

26. SI MARK�TA.

Si Mark�ta ay is� ng dal�ga ng maba�t at magand�, d�tapuwat mah�rap. Sya y m�y-roo ng isa ng n�byo na mah�rap d�n, d�tapuwat may empl�yo sa goby�rno sa Mayn�la` at m�y-roo ng mab�ti ng sw�ldo.

Si Mark�ta ay m�y-roo ng isa ng k�pit-b�hay na may�man. Ang b�hay ay tabl�, at y�ro ang bubung�n, mal�pad ang kanya ng bukir�n. Ang k�pit-b�hay na yt� y malak� ang pagk�gusto kay Mark�ta, d�tapuwat hind� n�tin m�s�s�be kung t�nay ang kanya ng pag�big, sapagk�t maluw�g ang kanya ng torn�lyo. Lah�t nang pags�yo` ay ginaw� nya kay Mark�ta, d�tapuwat si Mark�ta y isa ng dal�ga ng hind� sa-law�han ang lo�b, at ang lah�t nang kanya ng pags�yo` ay hind� pinans�n.

Sa kalakh�n nang pag�big nang manglil�gaw na si Mark�ta ay m�pasa kany�, ang ginaw� nya y gum�mit nang lak�s. Isa ng h�pon pum�sok sa bak�ran nila Mark�ta at nagkubli sy� sa isa ng p�no-ng-s�ging. Nang h�pu ng yo�n ay nagk�taon nam� ng ang bak�ran nil� Mark�ta ay marum�. Kany� it� y nan�og at niwalis�n ang bak�ran. Pagk�tabi ny� sa p�no-ng-s�ging na pinagk�kublih�n nang lal�ke, it� y lum�pit pagd�ka, tinangn�n sya sa kam�y at kany� sya hinagk�n.

N�l�l�man na niny� na sa manga mahihinh� ng t�o do�n sa �tin ang isa ng hal�k ay isa ng malak� ng kasira�n nang p�ri. D�hil d�to nang si Mark�ta ay pumanh�k sa b�hay na um�iy�k, at nang m�l�man nang kanya ng manga mag�lang na sy� y tinampal�san o hinagk�n nang lal�ki ng iy�n, inak�l� nila na wal� ng iba ng pangtak�p sa kasira�-ng-p�ri ng it� kung hind� ang ipakas�l nil� sa lal�ki ng iy�n ang kanil� ng an�k na si Mark�ta. K�hit an� ng pagay�w ang ginaw� ni Mark�ta at k�hit na n�l�l�man nil� na it� y may ka�b�gan, ay kanila r� ng ipinat�loy ang pagkakas�l.

Si Mark�ta ay isa ng b�ta ng lubh� ng mas�n�rin sa kanya ng manga mag�lang, kany� hind� sya makasuw�y nang t�toh�nan ngay�n. Ang ginaw� na l�mang niy� ay isin�lat nya sa kanya ng n�vyo ang manga nangy�ri at mangy�y�ri at sin�bi nya ng ang mag�ging pagkakas�l sa kany� ay isa l�mang pagsun�d sa manga mag�lang at siya r�n ay kanya ng in��big. Sa manga mag�lang nam�n ni Mark�ta ay kanya ng sin�bi na sya ay hind� nila pak�kinab�ngan, sapagk�t ang pagkakas�l nya sa t�u ng kanya ng kinab�buwis�tan ay kany� ng ikam�matay na madal�`.

Ikinas�l sil�. Hind� nala�nan at inapuy�n si Mark�ta nang lagn�t. Mul� sa �raw nang kanya ng pagkakas�l ay hind� sya makak�in nang k�hit an�, at �raw-gab� sya y lum�l�ha`. Ang manga magagal�ng na m�diko sa b�yan, ang lah�t nang y�man nang kanya ng as�wa, at ang lah�t nang manga panal�ngin nang kanya ng manga mag�lang ay hind� makapagligt�s sa kany� sa kam�t�yan. Pagkara�n nang pit� ng �raw nang kanya ng pagk�kas�l ay sya y namat�y. It� y nag�ng malak� ng kalungk�tan nang kanya ng nag�ng n�byo at isa ng nakat�long sa nag�ng kasawi�-ng-p�lad nit� sa kanya ng b�hay na dumat�ng.

27. ANG MANGM�NG NA P�RE`.

Sa b�ya-ng-Bal�wag ay m�y n�dist�no ng isa ng p�ri ng wala ng muw�ng k�hit anu m�n. Hin�hin�la` nang manga t�o na sy� y isa ng sakat�ro l�mang sa Esp�nya na n�padpad do�n at idinist�no sa kanil� ng b�yan �pang magkaro�n nang sw�ldo at sa gay� y m�ligtas sa pagkamat�y nang g�tom. Linggo-lingg� sy� y nagm�m�sa, d�tapwat ang manga nak�kinig nang m�sa ay wala ng m�rinig sa kany� kung hind�` ang salit� ng "M�sa, m�sa, m�sa," at iba p�. Papas�-pasyal sa harap�n nang alt�r; kung m�nsan ay hum�harap sa manga t�o, pinagd�doop ang kam�y, at sa lah�t nang pagk�los nya ng it� y wala ng pat�d nya ng sin�s�bi ang "M�sa, m�sa, m�sa," at iba p�.

Ang manga t�o y nag�lit at ipinagsumb�ng sya sa arsub�spo. Ang sag�t nang arsub�spo ay p�paroon sya ng is� ng lingg� at mak�kinig nang m�sa, �pang m�k�ta kung t�nay ng�` ang sumbong nil�.

Dumat�ng do�n ang arsub�spo. Sa kany� y sin�bi nang p�ri` na sya y hind� makapagm�sa, sapagk�t ang manga ul�l na t�o ay nag��l�san sa simb�han paguumpis� nya nang m�sa.

"B�kas," sin�bi pa ny�, "ay m�m�masd�n niny� ang kanila ng pagtatakb�han sa pagbebendisy�n ko pa l�mang."

Kin�buk�san ay lingg� at sa pagmim�sa nya ay h�harap ang arsub�spo. Um�sip sya nang para�n nang pagliligt�s sa kanya ng sar�le. Kany�`, b�gu sya nagumpis� nang pagmim�sa ay nagpakul� sya nang lang�s. H�bang sya y nagb�b�his ang manga t�o nam�n at ang arsub�spo ay n��up� na sa simb�han. Ang arsub�spo ay mal�pit sa alt�r at h�bang sya y nagb�b�his ang lang�s nam�n ay kasaluk�ya ng kum�kul�`. Nang makapagb�his na sy� ay ibin�hus nya sa lalagy�n nang t�big na bend�ta ang kum�kulu ng lang�s. Ang ug�l� nya ay magbendisy�n m�na b�gu magm�sa, kany�` pagp�sok nya sa simb�han ay sya ny� ng iniwis�k sa manga t�o ang kum�kulu ng lang�s sa lug�r nang �gwa-bend�ta. Ang manga t�o ng dinap�an nang mai�nit na pat�k nang lang�s ay nagsipagtind�g at �bus-l�k�sa ng nagsipagtakb�han papalab�s sa simb�han. Nang m�k�ta it� nang arsub�spo ay hind� nya ipinatul�y ang pagmim�sa sa �raw na iy�n, sapagk�t wala ng n�tira sa simb�han n� isa m�n sa manga t�o.

Sin�bi nang arsub�spo sa p�r�` na sya y hind� m��al�s sa b�ya ng iy�n at hind� na ny� p�pansin�n ang anu m� ng ipagsumb�ng nang manga t�o.

28. ANG P�KUMPIS�LAN.

Si P�r� Mund� ay sya ng n�dist�nu ng il� ng ta�n sa b�ya-ng-Marik�na. Sya y isa ng t�o ng maibig�n sa pagliliwal�w. Sa pagtup�d sa kanya ng manga tungk�lin sya y hind� nagk�k�lang k�ylan m�n. Araw-�raw sya y nagm�m�sa at kung lingg� ay mak�lawa sya ng magm�sa. Gayon d�n sya y nagb�biny�g nang manga b�ta`, nagb�bendisy�n nang pat�y, nagh�hatid nang biy�tiko, nagp�pakumpis�l, at nagpakin�bang. Ang lah�t nang kany� ng tungk�lin ay sin�sunod ny� ng mab�te, d�tapuwat ang pagpapakumpis�l ay nilal�an nya nang kaunt�`. Sa gan� ng kany� sig�ro ng it� y mab�te �pang paunti�n ang manga kasal�nan nang kanya ng kin�kumpis�l, d�tapuwat sa ib� sa kanya ng manga kin�kumpisal it� y may nag�ng masam� ng d�lo.

M�nsan m�y-ro ng is� ng bab�i ng dal�ga na mapagsimb� at mapagkumpis�l. Nang dumat�ng ang dal�ga ng it� sa dalawa ng p� ng ta�n ang g�lang ay in�wan na ny� ang kab�n�la ng pagkukumpis�l, gayon d�n bih�ra ng magsimb�. Nang m�nsan usis�in ang bab�ye ng it� ay nags�bi nang ganit�:

"Noo ng �na ang bo� ng ak�l� ko si P�r� Mund� ay isa ng s�nto, d�tapwat ngay� y n�pagk�kil�la nang mar�mi na sya y isa ng buw�sit na t�o. Kung bah�` at ang manga t�o y nags�sipamangk�` sa bah�`, sya y sa bangk�` nang manga bab�e nak�kisak�y at hind� sa manga lal�ki. Kung um�ga pagkam�sa nya ay m�k�k�ta na sya ng nakatalungk� sa kanya ng p�tyo na ang �bito y nag�g�mun sa l�pa` at sya y hum�h�god nang man�k kahar�p nang ib� ng sabung�ro.

"Noo ng �na ak� y madal�s magkumpis�l sa kany�, d�tapwat dumat�ng ang isa ng �raw na pan�y na kaulul�n l�mang ang ipagtatan�ng nya sa �kin sa kump�s�lan. S�kat ba ng itinan�ng nya sa �kin kung il�n ang manlil�gaw sa �kin, kung s�no ang �ki ng in��big, at kung sa�n ak� mak�kipagtagp�`? Sa loob-lo�b ku l�mang ay n�pakawala-ng-hy�` ang p�ri ng it�. Kany�` in�wan ku sya ag�d sa kump�s�lan at mul� noon ay hind� na ak� nangumpis�l."

29. SI HW� NG B�BAS.

Si Hw�n ay isa t�o ng mapaggaw� nang kaulul�n, d�tapuwat it� y hind� nya sin�sady�` �pang magpag�lit nang k�pwa t�o, kung hind� yon ay talag� ng sya ny� ng ug�li` na �tas sa kanya nang kanya ng pagi�sip.

M�nsan sya y napar�n sa fiy�sta nang isa ng b�yan. May pas�n sya ng tatl� ng bi�k, �pang ipagbil� sa b�yan. Nang sya y dumating n�, n�k�ta nya sa p�tyo nang simb�han ang mar�mi ng t�o ng nal�l�pon at nak�kin�g nang bin�bigkas na talump�ti` nang k�pitan sa b�yan. Masik�p ang pagkak�tayo nang manga t�o, d�tapwat sya y n�lapit d�n sa paan�n nang entabl�do na kin�t�tayu�n nang nagt�talump�ti`. H�bang nak�kipagsiks�kan sy�, ang tatl� ng bi�k ay wala ng lub�y nang pagy�k. Nang sy� y makarating n� sa harap�n nang k�pitan, tin�kup nya ang manga bib�g, �pang sil� y patahan�n, d�tapwat wal� sya ng magaw�`. N�ino nang k�pitan ang manga �y�kan nang bi�k at tiningnan ny� kung s�no ang m�y dala do�n nang manga bi�k.

Nang m�k�ta nya si Hw�n ay sin�bi nya ang gan�t�: "Huw�n! An� ang gustu m� ng sab�hin sa pagpapaiy�k mo d�to nang iyo ng manga bi�k? Lum�yas ka ngayon d�n, at hwag k� ng mak�tuntong-tunt�ng k�ylan m�n sa l�pa-ng-B�stos!"

Si Hw�n ay umal�s at umw�` sa kanya ng b�yan sa San-Ildep�nso. Nakara�n ang isa ng ta�n at dumat�ng na mul�` ang fy�sta sa b�yan nang B�stos. In�big ni Hw�n na pumaro�n, d�tapuwat n�ala�la nya na tinang�an sya nang k�pitan sa b�ya ng iy�n na, pag sya y n�k�ta ng mul�` sa l�pa-ng-B�stos, ay sya y ipab�bilangg�` at pah�hir�pan. Um�sip si Hw�n nang para�n �pang makapar�n.

Nang dumat�ng ang fiy�sta ay m�y-roo ng is� ng m�sa ng malak� na dinaluh�n nang l�bo-l�bo ng t�o. Si Hw�n ay is� sa manga t�o ng it� at sy� ang n�p�pans�n nang mar�mi ng t�o, dahil�n sa any� nang pagk�lagay ny� do�n sa lo�b nang simb�han. D� nala�nan at is� sa manga t�o ng nagm�masid sa kany� ay nagsumb�ng sa k�pitan at sin�bi na si Hw�n ay n�s�sa lo�b nang simb�han at nakasak�y sa isa ng kar�ta na hin�h�la nang kalab�w, at ang lah�t, kar�ta, kalab�w, at si Hw�n ay n�s�sa lo�b nang simb�han. Si Hw�n ay hind� nan�n�og sa kar�ta ng kanya ng tin�tuntung�n.

Pumar�n ang k�pitan sa simb�han �pang hul�hin si Hw�n. Nang m�lapit sy� d�to ay sin�bi ny�: "Huw�n! Sumun�d ka sa �kin at ib�bilangg� kit�. Hind� ba sin�bi ko n� sa iy� t hw�g k� ng t�tuntong nang l�pa-ng-B�stos?"

Isinag�t nam�n ni Hw�n: "Gino� ng K�pitan! Sin�bi ng�` po niny� sa �kin iy�n. Kany�` ak� y hind� makaal�s sa �ki ng kar�ta. N�k�k�ta p� ba niny� it� ng l�pa ng l�lan nang �ki ng kar�ta at sya k� ng tin�tuntung�n? Ito p�` ay hind� l�pa-ng-B�stos kung hind� l�pa-ng-San-Ildep�nso. Do�n ko p�` sa �ki ng b�yan kin�ha ang l�pa ng it�."

Pagk�s�bi ni Hw�n nit� ay hind� n�pig�lan nang k�pitan ang pagt�wa, at sin�bi na l�mang nya sa kanya ng sar�li na sy� y wala ng mag�gawa kay Hw�n, sapagk�t it� y n�sa katw�ran.

30. TATL� NG MAGKAKAYB�GA NG MAGNAN�KAW.

Si Hw�n, si Andr�s, at si Dy�go ay tatl� ng magagal�ng na magnan�kaw. Sil� y bal�ta ng bal�ta`, at mar�mi ng t�o ang nags�sih�le sa kanil�, d�tapuwat sa gal�ng nil� nang panging�lag at pagnan�kaw ay hind� sila m�h�le. Ang tatl� ng it� y nagt�p�na ng m�nsan na magtatagp�` sila sa isa ng lug�r na tah�mik at l�him �pang pagus�pan nil� ang kanil� ng pamum�hay at manga mabub�ti ng b�go ng para�n nang pagnan�kaw. Sil� ng tatl� ay nab�b�hay sa pagnan�kaw l�mang. N� isa m�n sa kanil� ay wal� ng paghah�nap na mab�te. Mul� pa sa pagkab�t�` ay ganito n� ang kanila ng pamum�hay, kany�` sil� y nag�ng matal�no at lubh� ng mak�nis sa gawa ng it�.

Nang dumat�ng ang �raw nang kanil� ng t�p�nan, madali ng �raw pa l�mang ay n�r�ro�n na sil�. Malak� ng pamamal�ta` nang b�wat is� at hind� magk�m�yaw ang kanila ng pagbab�lita�n.

Itinan�ng ni Hw�n kay Dy�go: "G�nu ka na b� kak�nis ngay�n sa �ti ng trab�ho?"

"Sa damdam k�," ang sag�t ni Dy�go, "ay ak� ang pinakamak�nis sa �ti ng tatl�, sapagk�t ak� y nakapagn�n�kaw nang manga itl�g na hin�halimhim�n nang man�k na hind� n�l�l�man nit�. At hind� itu l�mang," idinugtung ny�, "ang manga h�yop m�n na mababags�k ay n�n�nak�wan ku nang kanila ng inak�y nang wal� sila ng m�lay."

"Gany�n ba l�mang ang k�nis mo?" isinab�d pagd�ka ni Andr�s, "Ak� ay nakapagn�n�kaw sa h�yop at gayon d�n sa t�o. Ang manga al�has nang t�o na �big ko ng nak�win ay nin�n�kaw ko, k�hit na nat�t�log o nagl�lakad ang may �re`. M�nsan ay nin�kaw ko ang isa ng sings�ng na hin�hig�n nang may �ri` �pang hwag m�n�kaw, d�tapwat it� y n�n�kaw ko nang wal� sya ng m�lay."

"Gany�n ba l�mang ang k�nis niny�?" itinan�ng ni Hw�n, "Wal� sa kalah�t� nang k�nis ko sa pagnan�kaw ang iny� ng manga nag�gaw�`. Ak� y nakapagn�n�kaw nang t�o m�smo at hind� nang kanila l�mang na manga paga�re`."

N�pag�lat ang dalaw� nya ng ka�sap, sapagk�t hind� nila inak�la ng ang isa ng t�o ng buh�y ay ma��ri ng m�n�kaw nang hind� nito n�l�l�man, at �pang sub�kan nil� ang gal�ng ni Hw�n ay nakipagpust�han sil� ng dalaw� kay Hw�n. Sin�bi nil� ng nak�win nya ang p�r�` sa b�yan at ihatid ny� sa lug�r na kanila ng kin�d�roon�n ngay�n. Kung it� y magaw� nya, b�bay�ran sya ni Andr�s at ni Dy�go nang lim� ng da� ng p�so. D�tapuwat kung hind� nya magaw�`, b�bay�ran nya si Andr�s at si Dy�go nang isa ng da� ng p�so. Um�yon si Hw�n sa pust�ha ng it� at sil� y naghiw�-hiwal�y.

Si Hw�n ay napat�ngu sa b�yan at pinakibalit�an nya kung sa�n n�t�tir� ang p�r�`. Nang m�l�man nya it� ay nagis�p sya nang para� ng g�gawin ny� na pagn�kaw sa p�r�`. Sya y pum�suk na al�la` sa p�ri ng it�. Sa kanya ng pagk�paal�la ng it� ay n�kil�la nya ang manga ug�li nang p�re`. Is� sa kanya ng ug�li` na hind� nab�b�li` k�ylan m�n ay ang pagdadas�l nang ros�riyo sa harap�n nang isa ng po�n. Ang po� ng it� ay nay�y�r� nang k�hoy, at it� y si Sang-Hw�n. Ang lak� nang po� ng it� ay kasingpant�y nang isa ng t�o.

Ang ginaw� ni Hw�n ay nagpagaw� sya sa isa ng mandur�kit nang isa ng po� ng g�ya rin nit�, d�tapuwat huk�y at wala ng lam�n ang lo�b. Ang b�tas na it� sa lo�b nang kataw�n nang po� ng it� ay ma��ri ng soot�n nang isa ng t�o. Nang may�r� na ang po� ng pagaw� ni Hw�n, ay pinalitan ny� ang po� ng si Sang-Hw�n na t�nay na�r� nang p�r�`.

Isa ng h�pun b�gu dumat�ng ang orasy�n ay kum�ha sya nang isa ng s�ko nang big�s at napalo�b sya sa lo�b nang s�nto ng ipinagaw� nya. Pagkah�pon nang p�r�` it� y pumaro�n sa kw�rto ng kanya ng pinagd�dasal�n �pang magros�ryo. Nang magk�kalahat� na ang kanya ng pagdadas�l at k�taon nam� ng nang�ng�wit na si Hw�n sa pagk�tay�`, ay nagsalit� ito: "Ihint� mu n�, P�r� L�kas, ang iyo ng pagdadas�l. Ako y pin�par�to sa iy� �pang ihat�d kit� sa l�ngit."

Nang �na ay sinigl�n nang t�kot ang p�re`, d�tapuwat inak�l� nya ng ang kanya ng po�n ay nagm�mil�gro at totoo ng� ng sin�sund� sya �pang ihat�d sa kalangit�n.

Sa kany� ng hind� pagkib�` ay nagsalit� ng mul� si Hw�n nang ganit�: "Mar�mi n� ang kab�n�la ng iy� ng ginaw�`. Matag�l ka nang nam�m�hay nang mab�ba`, at d�hil d�to y n�t�ta�n sa iy� ang lah�t nang kaginhaw�han sa l�ngit. Sum�ma ka sa �kin at ih�hatid kit�."

Isinag�t nang p�re`: "Pap�no ang g�gawin k� ng pags�ma sa iy�? Ak� y matand� na at hind� ako makal�l�kad mul� d�to sa l�pa` hangg�ng sa l�ngit."

Isinag�t nam�n ni Hw�n: "Y�n ay hwag m� ng alalah�nin. M�y-ron ako ng isa ng s�ko. Sumil�d ka d�to at p�pasanin kit� sa pagpunt� sa l�ngit."

At pagk�s�bi nya nit� y iniladlad ny� ang s�ko nang big�s. Pagk�silid nang p�re` ay tinal�a ng mahigp�t ni Hw�n ang s�ko. Lumab�s sya sa lo�b nang po�n at pinasan ny� si P�r� L�kas pat�ngo sa b�hay na kanya ng pinagtipan�n sa dalawa ng kayb�gan. Tiwal� ng tiwal� si P�r� L�kas na sya y papunt� sa l�ngit, kany�` wal� sya ng kib�` sa lo�b nang s�ko.

D�tapwat, nang nagb�b�tis na si Hw�n sa isa ng mab�baw na �log, ay inak�l� nya ng sya y n�l�l�ko l�mang at hind� sa l�ngit ang punta nil�.

Kany� itinan�ng nya kay Hw�n: "Anu ng �log it�, at b�kit t�yo d�pat tumaw�d nang �log sa pagpunt� sa l�ngit?"

Isinag�t ni Hw�n: "Sssst! Hwag k� ng ma�ngay! It� y �log nang H�rdan."

Ang p�r� ay nagtah�n nang pagsasalit�`. Ipinat�loy ni Hw�n ang pagl�kad.

Nang sya y pum�panhik n� sa b�hay na kanila ng tagp�an, n�pag�lat na mul�` ang p�re`, at tuman�ng sya ng mul�`: "Anu ng hagd�nan it�? Ganito b� ang hits�ra nang hagd�na ng papunt� sa l�ngit?"

"Sin�bi ko n� sa iy� at hwag k� ng ma�ngay", ang isinag�t ni Hw�n, "Ito ng�` ang hagd�na ng paaky�t sa l�ngit."

Nang m�panhik n� sil� sa b�hay ay sinal�bong sil� ni Dy�go at ni Andr�s. Inilap�g ni Hw�n ang kanya ng dal�, at sin�bi nya sa dalaw�: "Dala ko r�to ang iniy�tos ninyo sa �ki ng nak�win. Dala ba niny� ang lima ng daa ng p�so?"

Ang dalaw� y hind� naniw�la ng ag�d. Kany�` ang ginaw� nila y bin�tas nil� ang s�ko at sin�lip nil� ang lam�n. Sa lo�b ay n�k�ta nila ang �lo nang p�r�` na may sats�t. Kany�` iniyab�t nila kay Hw�n ang lima ng daa ng p�so, at sila ng lah�t ay nan�og pagd�ka. In�wan nil� ang p�re` �pang sya ay magpakawal�` sa kanya ng sar�le.

31. ANG PANGHUH�LI NANG MANGA UNGG�`.

Hind� bih�ra` sa manga g�bat na m�tagpu�n ang malalak� ng k�wal nang manga ungg�`. Kung wal� ng arm�s ang is� ng n�p�pasa kanila ng lug�r, sil� y mababags�k, at may pang�nib na patay�n nil� ang t�o ng kanila ng m�pagkalipumpun�n. Sil� kung nag�g�lit ay nags�sipan�og sa manga p�n� nang k�hoy at pinagt�tul�ng-tul�nga ng kin�kagat ang t�o ng n�s�sa kapangyar�han nil�. D�hil d�to ang isa ng t�o ng nagl�lakad sa manga g�bat na mar�mi ng ungg�` ay hind� magp�pab�ya ng magdal� nang bar�l. Ang manga ungg�` kung pin�putukan n� nang bar�l ay wala ng t�kot. Karam�han ay hind� nagt�takb�han, d�tapuwat tin�tingnan nil� ang pinangg�gal�ngan nang �ngay at nang as�. Ang manga din�ratnan nam�n nang b�la ay sin�sangga it� nang kanya ng kam�y, p�ra ng sum�sangga sa isa ng puk�l l�mang. Kany�` ang manga p�lad nil� ay n�b�b�tas d�n nang b�la kung sil� y tama�n.

Hind� bih�ra` ang manga t�o y nangh�h�le nang buh�y na ungg�` �pang kanila ng alil�in at ipagbil� sa manga taga iba t ib� ng lupa�n na nags�sipunt� sa Filip�nas. Ang panghuh�le nang buh�y na ungg�` ay hind� nang�ngail�ngan nang malak� ng p�god, d�tapuwat ang para�n nang pagh�le sa kanila ay is� ng panglol�ko l�mang sa kanil�. Ito ng sum�sun�d ay isa ng halimb�w� nang pagh�le sa kanil�.

Kung ang isa ng t�o ay �big hum�le nang ungg�`, karany�an ay nagl�l�to` o nagp�pal�to sya nang kakan�n, at it� y hin�hal�an o pinah�hal�an niya nang balas�ng. Ang balas�ng ay isa ng but� nang hal�man na nakal�las�ng o nakapag�ant�k nang mal�lim na ant�k sa manga h�yop na mak�k�in. Gayon d�n gin�g�mit it� sa panghuh�le nang isd� sa �log. Pagkal�t� nang kakan�n it� y din�dala nang t�o sa lug�r na kin�d�roon�n nang k�wal nang manga ungg�`. D�tapuwat kung it� y ilagay ny� nang mah�say sa l�p�` ang manga ungg�` ay hind� mags�sipan�og �pang kum�in. Hin�hin�l� nil� na ang kakan� ng iy�n ay p�in l�mang sa kanil� �pang sil� y hul�hin o patay�n. D�hil d�to ang gin�gawa nang t�o ay nagt�takut-tak�tan pagk�tanaw ny� sa manga ungg�`, at sya y nagt�takb� na s�nong ang bil�o nang kakan� ng may balas�ng. Sa kanya ng pagtakb� ay nagd�dapa-dap�an sy�, at d�hil d�to y ang s�nung nya ng kakan�n ay n�p�palagp�k at n�s�s�bog sa l�pa`. Kung it� y mangy�ri n�, ipinat�t�loy din ny� ang kanya ng pagtakb�, at sya y nang�ngubl� sa isa ng lug�r, �pang tanaw�n nya ang pagkak��nan nang manga ungg�`. Pagk�k�ta nang manga ungg�` sa patakb� ng pagal�s nang t�o at pagk�kubli nit�, sil� y nags�sipan�ug sa manga p�no-ng-k�hoy at nags�sipagagaw�n nang kakan�n. Nagk�k�dag�n-dag�n sil� sa pagaagaw�n, at lubh� ng malak� ang �ngay, sapagk�t ang b�wat isa ng k�wal nang ungg� ay m�y-roo ng lim� ng da�n o is� ng l�bo ang b�lang. Pagkak�in nil� hind� nal�l�on at sin�sumpong sil� nang ant�k, nags�sipangh�na` at hind� makaaky�t sa k�hoy. Isa ng nak�t�tawa ng panoor�n ang manga ungg� ng it�, matand�` at b�t�`, ay nang�t�talungk� sa l�pa` at nags�sipagyukay�k b�wat is�. Ang ib� ng hind� nagkap�lad na mak��gaw nang kakan�n ay nags�siyaky�t sa p�no-ng-k�hoy at pinan�nood ang kanila ng manga las�ng na kasamah�n. Pagaany�` nang ganit� nang manga ungg�`, ang t�o ng n�k�kubl� ay sak� pa l�mang lum�l�pit at isa-is� ng sin�sunggab�n ang manga nat�t�lug na ungg�`. Hind� mal�o ng panah�n ang pagubr� nang balas�ng na it�, at ang manga ungg� y nags�sih�say pagkara�n nang il� ng �raw.

Ang ikalaw� ng karany�a ng gaw�n sa panghuh�li nang ungg�` ay ang pagpap�in sa kanila nang ny�g. Ang isa ng bo� ng ny�g ay nil�lagyan nang b�tas. Ang lak� nang b�tas na it� ay hust� l�mang na m�ip�suk nang ungg�` ang kanya ng kam�y kung wal� ng t�ngan. Sa lo�b nang b�o nang ny�g ay inil�lagay ang isa ng pir�su-ng-lam�n nang ny�g, at ang lah�t na it� y inil�lagay sa lug�r nang manga ungg�`. Ang manga ungg�` ay magust�hin sa ny�g, at pagk�k�ta nil� d�to ay din�d�kot nil� ang lam� ng n�sa lo�b nang b�o. Kung masunggab�n na nam�n nil� ang lam�n nang ny�g, ang kanila ng kam�y ay hind� nila m�ilab�s sa b�tas, n� �big nam�n sil� ng bit�wan ang lam�n nang ny�g. D�hil d�to sil� y p�ra ng nakapang�w at pagl�pit nang t�o ng manghuh�le ay hind� sila makaal�s, sapagk�t ang niyog nam�n ay mabig�t at kung m�nsan ay m�y-roo ng pabig�t. Kany�` pagl�pit nang manghuh�le, ay wala ng h�rap nya ng nas�sunggab�n ang manga ungg�` o mats�ng na nang�p�pang�w.

32. ANG FIY�STA NI SANG-HW�N.

Ang ab�ynte-kw�tru nang H�nyo ay sya ng �raw na kapyest�han ni Sang-Hw�n, at it� y ipinagd�d�wang sa manga bay�n-bay�n sa lalaw�gan nang Bulak�n. Sa bw�n nang H�nyo ay kasaluk�yan ang ul�n at map�tik. Ang paniw�l� nang manga t�o si Sang-Hw�n ay sya ng s�nto ng nagp�paul�n, d�hil d�to y maibig�n sa t�big at p�tik. Kany�` ang manga pagdir�wang na gin�gaw�` sa kanya ng kaaraw�n ay lubh� ng malak� ang pagk�iba sa pagdir�wang na gin�gawa sa kaaraw�n nang ib� ng s�nto. Sa b�ya ng malal�pit sa d�gat kung bw�n nang H�nyo ay bum�bah�`, at ang t�big ay um��hon sa b�yan. Sa manga b�ya ng malal�yo` sa d�gat ay lubh� ng maul�n d�n, at karany�wa y ang manga pagbah� ng it� at pagul�n ay n�t�ta�n sa kaaraw�n ni Sang-Hw�n. Ang manga t�o ng kas�li sa pagdir�wang ay nags�sipagbas�` sa bah�` o sa ul�n. Sa manga b�yan nang Mal�los at Hag�noy kung n�t�ta�n ang fy�sta ng it� sa isa ng bah� ng malak�, h�los lah�t nang t�o ay nagl�lublob sa t�big o kay� y nags�sipamangk�`. Kung hind� nam�n bah�`, ang manga t�o y nags�sipaglib�t l�mang sa ul�n. Mar�mi ng taga b�kid at taga b�riyo ay nags�sipagpalim�s sa kaaraw� ng it�. Karam�han sa kanil� ay manga b�ta` o kay� y manga bin�ta`. Bih�ra ng m�y manga bab�ye. Pangkat-pangk�t sila ng nags�sipagpalim�s, at b�wat isa ng pangk�t ay m�y manga kas�ma ng m�siku ng bungb�ng. Ang manga hind� nags�situgt�g ang katungk�lan ay kumant� o kay� y sumay�w. Sila ng lah�t ay uwal� ng pamam�ro` h�los, g�ya nang manga Igor�te, d�tapuwat ang bo� ng kataw�n mul� sa pa� hangg�ng �lo, pat� manga mat� at ta�nga, ay n�k�kulap�lan nang p�tek.

Ang manga pangk�t na it� ay tum�t�wag sa bahay-bah�y. Nagh�hint� sila sa harap�n nang b�hay, at d�to y tum�tugtog sil� o kay� y nags�sikant� o nags�say�w. Ang karany�a ng kanila ng kantah�n ay �kol sa nag�ng pamum�hay ni Sang-Hw�n o kay� y nang iba ng s�nto ng kayb�gan nit�. Sa kanila ng pagtutugt�gan ang kanila ng �yos ay makahil�ra ng pabil�g, kung m�nsan ay nakatay�`, kung m�nsan ay nakatalungk�`, o kay� y nakaluh�d. Kung m�y-roo ng nagk�kant� o sum�say�w, it� y n�s�sa lo�b nang b�log nang manga m�nunugt�g, at do�n nya gin�gaw� ang kanya ng pagkant� o pagsay�w. Pagkara�n nang dalaw� o tatl� ng tugt�gan, kant�han, o s�y�wan, sila y nags�sipaghint�` at sab�y-sab�y na nags�sipanghing�` nang lim�s sa manga t�o ng nan�nood sa kanil�. Kung sila y hind� limus�n, kum�k�ha sil� nang p�tik sa kanila ng kataw�n at pin�pukul nil� ang manga t�o ng marar�mot.

Ang bo� ng magh�pun ay in��bus nil� sa ganit� ng pagdir�wang. Ang manga manglil�mos na it� ay lubh� ng mar�mi r�n, kany�` sil� y nakat�t�lung na magpasigl� sa b�yan k�hit na lubh� ng maul�n.

Sa manga pagbabangk�an nam�n ay hind� bih�r�` ang magkalun�d ang manga t�o. Kany� ang ug�li ng it� ay unti-unt� ng naw�wal�`. Gayon d�n sa manga panah� ng it� ang manga t�o y nag�ging kur�put at bih�ra ng maglim�s. Kany�` ang manga manghihing� nang lim�s sa kaaraw�n ni Sang-Hw�n ay unt�-unt� ng naw�wal�`.

33. ANG MANGA PANGING�LIN NANG MANGA KAMAG�NAK NANG ISA NG NAMAT�Y.

Ang is� ng angk� ng nam�matay�n ay hind�` ang kanila ng lo�b at k�luluwa l�mang ang nagt�tamu nang h�rap, kung hind�` pat� ang buls� r�n nil�. It� y dahil�n sa lubh� ng malalak� ng d�mi nang gin�g�gul nang nam�matay�n sa pagdad�os nang sar�-s�ri ng kaugali�n.

Sa �raw nang pagkamat�y nang isa ng t�o, sa angk�n nit� ay mar�mi ng lubh�` ang nags�sid�law, at ang manga nags�sid�law nam� ng it� ay hind� nas�syah�n nang pakikipagdalamh�t� l�mang sa kamagan�kan nang namat�y, d�tapuwat sil� y nagt�tumir� sa b�hay nang namatay�n. D�hil d�to ang angk�n nang namat�y ay nap�pil�ta ng maghand� nang pangpak�in sa manga d�law. Karany�wa y hind� inil�libing ag�d ang pat�y, d�tapuwat ibin�b�rol m�na ng dalaw� o tatlo ng �raw mul� sa pagkalag�t nang hining�. Sa manga �raw na it� �raw-gab� ay wal� ng pat�d ang d�law nang manga t�o. Karam�han ay manga kamag�nak at ib� y manga kayb�gan, k�pit-b�hay, o ib� ng kakil�la sa b�yan. Kung ang namat�y ay isa ng t�o ng mar�mi ng kayb�gan o kamagan�kan sa iba ng b�yan sila m�n ay dum�d�law r�n, at sil� y d�pat na bigy�n nang t�r�han at pagk�in nang angk�n nang namat�y. It� y ganit� sapagk�t sa manga bay�n-bay�n sa prov�nsiya ay wal� ng b�hay-t�l�yan.

Sa pagpapak�in sa mar�mi ng d�law na it� hind� bih�ra ng naka��bus sil� nang kaby�k na b�ka at il� ng t�pa, kamb�ng, at hind� mab�lang na manga man�k. Ang kosin�ro karany�wa y upah�n, at ang malal�pit na kamag�nak nang namat�y ay nags�sit�lung na magl�to`. D�hil d�to sa b�hay nang namatay�n ang lug�r na kin�b�bur�lan nang pat�y ay tah�mik na tah�mik at k�hit na mar�mi ng t�o ang n�r�ro�n, pabul�ng l�mang kung sil� y mags�lit�an. D�tapuwat sa kain�n at lutu�n ang �ngay ay hind� karany�an. Isa t is� y nag��tos sa manga al�la`, may nagh�h�gas nang pingg�n o kay� y manga palay�k, may nagp�pakint�b nang manga tinid�r at kuts�lyo, may nagh�hand�` sa lam�sa, at iba p�. Sa kus�n� nam�n ang sagits�t nang kaw�le` ay wala ng lub�y. Ang pagtatadt�d nang karn� ay wala ng pat�d at ang tin�g nang kosin�ro at kanya ng alag�d ay sya na l�mang n�r�rin�g.

D�tapuwat sa isa ng sil�d nam�n nang b�hay ay do�n n�r�ro�n at n�l�lugm�k sa pagdadalamh�te` ang manga angk�n nang namat�y. Sila y nags�siy�k nang �bus-lak�s at kung m�nsa y nagd�dukl�y-dukl�y sil� nang kung ano-an� ang mangy�y�ri sa kanila ng pamum�hay dahil�n sa pagp�naw nang namat�y.

Kung may�man ang namat�y, it� y ipinad�d�pit sa p�r�` at inih�hatid sa simb�han. Pagdat�ng do�n sa simb�han bin�bendisyun�n nang p�r�` ang pat�y at pagkat�pos ay inih�hatid d�n nya sa l�b�ngan. Ang lah�t nang manga d�law ay kas�ma sa paglilib�ng na it� at kadalas� y n�s�sakay sil� sa manga karum�ta. Ang manga karum�ta ng it� nam�n ay upah�n, l�ban na l�mang sa il� ng �r� nang manga d�law.

Pagk�libing nang pat�y ang manga d�law na taga iba ng b�yan ay doon d�n ang w�` sa b�hay nang namat�y. Kadalas�n sil� y nags�sial�s ag�d, d�tapuwat kung magk�bih�ra` ay sil� y nagt�tira na tatlu ng �raw �pang mak�s�le sa pagtatatlo-ng-gab�. Ang tatl� ng gab� ay idin�d�os sa b�hay nang namat�y. D�to ay dum�d�law ang manga kamagan�kan at sil� y nags�sipagdas�l. Sa pagdadas�l na it� ay ang manga matatand� l�mang ang kas�li, at ang manga bin�t� at dal�ga ay nags�sipagbugt�ngan nam�n. Ang ganit� ng panging�lin ay gin�gawa sa lo�b nang tatlu ng gab�. Sa katapus� ng gab� karany�a y lubh� ng mar�mi ang t�o, at ang hand�` ay malak� k�y sa dalaw� ng gab� ng nagda�n. Mar�mi r�n nam�n sa manga nags�sidal� ang nagb�bigay nang lim�s sa namatay�n. Karany�wa y manga pangpak�in sa manga d�law.

Sa manga angk� ng mahih�rap ang manga panging�li ng ito ay gin�gaw� r�n, d�tapuwat ang pagd�pit at paghahat�d l�mang nang p�ri sa pat�y ay wal�`. Sa pagbebendisy�n nang pat�y ang isa ng t�o y makab�b�yad sa p�re` nang gustuh�n ny�. Ang pinakam�ra ay ang pagbebendisy�n sa pat�y sa pint�an l�mang nang simb�han at sa sah�g n�l�lap�g. Ang sum�sun�d ay ang pagbebendisy�n nang pat�y sa pint�an d�n, d�tapuwat n�p�p�tung l�mang ang ata�l sa isa ng alt�r. Ang manga mahahalag� ng pagbebendisy�n ay gin�gaw�` sa tab� nang alt�r. Mul� sa isa ng da� ng p�so hangg�ng sa lima ng da�n ang manga halag� nit�.

34. ANG TAKB�HAN SA AMERIK�NO.

Ang manga t�o sa San-Mig�l ay nag�ng p�ra ng manga k�wal nang h�yop na um��lag sa manga pam�lo` nang manga past�l at panghah�bol nang manga �so ng mababags�k. Sil� y lubh� ng maibig�n sa katahim�kan at kapayapa�n. Gayon d�n sila y lubh� ng p�niwala�n sa sabi-sab�, at it� ng manga b�gay na yit� ay sya ng hind� ikin�p�tag nang mar�mi sa kanil� sa b�yan sa panah�n nang manga paghih�mags�kan l�ban sa Kast�la` at sa Amerik�no. Toto� r�n nam�n na mar�mi sa kanil� ay nangagsipagtakb� dahil�n l�mang sa katak�tan o kadw�gan.

Nang mangy�ri ang paghih�mags�kan l�ban sa Kast�la` nang ta� ng isa ng l�bo walu ng da�n at siy�m na pu t �nim, ak� y ��pat na ta�n pa l�mang sa g�lang. �yon sa sin�bi sa �kin nang �ki ng n�nay, kam� ay nagsipunt� sa Mayn�la` sa lug�r nang um�hon sa bund�k. Wal� ako ng mar�mi ng nat�tanda�n nang manga nangy�ri sa panah� ng ya�n, kung hind� ang b�gay nang �mi ng pagpunt� sa estasy�n nang tr�n. Pagdat�ng sa Mayn�la` ay hind� kami nakap�sok sa lo�b nang b�yan kung hind�` may pahint�lot nang isa ng pin�no` sa b�ya ng iy�n.

Ang sum�sunod na b�gay na n�tal�` sa �ki ng pangala�la ay ang pagk�tira n�min sa Biga�, sa b�hay nang isa ng m�nanangg�l na ang pang�la y si Don-Nas�ryo. Ang dahil�n nang ikinal�pat n�min sa b�ya ng it� ay ang pag�lag sa paglalaban�n nang manga Katip�nan at manga Kast�la` sa Mayn�la`. Sa Biga� ay manga sund�lo ng Tag�log sa kanila ng pagsas�nay sa pakikipagl�ban.

Hind� nala�nan at kam� ay n�pasa b�yan nang B�stos. Ang b�ya ng it� ay nas�s�kup d�n sa manga panah� ng iy�n nang manga Katipun�ros. Ang b�ya ng iy�n ay lubh� ng magand� dahil�n sa sar�-s�re ng hits�ra nang manga b�gay-b�gay na n�k�k�ta. Ang �lug ay lubha ng mal�wak, ang pas�gan ay mal�pad, may manga bunt�n nang bat� at buh�ngin sa pas�gan. Ang �mi ng manga kayb�ga ng tinul�yan ay mababa�t na t�o. Ak� at ang �ki ng kapat�d na bab�ye ay kanila ng par�ti ng ipinal�lib�ng, at ang paglilib�ng na it� ay ang pagpapas�sid nang p�to sa mal�naw na t�big sa �log.

Kung an� ang nangy�ri sa manga paglalaban�n nang manga panaho ng iy�n ay hind� ku n�alam�n, dahil�n sa kaliit�n at kawal�n pa nang m�lay.

Nang dumat�ng ang takb�han sa Amerik�no, ak� y may g�lang na nang kaunt�`, at mar�mi ak� ng nat�tanda�n sa �mi ng pagtakb� sa bund�k. Nang ang manga Amerik�no ay nags�sipan�lo na l�ban sa manga sund�lo ni Agin�ldo ang manga t�o sa b�ya-ng-San-Mig�l ay pinagsisigl�n nang t�kot. Lumag�nap sa b�yan ang bal�ta` na ang manga Amerik�no ay manga t�o ng salb�he, malulup�t, at mababags�k at wala ng p�t�gan sa k�hit anu pa m�n. It� y sig�ru ng isa ng bal�ta ng pak�lat nang manga Kast�la` at l�l� na nang manga k�ra sa Filip�nas.

D�hil sa pagkat�kot nang manga t�o sa manga Amerik�no h�lus kami ng lah�t na nam�m�yan ay nagsipagbal�t at nagsi�hun sa bund�k. Kam� ay n�t�tir� no�n sa b�hay nang isa ng �li nang �ki ng n�nay, at do�n ay kas�no r�n n�min ang angk�n nang k�ya nang �ki ng n�nay. �ki ng nat�tanda�n na m�y-ro� ng mahig�t na s� m pu ng �raw ang pagbabast�an at ang paghah�k�tan nang manga kasangk�pan n�mi ng magkakas�no`. Ang manga karit�n na m�y l�la ng kasangk�pan ay gab� kung ipal�kad, �pang ang manga kalab�w na hum�h�la ay huw�g magsis�yad sa kain�tan nang �raw. Ang manga karit�n ay p�n�an hangg�ng sa itukt�k nang k�rang nit� at ang manga kalab�w ay lubh� ng nahir�pan sa pagh�la nang mabibig�t na l�lan. Nang wal� na ng n�t�tir� sa manga ab�bot ay kam� nam� ng manga t�o ang nagsil�lan sa karit�n �pang ihat�d sa bund�k.

Ang lug�r na �mi ng pinarun�n ay tin�t�wag na Pa�-ng-Bund�k, kalah�ti-ng-�raw na lak�rin mul� sa Sib�l. Do�n ang dinatn�n n�mi ng titirh�n ay isa ng k�bo l�mang na may at�p na k�gon at lubh� ng mali�t. Ang sah�g ay manga sang� nang k�hoy na pinut�lan nang manga malili�t na sang�, d�tapuwat hind� makik�nis n� hind� pantay-pant�y. Gayon d�n lubh� ng mali�t at pin�p�sok nang h�ngin at lam�g. Gano�n ang �mi ng tinirh�n na may ila ng bw�n, sa lug�r nang b�hay na tabl� nang �li nang �ki ng n�nay.

Do�n sa Pa�-ng-Bund�k ay nak�tagpu kam� nang mar�mi ng kabab�yan na nagsi�lag d�n, at ang manga n�huli ng nagsidat�ng ay nagbal�ta ng ang lah�t nang t�o sa b�yan ay nang�sa bundok n� o kay� y nang�sa ib� ng b�yan n�. Ang b�ya-ng-San-Mig�l ay nawal�`, d�tapuwat ang manga b�hay ay sya l�mang n�r�ro�n.

Pagkara�n nang ila ng bw� ng pagtitir� n�min sa Pa�-ng-Bund�k ay lum�pat kam� sa isa ng lug�r na l�him. Ang lug�r na iy�n ay is� ng kaing�n sa kagub�tan. Wal� ng nak��alam n� s�nu man sa �min ang pang�lan nang lug�r, at ang ib� ng nak��al�m ay inil�him na lubh�`, �pang hwag m�pagalam�n nang iba ng t�o ang �mi ng kin�t�tag�an. Iy�n ay para�n nang panging�lag hind� sa ka�way l�mang, d�tapuwat sa tulis�n at magnan�kaw d�n. Ang b�hay na tinirh�n n�min do�n ay lubh� ng malak�, mah�ba ng mah�ba` sa il�lim nang is� ng bubung�n. Ang kabahay�n ay hin�ti nang magkakasinglak� ng kw�rto. M�y-roo ng wal� ang b�lang nit�. Sa b�wat kw�rto ay is� ng angk�n ang n�tir�. D�to ay m�y-roon d� ng ila ng bw�n ang �mi ng ikin�pagtir�.

Nang m�l�lapit n� sa b�ya-ng-San-Mig�l ang manga Amerik�no, n�balit�an n�min na ang manga t�o ng it� y hind� g�ya nang manga sab�-sab�, kany�` umunt� nang umunt�` ang �mi ng t�kot sa kanil�. D�hil d�to y umal�s kam� sa �mi ng mal�lim na tagu�n, at naparo�n kam� sa P�ho`. It� y is� ng lug�r sa bundok d�n, d�tapuwat mal�pit nang kaunt�` sa b�yan. D�to y lubh� ng mar�mi kam� ng dinatn�n nang manga kabab�yan at tag� iba t ib� ng lug�r. Karam�han sa kanil� ay m�y manga sak�t, dahil�n sa pagtitir� sa bund�k. D�to nagkaro�n nang malak� ng kagamit�n ang manga gam�t na ipina�hon ni N�nay sa bund�k, at hind� in�wan sa b�yan. Ang manga gam�t na it� y �r� ni T�tay at kanya ng in�wan sa pagkapat�pun sa kany� nang manga k�ra sa Hol�. Isa ng um�ga m�y-roo ng tum�wag sa �mi ng b�hay �pang bumil� nang gam�t. Hin�nap ni N�nay ang kah� ng kin�l�lagy�n nang gam�t. Nang it� y mabuksan n� ay n�k�ta n�min ang is� ng �has na naka�kid at nat�t�log sa ib�baw nang ip� na n�t�t�bon sa manga b�te. Malaki ng tw�` nang ib� ng t�o ng nak�k�ta, d�tapuwat si N�nay ay nat�kot l�mang. Hind� nya n�l�l�man ang kahulug�n nang �has na iy�n. Pagkara�n nang k�tw�an ay itinan�ng ni N�nay kung an� ang d�hil at sil� y nagk�k�tw�an. Isinag�t nil� kay N�nay na ang kahulug�n nang �has na iy�n ay ang pagpat�ngo sa pagy�man nang may �r� nang gam�t. Si N�nay ay n�pataw� l�mang sa kanil� ng s�bi, at hind� sya nan�niw�l� sa manga b�gay na iy�n.

Nang makara�n ang il� ng bw�n ay in�wan n�min ang P�ho` at umw� kam� sa b�yan. Nang kam� ay dumat�ng na do�n, mar�mi sa ila ng kasangk�pan na na�wan n�min ay pinagnak�w nang ila ng t�o ng nanga�wan sa b�yan. Ang tabl� na sah�g nang b�hay nang �li ni N�nay ay wal� na, at hind� nila n�l�man kung s�no ang kum�ha.

Hind� nala�nan ang �mi ng pagdat�ng sa b�yan at n�bal�ta ng ang manga sund�lo ng Amerik�no ay mal�pit na sa b�ya-ng-San-Mig�l. Kam� ay hind� nabag�bag sa bal�ta ng it�, at hinint�y n�min ang kanila ng pagdat�ng. Is� ng katanghal�an ay matah�mik ang b�yan. Ang manga sund�lu ng nang�sa b�yan ay nangagsial�s at ang ib� ng hind� umal�s ay ipinagtap�n ang kanila ng manga bar�l. Ang dahil�n nang b�gay na iy�n ay ang pagp�sok nang manga sund�lo ng Amerik�no. Sa dul�han nang bak�ran nang b�hay na �mi ng kin�tirh�n ay n�k�ta ko ang pagl�pit nang manga sund�lo. Ang salaw�l nil� ay k�ki at ang kamis�ta as�l. Bitb�t nil� ang manga bar�l at nakahil�ra sila nang pagtakb� sa bukir�n at pat�ngo sil� sa da�n.

Nang ang manga Amerik�no y sya n� ng nam�mah�la` sa b�yan, may ila ng bw� ng ang manga �tos ay mahihigp�t. Ang manga �law ay ipinap�patay sa alas�s nang gab�, at wala ng t�o ng pinah�hintul�ta ng maglak�d pagkara�n nang �ras na it�. Sa manga bund�k na mal�pit sa San-Mig�l ay mar�mi ng manga sund�lo ng Tag�log at madal�s nila ng sinalak�yan ang b�ya-ng-San-Mig�l. D�hil sa manga pagsal�kay na it�, ang manga b�hay sa San-Mig�l ay pinagsun�g nang manga Amerik�no. Kung gabi-gab� ang pagsal�kay nang manga sund�lo, gabi-gab� r�n nam�n ang ginaw� ng panun�nog nang manga b�hay. Ang �mi ng manga k�pit-b�hay ay nags�sil�pat sa �min gabi-gab� �pang do�n makit�log, sapagk�t sa �mi ng b�hay ay hind� lubh� ng malak� ang pang�nib sa manga b�la nang nags�sipaglaban�n. Ang manggagam�t nang manga sund�lo ng Amerik�no na n�s�sa b�ya-ng-San-Mig�l ay nag�ng kayb�gan nang �ki ng t�tay, at d�hil d�to y n�ligtas sa s�nog ang �mi ng t�r�han. M�nsan ay sin�bi nang manggag�mot na it� kay T�tay na madal�s sya ng sum�ma sa manga patr�lya at sin�s�bi nya r�to na hwag sun�gin ang �mi ng b�hay. Sa kala�nan, nang hind� mapaal�s nang manga sund�lo ng Tag�log ang manga Amerik�no sa b�yan, ay hinintu�n na nil� ang pananal�kay, at ang b�ya y tumah�mik n�.

TRANSLATION

1. THE FOOLISH MONKEY AND THE CLEVER TURTLE.

Once upon a time, when the turtle was swimming in the river, he saw a banana-tree adrift and being carried along by the current. He dragged it to the beach, but was not able to carry it up to the solid ground. Therefore he called his friend, the monkey, and offered him a half of the banana-tree, if he would plant his part for him. The monkey agreed, and they divided the banana-tree at the middle, half-way from either end. The monkey took the half which had leaves, because he thought it would grow better than the half which had none.

When a few days had passed, the monkey's tree died, while that of the turtle grew until it bore fruit. The bananas grew ripe, but the turtle could not climb for them. Therefore he called his friend, the monkey, and offered him some of the fruits of the banana, if he would climb the tree. The monkey climbed up and ate for all he was worth.

Said the turtle: "Throw me some."

But the monkey answered: "Though sweet the skins, I'd throw you none."

The turtle got angry and scattered spines round the foot of the tree. When the monkey jumped down, he landed on the spines. He suspected the turtle and looked for him, in order to punish him. He found the turtle behind a stump.

Said he to the turtle: "I am going to punish you. Choose between the two: shall I bray you in a mortar or drown you in the river?"

The clever turtle began to shout and begged the monkey, if it were possible, to bray him in a mortar.

But the monkey answered: "I shall give you the punishment you don't want."

And he threw the turtle into the river.

When the turtle arrived in the water, he set up a shout and said to the monkey: "Thank you, friend! This is my home."

Note. p. 16, l. 2 ang pag�ng h�bang nal�l�go` is unusual and no doubt traditional for h�bang ang pag�ng ay nal�l�go`. Similarly, p. 16, l. 18 Balat m�n at malinamn�m ... is traditional (proverbial) for modern K�hit na malinamn�m ang manga bal�t.

2. THE RACE OF THE DEER AND THE SNAIL.

A deer, grazing in the jungle, came upon a snail that was creeping over the leaf of a bamboo-plant. The deer ceased from his grazing and watched the slow creeping of the snail.

When a few moments had passed, he said to the snail: "How slowly you walk! Why don't you learn to walk faster? Look at me,--I am often pursued by dogs, but my swift running is what saves my life. But look at you,--if you should be pursued by any foe, what will ever save your life? Surely you will get killed."

When the snail had heard these words, he looked at the deer and scanned his fine physique, his long legs, and his strong muscles. He wished that he too might be like the deer, so that he could run fast. However, he thought that if he forced himself to run, he should not remain far behind the deer.

Accordingly he answered the deer: "You are overweening. You do not suspect what can be done by one who has a strong will. I challenge you to race with me from here to the river that lies west of here."

The deer laughed loudly and answered the snail: "How can you think you will defeat me? I suppose you are going to cheat."

The snail answered that he was not going to cheat, and, so that there might be someone to watch them and be judge over their race, he suggested that they call one of their friends to be judge.

The deer agreed, and they called an owl to be judge.

When they began to run, the snail was soon left far behind. On his course the deer came upon a flourishing grass-field. He stopped to graze, since his start over the snail was so great. He planned that when he saw the snail coming, he would start running again. However, when he had done feeding, he was attacked by laziness. He went to sleep, with the thought that he would wake up before the snail arrived.

However, while he was asleep, the snail passed by. When he awoke, it was already late in the afternoon. He ran with all his might to the river, and there he was met by the snail and their judge, the owl.

"You are defeated," said their judge at once.

3. A GOOD FRIDAY.

Juan and his friend Pedro were canoeing on the river toward the town Baliwag. In their canoe they had an image of Christ which they were conveying to a priest to be used in the celebration of a Good Friday Mass. Juan was filled with terror.

Said he to Pedro: "This man of ours in the canoe is all chopped up with wounds and no longer breathing. I think this man is a corpse. I am afraid we shall be suspected by the priest to whom we are delivering him."

Pedro answered: "We shall tell him that when this man was loaded into our canoe, he was already in this condition. We have many witnesses, so don't be afraid."

When they reached the priest they gave him the image. The priest told them to come to church the next day in the afternoon to hear the sermon.

Juan was again filled with terror, for he could not make out why the priest wanted them to go to the church. He had often heard of men being summoned to the church and there seized by the gendarmes. However, he did not say anything to Pedro, for he saw that the latter had no fear.

On the next day in the afternoon they went to church, and there they saw a Christ nailed to the cross.

Said Juan: "That man, if you remember, is the one we delivered to the priest. We had better go to some place out of sight of the priest."

So the two of them went under the pulpit, to hear the sermon from there. The Good Friday Mass began, and the priest was already getting to the last part of his sermon.

In his sermon the priest said: "Repent ye of your sins, cruel people! Behold the wounds which you struck in the body of our Savior!"

When Juan heard this, he was again filled with terror, for he thought that he had fallen under suspicion.

Therefore, what he did was to come out from under the pulpit, face the priest, and say: "Father, we are not the ones who wounded this man! When he was loaded into our canoe he was already wounded."

When he had said this, he went back under the pulpit. The priest paid no attention to the speech he had heard, and went on with his sermon.

"The day has come now, when ye sinners must repent. The portals of Heaven are open now through the death of our Savior, and every sinner can enter Heaven, if he repent. But if ye do not repent, ye shall come to be punished with sufferings without end in the flames of Hell for the sufferings which ye caused our Savior to undergo. Behold His body sweating blood, His hands and feet nailed to the cross, and His wounds from head to feet. No one other caused Him to suffer and wounded His dear body, than you, ye sinners, and if ye do not repent, ye shall fall into Hell."

Juan could not remain in his place, for he thought that the priest was overflowing with anger against him.

So he again faced the priest and said, as loudly as he could: "Father, only a moment ago I told you that I had no part in wounding this man, so do not send me, sir, to Hell."

The priest was filled with great anger and said to the congregation: "What sort of people are you, foolish folk? Is there not one among you who can take hold of this fellow and choke him?"

When Juan heard this, he ran with all his might, trampling without regard the people who were kneeling and weeping in repentance of their sins. He was followed by Pedro, and the two ran together, without stopping, until they reached their home town. And there they told the story of their narrow escape.

4. THE HUNCHBACK AND THE BLINDMAN.

A hunchback and a blindman were close friends. When they walked, the hunchback led the blindman; the blindman, on the other hand, carried the hunchback on his shoulders, when they had a hard road to travel, for the hunchback was weak of body.

Once they came upon a cocoanut-tree. They wanted to pick some of the fruits, but they did not know which of the two of them should be the one to climb the tree. The blindman said that he should not be able to climb, because he should not be able to see which fruits to pick, since there were many unripe fruits. The hunchback also did not want to climb, on account of his weakness. However, he was very eager to eat of the cocoanuts, so, finally, he said to the blindman that he would do the climbing.

"To prevent your being robbed of the fruits which I shall throw down, do you count out loud the thud on the ground of the fruits as I drop them, so that I may keep track of the number."

The hunchback began to climb, but when he was half-way up, he fell down.

"One!" said the blindman.

The hunchback told him that it was he who had made the thud and not a cocoanut.

He climbed again. After a few moments he took another fall.

"Two!" shouted the blindman.

The hunchback got angry and told the blindman that he was stubborn.

He said: "That first thing that made a thud was I, and the second one was I again; I haven't yet picked any cocoanuts."

But the blindman planned to make fun of the hunchback's falls. So he decided that, when he again heard a thud, he would cry "Three!"

The hunchback climbed again, but again fell. The blindman cried "Three!" and laughed.

The hunchback grew hot with anger. He went up to the blindman and slapped him in the face. The slap hit the blindman's eyes, and through it his eyes came open. To take revenge he kicked the hunchback. He struck him on the back, and through this his hump was straightened out.

They both rejoiced at what had happened, and their friendship grew all the closer, instead of their becoming enemies.

5. THE KING WHO HAD HORNS AND JUAN.

On a group of islands there ruled a man who had two short horns hidden in his thick hair. This was not known to his subjects, but the secret began to spread among the people by way of the barbers who had cut his hair.

On account of this he conceived a great anger against barbers and planned to exterminate the barbers in his kingdom. He ordered four deep wells dug in front of his residence, and in the center between the four pits he had a seat placed. One day he sat down on the chair between the four pits, and asked everyone who passed whether he knew how to cut hair. Whenever anyone said "Yes," he stopped him, gave him a pair of shears, and had him cut his hair. After a little while he asked each hair-cutter what he saw on his, the king's, head. The hair-cutters all told the truth, and each one of them answered that he saw horns. Every one who answered thus was pushed by the king into one of the pits that were round him.

A few days passed and two of the pits were already filled with barbers and were ordered by the king to be filled up with earth. The passers-by who knew how to cut hair grew scarce, and the king thought he had already killed all the barbers in his kingdom.

One day he waited on his seat until mid-day, before a man came by who said he knew how to cut hair.

The king asked him: "What is your name?"

The man answered: "My name, sir, is Juan."

"Cut my hair, Juan," commanded the king.

Juan approached the king and began to cut his hair.

After a short time the king asked: "What do you see on my head, Juan?"

His reply was thus: "Your Majesty, I see on your head the crown."

This made the king glad. Therefore he got up from his seat and led Juan into his palace and made Juan barber royal. He gave Juan large wages and had the remaining pits filled up.

6. THREE STUDENTS.

Juan, Pedro, and Andr�s were three students from the same town who were friends. When the opening of the schools came, they knew that they would part: each one of them was to go to a different town. Before they parted, they appointed a place where they would meet at the beginning of the vacation.

A year passed, the closing of the schools arrived, the students returned to their home towns, and the three friends, Pedro, Juan, and Andr�s met in the town where Pedro had been brought up, to spend the vacation there.

When they came together, after discussing various matters, they inquired how much each of them had learned in his study of the Spanish language. Pedro said that he knew a great many Spanish words, but that which he remembered best was the word "Vamos."

Juan in turn answered: "I too know a great deal, but what I recall just now is the word 'Matar.'"

Andr�s said that he had learned nothing except the word "Si."

After their conversation Pedro suggested that they go boating on the river and take a bath.

When they were boating on the river, they saw on the bank a Spaniard who wanted to bathe. Pedro said it would be a good idea to speak to the Spaniard, so that each one of them might show his knowledge.

Pedro began and said "Vamos!"

Juan answered "Matar!"

And last came Andr�s with his "Si!"

When the Spaniard heard this, he was filled with terror, for he thought that the three canoers were going to kill him. Therefore, even though he did not know how to swim, he jumped into the river and was drowned.

7. A SOLDIER WHO KNEW LATIN.

Three friends, a priest, a physician, and a soldier, went together to shoot wild game in a deep jungle. As the jungle was far from the town, they carried plenty of provisions, so as not to be in want of food. A few days passed without their bagging anything. Their provisions grew less and less, until there was nothing left except one raw egg. There came to them the day of great hunger, but the three had no food except the egg that was left.

The priest said that, if they divided the one egg, it would do them no good, for it would not slacken their hunger. Therefore the priest suggested that only one of them should eat the remaining egg, and in his selfishness he suggested that whichever of them was best at speaking Latin should eat the egg all by himself. He thought that the soldier did not know Latin, and the doctor alone would be his opponent, and his knowledge he held in contempt.

The doctor agreed to the advice of the priest, but the soldier did not want to consent, for he had not studied like the priest and the doctor, but there was nothing for him to do.

The priest took the egg and tapped it against a stone. When the egg was broken, he said: "Coronatum est," and looked at his two companions.

The doctor took the broken egg, removed the broken part of the shell, put on some salt, and said: "Saltum est."

The physician handed the egg to the soldier, and the priest and he waited for what the soldier would say.

The latter did not know what to say, for he really did not know a single iota of Latin. In his cogitation he remembered that once, when he went to church to hear the Good Friday Mass, he heard from the priest that the meaning of the words "Consummatum est" was "It is all over now." So he poured the egg into his mouth and, when he had swallowed it, he said: "Consummatum est."

His two companions were greatly astonished at the learning of the soldier, which they had by no means suspected.

8. THE SEVEN DWARVES.

A certain married couple had seven children who were dwarves. The father was out of work and could not find any. The mother also was not earning any money, for her body was weak and often sick.

One noon they were sitting on a bench and discussing the life they were leading. The man asked what they had better do with their many children. The woman suggested that they should look for work for their children, so that they might earn money. But the man answered that, in his opinion, they would not be able to find any work, since he himself had not been able to find any. Therefore he suggested that they had better abandon their children.

This made the woman grieve and weep. She would not consent to abandon the children. But her husband made it clear to her that, if they did not do this, they would all die of hunger. Finally the woman consented and they agreed that they would take their children for a walk and leave them on the way.

While they were discussing this, the seventh child was in a crack of the bench on which they were sitting and heard what their parents were going to do to them. After they had finished talking, the child at once looked for his brothers and sisters and told them what he had heard. They all wept, because their parents had not told them that they were a burden to their life. They thought that, if they had known this, they would have done anything whatever to help them gain a living. However, they agreed that they would go along, if they were asked to go walking, and would allow themselves to be led astray.

On the next day their father came to them, told them to get dressed, gave them some cakes, and told them that they should all go for a walk. When they started out, the seventh child did not eat his bread, but, starting at their gate, he crumbled it and scattered it along the road which they were walking. When they had gone some distance, he ran out of bread and asked his brothers and sisters for some. But they did not give him any. He did not tell them why he had run out of bread so soon. When he could get no bread, he picked up stones and these he dropped one by one on their path.

When they came to a jungle, their parents left them, telling them to wait for them there and that they would soon come back. Their parents left them, but they knew that their parents would not come back to them.

When a short time had passed, they heard a noise. They went toward the place from which the noise came. There they saw a great giant bathing by the side of a well. They looked round about the place, and by the side of a tree they saw the clothes of the giant. The seventh child sent his brothers and sisters away and told them to hide, and he would steal the giant's shoes. They did this and the child stole the shoes.

When the giant had finished bathing and was getting dressed, he could not find his shoes. He got angry and cursed. He called for help. When the one who had stolen the shoes heard this, he quickly approached. When the giant saw him, he did not suspect him, for, on account of his smallness, the giant thought that he would not be able to carry the shoes.

Therefore the giant said to him: "If you will carry this bag of money of mine to my wife and tell her to buy some shoes and to bring them to me, I shall pay you much money."

He said further that he could not walk without shoes, and therefore he should hurry. Taking the bag of money, the child promised to return at once. However, when he had gone some distance, he called his hidden brothers and sisters, and when they were assembled, he suggested that they go home. But his brothers and sisters answered that they did not know the way home. He however answered that they should follow the stones and bread he had dropped on the way.

One of his brothers said that, if he had known what he had done with the bread, he would have given him some when he asked for it. They were sorry for the stinginess they had shown toward their brother.

It was not long before they came upon the trail of stones along their way. This they followed and arrived at their house, bringing with them the bag of money, which they at once gave to their parents. The latter rejoiced and were sorry for their bad conduct toward their children,--they rejoiced because they had now the means of living for a long time to come.

9. A POLICEMAN WHO PLAYED VAMPIRE.

In the summer of the year 1902, when the ripe fruits of the fruit-trees were hanging from the branches, there circulated all through the town of San Antonio the rumor that a vampire was going about the town.

The people of San Antonio in those years believed in ghosts, vampires, dwarves, and other objects of terror. Most of them had not been fortunate enough to get an education, but, in spite of this, they were kindly, quiet, and industrious people.

The houses in this town were built of nipa-fibre and bamboo. There were also some frame houses. Most of them stood in large enclosures, and the rear part of these yards was planted with trees that have tasty fruits, such as the custard-apple, grape-fruit, santol, mabolo, mango, and the like.

These fruits were just getting ripe, when the rumor spread that, for several nights back, some women had caught sight of the vampire in various back yards. The women and children were filled with great terror; accordingly, as soon as darkness came down, they staid still in their houses. Most of the men also were afraid, but there were some who said that they were not afraid, because they had not yet come across a vampire and therefore did not know whether it was really to be feared.

A vampire is a being of great power. It changes its body into various forms. At some times it has a body like a human being, but black, at others it is a large dog or pig. It eats people, especially children. But its favorite food, by far, and that which it most commonly eats, is the child yet unborn and still in its mother's womb. Therefore the pregnant women in the town had great fear. They did not allow their husbands to sleep, for watching at their side. A vampire is hard to kill with knife or gun, because it has but one place which one must hit or wound in order to kill it, and this place is secret. The only thing it flees from is garlic, which therefore is much used in driving off vampires.

A surprising thing, however, about this vampire was its habit of keeping itself in back yards. Strange was also the fact that it was mostly young girls who said that they had caught sight of this vampire in back yards, up in grape-fruit trees and other trees. A few bold men said that they suspected that this spook was a thief and no vampire.

It was a certain policeman of more than usual courage who spied upon this vampire in a back yard in which it had recently been seen. When darkness came, he went to his hiding-place. It was not long before the vampire came and climbed on a grape-fruit tree, and he heard it picking many fruits. It came down and went away, but was followed by the policeman to a house which it entered.

Great was the surprise of the policeman, when he saw here his fellow policeman wrapped up in a black sheet and just putting down on the floor a black bag full of grape-fruit.

He summoned his fellow policeman to the town hall and there on the next day accused him before the judge. The policeman who had played vampire was put in jail for the crime of theft.

10. A VAMPIRE THAT GOT KILLED.

One evening in a students' boarding-house in the town of Malolos I heard an old man, ninety years of age, tell a company the following story:

When he was still a young unmarried man, he lived in the country. There were only a very few neighbors. One day there was a death in the house of a neighbor. Following an ancient custom, he went to the house of mourning.

When he arrived there it was not long before he was told that there was a vampire in the place. He had a great and inherited hatred of vampires and therefore decided to watch that night.

Late in the evening he left the house and in a wagon not far from the house, there he lay down. There was a full moon that night, so that he had a clear view of things round about. As he saw nothing that could be suspected of being a vampire, he went to sleep.

At midnight he woke up, and the first thing that struck his eyes was a black object on the roof of the house where there had been a death. This black thing had not been there before he went to sleep, so he suspected that this was the vampire he had been told about. Vampires eat dead people, so he concluded that the dead person was the thing for which the vampire had come there.

Carrying a bolo-knife, he went up to the house. The people were asleep. Up above he saw something hanging down from the roof of the house. It was like the intestine of a chicken. It got longer and longer, until the end of it went into the mouth of the dead person. The corpse stood up from the place where it lay, when this thing went into its mouth.

What the young man did was to walk up to the upright corpse and, with the bolo he was carrying, cut the thing that was like the intestine of a chicken. When he had cut this, something came down with a thud at the side of the house. He went down, and there he saw the dead vampire.

11. SORCERERS.

In some places in the Philippines the people have a firm belief in sorcerers. According to their belief a sorcerer is a person of great power, and this power comes from a demon or else is inherited from one's parents. Before one may gain this power one must first become friends with a demon and serve it. However, there are some also who believe that one may find or snatch up this power in a jungle or some uncanny place that is hard to reach and usually full of terror.

The kulam is that seized, inherited, or given by the demon, and it is the source of the possessor's power. The appearance of the kulam is not always the same. Sometimes it is a stone or a small doll of ugly appearance. In the dark this kulam glows like a firefly, but this glow disappears when the kulam desires it. The kulam and the person, man or woman, who possesses it, do not separate even for a moment, and even when bathing the sorcerer carries his kulam. Therefore, curious people, when they wish to find out whether a person whom they suspect is really a sorcerer or not, watch him at his bath. If the sorcerer is not careful and has no suspicion that he is being watched, the watcher sometimes succeeds in seeing the kulam.

The sorcerer has also the power of concealing the kulam inside his body, and the people are not rare who have seen a sorcerer at his death. At the last moment, before breathing ceases, he spits out the kulam.

This happens only when the sorcerer does not wish to bequeath his kulam. If, however, he wishes to bequeath it, then, long before the sorcerer dies, he calls the person to whom he wishes to bequeath it and in all secrecy gives him the kulam.

The great power of the sorcerer is used by him against his enemies, against people who have incurred his anger; or against their live stock, in case he wishes to make this latter the object of his vengeance. He also uses his power in playing jokes on a person or animal that has gained his liking.

His victim usually acts like crazy. Sometimes the person he has bewitched complains that his whole body is sore, keeps shouting, and cannot keep quiet even for a moment. In the case of animals,--usually the pig most valued by the owner,--the punishment he gives is like the disease of cholera, but more severe than this. The bowel-movement of the animal does not stop, and after a few hours, no matter how fat the animal, it becomes skin and bone. The bewitched person eats mightily, like two men, and keeps asking for tasty food. Therefore people believe that the sorcerer who is punishing him shares in the eating of the sick person.

The sorcerer has the power of entering the body of the person bewitched. This is the belief, but in what way the sorcerer effects his entrance or at what point he enters the body of the person he is bewitching, there is no one who knows. However the place where he comes out is the forefinger. This fact is of great importance for the cure of people who have been bewitched and also for the punishment of sorcerers.

Although the power of the sorcerer is great, yet there are some things which he fears, usually strong people who are bold and have no faith in the powers of sorcerers and other things that terrify other people. Therefore it is not rare that, after the first or second time he cures a person of this disease, some man receives the title of "witch-doctor."

I once heard someone who had seen the cure of a bewitched person tell the story. The narrator had a neighbor who had a young daughter. This young lady had many suitors, and one of them was suspected of being a sorcerer. He had the bad fortune to be one of those who were not accepted. In his great anger he bewitched, one after the other, the betrothed man and woman.

He began with the woman, and her parents at once called in a witch-doctor for her. When the doctor arrived and saw the patient, he said that the woman was really bewitched.

He told the people who were there not to let the bewitched person know that he was in the house. If the patient knew this, the sorcerer who was inside her body would have a chance to go away at once. The doctor went up to the woman without her being aware of it and suddenly seized her two forefingers in a tight grip. She shouted all the louder and trembled like one in terror.

The sorcerer, according to people's belief, feels any pain that is given to the body of the person he is bewitching while he is within the latter's body. Likewise, when one speaks with the patient, it is he who answers.

Therefore the doctor suddenly asked: "What are you doing here, you brute?"

The patient did not utter a word, but tried to get free. The strength she displayed was not the usual strength of a woman.

But the doctor did not let her go, and asked her again: "What are you doing here? Why have you come here? If you do not answer, I shall torture you."

The woman answered in a pitiful tone: "No, sir, I shan't do it again; let me go, sir; you are torturing me already."

"Shall I let you go?" asked the doctor at once. "Promise me first that you won't come back."

"No, I shan't come back, sir," answered the woman.

"If I catch you here again, I shall kill you. Don't be troublesome. Stay still in your house."

"Yes, sir; yes, sir; I shan't come back, sir. Please, let me go!"

While this dialogue was taking place, the woman was struggling to get loose and trying to make the doctor let go of her forefingers. When the woman had made her promise, the doctor let go of her two forefingers. The face of the woman, which just before had been expressing great suffering, now became quiet, and she was like a madwoman who has got back her reason. She became quiet, stopped shouting, and was able to converse intelligently.

The man lived in a near-by town. When he was bewitched his brother called a physician for him. In his extreme anger, this brother called a physician who was fierce and cruel in his treatment of sorcerers.

The physician came secretly to the sick man's house. From his hiding-place he first determined at what time the sorcerer was in the body of the sick man. This showed itself in the shouting, movements, and senseless talking of the patient. The physician sharpened a bolo-knife and, when he had done this, quickly ran to the side of the patient. He then seized the latter's two forefingers, leaned over his body, and cut several deep gashes in his face. The patient screamed and tried to get away, but when he did get away there were wounds in his face and the blood was flowing in a stream. The physician left him without a word. He sought out the brother of the wounded man and told him not to heed his brother's wounds, for tomorrow they would go away and be transferred to the sorcerer, for it was the latter whom he had reached in the body of his brother. On the next day the doctor went to the man whom he had cured with the knife and was much pleased when he found him well and without the marks of wounds in his face. A few days later they heard that a sorcerer in the neighboring town was in a serious condition, owing to the unceasing flow of blood from some wounds in his face.

There are also, however, some sorcerers who are quick and have not been caught by physicians. The physician, too, must be skilful and quick. Anyone at all can cure a person who has been bewitched, since there is no other method of cure than that of inflicting pain on the body of the bewitched person. The danger, however, is great, since, if the one who is attempting the cure is not quick, owing to lack of practice, the sorcerer will be able to get away. In this event it is the bewitched person himself who will suffer from the punishment. It is related that there once happened something like this which follows.

One of two brothers was bewitched by his rival in courtship. There was no witch-doctor within call. In his great pity for him, the older brother decided to cure him, even though he had had no practice. He was not practised, to be sure, but he had often heard from physicians the manner of cure. One evening, when he thought that the sorcerer was inside his brother's body, he quickly seized a bolo, and, stepping up to his brother, cut him without care. On the next day, instead of his finding his brother well and unwounded, the latter was a corpse. The sorcerer had got away.

12. THE GAME OF FOOTBALL IN THE PHILIPPINES.

The games of football in the United States and in the Philippines are very different. Instead of the players belonging to two contending sides, as in American football, in "sipa" the players form but one party. In sipa the aim of the players is not to defeat an opponent, but to prevent the ball or sipa from falling to the ground. The ball used is also very different. It is made of split rattan woven into the shape of a sphere. The inside is hollow and the eyes of the weave are large. Therefore the sipa, unlike the ball used in baseball, is light.

The number of players is from two to twenty. When they are many, they stand in a circle. To begin the game, one of the party throws the sipa ball up into the air and toward one of the players, usually toward one opposite him. The one to whom the ball is tossed returns it to the one who threw it to him, not with his hand, but with his foot.

When the players are skilful, they direct the ball to each one of the party, so that each one of them is alert and ready for the coming of the ball. Each one is careful not to let the ball fall to the ground. Often the players display various manners of sending the ball. The graceful bendings of the legs forward and backward, the quick and light leaps, the gentle and light kicking of the ball, and the sending of the ball in every possible direction, are features which give beauty to the game of sipa. Sometimes the shoulder, the elbow, the knee, or the hand is used in returning the ball.

How is there any contest in this game? This can consist only in the test of endurance in keeping the ball from falling to the ground.

When, for instance, one team of football-players or siperos wants to contend with another team, the former challenges whatever team it has picked out. If the challenge is accepted, the day, hour, and place of the game are at once announced in the newspapers.

At the time of the game thousands of people look on. The challenging party usually hires a band of musicians, and each team is played for during its innings. Usually there are two bands, for, if the challenged party has any pride, it wants to show it and so brings its own band.

After the game the judge announces to the spectators which team has won. When the announcement of the judge has been heard, there begins at once the yelling and the honoring of the victorious team. The winning team and their friends and followers, accompanied by the music of their band, at once begin to parade through the places near to the field of the game. On the next day the whole story appears in the newspapers.

Such games of sipa as these are not common in the little towns in the provinces, but only in the large cities, such as Manila.

13. THE PRIEST PATUPAT.

In the last years of the Spanish time there dwelt in the town of San Miguel a certain man. This man was educated and was intelligent enough to understand the evil ways of the priests, who were really little kings in their towns.

In San Miguel the priest who had the parish was a violent and hot-headed man. The people called him "Patupat."

One Sunday the man above mentioned went to church to hear the sermon of the priest. As this priest thought that the people to whom he was preaching were uneducated people, he took no pains to speak Tagalog correctly. His speech had neither beginning nor end and was mixed up like rice-pudding. Moreover, what he preached about was never other than Hell, Purgatory, what brutes the people of the town were, and the End of the World.

When the sermon began, our friend Francisco entered the church.

As usual, the priest began his sermon with this utterance: "Brezren and faylow-Christiannes!" Although he had been for almost forty years now in the Tagalog country, he had not yet learned to say correctly "Brethren and fellow-Christians."

Francisco stood in a place near the pulpit and listened carefully to the sermon, which on that day contained nothing except what had already been a thousand times repeated by the priest, namely about the sufferings in Hell and Purgatory, the offering of candles and the giving of money to the church in order to escape from these sufferings.

Francisco was filled with great anger, for he saw that the priest was fooling his people and had no other aim than to frighten the townspeople so that they should enrich the church and priests.

After the sermon Kiko did not go home as usual, but waited until mass was over. After mass he staid in the church until he was alone. He took some pieces of paper and wrote to the priest as follows:

"Father, I heard your sermon this morning. It is apparent to me that you believe that there is a Hell and that there is a Purgatory. I do not believe in these things. Next Sunday, if you wish, you may prove to the people in your sermon that there is a Hell and a Purgatory. When you are done, I shall try to prove to them that there is no Hell and no Purgatory. If the people believe you, I do not mind if you have me hanged for my defeat and my unbelief, but, if I am the victor, all I ask of you is to allow me to say to the people at large that there is neither a Hell nor a Purgatory."

Several copies of this letter he pasted to the walls of the church, and one he sent to the priest.

When Patupat read it, his blood boiled and his anger knew no bounds. He had the gendarmes called, and on the evening of that very Sunday he had all the houses in the town entered and searched, so as to catch Kiko. But they did not catch Kiko. That same afternoon Kiko told some of his intimate friends what he had done, and they were all astonished. They asked him why he had done this thing and whether he could not see what would happen to him.

Kiko refused to follow his advice, because he thought that Patupat would accept his challenge about showing the people that there was neither a Hell nor a Purgatory and that these things were merely a device of the priests for getting money. Therefore he allowed himself to be overtaken by night in the house of a friend of his.

One of them spoke thus: "Pack up some clothes and go away right now, if you don't want to be caught by Patupat's soldiers and shot tomorrow."

Not until it was dark and the town was upset with the searchings of the gendarmes did he recognize the great danger which he was incurring. Since he had heard of this at once, he had time to hide in a secret corner of his friend's house.

When the house-searchings were over, he went out from his hiding place, went home, wrapped up some clothes, had a wagon hitched up, and, taking some rifle-bullets, shouldered his gun, got into the wagon, and had himself driven out of town. After a few days he went to the mountains together with several townsmen who could not stay in the town because they had incurred the anger of the priest or of some other Spanish official of the town.

There, in his stay in the mountains, he was overtaken by the revolution against the Spaniards in the year 1886.

14. MARIANO AND THE PRIEST PATUPAT.

Mariano was one of the very few apothecaries in the town of San Miguel. He was one of the people who fell into misfortune through disobeying the orders of the priest Patupat. He had a family; beside his wife he had two children, one two years old and one new-born.

One day his servant fell sick. He had a brother-in-law who was a doctor, so he had him treat the servant without charge, and he gave the servant medicine without charge. After some days the servant got well and decided to rest for a while in the country. Accordingly he paid his debt and took his leave of Mariano for a stay in the country. His stay in the country did not last long, before he fell sick anew, and the end was his death.

In the Philippines in those days it was not allowable to bury a dead person without first having him blessed by a priest. The priests did not allow this, but they did not much mind the living together of a man and woman not married, for the reason that they did this themselves.

The deceased servant of Mariano was very poor and his relatives also were poor and had not the means to pay the price demanded by Patupat. Thus there was no one to see to the burial of the servant's body.

When Patupat learned this, he had Mariano called and said that it was his place to have the dead man buried and to pay the costs. In Mariano's opinion Patupat's insolence was getting beyond bounds. Therefore he said that he would not pay him for the burying of the dead man, no matter what happened.

Patupat boiled with rage. He had the dead man buried and on the same day went to court and sued Mariano for the cost of blessing the dead man.

When the session of the court came, Mariano was present, and when the judge asked what he had to say to this accusation, he spoke as follows:

"Your Honor, this man who died was no longer in my care, for he was no longer my servant when he died. When he was still sick, I had him treated without charge and gave him medicine without charge. I have done my duty to my fellow-man and the duty placed upon me by the Lord. One of the duties of the priests is to provide burial for the dead. Now this man is dead, why cannot this priest do his duty without receiving pay, since even this would not happen, if the relatives of the deceased had means?"

After asking some further questions of the priest and of Mariano, the judge closed the hearing and announced that Mariano was in the right and that the priest would have to put up with having blessed the dead man without payment.

When this had happened Patupat's wrath against Mariano greatly increased, and after a few days he again entered a charge against Mariano. This time he made a different accusation. He complained to the court that Mariano was a Mason, because he did not come to church, did not confess, and did not kiss the priest's hand. The Masons are enemies of the Catholic Church and, in consequence, were enemies also of the government in the Philippines in those days; and therefore he suggested that Mariano be deported.

When Mariano heard of this accusation of Patupat, he decided that his only hope was to hide or to escape from those who were to arrest him. Accordingly what he did was to go down to Manila, and there he hid.

But even there he was caught by the gendarmes. Together with seven or eight men from various towns he was put into a steamboat and they were taken to the southern part of the Philippine Islands. And when they arrived there some of their number were shot by the soldiers who accompanied them, for this was ordered by the officials who sent these men into banishment.

However, Mariano was not one of those who were shot. He staid there until, after the victory of the Americans, he was given the liberty of returning to his family. When he came back to the latter, his one child was seven years old and the second, five.

15. THE STORY OF THE CHINESE CARPENTER.

Juan was a carpenter who had for neighbor a Chinaman who also was a carpenter. This Chinaman was a skilled carpenter and his cleverness showed itself in his skilful use of the plane. One day he bought a piece of wood forty feet in length. This he proceeded to smoothe. He tried to see if he could obtain shavings without a break for the whole length of the wood. What with the excellence of his tools and his skill at carpentry, this feat went off as if there was nothing to it. Every time he pushed his plane he obtained a shaving without a break, forty feet in length. In order to show this his skill to his neighbor, the Tagalog carpenter, he sent him one shaving every day.

The Tagalog carpenter, Juan, marvelled at the skill of the Chinaman. In order to make return for the shavings he had received, he too tried to use the plane and to send the shavings to the Chinaman. However, the longest shavings he succeeded in getting were only fifteen feet. These it would have been humiliating to send to the Chinaman.

Juan was skilled in the use of the daras, and he was able to smoothe boards by the use of the daras alone. Any piece of wood which he had chopped smooth with the daras did not require the use of the plane; but the pieces he chopped off were only short splinters, not suited to show his skill, and he could not send them to the Chinaman.

While Juan did not know what to do, the Chinaman did not stop sending long shavings. Juan was filled with anger. He took his daras and went over to the Chinaman's. The latter was surprised and frightened when he saw Juan.

The latter said: "What do you mean to say by sending me those shavings? You are offensive to me and you shall pay for it. I am going to cut your hair with this daras."

The Chinaman was frightened, for he knew that if that daras struck his head, he would surely not survive. He tried to escape, but Juan seized him, tied him to a bench, and began to use the daras on the Chinaman's head.

The daras is a large tool, the size of a pick, and heavy, but in Juan's skilful hand it was like a mere pair of scissors. The descent of the daras on the Chinaman's head was very gentle, and only the hair was cut by the edge.

The Chinaman in his fright shouted and said: "Wapelo! Come helpee me, Juan bad man, not Chlistian!"

This was heard by the neighbors and passers-by.

Accordingly they came into the Chinaman's workshop, but there Juan said to them: "Don't you mix in here! I am not hurting this Chinaman. I am just cutting his hair."

And he kept on with his chopping.

When the Chinaman's hair was completely cut, the onlookers were greatly astonished, for the Chinaman's hair was as if cut by the shears of a skilful barber. The Chinaman too, when he saw in the looking-glass that his head was unhurt, was greatly astonished and did not stop praising Juan's skill in the use of the daras.

16. A MAN WHO HAD THE POWER OF A DEER.

In a certain town in the Philippine Islands there once became celebrated the name of a certain man, both among his fellow-townsmen and the people of the neighboring towns, on account of his unusual strength in running and jumping.

He was not a proud man, but he had some astuteness in money matters and also some courage. He did not let his rare good fortune make him proud, nor did he lie about the source of his unusual strength. He told those who were curious that the source of his strength was the power of the deer which he had made his own.

He did not tell how this power had come into his possession, but he was not stingy about doing favors by helping with his strength both friends and strangers.

Like most people, he wanted to get rich, and it was toward this end that he used his strength. He often entered into races, and these races were always means of winning much money. He always made large bets. He refused no one that wanted to race with him. Sometimes he ran races with people, sometimes with horses, with dogs, and with other animals that are fast at running.

After a few days the money he had won in bets made up a large sum. His friends also, who had bet on him, got much money. When people came to know that he had the power of a deer, they did not want to run against him. Therefore, so as not to stop winning and making money, he gave large handicaps to his opponents. The handicaps which he gave were so great that many people contended with him. Still he always came out the winner. In jumping-matches also he was always victorious.

However, though the advantages which he gained through this power were great, yet there were also some disadvantages which he obtained through it. On account of these disadvantages he did not manage to keep this power as his own through all his life. Through this power he had become very nervous. The sounds of falling bodies, noises, and the barking of dogs at night, did not allow him to sleep. These noises often made him start up with a jump from his sleep. Especially when the barking of a dog, for instance, woke him up, he jumped high up from his bed, and before he recovered his wits he was running at full speed. He could exercise no care about his involuntary jumping up and usually went way up to the ceiling, and, since this was low, his body got full of bruises and his head full of bumps from striking against the ceiling. Likewise in his unintentional running whenever he woke up with a start, his whole body got knocked again and again against the walls of his house.

This was hard to bear, and he thought that he should not live long, what with not sleeping of nights. Therefore he decided to get rid of this power in a few days. When the seventh day of his possession of the power came, he was very sore and thought he should die of soreness. His head was covered with bumps. His face was full of black and blue marks, and though he had broken no bones, his muscles were badly bruised.

Therefore, without saying a word, he went to a forest and there abandoned the power which he had got hold of, seeing that he had already won much money.

17. THE PET MONKEY.

Andr�s had a pet monkey which he prized very highly, because this monkey gave him much service. At night the monkey spread out his sleeping-mat for him; in the morning it handed him his water for washing, and whatever order he gave was obeyed by the monkey.

Every night this monkey slept underneath the bedstead on which its master slept. This was not pleasing to the latter, for owing to its great value, Andr�s wanted to give it a good place to sleep in. However, no matter what efforts Andr�s made to force it, his pet monkey could not be brought to sleep in any other place.

Andr�s was a man who feared and loved God. Therefore, every night, before he went to sleep, he made the Sign of the Cross and called upon God. At his bed-time every night he found that his monkey was already under his bedstead. Not once did he get ahead of the monkey in going to bed.

One day the priest of the town visited Andr�s in his house. After some time had elapsed in conversation, Andr�s told the priest that he had a pet monkey which was very useful, because it served him well and obeyed his every command, and he also said that this monkey was more diligent than his other servants.

The priest was much surprised and asked that the monkey be shown to him. So Andr�s called the monkey. Usually the monkey came at once at a single call by Andr�s, but on this occasion it did not appear even when he had called ten times. Andr�s got angry, arose, and looked for the monkey in the nooks and corners of the house.

He found it in a corner, clinging tightly to a post. He called it and tried to get it out of the corner, but the monkey would not come away, no matter what Andr�s did to it. Therefore he called the priest to look at his pet monkey there in the corner.

At the approach of the priest the monkey trembled with fear. The priest conceived the suspicion that this monkey was an evil spirit. So he made the Sign of the Cross, and blessing a little water, sprinkled it over the monkey.

When the water struck the latter's body, there was a report like that of a gun, and in the place of the monkey they saw only some smoke, which soon disappeared.

Thereupon the priest questioned Andr�s concerning his faith in God. Andr�s said that his firm faith had not changed and that he prayed every night before going to sleep. The priest then asked where the monkey used to sleep. Andr�s answered that it slept every night under his bedstead.

Thereupon the priest informed him that this monkey was an evil spirit which had been lying in wait for him, and that if he had ever failed to call upon God before he went to sleep, on that very night the evil spirit would have thrown him into Hell.

18. THE OLD MAN OF THE ANT-HILL BY LIGHT OF DAY.

Pedro was a brave man. He had often heard stories about vampires, dwarves, sorcerers, and old men of the ant-hill, but what made Pedro wonder was why he had never chanced to meet even a single one of these creatures. He wanted to get a sight of at least one of them, so that he might know whether it was true that they had powers not common to most persons.

One night he walked about in a dark and haunted place, because he had heard that many people had there seen an old man of the ant-hill.

The cigar of such an old man is of terrifying size, and when he draws at it, the light given forth is like the light of a bonfire.

On this night he had gone some distance on his ramble, when he saw a flare of light. His hair stood on end and he thought of going back, but he overcame his fear and continued on his walk.

He was met by the smoker. When he approached, Pedro examined the old man's figure, but as he did not succeed in gratifying his curiosity, he was taken with the desire of seeing the old man by daylight. To bring this about, he would have to hold the old man fast, for these spirits return to their abode in Hell or some other place of the kind as soon as morning comes.

Therefore what he did was suddenly to seize hold of the old man. The latter began to wrestle with him. Sometimes Pedro was below, sometimes he was on top, but he did not let go of the old man. He held him as tightly as possible and made up his mind that he would follow no matter where the old man bore him, should the latter prove stronger than he.

They wrestled till three o'clock. By this time Pedro was as tired as can be and ready to sink to the ground, but he did not let go of his fellow-wrestler. When four o'clock came his opponent ceased to move. When another half hour had passed, the rays of the sun began to fall upon them, but it was not yet light enough for Pedro to make out what sort of thing it was he had hold of. When five o'clock came, he was greatly surprised to see that he was embracing a post which was not much higher than he. It was, however, firmly fixed in the ground and completely charred.

19. JUAN'S GOBLIN.

One night Juan while rambling about, crossed a river. While he was still on the bank and just walking on the sandy beach, he felt some sand being showered on his back. He thought he would watch for the person who was throwing sand on him and catch him, so, while walking, he kept turning suddenly right about at short intervals, but he saw nothing.

This frightened him a little, and he began to wonder if he was not perhaps dealing with some old man of the ant-hill or some goblin. Therefore he hastened his running, but the faster he went, the more frequent grew the striking of sand on his back. His fear increased and he returned home running with all his might.

When he got there he was out of breath and unable to speak. It was only when he had rested a while that he was able to answer the many questions of his father and the other members of the household. He told his father that he had been pursued by dwarves on his walk and showered with sand.

His father asked him where the scene of this was, and he said on the bank of the river. His father burst into peals of laughter and said that these were no dwarves, but only his own feet, which sent the sand up on his back at every stride he made.

But Juan refused to believe this, and for several days he did not leave the house. His father therefore wanted to show him the truth of what he had said, so one night he told Juan to go for a walk to that same place, and he would accompany him.

Juan consented and they both went to the river-bank. When they got there, Juan's father dropped behind. When Juan walked on the sandy beach and felt the sprinkling of sand on his back, he was again filled with terror and shouted to his father that they were already starting to throw sand on his back.

He made Juan come back and walk on again. This time he followed at his back. Accordingly Juan's father saw that every time Juan took a step, the sandals he was wearing carried along some sand, and when he raised his foot the sand thus carried along was sprinkled on his back.

His father now had him take off the sandals he was wearing and made him walk on again. This time, no matter how much ground Juan walked over, he felt no scattering of sand on his back.

From this time on he had no more fear of old men, dwarves, vampires, and other spooks.

20. JUAN THE SUITOR.

Young Maria was famed for beauty in her district. She had no suitors, however, except only Juan. But Maria's father had a great dislike for Juan. Juan could converse with the girl he was courting only in secret, for when Maria's father knew of it, he would punish them both with his stick.

Sometimes, when the father's anger was great, he used a club on Juan, so that he was in danger of getting his bones broken whenever they were caught talking together.

One dark night Maria's father had gone out. When Juan found this out, he went to Maria's to talk with her. They forgot themselves in their conversation, and so were surprised by Maria's father on his return.

He was at once filled with anger and in a loud voice addressed Juan: "What do you want, you brute? I've told you not to set foot in my house here. What do you mean by coming here?"

And when he had said this he seized a bamboo cane and made ready to give Juan a caning. In his terror the latter jumped out of the window, but he was followed by the father. So he took to running with all his might.

The night was dark as coal and he could not make out which way to go, but he kept running nevertheless. He fell on his face again and again as he ran, but he got up quickly and kept on running.

It was not long before he came upon a large black object. He recognized it as a carabao, so he leaped quickly on its back and made it run.

Riding on a carabao is not very difficult, owing to the breadth of its back and the slowness of its pace. Therefore, even though he had no reins, Juan was not afraid to ride. Owing to the darkness of the night it happened that in his mounting he faced the tail-end of the carabao and not the head.

He urged on the carabao. Now it happened that this carabao was owned by Maria's father. It was not long before Juan saw a lighted house in the direction toward which the carabao was going. He confidently expected that this house was his neighbor's. Therefore he got down from the carabao and went up into the house on the run.

Great was his surprise and terror when, upon entering, he was met by Maria's father and beaten all over his body and addressed: "What have you come back for? Haven't I got rid of you yet, you shameless rascal?"

When Juan came to himself he jumped from the porch and ran toward home, but this time he did not ride on anything.

21. MARIA THE MISER.

When Maria was still alive, she lived in her pleasant house in the middle of wide grounds with beautiful gardens and trees. As she was very rich, her life was one constant pleasure.

She had not reached the age of forty years, when she died. All her wealth she divided between her sister and the church. She did not remember the poor acquaintances and those of her neighbors who were poor.

The sister who was left had a series of masses said during the seven days after death, so that Maria's soul might be admitted by Saint Peter at the gates of heaven.

When her sister Maria was still alive, she was known far and wide for her avarice. She herself rarely had masses said or made offerings of candles. When beggars asking for alms called on her, she had them driven away and gave them no alms. Often also she had them chased with dogs. She forced her peons to work without pay, and when she gave them rations it was without meat or vegetables,--only boiled rice with salt. To propitiate her, her peons, whenever they went home, brought chickens, eggs, young pigs, and vegetables or fruits to give to Maria. They did not make these presents for love of Maria, but as a kind of bribe, so that they might not be too harshly treated during their stay in her house. But when Maria went to the country to her workmen, she appropriated without saying a word and without paying for it, everything she saw in their house that took her fancy. When, for instance, she saw at her workmen's a new basket, tray, sieve, sack, mat, pot, cup, dipper, brazier, or other household utensil, she took it and carried it off to her house. When she could not make use of the things she had taken, she sold them. She acted in the same way about animals that belonged to her servants. In this way she had quickly grown rich.

When she had been dead about three days, her sister was at her house, spending the period of mourning. One evening, when she was walking in the garden she came to the side of a well that was in the yard. She was surprised, for from the depth of the well she heard someone calling her name. She turned her head toward the well and there she again clearly heard the calling, although she could see nobody whatever.

The voice said: "My sister, I am Maria. I am paying now for my life of avarice, selfishness and cruelty. I am here in the Lord's place of punishment for all sinners. If it may be, do not follow my example, but seek some means to save me from the boiling oil here which is now my place of dwelling."

Her sister was much grieved then and went at once to the priest to ask to what means she could resort to rescue her sister from Hell. The priest advised her to go to a certain town where there was a wonder-working image of Saint Peter. This image of Saint Peter talked with people and advised various means of getting into Heaven. This was its miracle.

Maria's sister went immediately to the town where stood the miraculous Saint Peter. When she got there and talked with Saint Peter, she told him the whole story. She said that her sister had told her that her avarice, selfishness, and cruelty had caused her to be thrown into Hell.

"In that case," said Saint Peter, "find you but one single person, animal, or plant that was the object of an act of kindness on the part of your sister. When you have managed to find it, come back to me, and I shall give you a means to rescue your sister from damnation."

Maria's sister went home to their town at once and there she inquired of all the townspeople which of them owed any debt of gratitude to her sister, or which of them had been well treated or kindly spoken to by her. But not one of them was able to answer. The animals also of the neighbors and on Maria's own grounds were interrogated by her, but here she found none that had been done a kindness by her sister.

One dog, a creature of skin and bones, said to her: "One afternoon I was very hungry. I found a bone in her yard. I seized it and was carrying it off, when she saw me. She had me chased at once, and when I dropped the bone she had it buried in the ground. Was that an act of kindness?"

The grief of Maria's sister became much greater, and her hope of rescuing her sister from damnation was gradually failing. She began to question the plants in her sister's yard. She took one by one all the gourds, pumpkins, cucumbers, chile peppers, melons, sincamas, peanuts, egg-plants, cow-peas, and onions and garlic, and other vegetables. She did not find among them that which she sought. She also went through the trees. She made inquiry, one after the other, of the chico, anona, custard-apple, mabolo, grape-fruit, orange, lime, and casoy trees. But here too her labor gave no result; only the group of the garden-plants she had not yet questioned, and if here she did not find what she sought, there would be nothing for her to do about the punishment her sister was undergoing. She went to them all, but there were not any who could say that they had received any kindness from Maria.

At the very last the sister went to the side of the well, and there she questioned all the blades of grass. When night came there was only one head of grass which she had not yet questioned. Full of fear and hope she approached it.

She asked the head of grass which grew by the side of the well: "When my sister was alive, did she ever do you an act of kindness?"

"Oh, your sister?" answered the grass, "Yes, it was she who gave me new life. Last summer my blades were all withered and I was near to dying, but your sister bathed one evening by the side of this well. As she bathed, some water was sprinkled on me, so that I grew again and my withered blades became fresh once more."

Maria's sister could not contain the joy which arose in her, and that very night she returned to Saint Peter. Saint Peter gave her a rosary and told her to go home and to hang this rosary down into the well. She was to call Maria and let her take hold of the rosary; by this means her sister could be rescued from damnation.

She went home at once, and hardly was the sun shining, when she came to the yard of the deceased Maria. She approached the well, let down the rosary, and called her sister. Maria emerged from under the water and took hold of the rosary. Her sister began to pull at the rosary and she was slowly lifted up.

As she was thus being rescued, some other souls too wanted to escape from Hell. So they all took hold of Maria's feet, when they saw that she was being rescued from damnation. But when only Maria's feet were still under water, she shook her two feet, so that the souls who had hold of her should have to let go.

When she did this the rosary broke and she at once fell into the well, and from that time on her sister was never again able to communicate with her.

The sister went back to Saint Peter and told him what had happened, but Saint Peter said that there was no longer anything that they could do to save her sister from Hell.

22. THREE SOULS WHO CALLED UPON SAINT PETER.

Juan was a gay bachelor. But when he reached the age of twenty-two he fell very sick and it was not long before he died. His soul went to Heaven and knocked at its gate.

Saint Peter answered his knock and asked: "Who are you? What brings you here?"

Juan's soul answered: "I am Juan's soul. Open the door, for I want to come in."

The door-keeper opened the gate, but before he allowed Juan's soul to enter, he questioned him as follows: "Why have you come here? What acts of piety have you performed on earth that you think you are entitled to the joys of Heaven? Have you left a wife behind you?"

Juan's soul said: "When I was still on earth I often went to church, prayed, and gave alms, but I did not have the good fortune to get married."

The door-keeper answered: "You are not fit to partake of the joys of Heaven."

And when he had said this he closed the door. Juan's soul was not able to enter Heaven.

When Juan had gone away, another soul arrived.

"Who are you? And why do you wish to come into Heaven? Did you get married when you were still on earth?" asked the door-keeper.

The soul answered: "I am the soul of Andr�s. I took a wife when I was yet on earth. Open the gate for I want to come in."

At once Saint Peter opened the gate of Heaven, and when he saw the soul of Andr�s he said: "Oh, pitiable soul! For such as you the joys of Heaven are reserved and fitting. Enter!"

The soul of Andr�s was overjoyed and entered the abode of bliss.

When the door was closed there was another knock.

"Who are you?" the keeper asked again.

"I am the soul of Mariano," answered the one who had knocked.

"Why have you come here? Why do you think that you deserve to partake of Heaven? Did you get married when you were still on earth?"

To these questions the soul of Mariano answered: "When I was still on earth I often had masses said. Half of my wealth I gave to the Church for the saying of masses and the ringing of bells. The candles I offered up could not be drawn by three carabao, and as to getting married," continued the soul, "I was married twice. I became a widower and married again."

"I am very sorry that I am not able to let you in. There is no place for madmen like you in the Kingdom of Heaven."

And he closed the door.

23. JUAN THE CANOER.

One day a Spaniard was having Juan ferry him across the river in his canoe. The Spaniard, Juan's fare, was able to speak Tagalog. Accordingly, while they were still far from shore, he began a conversation with Juan.

This Spaniard was a learned man, no doubt a famous scholar in Spain, and this showed itself in his discourse to Juan regarding geography, arithmetic, and various languages of Europe.

When his discourse was ended, he asked Juan: "Have you studied geography?"

"No, sir," answered Juan,--and in truth, Juan had no education, for he had grown up in poverty, so that his life at all times was nothing but ceaseless work.

The Spaniard was astonished at Juan's answer and said at once: "I am sorry, friend, that you do not know geography, for in consequence half your life, as it were, is lost."

Juan did not utter a word, and kept on paddling.

It was not long before the Spaniard again asked: "Have you studied arithmetic?"

"No, sir," answered Juan.

"If that is the case, friend, a fourth of your life is lost to you, as it were."

Juan became a little frightened, for he could not make out what the Spaniard was trying to say.

He said to himself: "You poor fellow, Juan, only a fourth of your life is left now."

When their canoe had got to a deep part of the river, and while the Spaniard was reflecting upon the great ignorance of the working people in the Philippines, Juan asked his passenger this question: "Do you know how to swim, sir?"

"No," answered the Spaniard at once.

"In that case," answered Juan, "you have lost your whole life, not only as it were, but you have lost it in all truth."

And while he spoke these words he tipped over the canoe they were riding in. Juan swam to the shore, but the Spaniard was carried away by the stream.

24. KINDNESS TO ANIMALS.

One dark night Juan was walking in some forests far from any towns. He was on his way to his home town. Before he could arrive there, he had to pass through some uncanny places. One night, when he was walking in such a place, he was suddenly startled by the arrival of a black cat which purred and scratched at his leg. What he did was to kick the cat with all his might, and it was tossed a good distance. He kept on walking, but it was not long before the cat came back to him. His anger greatly increased, and he kicked the cat again. He thought that this cat was the plaything of some goblin or vampire. He kept on walking. It was not long before the black cat again came back to him. This time, instead of kicking the cat, he took hold of it, lifted it up on his arm, stroked it and patted it, and said to it: "Good little cat, what do you want? Are you going to come along with me on my journey?" and he continued walking.

After a while he was attacked by sleepiness. He saw a house by the way, but the people in his town believed that this house was enchanted. However, Juan had no other place to sleep, so he entered the house to sleep there.

He fell sound asleep, but at midnight he was awakened by the pattering of rats. He set about kicking and striking at the rats to kill them or drive them away. But the rats became more and more numerous until the room became full and they bit him and gnawed at him.

It was then that Juan took his black cat and told it to kill the rats. The cat miewed and began to chase the rats. Great fear seized the rats, and those that were not killed by the cat ran to their holes. When Juan saw that there were no rats left except only a single pair, he stopped the cat. He caught the two rats and petted them and decided to take them along on his journey, just like the cat.

On the next day he continued his journey. He was overtaken by night in a place where there were no houses, so he walked on toward a house owned by a certain old man. Now it happened that this old man was an enchanter. He took Juan in and gave him an alcove to sleep in. Juan went to sleep without suspecting anything.

However, when he woke up on the next day, he was surprised and frightened when he saw that he was locked up in a box without any opening. He kicked at the walls of the box, but was not able to do anything: he could not open it. Great was his despair, and he did not know what to do, when he remembered that he had a cat and two rats with him in his prison. He took the two rats, petted them, and told them to make a hole in the box in which they were confined. The rats began to gnaw at the boards, and gradually they succeeded in making a hole in the thick board, until it was pierced through. When they had pierced it, they returned to Juan, and Juan had them again pierce the wall of the prison. When they had made holes again and again, they finally succeeded in making a large opening, and Juan was able to escape.

Juan looked for the old man, but did not find him anywhere. So he continued on his way home, and when he arrived there, he told of the great service which had been done him by his three friends, a cat and two rats.

25. JUAN THE SCULPTOR.

I once read, in a Spanish novel entitled La tumba de hierro, the following story:

Juan was a child of five years, the son of a workman of the wealthy Andr�s. Juan was dumb from birth, but not deaf. Moreover, his dumbness was not complete, for often he was able to cry out, though his voice was not like that of a normal child.

One evening Andr�s visited the house of his workman, Juan's father, and on this visit he brought along his daughter, who also was five years old. In spite of his dumbness, Juan made friends with his master's child, and the two played together while their fathers were discussing matters of farming. He showed Maria (this was the name of his playmate) his toys, which he had made by his own hand and skill.

His toys were all kinds of faces of people which he had made, and they were made of clay. There were also many whole figures of people in all kinds of positions. Some were planting, some were dancing, some were lying down, and there were also some wrestling, running, and in many other positions. He also had animals; some were made of clay and others were made of wood.

The two children became good friends and were engrossed in play. When their fathers had finished their conversation, Andr�s called Maria to go home, but Maria first asked her father to come to where Juan's toys were, so that he might see them. When Andr�s beheld the toys, he was astonished at the great ability shown by the one who had shaped these manikins. Andr�s told Juan's father that Juan was gifted and ought to be sent to school. But Juan's father answered that he had no money with which to let Juan study.

"In that case," said Andr�s, "I will pay the teacher. Tomorrow Maria's teacher is coming to our house. I shall have him go on here to you, to begin the teaching of Juan and the opening up of his mind."

Juan's father thanked him profusely, and they parted. Juan was very sorry when his playmate left.

From that day on Maria's father often sent for Juan that he might play with Maria there in his house.

One afternoon when the two were playing in the garden in the wide grounds of Andr�s, a butterfly came flying past the two children. They ran after it. Maria ran ahead and Juan followed. As they were running, Maria fell into a shallow pool which Andr�s used as a fishpond. Juan gave a loud cry, and, as he cried out, a muscle in his throat broke and his mouth bled. He paid no attention to this and jumped into the pool to save Maria from drowning. As the pool was shallow, the two children did not drown, only Maria was filled with great fear, which caused her to faint while still in the water. So what Juan did was to take hold of Maria by her back and lift her up, so that she should not swallow any water,--he himself meanwhile being immersed. They were in this position when a servant of Andr�s came upon them and rescued them from the pool.

Great was the surprise of Andr�s and great was the joy which came to Juan's father, when they heard Juan talk and tell them what had happened. What with Juan's talking, his progress in his studies became much greater and his friendship with Maria grew much stronger.

There came the day when his teacher said that he ought to go to another town to continue his studies, for he could teach him nothing more. He told this also to Andr�s. Andr�s sent Juan to a school for sculptors, and there he studied for about six years.

Juan and Maria grew up and their friendship turned into love. Every vacation Juan went home to their house on Andr�s' estate, and there he passed the days at Maria's side.

There came a day for the exhibition of the sculptures of the artists, and Juan had planned a design which he was going to carry out for that day. The victor among the contestants was to be given a prize that was to be accompanied by much money, in addition to a celebration in honor of the winner. For about a year Juan worked at his composition.

The day for presenting the statues arrived. Juan, his father, Andr�s, and Maria went to the building where the statues were. Many people were there, but they were all crowding round Juan's statue. Andr�s did not know what to say in his admiration. The hour came when the judges announced who was the winner, and Juan's statue was that named as having won the prize.

It was a group with a standing woman. Her left hand held a torch and her right a crown of leaves. At the right of the woman and under the crown of olive a youth was kneeling on his right foot. In his left hand he was holding a book, and in his right a hammer. At their feet lay scattered various implements of a student.

On the way home the two lovers revealed their secret to their parents. Juan's father was merely grieved, for he knew that the marriage of the two was not possible, for their position was like that of a slave or thrall and a lord or king. When Andr�s learned of the matter, he was filled with great anger. He had Juan called to him and scolded him. He told him he was shameless and did not know how to appreciate favors,--did not know how to repay the man who had given him his education, and told him that he could not marry Maria. Accordingly Juan at once went away without anyone's knowing his destination.

Five or six years passed, and Juan at his sculpture did not forget Maria.

Maria passed these six years in her house. She was sunk at all times in a deep grief, and it was always Juan of whom she was thinking. Maria fell seriously ill and was near to death.

Her physician advised Andr�s that, if he wanted to save his daughter, he would have to follow her desire regarding marriage to Juan. But when Andr�s consented, it was already too late. Maria's sickness went from bad to worse, and he did not even know where Juan was. He sent many messengers to the large towns to look for Juan, but even when many days had passed, not one of them had succeeded in finding Juan.

At last one of them came upon him in the town of Kamalig in his workshop. When he was told that he was being sent for by Andr�s that he and Maria might be married, his joy was very great. But he was also much afraid that he might not find his loved one alive. He went home with all possible speed, and when he arrived at the house of Andr�s, he found there the body of Maria, mere bone and skin, stretched out on her couch. That very moment Andr�s sent for a priest, and Juan and Maria were married. While the marriage-ceremony was being performed by the priest, Maria's breath ceased. When they were married, Juan had but time to kiss his wife before her breath left her, her face glad and her mouth smiling.

26. MARQUITA.

Marquita was a good and beautiful young woman, but poor. She was betrothed to a man who also was poor, but had a position with the Government in Manila and received good pay.

Marquita had a rich neighbor. His house was of wood, with an iron roof, and his estate was large. This neighbor had a great liking for Marquita, but we cannot say whether his love was true, for he had a screw loose. He paid every attention to Marquita, but Marquita was not a girl of fickle heart and paid no heed to all his attentions.

So great was the desire of this suitor to win Marquita that he decided to employ force. One afternoon he went into the yard of Marquita's family and hid in a banana-tree. It happened that on this afternoon Marquita's yard was dirty. Accordingly she went and swept the yard. When she came near the banana-tree in which the man was hiding, he suddenly dropped down, seized her by the hand and kissed her.

As you know, among reputable people in our country a single kiss is a great stain on a girl's honor. Therefore, when Marquita came into the house weeping and her parents found out that she had been roughly handled or kissed by this man, they decided that there was no other way of covering up this disgrace than marrying their daughter Marquita to this man. No matter how much Marquita objected, and although they knew that she had a sweetheart, they nevertheless prepared for the marriage.

Marquita was a daughter very obedient to her parents, so she could not actually disobey them now. All she did was to write her betrothed what had happened and what was going to happen and to tell him that her coming marriage was only an act of obedience to her parents, and that she loved only him. To her parents Marquita said that they would get no joy from her, for her marriage to the man whom she abhorred would soon be the death of her.

They were married. It was not long before Marquita was stricken with fever. From the day of her marriage she was not able to eat anything, and she shed tears day and night. The skilful physicians of the town, all the wealth of her husband, and all the prayers of her parents, failed to save her from death. Seven days after her wedding she died. This caused much grief to her former betrothed and contributed to his misfortune in his later life.

27. THE IGNORANT PRIEST.

To the town of Baliwag there was once assigned a priest who had no education whatever. The people surmised that he was only a grass-cutter in Spain, who had been cast hither by chance and assigned as priest to their town so that he might have some income and so be saved from dying of hunger. Every Sunday he said mass, but those who heard the mass could hear nothing from him, except only the word "Mass, mass, mass," and so on. He would walk round in front of the altar; at times he faced the people, brought his hands together, and, while making all these movements, he would keep saying his "Mass, mass, mass," and so on.

The people got angry and reported him to the archbishop. The answer of the archbishop was that he would come some Sunday and hear the mass to see if their accusation was really true.

The archbishop arrived. The priest told him that he was not able to perform mass, because the silly people all left the church as soon as he began mass.

"Tomorrow," he added, "you will see how they all run away as soon as I give the blessing."

The next day was Sunday and at his mass the archbishop was to be present. He planned a way of saving himself. Accordingly, before beginning the mass, he caused some oil to boil. While he was putting on his vestments the people and the archbishop were seated in the church. The archbishop was near the altar, and, while the priest was putting on his vestments, the oil was boiling. When he had put on his vestments, he poured the boiling oil into the vessel for holy water. It was his custom to give the blessing before saying mass, so, when he entered the church, he sprinkled the boiling oil on the people instead of holy-water. The people, struck by the drops of hot oil, all jumped up and ran with all their might out of the church. When the archbishop saw this, he did not have the mass gone on with on that day, for there was not a single one of the people left in the church.

The archbishop said to the priest that he would not have to leave the town and that hereafter he would not heed any accusation that the people made.

28. THE CONFESSIONAL.

Father Mundo was the priest assigned for some years to the town of Mariquina. He was a man who liked amusements. He was never deficient in the fulfilment of his duties. Every day he said mass, and on Sunday he said mass twice. Also, he christened children, said blessings over the dead, carried the sacrament, heard confession, and gave holy communion. He performed all his duties well, but the confessing he overdid a little. From his point of view this was perhaps useful in lessening the sins of those whom he confessed, but for some of the latter it had its bad side.

Once there was a young woman who was fond of going to church and to confession. When this young woman reached the age of twenty years, she abandoned the pious duty of going to confession, and also went to church but rarely. Once when this woman was questioned, she spoke as follows:

"At first I really thought that Father Mundo was a saint, but now the people realize that he is a horrid man. At flood-time, when the people are all canoeing on the flood, he rides along in the women's canoe, and not with the men. In the morning, after saying mass, he is seen squatting in his courtyard with his vestments trailing on the ground, petting fighting-cocks, in company with the other cock-fighters.

"At first I often confessed to him, but there came a day when the things he asked me in the confessional were nothing but foolishness. Was it right for him to ask me how many suitors I had, whom I liked, and where I met them? What I thought was that this priest was extremely impudent. So I left him at once in the confessional, and since that time I have not been going to confession."

29. JUAN THE JOKER.

Juan was a man given to doing nonsensical things, but he did not do them intentionally to anger his fellow-men; it was merely his natural habit, prompted by his character.

Once he went to the festival of a certain town. He was carrying three young pigs to sell in the town. When he got there, he saw many people gathered in the courtyard of the church and listening to a speech which the mayor of the town was delivering. The people stood in a dense crowd, but he succeeded in getting close to the foot of the platform on which the orator was standing. While he took part in the crowding, the three pigs kept squealing. When he had arrived in front of the mayor, he held his hand over their mouths to make them keep quiet, but he did not succeed. The mayor took notice of the squealing of the pigs and looked round to see who had brought the pigs there.

When he saw Juan he addressed him as follows: "Juan! What do you mean by making your pigs squeal here? Get out of here at once and never again dare to set foot on the ground of Bustos!"

Juan departed and went home to his town of San Ildefonso. A year passed, and the festival in the town of Bustos came round again. Juan wanted to go there, but he remembered that the mayor of that town had threatened him that, if he were seen again on the ground of Bustos, he would have him imprisoned and tortured. Juan thought of a way of going there none the less.

When the festival arrived, there was a high mass, which was attended by thousands of people. Juan was one of these people, and he it was whom all the people were watching, owing to the manner of his appearance there in the church. It was not long before one of the people who were watching him complained to the mayor, saying that Juan was in the church mounted on a wagon drawn by carabao, and that the whole thing, wagon, carabao, and Juan, was inside the church. Juan had not got down from the wagon on which he was standing.

The mayor went to the church to arrest Juan. When he got there he said: "Juan! Follow me, I am going to imprison you. Didn't I tell you not to set foot on the ground of Bustos?"

But Juan answered: "Mr. Mayor! You certainly did tell me that. That is why I cannot get out of my wagon. Do you see this earth, sir, with which my wagon is loaded and on which I am standing? This is not the ground of Bustos, sir, but earth of San Ildefonso. I got this earth in my town."

When Juan had said this, the mayor could not restrain his laughter and only said to himself that he could do nothing to Juan, for the latter was in the right.

30. THE THREE THIEVES.

Juan, Andr�s, and Diego were three expert thieves. They were very famous, and many people were trying to catch them, but their cleverness at dodging and stealing kept them from being caught. The three once made an appointment to meet at a certain quiet and secret place to discuss their means of livelihood and new good methods of thievery. Not one of them had an honest trade. This had been their mode of life from childhood on, so they had become skilful and very clever at this activity.

When the day of their meeting came, they were there already at dawn. Each one of them had much to tell, and, as they were all talking at once, their stories were indistinguishable.

Juan asked of Diego: "How skilled are you now at your work?"

"In my opinion," answered Diego, "I am the most skilful of us three, for I am able to steal the eggs a hen is brooding on without its knowing it. And not only this," he continued, "I am able to rob wild animals of their young without their noticing it."

"Is that all your skill?" Andr�s quickly interrupted, "I am able to rob animals and men too. I have stolen all of people's jewelry that I wanted to steal, whether the owner was asleep or up and about. Once I stole a ring that the owner was sleeping on to keep it from being stolen,--but I stole it without his noticing."

"Is that all the skill you two have?" asked Juan. "The things you do don't come halfway up to my skill at stealing. I can steal people themselves, and not only their property."

The two he was talking to were surprised, for they did not think that a live man could be stolen without his knowing it, and, to test Juan's ability, the two made a bet with Juan. They told him to steal the priest of the town and to bring him to the place where they now were. If he succeeded in doing this, Andr�s and Diego would pay him five hundred pesos. But if he could not do it, he was to pay Andr�s and Diego one hundred pesos. Juan agreed to this bet, and they parted.

Juan went to the town and found out by inquiry where the priest lived. When he had found this out, he figured out the plan he would pursue in stealing the priest. He entered the priest's household as a servant. During his stay as a servant he became acquainted with the habits of the priest. One of his habits, from which he never deviated, was praying a rosary before the image of a saint. The image was made of wood, and it represented Saint John. The size of this image was equal to that of a man. Juan had a carver make an image just like this one, but with an opening, and hollow inside. This opening inside the body of the image of the saint was such that a man could enter it. When the image which Juan had had made was ready, he replaced with it the image of Saint John which belonged to the priest.

One afternoon before prayers he took a rice-sack and went into the inside of the saint he had had made. When the priest had eaten supper he went into the room in which he prayed, to say a rosary. When he was halfway through his prayers, and just about as Juan was getting tired of standing up, the latter spoke: "Cease your praying, Father Lucas. I have been sent here to conduct you to Heaven."

At first the priest was filled with fear, but then he thought that his saint was doing a miracle and was really calling for him in order to take him to Heaven. As he did not say anything, Juan again spoke as follows: "Many are the works of piety which you have done. You have been patient in living a lowly life, therefore all the joys of Heaven have been reserved for you. Come with me, and I shall conduct you."

The priest answered: "How shall I manage to come with you? I am old and cannot walk from here on earth as far as Heaven."

Juan answered: "Never you mind that, I have a bag here. Get into it and I will carry you on my way to Heaven."

When he had said this, he spread out the rice-sack. When the priest had got into it, Juan tied the bag tightly. He got out from inside the image and carried Father Lucas on his shoulder toward the house where he had his appointment with his two friends. Father Lucas really believed that he was going to Heaven, and so he staid still in the sack.

However, when Juan was wading through a shallow river, it occurred to him that he was being fooled and that they were not going to Heaven at all.

Therefore he asked Juan: "What river is this, and why must we cross a river on the way to Heaven?"

Juan answered: "Shhh! Don't make any noise! This is the river Jordan."

The priest desisted from speaking. Juan kept on walking. When he was already going up into the house that was their place of meeting, the priest was again surprised and again asked: "What stairway is this? Is this the way the staircase of Heaven looks?"

"I have told you already that you must not make any noise," answered Juan, "This is the stairway that leads to Heaven."

When they had come up into the house, they were met by Diego and Andr�s. Juan dropped his burden and said to them: "I have brought here what you told me to steal. Have you brought the five hundred pesos?"

The other two did not believe him at once. So what they did was to make a hole in the bag and peep at the contents. In it they saw the head of the priest with the tonsure. Accordingly they handed Juan the five hundred pesos and they all quickly left the house. They abandoned the priest, leaving him to get free as best he could.

31. HOW MONKEYS ARE CAUGHT.

In the jungle one not rarely meets with large herds of monkeys. When the one who comes into their haunts is unarmed, there is danger of their killing the man whom they overpower by their numbers. When angry, they climb down from the trees and all bite at the man who is in their power. Therefore a man who is going into jungles where there are many monkeys will not neglect to carry a gun. When the monkeys hear the noise of the gun, they are unafraid. Most of them do not run away, but look at the place where the noise and smoke come from. Those who are reached by a bullet try to ward it off with their hand, like one who is warding off a mere throw. Therefore, when they are shot, their palms too are pierced by the bullet.

Not infrequently people catch live monkeys, so as to domesticate them and sell them to the various foreigners who come to the Philippines. The catching of live monkeys does not involve much labor, for the method of catching them is simply to trick them.

When one wants to catch monkeys, one usually cooks or has cooked some sweetmeats, and into these one mixes or has mixed some balasing. Balasing is the seed of a plant which intoxicates or puts into a deep sleep the animals which eat it. It is used also in catching fish in rivers. When these sweetmeats have been cooked, the man carries them to where the herd of monkeys is. However, if he should place it carefully on the ground, the monkeys would not climb down to eat it. They suspect that these sweetmeats are only a bait for them, that they may be caught or killed. Therefore what the man does is to pretend that he is frightened and when he sees the monkeys, he starts running, carrying on his head the tray of drugged sweetmeats. While running he pretends to take a fall on his face, so that the sweetmeats he is carrying on his head fall down and are scattered over the ground. When this happens, he keeps on running just the same, and hides somewhere or other to watch the monkeys eat. When the monkeys see the man running away, and when he is hidden, they climb down from the trees and all start grabbing the sweetmeats. They all crowd on top of one another in their greed, and the noise is very great, for each herd of monkeys is about five hundred or a thousand strong. When they have eaten it is not long before they are attacked by sleepiness. They get weak and cannot climb into the trees. It is a laughable sight to see these monkeys, old and young, squatting on the ground and nodding, everyone of them. The ones who did not succeed in grabbing any sweetmeats climb up into the trees and look down at their drunken companions. When the monkeys are in this state, and not before, does the man who is hidden come up and take the sleeping monkeys one by one. The effect of the drug is not of long duration, and the monkeys get well after a few days.

Another common way of catching monkeys is to use cocoanuts as bait. A hole is made in an unopened cocoanut. The size of this hole is just large enough for a monkey to put in his hand when it is not holding anything. Inside the cocoanut-shell is placed a piece of the meat of the cocoanut, and the whole thing is placed in a spot where there are monkeys. Monkeys like cocoanut, and when they see it, they grasp the meat that is inside the shell. But when they have hold of the cocoanut-meat, they can no longer take their hand out through the opening, but they will not let go of the cocoanut-meat. Consequently they are as though in stocks, and when the man who is catching them approaches, they cannot get away, for the cocoanuts are heavy and sometimes are weighted in addition. So when the catcher comes up, he is able without difficulty to capture the handcuffed monkeys, grown or young.

32. THE FESTIVAL OF SAINT JOHN.

The twenty-fourth of June is the festival of Saint John, and it is celebrated in the various towns of the province of Bulac�n. In the month of June there is usually rain and mud. The people believe that Saint John is the saint who makes the rain fall, and therefore is fond of water and mud. Hence the celebrations performed on his day are very different from those performed on the days of other saints. In the towns near the sea there are floods in the month of June and the water comes up into the town. In the towns farther from the sea it is also very rainy, and usually these floods and rains fall on the day of Saint John. The people who take part in the celebration get themselves drenched in the flood or in the rain. In the towns of Malolos and Hag�noy, when this holiday falls into a time of large flood, almost all the people get into the water or else go canoeing. If there is no flood, the people walk about in the rain. Many people from the country and the suburbs go about collecting alms on this holiday. Most of them are boys or young men; rarely are there any women. In separate groups they go about collecting alms, and each group has with it a band that plays on bamboo instruments. Those who do not play are supposed to have the task of singing or dancing. All of them are almost without clothing, like Igorots, but their whole body, from head to foot, including even the eyes and ears, is caked over with mud.

These groups go calling from house to house. They stop in front of a house and there they play music or sing or dance. They usually sing about the life of Saint John or of some other saint who was a friend of his. While their music is playing, their order is in single file in a circle, sometimes standing, sometimes squatting or kneeling. When there is a singer or dancer, he is within the circle of musicians and there performs his singing or dancing. After two or three pieces of music, songs, or dances they stop and all go round asking alms of the people who are watching them. If they receive no alms, they take mud from their body and throw it at the stingy people. They spend the whole day in such celebration. As these alms-gatherers are very numerous, they help to make the town gay, even though it is very rainy.

When there is canoeing it is not uncommon for people to get drowned. Consequently this custom is gradually disappearing. Moreover, in these days people are getting stingy and rarely give alms. Hence the gatherers of alms on the festival of Saint John are gradually disappearing.

33. FAMILY CELEBRATIONS AFTER A DEATH.

A family that has suffered a loss by death suffers not only in its mind and soul, but also in its purse. This is on account of the great expense borne by the bereaved ones in conforming with various customs.

On the day when someone has died very many people call on his family, and these visitors do not content themselves with condoling with the dead person's family, but make a long stay in the house of mourning. Consequently the bereaved family is compelled to serve food to the visitors. Usually the dead person is not buried at once, but is first placed in state for two or three days from the time when he ceased to breathe. During these days people's visits stop neither by day nor by night. Most of them are relatives and others are friends, neighbors, and other acquaintances in town. If the deceased had many friends or relatives in other towns, they too come to visit, and they have to be given board and lodging by the dead person's family. This is because in the small towns in the provinces there are no hotels. In feeding all these guests they often use up half a cow, several sheep and goats, and innumerable chickens. The chef is usually hired, and the near relatives of the deceased help with the cooking. For this reason in the house of death the place where the deceased is lying in state is very quiet, and even when many people are there, when they talk it is only in whispers. But in the dining-room and kitchen the noise is extraordinary. Everyone is giving orders to the servants, some are washing dishes or pots, some are polishing knives and forks, some are serving at the table, and so on. In the kitchen the sputtering of the frying-pans never stops, and one can hear only the voices of the chef and his assistants.

But in one chamber of the house stays the immediate family of the deceased and is plunged in grief. They all cry as hard as they can and from time to time blurt out questions as to what will happen to them because of the departure of the one who has died.

If the deceased is wealthy, a priest comes to get him and escorts him to the church. Arriving at the church, the body is blessed by the priest and after this the priest escorts it also to the cemetery. All the visitors are present at the burial, and usually they ride in carriages. These carriages are hired, except for a few which belong to some of the visitors.

When the dead has been buried the guests who come from other towns go along back to the house of mourning. Most commonly they soon depart, but sometimes they stay three days, to take part in the Three Nights' Celebration. The Three Nights are celebrated in the house of the deceased. At this time the relatives call and all pray together. In this praying only the older people take part, and the young men and young women tell each other riddles. These ceremonies are performed during the Three Nights. On the last night there are usually many people, and the entertaining is more elaborate than on the two preceding nights. Many of those who come give presents to the bereaved ones. Usually these are things to eat for the guests.

In poor families these ceremonies are also performed, but the priest's calling for and escorting the corpse does not take place. For the blessing of the corpse one may pay the priest whatever one desires. The cheapest thing is the blessing of the corpse at the door of the church and placed on the ground. The next in order is the blessing of the corpse also at the door of the church, but with the coffin placed on an altar. The most expensive blessings are performed right by the altar. The price of these is from one-hundred to five-hundred pesos.

34. FLEEING FROM THE AMERICANS.

The people of San Miguel were like herds of animals fleeing before the whips of the herdsmen and the pursuit of savage dogs. They are very fond of peace and quiet. Also they are very credulous toward hearsay, and these circumstances are what did not allow most of them to stay at ease in the town during the time of the revolutions against the Spaniards and the Americans. It is also true, however, that many of them ran away merely from fright or cowardice.

When the revolution against the Spaniards of the year 1896 took place, I was only four years old. According to what my mother has told me, we went to Manila instead of going up into the mountains. I do not remember much of what happened at that time, except the fact that we went to the railroad station. When we arrived at Manila we were not able to enter the city unless we had a permit from an official of this city.

The next thing which has become fixed in my memory is our stay in Biga�, in the house of an attorney, whose name was Don Nasario. We went to this town to escape the fighting of the forces of the Katipunan and the Spaniards in Manila. In Biga� were Tagalog soldiers drilling to take part in the fighting.

A little later we went to the town of Bustos. This town also was at that time in the hands of the Katipunan. This town is very pretty because of the various aspect of the things one sees. The river is very broad, the banks are wide, and on the banks are hills of stone and sand. The friends with whom we stayed were kind people. They often played with my sister and me, and the game was to make ducks dive in the clear waters of the river.

What took place in the fighting of those times I did not find out, for I was still small and had not yet any understanding.

When the flight from the Americans came, I was already a little older, and I remember much of our flight to the mountains. When the Americans had defeated the soldiers of Aguinaldo the people of San Miguel were filled with terror. The report circulated in the town that the Americans were wild people, cruel and fierce, and without respect for anything. This no doubt was a rumor which the Spaniards caused to be spread, and especially the Spanish priests in the Philippines. Owing to people's fear of the Americans, almost all of us townspeople packed up our belongings and went up into the mountains. We were living at that time in the house of an aunt of my mother's, and there dwelt with us also the family of my mother's oldest brother. I remember that the packing and hauling of the goods of all of us who lived in the house took more than ten days. The wagons laden with our goods were despatched at night, so that the carabao that drew them should not get exhausted in the heat of the sun. The wagons were filled up to the top of the covering, and the carabao were much wearied by the drawing of the heavy loads. When no belongings of ours were left, we ourselves got into the wagon to be carried to the mountains.

The place we went to was called Paang-Bund�c, half a day's walk from Sibul Springs. The dwelling we came to there was a mere hut with a roof of cugon-grass, and very small. The floor consisted of branches of trees with the twigs cut off, but not smooth or even. It was very small and was penetrated by wind and cold. Such was the place we lived in for several months, instead of the frame house of my mother's aunt.

There in Paang-Bund�c there came to us many fellow-townspeople who were also fleeing, and the last comers reported that all the people of the town were by now in the mountains, or at any rate gone, and only the houses were left.

After several months' stay at Paang-Bund�c we went from there to a secret place. This place was a clearing in the jungle. Not one of us was allowed to know the name of the place, and those who knew it kept it very secret, so that our hiding-place should not be known by any outsider. This was a way of escaping not only the enemy, but also robbers and thieves. The house we lived in there was very large, a very long building, all under one roof. The building was cut up into rooms of equal size. The number of these was about eight. In each room one family lived. Here too we were compelled to stay for several months.

When the Americans were already near the town of San Miguel, it was reported to us that these people were not as hearsay described them, so that our fear of them gradually gave way. Accordingly we left our deep concealment and went to Paho. This too is a place in the mountains, but nearer to the town. There we were met by many fellow-townsmen and people from various other places. Most of them were sick from staying in the mountains. Here the medicines which Mother had taken up into the mountains instead of leaving them in the town, were of great use. These medicines belonged to Father; he had left them behind when he was banished to Sulu by the Spanish priests. One morning someone called at our house to buy some medicine. Mother went to the chest in which the medicine lay. When it was opened, we saw a snake coiled up and sleeping on the rice-hulls that covered the bottles. The people who saw this rejoiced greatly, but Mother was only frightened. She did not know the meaning of the snake. When the rejoicing was over, Mother asked why they were all so glad. They answered that the meaning of the snake was that the owner of the medicine was going to get rich. Mother only laughed at what they said, for she did not believe in these things.

After a few months we left Paho and went home to our town. When we got there, most of the few belongings we had left there had been stolen by the few people who had been left in the town. The boards of the flooring of the house of Mother's aunt were gone, and they did not know who had taken them.

Not long after our arrival in town it was reported that the American soldiers were now near to the town of San Miguel. We were not made uneasy by this news, and awaited their arrival. One noon the town was quiet. The soldiers who were in the town went away and those who did not go away threw away their guns. The reason for this was the entry of the American soldiers. From the back yard of the house in which we were living I saw the approach of the soldiers. Their trousers were khaki and their shirts blue. They carried their guns and ran in single file across the fields and came toward the road.

When the Americans were in possession of the town, orders for some months were strict. Lights were ordered extinguished at six o'clock in the evening, and no one was allowed to walk about after this hour. In the mountains near San Miguel were many Tagalog soldiers, and they often attacked the town of San Miguel. On account of these attacks the Americans set fire to houses in San Miguel. Night after night when the soldiers attacked, the houses were regularly set fire to. Our neighbors came to us every night to sleep with us, because in our house the danger from the bullets of the contestants was not so great. The doctor of the American soldiers who were in the town of San Miguel had become a friend of my father's, and for this reason our house escaped being burned. Once this doctor told Father that he often accompanied the patrols and told them not to burn down our house. Finally, as the Tagalog soldiers did not succeed in driving the Americans out of the town, they stopped their attacks, and the town became quiet.

II. GRAMMATICAL ANALYSIS.

Note.--The following grammatical analysis of Mr. Santiago's speech can, of course, lay no claim to completeness: he surely uses some constructions and very many forms which I have not heard or have failed to note. Such fulness as will be found is due to Mr. Santiago's intelligence and patience under questioning and in conversation. A very few of the examples represent his form of sentences in MacKinlay's Handbook. The full representation of derivatives of the root p�tol cut is due to Mr. Santiago's kindness in listing these forms, wherever they seemed possible to his speech-feeling, in accordance with my list of morphologic elements, and in then forming sentences to illustrate them.

In the use of accent-marks and of the symbol y I have deviated from the practice of the International Phonetic Association. Where roots did not occur as independent words, I have prefixed a hyphen and given a theoretical meaning. In the explanation of constructions I have allowed myself the use of distorted English; although this time-honored device does not really reproduce the foreign expression (substituting, as it does, impossible constructions for natural ones), it does enable the reader to follow the general trend of the foreign idiom.

A. PHONETICS.

1. Distinctive sounds.

1. The distinctive sounds are the following:

Labial Dental Palatal Velar Laryngeal

Stops: unvoiced p t k ` Stops: voiced b d g Spirants (unvoiced) s h Nasals (voiced) m n ng Trill (voiced) r Lateral (voiced) l

High vowels i(e,y) u(o,w) Low vowel a

2. a is a low unrounded vowel, as in Standard English far, but more tense and with the corners of the mouth (lips) slightly drawn back: h�laman�n garden.

3. i and u, in what may be regarded as the normal form, are about as high as the Standard (American) English vowels in pit and put, but more tense; moreover, the lips are well drawn back for i and well rounded for u: �nit heat, lut�in be cooked.

4. In the final syllable of a phrase (or of a word spoken alone) the tongue position of i and u is as a rule lowered, often all the way to mid position; the tenseness and lip position are, however, kept, so that the resulting sound often resembles French � and lower o.

5. u is nearly always so lowered: b�go new, buh�k hair. It is not lowered in p�` ten.

6. i is not lowered before dentals: k�hit though, �kin my, p�gil compulsion. It is usually kept high also before velars: sah�g flooring, sings�ng ring. Some words ending in velars more or less regularly have the lowering: p�tik, p�tek mud; so especially some proper names: Ints�k Chinese, L�leng Lola.

Even in other cases the higher variants of i are commoner than the lower; hind�` not, kam� we, gab� night, mul�` again are commoner than these words with e; a very few words, such as ul�` again have oftener e than i; others, such as it�m black are fairly regular in their variation.

7. Within a closely unified phrase the lowering is as a rule omitted: ul� sya again he (ul�`), Hint� na! Stop! (hint�`). In this regard the habits are variable; the form chosen depends mostly on the speaker's momentary attitude toward the closeness of joining of the words.

A dissimilative factor also seems to be involved: a following i or u favors the lowering:

Nat�t�lug ang �so. The dog is sleeping.

Nat�t�log si Hw�n. Juan is sleeping.

8. o occurs in a number of words as the vowel in the last two syllables: in all of them the intervening consonant is the glottal stop: �`o yes, do`�n there; bo`�` whole has occasionally bu`�`. The raised variant is not used within the phrase: �`o p�`. Yes, sir. Yes, ma'am. do`�n sya there he.

e occurs in the same way in le`�g neck, beside li`�g.

9. In word-formation, when, by the addition of suffixes, the i or u is no longer final, it is not lowered: l�to` cook, lut�in be cooked; it�m black, itim�n be made black. Occasionally, however, the lowered vowel is retained: t�o human being, ka-ta�-han mankind, beside kata�han, tao-ta�-han manikin, pupil of the eye, beside tauta�han.

The words with o`o (� 8) keep the lowered vowel when uncontracted: pina-ro`on-�n was gone to (do`�n there); these words are also reduplicated with o: kin�-d�-ro`on-�n is been in.

10. e and o occur also in unassimilated loan-words: b�sbol baseball, Sil� y nag-b�-b�sbol, They are playing baseball, estudiy�nte, istudiy�nte student, pol�s, pul�s policeman, sip�ro football player, bangk�ro canoer (both with Spanish suffix -�ro added to Tagalog words: s�pa` football, bangk�` canoe).

For e see also � 29.

11. As the variation between i and e and between o and u is thus never distinctive, there is no need of indicating it in transcription; I have, however, used the characters e and o wherever I heard markedly lowered variants.

12. i and u occur also as non-syllabics; I use, respectively, the characters y and w: ya�n that, g�ya like, w�ka` speech, word, t�wag call. In final position they are always lowered: thus in pat�y dead person, ik�w thou, y represents non-syllabic e, w non-syllabic o.

13. In word-formation before suffixes vowels are in certain cases lost, see Morphology: k�nin be eaten, -k�in eat with suffix -in.

14. The laryngeal (glottal) stop occurs as a distinctive sound only after a vowel at the end of words: b�ta` child, boy, girl, hind�` not, hint�` stop.

As a non-distinctive sound it is used as a vowel-separator wherever syllabic vowels follow each other without an intervening distinctive non-syllabic. In this use I shall not indicate it in transcription, as it may be taken for granted wherever vowels are written together. Such words as those in � 8 will therefore from now on be transcribed without the sign for glottal stop: do�n, �o, bo�`. So t�o (� 9) means t�`o, etc. Cf. below.

15. The distinctive final glottal stop is usually lost before a following word in the phrase: hind� sya not he, Hint� na! Stop!

It is always lost before the words ng, t, and y: ang b�ta ng maba�t the good child.

16. p, t, k are unvoiced fortis stops; they differ from the corresponding English sounds primarily in that they are only slightly aspirated. In sentence-final the implosion only is made.

t (in contrast with the English sound) is postdental, often near to interdental.

k is always articulated in back velar position (as in English coo), no matter what sound follows. The closure of k is occasionally imperfect, so that a rather open velar spirant (resembling Slavic x) is heard: malax�s for malak�s strong; this variation has not been noted in transcription.

In word-formation p, t, k alternate, respectively, with m, n, ng; see Morphology.

17. b, d, g correspond in position to p, t, k. They are fully voiced lenis stops; in sentence-final often implosive only, and then weakly voiced.

The closure of b is occasionally imperfect, so that a bilabial spirant is produced: t�Vig for t�big water; this variation has been ignored in transcription.

In word-formation b alternates with m; see Morphology.

Final d in word-formation is always replaced by r before the vowel of a suffix: l�kad walk, lakar-�n walking-party.

Initial d becomes r in the sentence frequently after the final vowel of a preceding word and occasionally even after a final non-syllabic, in the words da�n hundred (not in da�n road), dam�, d�w, d�n, d�ne, d�to, diy�n, do�n; e. g. ako r�n I too.

In word-formation some words frequently change d to r after the vowel of a prefix or a reduplication, and others do not: pa-ra�n means (da�n road, way), but i-pa-dal� be sent (dal� bring, carry). The words (or roots) that have changeable d- are those mentioned in the preceding paragraph and da�n, -d�ka, damd�m, d�mi, d�mot, dang�l, dap�`, d�pat, d�ti, -d�tig, -dat�ng, dik�t, -din�g, -d�wang, -d�kit, -dum�, d�nong, d�sa.

18. s is the normal unvoiced sibilant, spoken in postdental position. Before y and iy it is somewhat palatalized (more, for instance, than Russian palatalized s),--a variation that is not distinctive and need not be noted in transcription: siy�, sy� he, she, pronounced with palatalized s.

s alternates in word-formation with n; see Morphology.

In the affricate combination ts, which is felt and treated as a single sound, the s is always palatalized: Ints�k Chinese.

19. h is the unvoiced glottal spirant; as in English, it occurs only in syllable-initial: hind�` not, b�hay house, mukh�` face.

In word-formation h is often spoken before the initial vowel of a suffix that is added to a final vowel: -b�sa read, basa-h�n reading room. See Morphology.

20. The nasals m, n, ng correspond in position to the stops. In word-formation they alternate, respectively, with p, t, k; m also with b, and n also with s; ng is often prefixed to an initial vowel; see Morphology.

Both in word-formation and in the phrase the nasals are occasionally assimilated in position to a following consonant: s� m p�` ten (m for ng), Sa�ng ka p�paron? Where are you going? (for sa�n).

In the sentence, final n is lost before the words ng, t, and y: ang �ki ng am� my father (for �kin my).

21. r is the voiced tongue-tip trill, postdental. It occurs between vowels within simple, underived words: �raw sun, day,--no doubt as a substitute for d, which never occurs in this position; everywhere else r is merely a variant of d (� 17).

22. l is postdental; the timbre is much as in Standard French or German, the mid-tongue not lowered.

23. f and v (both labiodental) occur in unassimilated foreign words; they are occasionally replaced (especially in derivatives) by p and b. Filip�nas the Philippines, infiy�rno, impiy�rno Hell, fiy�sta, piy�sta fiesta, but always ka-piyest�-han day of a festival, siv�l, sib�l civil, prov�nsiya province, bint�na` window, b�so drinking-glass.

r occurs freely in all positions in foreign words (cf. � 21): tr�n train, trab�ho work, kr�s cross, rel�s watch, sombr�ro hat, beside Tagalized sambal�lo.

The occurrence of ts (� 18) is probably limited to foreign words.

24. When in word-formation a vowel is lost before a suffix (� 13), the non-syllabics thereby brought together are subject to various changes: sigl-�n be filled, sil�d with suffix -an. See Morphology.

2. Syllabication.

a. In the word.

25. If a single non-syllabic follows a stressed vowel, the latter is spoken with open syllable accent, and the non-syllabic begins the following syllable: b�-hay house, s�-s�-lat will write.

If a single non-syllabic follows an unstressed vowel, the latter has close syllable accent,--that is, no stress-division is made between the syllables (just as in English): it� this, kasakim�n selfishness, sum�-lat wrote.

If two non-syllabics intervene between two syllabics, the syllable-division is made between the non-syllabics: luk-s� jump, muk-h�` face, In-ts�k Chinese. Stressed ay seems, however, to have open syllable accent: k�y-lan when?

Syllabics never follow each other without an intervening non-syllabic. If no other non-syllabic intervenes, a non-distinctive glottal stop is spoken. I have not written the glottal stop in this position, as it may always be taken for granted (� 14). Hence da�n road is pronounced da`�n, si�k young pig si`�k, do�n there do`�n, t�o human being t�`o.

Nor do more than two non-syllabics ever follow each other in a native word. The following are examples of unusual combinations in foreign words: An-dr�s, P�-dro, beside Tagalized P�ro, k�-tre bedstead, s�r-mon, trab�-ho work, but in reduplication mag-t�-trab�-ho will work, kr�s cross, but in reduplication nag-k�-kur�s crosses himself, cf. bar�so arm, l�bo balloon (Sp. globo).

26. In frequently used words, especially in more rapid speech, the intervocalic glottal stop is often lost.

If unlike vowels meet, the non-syllabic corresponding to the higher vowel (i. e. y with i, e and w with u, o) takes the place of the glottal stop. So t�wo beside t�o. The combinations so resulting are treated in every way like those discussed in the next �.

If like vowels thus meet, they coalesce into a single vowel of no more than normal length: pumar�n went there beside pumaro�n. When oo is thus contracted, the resulting o may be raised to u (cf. � 9): pinarun�n was gone to, beside pinaron�n and pinaroon�n.

27. If the non-syllabic intervening between two vowels is y or w, the combination involves no peculiarity, provided that neither of the vowels is homogeneous with the non-syllabic: b�-yan town, pag-dir�-wang celebration, gay�n thus.

If, however, one of the vowels is homogeneous with the non-syllabic (i. e. i, e with y and u, o with w) and is not stressed, it is spoken shorter than a normal unstressed vowel: in such words as iy�n that, buw�n moon, month the i, u are spoken shorter than in other positions. So also in t�wo (see preceding �) the o.

After consonants these short vowels are often entirely omitted: bw�n beside buw�n, sy� he, she beside siy�. The syllable-division remains, however, as in the longer form: k�pw�` fellow- beside k�puw�` is pronounced k�-pw�` (not kap-wa`).

Even in other positions these reduced vowels are often omitted, especially in frequently used combinations: Ano y�n? What's that? beside Ano iy�n?, occasionally t�w for t�wo, t�o.

28. Conversely, one hears now and then a superfluous short i, e with a y, and an u, o with a w: iya�n for ya�n that, m�ye for m�y having, uwal�` for wal�` without.

29. The combinations ay and ai are occasionally replaced by a long open e: k�lan beside k�ylan when?, m� b�hay beside m�y b�hay wife, housewife, me �re` beside may �re` master, owner, t�nga beside ta�nga car.

b. In word-formation.

30. When in word-formation affixes or reduplicative syllables are added to a root, the syllabication is as in a simple word: sul�-tan be written to (s�lat writing with suffix -an), sum�-lat wrote (same, with infix -um-), umuw�`, umw�` (� 27) went home (-uw�` go home, with prefixed -um-).

When vowels meet, they are as a rule separated by the non-distinctive intervocalic glottal stop: ma�-�-re` will be possible (�re` property reduplicated and with prefix ma-).

31. The intervocalic glottal stop is rarely reduced, except in certain much-used combinations, the commonest being those with the prefix i- and with the prefix ka- and the suffix -an in certain uses (see Morphology): ini�tos was commanded (�tos command with prefixes in- and i-), usually iniy�tos; laru�n, toy (lar�` play, game with suffix -an), usually laruw�n, larw�n, but (with a different use of the suffix -an) l�r�an playground; kayib�gan, kayb�gan friend (�big love, desire, with prefix ka- and suffix -an), but ka�b�gan sweetheart and kaibig�n affection. For -�wan abandon with prefix i- only the contracted form �wan be abandoned is spoken. Cf. further ika�pat, ik�pat fourth (�pat four with prefixes i- and ka-).

32. Conversely, an original y or w is sometimes under emphasis replaced by glottal stop; thus, for patay�n be killed (pat�y dead person, kill with suffix -in), occasionally pata�n.

33. When a word is doubled, when two words are united in a compound word, and after the prefixes that end in g, the syllable-division is however made as though separate words were meeting in a sentence,--that is, according to the rules in the following paragraphs.

c. In the phrase.

34. When words come together in the phrase, the word-division is maintained (as in English) as a syllable-division.

In the case of initial consonants the division is thus like that within a word: Sum�lat ka. Write (thou), Sum�lat siy�, Sum�lat sy�. He wrote, Sum�ma ka. Go along, Sum�ma siy�, Sum�ma sy�. He went along.

Before a vowel-initial the word-division is maintained as a syllable-division by the use of a non-distinctive glottal stop (as in German): Sum�lat ak�. I wrote, i. e. sum�-lat-`ak�; Sum�ma ak�. I went along, i. e. sum�-ma-`ak�.

Doubled words, compound words, and forms with prefixes ending in g (namely, mag-, nag-, pag-, tag-) are similarly treated (� 33): ag�d-ag�d immediately (ag�d at once doubled), i. e. ag�d-`ag�d; b�hay-akl�tan library-building (compound of b�hay house and akl�tan place for books), i. e. b�-hay-`ak-l�-tan; pags�lat an act of writing (s�lat writing with prefix pag-), i. e. pag-s�-lat; nag�ral studied (�ral teaching with prefix nag-), i. e. nag-`�-ral.

Occasionally, in emphatic speech, the same division is made within other formations: umakiy�t, umaky�t climbed (-akiy�t climb with prefixed -um-), occasionally, but rarely, um-`akiy�t, usually umakiy�t, umaky�t (by � 30).

35. Reduction of the glottal stop and contraction of vowels occur only in a few much-used combinations of words: si Andr�s (si is the article of proper names), also siy Andr�s, sy Andr�s; Ano iy�n? What's that?, also Ano y�n? and even An y�n?; na it� this (na is a particle expressing attribution), also na yit�, na yt�.

36. Occasionally such reductions go even farther, as in an� in the preceding paragraph, and occur where the glottal stop is not involved: as, s� for is� one in s� m p�` ten, for is� ng p�`.

37. The words at, ay, and na have also a shorter form, t, y, and ng, respectively, which occurs only (but not always) after a final vowel, glottal stop, or n. When these forms are used, the final glottal stop or n is lost (�� 15, 20) and the t, y, or ng is treated in every way exactly as though it were part of the preceding word: but� at bal�t, but� t bal�t bone and skin, i. e. but�t-bal�t; Iy�n ay mab�ti, Iy� y mab�ti. That's good, i. e. iy�y-mab�-ti; ang b�ta` na maba�t (clumsy, as in the speech of a child just learning to speak, for:) ang b�ta ng maba�t the good child, i. e. ang-b�-tang-maba`�t.

3. Accentuation.

a. Word-accent.

38. In a word of more than one syllable at least one syllable is normally spoken with a greater degree of stress than the others.

The unstressed syllables have short vowels (about as long as the vowel in English pit or put) and close syllable-stress (� 25).

39. A non-final syllable ending in a non-syllabic (i. e. a closed non-final syllable) never has the stress; such words as luk-s� jump, muk-h�` face, ak-l�t book are therefore always oxytone. The only exceptions are syllables ending in ay; this combination seems to be felt as a unit capable of open syllable-stress: k�y-lan, k�-lan when; further, the words m�n-san once, p�n-san cousin, and n�n-don, by-form of n�-ro�n is there; and, finally, unassimilated foreign words: b�s-bol, s�r-mon, kw�r-ta, kw�l-ta money (Spanish cuarto), but also Tagalized kwalt�.

Words like k�-pw�` (beside k�-puw�`) are not exceptions, for the first syllable is not closed (� 27).

40. The stressed syllables fall into two grammatical classes which are only in part phonetically distinct; we may call them primary and secondary word-accent.

41. The primary word-accent on a final syllable or (in the cases mentioned in � 39) on a closed non-final syllable, consists merely in greater stress than that of an unaccented syllable, accompanied by a pitch-rise of about half a note. [4] I use the grave accent-sign: gab� night, hind�` not, kam�y hand, buh�k hair, n�ndon is there, s�rmon sermon.

42. On a non-final open syllable the primary word-accent involves an increase of stress (less than in English), a pitch-rise of two notes, lengthening of the vowel to about one and one-half times the duration of an unstressed vowel, and open syllable-stress (� 25). I use the acute accent-mark: b�hay house, b�yan town.

So also, irregularly, syllables in ay: k�ylan, k�lan when?, and even finally: k�y, k� than, m�y, m� having; also m�nsan, p�nsan.

If an unaccented syllable precedes, the pitch-rise really begins on the latter: in sum�lat wrote, for instance, the first syllable is spoken above the usual pitch, and the two-note pitch-rise is merely completed in the accented syllable.

43. The secondary word-accent on a final syllable has weaker stress than the primary accent in the same place, and ordinarily lacks the pitch-rise. Grammatically, it is recognizable by the presence of the primary accent on another syllable; I use the grave accent-mark: �akiy�t, �aky�t will climb, n�rin�g was heard.

44. On a non-final open syllable the secondary accent differs from the primary accent in similar position in two respects: its pitch-rise is less marked, varying from three-quarters to one and three-quarters notes, and its vowel-lengthening is greater, reaching twice the length of an unstressed vowel. I use the grave accent-mark: s�s�lat will write.

When the primary accent is on the last syllable and therefore weak (� 41), the secondary accent often approaches a non-final primary accent in character: the first syllable of a word like n�buks�n came open is often phonetically the same as that of a word like n�rin�g was heard.

If an unaccented syllable precedes the secondary accent, the pitch-rise really begins in the former: in such a word as sum�s�lat is writing the first syllable is spoken with higher than normal pitch, in the second syllable the pitch is brought up to a note and three-fourths above normal, and in the third the two-note rise is completed.

Of two secondary accents following each other the preceding is the more marked: n�r�ramdam�n is felt (n�- has more marked accent than r�-). This helps to make the primary accent distinct, for it is stronger than a preceding secondary accent: s�s�lat will write (the second su- is stronger, not weaker, than the first); n�l�l�man is known (if the third syllable had a secondary accent, it would be less marked than the first and second, but its pitch and stress are actually higher).

b. Sentence-accent.

45. Certain words are atonic, i. e. are always spoken unstressed in the phrase: e. g. ang �so the or a dog, sa �kin to me.

The atonic words are: ang, at, ay, kay to (not k�y, k� than), kung, na attributive (not n� already), nang, ni of (not n� nor), o or (not � oh), pag, sa, si.

The short variants of at, ay, and na, namely t, y, and ng (� 37), having no vowel, cannot be stressed; they are treated in every way as though they formed part of the preceding word.

46. In closely united phrases the last word keeps its accent, while the preceding ones often weaken theirs. Especially a final syllable often loses its accent before another word in the phrase:

d�hil d�to on account of this, often: dahil d�to,

ang mang� b�hay the houses, often: ang manga b�hay,

ang kany� ng b�hay his or her house, ang kanya ng b�hay,

ang malak� ng b�hay the large house, ang malaki ng b�hay.

47. Opposed to the preceding rule is the treatment of certain words which we may call enclitics. These very frequently, to be sure, receive the normal treatment: that is, they are stressed and the preceding word either keeps its stress or, if oxytone, often loses it; but frequently, instead, the enclitic loses its accent:

Umaky�t siy�, Umakyat sy�. He climbed, but also Umaky�t sya.

�aky�t siy�, �akyat sy�. He will climb, but also �aky�t sya.

G�nu ka na b� kak�nis? How clever are you now? (k�, n�, b� are all enclitic).

Enclitics have the further (and more easily recognized) peculiarity that they follow the first orthotonic (i. e. neither atonic nor pretonic, � 48) word of the expression to which they belong (either as modifiers or as subject):

ang mahah�ba nya ng pa� his (niy�, enclitic) long legs.

When several enclitics come together the last one is often stressed. Monosyllabic enclitics precede disyllabic:

Nah�nap na ny� ang sombr�ro. He has already looked for the hat. (n� and niy� are enclitics; the latter is treated as disyllabic even when in the contracted form ny�).

The enclitics are:

(1) always: the monosyllabic forms of the personal pronouns, namely k�, k�, m�, and the words (particles) b�, bag�, d�w, d�n, m�n, m�na, n�, nam�n, naw�`, ng�`, p�, pal�, p�`, s�na, tul�y.

(2) frequently or in certain senses: the disyllabic forms of the personal pronouns (including siy�, sy� and niy�, ny�) except ik�w (which is never enclitic), the demonstrative pronouns, and the words d�ne, d�to, diy�n, do�n, kay�`, l�mang, ul�`; occasionally short phrases (� 88).

For details about these words see Syntax.

48. Opposed to the rule in � 46 are also certain words (particles) which we may call pretonics. Their treatment is often regular: that is, the pretonic as well as the following word keeps its accent, or the pretonic loses its accent before a following word; but sometimes the pretonic keeps its accent and the following word, if oxytone, is unaccented:

m�y sak�t, may sak�t having sickness, i. e. sick, but also m�y sakit. Only m�y and n�sa actually appear with this accentuation.

The other pretonics are so classed because they share with these two words the peculiarity that an enclitic belonging to the phrase follows not the pretonic word, but the first orthotonic word:

M�y kataw�n sya ng p�ra ng t�o. He has a body like a human being. (siy� he, enclitic follows not m�y, which is pretonic, but kataw�n body, the first orthotonic word of the predicate).

The pretonics are the particles b�wat, k�hit, kap�g, kin�, mang�, m�y, nag�ng (together with its other forms, � 250), n�sa (together with its other forms, � 212), n� nor (not ni of), nin�, pagk�, sin�, tag� (tig�). See Syntax.

49. A final syllable ending in glottal stop (� 14) often receives a higher degree of stress than a corresponding syllable with a different final.

If the syllable ending in glottal stop has not the word-accent, it often receives an accent resembling the secondary accent on a non-final syllable; this is especially common if the glottal stop is lost before another word in the phrase: p�re`, p�r�` priest, P�r� Hw�n Father Juan.

If the syllable has a word-accent and the glottal stop is lost in the phrase, its accent is often spoken like a primary word-accent on an open syllable: Wal� sya. He has none (wal�`), Nagl�lar� sya. He is playing (nagl�lar�`).

If, however, the glottal stop is lost before t, y, or ng, this heightening of accent does not take place, since the syllable is then treated as ending in t, y, or ng: Sy� y wal� ng akl�t (i. e. wal�ng-`ak-l�t), Sya y wala ng akl�t. He has no book or no books.

50. In a succession of otherwise unstressed syllables a rhythmical movement is usually produced by means of grammatically insignificant stresses weaker than a secondary word-accent; the distribution, and, indeed, the occurrence of these is so variable that I have not tried to indicate them in transcription, especially as they are never distinctive. Thus, in the phrases in � 46 an accent of this kind may fall on the next-to-last syllables of the words that lose their normal word-accent: ang m�nga b�hay, ang k�nya ng am� his father, ang mal�ki ng b�hay.

51. The successive accents in a sentence bear a well-marked relation to each other: the early and especially the middle ones have higher absolute pitch than the last; an accent on the last syllable of a sentence often entirely loses its pitch-rise. As a consequence of this rather fixed melody, the differences of pitch-movement between statements, questions, commands, and exclamations of various kinds are not so marked as in English; the higher stress of emotionally dominant (emphatic) words, also, is less marked than in English.

In exclamation or under emphasis the accent of a final syllable may be like that of a medial syllable, and may, in addition take on a falling accent after the rise: Hw�n! (with rising-falling stress and pitch) Juan!, for normal Huw�n, Hw�n. Other disturbances of accent also occur in exclamation.

B. SYNTAX.

1. Sentence and word.

a. Syntactic relations.

52. The sentence consists of one or more words: Ar�y! Ouch! Um�ul�n. It's raining. Ina k�! Mother of mine! (as exclamation). Sya y sum�s�lat. He or she is or was writing.

53. The relations between the words in a sentence are the usual ones: (1) Attribution: Ina k�! Mother (of) mine! (2) Predication: Sum�s�lat sy�. Literally: Is-writing he. (3) The serial relation: but� t bal�t bone and skin.

54. Some of the particles (� 55) seem, however, to stand in none of these relations, but rather to express these relations themselves. Thus the particle t and in the preceding example is expressive of the serial relation. So further: malak� ng b�hay large house; the particle ng expresses the attributive relation; Sya y sum�s�lat. The particle y expresses the predicative relation.

It is to be remarked, further, that the sphere of attribution includes some cases in which the attribute markedly alters the sense: sak�t sickness: m�y sak�t (m�y is an attribute) having sickness, sick. [5]

b. Parts of speech.

55. Tagalog distinguishes two parts of speech: full words and particles.

The particles either express the syntactic relations between full words (as illustrated in � 54) or act as attributes of full words (so m�y in the example in � 54): Hind� sya sum�s�lat. He is not writing. The particle hind�` not is an attribute of sum�s�lat.

In contrast with the particles, full words act not only as attributes, but also as subject or predicate, and any full word may, in principle, be used in any of these three functions:

(1) Subject: Ang sum�s�lat ay si P�dro. The person writing is Pedro. Ang pul� nang pany� ay matingk�d. The red of the handkerchief is intense.

(2) Predicate: Sya y sum�s�lat. He is writing. Pul� ang panyo ng it�. This handkerchief is red.

(3) Attribute: ang b�ta ng sum�s�lat the writing child, the child who is writing; ang pul� ng pany� the red handkerchief.

56. Independent of this classification into parts of speech are certain less important groupings of words and certain phrase types, some of which will appear in the course of the analysis. Others, however, demand mention at the outset.

c. Static and transient words.

57. Transient words express an element of experience viewed as impermanent, i. e. belonging to some limited portion of time, so sum�s�lat above, as opposed, e. g., to siy�, pul�, pany�, b�ta`, P�dro. Words which are not transient may be called static. Only a few particles are transient; among the full words the transient group is large and important.

d. Personal names.

58. Except in exclamations and in address, names of persons (or animals) are distinguished from other words by being always (but see � 78) preceded by the atonic particle si: Hw�n! Juan! si Hw�n Juan, si Salam�n Glass, Mirror (as name of a dog).

59. Many terms of relationship and titles may be used in place of the name of an individual and then belong to the personal name class: ang am� the father, ang �ki ng am� my father, but: si Am� Father. Thus are used, further: si In� Mother, si T�tay Papa, si N�nay Mama, si K�ya or si K�yang Oldest brother, si At� Oldest sister, si Ingk�ng Grandfather, si Ind�` or si Imp� Grandmother, si �li or si Tiy� Aunt, si M�ma` Uncle; si Bath�la` God, but: ang Dy�s.

So also phrases in which these and other titles as attributes precede a name, see � 256.

60. The particle sin� or sil�, pretonic, in place of si forms an expression denoting the person named together with his family or group of adherents: sina Hw�n or sila Hw�n Juan and his family or Juan and his crowd. With a series of names sin� implies that those named form a group: si Hw�n, si Andr�s, at si Mariy�no Juan, Andr�s, and Mariano; sina Hw�n, Andr�s, at Mariy�no the group consisting of Juan, Andr�s, and Mariano; sina Hw�n, sina Andr�s, at sina Mariy�no Juan, Andr�s, and Mariano, each with his group.

e. The object construction.

61. When a word or phrase denotes an element of experience viewed as an object, it is, with certain exceptions, preceded by the atonic particle ang: ang b�ta` the or a child, boy, girl; children, ang b�hay the, a house; houses, ang b�yan the, a town, ang kab��tan goodness, kindness; an act of kindness, ang kata�han mankind, ang pags�lat the or an act of writing, ang mab�te that which is good, the best thing.

The following are the exceptions:

62. Personal names preceded by si or sin� (sil�) do not take ang; they always, of course, denote an object idea. See the examples in � 58 ff.

63. The personal pronouns (which always express an object idea) do not take ang. They are: ak� I; kit� we, i. e. thou and I, inclusive dual; t�yo we, i. e. thou (or ye) and I (or we), inclusive dual and plural; kam� we (but not you), exclusive dual and plural; ik�w, k� thou (singular); kay� ye, you (dual, plural, and polite singular); siy� he, she; sil� they.

All of these except ik�w are often enclitic; k� is always so: Ik�w ay tal�nan. You are defeated. Sum�lat ka. Write (thou).

Siy� is used only of living beings, except for a single peculiar construction to be described below (� 106 f.).

Kit� in the sense here given is not much used, t�yo being commoner: Pal�t kit� nang sombr�ro. Let's trade hats. Kit� ay pumaro�n sa tey�tro. Or, more commonly: T�yo ay pumaro�n sa tey�tro. Let us go to the theatre. Kit� is more used in another meaning, as we shall see (� 182).

Kam� differs from these two words in excluding the person or persons addressed: K�k�in t�yo. We shall eat. Nakit�luy kam� kina P�dro. We asked hospitality of Pedro's. In both of these sentences (as also in that with t�yo already given) two or more people may be meant. It will be seen, therefore, that the distinction between dual and plural is not categoric (obligatory).

That between singular and plural is categoric in these pronouns; everywhere else it is not obligatory; the idea of plurality is inherent in many words and forms, but these are used only where the idea of plurality is explicitly prominent.

64. The demonstrative pronouns as object expressions also reject ang. They are: ir� this (on the person of the speaker or within his immediate reach); it� this (more generally, of anything nearer to the speaker than to the person addressed); iy�n, y�n that (nearer to the person addressed); iy�n, ya�n, yo�n, y�n that (of things distant from both speaker and person addressed).

It� and iy�n are used also anaphorically: the former--the latter.

The demonstrative pronouns are often enclitic.

Ang is omitted also before an object expression in which a demonstrative pronoun stands first as a modifier, see � 130.

65. Similarly before object expressions in which an interrogative pronoun stands first as a modifier, see �� 131.168.

66. The use of ang is optional before the numerative pronouns. The use of ang seems sometimes to lend these greater definiteness, sometimes to be indifferent.

The numerative pronouns used as object expressions are: ib� other, il�n few, karam�han most, lah�t all. (The other numerative pronouns, namely bo�` whole and the particles b�la any and b�wat every are not used as object expressions).

ib� others; il�n a few; Ang il�n ay malalak�s at ang ib� ay mahih�na`. Some are strong and others are weak. Lah�t nang t�o sa b�ya ng it� ay d�pat umal�s. All people (who are) in this town ought to leave (nang t�o of people, of the people is an attribute of lah�t). Ang lah�t nang t�o sa b�ya ng it� ay m�y sak�t. All the people in this town are diseased. karam�han sa kanil� most of them; ang karam�han the majority.

The use of ang is optional also before object expressions in which a numerative pronoun stands first as an attribute, see � 132.

67. The use of ang is optional before the cardinal numerals: is� sa kanil�, or: ang is� sa kanil� one of them.

The simple cardinal numerals are: is� one, dalaw� two, tatl� three, �pat four, lim� five, �nim six, pit� seven, wal� eight, siy�m, sy�m nine.

Similarly, the use of ang is optional before an object expression in which a cardinal numeral stands first as a modifier, see � 133.

In dates and for the hours of the day the Spanish numerals are commonly used; these demand ang: ang ab�ynte-kw�tru nang H�nyo the twenty-fourth of June.

68. Ang is omitted, further, before object expressions beginning with the particle n� (� 253) and optionally before those beginning with the particle k�hit (� 248). All object expressions lack ang when forming an indefinite object predicate (� 109), in expressions of indefinite quantity (� 69), when used indefinitely after p�ra (� 275), hangg�ng (� 293), pat� (� 305), and in exclamation or address (�� 75.78). [6]

f. Expressions of indefinite quantity.

69. Object expressions are used (without ang, � 68) to express indefinite objects (roughly speaking such as would lack the article the in English) or indefinite quantities of objects, when preceded by certain modifiers. These modifiers are the pretonic particle m�y, expressing existence or forthcomingness (� 252), and the full words m�y-ro�n, equivalent with m�y; wal�` the negative of these; malak� great; mal�on long; mar�mi much, many (� 138). The phrases so formed may be described as expressions of indefinite quantity. Beside the omission of ang before the object expression, they have the peculiarity that in certain constructions they express (without further accompaniments) the possessor of that designated: may s�ngay there are horns or having horns, horned; m�y-roo ng akl�t there are books or having a book, books; wala ng akl�t there are no books or without a book, having no books; malak� ng kagamit�n great usefulness, there is great use, or having great usefulness; mal�o ng panah�n long time or taking a long time; mar�mi ng salap�` much money, there is much money or having much money; mar�mi ng kayb�gan many friends, there are many friends or having many friends.

M�y expresses also approximateness (where the object expression is one of number): may �pat na pu ng pa� about forty feet or having, measuring about forty feet.

70. An expression of indefinite quantity may, as a unit, stand in object construction; in this case the first three have possessive value, but not the others: ang m�y sak�t the or a person having sickness, the or a sick person; ang m�y-roo ng akl�t the (a) person who has a book or books; ang wala ng hiy�` the (a) shameless person; but: ang malak� ng b�hay the, a large house; ang mar�mi ng b�gay the many things.

71. Mar�mi may by itself stand in object construction; it then has the meaning: ang mar�mi the many, the crowd, the people, hoi polloi.

2. Subject and predicate.

72. Most sentences consist of a subject and a predicate, showing the construction of Sum�s�lat sy�, Sya y sum�s�lat (�� 53, 54). Indeed, this goes farther than in English; many commands, for instance, have the subject-and-predicate structure: Sum�lat ka. Write thou, i. e. Write.

Nevertheless, much of the syntax is determined by the use of constructions which lack subject-and-predicate structure.

a. Non-predicative sentences.

73. The sentences which lack subject-and-predicate structure are of two general types: (1) exclamatory, and (2) impersonal-anaphoric.

74. To the exclamatory type belongs the use in independent sentences of certain particles, the primary interjections: Ab�! Ah! Ar�y! Ouch! �! Oh!

As in other languages, some of these violate the normal phonetic structure, that is, are "inarticulate": Sss! Whew!, uttered when the weather is very hot. One whistles when one wants the wind to blow.

75. To the exclamatory type belong, further, words and phrases used as secondary interjections: An�! What! (unpleasant surprise). In� ko! or: Ina k�! Mother of mine! Ano ng h�na mo! What weakness of-you! i. e. How weak you are!

As the second example shows, object expressions are here used without ang (� 68).

76. Certain words with the prefix ka- expressing high degree of a quality (see Morphology), with their attributes: Kait�m nang gabi! What-blackness of-the night! i. e. How black the night is!

77. Certain words with the prefix ka- and reduplication expressing recent completion of an act (see Morphology), with their modifiers: Kar�rating ko pa l�mang! Just-arriving by-me still only! i. e. I have only just arrived.

78. Vocatives, in calling or address: Kay� ng manga makasal�nan! Ye sinners! In this use personal names lack si and all object expressions lack ang (� 68): Hw�n! Juan! M�ma`! Sir! �li! Madam! Wala ng hiy�`! Shameless one!

79. Commands of certain brusque or familiar types, used, e. g., to children, servants, animals, in haste or excitement: Hint� na! Stop! �lag na! Get out of the way! S�long! Go ahead! Hurry up! Pan�og n� sa b�hay! Come down from the house! Come on out! T�b� po` Look out please! (Cry of drivers to people on the street. The accent is irregular by � 51 for tab�).

80. Certain set expressions, such as greetings: Maganda ng �raw p�`! Good-morning! Sal�mat. Thanks. Sal�mat sa iy�. Thank you.

81. Expressions of affirmation and negation: �o. Yes. Oo ng�`. Yes indeed. T�ma`. That's right, Exactly. Hind�`. No. Wal�`. None, Nothing, There isn't.

82. The mere naming of an idea, as in counting or giving the title of a story: Is�, dalaw�, tatl�, �pat, lim�.... One, two, three, four, five....

83. (2) Of the impersonal-anaphoric type are many answers to questions or continuations of dialogue: Kah�pon. Yesterday. Ak�. I, It's I, It was I. (Never "It� y ak�," or the like).

84. Certain occurrences, especially meteoric phenomena, are not analyzed into subject and predicate: Um�ul�n. It's raining. Kabil�gan nang bw�n. Roundness of-the moon, i. e. There is a full moon. Bum�bah�`. There is a flood. Na��re`. It is possible, allowable. Hind� nala�nan. It did not take long, It was not long. Taginit n�. It is summer already.

85. Very common in impersonal construction are expressions of indefinite quantity (� 69). In this use they express existence or forthcomingness (or the opposite) of indefinite objects: M�y manga bab�ye. There are women. M�y-roo ng asw�ng sa b�yan. There was a vampire in the town. Wal� ng pap�l. There is no paper. Wal� ng anu m�n! There is nothing. Also: Not at all! You're welcome! Malaki ng tw�` nang iba ng t�o. There was great rejoicing by the other people. Sa dal�ga ng it� y mar�mi ng manglil�gaw. For this young woman there were many suitors.

86. Less common in impersonal construction are expressions of occurrences involving indefinite or indifferent persons or things: Hum�kay. One should dig. Nagumpisa n� nang pags�buy. "They" have already begun to throw.

87. There is great freedom as to presence or absence of anaphorically determined elements (i. e., such as have been recently mentioned or, less commonly, are about to be mentioned), including the subject; when this is wanting, the subject-and-predicate structure is, of course, lost: Hin�la nya sa pas�gan. Was-dragged by-him to-the shore, i. e. He dragged it or the tree (sc. it�, or: ang p�no`, from the preceding sentence) to the shore. Hind� makab�b�ti sa kanil�. (It, the scheme mentioned) will do them no good.

Many constructions later to be noticed depend on this habit of omitting anaphorically determined elements, cf. e. g.: Ang p�no` ay tum�bo hangg�ng sa magb�nga. The tree grew until (sc. it) bore fruit. Pagdat�ng niya ay sab�hin mo ng maghint�y. At-the-coming of-him be-said (impersonal) by-you that (sc. he) should-wait, i. e. When he comes, tell him to wait.

b. The subject.

88. The subject of a sentence is always an object expression. The only exceptions are complex sentences with entire predications (� 115) or quotations (� 329) as subject.

89. The subject may have two positions:

(1) Non-enclitic: it precedes or follows the predicate; in the former case the predicate is introduced by the atonic particle ay, y (y often after syllabic vowel, n, or `; see Phonetics): Sum�s�lat ang b�ta`. The child is writing; or: Ang b�ta` ay sum�s�lat. Ang b�ta y sum�s�lat. Siy� ay sum�s�lat. Sya y sum�s�lat. He, she is writing. Here siy�, sy� is not enclitic.

(2) Enclitic: it follows the first orthotonic word of the predicate: Hind� sya sum�s�lat. Not he is-writing, i. e. He is not writing. Sum�s�lat sya nang l�ham. He is writing a letter, letters. In these examples siy� is enclitic.

Not only enclitically used pronouns (�� 63. 64), but even short phrases are thus used: Pinap�tol nila si Hw�n nang k�hoy. Was-ordered-to-cut by-them Juan (subject) some wood, i. e. They ordered Juan to cut wood. Here the position of si Hw�n after the first orthotonic word of the predicate (pinap�tol) but before the rest of the predicate (nang k�hoy) shows it to be (like nil�) an enclitic element. With the same subject not enclitically used the sentence would be: Pinap�tol nila nang k�hoy si Hw�n, and this, indeed, is the more usual locution.

90. On the use or non-use of an anaphoric subject (siy�, sil�, it�) see � 87.

c. The predicate.

91. The predicate may be (1) a transient word with its modifiers, (2) a static word with its modifiers, or (3) an object expression.

(1) Transient predicate.

92. Transient words fall into four classes according to the four relations which a subject may bear to them when they are used as predicate. We may designate these classes by the following names:

1. active: the subject is viewed as an actor: Sum�s�lat sya nang l�ham. He (subject) is writing a letter, letters. Sya y pum�tol nang k�hoy. He (subject) cut some wood. Umal�s sy�. He went away.

2. direct passive: the subject is viewed as an object fully affected or produced: Sin�lat nya ang l�ham. Was-written by-him the letter (subject), i. e. The letter was written by him, He wrote the letter. Pin�tol nya ang k�hoy. Was-cut by-him the wood (subject), i. e. He cut the wood.

3. instrumental passive: the subject is viewed as a means, an instrument, something given forth or parted from: Isin�lat nya ang kw�nto. Was-written-down by-him the story (subject), i. e. He wrote the story. Ipin�tol nya ang g�lok. Was-cut-with by-him the bolo (subject), i. e. He used the bolo for cutting, He cut with the bolo.

4. local passive: the subject is viewed as an object partly or less fully affected, as a place or sphere: Sinul�tan nya ak�. Was-written-to by-him I (subject), i. e. He wrote me. Pinut�lan nya ang k�hoy. Was-cut-from by-him the wood (subject), i. e. He cut a piece off the wood.

For a detailed description of these classes of transient words, see Morphology.

93. In general the choice between these four constructions is made in accordance with the logical situation: the definite, known object underlying the predication as starting-point of discourse is chosen as subject: Binigy�n nya ak� nang akl�t. Was-given-to (local passive) by-him I (enclitic subject) a book, books, i. e. He gave me a book, books. Ibinigay ny� sa �kin ang akl�t. Was-given (instrumental passive) by-him to me the book (subject), i. e. He gave me the book. In the first example the speaker is talking about himself, in the second about a certain book.

94. However, the active construction is avoided whenever any object other than the actor is available as subject. Especially are active constructions with an anaphoric subject (siy�, sil�, it�) avoided wherever a passive construction is at hand. Thus, in the instance in � 93, even if "he", the actor, were the real subject of discourse, one would rarely use the active construction: Sya y nagbig�y sa �kin nang akl�t. He (subject) gave (active) me a book, books. Even elements which we should look upon as somewhat indefinite are preferred as subjects to an actor: Kin�ha nya ang isa ng akl�t. Was-taken (direct passive) by-him a book (subject), i. e. He took a (certain) book (he knew, or I know which one or what kind).

The active construction is thus confined to instances in which the object-ideas other than the actor are entirely vague and undetermined or lacking: Umal�s sy�. He went away. Sya y kum�ha nang akl�t. He took a book, some books (no matter to him or to me which one or what kind). Sum�s�lat sya nang l�ham. He is writing a letter, letters. Sya y pum�tol nang k�hoy. He cut some wood. Kum�in sya nang k�nin. He ate some boiled rice; but: Kin�in nya ang k�nin. Was-eaten (direct passive) by him the boiled rice (subject), i. e. He ate the boiled rice.

If, in spite of the presence of other definite objects, the actor is very decidedly emphasized, a different construction (�� 104.107.) is used.

(2) Static predicate.

95. The predicate may consist of a static word with its modifiers: Ang b�t� ay maba�t. The child is good. Iy� y masam�`. That's bad, wrong. Pul� ang panyo ng it�. This handkerchief is red.

96. This type of predicate is regular in word-questions: the question word is used as predicate; it precedes the subject: P�no ang pagk�gusto niny� sa trab�ho-ng-kanyun�ro? How (predicate) your liking for (i. e. How did you like) the artillery-service? Pap�no ang pagsas�bi sa w�ka ng Tag�log nang salit� ng Ingl�s na "scissors"? How (predicate) the saying in the Tagalog language of the English word "scissors"? i. e. How does one say "scissors" in Tagalog? Ga�no ang pagkakagal�t nila? How great, How serious was (predicate) their quarrel?

97. This is the construction of the interrogative pronouns in questions asking for the identity of an object,--unless, indeed, these belong rather under type (3). The interrogative pronouns are the following:

(a) s�no who? (singular and plural), s�no-s�no (explicit plural, � 63, end) is used of persons only, and then only when the answer expected is a name or the equivalent; it asks for the identity of a person: S�nu ka? Who are (predicate) you (subject)? S�nu y�n?--Ak�. Who's that? i. e. Who's there?--I. S�nu ya ng tum�tukt�k? Who's that knocking? S�no ang nagbig�y sa iy�? Who (predicate) the one-who-gave (sc. it, anaphoric) to you (subject)? i. e. Who gave it to you? S�no ang nags�bi sa iy�? Who told you? Who told you so? S�no sa kanila ng dalaw� ang nagn�kaw? Which of the two committed the theft? The two are known by name or, at any rate, as personalities. S�no-s�no sa manga b�ta` ang iyo ng n�h�le sa panguum�t? Which ones of the children (predicate) did you catch pilfering? literally: the ones caught by you at pilfering, subject.

(b) an� what? what kind of? how?, explicit plural an�-an�, asks for the identity of a thing or for the description, character, condition of a person or of a thing: Ano y�n?--It� y libr�. What (predicate) is that you have there (subject)?--This is a book. An y�n?--Yo y s�nog. What's that over there?--It's a fire. An� ang ng�lan mo? What is your name? Ano ang s�bi mo? What do you say? Ano ang �big mo? What do you want? Ano-an� ang pinagsab� ni Hw�n sa iy�? What things did Juan tell you?, literally: What things (predicate) the things said by Juan to you? Anu k�? What sort of person are you? An� ang lag�y nang manga b�ta`?... nang as�wa mo? ... nang m� b�hay? What (or How) is the condition of (i. e. How are) the children? ... your husband or wife? ... your wife?

(c) al�n which? which one? which ones?, explicit plural al�n-al�n, is used of persons and things; it asks neither for identification (persons, s�no; things, an�) nor for characterization (an�), but for indication, by pointing or by description of the place or some other unessential feature, of persons or things: Al�n ang gustu m�? Which one, Which ones do you want? Al�n sa kanila ng dalaw� ang nagn�kaw? Which of the two (e. g., of these two strange men) committed the theft? Alin-al�n sa manga p�nu-ng-k�hoy ang iyo ng tinag�`? Which ones of the trees did you cut down?

98. Of the numerative pronouns (� 66), bo�`, ib�, and il�n (in this use interrogative) are used as static predicates: It� y bu�`. This is entire, complete, unbroken. Hind� ko gusto iy�n; ib� ang �ki ng gust�. Not by-me wanted (static predicate) that (subject); different (predicate) that by-me wanted (subject), i. e. I don't want that; what I want is different, I want something else. Il�n ang manglil�gaw? How many are the suitors?

99. Of the modifiers of indefinite quantity (� 69) several are used as static predicates: Sya y wal� na. He is or was gone already. It� y wal�`. This does not take place, does not appear, falls away. Malak� ang s�nog. The fire was great. Mar�mi ang nags�s�bi nit�. Many are they who say this.

100. For the disjunctive forms of personal pronouns and of s�no as static predicates, see � 169. For local expressions, see � 211. For entire predications as static predicates, � 112 f., quotations, � 114.

(3) Object expression as predicate.

101. If the predicate is an object expression, it may have three different forms: (A) definite, (B) circumlocutory definite, and (C) indefinite.

102. (A) A definite object predicate consists simply of a word or phrase in the object construction (� 61 ff.); it has therefore the same structure as a subject. Usually this predicate precedes and is emphatic (emotionally dominant): It� ang �ki ng t�r�han. This is (predicate) my dwelling (subject), i. e. Why, it's here I'm at home!

103. The definite object predicate is especially emphatic in sentences that have as subject a transient word (with or without modifiers) in object construction: Si Hw�n ang nagn�kaw. It was Juan who did the stealing. Siya r�n ang kanya ng in��big. It was he whom she loved. Both nagn�kaw and in��big are transient.

104. When an emphatic actor cannot be used as subject of a transient predicate (owing to the presence of other definite object ideas, � 94), it is often used as the predicate in this construction,--the transient part of the sentence being put into object construction and used as subject. Thus, if, in the sentence: It� y ginaw� ni Hw�n. This (subject) was-done (direct passive) by Juan, the idea of "Juan", the actor, should become dominant, one would not use the active transient predicate ("Si Hw�n ay gumaw� nit�"), for the idea of "this" is too definite to allow of the actor's functioning as subject; one says instead: Si Hw�n ang gumaw� nit�. It was Juan who did this, with "Juan" as definite object predicate and the rest of the sentence, objectivized, as subject. So: Siy� ang nagbig�y sa �kin nang akl�t. It was he that gave me the (or a) book, books. (cf. � 93). Ikaw ng�` ang nags�bi niy�n. It was you yourself who said that.

105. Less commonly the subject precedes the predicate. In this case the construction is quite normal and unemphatic; if there is a transient element it usually stands in the predicate: It� y ang �ki ng t�r�han. This (subject) is my dwelling. Si Hw�n ay ang nagn�kaw. Juan is the one who did the stealing.

106. (B) In the circumlocutory definite object predicate the central element is the pronoun siy� (in this use never enclitic), which is followed by modifiers which express the real content of the predicate. In this use siy� may apply to inanimate objects and to two or more objects (� 63). The subject, which has always a moderate degree of emphasis, usually precedes: It� ay sya k� ng t�r�han. This is what is my home, i. e. This is where I live. In most cases the real content of the predicate is a transient word (with or without modifiers): Si P�dro ay sya ng tum�tukt�k. Pedro is the one (siy�) who is knocking. (Less emphatic than the violently transposed Si P�dro ang tum�tukt�k. It's Pedro who is knocking, of type A). Ang pagk�tahol nang �so ay sy� ng ikin�gising nang b�ta`. The barking of the dog is what woke up the child. Ang manga pangparik�t ay sya k� ng pinamut�lan. The kindlings are what I have cut up. Occasionally the predicate precedes: Bak� sya ng ikap�tol nang pingg� ang kabigat�n nang buh�ngin. Perhaps that which may break the carrying-pole (predicate) the weight of the sand (subject), i. e. See that the weight of the sand doesn't break the carrying-pole.

107. This construction, like that of type (A), is often used when a transient predicate is not permissible with an actor-subject; here, however, the sentence is not, as in (A), reversed, but the actor is used as subject and the rest of the sentence as true content of the circumlocutory predicate: Si Hw�n ay sy� ng gumaw� nito. Juan is the one who did this. Si P�dro ay sy� ng nagbig�y sa �kin nang akl�t. Pedro is the person who gave me the book.

108. A predicate of this type may, in its entirety and as a unit, be objectivized with ang and used as subject of a sentence of type (A): Ang m�diko l�mang ay sya ny� ng m�k�kat�lo. The doctor alone will be the one to oppose him (literally: he by-him who will-be-opposed, direct passive): Ang m�diko l�mang ang sya ny� ng m�k�kat�lo. It is the doctor alone who will be the one to oppose him. Ang bint�na ng iy�n ang sy� ng kah�hul�gan nang b�ta`! It's that window that will be the place where the child will fall out!

109. (C) The indefinite object predicate has the structure of an object expression, but lacks ang (� 68). In meaning it corresponds, roughly, to an English noun-predicate without the: It� y libr�. This (subject) is a book (predicate). Yo y s�nog. That's a fire. It� y mab�ti ng libr�. This is a good book. Si Hw�n ay isa ng magnan�kaw. Juan is a thief. Mas�pag na t�o it�. Industrious people (predicate) these (subject), i. e. These are industrious people.

110. As indefinite object predicates occur especially the expressions of indefinite quantity (� 69). In this use they have possessive value: Sya y m�y fam�lya. He has a family. May �pat na pu ng pa� ang h�ba`. Having forty feet (predicate) the length (subject), i. e. The length is about forty feet. Sya y m�y-roo ng akl�t. He has a book, books. Sya y wala ng akl�t. He has no book, no books. Sya y mar�mi ng salap�`. He has much money. Hind� mal�o ng panah�n ang kanya ng paghihimat�y. Her fainting-spell did not last long. It� y malak� ng kagamit�n. This has great use, is much used.

It is to be noted that all the modifiers of indefinite quantity, except m�y, which is pretonic, are orthotonic and therefore followed by an enclitic subject (� 89): M�y-roon sya ng akl�t. He has no book. But: May dalaw� sya ng an�k. He has two children.

d. Subordinate predications.

111. An entire predication may be used as subject, predicate, or attribute in a longer sentence. The use of such subordinate predications is, however, limited (as opposed, e. g., to English usage) by the habit of freely using transient words (with their modifiers) as attributes: ang s�pot nang kwalt� na kanila ng ibinig�y pagd�ka sa kanila ng mag�lang the bag of money by-them given at once to their parents, i. e. ... which they gave.... It is limited, further, by the freedom of omitting anaphoric elements (� 87): Ang p�no` ay tum�bo hangg�ng sa magb�nga. The tree grew until (sc. it, subject) bore fruit.

112. Predications as predicates occur very frequently. Ang ginaw� nya ay umal�s sya. That done by-him (subject) was went-away he (predication, as predicate), i. e. What he did was, he went away. Ang mab�ti ay it�pun nil� ang manga b�ta`. The best thing (to do) was that they should abandon the children. Ang �sip ko y balat l�mang nang itl�g it�. My thought was (i. e. I thought) this was only an egg-shell.

113. Especially common is a whole predication as a predicate describing or characterizing the subject: Ang k�ba ay mah�na` ang kataw�n. The hunchback was: weak was his body, i. e. was weak of body. Ang ikapitu ng b�ta` ay hind� kin�in ang kanya ng tin�pay. The seventh child was: not was-eaten his bread, i. e. did not eat his bread. Ang isa ny� ng an�k ay pit� n� ng ta�n ang g�lang. His one child was now seven years of age. This construction, together with the use of impersonal expressions (� 84) makes possible such a sentence as: Ang manga karit�n ... ay gab� kung ipal�kad. The wagons ... were: it-was-night when (sc. they, anaphoric subject) were-made-to-go, i. e. The wagons were driven at night.

114. Direct quotations as predicates are frequent: "Is�!" ang s�bi nang bul�g. "One!" was what the blindman said. "T�nay bag� ng ak� y in��big mo?" ang tan�ng nang dal�ga ni Andr�s sa kany�. "Is it really true that you love me?" was the question of Andr�s' young lady to him.

115. A predication as subject is rare: Mab�ti t�yo y dumo�n sa isa ng lug�r.... It is best (predicate) that we go to a place.... Hind� bih�ra` ang manga t�o y nangh�h�le nang buh�y na ungg�`. It is not rare that people go catching live monkeys. It will be noted that these predications are not objectivized, cf. � 88.

116. Occasionally, however, the predication used as subject is objectivized: Hind� bih�ra` ang magkalun�d ang manga t�o. It is not rare that people get drowned, or The occurrence that people get drowned is not rare. S�kat n� ang ik�w ay magpasal�mat. It is fitting now that you be thankful.

117. For predications as attributes see the section on attribution.

e. Omission of predicate.

118. The use of a predicate, or of the central element of a predicate is (like that of any other element, � 87) optional when, if used, it would be anaphoric: (Si Hw�n nam�n ay sumag�t: "Mat�r!" at sa hul�) si Andr�s ang kanya ng "S�!" (Then Juan answered "Matar!" and last) Andr�s his "Si!" The form of the sentence with the predicate (which is anaphoric from the preceding sumag�t answered) would be: ... si Andr�s ay isinag�t ang kanya ng "S�!" ... Andr�s was: was-answered his "Si!", i. e. Andr�s answered his "Si!",--a sentence of the kind described in � 113.

3. Attributes.

119. We may distinguish four constructions in which an attribute may stand: 1. Conjunctive attribution: the attribute is joined by means of the particle na or ng: isa ng t�o a person, one person; 2. Disjunctive attribution: the attribute, which is always an object expression, stands in a special disjunctive form, ang, for instance, being changed to nang: ang p�no nang ungg�` the tree of the monkey; 3. Local attribution: the attribute, which is always an object expression, stands in a special local form, ang, for instance, being always changed to sa: nal�l�go sa �log bathing in the river; 4. Absolute attribution: the attribute merely precedes or follows: hind� t�ma` not correct.

In a sense the last three constructions, which do not employ the particle na, ng, stand opposed to the first, which does. Constructions 2 and 3 make it possible to speak, in a very wide sense, of three "cases" in which an object expression may stand: "subjective" ang �log the river, "disjunctive" nang �log of the river, and "local" sa �log in the river; but it is to be observed that these "cases" are not confined to any class of words, but appear in any word or phrase when it stands in the object construction. [7]

120. In position attributes may be:

A. Loosely joined. In this position occur only attributes of a predicate (or of an entire non-predicative sentence). Their treatment resembles that of a non-enclitic subject (� 89): they either precede the rest of the sentence with ay, y, or follow at the end of the sentence: Do�n ay sy� y nahig�`. There (do�n, loosely joined) he lay down. Nah�nap ko n� ang sombr�ro sa lah�t nang s�lok. I have looked for the hat in every corner. The phrase beginning with sa is loosely joined; it follows all the rest of the sentence, including even the subject, ang sombr�ro.

In the placing of enclitics a loosely joined attribute is ignored: Pagul�n ay gam�tin mo ang kap�te. When it rains use your rain-coat. The enclitic m� follows the first orthotonic word of the predicate (which it modifies), not counting the loosely joined pagul�n.

When a loosely joined attribute precedes, the ay, y is in some cases left off: Dahil d�to tin�wag nya ang kayb�gan nya. Therefore he called his friend. The position of the enclitic niy� shows that dahil d�to is loosely joined, but ay, y is not used.

Occasionally a loosely joined attribute is preceded by the subject and only one ay, y is used: Karany�wa y ang kosin�ro y upah�n. Usually (loosely joined) the cook is hired; but also: Ang kosin�ro karany�wa y upah�n.

B. Closely joined. The attribute immediately precedes or follows that modified: hind� t�ma` not correct; ang p�no nang ungg�` the tree of the monkey.

C. Enclitic. They follow immediately on the first word of the expression modified, counting closely joined attributes, but not loosely joined: Hind� ko n�l�l�man. Not by-me (it) is-known, i. e. I don't know. ang mahah�ba nya ng pa� his (niy� enclitic) long legs.

121. Some attributes always precede (so e. g. hind�`, � 239); others always follow (so, for instance, disjunctive attributes, � 171).

a. Conjunctive attributes.

122. A conjunctive attribute is connected with the word or phrase which it modifies by the atonic particle na. Normally ng takes the place of na after a vowel, n, or the glottal stop (see Phonetics): mab�ti ng akl�t good book, or: akl�t na mab�ti.

However, na and ng are not exactly equivalent. Predications, longer phrases, and, frequently, transient expressions are joined with na even where ng is possible: isa ng malak� ng hig�nte na nal�l�go` a big giant who was bathing.

On the other hand, some constructions use na rarely or not at all: where ng cannot be used the particle is then omitted and we have absolute attribution. These constructions will be described under the latter heading.

In the formation of compound words (see Morphology) na is never used, while ng is a regular element. This latter circumstance sometimes makes it difficult to determine whether a given expression is a conjunctive phrase or a compound word.

123. Conjunctive attributes are closely joined and either precede or follow; for this reason it is sometimes undetermined which of the elements connected is the attribute, which the element modified.

124. The elements connected by conjunctive attribution are viewed as constituting a single larger element. Conjunctive attribution is the normal and general relation between modifier and modified and includes relations that in many other languages (such as English) are viewed in manifold ways. We may divide the construction roughly into three types, although these actually merge into each other: (1) quality, (2) manner, and (3) complement.

Not included in this division are the cases where conjunctive attribution alternates with absolute (� 122), which will be treated of under the latter heading, and a type which in meaning is so closely parallel with disjunctive attribution that it will be more economical to treat it under this head (�� 165.168).

(1) Conjunctive attributes of quality.

125. Conjunctive attributes of the quality type are used chiefly in object expressions. They have no fixed order: ang mab�ti ng akl�t the (a) good book, or: ang akl�t na mab�ti. ang sum�s�lat na b�ta` the writing child, the child that is writing, or: ang b�ta ng sum�s�lat.

126. When they precede a personal name the whole expression is preceded by ang, but when they follow si suffices: ang b�ta ng si Hw�n the child Juan, little Juan, si Hw� ng Tal�nan Juan who is always defeated (as a nickname).

127. Conjunctive attributes of quality tend to precede when they are emphatic or in contrast; when fixed they tend to follow: Ang mar�nong na pag�ng at ang ul�l na ungg�`. The clever turtle and the foolish monkey. Si Hw� ng P�pe ay n�k�ta n�min sa tul�y. We saw Dumb Juan on the bridge. ang b�o ng bab�ye the lower half of the cocoanut shell, ang b�o ng malamb�t the soft shell of the cocoanut, ang w�ka ng Kast�la` the Spanish language. Especially those expressing material tend to follow: ang b�hay na bat� a stone house, ang kor�na ng tin�k a crown of thorns, ang ats�ra ng pap�ya papaw salad, pickled papaw, ang tin�la ng man�k chicken stew, ang s�ko ng p�lay a sack of rice. A modifier expressing the special kind always follows: ang s�la ng pagnan�kaw the crime which is (i. e. of) theft, ang b�syo ng pagin�m the vice of drinking, ang lar� ng tagu�n the game which consists of hiding, the game of hide-and-seek, kan�na ng um�ga a little while ago in the morning, i. e. this morning, il� ng �ras na pagsas�lit�an a few hours of conversation, ang band� ng kataas�n (or: ita�s) the direction (which is) north, i. e. the north; so: ang band� ng kabab�an (or: ibab�`) the south, sil�ngan (or: s�lang�nan) the east, kalun�ran the west, ang gaw� ng k�nan the right-hand side, kaliw�` the left.

128. Titles and the like precede: ang b�o ng si Mary� the widow Maria.

129. The personal pronouns precede their conjunctive attributes: sila ng tatl� they three, Si P�dro ay sy� ng tum�tukt�k. Pedro is the one who is knocking (� 106 ff.).

130. The demonstrative pronouns as conjunctive attributes usually follow: ang t�o ng it� this person, this man, ang tatl� ng it� these three, Ang korb�ta ng ir� ay b�go. This necktie is new.

Occasionally, however, they precede, especially with a longer expression. In this case ang is not used (� 64, end): ito ng s�pot ko nang kw�lta this bag of money of mine; iyo ng �na ng kumalab�g that first thing which made a thud; It� ng b�hay ang binili k�. This house is what I bought, It's this house I've bought, This is the house I've bought (� 102 ff.).

Under emphasis the demonstrative pronoun may both precede and follow: ito ng t�o ng it� this man here, iyo ng t�o ng ya�n that man over there.

131. The interrogative pronouns precede; ang is not used (� 65). See also kan�no, � 168. The meanings of the interrogative pronouns as conjunctive attributes are:

s�no which? (of several known people): s�nu ng t�o? which one? which ones?

al�n which? (of several known things): al� ng lug�r which place, which places? al� ng band�? which way? (e. g. at a cross-roads) al� ng manga b�nga? which fruits? which ones of the fruits?

an� what? what kind of? (of persons or things not known), also, in exclamations, what...! what great...! Anu ng �log it�? What river is this? ano ng band�? what direction? which way? (of all possible points of the compass) anu ng t�o what sort of a person? what sort of people? who? Ano ng h�na`! What weakness!

132. The numerative pronouns mostly precede, and the use of ang is optional (� 66, end); ib� other, however, requires ang when, as conjunctive attribute, it begins an object phrase. Of the others, karam�han most and the particle b�wat every are not used in this construction, and lah�t all occurs only as modifier of the personal pronouns, which (by � 129) precede. The particle b�la any, on the other hand, occurs only as conjunctive attribute: ang iba ng b�hay the other house, another house, sila ng lah�t they all, all of them, b�la ng t�o any person, anyone, ang b�la ng t�o any one (of a given group), bo� ng b�yan all the town, everybody in town, ang bo� ng b�yan the entire town, everybody in the town, il� ng t�o ng matal�no a few intelligent men, ang il� ng sandal�` a few moments.

133. The cardinal numerals usually precede; ang is optional (� 67): isa ng itl�g one egg, an egg; ang isa ng itl�g the one egg.

134. The tens, hundreds, etc. of the cardinal numerals are always modified by is� one or a higher unit. The phrase so formed precedes that counted. The higher numerals are: p�` ten, da�n, ra�n hundred, l�bo thousand, laks�` million, y�ta` billion: isa ng p� ng t�o, s� m pu ng t�o ten men, �pat na ra� ng b�hay four-hundred houses.

135. The teens are expressed by lab� preceding the simple numerals as conjunctive modifier: lab� ng is� ng akl�t eleven books, lab� ng tatl� ng �raw thirteen days.

136. The Spanish numerals, however, (used in dates, � 67) follow: ang ta� ng m�le-nobisy�ntos-d�s the year 1902.

137. sar�le self (see � 175) is used as a conjunctive attribute in the sense of own: Wal� sya ng sar�li ng ba�t. He has no self-respect (literally: own respect).

138. Of the modifiers that form expressions of indefinite quantity all except m�y precede as conjunctive attributes; for examples see � 69 f. In object expressions mal�on, malak� and mar�mi do not differ from normal conjunctive attributes; examples in � 70.

139. Expressions of indefinite quantity as units may stand in conjunctive attribution. They then have possessive value: ang h�re ng may s�ngay the king who had horns; ang kap�tol na wala ng d�hon the part without leaves.

140. Conjunctive attribution includes many cases which in English would be envisaged rather as appositions of two objects: ang b�ta ng si Hw�n the boy Juan, si Hw� ng B�bas Juan the Jester, Sya y may t�nga ng pam�lo`. He has hold of a stick. T�ngan that grasped, thing grasped is conjunctive attribute of pam�lo` club, stick. ang mag�nak na sina Bant�g the Bantog family, tatl� ng magkakayib�ga ng estudy�nte ng magkabab�yan three friends (ng) students (ng) fellow-townsmen, i. e. three student friends from the same town; ang tatl� ng magkakayb�ga ng si P�dro, si Hw�n, at si Andr�s the three friends, Pedro, Juan, and Andr�s; ang salit� ng "b�mos" the word "vamos".

141. When a longer expression is used as a conjunctive attribute of quality, it usually follows, and na is often preferred to ng: ang par�sa na hind� mo gust� the punishment not by-you liked, i. e. the punishment you don't like; is� ng us� ng nang�ngin�in sa g�bat a deer grazing in the jungle; ang is� (sa manga kayb�gan nil�) na sya ng mag�ging huk�m one (of their friends) who will be judge; cf. the predicates described in � 106. ang manga k�ra na sya ng manga malili�t na h�re` the priests (who are) those (who are) little kings, i. e. the priests, those veritable little kings.

142. An object expression is frequently followed by an entire predication of the type described in � 113, as conjunctive attribute: Ang tagah�le ay isa ng t�o ng ang katungk�lan ay hum�le nang ano m�n o s�no m�n. A catcher is a person (whose) duty is to catch anything or anyone. ang manga p�no-ng-k�hoy na masasar�p ang b�nga trees (whose) fruits are tasty; isa ng t�o ng malak� ang kapangyar�han a person (whose) power is great.

(2) Conjunctive attributes of manner.

143. Conjunctive attributes of manner precede or follow. When they precede a predicate they stand as the first orthotonic word and are immediately followed by enclitics (such as an enclitic subject pronoun, � 89), after which comes the na or ng, and then the central element of the predicate: Sy� y mab�te ng tumugt�g. She plays (music) well. This example illustrates the identity of conjunctive attributes of manner and of quality, for mab�te ng tumugt�g may be looked upon indifferently as a transient predicate (� 92) with mab�te well as attribute of manner, or as an indefinite object predicate (� 109) a good player, in which mab�te good is an attribute of quality. Other forms of the same sentence are: Mab�ti sya ng tumugt�g. (siy� enclitic), Sy� y tumugt�g na mab�ti. So further: Is�pin mo ng mab�ti. Consider it well. Literally: Be-considered by-you (m� enclitic) well. Iy�n ay t�t�bo na mab�ti. It will grow well. Sil� y magkakas�ma ng nagsipamar�l. They as-companions (i. e. in company, together) went hunting. Or: They were companion (quality) hunters. Madal� sya ng tumakb�. Quickly he ran. Talag� ng mahigp�t ang tap�n nang b�te ng iy�n. The stopper of that bottle is certainly tight. Mahigp�t tight, as central element of the predicate, is modified by talag� fated, by fate, by nature, certainly. Putik� ng dumat�ng si Salam�n sa b�hay. "Mirror" (as name of a dog) came home all muddy. Or: ... was a muddy comer. Paput�l nya ng tinag�` ang bis�g ni Hw�n. He cut Juan's arm transversely. Kinalaykay k� ng patip�n ang manga sang� ng malili�t nang k�hoy. I raked into-a-heap the twigs of-the trees.

144. A phrase of more than one word usually follows that modified; frequently na is used instead of ng: N�dala ny� na hind� sin�sady�` sa kanya ng pagal�s ang �ki ng p�yong. Was-taken by-him not intendedly in his departing my umbrella, i. e. In leaving he inadvertently took my umbrella.

145. The numerative pronoun lah�t is used as a conjunctive attribute of manner in the sense of entirely, completely. It follows that modified: Ang manga lalagy�n ay p�n�a ng lah�t. The containers are entirely full.

146. Expressions of indefinite quantity as conjunctive attributes of manner follow: Ang manga t�o ay nagtakb�ha ng wal� ng t�to. The people all ran without order, in disorder.

147. The particles lubh�` very and l�lo` more usually precede: Lubh� ng malak� ang g�lit ni P�dro. Pedro's wrath was very great. L�lu ng lumak� ang kanya ng g�lit. His wrath grew still greater.

148. The particle mul�` again follows: T�takbo sya ng mul�`. He will run again. Ang kamakalaw� ay hind� na d�rating na mul�`. The day before yesterday will never come again.

149. A conjunctive attribute of manner may express the time throughout which: Sy� y nanggup�t at nang�hit na mal�o ng panah�n. He did hair-cutting and shaving for a long time. Sil� y nagt�tira na tatlu ng �raw. They stay three days. May ila ng bw� ng ang manga �tos ay mahihigp�t. For several months (literally: having several months, � 69, end) the orders were strict.

150. A word repeated as its own conjunctive attribute of manner expresses a high degree (intensity): Sya y bing�. He is deaf. Sya y bing� ng bing�. He is stone deaf. In�t si P�dro. Pedro is hot, is angry. In�t na in�t si P�dro. Pedro is in a rage. l�him na l�him very secretly, malak� ng malak� very large.

(3) Conjunctive attributes as complements.

151. The general sphere of conjunctive attribution includes cases where one element involves another as result or content. The latter follows and is in many instances plainly viewed as the attribute. In some instances, however, the former may just as well be looked upon as a modifier, usually of quality, sometimes also of manner. The transition from these latter types to that of the complement appears, indeed, in all possible stages, and no real boundary can be drawn. Sya y mab�ti ng tumugt�g (nang piy�no). She is a good player (of the piano), or She plays (the piano) well,--see � 143--can be analyzed also: She is good that (she, anaphoric subject omitted, � 87) plays the piano; and in some instances this last analysis is the only possible one.

Other examples illustrating the merging of the three types we have set up are the following: Mal�pit na siya ng makat�pos nang kar�ra. He was already near that (he) end his course, i. e. near ending his course, almost through his course; or: a near ender, cf. isa ng b�ya ng mal�pit a near-by town. Ang pagmamar�nong ni Hw�n ay gin�gawa ng katatawan�n nang manga nak�k�kil�la sa kany�. Juan's pretending to be wise is made fun of by those who know him, literally: ... is-being-made (gin�gaw�`) that (it) is a laughing-stock, or else: ... a being-made laughing-stock. Cf. ang gaw� ng h�kay the to-be-made ditch, i. e. the ditch that is to be made, where only the quality interpretation is possible. Magt�lin ka ng lum�kad. Walk faster. This can be interpreted as Be a fast walker, or Walk faster, or Be-quick that (you) walk; and this last interpretation comes nearest to the original in so far as magt�lin is an active transient form used in commands rather than an expression suited to an idea of quality or of manner. Sya y nagd�dahil� ng may sak�t. He alleges that (he) is sick. Ang pagsak�y sa kab�yo ay hind� maga� ng pagar�lan. Riding horseback is not easy that (it) be-learned, i. e. not easy to learn, or: not an easy thing-to-be-learned. ang pinakamah�say na magsalit�` nang Lat�n the best that (he) should speak Latin, or: the best speaker of Latin; Hwag k�, Hw�n, pum�suk na sekr�ta. Don't go as a spy (or to be a spy), Juan. Ginaw� nya si Hw�n na barb�ro nang h�re`. Was-made by-him Juan that (he) be barber of-the king, i. e. He made Juan barber royal. Si Hw�n ay pinam�magat�n nang mar�mi na isa ng dokt�. Juan is reputed by the people that (he) is (i. e. as) a learned man.

152. The simplest cases are those where both of the expressions connected by na, ng refer to the same person or thing, as in the above examples. The following are less doubtful cases of complement construction of this kind: Nagp�pum�lit sya ng m�t�to. He strives to get educated. Si Hw�n at si Mary� ay nagk�sundo ng pakas�l. Juan and Maria have agreed that they (i. e. to) get married. Inany�han sil� ni Hw�n na magpasy�l. They were invited by Juan that they (i. e. to) go walking. Ma�ri mo ng� ng ih�lug sa kor�yo ang �ki ng s�lat? Can you please mail my letter? Literally: ma�ri ... ng ih�lug a possible thing-to-be thrown or capable that (it) be thrown. Na��ri ak� ng mal�go mak�lawa magh�pon. I am able that (I) bathe (i. e. to bathe) twice a day. Pinabay�an niya kam� ng umal�s. We were permitted by him to depart. Hinant�y nya ng mat�pus ang m�sa. The mass was-awaited by-him that it end, i. e. He waited until the mass was ended. An� ang gustu mu ng sab�hin? What is desired by-you that (it) be-said? i. e. What do you mean to say? Hind� ko gust� ng m�kat�lo si Hw�n. Not by-me desired that (he) be-opposed is Juan, i. e. I don't want Juan to be my opponent.

153. Clear cases of the complement construction are those in which the two elements connected refer to different persons or things: Nagyay� sya ng umuw�`. He advised that (they, anaphoric) go home. (34, 12.) Ang pagk�mas�d nya sa l�ngit ay sy� ng nagpakil�la sa kany� na �ul�n. His glance at the sky was what showed him that (it, see � 84) was going to rain.

154. When the former of the two elements is an object expression (or similar element) the complement construction is evident: ang kaibig� ng m�t�to the desire that (he) get educated, i. e. the desire to get an education. ang pagk�gusto ny� na kum�in nang ny�g his desire that (he) should-eat cocoanuts, i. e. to eat.... Anu ng tag�l nya ng sum�sid! What endurance of-him that (he) stay under water! i. e. How long he stays under water! Ano ng h�na mo ng lum�kad! What slowness of-you that (you) walk! i. e. How slowly you walk! Ang tagasuls� ay isa ng bab�ye ng may katungk�la ng manah�` o manuls� nang manga p�nit nang dam�t. A darning-woman is a woman having the duty that (she) patch or mend the small holes in clothing, i. e. ... whose duty is to....

155. A further sign that the speech-feeling envisages the complement construction as different from the constructions of quality or manner appears when enclitics follow the first word of the complement (i. e. of the second of the connected elements) rather than the first word of the sentence: this shows that the complement is viewed as a relatively independent element within the sentence: Ma�ri ng� ng ih�lug mo sa kor�yo ang �ki ng s�lat? Should-be-capable that (it) be-thrown by-you into the mail (predicate) my letter (subject)? i. e. Can you please mail my letter? Cf. under � 152 above.

156. Very frequently the complement is an entire predication: ang panuk�la` na ang p�no` ay t�t�bo` the thought that the tree will grow; pagk�tanaw ny� na dum�rating ang sus�` (at the) seeing by-him i. e. when he sees that the snail is arriving; ang �raw na kay� ay d�pat magsipags�si the day that (i. e. when) you ought to repent; Nagk�kap�lad ang man�n�bok na m�k�ta nya ang k�lam. The spier has the good fortune that be-seen by-him the magic principle, i. e. ... to see....

157. A predication as complement is often parallel with a disjunctive object modifier, i. e. with an object expression used as direct, instrumental, or local object (� 184 ff.): Sya y nags�bi ng sya y mar�nong gumup�t nang buh�k. He said that he knew how to cut hair. Ang bul�g ay nagak�la ng gaw� ng katatawan�n ang pagkah�log nang k�ba`. The blindman thought that the falling of the hunchback should be made (sc. niy� by-him, anaphoric) that (it) be a laughing-stock, i. e. decided to make fun of the falling ...; that which one says or thinks, with s�bi and ak�la`, is also expressed as a direct object.

158. Similarly, predications as complements are, in impersonal constructions, parallel with a subject: Sin�bi nya ng sya y mar�nong gumup�t nang buh�k. Was-said by-him that he was able to cut hair, i. e. He said he knew how to cut hair. Hind� bih�ra` na ang isa ng t�o y pamagat� ng m�diko-ng-mangkuk�lam. It is not rare that a man is reputed as a witch-doctor. Cf. the example of predication as subject in � 116. Hinil�ng nya sa ungg�` na dikdik�n sya sa lus�ng. It was begged by him of the monkey that he be brayed in the mortar, i. e. He begged the monkey to bray him in the mortar. Pinabay�an niya na kam� y umal�s. It was allowed by him that we depart, i. e. He allowed us to depart, a less usual form than that in � 152. Totoo ng� na ak� y naparo�n sa Bal�wag. It is true that I went to Baliwag. Ma��ri p� ba ng kay� y maghint�`? Will it be possible please that you should stop? i. e. Can you please stop? In�sip nya ng magn�kaw sa isa ng tind�han. It was planned by him that (he) rob a shop, i. e. He planned to.... Iniy�tus nya ng hum�kay. It was ordered by him that (one, see � 86) should dig, i. e. He ordered people to dig. Hind� mo gust� ng m�h�le ka. Not by-you it-is-desired that you be-caught, i. e. You don't want to be caught.

159. A direct quotation may have the same construction as a predication: Sin�bi nya ng "B�mos!" It-was-said by-him, namely "Vamos!" i. e. He said "Vamos!"

b. Disjunctive attributes.

160. Only object expressions are used as disjunctive attributes, and all object expressions have a special form for this use.

161. Those beginning with ang substitute for this particle the atonic particle nang: ang p�no nang ungg�` the tree of the monkey, ang laruw�n nang b�ta ng si Hw�n the toy of the boy Juan; little Juan's toy, toys.

162. Those beginning with si (�� 59. 126) substitute for this the atonic particle ni; those beginning with sin� (or sil�, � 60) substitute nil� (or nin�), pretonic: ang am� ni Hw�n Juan's father, ang b�hay nila Hw�n the house of Juan and his family.

163. The personal pronouns as disjunctive attributes take the following forms: k� my, nit� of us two, n�tin our (inclusive), n�min our (exclusive); m� thy, niniy�, niny� your; niy�, ny� his, her, nil� their.

The monosyllabic forms k� and m� are always enclitic, the others usually: Hind� ko n�l�l�man. I don't know, literally: Not by-me (it) is-known. ang b�hay nya his, her house, ang mahah�ba nya ng pa� his long legs, ang hind� karany�wa ng tal�no ny� his unusual talents (niy� not enclitic).

164. When these enclitics meet an enclitic subject, they precede, unless by the general rule (� 47) the monosyllabic subject k� precedes a disyllabic disjunctive (including niy�, ny�): Sa�n mo sya n�k�ta? Where by-you he was-seen? i. e. Where did you see him? Binigy�n nya ak� nang akl�t. Was-given by-him I a book, i. e. He gave me a book. Bak� mo iy�n m�b�lag. Perhaps by-you it might-be-blinded, i. e. See that you don't blind it. Hind� ka n�min dinatn�n. Not you by-us were found-there, i. e. We did not find you in.

165. The personal pronouns have another form, which is used as a conjunctive attribute of quality (cf. � 124, end) and always precedes that modified: its meaning, however, is the same as that of the disjunctive forms just given. These prepositive forms are: �kin my, kanit� thy and my, �tin our (inclusive), �min our (exclusive); iy� thy, iniy�, iny� your; kaniy�, kany� his, her, kanil� their, kan�-kanil� their respective, several, various.

Examples: An� ang iyo ng ng�lan? What is your name? or: An� ang ng�lan mo? ang �ki ng am� my father, or: ang ama k�, ang kanya ng b�hay his, her house, ang kany� ng mahah�ba ng pa� his long legs, ang kanit� ng kwalt� our money (i. e. thine and mine), ang kan�-kanil� ng b�hay their several houses.

Only a demonstrative pronoun modifier precedes these prepositive forms: iy� ng iyo ng sambal�lo ng l�ma` that old hat of yours. Exceptions are rare: ang karany�wa ng kanila ng kantah�n their usual song; what they usually sing.

166. The demonstrative pronouns, whether standing alone (� 64) or as modifiers at the beginning of an object expression (� 130), have the following disjunctive forms: nir� of this (right here), nit� of this, niy�n, ny�n of that, niy�n, ny�n, no�n of that (over there). Ang k�lay nir� ng korb�ta ng ir� ay n�p�pag�tan sa it�m at sa pul�. The color of this necktie (I have on) is between black and red. ang d�lo nit� the end of this, ang an�k niy�n that one's child (e. g. with pointing gesture), ang b�hay niyo ng t�o ng ya�n the house of that man over there, ang an�k noo ng t�o ng iy�n the child of that man over there. The form no�n is used chiefly when the disjunctive attribute expresses time (� 192).

167. The interrogative pronoun s�no, whether used alone or standing first in an object expression as attribute (� 131), has the disjunctive form n�no whose? This form, however, is little used, for, while the interrogative pronoun is usually emphatic and tends to come first (� 96), a disjunctive attribute follows that modified (� 171). Hence the form n�no is used only under peculiar conditions of emphasis: Ang sambal�lo n�no? Whose hat (did you say)? Ibinig�y sa iy� n�no? Given to you by whom? Sin�bi sa iyo n�no? Told to you by whom?

168. Instead of n�no a prepositive form, kan�no, explicit plural kan�-kan�no, is ordinarily used; like the prepositive forms of the personal pronouns it stands in conjunctive attribution and precedes that modified. Before it the use of ang is optional (�� 65.131); when ang is used the expression is more definite: Kan�no ng sambal�lo? Whose hat? (the ownership of a given hat is inquired after) Ang kan�no ng sambal�lo? Whose hat? (the ownership of each hat is known; the question asks merely which of them is involved) Kan�no ng akl�t iy�n? Whose book have you there?

169. The prepositive forms of the personal pronouns and of s�no are used also as static predicates expressing possession: Ang libr� ng bin�b�sa mo kah�pon ay �kin. The book you were reading last night is mine. Kan�no ang akl�t na iy�n? Whose is that book? Kan�-kan�no ang manga b�hay na it�? Whose are these houses? The personal pronouns may be followed by sar�le own (cf. � 137): Ang laruw� ng it� y �ki ng sar�le. This toy is my own.

170. All other expressions which lack ang,--that is, the remaining interrogative pronouns, the numerative pronouns, the cardinal numerals, and object expressions in which these as modifiers stand first (� 131 ff.),--prefix nang, atonic, when used as disjunctive attributes: Sa ita�s nang an�? On top of what? Tak�p nang al� ng kah�n it�? Of which box is this the cover? ang panuk�l� nang karam�han the opinion of the majority; Nak�k�ta ak� nang isa ng t�o. I saw a man.

171. All disjunctive attributes are closely joined and follow that which they modify. The only exceptions are the enclitic pronoun forms and expressions of time (� 192). A disjunctive attribute precedes a subject: Binigy�n nya nang akl�t si Hw�n. He gave Juan some books. When the subject is enclitic, it of course precedes: Binigy�n nya si Hw�n nang akl�t. Real exceptions, in which a non-enclitic subject precedes a disjunctive attribute, are not common: Ipinak�kipagp�tol ni Hw�n si P�dro nang lab�ng. Juan is asking someone to cut some bamboo-shoots for Pedro.

172. In meaning disjunctive attribution includes almost all cases in which an object element is viewed as the attribute of another element in the sentence. The only exception is the sphere of relations expressed by local attribution (� 195 ff.). The meanings may, very roughly, be divided into seven groups: (1) possessive-partitive, (2) agent, (3) direct object, (4) instrumental object, (5) local object, (6) manner, (7) time.

173. (1) Possessive-partitive modifier: ang kanya ng b�hay, ang b�hay nya his house, ang p�no nang ungg�` the tree of the monkey, ang p�no nang k�hoy the tree (literally head of wood), ang p�no nang s�ging the banana-tree, Sa ita�s nang an�? On top of what? Nas�nog ang kalah�t� nang p�no`. Half of the tree got burned up. Ang b�yad sa �tang ni P�dro ay l�bis nang dalaw� ng p�so. The payment made to settle Pedro's debt is too great by two pesos. ang �ras nang alaskw�tro the hour of four o'clock, Is� ng sund�lo ng mar�nung nang Lat�n. A soldier who knew Latin, literally: having-knowledge of Latin. ang s�ko nang p�lay a rice-sack (cf. � 127), ang lar� nang bar�ha a game of cards, cf. ang lar� ng tagu�n (� 127) a game consisting of hiding, hide-and-seek, ang katapus�n nang gab� the end of the night; cf. ang katapus� ng gab� the night which was the end, the last night, ang il� ng sandal� nang pagsas�lit�an a few moments of the conversation; cf. ang il� ng sandal� ng pagsas�lit�an a few moments (which consisted) of conversation. Note: ang b�yan nang Bal�wag the town of Baliwag, ang prov�nsya nang Pamp�nga the province of Pampanga.

174. The pronoun lah�t as an object expression is followed by this kind of attribute: lah�t nang t�o all (of) the people.

175. As an object expression sar�le self is modified by disjunctive pronouns: ang kany� ng sar�le his self. Similarly sar�le as conjunctive attribute, in the sense of own: Wal� sya ng ba�t sa kanya ng sar�li. He does not do even himself any good. ang sar�le nila ng b�nda nang m�sika their own band of music; Ang kanya ng sar�li ng bar�l ang kanya ng gin�mit. It was his own gun he used, What he used was his own gun. Cf. �� 137 and 169, end.

176. The modifier may be an entire predication: sa lug�r nang magkasir� sil� in place of the (occurrence that) they should become enemies, i. e. instead of their becoming enemies.

177. Here belongs further the disjunctive attribute with words expressing association, companionship, or equality: Si Hw�na ay siy� ng kab�l�ngan ni Mary�. Juana is the one with whom Maria is whispering. Ang m�sa ng it� ay kasingk�lay nang kah�n. This table is of the same color as the chest. Si Hw�n ay kapant�y ni P�dro. Juan is of the same height as Pedro. Kal�kip nang s�lat ko ng it� ay lim� ng p�so. Enclosed with this my letter are five pesos. g�ya ko like me.

178. Similar is the use of a disjunctive modifier expressing one of the objects, with expressions involving dual or plural ideas: sil� ni Mary� they with Maria, i. e. Maria and he (88,42), sil� ng dalaw� ni Mary� (92,17).

179. Here belongs the disjunctive attribute in exclamatory sentences expressing the high degree of a quality; these are formed with an� (� 131) and with words with prefix ka- (� 76): Ano ng h�na mo! What weakness of-you! i. e. How weak you are! Anu ng luw�t nang hind� nya pagdat�ng! What duration of his not arriving! i. e. How long he is getting here! Kapul� nang panyo ng iy�n! What-great-redness of that handkerchief! i. e. How red that handkerchief is! Kar�nong nang b�ta ng si Hw�n! How much little Juan knows! Kaytip�d na b�ta` ni Hw�n! How-saving a child of Juan! i. e. What an economical boy Juan is!

180. In the preceding and related constructions the attribute may be an entire predication: Kamunt� nang m�tama�n ang b�ta`! What-little-lack of the (occurrence that) the child should-be-hit! i. e. How near the child came to being hit! Munt� nang m�liguwak ang dala ny� ng pul�t. Little-wanting of-the (occurrence that) should-be-spilled the borne by-him honey, i. e. The honey he was carrying came near being spilled.

181. (2) A disjunctive attribute expressing the agent corresponds in sense to the subject of an active transient predicate. When it modifies a transient word, the corresponding active can be formed: Sin�lat nya ang l�ham. He wrote the letter; literally: Was-written by-him (agent) the letter. Isin�lat nya ang kw�nto. He wrote down the story. Sinul�tan nya ak�. He wrote to me. The corresponding active is: Sy� y sum�lat.... He wrote.... Cf. � 92. So further: Pin�tol nya ang k�hoy. The wood was cut by him; active: Sy� y pum�tol nang k�hoy. He cut some wood. Kin�ha nya ang libr�. The book was taken by him; active: Sy� y kum�ha nang libr�. He took some book. �ki ng binit�wan ang b�te. By-me was-let-go-of the bottle, i. e. I let go of the bottle; active: Bumit�w ak�.... Ang hinir�m nya ng kamp�t ay iyo ng k�nin. The borrowed by-him (agent) kitchen-knife by-you (agent) is to be taken, i. e. Take the kitchen-knife he borrowed.

When the word modified is not transient no clear line can be drawn between disjunctive attributes of agent and of possessor: ang kany� ng pagdat�ng his arrival, his arriving, or: the arriving by him, ang g�mit nya ng libr� the book used by him, ang paup� ni Hw� ng s�g�lan the gambling-party invited by Juan, ang dala ny� ng pul�t the honey he is or was carrying, Ang lar� ng tagu�n ay gust� nang manga b�ta`. The game of hide-and-seek is liked by children. Hind� ko gust� ang libr� ng it�; ib� ang �ki ng gust�. I don't want this book; it is a different one I want.

182. When disjunctive agent is the speaker (k� by me or its substitute �ki ng) and the subject is the person addressed (ik�w, k� thou), the pronoun kit� usually takes the place of both. This is the commoner value of kit� (cf. � 63): S�sungang�in kit�. I'll smash your face; the subject of this direct passive expression is the person addressed, the agent the speaker: Ik�w ay �ki ng s�sungang�in would be an unidiomatic equivalent. Ipagl�laba kit� nang dam�t. I shall wash your clothes for you. The predicate is instrumental passive, with you, the person for whom, as subject. H�hatdan kit� nang g�tas. I shall deliver milk to you; local passive.

Occasionally the agent is redundantly added: Kit� ay �ki ng par�rus�han. I shall punish you.

183. A disjunctive agent is used with the words expressing recent completion of an act with prefix ka- and reduplication: (� 77): Kar�rating ko pa l�mang! I have only just arrived. Kak�k�in ko pa l�mang! I have only just finished eating.

184. (3) A disjunctive attribute expressing the direct object corresponds to the subject of a direct passive transient predicate: Sya y kum�in nang k�nin. He ate some boiled rice. Passive: Kin�in nya ang k�nin. Was-eaten by-him the boiled rice, i. e. He ate the boiled rice.

It will be seen that when the direct object is definite it is more likely to serve as subject of a passive predicate (� 94); hence the disjunctive attribute expressing a direct object has often an indefinite partitive value. Sy� y sum�lat nang l�ham. He wrote some letters. Sy� y pum�tol nang k�hoy. He cut some wood. Bigy�n mo ak� niy� ng t�big. Give me some of that water. Kat�tagpi ko niy�n! I have just finished mending that! Sya y naghint�y nang s�sab�hin nang sund�lo. He awaited that which was going to be said by the soldier.

185. (4) A disjunctive attribute expressing the instrument corresponds to the subject of an instrumental passive transient predicate: Sy� y sum�lat nang kw�nto. He wrote down a story, stories. Passive: Isin�lat nya ang kw�nto. Was-written-down by-him the story, i. e. He wrote down the story.

The indefinite value of the disjunctive attribute is here due to the same relation as in the preceding type. Pin�tol nya nang g�lok ang k�hoy. The wood was cut by him with a bolo; instrumental passive: Ipin�tol nya nang k�hoy ang g�lok. Was-used-for-cutting by-him of wood the bolo, i. e. He cut wood with the bolo. Binigy�n nya ak� nang akl�t. He gave me a book.

186. So a direct quotation or an entire predication: Ang bul�g ay sumig�w nang "Tatl�!" The blindman shouted "Three!"; passive: Isinig�w nang bul�g ang "Tatl�!" Ang b�wat isa sa kanil� ay sumag�t nang s�ngay ang kanila ng n�k�k�ta. Each one answered that horns were what they saw.

187. (5) Disjunctive attributes of place correspond to the subject of a local passive transient predication: Sy� y pumanh�k nang b�hay. He entered a house; passive: Pinanhik�n nya ang b�hay. He entered the house. Ang pag�ng ay nagumpis� nang pagsisig�w. The turtle began (a) shouting; passive: Inumpisah�n nang pag�ng ang pagsisig�w.

These attributes are in meaning rather close to local attributes (� 203); as opposed to the latter they are, however, the real correspondents of the subject of a local passive transient predication, expressing a real participation of the object in the action or occurrence,--whereas the local attributes express the place of the action as something more or less unaffected and independent.

188. (6) Disjunctive attributes of manner do not correspond to any kind of subject. When they are used with a transient word the sentence may, however, be reversed so as to make of the attribute a transient predicate of a sentence in which the action (as subject) is spoken of as being "made such and such". Tumakb� sya nang mat�lin. He ran fast. The words nang mat�lin are the disjunctive form of an object expression, ang mat�lin, which would resemble German das schnelle. Our sentence corresponds to: Tinul�nan nya ang pagtakb�. Was-made-fast by-him his running, He ran fast. Sy� y tum�wa nang malak�s. He laughed aloud, cf. Inilakas ny� ang pagt�wa. He made his laughing loud. ... m�n�kaw nang hind� nito n�l�l�man should be stolen in the manner of not by-him known, i. e. should be stolen without his knowing it. mata�s nang kaunt�` higher by a little, a little higher.

189. Expressions of indefinite quantity are used in this way: Sil� y nagtakb�han nang wala ng hint�`. They ran without stopping. This construction is in rivalry with that of conjunctive attribution (� 146).

190. The demonstrative pronouns and the interrogative pronoun an� are not used as attributes of manner; for this value they have separate derivatives: ganit�, ganiy�n, gay�n or gano�n, and ga�no or g�no. These forms, moreover, occur also as static predicates and as conjunctive attributes of quality: ang b�wat sumag�t nang ganit� every one who answered in this way; this could be viewed also as an instrumental object. Ganit� ang kal�g�yan nil�. Their condition was like this. ang ganit� ng manga paglalar�` such games as this; Gany�n ba l�mang ang k�nis mo? Is your skill merely like that? Nak�s�lat ak� kay Hw�n nang gay�n dahil�n sa malak� ko ng pagkag�lit. I came to write like that (or such things, cf. instrumental object) to Juan through my great anger. Gano�n ang �ki ng pagk�rin�g. That was the way (i. e. the form in which) I heard the thing. Ang gay� ng pananalit�` that manner of speaking, that expression. g�nu ng pagp�lit? how much effort? Ga�no ang pagkakagal�t nila? How great, how serious is their quarrel? (Cf. � 96).

191. A special case of the disjunctive attribute of manner is the repetition of a word as its own disjunctive modifier, expressing continuity or insistence of action: Hum�b� nang hum�ba`. It grew longer and longer. Ang kanila ng b�on ay umunt� nang umunt�`. Their provisions grew less and less. Si Hw�n ay t�wa nang t�wa. Juan laughs and laughs. Bil� nang bil� si Hw�n nang p�lay. Juan keeps buying rice.

192. (7) Disjunctive attributes of time express the time when of an occurrence in the past. They differ from other disjunctive attributes in being often loosely joined, in which case they may precede. Pumaro�n sila nang h�pon. They went there in the afternoon. So: nang um�ga in the morning, no� ng tag�raw (nang ta� ng m�le-nobisy�ntos-d�s) in the summer (of the year 1902). Nang umul�n ay gin�mit ko ang kap�te. When it rained I used my rain-coat. N�l�kad sina P�dro nang hind� �ras. Pedro and his party had to start at a time not planned; literally: when not time.

193. Complete predications as disjunctive attributes of time are common. It is as though the whole predication were objectivized: Nang dumat�ng ako do�n ay sya y wal� na. When I arrived there he was already gone. Noo ng sya y b�go ng t�o pa l�mang.... When he was still but a young man....

194. Anaphorically determined disjunctive attributes are often omitted. �big nya ng k�nin ang s�ha`. Desired by-him that be-eaten (by-him) the grape-fruit, i. e. He wants to eat the grape-fruit. Nanghing� sya sa kanya ng manga kapat�d. He asked his brothers and sisters (for some). Hind� nila sya binigy�n. He was not given (any) by them, They did not give him any.

c. Local attributes.

195. An object expression in local attribution expresses a local circumstance of that which is modified, such as the place in, to, or from which, that from whose midst, that about which or owing to which, the person to whom, etc.

196. In this construction initial si is replaced by kay (atonic), sin� by kin� (pretonic), and ang by sa (atonic); object expressions which begin with none of these particles take sa: Si P�dro ay gal�t kay Hw�n. Pedro is angry at Juan. Nakit�luy kam� kina P�dro. We asked hospitality of Pedro's family. Sy� y nan�og sa b�hay. He came out of his house. sa boo ng b�yan in the whole town.

Rarely both sa and kay precede a personal name: It� y n�t�to sa kay May�stro ng Hw�n. This one got his training from Teacher Juan. ang pagk�b�hay nang m�diko sa kay Hw�n the doctor's saving of Juan's life.

197. The personal pronouns and s�no take their prepositive forms after sa: Ibinig�y nya sa �kin ang akl�t. Was-given by-him to me the book, i. e. He gave me the book.

198. In a peculiar construction these prepositive forms are preceded by the particle gan� as a conjunctive attribute, in the sense of so far as ... is concerned: Sa gan� ng �kin sya y ma��ri ng umal�s. So far as I am concerned he may leave.

199. The demonstrative pronouns and an� never stand in local attribution, see � 263 f.

200. Whole predications are rarely used as local attributes:

Dumat�ng ang dal�ga ng it� sa dalawa ng p� ng ta�n ang g�lang. This young woman arrived at (the time when) her age was twenty years, i. e. reached the age of twenty years.

201. Local attributes are mostly closely joined and as a rule follow that which they modify, taking precedence of a disjunctive attribute or of a subject: ang nagbig�y sa �kin nang akl�t na it� the giver to me of this book, the one who gave me this book (Bayad n�) ang �tang sa �kin ni Hw�n. Juan's debt to me (has been paid). Ibig�y mo kay Hw�n ang libr�. Be-given by-you to Juan the book, i. e. Give Juan the book.

Often, however, a disjunctive attribute which is felt to belong closely to what precedes, comes before a local attribute: Bayad-�tang ni Hw�n sa �kin ang rel�s na it�. This watch is Juan's debt-payment to me.

Occasionally the local attribute precedes the expression modified: Sy� y sa bangk�` nang manga bab�e nak�kisak�y. He goes along into the canoe of the women. Sa kabil� ng band� mo ibw�l ang p�no ng iy�n. Make that tree fall in the direction away from me.

202. Very frequently, however, local attributes are loosely joined, preceding or following; in the former case ay, y is sometimes omitted: Sa B�ya-ng-San-Mig�l ay nangy�re ang isa ng nakaw�n. In the town of San Miguel a robbery took place. Hind� makad�dala si P�dro nang kah�n sa kabigat�n nil�. Pedro will not be able to carry any boxes, on account of their heaviness. Sa gan� ng �kin sya y ma��ri ng umal�s. So far as I am concerned he can go. (� 198).

203. We have seen that disjunctive attribution expresses the relation of objects (direct object, local object, instrumental object, �� 184, 185, 187) to an action, provided that these objects are more or less indefinite. If they are quite definite, they are preferably made subjects in a passive construction. Frequently, however, they are instead put into local attribution, which thus competes with these types of disjunctive attribution, but involves a more definite object: Ang b�hay na bat� ay ang �ki ng pinagh�hatd�n nang g�tas. The stone house is the place to which I am delivering milk (instrumental object), i. e. I am delivering milk to the stone house; but: Ang b�hay na bat� ay ang �ki ng pinagh�hatd�n sa b�ta`. The stone house is where I am bringing the child. (nang b�ta` would be a child or children).

It follows that the personal pronouns, which always refer to definite persons, cannot stand as disjunctive objects of transient words, but stand instead in local attribution: Ang b�hay na bat� ay ang �ki ng pinagh�hatd�n sa kany�. The stone house is the place where I am taking him.

Similarly a personal name: Ibig�y mo kay Hw�n ang libr�. Give Juan the book; cf. Bigy�n mo nang libr� si Hw�n. Give Juan a book; "Juan" could not figure as disjunctive local object.

204. In many cases, however, these local attributes differ from disjunctive attributes and from the corresponding subjects of passive constructions: the local attribute represents the object as more externally involved and less thoroughly concerned in the occurrence: Hum�kay sila nang bak�ran. They dug up some yards. Hinuk�yan nil� ang bak�ran. They dug up the yard. In both sentences a serious change, such as unauthorized tampering, is implied; but: Hum�kay sila sa bak�ran. They dug in the yard, merely tells where they did their digging. Sya y pumanh�k nang b�hay. He entered a house (or houses), perhaps illicitly; the house is viewed as in some way affected or intimately involved in the action; so also: Pinanhik�n nya ang b�hay. He entered the house; but: Sya y pumanh�k sa b�hay. He went into the house, He went into his house.

205. In other cases, where a transient predicate is not involved, the same difference appears: the local attribute is a mere scene or attendant circumstance, the disjunctive a real factor: Ang pagtat�bon nang manga h�kay na it� ay tapus n�. The filling up of these ditches is now finished, i. e. These ditches are filled up now; but: Ang pagtat�bon sa manga h�kay ay mah�rap. Filling earth into ditches is hard work. karam�han nang manga t�o most of the people; karam�han sa kanil� most of them; sa ganit� under these circumstances; nang ganit� (� 190) thus, in this manner.

206. Expressions of time as local attributes denote future time when; occasionally also past time: P�paro�n ak� sa makalaw�. I shall go there the day after tomorrow. So: sa l�nes next Monday, cf. no� ng l�nes last Monday. P�ho ak� ng p�paro�n sa alas�ngko. I will surely go there at five o'clock. Sa gabi ng iy�n.... That night....

207. With jussive words with prefix pa- (see Morphology) the person ordered to do so-and-so is viewed as a local feature: Ipinagup�t ko sa barb�ro ng si Hw�n ang buh�k ni Andr�s. Was-ordered-to-be-cut by-me of-the barber Juan the hair of Andr�s, i. e. I ordered the barber Juan to cut Andr�s' hair.

208. Rarely an expression in local attribution is used as a conjunctive attribute in an object expression: it precedes and has the meaning of a disjunctive attribute of possessor: ang sa ib� ng t�o ng kaw�yan other people's bamboo, or: ang kaw�yan nang ib� ng t�o.

209. This construction is much commoner when that owned is anaphorically omitted: ang sa pag�ng that of the turtle, the turtle's, i. e. ang p�no nang pag�ng. So: ang sa kany� his, hers.

210. In other cases anaphoric omission of an element modified by a local attribute is less common: ang pagsak�y sa tr�n sa lug�r nang sa karum�ta the riding on the train in place of the (sc. pagsak�y riding) in the carriage.

211. A static predicate may have the form of a local attribute: Sa lingg� ang �ki ng l�lan sa tr�n. On (next) Sunday my embarking on the train, i. e. Next Sunday I shall take the train. Ang uup� ng it� ay sa h�re`. This seat is for the king.

212. The particle sa has a number of derivatives which are transient in meaning, but otherwise have the same construction as sa; they are pretonic. Sya y n�sa Mayn�la`. He is in Manila. Sya y n�sa kanya ng b�hay. He is in his house. Ang tinter�han ay n�sa b�ngit nang lam�sa. The inkwell is at the edge of the table. For these forms see Morphology.

d. Absolute attributes.

213. Absolute attribution, in which no particle is used, is confined to certain expressions and types of expressions. Some absolute attributes and some of the particles introducing absolute attributes end in -ng or -t; these may contain the particle ng or at (� 313).

We may divide the cases of absolute attribution into six types, although these are not fully distinct from one another: (1) enclitic particles, (2) prepositive particles, (3) single words used as attributes of manner and time, (4) absolute complements, (5) words used with disjunctive and local attributes, (6) words introducing subordinate phrases or predications.

(1) enclitic particles.

214. The enclitic particles which are used as absolute attributes follow a monosyllabic enclitic pronoun (k�, k�, m�) but precede a disyllabic enclitic pronoun (including niy�, ny�, siy�, sy�). Among themselves they follow the general rule: monosyllabic enclitics precede disyllabic enclitics (� 47).

215. b� is expressive of interrogation in yes-and-no questions and often in others: M�y-roon ba sil� ng ginaw�`? Have they done anything? M�y-roon ka b� ng g�gaw�n? Have you anything to do? Ipin�p�tol mo ba ak� nang tub�? Will you cut some sugar-cane for me? Pinapagp�p�tol ba nila sy� nang k�hoy? Does he get ordered by them to cut wood? i. e. Do they have him cut wood? Ano b� ang inil�l�tu mo? What is it you are cooking? Anu ba kay�? What sort of people are you? Hind� mu ba n�k�ta si Hw�n sa tey�tro? Didn't you see Juan at the theatre? Ang iyo b� ng kapat�d? Your sister? See �� 223. 229.

216. bag� throws more stress on the interrogation: Ik�w bag� y nagas�wa? Did you (ever) get married? See �� 290. 317.

217. d�w, r�w expresses that the sentence represents the saying of someone other than the speaker; the person so quoted may be the agent of the sentence itself: Pagk� pinapagp�tol mo r�w sya nang kaw�yan ay l�l�yas sy�. When he is ordered by you to cut bamboo, he will leave, I am told, or: he will leave, he says. Ang paguup� raw nya sa dam� ay mab�ti sa kany�. He says (or: They say) his habit of sitting on the grass is good for him. It is sometimes used pleonastically, see the example in � 278.

218. d�n, r�n expresses that the expression modified (which may be the whole sentence or an element within the sentence) is like a corresponding earlier idea: Ako r�n ang nagpal�go sa b�ta`. It was I, too, that bathed the child (beside the other things I did), i. e. I also bathed the child. Si Hwan d�n ang nagl�nis nang kabalyer�sa. Juan also cleaned a stable or stables (beside the other things he did). Si Hw�n ay nagl�nis r�n nang kabalyer�sa. Juan, too, cleaned stables. Here d�n is an attribute of nagl�nis nang kabalyer�sa: this act has been performed by Juan even as by others previously spoken of or known of. Si Hw�na ay nagl�to nang estop�do; kamakalaw� nagl�tu rin ak� nang estop�do. Juana cooked meat-stew; day-before-yesterday I too cooked meat-stew. Iyo ng �na ng kumalab�g ay ak�, ang ikalaw� ay ako r�n. That first thing which came down with a thud was I, the second was I again. Nah�log d�n sy�. He fell down again. K�hit na madil�m ang gab� ay nagpasyal d�n si P�dro. Although the night was dark, Pedro none the less (i. e. even as at other times) took a walk.

Thus d�n is especially common in expressions of identity: Kah�pon ay nak�k�ta ako nang isa ng t�o sa Mayn�la`, at ngay�n ay n�k�ta ko ang t�wo r� ng iy�n sa b�ya ng it�. Yesterday I saw a man in Manila, and today I saw the same man in this town.

In some instances d�n modifies an element not actually identical with another. Nagtal�n sya sa bint�na`, d�tapuwat sinund�n din sy� nang am�. He jumped out of a window, but he was followed, too, by the father. See �� 221. 227. 238. 239. 262, (11).

219. kay�` expresses doubt or possibility of choice: An� kay�` ang ipinag�tos mo sa kany�? What perchance did you order him to do? M�p�pagk�ro` kay� nya sa s�lat na iy�n ang �big mo ng gaw�n nya. Perhaps he may be able to make out from this letter of yours what you want him to do. Bak� kay�` magkaput�l ang manga tub� sa kalakas�n nang h�ngi ng it�. I am afraid that perhaps the sugar-cane may all break off, what with the strength of this wind.

For another use of kay�` see � 297; cf. �� 317. 321.

220. l�mang only: Is� l�mang ang mans�nas na n�tira sa lam�sa. Only one apple is left on the table. So: �isa l�mang only a single one. Sila ng tatl� ay wal� ng pagk�in kung hind� ang itl�g l�mang na n�t�tir�. The three had no food except only the egg that was left.

Occasionally l�mang follows the expression it modifies: isa ng ik�pat na part� l�mang only a fourth part.

Sometimes a na is left off after l�mang: �kin l�mang pin�putl�n nang buh�k. By-me (for �kin ... na, ng) only (he, anaphoric) is-getting-cut of hair, i. e. I am only cutting his hair. siya l�mang k�k�in nang itl�g he (who; normally this relation is expressed by na, ng) will-eat the egg, i. e. the one who is alone to eat the egg. See �� 227. 243.

221. m�n expresses contrast with what precedes; it is the opposite of d�n, and the two are often used in one sentence to emphasize the point of difference and that of identity: Si Hwan m�n ay nagl�nis (r�n) nang kabalyer�sa. Juan, too, cleaned stables (as did others). L�l� n� lumak� ang g�lit ni Hw�n, nang m�balit�an niya ng ang ikalaw� m�n nya ng an�k ay nagsund�lo r�n. Juan's anger grew even greater when he learned that his second son too had (like the other) become a soldier.

With interrogatives m�n produces indefinites: Wal� ng anu m�n. There is nothing at all; also: Not at all, i. e. You're welcome. ang ano m� ng pas�kit any kind of injury; ang alin m� ng pangk�t any team; s�nu m�n any person whatever, anyone at all. See �� 227. 248. 262, (7. 10). 290. 317.

222. m�na expresses that that modified precedes another thing: Mag�w�tan m�na t�yo, b�go t�yo maghiw�-hiwal�y. Let's sing a song together (first) before we part. Mang�ko ka m�na... First promise....

223. n� takes into view the maturity of a situation (cf. German schon): Ang libr� y gamit n�. The book is used already, i. e. is second-hand. Agad n� ng l�lam�g. It will soon be cold now. Pa�lam na ak� (sa iy�). Good-bye (to you). Nah�nap ko n� ang sombr�ro. I have already looked for the hat. Nah�nap na ny� ang sombr�ro. He has.... ang mal�on na nila ng pagpupuy�t gabi-gab� their long staying up now every night, i. e. the fact that they have staid up late every night now. �isa na l�mang pangk�t only a single group now. It precedes b� (� 215): Nakahand� na ba ang �ki ng pangpal�go`? Is my bath ready? G�nu ka na b� kak�nis? How clever are you by this time?

It is used also in brusque or familiar commands: P�l� na sa kanya ng kam�y! Hit him on his hand! S�ma na sa �kin. Come to me (to a child). �lag ka na riy�n! Be off there! See �� 224. 226. 227. 229. 242. 244.

224. nam�n expresses transition to another subject, hence often also mild contrast: H�bang si Hw�na ay nagl�l�to`, si Hw�n nam�n ay nagl�l�nis nang b�hay. While Juana is cooking, Juan cleans the house. Anu ka ba nam� ng t�o? What sort of person are you, anyway? Ib� nam�n ang gaw�n mo ng l�to sa man�k. You are to cook the chicken in a different way. siya r�n nam�n ny� ng karany�wa ng kin�k�in that which, however, is usually eaten by him.

The combination n� nam�n means again: Ma�nit na nam�n. It's hot again.

225. naw�` pray, please expresses imprecation: Kaawa�n naw�` ninyo kam�, poo ng Dy�s! Take pity on us, O Lord!

226. ng�` is assertive and emphasizing: Oo ng�`. Yes indeed. Ikaw ng�` ang nags�bi niy�n. You yourself are the one who said that. It is used in polite requests: It�ru nga niny� sa �kin ang da�n. Please show me the way. Ipakip�tol mo ng�`, Hw�n, ang tinib�n sa �ki ng bak�ran. Please, Juan, cut down for me the banana-stump in my yard. It follows n�: Pakip�tol na ng�` ang sin�lid na it�. Please cut this string for me. See � 229.

227. p� expresses the immaturity or continuance of a situation (cf. German noch) and stands in contrast with n�. Its meaning is often emphasized by l�mang: mab�ti p� better yet, �big ko p� nang k�nin. I should like some more rice. Hampas�n mo pa sy�. Whip him some more. Sar�w� pa ang dam�t. The clothes are still wet. It precedes d�n and m�n (cf. � 248): ang isa pa r� ng k�luluwa another (i. e. one more) soul; Hind� pa r�n lubh� ng maliw�nag. It was, however, not yet light enough. Kag�g�sing ko pa l�mang. I have only just waked up. See �� 243. 248.

228. pal�, used after hind�` (� 239), expresses contrast with one's expectation, reversal: Ang �sip ko y balat l�mang nang itl�g it�, hind� pal�, kun d�` itl�g na bo�`. I thought this was only an egg-shell, but no, it was a whole egg.

229. p�` is expressive of politeness toward the person addressed: Oo p�`. Yes, sir; Yes, ma'am. Pat�taw�rin p�`! Pardon me; used also in refusing to give alms. Pat�taw�rin po nang il� ng sandal�`. Excuse me for a few moments, please. Maghint� pu kay�. Please stop (plural or polite singular). Magsihint� pu kay�. Please stop (explicit plural). Umup� po kay�. Please sit down. Maup� po kay�. Please be seated. Ikinal�lungkot ko p�` ang kasawi�-ng-p�lad na nangy�re sa iny�. I lament the misfortune which has come to you. ang iyo p� ng Kam�h�lan your Majesty. p�` precedes b� and follows n� and ng�`: Kaawa�n na p�` ninyo kam�, poo ng Dy�s! Take pity on us, O Lord! Ma��ri pu b� ng kay� y maghint�`? Can you please stop? Occasionally p�` follows that modified: Magand� ng �raw p�`! Good day; How do you do?

230. s�na expresses unreal futurity in the past or doubtful futurity in the present; in the latter sense it expresses modesty in a request: Ipagl�laba s�na kit� nang iyo ng dam�t, ng�nit wal�` ako ng sab�n. I would wash your clothes for you, but I have no soap. Isin�lat ko sa kany� ng pil�tin s�na niya ng m�par�to sa �tin, pag sya y n�r�rit� sa b�ya ng it�. I wrote to him to try to get round here to us when he gets to this town.

231. tul�y further, in continuation: Sin�bi tul�y niy�.... He said further....

232. ul�` again, equivalent with mul�` (� 148), has two irregularities: it is often not enclitic but closely joined postpositive, and, in this case, it may, entirely like mul�`, be conjunctive instead of absolute: Nah�log ul� sya. He fell again; but: Umaky�t sya ul�`. He climbed again; and even: ... nang magda�n sya ng ul�` sa pas�ga ng it�.... when he again walked on this beach.

(2) prepositive particles.

233. Certain particles used as absolute attributes always precede that modified. They fall into two groups: (A) regular closely joined modifiers, and (B) particles which immediately precede single words or short phrases.

234. (A) The closely joined particles usually receive regular treatment, being followed, for instance, by enclitics. Occasionally, however, the feeling seems to be that the particle is, as it were, placed before the whole sentence; in this case a non-enclitic subject or a loosely joined attribute or a second closely joined attribute may follow the particle, and the last-named may (instead of the particle) be followed by some or all of the enclitics.

In the case of huw�g (� 240) we meet for the first time alternation of absolute and conjunctive attribution, which mostly follows the principle that the latter construction is used where ng (as opposed to na) is possible (� 122).

235. bak�` is expressive of an undesired contingency; it is the negative of wishes and fears: Bak� ka maput�lan nang dal�ri`, Hw�n. You might get your finger cut off, Juan, i. e. See that you don't ... or I hope you won't.... Bak� nya ik�taw� ang iyo ng s�sab�hin. Perhaps what you intend to say will only make him laugh. Bak� t�yu ang pagbintang�n nang p�re`. I am afraid the priest may suspect us. See � 317.

236. b�kit why? B�kit ka napar�to? Why have you come here? B�kit mo inak�la`...? Why do you think...? B�kit hind� ka mag�ral...? Why don't you learn...?

237. d�` not is often used instead of hind�` (� 239) before shorter expressions: d� mal�yo` not far, d� karany�wan unusual, Si Hw�n ay d� nat�kot na sumak�y. Juan was not afraid to mount. See � 301.

238. gay�n (� 190), in this use always followed by d�n (� 218), also, furthermore: Sya y isa ng t�o ng may kaunt� ng tal�no at gayon d�n may kaunt� ng t�pang. He was a man of some cleverness and also of some courage.

239. hind�` not is used where the specific negatives �yaw (� 267), bak�` (� 235), huw�g (� 240), and wal�` (�� 61. 81. 89) are not applicable. Occasionally it is replaced by d�` (� 237). Hind�`. No. Hind� ak�. (It is, was) not I; I don't, didn't, etc. Hind� b�le. It doesn't matter. Hind� ko n�l�l�man. I don't know. Hind� ko sya n�k�ta. I didn't see him. Hind� ko mab�sa iy�n. I can't read that. Ang t�nay na lak� nang buw�n ay hind� sya ng n�k�k�ta nang manga t�o kung gab�. The real size of the moon is not that which people see at night. ang kanya ng t�kot na bak� hind� nya ab�ta ng buh�y ang kanya ng in��big his fear that (perhaps) he should not see his loved one alive.

Hind�` negates only the material part of a word, not its grammatical (affixal) elements: Ang kamahal�n nang man�k ay sya ng hind� ikabil� nit� nang mar�mi ng t�o. The high price of chicken is that which not causes-to-buy it many people, i. e. causes many people not to buy it; the idea of buying is the material element of i-ka-bil� (see Morphology); the causal idea, which is expressed by the prefixes i-ka- is not negated. Ang pagkukubl� nang manga sund�lo ay siy� nil� ng hind� ikinamat�y. The hiding of the soldiers is what caused them not to be killed, i. e. saved them from death.

Note hind� r�n (� 218) also not, nor, and gay�n d�n hind�` (� 238): Ang dal�ga ng si Mariy� y sumay�w sa b�la ng t�o ng humil�ng sa kany� sa s�y�wa ng pinaroon�n niya kagab�: sya y hind� nam�li nang kanya ng sinam�han at hind� rin nam�n nam�li nang tugt�g na kanya ng sinayaw�n; gayon d�n hind� nya inin� ang b�lang at ang kadalas�n nang kany� ng pagsay�w. Miss Maria danced with any man that asked her at the dance to which she went last night: she chose neither her partners nor the music to which she danced; nor did she mind the number and the frequency of her dances. See �� 228. 237. 301. 319.

240. huw�g, hw�g is the negative of commands, purpose, obligation. Where ng is possible conjunctive attribution takes the place of absolute: Ang hang�d ay ang huw�g bay�a ng lumagp�k sa l�p� ang b�la. The aim is not to let the ball fall to the ground. (46, 36) Sin�s�bi nya r�to na hw�g sun�gin ang �mi ng b�hay. He told them not to burn our house. Ang t�ro sa �kin nang may�stro ay hw�g ak� ng mapagaw�y. The teacher's order to me is that I must not be quarrelsome. Hwag m� ng taw�nan si Hw�n. Don't laugh at Juan. Hwag k� ng umy�k. Don't cry. Hwag k�, Hw�n, pum�suk na sekr�ta. Don't go as a spy, Juan. See � 239.

241. kaniy�`, kany�` therefore, as a result, consequently: Bumit�w ang b�ta` sa l�bid, kany� n�parap�` ang kany� ng kahatak�n. The child let go of the rope, and so the one he was pulling against fell. Kany�` hind� tul�` ang kanya ng kinant�. Therefore what he sang was disconnected. Kany�` sa katapus�n ay sin�bi nya... Therefore in the end he said.... Occasionally it is loosely joined: Kany� y sya y umal�s. Therefore he went away. See �� 295. 324.

242. l�lo` (� 147), in this use always followed by n� (� 223), especially, very: L�l� na kung isa ng tah�l nang �so ang mak�g�sing sa kanya, sya y n�p�paluks�. Especially when the barking of a dog awoke him, he would involuntarily jump. Sya y nang�ng�in nang t�o l�l� n� nang manga b�ta`. It makes its food of people, especially children.

243. sak�` after that, then: Pagk� pinapagp�p�tol ko n� sya nang k�hoy ay sak� sya nagd�dahil� ng may sak�t. As soon as I order him to cut wood, (then) he alleges that he is sick.

Especially sak� pa l�mang (� 227) only then, not till then: Kapag ipinam�m�tol na nya nang k�hoy ang lag�ri` ay sak� mo pa l�mang k�nin it� sa kany�. When he uses the saw for cutting wood, only then do you take it from him.

244. tuw�` when followed by n� (� 223) is used as a loosely joined prepositive attribute: every time: Tuw� n� y sy� ang nag�ng m�nanal�. He turns out victorious every single time. See �� 307. 317.

245. (B) The particles of the second group are mechanically prefixed, as it were, to that modified.

246. The pretonic particle b�wat every precedes that modified, forming an object expression with or without ang (� 66, end): B�wat mar�nung nang leksy�n ay maka�al�s pagdat�ng nang alas�ngko. Everyone who knows the lesson will be allowed to leave at five o'clock. Ang b�wat hind� mar�nung nang leksy�n ay m�t�tir� hangg�ng alas�s. Every one of those who do not know the lesson will have to stay till six o'clock. b�wat t�o everyone, each person.

247. ga�no, g�no how? (� 190) is used absolutely before words with prefix ka- expressing high degree of a quality (see Morphology and cf. �� 76. 179): g�no katab�`? How fat? g�no kal�yo`? How far? G�nu ka na b� kak�nis? How clever are you now?

248. The pretonic particle k�hit precedes interrogatives and is� one absolutely or with na; its force is generalizing, more emphatically than m�n (� 221). The expression so formed is an object expression used with or without ang (� 68): ang k�hit na s�no, ang k�hit s�no, k�hit na s�no, k�hit s�no anyone, anyone whatever, no matter who, k�hit an� anything whatever, k�hit na anu ng t�o any sort of person whatever, k�hit na s�nu ng t�o any person whatever, sa k�hit al� ng band� in any direction, k�hit is� anyone whatever, even one.

These expressions are often strengthened by m�n (� 221) or p� m�n (� 227): Hind� na sya sumak�y sa k�hit ano pa m�n. This time he did not ride on anything. k�hit s�nu m�n anyone at all.

Expressions beginning with k�hit have the peculiarity that in the two normally conjunctive constructions in which they stand na, ng is often omitted before them:

After wal�` (� 138): Wal� k�hit an�. There isn't a thing. Wal� sila k�hit an�. They haven't a thing. So even when wal�` does not immediately precede: N�buks�n ang pint� nang wala ng nak�m�lay k�hit s�nu m�n. The door came open without anyone noticing it. Wal� pa sila ng n�h�h�li k�hit an�. They had not yet caught anything, literally: anything that was caught. Wal� sya ng n�l�l�man k�hit isa ng h�ta. He did not know a single iota. Occasionally na, ng is used: Wal� sya ng m�k�ta ng t�o ng k�hit an�. He saw no person whatever.

As (normally conjunctive, � 149) attribute of time during which: Sya y hind� m�tah�mik k�hit is� ng sandal�`. He cannot keep quiet even for a single moment. See �� 253. 294.

249. k�puw�`, k�pw�` fellow-, equally, applied to one of a pair, is sometimes used with personal pronouns: in this case it follows (cf. � 129): Si P�dro at si Hw�n ay dalawa ng k�pwa magnan�kaw. Pedro and Juan are two fellow thieves. ang k�pwa nya magnan�kaw his fellow-thief, K�puwa ma�nam ang tin�g nila ng dalaw�. The voices of the two are equally pleasant. K�pwa sila malak�s. They are equally strong. Sin�saktan sil� k�puwa`. They both get hurt. Redundantly: Nam�log si Hw�n nang �lo nang k�pwa nya kalar�`. Juan fooled (literally: rounded the head of) his (fellow) playmate.

The word modified may be anaphorically omitted: Ang t�wo y hind� d�pat sumak�t nang kanya ng k�pwa`. One must not injure one's fellow (sc. t�o man).

250. The transient pretonic particle mag�ng and its other transient forms (see Morphology) express that the word or phrase modified is something coming into being, arising, at the time specified by the tense-form of the particle: Sya y nag�ng huk�m. He became judge. ang nag�ng pagk�hul� the falling-behind which arose, Nag�ng isa sy� sa manga hind� n�tangg�p. He turned out to be one of those who were not accepted.

251. The pretonic particle mang� is the sign of explicit plurality with object expressions. It precedes the central element immediately, not even the na, ng necessitated by a preceding conjunctive attribute comes between; only ib� may come after mang�: ang kany� ng mag�lang, or: ang kany� ng manga mag�lang his, her parents, ang manga ib� ng t�o other people. Redundantly: Sa tap�t nang b�hay ni P�dro ay mar�mi ng manga bulakl�k. In front of Pedro's house there are many flowers. Ang �raw ay sya ng pin�poon nang il� ng manga salb�he sa �frika. The sun is worshipped by some savages in Africa. And even: ang manga ilan p� ng manga tan�ng several further questions. With mang� compare the prefix of the same form, see Morphology.

252. The pretonic particle m�y belongs here. For examples see �� 69. 70. 85. 110. 139.

253. n� pretonic, is a frequent substitute (Spanish) for k�hit (� 245) in negative sentences. The object expressions which begin with it never take ang (� 68): N� isa y wal� ng n�tira. There isn't a single one left. Wal� n� isa. There isn't a single one. N�buks�n ang pint� nang wala ng nak�m�lay n� s�nu m�n. The door came open without anyone noticing it. Wal� ng n�tira n� isa nang manga p�ras sa m�sa. Not one was left of the pears on the table.

Occasionally n� seems to take the place of nang before k�hit: B�kit hind� sya mak�tagpo n� k�hit is� nang manga b�gay na it�? Why could he not meet even a single one of these things? Cf. � 319.

254. The pretonic particle tag�, tig� preceding an expression of place forms an expression denoting a person from that place: Sya y isa ng taga Kapamp�ngan. He is a Pampangan. ang taga b�kid, ang tiga b�kid: ang isa ng t�o ng t�bo sa b�kid a country-man: a person raised in the country, ang may�ma ng taga iba ng b�yan the rich man from another town, stranger, foreigner, ang manga taga iba t ib� ng lupa�n people from various countries. So: taga b�yan, tiga b�yan townsman, taga Filip�nas Filipino, taga Am�rika American, taga Esp�nya Spaniard (beside Amerik�no, Kast�la`). Cf. in Morphology, the prefix taga-.

255. Numerative pronouns and cardinal numerals are used as absolute attributes before kat�o persons, men: sa m p� kat�o ten people, ten men; or: sa m p� ng t�o; Il�n kat�o (or: Il� ng t�o) ang bum�hat sa b�hay? How many men lifted at the house?

256. The terms of relationship and titles which are treated as personal names (� 59) precede a name as absolute attributes; after most of those that end in a syllabic, n, or `, ng is however used. Some titles occur only in this construction: si K�ya ng P�dro my oldest brother Pedro, si At� L�leng my oldest sister Lola, si Ingk�ng P�ro Grandfather Pedro, si Ind� ng Hw�na, or: si Imp� ng Hw�na Grandmother Juana, si �li ng Mary�, or: si Tiy� Mary� Aunt Maria, si M� ng Andr�s Uncle Andr�s, Don Andr�s, si Gino� ng Polik�rpiyo Mr. Policarpio, si G�ning M�rkes Miss or Mrs. Marques, si P�r� Hw�n Father Juan, si May�stro ng P�dro Teacher Pedro, Master Pedro, si B�o ng Mariy� Widow Maria, si nas�ra ng Mariy� the deceased Maria.

(3) words used as absolute attributes of manner and time.

258. Derivatives by doubling of words of time, in the sense of every (day, night, etc.). With these goes the compound �raw-gab� day and night. For both formations see Morphology. Hin�hatdan ny� ak� nang g�tas �raw-�raw. He delivers milk to me every day. Gabi-gab� ay tin�tul�gan nang bant�y ang �ki ng b�hay. Every night the sentry makes our house his sleeping-place.

259. Words with prefix ka- referring to past time (see Morphology): Ang p�t�ya ng nangy�ri kagab� ay paglalas�ng ang nag�ng sanh�`. The killing that occurred last night had drunkenness as its cause. Ang manga �so sa b�ya ng it� ay nagt�h�lan kagab�. The dogs in this town all bayed last night. Ang kab�yo ay namat�y kah�pon. The horse died yesterday. Pumaro�n ak� kamakalaw�. I went there day before yesterday.

These may be followed by a disjunctive attribute telling the specific time when: Nagsip�tol kam� nang tub� kah�pon nang h�pon. We cut sugar-cane yesterday afternoon. So: kah�pon nang um�ga yesterday morning.

260. Words of time with prefix kin�- and suffix -an expressing actual past time (see Morphology): Kin�h�ti-ng-gabih�n ay n�gising sy�. When midnight came he woke up. Kin�buk�san hin�nap sil� nang kanila ng am�. On the next day they were called by their father.

With disjunctive attribute telling the special time: Kin�buk�san nang h�pun ay naparo�n sila sa simb�han. On the next day in the afternoon they went to church.

261. Words of time preceded by the pronouns bo�` and is� as conjunctive modifiers: Sila y nagsipagsug�l gabi-gab� bo� ng magdam�g. They gambled all night every night. Isa ng �raw naup� sya sa tabur�te. One day he sat down on his chair. Ang iy� ng kapat�d ay nal�go isa ng h�pon. Your sister bathed one afternoon. Isa ng gab� ay n�rinig ko.... One evening I heard.... So: isa ng katanghal�an one midday, isa ng lingg� one Sunday, isa ng tangh�le` one noon, isa ng um�ga one morning. As conjunctive attributes: Sya y nagl�lakad na isa ng gab�. He was walking one night. P�paroon sya ng isa ng lingg�. He will come one Sunday. Those with bo�` also as local attributes: Nakatahul n� ang manga �so sa bo� ng magdam�g. The dogs have been barking all night.

262. Various words of time:

(1) antim�no beforehand (Spanish).

(2) b�kas tomorrow: Magp�pap�tol ba t�yo nang k�hoy b�kas? Are we going to have some wood cut tomorrow? With disjunctive attribute of specific time: Mags�sip�tol kam� nang tub� b�kas nang um�ga. We are going to cut sugar-cane tomorrow morning.

(3) d�ti for a long time already; formerly; it is sometimes closely joined: ang mukh� nang bab�ye, na d�ti y nagp�pakil�la nang malak� ng paghih�rap the face of the woman, which before had been showing great suffering; D�ti n�riy�n ang mans� ng iy�n. That spot has been there for a long time. As conjunctive attribute: D�ti sya ng nap�par�to sa �ki ng b�hay. He has been coming to my house since long ago.

(4) kadalas�n often, usually: Ang kanya ng pinas�sak�tan kadalas� y nag�anyo ng p�ra ng ul�l. The person he is injuring usually acts as if crazy.

(5) kan�na a little while ago, just now: Sin�bi ko na p� sa inyo kan�na, na.... I just told you a little while ago that....

With a conjunctive attribute of the specific time in the phrase kan�na ng um�ga this morning, which may be closely joined: Kum�in ka ba kan�na ng um�ga nang karn�?--Hind� ako kum�in nang karn� kan�na ng um�ga. Did you eat meat this morning?--I did not eat meat this morning.

(6) karany�wan mostly, usually: Ang kosin�ro karany�wa y upah�n. The cook is usually hired.

(7) k�ylan, k�lan when? K�ylan ako mal�l�go`? When shall I bathe? K�ylan pa kay� pangh�hinay�ngan nang manga t�o ang manga �ni ng ta�n-ta� y n�s�s�ra nang lukt�n o nang t�yot? When, pray, will the people regret the harvests every year destroyed by locusts or by drought? So k�ylan m�n at any time, ever, always (�� 221. 317): K�ylan m� y hind� nil�lim�tan si Mary�. Maria was never forgotten.

(8) mak�law� twice, when with magh�pon per day: Na��ri ako ng mal�go mak�lawa magh�pun, dahil�n sa kain�tan. I can bathe twice a day on account of the heat. Alone mak�law� is a conjunctive attribute: Mak�lawa ko ng itinan�ng kung sa�n sya p�paro�n, d�tapuwat hind� nya ako sinag�t. I asked him twice where he was going, but he did not answer me. Magh�pon does not occur alone.

(9) m�may�`, m�my�` after a while, soon, with a disjunctive attribute of the specific time when: M�my� nang kaunt�` ay �alis ak�. In a little while I am going. As conjunctive modifier; the phrase so formed is used like m�may�` alone: M�maya ng gab� ay p�p�sok t�yo sa tey�tro. This evening we shall go to the theatre.

(10) m�nsan once, once upon a time: M�nsan sila y nak�ra�n nang isa ng p�no-ng-ny�g. Once upon a time they came across a cocoanut-tree. With m�n at any one time (� 221): M�nsan m�n ay hind� sya n�una. Not a single time did he succeed in getting ahead. As conjunctive attribute: Ang tatlo ng it� y nagt�p�na ng m�nsan. These three once made an appointment.

(11) ngay�n now, just now, today (cf. � 302): Sya y n�sa Mayn�la ngay�n. He is in Manila today. Ngay�n ay mang�k�kat�log sil�. Now they will be able to sleep. So ngayon d�n right now (� 218): Umal�s ka ngayon d�n. Go away this minute.

(12) par�ti often: Mah�na ang kany� ng kataw�n at par�ti sa sak�t. Her body was weak and often in sickness. Also conjunctive: Ak� y par�ti ng n�h�h�bol. I am often pursued.

(13) siy�mpre (Spanish) always: Ang paggal�w na pagtag�lid ay sy�mpre (or: k�ylan m�n ay) sa kaikli�n nang bangk�`, d�tapuwat ang pagtikw�s ay sa kahab�an. The movement of rocking is always along the short axis of a boat, but pitching is along its length.

263. Four words of place, which serve also as local forms of the demonstrative pronouns (� 199). They are, corresponding to the four demonstrative pronouns: d�ne, r�ne; d�to, r�to; diy�n, dy�n, riy�n; do�n, ro�n. They occur in every position which an attribute can have:

Loosely joined, preceding: Do�n ay sinal�bong sya nang sus�`. There he was met by the snail. D�to n�m�las nya ng.... Here he perceived that....

Loosely joined, following: Taginit n� nang sya y dumating d�to. It was already summer when he arrived here. Ang al�la` ay ipinagam�t nya d�to. The servant was-ordered-to-be-cured by-him of-the-latter, i. e. He had the latter cure the servant. Alis dy�n! Get away there! (e. g. to a dog). Al�s na riy�n, P�dro. Go away from there, Pedro. M�tira ka dy�n. Stay there.

Closely joined, preceding: D�ne ako ma�up�`. I am going to sit right here. D�to ka na makik�in sa �min. Eat here with us. D�to nya gin�mit ang kanya ng lak�s. For this he used his strength. Do�n sila magpal�pas nang bakasy�n. There they are to spend the vacation.

Closely joined, following: Hwag m� ng ilagay d�to ang palat�n. Don't put the plate here.

Enclitic: Dalh�n mo r�to iy� ng libr� ng bin�b�sa ko kagab�. Bring here the book I was reading last night. Magdal� ka d�to nang kasapw�go. Bring some matches.

These words often precede a local attribute: �lag ka dy�n sa da�n. Get out of the road there. Nakit�loy sil� sa �min do�n sa b�kid. They asked us to take them in out there in the country. Note also: Sa isa ng karit� ng d� mal�yo sa b�hay, do�n sya nahig�` In a cart not far from the house, there he lay down.

264. Similarly sa�n where? which serves also instead of a local form of an� (� 199). It is closely joined and, as a question-word, precedes: Sa�n n�roon ang kanya ng kapat�d?--Hind� ko n�l�l�man kung sa�n n�roon ang kanya ng kapat�d. Where is his brother?--I don't know where his brother is. Saan n�ndon sya? Where is he? Sa�n mo sya n�k�ta? Where did you see him? Sa�ng ka ma�up�`? Where are you going to sit? Sa�ng ka g�ling? Where do you come from? (Cf., for the local value, the answer, e. g.: G�ling ako sa Mayn�la`. I come from Manila.) Sa�n ka nangg�g�ling? Where are you coming from? Sa�n ka nangg�ling? Where have you come from? Sa�ng ka p�paron? Where are you going? Sa�n ka p�punta? Where are you bound for? So: k�hit sa�n anywhere at all (� 248): It� y hind� nya m�k�ta k�hit sa�n. He could not find the latter anywhere.

As local form of an�, sa�n stands also in conjunctive attribution (� 131): Sa� ng gaw�` mul� r�to ang b�ya-ng-Kam�lig?--Sa gaw� ng k�nan mul� r�to ang b�ya-ng-Kam�lig. In what direction from here is the town of Camalig?--The town of Camalig is to the right of here. Pagka�sip mo, Hw�n, kung sa� ng b�yan ka magh�h�nap-b�hay ay sab�hin mo sa �kin. When you have decided, Juan, in what town you will try to earn your living, tell me.

As a question-word, further, sa�n may form a static predicate (� 96): Sa�n ang l�g�yan mo nang iyo ng sap�tos? Where is your place for putting away your shoes?

265. Several words of manner:

(1) The particle ag�d at once and its doubled form agad-ag�d immediately (see Morphology) are closely joined; where ng can be used, they are mostly conjunctive: Tumakb� sya ag�d. He ran at once, or: Tumakb� sya ng ag�d. Minul�n nya ag�d ang pagtatalump�te`. He at once began his speech. Agad n� ng l�lam�g. It will soon be cold now. Agad-ag�d in�umpisah�n ang pagsis�g�wan. At once the yelling begins.

(2) halimb�wa` for example, for instance is loosely joined: Kung halimb�wa y mak�k�ta sya nang isa ng b�kol.... When, for instance, she saw a basket ... isa ng tah�l nang �so halimb�wa` the barking of a dog, for instance.

(3) h�los almost is closely joined: h�los lah�t nang t�o almost all the people, wal� ng pamam�ro` h�los almost without clothing.

(4) isa-is� one by one is closely joined; it is more often conjunctive than absolute: Siniy�sat nya isa-is� ang manga p�no`. She questioned the trees one by one. It� y sya ny� ng isa-is� ng inilagl�g. These he dropped one by one.

(5) kar�ka-r�ka right away, quickly (cf. pagd�ka, pagkar�ka, below): "Hind� ak�!" win�ka nya kar�ka-r�ka. "It wasn't I!" he said at once.

(6) katun�yan truth, as absolute attribute, loosely joined, truly; in this sense also conjunctive: Katun�ya y uwal� ng mw�ng si Hw�n. Really Juan was ignorant. Katun�ya ng wal� sya ng n�l�l�man k�hit isa ng h�ta. He really did not know a single iota.

(7) m�smo (Spanish) himself, herself, intensive: ang n�k�k�lam m�smo the bewitched person himself; siya m�smo he himself, she herself.

(8) palibh�sa` is loosely joined and precedes. It expresses that what follows is stated as a reason; the construction is apparently not subordinating, but parallel with that of halimb�wa` above: Ang pagsas�ma ... ay hind� nila pin�pans�n, palibh�sa y gaw� rin nam�n nil�. The living together ... was not minded by them, the reason being that they did it themselves.

(9) pagd�ka and pagkar�ka immediately, quickly (synonymous with kar�ka-r�ka above): Pagd�ka y tinangnan ny� ang dalaw� ng hintut�ro` nang bab�ye. He quickly seized the woman's two forefingers. Also closely joined: Itinan�ng pagd�ka nang m�diko.... The doctor at once asked....

(4) absolute complements.

266. After certain words which are followed by a complement construction, as described in � 151 ff., the conjunctive particle is often omitted, especially where the form na is required; where ng is possible its use is preferred. They are:

267. �big desired, synonymous with gust� (of whose regular construction examples have been given in �� 152. 158), and �yaw the negative of �big. These are usually accompanied by a disjunctive agent: An� ang �big nya ng sab�hin? What is that desired by-him that (sc. by-him it, both anaphoric) be said? or: What is the desired by-him thing-to-be-said? i. e. What does he want to say? An� ang �big mo ng gaw�n nya? What do you want him to do? Hind� na sya �big laban�n. He was no longer sought as an opponent. It� y �big na gaw� ng �na. This is desired to be done first, i. e. One wants to do this first. Ang �yaw ko ng m�k�ta ay isa ng n�no`. What I don't want to see is a ghost. It� y �yaw nya ng gaw�n. He does not want to do this.

Very frequently the construction is impersonal, in which case the complement (and quasi-subject, � 158) may consist of an entire predication: �big nya ng kum�in nang s�ha`. It-is-desired by-him that (he) eat some grape-fruit, i. e. He wants to eat some grape-fruit. �big nya ng k�nin ang s�ha`. It-is-desired by-him that be-eaten (by-him) the grape-fruit, i. e. He wants to eat the grape-fruit. �yaw ipam�na nang mangkuk�lam ang kanya ng k�lam. The sorcerer does not want to bequeath his magic power.

When the person desiring is at the same time the agent of the complement, the whole expression may serve as predicate or attribute of the person desiring; this construction is rarely used with other than active complements: Sya y �big kum�in nang s�ha`. He is desired (by-him) that (he) eat some grape-fruit, i. e. He wants to eat some grape-fruit, equivalent to �big nya ng kum�in nang s�ha`. Ang k�ba` ay hindi r�n �big umaky�t. The hunchback too did not want to climb. isa ng Kast�la` na �big mal�go` a Spaniard who wanted to bathe. Ang sund�lo ay �yaw pum�yag. The soldier did not want to consent.

Without complement (or with anaphorically omitted complement): An� ang �big mo? What is it you want? �big ko p� nang k�nin. There-is-desire by-me still of boiled rice, i. e. I want some more boiled rice. Ang lar� ng tagu�n ay �big nang manga b�ta`. Children like the game of hide-and-seek. �yaw ko. I don't want to; less commonly: �yaw ak�.

268. d�pat proper, necessary and s�kat fitting, right: It� y d�pat gaw�n. This ought to be done. Sya y d�pat pal�in. He ought to be thrashed. An� ang d�pat nya ng gaw�n? What ought to be done by him? i. e. What ought he do? Ang is� y d�pat m�na ng magsilb� sa dim�niyo. One must first serve the demon. Hind� mo s�kat ikag�lit ang manga tuks�. It is not right for you to get angry at jokes, literally: Jokes are not by-you a fitting cause of anger.

Without complement: It� y s�kat n�. This is right, sufficient.

269. Words with prefix ma-, expressing the possessor of a quality, and their derivatives (see Morphology), have occasionally an absolute instead of a conjunctive complement. Those so used are:

(1) madal�s often, frequent, regular: Ak� y madal�s magkumpis�l. I was regular at going to confession, or: a regular confessor. But: Madal�s nila ng sinalak�yan ang b�yan. They frequently attacked the town.

(2) magal�ng skilful, clever, polite: Si Hw�n ay magal�ng gum�mit nang dar�s. Juan was clever at using the adze, or: a clever user of the adze, or: cleverly used the adze. But: Magal�ng sya ng tumugt�g nang piy�no. She plays the piano well.

(3) mah�rap suffering, destitute, difficult (i. e. having hardship, actively or passively): Ang asw�ng ay mah�rap m�patay. A vampire is hard to-be-killed, i. e. hard to kill. Regular constructions: Ang pagab�t nang b�nga ng it� ay mah�rap. The reaching this fruit is hard, i. e. The fruit is hard to reach. ang mah�rap na kasam� the poor laborer.

(4) mah�say able, good (at doing something), in good shape: Ang manga t�o sa b�yan ay mahuh�say sumun�d sa kautus�n. The people in the town are good law-abiders. But: ang pinakamah�say na magsalit�` the best at speaking; Ang l�p� nang l�pa` ay mah�say. The smearing (with sticky mud) of the ground (in the threshing-room for rice) is well done.

(5) ma�nam pleasant, tasty, good: Ang man�k na kawal�` ay hind� ma�nam patay�n. Chickens that run free are not good for killing. Cf.: isa ng ma�nam na sings�ng a pretty ring.

(6) malak�s strong, powerful, loud: Sya y malak�s kum�in. He is great at eating, or: a great eater; also: malak�s na kum�in. Cf.: ang manga t�o ng malalak�s strong men, Sya y tum�wa nang malak�s. He laughed aloud.

(7) maluw�t, malw�t long (in time), slow: Ang pagp�tol nang buh�k ay maluw�t m�tut�han. Hair-cutting takes long to learn. Cf.: Sy� y nagkalatimb� ng maluw�t. He squatted on heels (as exercise or punishment) many times. Nat�t�log ak� nang maluw�t. I sleep late.

(8) mar�nong wise, knowing how: Sya y mar�nung gumup�t nang buh�k. He knew how to cut hair. But: Mar�nong sya ng sumak�y sa kab�yo. He knows how to ride horseback. ang mar�nong na pag�ng the clever turtle; Isa ng sund�lo ng mar�nung nang Lat�n. A soldier who knew Latin.

(5) words used with disjunctive and local attributes.

270. Certain words form with their attributes phrases that are used as absolute attributes, for the most part loosely joined. The phrase-forming attributes are either (A) disjunctive or (B) local.

271. (A) ak�la` a thought followed by a disjunctive possessor: as so-and-so thinks: Ak�la ko y gamit n� ang sombr�ro ng it�. I think this hat has been used already, is second-hand. More commonly these phrases are used as local attribute: Ang harang� ng iy�n na nangy�ri kagab� sa ak�la ko y pah�rang ni Andr�s. The hold-up which took place last night was, in my opinion, planned by Andr�s.

272. g�ya like, resembling, in the manner of; for the disjunctive attribute cf. � 177: ang manga p�no-ng-k�hoy, g�ya nang ts�ko trees like the custard-apple; G�ya nang karany�wan inumpisah�n nang k�ra ang kanya ng s�rmon. As usual, the priest began his sermon. Maga�n ang s�pa`, hind� g�ya nang b�la ng g�mit sa b�sbol. The football is light, unlike the ball used in baseball. These phrases occur also as conjunctive attributes: Hind� umuw� si K�ko na g�ya nang karany�wan. Kiko did not go home as usual. Normal constructions: Ang h�ni nang �bo ng pip�t ay g�ya nang isa ng suts�t. The chirp of the humming-bird is like a whistling. ang manga g�ya mo those like you, people like you.

273. kas�ma (in normal constructions companion): as companion of, in company with: Namundok sy� kas�ma nang il� manga t�o-ng-b�yan. He took the mountains along with a few fellow-townsmen.

274. Abstracts of action with prefixes in p- (see Morphology) express the time when or (so pagka- and pagk�-) the time immediately after which. They sometimes occur without a disjunctive modifier. Cf. � 300. Pagul�n ay gam�tin mo ang kap�te. When it rains use your raincoat. Pagdat�ng niya ay sab�hin mo ng maghint�y. When he arrives tell him to wait, literally: At the arriving of him be-it-said by-you that (he) wait. Pagkas�nog nang b�hay ay hin�nap nil� ang al�has. When the house had burned down they looked for the jewelry. Pagakpakan m� si Hw�n pagkara�n nang kany� ng talump�te`. Applaud Juan when his speech is done.

275. p�ra like is followed by a conjunctive (instead of a disjunctive) object expression whenever an indefinite object is meant (� 68). The phrase so formed is often a conjunctive attribute. It is closely joined: Si P�dro m�n p�ra ni Hw�n ay n�bilangg�`. Pedro too, like Juan, was put in jail. But: May kataw�n sya ng p�ra ng t�o. He has a body like a human being. Normal constructions: P�ra ka ng k�ra. You are like a priest. Ang lam�g nang kanya ng kam�y ay p�ra ng sa pat�y. The coldness of his hand is like that of a dead person. (Cf. � 209).

276. s�bi saying, that said: S�bi daw ny� ay malak� ang s�nog. He says, I am told, that the fire was big.

277. (B) alint�na despite: N�b�lot ko n� ang manga libr�, alint�na sa karam�han nit�. I have managed to pack the books, in spite of their number.

278. �yon according to (giving the source of a statement): �yon sa s�bi nang mar�mi ay m�p�paghuli na r�w ang manga magnan�kaw. According to what people say, the robbers are now near to being caught.

279. buk�d beside, in addition to: Buk�d sa as�wa ay may dalaw� sya ng an�k. Beside his wife, he had two children.

280. d�hil reason, cause and its derivative dahil�n, both here in the sense: on account of: Hind� nakatah�l ang �so d�hil sa kanya ng kahin�an. The dog was not able to bark, on account of his weakness, i. e. was so weak that he could not bark. Hin�le si Hw�n nang pul�s dahil�n sa pagh�rang na ginaw� nya kina Andr�s at kanila ng manga kayb�gan. Juan was arrested by the policeman for having held up Andr�s' party and their friends. Dahil�n sa kanya ng pagk�g�lat ay n�paup� sya. In his surprise he sank down on his chair.

Note especially d�hil d�to, dahil d�to on account of this, therefore; the omission of ay, y is especially frequent, see � 120, A, and the example there given. D�hil d�to ay nad�lat ang kanya ng manga mat�. Through this his eyes were opened.

281. The particle k�y, k� than, more than: Ang b�nga ng it� y matam�s k�y sa as�kal. This fruit is sweeter than sugar. malak�s k� sa kany� stronger than he.

The combination k�y sa has so much unity that the sa is often repeated or used where unnecessary: so always before a proper name: Ang b�ta ng si P�dro ay mata�s nang kaunt�` k�y sa sa lam�sa. Little Pedro is a bit taller than the table. l�lu ng mabags�k k�y sa r�to more fierce than this; Ang b�ta ng si P�dro ay mata�s nang kaunt�` k�y sa kay Hw�n. Little Pedro is a bit taller than Juan. Sya y mab�te ng tumugt�g k� sa kay Hw�na. She plays better than Juana. Si Hw�n ay mag�lang k�y sa kay P�dro. Juan is older than Pedro.

Owing to the construction described at � 120 this construction may be ambiguous: L�lo ng malak� ang g�lit ni Hw�n k�y sa kay P�dro. Juan's anger is greater than Pedro's.

282. l�ban against: ang g�lit l�ban sa kany� anger against him, Ang kapangyar�han ay gin�g�mit nya l�ban sa kanya ng manga ka�way. He uses his power against his enemies.

283. l�ban except: Ang manga karum�ta ng it� ay upah�n, l�ban na l�mang sa il�n. These carriages are hired, except only for a few.

284. The particle mul�` from and its derivative magmul�` starting from: ang gitn�` mul� sa magk�bila ng d�lo the middle from both ends; ang kany� ng manga s�gat mul� sa pa� hangg�ng �lo his wounds from feet to head; mul� r�to from here. With disjunctive attribute of time instead of local attribute: mul� no�n from then on, from that time.

285. Words of manner with prefix pa- (see Morphology): Ang manga t�o ay nagsipagtakb�han papalab�s sa simb�han. The people ran leaving (i. e. out of) the church. Ipinat�luy nya ang paglalak�d papunt� sa isa ng b�hay. He continued walking (directed) toward a certain house.

Commonest is pat�ngo directed towards, aiming for: Tumakbo sy� pat�ngu sa �log. He ran towards the river.

Regular construction: Sya y papunt� sa l�ngit. He was on the way to Heaven.

286. The particle par�, p�ra (Spanish) for, equivalent to �kol (� 288): Nagbw�l sila nang isa ng b�ka p�ra sa fiy�sta. They slaughtered a cow for the fiesta. Hum�kay sila nang mal�lim par� sa pat�y. They dug a deep pit for the corpse. Pum�tol ka b� nang dam� par� sa kab�yo? Have you cut any grass for the horse? Also as conjunctive attribute, modifying an object expression: Sulat n� ang l�ham na p�ra kay Hw�na. The letter for Juana is written.

287. tungk�l about, concerning: Nasiy�sat nang huk�m ang lah�t nang b�gay tungk�l sa kanila ng �sap. The judge inquired into all the matters relating to their suit. Cf.: ang tungk�l sa s�nog the details about the fire.

288. The particle �kol is synonymous with par� (� 286) and tungk�l: Hum�kay sila nang mal�lim �kol sa pat�y. This phrase as predicate: Iy� y �kol sa manga h�rap sa infiy�rno. This was about the sufferings in Hell.

(6) words introducing subordinate phrases or predications.

289. Certain words precede words, phrases, and whole predications which are thereby subordinated to the main sentence as absolute attributes, loosely joined.

The syntactic relation of these words to the expressions which they introduce seems to be the peculiar one described in � 54. However, some of them are plainly joined to their phrase by na, ng, and others end in -ng or -t. Most of them merely precede the phrase, others are closely joined.

Finally, in a few cases predications apparently not introduced by any subordinating word are used as absolute attributes.

290. bag� (� 216), in this sense always followed by m�n (� 221), although, is less used than k�hit (� 294). See also � 317. Baga m�n nakapagpasy�l si P�dro, n�tira kam� sa b�hay. Although Pedro managed to take a walk, we staid home.

291. b�go, in this use before (in point of time), has closely joined position as regards its phrase: Ang manga kab�yo ng gin�g�mit nang manga kanyun�ros nang guby�rno ay pina�inum m�na, b�go pak�nin. The horses used by the artillery of the government are watered first, before they are fed. Nagkant�han sil� b�go naguw�an. They sang together before they went home. B�go sya y sum�lat ay makipag�sap ka sa kany�. Before he writes have a talk with him. Mag�sip ka b�go ka sumag�t. Think before you answer. Balatan m� ang mangg� b�gu mo k�nin. Peel the mango before you eat it. maluwat p� b�go mamat�y ang mangkuk�lam long before the sorcerer dies.

In normal constructions b�go has the sense of new, recent: ang b�gu ng b�hay the new house; ang b�go ng t�o an unmarried man, a youth; ang manga man�k na b�go ng bil� the chickens just bought; B�gu ng g�ling sya sa sak�t. He is recently recovered from an illness.

292. h�bang throughout, during, while probably consists of h�ba` length plus ng. H�bang sya y nat�t�log ay nakara�n ang sus�`. While he was sleeping the snail passed. H�bang pinagus�pan nil� it� ang ikapit� ng b�ta` ay n�sa isa ng bit�k nang bangk�`. While they were discussing this, the seventh child was in a crack of the bench. N�l�lugmok sy� h�bang panah�n sa isa ng mal�lim na kalungk�tan. She was sunk constantly (literally: throughout time) in a deep sadness. A short phrase with h�bang may be closely joined: Hind� nya natagal� ng angkin�n h�bang b�hay nya ang birt�d na iy�n. He did not succeed in keeping this quality as his own throughout (his) life. [8]

293. hangg�ng as far as, to, until may be hangg�n limit, end plus ng; instead of the absolute construction the phrase is, however, often in local form. For lack of ang in the phrase see � 68. Naghint�y sya hangg�ng katanghal�an. He waited till noon. Ang p�no` ay tum�bo` hangg�ng sa magb�nga. The tree grew until (it) bore fruit. Sil� ay nagtakb�han hangg�ng sa dumat�ng sila sa kanila ng b�yan. They both ran until they arrived in their town. As predicate: Ang k�lang nang g�tas ay hangg�ng sa le�g nang b�te. The lack of milk is as far as the neck of the bottle, i. e. The milk goes only up to the neck of the bottle.

294. k�hit (� 245), with or without na, in the sense of although, no matter (cf. �� 290. 317). The subordinate word or phrase has usually the form of a question; when it is an entire predication the predicate stands first: Tinalaga ny� ng sum�ma, k�hit na sa�n sya dalh�n. He decided to go along, no matter where he was carried. K�hit na an� ang iy�tos nya ay sin�sun�d. No matter what it was he ordered, (it) was obeyed. K�hit na madil�m ang gab� ay nagpasyal d�n si P�dro. Though the night was dark, Pedro nevertheless took a walk. K�hit na bahagy� ang ul�n ay nakabas�` nang kars�da. Though the rain was scanty, it sufficed to wet the streets. K�hit ul�l ang �so ay �yaw nya ng patay�n. Although the dog was mad, he did not want to kill it.

Note the following instance, in which k�hit na precedes its phrase as a closely joined attribute: N�ramdaman k� ang kalab�t nya sa �kin, k�hit na ak� nat�t�log. I felt his touch against me, even though I was asleep.

Phrases with k�hit may be closely joined to the main sentence: N�p�p�tol nya k�hit na wal� sya ng kasangk�pan ang b�kal nang kanya ng b�langg�an. He managed, even though he had no tools, to cut the iron of his prison. ang t�o k�hit lal�ki o bab�ye na nag��ri sa kany� the person, man or woman, who owns it.

295. kaniy�`, kany�` (� 241) expressive of result, may with its phrase be subordinated. It then stands as a closely joined attribute of its phrase: Kany� nya in�wan ang p�yong ay sapagk�t nagt�gil ang ul�n at lumiw�nag ang l�ngit. The reason he left his umbrella (quasi-subject) was because the rain let up and the sky cleared. Accordingly we may analyze as subordinate such clauses as the following: N�up� sya sa tin�k, kany� sya n�patind�g ag�d. He sat down on a spine, so as to jump at once, i. e. that is why he jumped up at once. Cf., however, � 324.

296. The particle kap�g if, in case (of single events viewed as completed in the future, synonymous with pagk�, � 304), see � 300: Ang hinir�m nya ng kamp�t ay iyo ng k�nin, kapag ipin�p�tol na ny� nang k�hoy. Take away the knife he borrowed if he uses it to cut wood.

297. kay�` (� 219) is sometimes used exactly like kaniy�` (� 295): Kay�` aku napar�to ay k�k�nin ku ang hinir�m mo ng libr�. I am going to take the book you have borrowed, so that I have come here, i. e. I have come here to.... The act is expressed as a subordinate element, the purpose as the principal sentence. Nagp�p�tol si Hw�n nang k�hoy, kay� sya y wala r�to. Juan is cutting wood now, that is why he is not here.

298. The atonic particle kung preceding an expression of time states the time when of repeated occurrences: Gum�g�mit kam� nang makap�l na dam�t kung tagul�n. We use thick clothing in the rainy season. Nagt�t�pon nang pagk�in ang manga langg�m kung tag�raw. The ants collect food in summer. Ang h�n�han nang manga �bon kung um�ga ay nakal�lig�ya. The chirping of the birds in the morning is gladdening. Ang iba ng t�wo y mab�ti pa ng makis�ma k�y sa is� ng kapat�d kung m�nsan. An unrelated person is better to associate with than a brother at times. So: kung gab� at night, of nights, kung fiy�sta nang b�yan during the (periodic) fiesta of the town, kung madil�m at dark, when it is dark, kung bah�` at flood-times, kung buw�n nang H�niyo in June.

Occasionally the phrase with kung is closely joined: Hind� has�` kung m�nsan ang manga b�gu ng patal�m sa Filip�nas. In the Philippines new cutlery is sometimes without an edge (i. e. sold without an edge, to be sharpened by the purchaser).

299. With phrases in the form of a question (minus b� � 215 or bag� � 216) kung expresses indirect question. The expression so formed stands as quasi-subject or quasi-object (cf. �� 157. 158) or as predicate: Naala�la nya kung pap�no ang paggaw�` nang salamangk�. He managed to recall how the trick was done. Ipin�yu nya na kung s�nu sa kanil� ang pinkamah�say na magsalit�` nang Lat�n ay siya l�mang k�k�in nang itl�g. He advised that whoever (kung s�no) among them was the best at speaking Latin should be the one who alone ate the egg. Si P�dro ay nag�is�p kung sa�n nya na�wan ang kanya ng p�yong. Pedro is trying to recall where he left his umbrella. N�l�l�man mo b� kung sa�n sya n�roon? Do you know where he is? Ang manga t�o-ng-b�yan ay nagsiy�sat kung ma��ri sila ng magtay� nang isa ng m�kina nang b�g�san sa kanila ng b�yan. The townspeople considered whether they could put up a machine for thrashing rice in their town. Ang siy�sat ni Hw�n sa kanya ng pagpar�to ay kung il� ng k�ra ang n�r�rit� sa �ti ng b�yan. Juan's inquiry when he got here was how many priests there are in our town.

300. Introducing other phrases kung has the sense of if, whenever (of non-actual occurrences viewed as unreal, hypothetical, or repeated); compare disjunctive attributes of time (� 192, single actual occurrence), pag (� 303, single non-actual occurrence, simultaneous), kap�g and pagk� (�� 296, 304, single non-actual precedent occurrence), words with prefixes in p- (� 274, single occurrence, actual or non-actual), tuw�` (� 307, repeated actual): Kung dumat�ng si Hw�n ay umalis k�. If Juan comes, go away. Kung dumat�ng sya ay sab�hin mo ng maghint�y. If he comes, tell him to wait. Kung �ul�n ay gam�tin mo ang kap�te. If it rains, use your raincoat. B�bilhin k� ang kab�yo ng iy�n kung m�y-roon ak� ng mar�mi ng kwalt�. I should buy this horse, if I had enough money. Note: Kung sa pagaas�wa nam�n, ak� y nagkaro�n nang dalaw�. And as to (literally if) taking a wife, I had two.

301. In the same sense kung with d�` (� 237) or hind�` (� 239) if not, precedes the second, positive member of a contrast: unless, but rather, beside, except (Cf. pal� � 228): Hwag k� ng mak�pakik�in-k�in kung hind� ka in�any�han. Don't be taking meals with people unless you are invited. Wal� ng ib� ng nagp�pah�rap sa kany� kung hind� kay�. There is no one else who causes suffering to him, beside you.

302. ngay�n (� 262), when subordinating, is conjunctively joined to its clause: Ngay� ng �raw na yit� y d�rating sil�. On this very day they will arrive. Ngay� ng t�o ng iy�n ay patay n�, b�kit nam�n...? Now that this man is dead, why...?

303. The atonic particle pag gives the time when of a single non-actual occurrence; cf. � 274 and see � 300. Pag ak� ay pag�d, nat�t�lug ak� nang maluw�t. When I am tired, I sleep late. Pag paput�l mo ng hin�wa` ang pakuw�n ay hind� m�b�bil� ang banda ng p�no`. If you cut the watermelon crosswise, you will not be able to sell the stem-end. Magm�murah�n sila ng dalaw� pag nagk�ta. The two will revile each other when they meet.

304. The particle pagk� (synonymous with kap�g, � 296) gives the time immediately after which of a single non-actual occurrence; cf. � 274 and see � 300. Pagka ik�w ay nah�log ay mas�saktan k�. When you have taken a fall you will be hurt.

305. The particle pat� including; cf. � 68. ang bo� ng kataw�n pat� manga mat� at ta�nga the whole body, including eyes and ears.

306. The particle sapagk�t (sa pagk� at�?) because, for: Sapagk�t ang p�ri ng it� ay nagak�la ng manga wal� ng pinagar�lan ang kany� ng sin�s�rmunan ay hind� sya nagp�lit.... Because this priest thought his hearers were uneducated people, he took no pains.... Ipinap�tol nya ang kanya ng dal�re`, sapagk�t tinub�an nang k�nser. He had his finger amputated because there was a cancer on it. For a phrase with sapagk�t as predicate see example under kany�`, � 241.

307. The particle tuw�` (� 244) in this use tells the time when always of actual repeated occurrences: whenever, every time. It is conjunctively joined to its clause: Pinagh�hatdan ny� nang g�tas ang b�yan tw� ng um�ga. He delivers milk in the town every morning. Pum�par�to ang m�diko twi ng makalaw�. The doctor comes every other day. Si Hw�n ay nak�kipagluks�han twi ng idin�d�os ang manga palar�` kung fy�sta nang b�yan. Juan takes part in the jumping contest whenever games are held in the fiesta of the town. Tw� ng pap�suk ak� sa s�ne sa �ki ng k�yang ay �yaw sya. Every time I ask my brother to take me to the moving-picture show, he refuses.

308. �pang in order to, so that (�pa pay, wages�?): Sila y na�upo pa l�mang �pang manangh�le`. They are just sitting down to eat the noon meal. Sy� y tumay�` sa bubung�n nang b�hay �pang tanaw�n ang s�nog. He stood up on the roof of the house to watch the fire. Kantah�n niny� ang m�y sakit �pang sya y malib�ng. Sing for the sick man so that he may be cheered. Tin�wag nil� ang isa ng k�law �pang siya ng mag�ng huk�m. They called an owl so that (it) might be the one who served as judge.

309. y�mang while, as: Ang p�no nang ungg� ay namat�y y�mang ang sa pag�ng ay tum�bo`. The tree of the monkey died while that of the turtle grew.

257. The words used as absolute attributes of manner and time resemble in meaning conjunctive attributes and are frequently used in the latter construction. As a rule they are loosely joined and absolute. In this way are used:

310. Predications and similar phrases (impersonal or anaphoric) as absolute attributes, in the meaning of disjunctive attributes of time, are not uncommon: Madali-ng-�raw pa l�mang ay n�r�ro�n na sil�. (When) it was still but dawn, they were already there. Mak�sa-m-pu ng t�wag n� ay wal� pa sy�. (At) the tenth call he was still not there. Makara�n ang ila ng sandal�` ay sin�bi nya sa sus�`.... (When) a few moments had passed, he said to the snail.... May �pat na pu ng ta�n na sya sa l�pa ng Katagal�gan ay hind� pa nya n�tut�han ... (When) he had already been in the Tagalog country for about forty years, he had not yet learned.... M�nsan pum�suk sya sa simb�han ay n�rinig nya.... Once (when) he went to church, he heard.... Other examples at 26,21. 28,11. 66,15. 9213.

4. Serial groups.

311. The serial relation is expressed in part explicitly by particles and in part by parataxis, parenthesis, and anacolouthic constructions.

(1) coordinating particles.

312. The most important of the coordinating particles is at, t; as some of the others end in -t, they may be felt to contain at; cf. the similar ending in other particles, � 213; t is used after syllabics, n, and ` (see Phonetics), but even here at is commoner.

When a sentence begins with a coordinating particle, the latter gives expression to the connection with the preceding sentence (as in English sentences beginning with And ... or But ...)

313. at, t and connects words, phrases, or entire predications. b�ro t salaw�l blouse and trousers (native costume), ang tapun�n nang b�ha at up�s the place for throwing cigarette-ends and cigar-stubs, dalawa ng, p� t dalaw� twenty-two, kung m�nsan at malak� ang g�lit nang am� ... sometimes, when the father's anger was great ... (kung goes with both of the members connected by at).

When more than two elements are connected, at is used generally between the last two: sina P�dro, Hw�n, at Andr�s the group consisting of Pedro, Juan, and Andr�s. isa ng l�bo, walo ng da�n, walo ng pu t �nim 1886.

314. at is used in a few common phrases: is� t is� everyone ib� t ib� various: ang mang� taga ib� t iba ng b�yan people from various towns; Iba t ib� ang k�lay nang kanya ng pananam�t. His clothes are of various colors. at ib� p� and so forth, and other; ang ts�ko, s�ha`, sant�l, ... at iba p� the custard-apple, grape-fruit, santol, and so forth; ang manga h�yop at iba p� ng �r� nang p�mahala�n the live stock and other belongings of the government.

315. at has occasionally a decidedly adversative tone; so, for instance, at 78,31.

316. Frequently at has subordinative coloring, the second of the members joined expressing:

cause: Hint�y ka m�na t hind� pa ak� nakap�pahing�. Make a halt first, for I am not yet rested. �big mo b� ng kum�in sa �min?--Sal�mat, �yaw ko t kak�k�in ko pa l�mang. Do you want to eat with us?--Thank you, no, for I have only just eaten. Buksan m� ang pint�` at �big ko ng pum�sok. Open the door, for I want to go in.

result: Ano t d� ka lum�kad nang mat�lin? Why don't you walk fast? Ano ang �big mo t n�r�rito k�? What do you want that you have come here? i. e. What have you come here for? So especially: an� ang d�hil at...? what is the reason that...?

purpose: Umal�s sya t mak�kip�tol nang dam�. He has gone to help cut grass.

temporal succession: Hind� sya nakarat�ng nang �pat na pu ng ta�n sa g�lang at sya y namat�y. She had not reached forty years in her age, when she died.

a subordinate quasi-subject: Sin�bi nang manghuh�la sa iy� t hindi mal�yo r�to ang kaw�walan nang iyo ng sings�ng. The fortune-teller told you that the place where you would lose your ring is not far from here. Sin�bi ko n� sa iy� at hwag k� ng ma�ngay. I have told you already not to make any noise. [9]

317. The subordinating value of at appears especially in certain expressions which it forms with other particles:

(1) at bak�` lest (cf. � 235): Hwag k� ng magpatih�log diy�n sa k�tre at bak� ka masakt�n. Don't throw yourself from that bed, for you might hurt yourself.

(2) at nang so that (cf. � 192 f.): Magiin�m ka nang g�tas at nang ik�w ay tumab�`. Drink milk so that you may grow stout.

(3) bag� m�n at although (cf. � 290): Baga m�n at um�ul�n ay nags�sipaglar� sil�. Although it is raining they are at play.

(4) kay�` at so that (cf. � 297): Napap�punta nil� ang pel�ta kay� t b�wat isa sa kanil� ay nakaab�ng. They direct the ball so that every one of them is on guard.

(5) k�ylan m�n at every time that, whenever, synonymous with tuw� ng, � 307 (cf. k�ylan m�n � 262): Si Hw�n ay t�wa nang t�wa k�ylan m� t m�rinig nya ang manga katatawan� ng bah�gi nang kw�nto. Juan laughs and laughs every time he hears the funny parts of the story.

318. d�tapuwat but is the commonest adversative coordinating particle. It is used also when the two members are not logically but only formally in contrast: Ang h�ni nang pip�t ay mah�na`, d�tapuwat mata�s ang t�no. The chirping of the stone-sparrow is weak, but high-pitched. P�put�lin ko ang l�bid kung m�y-roon ak� ng las�ta, d�tapuwat wal� ako. I should cut the rope if I had a knife, but I have none. Si P�dro ay hind� dumat�ng, d�tapuwat iba ng t�o ang napar�to. Pedro did not arrive; it was someone else who came here.

319. The particles n� hind�` (�� 253. 239) connect coordinate elements in the sense of nor: Sya y hind� nags�simb� n� hind� nang�ngumpis�l n� hind� rin nagm�m�no sa p�re`. He neither went to church nor confessed nor kissed the priest's hand. The hind�` may, as an anaphoric element, be left off after another hind�`: Ang kanila ng kam�y ay hind� nila m�ilab�s sa b�tas n� ibig nam�n sila ng bit�wan ang lam�n nang ny�g. They cannot take out their hands from the opening, nor are they willing to let go the cocoanut-meat.

320. The particle ng�nit is equivalent with d�tapuwat, but is less common: Hind� sya nag�sip, ng�nit sumag�t kar�ka-r�ka. He did not reflect but answered at once.

321. The atonic particle o or (probably Spanish): isa ng malak� ng �so o b�boy a large dog or pig; Dikdik�n kit� sa lus�ng o lun�rin kita sa �log? Shall I bray you in a mortar or drown you in the river? Frequently the combination o kay�` (� 219) is used; it is loosely joined: Ang kapangyar�ha ng it� y g�ling sa dim�niyo o kay� y m�na sa mag�lang. This power comes from a demon or else is inherited from one's parents.

322. The particle sub�lit but is less common than its equivalents d�tapuwat and ng�nit: Aku s�na y p�paroon sa Bal�wag, sub�lit hind� ako n�tul�y, dahil�n sa isa ng karamd�man. I was going to Baliwag, but I did not keep on, on account of an illness.

(2) paratactic sentences.

323. A vocative joins another sentence: Hint� na kay�, manga b�ta`! Stop, children! T� na, bal�e! or: Tara n�, bal�e! Come on, old man!

324. Contrast, cause, result, detail, etc. are sometimes paratactically expressed; in some cases it seems uncertain whether the second element is paratactic or subordinate, so especially when it begins with kaniy�` (�� 241. 295): Sina P�dro, Hw�n, at Andr�s ay magkakasamah� ng nagt�nod sa is� ng d�lo nang tul�y; sina Fel�pe, And�y, at Mariy�no sa ikalaw� ng d�lo. Pedro, Juan, and Andr�s are standing guard together at one end of the bridge; Felipe, Andoy, and Mariano at the other. Hind� ko gust� iy�n, ib� ang �ki ng gust�. I don't like that, I want something else. Hwag k� ng umy�k, Mary�, bak� ka himatay�n. Don't weep, Maria, you might have a fainting-fit. Ang kant� nang b�ta ng si Hw�n ay kanya ng nalim�tan, kany� hindi tul�` ang kanya ng kinant�. Little Juan forgot his song, that is why what he sang was disconnected. Siya ng�`, siy� ang nagbig�y sa �kin nang b�go ng b�hay. Yes, she; it was she who gave me new life. Sya y may fam�liya; buk�d sa as�wa ay may dalaw� sya ng an�k. He had a family; beside his wife he had two children.

(3) parenthesis.

325. Not infrequently explanatory elements are inserted into a sentence parenthetically: Tatl� ng magkakayb�gan, isa ng p�re`, isa ng manggag�mut, at isa ng sund�lo ... Three friends, a priest, a physician, and a soldier ... sa h�yop nam�n, karany�wa y ang b�buy ... against animals, usually a pig ... wala ng ul�m, as�n at k�nin l�mang there was no meat, only salt and boiled rice. Further cases at 54,5. 86,21. 100,23. 108,29.

326. Often the parenthetic element is descriptive: malak�s kum�in, katimb�ng nang dalaw� kat�o great at eating, a match for two persons; nang pinagkatam�n na wal� ng pat�d, �pat na pu ng pa� ang h�ba` shavings without a break, forty feet in length. Similar cases at 80,39. 86,29. 118,43. 120,2.

327. Especially common are parentheses describing the temporary state or situation of something: Ang m�nanal� ng pangk�t at ang kanila ng manga kayb�gan, magkakas�ma ng tin�tugtug�n nang kanila ng b�nda nang m�sika, ay agad-ag�d na nagp�pas�yo. The winning team and their friends, all together accompanied by the playing of their band, at once form a parade. Nakarat�ng sila sa kanila ng b�hay, dal� nila ang s�pot nang kwalt�. They arrived at their house, bearing the bag of money. Other cases at 92,22. 98,21. 114,42.

(4) anacolouthon.

328. In other cases a breaking off of the construction rather than an insertion seems to take place: Ang manga hind� nags�situgt�g ang katungk�lan ay kumant�. Those who do not play, their duty is to sing. G�ya ko, ak� y par�ti ng n�h�h�bul nang manga �so. Like me, I am often pursued by dogs. Pabul�ng l�mang kung sil� y mags�lit�an. In whispers only (predicate) when they talk together. The organic construction would probably be: Pabul�ng l�mang ang kanila ng pagsas�lit�an. Their conversation is only in whispers. Kung kanya ng pak�nin ay wala ng ul�m. When (they, anaphoric) are fed it is without meat.

329. While direct quotations often enter into normal constructions as predicate (� 114), as conjunctive complement (� 159), or as disjunctive object (� 186), they are often joined by a breaking off of construction. In this case their relation to the rest of a sentence may resemble that of a subject; this happens especially when the sentence begins with the quotation or with part of it. If ay, y were used many of these sentences would be regular: "Mag�ral ka ng mab�ti," sin�bi ni Hw�n sa kanya ng an�k. "Study well" was said by Juan to his son. "Dalaw�!" isinig�w nang bul�g. "Two!" was shouted by the blindman. "Sa damdam k�," ang sag�t ni Dy�go, "ay ak� ang pinakamak�nis." "In my opinion," was Diego's answer, "I am the cleverest." Similarly their relation may resemble that of a disjunctive object (instrumental type, � 186), but nang is not used. This happens if the quotation follows active words of saying: Si Hw�n nam�n ay sumag�t: "Mat�r!" Juan then answered: "Matar!"

330. This peculiar construction of direct quotations is extended to some cases that are not exactly quotations but may be viewed as such: Ang bo� ng �sa ko ang kandid�to ng si Manik�s ang n�g�gustuh�n nang manga t�o; hind� pal�, kung hind� ang kandid�to ng si S�ntos. It was my whole expectation that the candidate Maniqu�s would be the one chosen by the people; but no, it was the candidate Santos. Ang paniw�la nang manga t�o si Sang-Hw�n ay sya ng s�nto ng nagp�paul�n. It is the belief of the people that San Juan is the saint who makes rain.

C. MORPHOLOGY.

1. Composition.

331. Compound words (i. e. words resembling in form a succession of two or more words, but diverging in meaning from such a succession) are treated phonetically like groups of words in the phrase (�� 33. 34).

If the first member ends in syllabic, n, or glottal stop, the particle ng appears before the second member.

In meaning, compound words resemble a phrase in which the word corresponding to the first member is modified, in disjunctive attribution, by the word corresponding to the second: b�hay-akl�tan library-building: b�hay nang akl�tan. The meaning of the compound is, however, more specialized than that of the phrase.

Exceptions as to meaning are: (1) the copulative compound �raw-gab�, formed on the model of doubled words, such as �raw-�raw, gabi-gab� (�� 258. 343.); (2) kapat�d-kongkristiy�nos, a foreign product; (3) m�y-ro�n, equivalent to m�y, which has been viewed as a compound because its construction (� 138) differs from that of the phrase m�y ro�n (which would not require the particle ng, �� 252. 263).

Similar in form to compound words are words derived from a phrase (� 332).

Examples of regular compounds: ang b�hay-b�ta` the womb, b�hay-g�ya` the womb of an animal (g�ya` the young of an animal), b�hay-p�hayag�n newspaper office, publishing house, B�hay-Pan�ki Bat-House (name of a town, pan�ki a bat), b�hay-pint�han paint-shop; It� y bigay-lo�b l�mang nya sa �kin. This is merely a concession he makes to me as a favor; ang lalaw�ga-ng-Pamp�ngga, ang prov�nsiya-ng-Pamp�ngga Pampanga Province, cf. ang prov�nsiya nang Pamp�ngga; pil�k-mat� eyelash (pil�k fin, lash); ang S�m�ha-ng-Sum�long the Sumulong Company; ang t�nud-b�hay the watchman of a house, t�nud-p�lay watchman of a rice-field.

A member of a compound may consist of an entire phrase (cf. � 332): B�g�sa-ng-Sum�long-at-Kasamah�n Rice-mill of Sumulong and Company (equivalent to B�g�san nila Sum�long at Kasamah�n); ang d�lo-ng-band�-ng-k�nan the right-hand end (ang band� ng k�nan the right).

Specialization and transference of meaning are especially marked in hampas-l�pa` (literally: beating of the ground) tramp, vagabond; k�pit-b�hay not only neighboring house, but also neighbor: Ang b�hay ni Hw�n ay �ki ng k�pit-b�hay, but also: Si Hw�n ay �ki ng k�pit-b�hay; k�pit-b�yan neighboring town, but also person from a neighboring town; Sawi-ng-p�lad siy�. He is unlucky (literally unhandy of the palm).

For the other occurrences of compounds see Index under b�hay, bak�s, b�nda, bant�y, b�sag, b�yad, b�yan, b�nga, b�tas, da�n, h�nap, �log, kalab�w, kapulu�n, kasama�n, kasawi�n, kasira�n, kinamatay�n, l�pa`, m�diko, pa�, pamat�y, pant�y, pir�so, p�no`, s�m�han, t�o, trab�ho, �bos.

2. General features of word-formation.

332. Many words are analyzed into (1) recurring affixes, (2) doubling, (3) reduplication, and (4) a recurring unanalyzable element bearing the material meaning, the root. The place of the root may be taken by a word in turn showing derivation by these processes, or by a compound word, or even by a phrase. Other words, root-words, contain only the unanalyzable element.

Other modifications affecting the meaning are shifting of the accent toward the end of the word, and the use of secondary accents.

Modifications not affecting the meaning, but merely accompanying those already named, are sound-variation and retraction of the accent toward the beginning of the word.

The same morphologic elements may be variously distributed; it is most convenient and corresponds most nearly to the speech-feeling to describe these differences as though they were due to different successions in which the modifications are applied: sum�s�lat is s�lat reduplicated and with infix -um-; but (nag-)t�tumir� is tir� with infix -um-, then reduplicated (plus prefix nag-).

The part of a word to which a modification is (in this sense) said to be added will be called the underlying word (or phrase): in sum�s�lat the infix -um- is added to the underlying word s�s�lat, in (nag-)t�tumir� reduplication is added to the underlying word tumir�; in ikasa-m-p�` the tenth the prefixes ka- and i- are successively added to the underlying phrase sa m p�` ten.

Roots not actually occurring in this book as independent words will be written with a hyphen prefixed (-k�in), except in unmistakable lists of roots.

333. The root. Except for some pronoun forms and particles, the roots have two or more syllables and are almost always accented either on the last (oxytone roots) or on the next-to-last (barytone roots): b�hay house, kam�y hand.

Some disyllabic roots are formed as though a single syllable were repeated: bitb�t, budb�d, bungb�ng piece of unsplit bamboo, damd�m, dibd�b chest (part of body), dikd�k, dingd�ng (dind�ng, � 20), g�ga, hinh�n, ladl�d, lagl�g, lingk�ng, lubl�b, mangm�ng, ningn�ng, padp�d, pangp�ng, pukp�k, sats�t, siks�k, sings�ng, s�si, s�so breast, nipple, suts�t, tadt�d, tikt�k, tingt�ng (tint�ng), tugt�g, tukt�k, tungt�ng (tunt�ng), ul�l.

Of the roots of more than two syllables some similarly repeat one or two syllables: ala�la, bab�ye (see � 345), bulakl�k, lipump�n (beside l�pon).

Others appear as though a syllable -al- or -ag- were infixed (or prefixed) before the first syllabic: alag�d (cf. ag�d`), balah�bo fur, hair on the body, bal�kat, bal�ta`, Bal�wag, bal�bad, balukt�t, dal�ga, dalamh�te`, daland�n, dalangh�ta`, dal�ngin, halakh�k, hal�man, hal�ge, halimb�wa`, halimh�m, kalab�g, kal�kal, kalas�ng, kalayk�y, kalusk�s, palak�`, salak�b, sal�kay, salak�t a rain-hat of palm-leaves, salap�`, salaw�l, salays�y, salit�`, sal�bong, sal�koy, talast�s, talungk�`,--bag�bag, bag�so bare stalk, of sugar-cane or corn (Spanish brazo, whence Tagalog bar�so arm, assimilated to this type?), Hag�noy, lagabl�b, lag�nap, pagakp�k, sag�sa`, sagits�t.

In some instances roots of the same or similar meaning resemble each other in form. This is commonest in loan-words, where different degrees of assimilation exist side by side: bir�ke, bit�ke blow-gun bullet (Spanish bodoque); pal�nsa, pir�nsa flatiron (Spanish plancha). It occurs also, however, in native (or anciently assimilated) roots: aniy�ya`, y�ya`; �nib, s�nib (for sa �nib?); bal�ta`, salit�`; bit�w, bit�w; bug�k, bul�k; bung�nga` mouth, maw (nang hurn� of the oven, nang kal�n of the stove), sung�nga` a blow on the mouth; din�g, kin�g; �pon, l�pon (lipump�n, above), t�pon; la�n, ta�n; luh�d, t�hod; mangh�`, tangh�`; mat�y, pat�y; hant�y, hint�y.

When syllables of a root resemble affixes, there is always possibility that the root may be interpreted as a derived word by the speech-feeling, no matter whether historically it be such or not. Thus the Index will show many roots whose initial syllables are identical with prefixes; the other cases will be mentioned under the various affixes.

334. Affixation. Prefixes are added to the initial of the underlying word: nag-tir�; infixes before the first syllabic: t-um-ir�, um-al�s; suffixes to the end: t�r�-han.

Affixes are occasionally accompanied by retraction of accent: it�, d-�to. See �� 343,c. 358,c.e. 481,c. 485,a. 523. 528,d.

In the following cases affixes are accompanied by sound-variation:

(a) prefixes:

(1) The prefixes ending in g are treated phonetically as though they were separate words; this happens occasionally with other prefixes (� 34).

(2) Initial d of the underlying word becomes r after the syllabic of a prefix in the roots listed in � 17. The change is constant only in the commonest formations: always pa-ra�n, but nak�-da�n beside nak�-ra�n. Striking irregularities at �� 407,a. 468.

(3) The prefix i- and in some formations the prefix ka- contract with a following syllabic (� 31): iy-�nib (for i-�nib), �wan (for i-�wan), ka-yib�g-an (for ka-ib�g-an), k�w�wa` (for ka-�wa-�wa`). See �� 368. 401. 421. 426,b. 475,a. 481,c. 485,a.

(4) The prefixes ending in ng (mang-, nang-, pang-) alter a following initial, always in much-used words, frequently in others.

Before an initial syllabic the ng is treated as though it belonged to the underlying word and not to the prefix. This appears in reduplication (� 336).

Initial p, b, t, d, s, are often, initial k is always changed to the corresponding nasal: pam�lo` (p�lo` with pang-), but also pang-pa-rik�t; pamilm�t (bilm�t), but also pang-bamb�; pan�li` (t�li`), but also pang-tak�p; panal�ngin (dal�ngin), but also pang-dil�g; na-nar�wa` (sar�wa`), but also pang-sak�y; nangap�` (kap�`). Where the change is not made, the ng may be assimilated to dentals (� 20): mandur�kit beside mangdud�kit.

Before nasals the ng is usually lost: namah�la` (mah�la` with nang-).

See pang- and mang- in List of Formations.

(5) The prefix hin- and its compounds give rise to a few similar changes, see �� 357,b. 376,a. 518.

(6) For occasional irregularities of prefixes see �� 347,b. 481,d. 528.

(b) infixes:

(1) Where -in- is infixed in a word beginning with l, w, or y, this initial is usually interchanged with the n, so that, practically, we have a prefixed ni- instead of an infixed -in-: ni-l�to` (beside less common l-in-�to`), ni-wal�s (beside w-in-�ka`), ni-y�ya`. See �� 359 ff. 374 ff.

(2) Where words beginning with syllabic, h, l, w (and y) have the prefix i- and the infix -in-, the latter is almost always used as a prefix, preceding the i-: in-iy-�tos, in-�wan (for in-i-�wan), in-i-hat�d, i-ni-l�to` (beside less common i-l-in-�to`), in-i-wis�k. See � 368.

(3) On -um- see � 348,b.

(c) suffixes:

(1) The suffixes (-an and -in) after a syllabic take an initial h: luks�-han.

(2) Final d always becomes r before a suffix: lakar-�n (l�kad).

(3) When used in the formation of transient derivatives, as well as in some other of their uses, the suffixes are accompanied by irregular modifications of certain roots.

Some roots ending in syllabic are treated as if they ended in glottal stop; they are am�, k�ta, mat�: ama-�n, kit�-an, mat�-an.

Others are treated as though they ended in n; they are pa�, t�lo, t�wa: paa-n�n (beside regular paa-h�n), tal�-nan, taw�-nan.

Other roots lose the syllabic of the last syllable, as well as a final glottal stop which may follow this; if the syllabic is final, the suffix adds h: as�n asn-�n, big�y bigy-�n, bil� bil-h�n, mul�` mul-�n. The roots so treated are: as�n, big�y, bil�, buk�s, dal�, hat�d, hig�`, ib� (but also regular iba-h�n), eskuw�la, gaw�`, k�in, kam�t, lag�y, lak�, lik�d, mas�d, mul�`, pun�`, p�tol (but also regular put�l-an), sak�y, s�kit, sub�, sun�d, t�ngan, tib�`, ting�n, tir� (but also regular tir�-han), ul�`, up�`, wal�`.

Still other roots add assimilation, dissimilation, or metathesis of consonants to the loss of vowel: �nak angk-�n, at�p apt-�n, dan�w (? see � 421) ka-raniy�w-an, dat�ng datn-�n, g�lid ta-ligd-�n (beside regular ta-gil�r-an), hal�k hagk-�n, hangg� hangg-�n (i. e. the h of -han is lost), kin�g kingg-�n, sil�d sigl-�n, tan�m tamn-�n, tuw�d ka-tu-tur-�n.

Entirely irregular are the following: ala�la alala-h�nin (-h�nin for -hin), aniy�ya any�-han, h�ri` ka-hariy-�n ka-hary-�n (beside regular pag-har�-an), �hip h�p-an, �lag inlag-�n (for ilag-n�n? but also regular il�g-an), kaw�yan kwayan-�n (beside regular kawayan-�n), kil�la kilan-l�n (for kilal-n�n?), k�ha k�-nin, lar�` laruw-�n larw-�n (beside regular laru-�n), pul�` ka-puluw-�n ka-pulw-�n (beside regular ka-pulu-�n), s�la sang-l�n (for sal-nan? also ka-sal�-nan and regular sal�-han), sund�` pagk�-sunduw-�n (beside regular -sundu-�n), t�o ka-taw-�n (? see � 422, also regular ka-ta�-han), toto� t�to-h�nan (-h�nan for -h�n).

335. Doubling. In certain formations the underlying word, if disyllabic, is repeated; the phonetic treatment is the same as that of successive words in a phrase (� 34): agad-ag�d, gabi-gab�, �pat-�pat, pa-l�gid-l�gid.

If the underlying word has more than two syllables, only the beginning of it, inclusive of the second syllabic, is repeated, and the final syllabic of this repeated part has a primary accent: kan�-kan�no, kan�-kanil�, nag-kag�-kagal�t (underlying word ka-gal�t).

336. Reduplication. In some formations the beginning of the underlying word, including the first syllabic, is repeated, s�-s�lat, �-akiy�t. Words with reduced i or u (� 27) reduplicate with i, u: maka-s�-siy�, maka-s�-sy�.

Note the foreign words: kr�s nag-k�-kur�s, trab�ho nag-t�-trab�ho.

Initial d of the roots listed in � 17 often becomes r after the reduplication: k-in-�-d�-roon-�n (do�n), nag-d�-da�n (da�n).

When a prefix which involves change of initial comes before a reduplicated form, the latter has the changed initial both in the reduplicative syllable and in the underlying part: n�-r�-ro�n (do�n), pa-ngu-ngum�t (um�t with pang-, � 334, a, 4; also: pang-u-um�t) p�tol pa-mu-m�tol (p�tol with pang-).

337. Accent-shift. In certain formations the accent is displaced one syllable toward the end of the word: s�lat sul�t. This is especially the case before suffixes forming transient words: s�lat sul�t-an. In some formations with suffixes the accent moves two syllables toward the end of the word: s�lat sulat-�n.

Certain roots are especially given to this change and show it in formations where it is not regular. In these roots the accent-shift is more or less clearly and regularly connected with a modification of meaning. The roots are: �bot overtake, with shift: reach for, take hold of, pass, hand; e. g. pa-�bot let oneself be overtaken, pa-ab�t something caused to be handed, �kay, �lam, �wa`, �yaw, b�ba`, b�hay, b�ya`, b�lag, g�lit, g�sing, h�yag, h�li, l�pit, l�yo`, m�ra, s�kit, s�ma, s�ra`, t�lo, t�ma`, t�wa, t�loy, �na. See Index. A few pairs of roots differing only in accent may possibly belong here, e. g. -�nak family and an�k child.

338. Secondary accents. (1) In some formations a secondary accent is spoken on the initial syllable of the underlying word: al�s �l�s-an, ka-gal�t k�gal�t-an, iy�k �y�k-an. If the first syllable is closed, the secondary accent is omitted: luks� luks�-han; so also if it is followed by consonant plus reduced vowel (� 27): taniy�g tany�g tany�g-an; and also if its own vowel is reduced: niy�g ny�g niy�g-an ny�g-an. There are some irregularities. See �� 377,b. 383. 421. 421,b. 426,b.

(2) Prefixes and reduplications often take a secondary accent: n�-p�tol (different in meaning from na-p�tol), s�-s�lat.

These secondary accents have phonetically the quality of primary accents when they come before short oxytone underlying words: n�-rin�g, �-akiy�t. If, however, the word is accented on a suffix, the accent on this is more audible and the secondary accent remains: n�-buks-�n. So also if there are two secondary accents: n�-r�-rin�g. Longer oxytone words not accented on a suffix vary; they have been transcribed as heard in each case: nag-s�-si-pag-lar�` nag-s�-si-pag-lar�`.

339. Indications. In the following description formations will be indicated as follows:

prefixes thus: nag-; infixes: -um-; suffixes: -an; secondary accent on prefixes: n�-;

doubling by "D", e. g. nag- D -an represents the formation seen in nag-asw�ng-asw�ng-an;

reduplication by "r", with secondary accent by "R", e. g. pag- r (pag-pu-p�tol), nag- R (nag-p�-p�tol), -um- R (s-um-�-s�lat), nag- R -um- (nag-t�-t-um-ir�);

secondary accent on the first syllable of the underlying word by "S", e. g. S -an (�l�s-an);

accent-shift by "(1)" or "(2)", e. g. (1) describes the formation of sul�t from s�lat; (1) -an (sul�t-an); (2) -an (sulat-�n).

340. Summary of formations. The various formations group themselves into eight classes: 1. simple formations without characteristic prefix, expressing simple actions, objects, etc.; 2. formations with characteristic prefix pag-, expressing chiefly transitive actions; 3. characteristic prefix pang-, deliberate actions; 4. si-, action by more than one actor; 5. paki-, action along with others; 6. ka-, reciprocal, involuntary, and accidental; 7. pa-, causative; 8. pati-, reflexive.

These indications are a mere rough guide: neither the characteristic prefix nor the meaning indicated runs through the entire group. The first three groups are the most important, and, to a large extent, each formation of the other five groups belongs also to one of the three primary groups.

In each group there are four types of words: simple static, transient, abstracts of action, and special static. The simple static words involve no idea of active or passive; the transients are accompanied by abstracts, in which the transient occurrence is viewed as a static concept, and by special static words, which, though static, involve the idea of voice: simple static s�lat a document, writing, letter; transient sum�lat wrote, sul�tan is to be written to; abstract pags�lat an act of writing; special static sulat�n a writing-desk (with idea of local passive).

Each (active or passive, � 92) transient formation exists in two modes, actual and contingent, and each of these has two aspects, punctual and durative; the durative always has accented reduplication. The actual mode envisages the occurrence as actually having taken place or taking place: in the punctual aspect the occurrence is viewed in its entirety, without regard to duration, and hence always as past: nag�ral studied, learned; in the durative aspect of the actual the occurrence is viewed as a process going on in time, past or present: nag��ral was studying, is studying, used to study, studied (repeatedly), studies. The contingent mode views the occurrence as not having actually taken place: the punctual aspect views it as possible, hypothetical, or commanded: mag�ral should study, study (as command); the durative as future from the point of view of the past or present: mag��ral will study, was going to study. The punctual contingent form is used not only in commands and hypothetical clauses, but in subordinate predications and complements generally, even, for instance, after nang (� 192 f.), and often, in such constructions, in competition with actual forms. It is often used, further, after hind�` (� 238). When objectivized with ang, it expresses the possibility or circumstance of the occurrence: ang mag�ral a hypothetical studier, the circumstance that one might study.

The abstracts of action are much used in the construction described at � 274.

In addition to these more or less regular and systematized forms, there are various isolated formations, which will be discussed after the others.

A systematically arranged list of formations precedes the Index.

3. Description of formations.

I. Primary groups (zero, pag-, pang-).

A. Simple static forms.

(1) Root-words.

341. The uses of root-words cover a wide range of meanings, the diversity of which is due to the various material meanings of the roots. The rough grouping here made is a matter of convenience; the speech-feeling seems not to distinguish classes of roots or diverse employments of root-words.

While a complete list of the examples occurring in the Texts and illustrative sentences will be given for nearly all other formations, the root-words are so numerous that it will be expedient merely to refer to the Index.

(1) Root-words in many cases express object-ideas which are viewed as simple: ang b�hay house, ang t�o human being.

(2) If the words containing a root have in common the idea of a quality rather than of an object, the root-word may express either the quality itself, or an object possessing the quality.

(a) In the former case, it is generally a single occurrence of the quality that is expressed, not the quality in general, which is expressed rather by a collective with ka- and -an (� 421 ff.), but this distinction is not fully carried out. The root-word generally stands in object construction. Examples: Ang b�te ni Hw�n ay wal� sa kanya ng �lo, d�tapuwat n�s�sa kanya ng p�so`. Juan's good quality lies not in his head, but in his heart. Si P�dro ay t�o ng wala ng dang�l. Pedro is a person without honor. ang �nit nang tag�raw the heat of summer. Ang l�lim nang bal�n ay is� ng pantay-kaw�yan. The depth of the well is the length of a bamboo-tree. Ang lam�g sa Am�rika ay masy�do. The cold in America is excessive. Ang ligs� nang us� ay hind� g�ya nang sa �so. The speed of the deer is not equal to that of the dog. Ang sam� nang s�ging na it� ay n�sa ug�t. The trouble with this banana-tree is at the root. ang ta�s nang k�hoy the height of the tree.

(b) When expressing an object endowed with a quality, the root-word is in competition with words formed with the prefix ma- (� 454). It usually stands as a predicate or as conjunctive attribute of another word. ang t�big na �lat salt-water, ang d�gat na �lat the salt-sea, the ocean. Ang p�ko` ay balukt�t. The nail is crooked. Ang patal�m ay b�wal sa manga b�ta`. Children are not allowed to have sharp tools. Ang itl�g na yit� y bug�k (or: bul�k). This egg is rotten. Sya y bug�k. He is crazy. ang buw�sit na al�la` a repulsive servant. Ik�w ay bw�sit. You are a bore. Manga g�liw ko ng gino�! Honored sirs! isa ng t�u ng h�mak a no-account person. ang t�u ng las�ng the drunken man. Sya y las�ng. He is drunk. ang pul�be ng lump� the lame beggar. Sya y lump�. He is lame. Si Hw�n ay isa ng mah�l na b�ta` sa kanya ng manga mag�lang. Juan is a child dear to his parents. M�ra ang manga s�le sa panah� ng it�. Peppers are cheap at this time. Hind� pans�n ang pikl�t sa mukh� nang dal�ga ng si Mary�. The scar on young Maria's face is not noticeable. ang t�o ng pan�t a bald-headed man. isa ng b�ya ng pay�pa` a tranquil town. Sya y p�pe. He is dumb. Ang pint� nang bint�na` ay put�`. The window is painted white. Sag�d ang kanya ng gup�t. His hair-cut is close. Sina Hw�n ay sal�t sa pananam�t. Juan and his family are short of clothing. Ak� y saw� sa pagsus�bo` sa b�ta`. I am in an awkward position for feeding the child. S�yang ang b�ta ng si Hw�n. Little Juan is to be regretted. Isa ng t�o ng sinung�ling si P�dro. Pedro is a liar. Si Hw�n ay isa ng t�o ng tany�g. Juan is a renowned man. Tany�g sya sa kanya ng kl�se. He is at the head of his class. ang tig�s nang k�hoy the hard part of the log. ang da� ng tump�k the right road. si Unt�` Shorty (as nickname).

(3) If the words containing the root refer rather to an action or occurrence, the uses of the root-word are more varied.

(a) The root-word may refer to the action itself; it is used of a single instance rather than of the action in general, which is expressed rather by abstracts of action, though the distinction is not always clear. The root-word so used is mostly in object construction. Examples: Ang any�ya sa �kin ni Hw�na ay �ki ng tinangg�p. I accepted Juana's invitation. May b�l�` ang kaw�yan. The bamboo has a break in it. May b�hay pa ang p�sa ng it�. This cat is still alive. Ang dalamh�t� nang kanya ng in� ay malak�. His mother's grief is great. Sa damdam k� y nagumpisa n� ang malalam�g na �raw. I think (literally: In my feeling) the cold days have begun. Si Hw�n ay sya ng pum�yag sa hil�ng nil� sa kanya ng sasaky�n. Juan was the one who acceded to their request for his vehicle. Ang h�gas nang pingg�n ay marum�. The washing of the dishes is dirty, i. e. The dishes have been poorly washed. Ang kant� nang �bon ay ma�nam. The bird's song is pleasant. Ang kas�l ni P�dro at ni Mary� ay sa lingg�. The wedding of Pedro and Maria will be on Sunday. ang �ki ng l�lan sa tr�n my embarking (with all my goods) on the train. Ang pagakp�k nang manga t�o ay nakab�bingi. The applause of the people was deafening. Ang p�so` sa pa� ni P�dro ay malak�. The burn on Pedro's foot is large. Ang p�tol nang buh�k ni Hw�n ay bak�l-bak�l. Juan's hair-cut is uneven. Sa l�nes ang tagp� nila sa da�-ng-Bal�wag. They are to meet on the Baliwag road next Monday. ang tah�l ni Bat� ng B�kal the barking of Iron Stone (name of a dog). Ang t�m� nang b�ta` ay sa �lo. The child was struck on the head. Binigy�n ni Hw�n nang is� ng tap�k ang kayb�gan nya ng si P�dro. Juan gave his friend Pedro a nudge. Ang kanya ng t�log ay mab�baw. His sleep is light. Ang up� nang Ints�k ay patalungk�`. The Chinese sit squatting. But�han mo ang y�r� nang sambal�lo. Put a good finish on (the making of) the hat.

(b) The root-word may express an object by virtue of which the action becomes possible or has concrete manifestation; this use closely approaches transient passives of various kinds. Root-words in this use are most commonly conjunctive attributes, but the object construction, especially in the predicate, is frequent. Ang �gaw nya ng laruw�n ay inilagay ny� sa kah�n. The toys he snatched were put by him into a box. S�no sa manga t�o ang in�ko ni Mariy�no? Ang �ko ni Mariy�no ay si P�dro. Which one of the men did Mariano relieve?--The one whom Mariano relieved is Pedro. Hwag kay� ng mam�tol nang kaw�ya ng hind� ninyo �ri`. Don't make a cutting of bamboo not owned by you; ang �ri` property, ang may �ri` the owner or master. Ang bigay ny� sa �kin nang Pask� nang Pangangan�k na nagda�n ay isa ng tabak�ra. For last Christmas he gave me a tabatiere. ang b�his nya ng dam�t the (good) clothes she has put on (in place of her others). isa ng b�ro` a joke. ang by�y na isd�` sa pal�isd�an the fish allowed to swim free in the fish-reservoir. ang dal� that carried; Dal� ni Hw�n ang lumb�. Juan is carrying the cup. ang dik�t nang ap�y the blazing of the fire. Ang oras�n ni Hw�n ay g�ling sa Par�s. Juan's watch comes from Paris. Ang torn�lyo ng it� y g�mit sa m�kina. This screw is used in the machine. ang gant� nya ng p�la` the gift he gave in return. Ang kw�ko ng it� ay ganti ng p�la` sa �kin ni Hw�n. This cigar-holder is a return-gift to me from Juan. May h�lo ng iba ng b�gay ang g�tas na it�. This milk has something else mixed in with it. h�ti ng gab� midnight. Ang hamp�s na tinangg�p ni Hw�n sa kanya ng pangino�n ay is� ng kab�n. The whipping Juan got from his master was twenty-five strokes. May h�rang na p�no-ng-k�hoy ang da� ng pat�ngo sa b�riyo nang San-Vis�nte. The road toward the district of San Vicente has a tree obstructing it. H�le si Hw�n nang pul�s. Juan was arrested by the policeman. Ang ig�b nya ng t�big ay marum�. The water he dipped from the spring is dirty. Ang bin�b�sa nya ng libr� ay kath� ni Ris�l. The book he is reading was written by Rizal. La�n (or: ta�n) kay P�dro ang ala�la ng it�. This present is reserved for Pedro. Ang l�kad ni Hw�n ay ang panghihir�m. Juan's errand is to borrow something. Ang l�lan ni Hw�n sa kanya ng karit�n ay manga kah�n nang �lak. Juan's load on his wagon is cases of liquor; ang l�la ng kasangk�pan the loaded utensils. Ang man�k na yit� y l�to sa dur�an. This chicken is roasted on the spit. N�h�le si Hw�n sa tab� nang kanya ng n�kaw na kab�yo. Juan was caught with the horse he stole. Ang p�sak nang bangk�` ay bun�t nang ny�g at pagk�t. The boat is calked with cocoanut fibre and wax. Ang p�gil ni Hw�n ay ang kab�yo. Juan is trying to restrain the horse. Ang pint�s ko kay Hw�n ay ang kanya ng b�syo ng pagin�m. What I don't like about Juan is his vice of drunkenness. ang p�lot anything picked up; an adopted child. ang isa ng p�tol na p�no-ng-k�hoy a tree that has been cut up; Ang p�tol nang k�hoy ay n�pakaikl�`. The wood has been cut too short. Ang libr� ay ang sady� ko sa b�hay ni Hw�n. The book is what I went to Juan's house for. Ang sak�y sa tr�n ay lim� ng kompany� ng sund�lo. The people in the train are five companies of soldiers. Ang sangk�p nang man�k ay kalab�sa. The chicken is cooked with pumpkin. "Magsipags�si kay�, manga t�o ng makasal�nan," ang sig�w nang k�ra mul� sa p�lpito. "Repent, ye sinners," was the cry of the priest from the pulpit. isa ng s�bo` a mouthful. Mar�mi sya ng t�go ng kwalt�. He has much money saved away. Ang tan�m nang b�kid ay p�lay na malagk�t. The field is planted with a sticky rice. Ang tangg�p nya ng b�lin ay lubh� ng mar�mi. The commissions he received were numerous. Malak�s ang t�wa ni Hw�n. Juan's laughter was loud. Ang t�wag sa lug�r na it� ay Kinamatay�-ng-Kab�yo. They call this place Dead Horse. ang tungt�ng that on which something stands; a mat on which dishes are set (specific name: dik�n). Ang t�r� nang b�ta` ay ang mans�nas sa m�sa. The child is pointing at the apple on the table. Ang us�sa` sa �kin ni Hw�n ay kung saan n�ndon ang kanya ng sombr�ro. What Juan asked me was where his hat was. Wal� sya ng uw� ng manga libr�. He did not bring home any books. Ang tal�m nang g�lok ay y�ri sa Yur�pa. The cutting-edge of the bolo is made in Europe.

(c) Especially with the particle n� (� 223) the root-word often expresses a brusque command; in this use it is in competition with transient forms. Dal� ka nang iyo ng pagtakb�. Hurry your running, i. e. Run faster. Hamp�s na kay�, manga b�ta`, sa manga langg�m. Whip at the ants, boys. H�t� na nang mans�nas. Divide up the apples. Hint� na kay�, manga b�ta`. Stop, children. �sip na kay� kung an� ang kahulug�n nang �ki ng bugt�ng. Guess the meaning of my riddle. L�yas na! Get out! L�g� na! Take a bath! Luksu n� sa tin�k na iy�n. Jump across those spines. S�ma n� sa kany�. Go to him. T�wag na nang manga pol�s. Call the police. Tay�`. Stand up. Up� na. Sit down.

(d) Repeated with nang (� 191) root-words, as predicates, denote an actor in repeated and continuous action: N�k�ta ko ng p�tol nang p�tol si Hw�n nang tub�. I saw Juan cutting away at the sugar-cane. Similarly (see Index) bil� and t�wa.

342. Root-words with accent-shift. Barytone roots are used as root-words with shift of accent to the last syllable to denote something which has been affected by the action, quality, or (in fewer cases) thing, which is denoted by the root. The particle n� is usually added. Agaw n� sa s�nog ang manga laruw�n. The toys have been snatched from the fire. Aw� na si Hw�n sa kanya ng pinar�rus�ha ng an�k. Juan is already overcome with pity for his child, whom he is punishing. Ang �so ni Hw�n ay bah�y. Juan's dog is grown up in the house, is completely domesticated. Ang b�ta ng si Hw�n ay bah�y. Little Juan is shy, is unused to strangers. Bayad n� ang �tang sa �kin ni Hw�n. Juan's debt to me is paid now. Bihis n� ang b�ta`. The child's clothes have been changed, The child is dressed up now. Bilang n� ang manga itl�g na it�. These eggs are already counted. Ang �lo ni Hw�n ay bil�g. Juan's head is round; or: Juan has been fooled; ang bil�g na t�bo` the round dipper. Buh�y ang �ki ng in�. My mother is living. Sya y bul�g. He is blinded; or: He is blind; ang bab�ye ng bul�g the blind woman. Daing n� ang isd�`. The fish has been laid open. isa ng t�o ng gut�m a hungry (or: gluttonous) person. Hat� na ang tub�. The sugar-cane is cut in two. Huli n� si Hw�na sa tr�n. Juana is late for the train. Ang karn� ay ihaw n�. The meat is done. Init n� ang g�tas. The milk is heated. Kayas n� ang kaw�ya ng it�. This bamboo is already smoothed. Ang pagk�k�nan nya nang itl�g ay ang kah� ng kulang n�. He will take eggs from the box that is already started (literally: incomplete, cf. �pat na s�ntimos ang k�lang nit�. This lacks four cents, is four cents too little). Lak�d kam� ng umw�`. We went home on foot. Lipas n� ang gam�t (ang pabang�`). The medicine (the perfume) is stale, has lost its strength. Lipas n� ang �ki ng g�tom. My hunger has disappeared. Pas�` ang lug�r na it� nang kanya ng kam�y. This spot on his hand is burned; ang pas�` a pottery dish. Ang pagkak�gal�tan ni Hw�n at ni P�dro ay paw� n�. The quarrel between Juan and Pedro is now allayed. Pigil n� ang kab�yo. The horse is under control now. Ang k�hoy ay putul n�. The wood is now cut. It� y sir� na. This is already ruined. Sun�g ang dam�t na kanya ng pinir�nsa. The clothes which she ironed are scorched; sun�g na as�kal burnt sugar. Tam� na ang iyo ng pagkw�nta. Now you have figured it correctly. Tipun n� an manga kalab�w. Now the carabao are rounded up. Tulis n� ang l�pis. The pencil is sharpened. Tur�` ang kanya ng dal�re`. His finger is stiff.

This form occurs, in this book, also from the following roots (see Index): b�sag, b�not, g�lit, g�mit, h�sa`, kil�la, l�pad, l�mang, p�god, s�kop, s�nay, s�lat, t�pos, tiw�la`, t�loy.

(a) In the case of some roots this form is used like a simple root-word without accent-shift; these are roots in which the accent-shift expresses a modification of the material meaning; see � 337. So: al�m that known (see Index); Bab� na riy�n sa iy� ng kin��up�n! Come down from your perch! Ang sak�t na kanya ng tin�tiis ay ang lagn�t na t�pus. The sickness from which he is suffering is typhoid fever. (ang s�kit na kanya ng tin�ti�s the grief he is enduring). Sama t�yo sa pagbil� nang p�lay. Let us be partners in buying rice. Cf. also hul�, above.

(b) In oxytone roots, where the accent-shift cannot occur, our form is homonymous with the simple root-word: Bigti n� si P�dro. Pedro is now strangled. Bukas n� ang l�ta. The can is opened. Busug n� ang manga h�yop. The animals have been fed their fill. Hint� na ang tr�n nang ak� y sumak�y. The train had stopped when I got on. Hubad n� ang b�ta`. The child is undressed now. Ang manga Igor�te ay hub�d. The Igorote go naked. Hungkuy n� ang big�s. The rice is fanned now. Sya y kas�l. He (she) is married. Pantay n� ang l�pa`. The ground has been levelled. N�k�ta ko ng pat�d ang samp�yan nang dam�t. I saw that the clothes-line was broken. Pun� na ang b�te ng it�. This bottle is already full. Tay� na ang b�hay. The house is already erected. Tikwas n� ang k�hoy. One end of the log is down.

Similarly are used: angk�n, bil�, tadt�d, tuw�`.

(2) Doubling.

343. Simple doubling. Simple doubling expresses explicit plurality or repetition, often with the idea of variation, intensity, or diminution: �pat-�pat four by four, four at a time, ang mata-mat� trellis-work. Ang d�r� nya nang kar�yom ay hindi par�-par�ho. Her stitches with the needle are not even. Sab�y-sab�y sila ng umal�s. They all went away at the same time. Similarly from: ag�d, al�n, an�, �raw, b�gay, bak�l, balukt�t, bar�, gab�, gib�`, hal�`, is�, lah�t, l�bo, lingg�, lo�b, pant�y, s�ri`, s�no, sun�d, tul�`, unt�`.

(a) The simple root does not occur and the meaning is discrepant in paru-par� butterfly.

(b) From derived words, in the same meaning: kan�-kanil� (ka-n-il� � 528), kan�-kan�no (ka-n-�-no � 528), dal�-dalaw� two by two, two at a time (da-law� � 345), tatlu-tatl� three by three, three at a time (ta-tl� � 345).

(c) With retraction of accent: D�l�-d�li sya ng tumakb�. He ran off like a flash.

344. (1) D. In some cases the accent is shifted; the meaning is the same: Put�l-put�l ang kataw�n ni Hw�n nang �ki ng m�k�ta. Juan's body was all cut up when I saw it. This form from: b�hay, b�yan, p�nit, s�bi, s�lok.

(3) Reduplication.

345. Simple reduplication. In a very few cases the place of the root-word is taken by the root with reduplication. The only clear case is tutul� ear-wax, root -tul�. The numerals dalaw� two and tatl� three seem to be irregularly reduplicated forms of roots -law� and -tl� (for -tal�?), as a few of the derivatives seem to indicate. A number of words, treated in the following as simple roots, have, however, the aspect of this formation: bab�ye, bibingk�, bubuw�t a kind of mouse, gagamb�, lal�ki, pap�ya (Spanish), tutub�, toto�.

346. Accented reduplication. Accented reduplication is used chiefly in transient forms (� 348); distinct from this use seems to be that of numerals, in the meaning of only so many: ��pat, �il�n, �is�; similarly d�-dalaw� only two (from da-law�) (� 345).

m�may�`, m�my�` seems to be felt as a simple root-word and has been treated as such.

(4) pang-.

347. Of the two prefixes round which primary forms are grouped (� 340), pag- is used only for abstracts of action (�� 348. 350. 351); with pang- are formed words denoting the thing used for doing so and so, or as such and such: Nawal�` ang kany� ng pangak�la`. His power of thought left him. ang pangat�p that used for roofing, a shingle. Magpap�tol ka, P�dro, nang manga kaw�ya ng pangb�kod. Have some bamboo cut for a fence, Pedro. ang pangbamb� a stick or club used for beating. pangbay� instrument for pounding rice, pestle. pangdil�g implements used for sprinkling. pangg�pas a slicer, a curved knife with saw-toothed edge. Ang gin�mit nya ng panggup�t na gunt�ng sa dam�t ay mapur�l. The scissors he used for cutting cloth were dull; also simply: ang panggup�t scissors, shears, ang panghamp�s a whip. Ang ginaw� ng pangh�rang sa da�n nang manga tulis�n ay isa ng gib� ng karit�n. The robbers used a broken-down wagon to make the obstruction on the road. Ang las�ta ng it� ay pangh�te` nang d�yap. This knife is used for cutting limes. ang pangl�pa` the sticky mud used for smoothing the threshing-floor. ang pangag�nip a dream. pamit�k a single rein (one guides the animal by flicking it in various ways, cf. pit�k a fillip, a flick, a snap). pamat�y in pamatay-k�to thumb, literally: that with which one kills head-lice (k�to). Pam�tol nang buh�k ang gunt�ng na it�. These shears are used for cutting hair. Ang salaw�l na yit� y sya k� ng pangsak�y sa kab�yo. These are my trousers for horseback-riding. Ang manga pint� ng may pangsar� na g�mit ay sum�sara ng k�sa`. Doors that have closing attachments close themselves automatically. ang pan�li` a halter or rope for tying up an animal. Ang kulil�ng na yt� y sya k� ng pan�wag nang al�la`. This bell is what I use for calling the servants; also: pangt�wag. Ang pangtay� nang hal�ge ay hind� dumating. The instruments for setting up posts (i. e. the cranes) did not arrive. Ang kalayk�y ay sya k� ng gin�mit na pangt�pon nang manga bun�t na dam�. I used the rake for piling up the uprooted grass. ang pan�ro` a pointer, anything used for pointing. Sya y may salaw�l na pangup� sa dam�han at gayon d�n m�y-roon sy� ng pangup� sa s�g�lan. He has trousers for sitting on the lawn and others for when he sits at the gaming-table.

Similarly from, the following roots: �hit, �ko`, ala�la, an�k, bil�, bilm�t, dal�ngin, gam�t, hil�mos, h�li, �sip, ngal�n, p�lo`, pukp�k, s�bong, tak�p, tan�m, tiw�la`.

(a) This derivative from numerals denotes a thing used to fill such and such a place: ang pang�pat that used as fourth, as: the fourth horse in a team; of similar meaning: panglim� fifth, pang�nim sixth, pamit� seventh, pangwal� eighth, pangsiy�m ninth. From the ordinal (� 416,a) is formed pang�na first. From phrases the higher numbers: pangsa-m-p�` the tenth (sa m p�` ten), panglabi-ng-is� the eleventh (labi ng is�), pangdalawa-ng-p�` twentieth, pamito-ng-p�` seventieth.

(b) A few formations show irregularities: panuk�la` equivalent to pangak�la` above, is felt to belong with ak�la`; cf. the similar insertion of u in paub�ya` (� 481,d); pangino�n master, does not seem to be felt as a derivative of gino� and has therefore been treated as a separate root.

Second and third are derived from the reduplicated form (� 345) and show phonetic irregularity: ang pangalaw� the second; one's second in a duel; pangatl� third, third horse in a gun-carriage; similarly pangatlo-ng-p�` the thirtieth.

(c) From root with accent shift (� 337) only panghul� the last (of an established series).

B. Transients, abstracts, and special static words.

(1) Active with -um- and abstract with pag-.

348. Of the active forms of the primary groups, that of the type with prefix zero expresses the actor in a simple action or process. Both of the punctual forms, actual and contingent, are made with infix -um-; the actual durative consists of the root reduplicated, with infix -um-; the contingent durative is reduplicated, but lacks the infix; the reduplication is in both cases accented. The abstract of action consists of the root with prefix pag-. Thus the forms are: p-um-�tol, p-um-�-p�tol, p-um-�tol, p�-p�tol, pag-p�tol. Examples:

Umabang k� nang maglalak� nang g�tas. Watch for a milkman. Sya y um�gaw nang manga laruw�n. He snatched some toys. Sya y um�hon sa �log (sa bund�k, sa gul�d). He went up the river (up into the mountains, up the hill). Pum�tol ka, Hw�n, nang b�ho`, pag�hon mo sa bund�k. When you go up into the mountains, Juan, cut some slender bamboo. Um�min sila P�dro sa harap�n nang huk�m. Pedro and his band confessed before the judge. um�mot sold, of other than a regular merchant. Um�nib ka kay P�dro. Let your mat overlap Pedro's, i. e. Sleep next to Pedro. Umangk�n ka nang laruw�n. Take some toys for yourself. Ang pag�yaw nya ng kum�in nang karn� ay sya ng nakab�b�te sa kany�. His not being willing to eat meat is what does him good. Ang hal�ge nang b�hay ay bum�ba` sapagk�t hind� k�ya nang l�pa` ang big�t na kanya ng din�dala. The post of the house sank because the weight it was bearing was too great for the ground. B�b�bag si Hw�n nang kanya ng kalar�`. Juan will fight with one of his playmates. Bumaluktot k� nang yant�k. Bend a piece of rattan. Ang �has ay bumalukt�t. The snake doubled itself up. Bum�lot ka nang s�man (nang sigar�lyo, nang k�mot). Roll up some suman (sticky rice cooked in banana-leaves; some cigarettes, a blanket). Ang pagb�sa ay mah�rap. Reading is hard. Sya y bumigt� nang t�o. He choked a man to death. Ang pagbigt� ay isa ng pagpat�y sa k�pwa t�o sa pamamag�tan nang pagsak�l. Strangling is killing a person by means of choking. Bum�log si Hw�n nang isa ng turump�. Juan turned out (on a lathe) a spinning-top. Bum�ngit sya sa malaki ng pang�nib. He went (voluntarily) to the brink of a great danger. Bumit�w sa l�bid ang is� sa iny�. One of you let go of the rope. Bum�buk�s ang manga bulakl�k sa h�laman�n. The flowers in the garden are opening. Sya y bum�not nang dam�. He plucked up some grass. Lah�t nang t�o sa b�ya ng iy�n ay bum�to sa kandid�to ng si Manik�s. All the people in that town voted for the candidate Maniqu�s. Ang hal�ge ay dum�dala nang tah�lan. The post bears up girders. Dumamd�m si Hw�n nang isa ng mabig�t na sak�t. Juan felt a severe pain. Sya y dumap�`. He lay down on his face. Ang kanit� ng kwalt� sa bangk� ay kasaluk�ya ng gum�g�na nang buw�s. Your money and mine in the bank is even now earning interest. gumant� act in retaliation. gum�pas cut with the pangg�pas. Ang m�y sak�t ay guminh�wa. The patient became more comfortable ... ay gum�ginh�wa n� ... is getting more comfortable now. Sya y humal�k sa kanya ng n�nay. She kissed her mother. Ang b�ta ng si Hw�n ang humamp�s sa an�k ni �li ng Mary�. It was little Juan who hit Aunt Maria's little boy with a whip. ang pagh�nap a seeking (especially of one's daily bread). Sya y hum�rang nang manga t�o ng nagh�hatid nang kab�yo sa b�ya-ng-San-Mig�l. He held up some people who were taking horses to the town of San Miguel. Ak� ay hum�t� nang mans�nas. I cut an apple in two. Hum�t� ako nang manga itl�g na binil� ni Hw�na. I took half of the eggs Juana bought. Ing�tan mo ang pagh�wak sa m�kina ng iy�n, sapagk�t bak� ka maput�lan nang dal�ri` na g�ya nang nangy�ri sa ib�. Be careful how you take hold of that machine, for you might get your finger cut off like others before you. Hum�n� nang pagtakb� ang kab�yo. The horse lost its speed as a runner. ang paghing�` a requesting, a request. H�hiram kam� nang libr� sa librer�ya. We shall borrow books from the library. hum�la` predicted, prophesied. umig�b get water by dipping from a well, spring, or stream. Ak� y um��hip nang p�to. I was blowing the small flute. Um��hip ang h�ngi ng hab�gat. The spring wind is blowing. Um�lag ka. Get out of the way. Ang kany� ng manga pagil�ng ay lubh� ng mak�nis. His little dodges are very clever. Um�nit ang pl�nsa. The flatiron became hot. Um�nit ang t�big. The water got hot. Ang pagin�m nang �lak ay masam�`. Drinking liquor is harmful. Sya y umin�m nang g�tas. He drank some milk. Um�sip ka, N�nay, nang isa ng kw�nto. Try to think of a story, Mother. Ang pag�sip nang bugt�ng na it� ay mah�rap. This riddle is hard to solve. ang kany� ng pagiy�k her weeping. kumabiy�w press sugar-cane. Kumalusk�s sa s�lok ang dag�`. The rat pattered in the corner, i. e. I heard the pattering of a rat in the corner. Ang �bon ay kum�kant�. The bird is singing. Kumap� si Hw�n nang itl�g sa p�gad nang man�k. Juan felt out some eggs in the hen's nest. Kum�kap� sya nang isa ng palak�`. He felt around for a frog. Sya y kum�yas nang isa ng kaw�yan. He smoothed a stick of bamboo. Hwag k� ng kumur�t ngay�n! Don't pinch now! Si P�dro ay lumab�s. Pedro went out. Ang �so y lum�l�mon. The dog is feeding. Si P�dro ay lum�l�mon at hind� kum�k�in. Pedro is eating like an animal, not like a human being. Lum�yag si Manuw�l sa Am�rika. Manuel sailed (i. e. voyaged) to America (ang l�yag a sail). Ang bantay-p�lay ay lum�yas. The watchman of the rice-field left his post. Isa ng sund�lo ay lum�yas sa �nit nang paglalaban�n. A soldier deserted in the heat of the battle. Sya y lum�bot. He went for a walk. Magp�tol ka, P�dro, nang manga k�gon, �pang lum�nis ang b�kid. Cut the cugon-grass, Pedro, so that the field may become clear. Si P�dro ay lum�pat sa iba ng b�yan. Pedro moved to another town. Lumuhod k�, Hw�n. Kneel down, Juan. Si Hw�n ay lumuh�d sa har�p nang h�re`. Juan knelt down before the king. Sya y ngum�ngit�`. She is smiling. Pumag�tan sya sa dalaw� ng dal�ga. He placed himself between two young ladies. Ak� y pum�na nang us�. I shot an arrow at a stag (p�na` an arrow). Pum�naw ang kanya ng hining�. His breath departed, i. e. He gave up the ghost. Si Hw�n ang pum�so sa �ki ng kulug�. It was Juan who burned out my wart for me. Huw�g k� ng pumat�d nang samp�yan! Don't you break the clothes-line! Si Hw�n ay sya ng pum�yag sa para� ng it�. It was Juan who agreed to this plan. Sya y pum�p�yag. He is willing. Pum�li ak� nang malak� ng mans�nas. I chose a big apple. Pum�p�lit sya ng magbuk�s nang kab� ng b�kal. He was trying hard to open an iron safe. (But punctual: Pum�lit sya ... He forced open...). pumit�k give a fillip, snap at with one's finger. Sya y pum�pukp�k nang bun�t nang ny�g. He is pounding cocoanut husks. Pum�p�tol nang kaw�yan si Mariy�no. Mariano is cutting bamboo. P�p�tol ... will cut.... Ang sum�s�buy na t�big ay nangg�g�ling sa bubung�n nang b�hay. The water that was splashing on us came from the roof of the house. sumag�sa` jostle. sumaguw�n paddle. sum�hod put something under to catch what flows or falls. Sya y sum�sakay sa bangka` nang ak� y dumat�ng. He was getting into the canoe when I arrived. Sum�la siy� sa sings�ng. He missed the ring (in the juego de anillo, in which one tries to catch a ring on a stick). sum�lok dip out water (ang s�lok a dipper, a basket for catching fruit when it is cut from the tree; a net for catching insects). Sya y sumand�k nang sin�ing. She dipped out some boiled rice. Sum�nib ka kay P�dro, (same meaning as um�nib above). Sum�kad ang kab�yo. The horse struck out, gave a kick. Sumik�p ang da�n sa karam�han nang t�o. The road became crowded with the multitude of people. Sumik�p ang dam�t. The garment shrank and became tight. Sumiks�k si Hw�n sa p�long nang manga t�o. Juan crowded his way into the gathering of people. Sumilakb� ang ap�y (ang kanya ng g�lit, ang kanya ng tuw�`). The fire (his anger, his joy) welled up. Ang pagsint� ni P�dro ay hind� tinangg�p nang dal�ga. The young lady did not accept Pedro's proffer of love. Siy� ang sumukl�y sa kanya ng an�k. It was she herself who combed her child's hair (ang sukl�y a comb). sum�lid spin thread. sum�long push ahead, progress; also as family name: Sum�long. Si P�dro ay sumund�` nang p�re`. Pedro fetched a priest. Hind� sya nagkap�lad sa pagsund� nang m�diko. He did not succeed in fetching a doctor. Pagsuntok ny� ay tumakbo k�. When he strikes you, run (sunt�k a blow on the head). Sya y sum�suts�t. He is whistling. Ang b�ta y tumah�mik. The boy quieted down. Tum�tah�l ang �so. The dog was barking. Sya y tum�m� sa hw�ting. He won in the lottery. Tum�tand� siy�. He is getting old. Sya y tum�nod sa b�hay sa bo� ng magdam�g. He guarded the house all night. Tuman�ng ak� kay Hw�n. I asked Juan. Tuman�ng ak� nang kw�lta kay Hw�n. I asked Juan for money. tumangh�` wonder. Sya y tum�tang�`. He is willing, He assents. Tum�t�wa siy�. He is laughing. Ik�w ang tum�wag kay Hw�n. Do you call Juan. N�rinig ko ang iy� ng pagt�wag sa �kin. I heard you calling me. Sya y tumay�`. He stood up. tumib�` cut bananas off the tree. tumil�d cut wood small along the grain, shave off, cut into small parts. Sya y tumimb� nang t�big. He drew water with a bucket. ang pagting�n the act of looking at something, observation. Ang pagtip�d sa kwalt� ay gin�gawa nang mar�mi. Many people practise economy in the matter of money. Ang pagt�pon sa manga k�hoy kung tagul�n ay mah�rap, sapagk�t map�tik. It is hard to collect logs in the rainy season, on account of the mud. Tumir� si Hw�n na isa ng ta�n sa b�ya-ng-Bal�wag. Juan lived one year in the town of Baliuag. tumuk�` pick with the beak (tuk�` the beak of a fowl). Sya y tum�lak sa isin�s�long na kah� ng b�kal. He pushed (i. e. took part in pushing) at the iron safe they were moving. Also: Sya y tum�lak. He "shoved off", i. e. He went away. Si Hw�n ay tum�log sa b�hay ni P�dro. Juan went and slept in Pedro's house. Ang kanya ng pagt�log ay mab�baw. His sleep is light. Tum�ngo sya sa b�ya-ng-Bal�wag. He went toward Baliuag. Ang pagubr� nang manga bar�l na yt� sa pamamar�l nang kalab�w-ram� ay hind� pinakamab�te. These guns are not the best for shooting wild carabao. Umubr� ang inin�m nya ng purg�. The purge he drank took effect. Umubr� sa kakan�n ang kanya ng ginaw� ng lam�sa. The table he made was suitable for the dining-room. Umubr� ng nag�mit ang torn�lyo ng b�kal sa lug�r nang tans�. It was possible to use the iron screw instead of the copper. Sya y umup�`. He sat down. Ang pagup�` sa h�ngin ay isa ng mah�rap na par�sa. "Sitting on the air" (standing in sitting position with the forefingers pointing up) is a hard punishment. Um��rung ang tr�n. The train is backing. Um�tang ka nang salap� kay P�dro. Borrow some money from Pedro. Umuw� si Hw�n. Juan went home, Yum�y� si Hw�n nang kanya ng mang� kayb�gan. Juan invited some of his friends. ang pagy�ya` the invitation.

Other roots occurring in these forms (and roots occurring above out of their alphabetical order): ab�la, �gos, �kay, akiy�t, al�s, �sa, �yon, b�baw, bah�`, bal�k, b�lang, bil�, b�hat, b�tas, da�ng, d�la, dal�s, d�law, dal�, d�mi, d�pit, d�po`, dar�s, dat�ng, dil�m, d�kit, dum�, do�n, gal�w, g�mit, gam�t, g�pang, gast�, gaw�`, g�lang, gup�t, gust�, h�ba`, h�bol, h�god, hakb�ng, h�ngo`, har�p, h�tak, hig�`, h�la, hil�ng, hing�, h�kay, h�li, h�ni, �big, kag�t, k�in, kalab�g, k�pit, kat�m, kib�`, kil�la, k�los, kin�g, k�ta, k�ha, kul�ng, kuw�nta, l�ban, lag�nap, lagp�k, l�kad, lak�s, lak�, lam�g, lamp�s, lang�y, l�pit, l�gaw, lind�l, lip�d, lit�w, liw�nag, lub�g, l�ha`, luks�, luw�s, n�kaw, ngiy�w, panh�k, pas�n, p�sok, pat�y, p�wis, p�hit, pit�s, puk�l, p�ri, put�k, sag�t, sak�l, s�kop, sal�kay, s�ma, sangg�, s�pit, sar�, say�w, sig�w, s�kat, sil�d, s�pa`, s�sid, sub�, s�gat, s�lat, sump�ng, sun�d, suw�y, s�yo`, tab�`, tag�`, takb�, t�lik, tal�n, tan�w, tangl�w, tar�to, taw�d, t�bay, tikt�k, tikuw�s, t�bo`, tugt�g, tukt�k, t�long, tungt�ng, tup�d, ul�n, ul�`, unt�`, �pa, y�man.

(a) Kumusta k�? How d'you do? may be felt to belong here. [10]

(b) An irregular inflection in which variation of the initial consonant takes the place of the infix is known to Mr. Santiago from a few traditional phrases: Hwag k� ng mat�y (for: pumat�y) nang k�pwa t�o. Thou shalt not kill.

(c) Forms with accent shift owe this feature to the root (� 337): Umab�t ka nang isa ng mans�nas. Help yourself to an apple. Ang sumun�d na silakb� nang lagabl�b ay siya ng umab�t sa bubung�n. The next leap of the flame reached the roof. Ang pagab�t nang b�nga ng it� ay mah�rap. This fruit is hard to reach. N�rinig ko sy� sa kanya ng pagay�w sa sin�be ni Hw�n. I heard him disagree with what Juan had said. Nag�lit ak� sa kanya ng pagay�w sa lam�sa. I was angered at his leaving the table. Si P�dro ay umay�w na. Pedro has left the table. Similarly from b�ba` and s�kit.

(d) From a phrase: Hind� mar�nong gumanti-ng-p�la` si Hw�n. Juan does not know how to make return for kindness (gant� ng p�la`).

(e) From derived words: tumag�lid, pagtag�lid (ta-g�lid � 523); tumal�kod, pagtal�kod (ta-l�kod � 523). See also �� 404. 488.

349. The doubled root with the same formation is used of actions aimlessly repeated at intervals. N�tinik sy� sa kanya ng pagtakb�-takb� sa bak�ran. In his constant running about the yard, he got a splinter into his foot. Tum�t�wa-t�wa si Hw�n h�bang nagb�bigk�s nang talump�te si P�dro. Juan kept laughing at intervals while Pedro was making his speech. Si Hw�n ay tum�t�wa-t�wa nang sya y hampas�n ni P�dro. When Juan kept laughing every little while, Pedro finally struck him with the whip.

(a) From a root with accent shift (� 337): Tum�tawa-taw� si Hw�n tw� ng �kin sya ng m�masd�n h�bang nagb�bigkas nang talump�te si P�dro. Juan kept snickering every time I happened to look at him while Pedro was delivering his oration.

(2) Active with mag- and abstract with pag-r.

350. Many roots form their active with the prefix mag- for the contingent, nag- for the actual mode; the durative is reduplicated before the prefix is added. The corresponding abstract of action has unaccented reduplication and prefix pag-. Thus: nagp�tol, nag-p�-p�tol, mag-p�tol, mag-p�-p�tol, pag-pu-p�tol. These actives express, generally, a more deliberate action than those with -um-; often also one involving more effect on external objects than do those with -um-. We take up first those roots from which forms with -um- do not occur in our material:

Ak� y nag�ant�k. I am sleepy. Ang l�song kay Hw�n sa kanya ng pagaar�ro ay nagsidating n�. The helpers for Juan in his plowing have arrived (ang ar�ro a plow). Si P�dro ay mag�as�wa. Pedro is going to take a wife. Si P�dro ay mag�as�wa kay Hw�na. Pedro is going to marry Juana. Sil� y nag��way. They are fighting. magb�hay build a house. Ak� y nagbast� nang �ki ng dam�t. I packed up my clothes. Sya y nagb�yad nang kany� ng manga �tang. He paid off his debts. magbay� pound rice in a mortar. magbig�s hull rice (i. e. make big�s, hulled rice, out of p�lay, rice in the grain). Sya y nagbig�y nang libr� sa �kin. He gave me some books. Sya y nagb�his kan�na ng um�ga. She put on her good clothes this morning. Ang pagbibiy�bo ay isa ng ug�li nang manga Ints�k. Swinging the feet when sitting is a habit of the Chinese. Nagbiy�y si Hw�n nang isd�` sa kanya ng pal�isd�an. Juan put some fish into his fishpond. magbuh�l tie a knot. Nagbw�l sila nang isa ng p�no-ng-k�hoy. They felled a tree. Ang s�ging ay nagd�d�hon. The banana-tree is putting out leaves. Ang paghah�sa` nang pang�hit ay mah�rap. Sharpening razors is difficult. Sya y nagh�hat�d nang manga lar�wan sa simb�han. He is delivering images to the church. Maghubad k� nang dam�t. Take off your clothes. Sya y nagh�h�gas nang pingg�n. She is washing dishes. Naghungk�y sya. He fanned rice. mag�haw roast (something). Nagkam�t sya nang mar�mi ng t�bo`. He obtained much profit. Sya y nagk�kuble. He is in hiding. maglak�` peddle (something). Magl�lar� na siy�. He is going to play after all. Naglar� na ak�. I have played enough now. Nagl�laro sil�. They are playing. Naglaw�t ak� nang l�bid sa bint�na`. I hung a rope out of the window. magl�gaw prepare rice-broth. Nagl�l�to siy� nang g�lay. She is cooking vegetables. Sya y magp�pasy�l. He is going to take a walk. Nagp�p�nas sya nang sah�g. He is scrubbing floors. Nagp�yat ak� kagab�. I staid up last night. mags�ing cook rice dry (with little water). Nagsamp�y sya nang dam�t. She hung out some clothes. Sya y nagt�bon nang isa ng h�kay. He dammed up a ditch. Magtah�n ka nang paglalar�`. Stop playing. Nang n�rinig nya iy�n ay malak� ang kanya ng nag�ng pagtatak�. When he heard this, his surprise was great. Sya y nagt�l� nang b�buy sa hal�ge. He tied a pig to the post. Magt�r� ka nang w�ka ng Kapamp�ngan sa iyo ng p�aral�n. Teach the Pampanga language in your school. Sya y nagt�t�ro`. He is teaching. T�m� ang kanya ng pagtutw�d. His reckoning is correct. Sya y nagus�sa`. He made inquiry. Sya y nagus�sa nang mar�mi ng b�gay. He inquired into many things. Hind� ba ak� nag�tos sa iy� ng gumaw� it�? Didn't I order you to do this? Ang pagwawal� nang mang� b�hag ay pinar�rus�han nang kam�t�yan. The escaping of captives is punished with death. Sya y nagw�wal�s. She is sweeping.

Other roots so used: ak�la`, alaskuw�tro, als�, aluw�ge, aniy�`, �ri`, bal�ta`, bant�y, b�ngon, b�tis, ba�n, bigk�s, bendisiy�n, biniy�g, bint�ng, bun�`, b�nga, da�n, dalamh�ti`, das�l, d�os, d�ya`, d�wang, dug�`, d�sa, ros�riyo, h�gis, hand�`, h�ri`, h�tol, hin�la`, hint�y, hint�`, h�rap, hiwal�y, �ngat, kas�l, k�lang, kumpis�l, kur�s, kuw�nto, las�ng, lib�ng, lib�ng, ligt�s, lim�s, lits�n, liwal�w, lub�y, lubl�b, mah�l, m�no, mas�d, mil�gro, m�sa, mul�`, ningn�ng, pasiy�nsiya, pas�yo, s�bi, s�bog, s�bong, sadiy�`, salit�`, s�nay, silb�, simb�, s�si, siy�sat, s�bo`, sug�l, sumb�ng, sund�lo, tab�ko, tadt�d, t�go`, t�lo, talump�ti`, tam�, taniy�g, tang�y, tangg�l, t�gil, tind�g, trab�ho, t�lin, t�los, umpis�, �sap, w�ka`.

351. When a root is used both with -um- and mag-, the latter form usually differs by adding another object affected (dumal� bear, bear up: magdal� carry to someone, to a place; bumal�k go back; magbal�k return to a place, to someone); in some instances the added object is the actor himself (reflexive); in others the mag- form expresses a general activity, that with -um- a specific act (so, in part, p�tol). Examples:

Sya y nag��ral. He is studying (um�ral is known as an archaic word for teach morals, instruct; ang �ral that taught, precept, moral doctrine). Magbaluktot k� nang yant�k. Curve some pieces of rattan (bumalukt�t, � 348, intransitive or of a single specific transitive action). Magb�lot ka nang s�man, nang sigar�lyo. Roll up some suman, some cigarettes (more general than -um-); Magb�lot ka nang k�mot. Wrap yourself up in a blanket (cf. -um-, � 348). Si Hw�n ay nagbigt�. Juan hanged himself; ang pagbibigt� suicide by hanging. Nagbil� si Hw�na nang mar�mi ng sombr�ro. Juana sold many hats. Nagb�bile si Hw�na nang sombr�ro. Juana is selling hats (bumil� buy). Siya y nagd�dala nang t�big sa kab�yo. He is bringing water to the horse. Ang b�ta` ay nagd�dala nang k�hoy. The boy is bringing wood. Hwag k� ng magdamd�m sa hind� ko pagkatup�d nang �ki ng pang�ko`, sapagk�t iy� y hind� ko sinady�`. Don't feel bad about my not having fulfilled my promise, for I did not do it intentionally (dumamd�m feel something). Si Hw�n ay naghamp�s no� ng Byerne-s�nto ng nagda�n. Juan performed flagellation last Good Friday. Magh�nap kay� nang inyo ng ikab�b�hay. Go and find a living for yourselves. Sya y nagh�rang nang p�no-ng-k�hoy sa da�n. He blocked the road with a tree. Ang paghah�rang sa da�n ay b�wal. It is forbidden to make obstructions on the roads. Nagh�t� ako nang manga bunga-ng-k�hoy sa manga b�ta`. I distributed fruits among the children; ... nang dam� sa manga kab�yo ... grass to the horses. ang paghah�ti nang manga b�nga-ng-k�hoy sa manga b�ta` the distribution of fruits to the children. Nagh�n� sya nang pagtukt�k sa pint�`. He made his knocking at the door gentle. Sya y nag��nit nang g�tas. She is heating some milk. Mag�sip ka. Bethink yourself, Be reasonable. Si Hw�n ay nag�sip na nak�wan si P�dro. Juan planned to rob Pedro. Ang kanya ng pagi�sip ay mat�las (mah�na`). His thinking-power is acute (weak). Sil� y nagk�m�yan nang magk�ta. They shook hands when they met. Maglabas k� nang manga s�lya. Bring out some chairs. ang paglal�kad the drawing of something on foot; Nagl�kad ang manga estudy�nte nang is� ng kar�sa. The students drew a float. Sya y nagl�bot nang isa ng band�la`. He walked about bearing a flag. Sya y nagl�l�nis nang m�sa. He cleans tables. Ang pagnan�kaw ay isa ng kasal�na ng mabig�t. Thievery is a serious offense (num�kaw of a single theft). Nagp�p�lit sya ng magbuk�s nang kaba ng b�kal. He tries (often) to force open safes. Pagpup�tol ni Hw�n nang b�ho` ay pumaro�n ka t tul�ngan mo sy�. When Juan cuts bamboo (as an occupation throughout a longer period of time), go along and help him. Magp�p�tol kam� nang manga kaw�ya ng g�gam�tin sa pagtatay� nang b�hay. We shall cut bamboo for use in building houses. Magp�p�tol ak� nang kuk�. I am going to cut my fingernails (reflexive). Nagp�tol nang buh�k ang Ints�k na si Y�p. The Chinaman Yap cut his queue. Nagsak�y sya sa kanya ng bangk� nang dalawa ng estudy�nte. He took two students into his canoe. Nagsik�p ang da�n. The road grew crowded (apparently equal to -um-, but cannot be used of a garment). Nags�siksik si Hw�n nang big�s sa s�ko. Juan was stuffing rice into the sack. Sya y nagsukl�y. She combed her hair. Ang pagtatah�l nang �so ng it� sa manga nagd�d��nan ay masam� ng ug�le`. This dog's way of barking at passers-by is a bad habit. Ang Kast�la` ay nagt�tan�ng. The Spaniard was asking questions. Nagtan�ng ak� kay Hw�n kung sa�n ang da�n. I asked Juan where the road was (mag- with indirect questions or questions implied). Si Hw�n ay sy� ng nagt�wag nang b�go ng l�yi. It was Juan who announced (as town crier) the new law. Ang pagtat�wag ni Hw�n ay hind� m�rinig nang karam�han dahil�n sa mah�n� nya ng tin�g. Juan's announcement was not audible to the majority, owing to his weak voice. Sya y nagtay� nang b�gu ng b�hay. He built a new house. Ang pagtatay� nang manga b�hay d�to ay lubh� ng mahalag�. The building of houses here is very expensive. Nagtikw�s si P�dro nang manga sul�ras nang b�hay. Pedro put some of the joists of the house out of level. Ang pagtitip�d nang kw�lta ay gin�gaw� nang mar�me. Many people save money. Nagtip�d si Hw�n sa kanya ng pananam�t. Juan was saving of his clothing. Ang pagtit�pon nang manga �rmas ay b�wal. Storing up arms is forbidden. Magt�pun ka nang k�hoy. Store up some wood. Sila y nagt�pon nang k�hoy sa lik�d nang kanila ng b�hay. They stored up wood in the rear of their house. Nagt�pon siya nang man�` sa isa ng s�lok nang bak�ran. He kept a pile of peanuts in a corner of his yard. Sya y nagt�lak nang isin�s�long na kah� ng b�kal. He did the shoving of the iron chest that was being moved (-um- shoved at, took part in the shoving). Mag�ubra ang karit� ng it� sa mah�rap na da�n. This wagon will be suitable for difficult roads. Nagup� sya nang manga b�ta sa bangk�`. He seated some children on the bench.

Similarly: bal�k, buk�s, kant�, s�boy, s�ma, sar�, say�w, takb�, tal�n, t�nod, tir�, y�ya`.

352. Transients with mag- are much used with derived words; in so far as these belong to secondary groups, they will be treated below; see �� 384. 405. 410. 427,a. 430,a.b.c. 453,a. 489. 489,a. 513.

(a) From phrases: Nagm�madali-ng-�raw. The day is dawning (madal� ng �raw proximate day, i. e. dawn, daybreak), nagm�m�-�ri` is possessing, has mastery of (may �ri` owner, master). nagh�h�ti-ng-gab�. It is midnight (h�ti ng gab� midnight). pagtatatlo-ng-gab� the three nights' celebration (tatl� ng gab�).

(b) From compound words: pagbibig�y-lo�b (big�y-lo�b); Ang maghampas-l�pa` ay nakas�s�ra` nang p�ri. Being a vagabond is dishonorable (hamp�s-l�pa`); magh�h�nap-b�hay (h�nap-b�hay).

(c) From derived words: Transients with mag- from the contingent of transients with -um- express insistent and prolonged action: K�hit na wal� sya ng tal�no ay nagp�pum�lit sya ng m�t�to. Although he has no gifts, he is trying very hard to get educated. Sya y nagp�pum�lit na pumaro�n sa p�knik. He is trying hard to be able to go to the picnic (pum�lit). Similarly, nagt�tumir� (tumir�).

From words with prefix ma- (� 454) in the sense of making something or making (claiming) oneself to have a quality: Magm�madal� t�yo nang pagl�kad, �pang hw�g t�yo ng m�huli sa tr�n. We will hurry our pace, so as not to be late for the train (madal�`). Nagm�maligs� si Kul�s sa pagsun�d sa manga �tos sa kany�. Nicol�s is quick about obeying the orders that are given him (maligs�). Nagmalw�t sya nang pagpar�to. He took a long time coming here. Hwag k� ng magmaluw�t nang pagpar�to. Don't take too long about coming here (maluw�t). Similarly, pagmamar�nong (mar�nong).

From various words: Sila y naghimags�k. They came to an armed conflict (-himags�k � 518). Si Hw�na ay nagh�himat�y. Juana is fainting (himat�y). Si Hw�na ay nagk�kakan�n. Juana makes sweetmeats (for sale) (kakan�n, � 367,e). Sya y nagkalatimb� nang mar�mi. He did the well-bucket exercise many times (kala-timb�`, � 519).

(d) Especially common are transients with mag- from special static words with suffix -an; they express mutual or concerted action by two or more actors.

From the forms in S -an (� 377): Nag�l�san ang mang� aluw�ge no ng l�nes nan h�pon. The carpenters all left last Monday afternoon (�l�s-an). Nagl�l�b�san sil�. They were all going out. Sil� y nagp�t�san nang manga biy�bas. They all picked guavas together. Mags�s�g�wan m�na t�yo b�go tap�sin ang m�ting. We will all give a yell together before we close the meeting. Ang manga �so sa b�ya ng it� ay nagt�h�lan kagab�. The dogs in this town all barked last night. Similarly, from: bangk�`, bast�, da�n, huk�m, iy�k, kam�y, kant�, salit�`, takb�, tamp�, taniy�g, tip�n, tugt�g, uw�`. The form in S -an is itself from a derived word in: Nagh�mags�kan ang mang� sund�lo ng Tag�log at Kast�la`. The Tagalog and Spanish soldiers fought each other (h�mags�kan from -himags�k, � 518).

From the forms in S (1) -an (� 378): Nag��w�tan sil� nang ak� y dumat�ng. They were singing in chorus when I arrived. Mag�b�gan kay�. Love one another. Nag��b�gan si P�dro at si Hw�na. Pedro and Juana love each other. Ang ginaw� nya ng pagmum�r�han nang kany� ng mang� kal�kal ay dahil�n sa kanya ng pangangail�ngan nang kw�lta. His putting down the prices of his goods was due to his need of money. Similarly: h�kot, k�in.

From forms in (2) -an (� 379): Hwag kay� ng magmurah�n sa da�n. Don't abuse each other on the street. Nagm�murah�n sil�. They were engaged in an abusive quarrel. Ang k�gal�tan ni P�tra at ni Kul�sa ay nat�pus sa h�y�ga ng pagmumurah�n. The hostility between Petra and Nicolasa ended in an abusive quarrel in public. Nagpurih�n ang dalawa ng magkayb�gan sa kanila ng pagtatalump�te`. The two friends praised each other in their speeches. Nagp�purih�n ang manga kayb�ga ng it� sa p�hay�gan. This group of friends praise each other in the newspapers. Si Hw�na at si Mary� ay nagputul�n nang kuk�. Juana and Maria cut their fingernails. Sil� y nags�gasa�n. They all jostled one another. Ang pagsas�gasa�n nang manga t�o ay lubh� ng magul�. The jostling of all the people was most confused. Nagsugat�n sil�. They inflicted wounds on one another. magtaan�n flee. Ang kanila ng pagtutulung�n ay hind� n�tul�y. Their plan to help each other was not carried out. Similarly: �gaw, bal�ta`, d�hil, h�nap, har�ng, l�ban.

From diminutives in D -an (� 381): Mag�aswang-asw�ngan daw si P�dro sa karnab�l. Pedro says he will dress up as a bogey-man for the carnival. Hwag k� ng magasw�ng-asw�ngan. Don't play bogey-man. Nagman�k-man�kan si Hw�n sa karnab�l. Juan masqueraded as a rooster at the carnival. Sil� y nag�ungg�-ungg�an. They are playing at being monkeys. Nagus�-us�han siy�. He pretended he was a deer. So also: dap�`. From (1) D -an: Sya y nagbab�-babay�han. He went dressed as a woman. So also from t�kot.

353. Transients with accent shift and mag- may owe the shift to the root; so from �bot (� 337): Nag�ab�t si Hw�n nang sigar�lyo sa kanya ng manga kayb�gan. Juan is passing cigarettes to his friends. Ang pagaab�t nang sigar�lyo ay isa ng ug�li ng mag�lang. Passing cigarettes is a polite custom (umab�t, � 348,c, does not involve a person to whom). So also m�ra.

In the great majority of instances, however, the accent shift is not peculiar to the root, but constitutes a special formation, which expresses a more plentiful and diverse action than the transient with -um- or simple mag-. Sil� y nagb�bab�g. They are fighting each other. Magbar� ka. Get dressed, Put on your clothes. Sya y nagbun�t nang dam�. He plucked up a lot of grass. Maghan�p kay� nang manga bulakl�k sa p�rang. Go and look for flowers in the woods. Pabaya�n naw� niny� na sya y maghan�p. Please allow him to make an inspection. Naghat� ako nang manga itl�g na pinatigas�n ni Hw�na. I halved a quantity of eggs which Juana had hard-boiled. ang paghahat� nang manga mans�nas the halving of the apples. Magisip k� nang manga lug�r na ma��ri ng kinaiw�nan mo nang iy� ng libr�. Think of the various places where you may have left your book. Si Hw�n ay nag�isip nang manga ih�hand� nya sa fiy�sta. Juan is thinking of what things he will serve at the fiesta. Hwag k� ng magput�l nang abak�, Hw�n. Don't cut up any hemp, Juan. Magp�putol kam� nang b�ho`, yant�k, at bay�gin, pagdat�ng n�min do�n. We shall cut slender bamboo, rattan, and thick bamboo when we get there. Nagput�l si Hw�n nang tub� sa pin�sok nya ng tub�han. Juan cut down a lot of sugar-cane in the cane-field he got into. Nagp�putol nang kaw�yan na hind� nya �r� si Hw�n. Juan cuts down bamboo that does not belong to him. Nagpuy�t ak� sa manga gab� ng nagda�n. I have repeatedly staid up late the last few nights. Hind� ko m�put�lan nang tah�d ang k�tyaw, sapagk�t it� y nags�sik�d. I couldn't cut the rooster's spur, because it kept struggling with its feet. Sya y nags�sinungal�ng. He is telling lies. Pagsusul�t nya nang manga s�lat ay pumaro�n ka t lin�sin mo ang kany� ng aral�n. While he is writing all his letters, go and clean his study. Ang pangino� y nagtaw�g nang manga al�la`. The master called various servants. Nagt�tawag sy� nang manga kit�`, nang �kin sya ng datn�n sa bak�ran. She was calling to a lot of little chicks when I came upon her in the yard. Ang pagtatawag ny� sa manga kit�` at ang manga p�t�kan nang manga man�k ay nakab�bing�. Her constant calling to the chicks and the clucking of all the hens made a deafening noise. Ang b�ta y nagt�tur� nang kany� ng gust�. The child points at the various things it wants. Hwag k� ng magut�ng. Don't go about asking for credit. Ang magut�ng sa mar�mi ng tind�han ay hind� ma�nam na ug�le`. Buying on credit in many shops is a bad habit. Similarly from: b�lot, �ngay, l�kad, l�yag, l�bot, t�go`.

(a) When transients with mag- are made from derived words, the accent of the underlying word is occasionally shifted, apparently without change of meaning: Sya y nagmayab�ng. He boasted (may�bang, � 454). Similarly: magk�kalahat�` (kalah�ti` � 519).

(b) In one such case there is not only accent shift, but also secondary accent on the first syllable of the underlying word: Sya y nagm�puri. He praised himself. Sya y nagm�m�pur�. He is praising himself. Ang pagmam�puri ay hind� magand� ng ug�li`. Praising oneself is not a becoming habit (ma-p�ri, � 454).

354. The corresponding form from oxytone roots is made with unaccented reduplication of the underlying word: mag-si-sig�w, mag-si-si-sig�w, nag-si-sig�w, nag-s�-si-sig�w; the abstract, however, lacks the extra reduplication, coinciding with that of �� 350. 351: pag-si-sig�w.

Sya y naggugup�t nang manga pap�l. He cut some pieces of paper into bits. Sya y nagg�gugup�t nang manga pap�l. He is cutting up some pieces of paper. Ang b�ta ng si Hw�n, kung wal� ng m�gawa`, ay sya ng nagh�hahamp�s sa manga p�nu-ng-s�ging. It is little Juan who goes whipping at the banana-trees when he can't find anything to do. Hwag k� ng magpupuk�l nang bat�, sapagk�t bak� mo tam�an ang bint�na ng salam�n. Don't be always throwing stones; you might break a window. Nagp�puput�k ang inah� ng man�k na n�sa kulung�n. The hen in the crate keeps up a constant cackling. Il�gan mo ang dum�rating na kab�yo na nagt�tatakb�. Look out for the horse that's coming there; it's a run-away. Nag�uup� sya sa dam�. He always sits on the grass. So also: dug�`, in�m, lund�g, sig�w, tagp�`.

(a) In one instance a barytone root has this reduplication with explicit plural meaning: magkik�ta see one another, meet (of more than two people, cf. magk�ta).

355. Accent shift and reduplication of the root appear in barytone roots in the same sense as accent-shift alone, with perhaps a somewhat greater intensity of the action: Nagp�puput�l nang ret�so ang b�ta`. The child was cutting some rags into small bits. Ang k�tyaw ay nags�sisik�d. The rooster kept struggling with its legs. Sya y nagt�tataw�g nang manga kit�`. She kept calling to the chickens.

356. With doubling of the root, transients in mag- express either action repeated at intervals or reciprocal action of explicitly more than two actors: Nagis�-is� ang manga b�ta` nang pagl�pit sa �kin. The children came to me one by one. So from: dukl�y, hiwal�y, �lit.

(a) In one instance the root has accent shift: Naguna-un� ang manga b�ta` nang pagl�pit sa �kin. The children vied with each other for the first place in coming to me.

(3) Active with mang- and abstract with pang- r.

357. The active with mang- has the forms: ma-m�tol, ma-m�-m�tol, na-m�tol, na-m�-m�tol, pa-mu-m�tol (from p�tol); it expresses action more deliberate, selective, or in larger quantity (professional, habitual) than mag-; like the latter, but more clearly, it is used for the making or using of such and such an object. Examples:

Sya y nangab�la sa �min. He made trouble for us. Nangano k� nang iyo ng manga kalar�`? What did you do to your playmates? Nang�yap l�mang ang b�ta`. The child ate only relishes. Sya y nangb�bambo nang �so. He is a caning a dog. ang pamamangk�` canoeing. Namil� ak� sa b�ya-ng-Mal�los. I shopped in Malolos. Sya y nangd�dilig nang kars�da. He sprinkles streets. ang pangdidil�g street-sprinkling (as vocation). Ang kasalat�n nina Hw�n sa pananam�t ay nangg�lin sa pagsusug�l ni Hw�n. Juan's family's want of clothing is due to his gambling. Hwag k� ng manghamp�s. Don't go whipping people. Sya y nangh�rang nang manga t�o. He made a practice of holding people up. Sya y hin�li nang pul�s dahil�n sa panghah�rang nang manga t�o. He was arrested by the police for highway robbery. Nangh�te si Hw�na nang kal�kal. Juana shared orders for goods. Ang panghah�te ni Hw�na nang kal�kal na ipinagb�bili ny� ay sya ny� ng ikinal�ge. Juana's getting her stock of goods for sale by sharing in orders of fellow-retailers is what made her lose money. Nangh�n� nang pagtakb� ang kab�yo sa kala�nan nang pagk�g�mit sa kany�. The horse slackened its pace because it had been driven too long. Sil� y nangh�na`. They grew faint. Manghir�m ka nang palak�l. Go borrow a hatchet. mangh�la` practise fortune-telling. Nangh�h�li kam� nang isd�` sa kagamit�n nang d�la. We catch fish by means of nets. Ang kanya ng manga panging�lag sa sak�t ay lubh� ng malak�. His precautions against sickness are elaborate. Sya y nang�ngab�yo. He rides horseback. Nangap� si P�dro nang isd�`. Pedro caught fish in his hands (by feeling for them in mud-holes). Sya y nang�ngas�ra. He eats in a boarding-house. mang�wit cut twigs with the k�wit (a small, hook-shaped pruning-knife); also: get tired of a position or occupation. Ang b�ta ng si Hw�n ay nang�ng�ya nang manga k�pwa nya b�ta`. Little Juan lords it over the other children. Sya y nang�ngubl�. He is keeping himself in hiding. Hwag k� ng mangur�t, P�dro. Don't be pinching people, Pedro. Ang kanya ng pananag�nip ay hind� n�tuloy, sapagk�t n�gising sy� sa kalab�g nang p�sa`. His dream was interrupted by his being awakened by the falling of the cat. Sya y nan�nag�nip. He is dreaming. Ak� y nanag�nip kagab�. I had a dream last night. Nam�so sya nang dal�ri nang k�pwa nya b�ta`. He scorched his playmate's finger. Pamum�tol nya nang kaw�ya y sund�n mo sy� t bak� magliwal�w l�mang sa kalakh�n nang panah�n. When he goes bamboo-cutting, follow him to see that he doesn't loaf most of the time. Ang pamum�tol nang kaw�yan ay mah�rap. Bamboo-cutting is hard work. Nam�tol si Hw�n nang kaw�yan. Juan cut bamboo. Nam�m�tol kam� nang dam� �pang ipagbil�. We are cutting grass for sale. Mam�m�tol kam� nang tub� sa bak�ran ni �li ng P�tra. We are going to cut sugar-cane in Aunt Petra's yard. Ang b�ta ng may sak�t ay nam�m�yat sa kanya ng in�. The sick child keeps its mother awake. Ang mal�wig na pananalit�` ay hind� ma�nam. Roundabout speeches are not pleasant. P�dro, hwag k� ng many�sat nang gaw� nang m�y gaw�`. Pedro, don't be inquiring into other people's business. ang panun�lat writing in quantity, clerkship. ang pananah�` the occupation of sewing, the being a seamstress. Sil� y nanah�mik. They quieted down. Ang b�ta y nanah�mik. The boy quieted down to take a rest. man�wag call, summon (people). ang panun�ro` the act of pointing things out. Sya y nang�na. He went first, He led. Sya y mang�ng�na. He will be in the lead. Ang b�ta y nangup� sa bunt�t nang s�ya nang bab�ye. The boy went and sat right down on the lady's train. Ang panguup� nang b�ta sa bunt�t nang s�ya ay ipinahint� sa kany� nang kanya ng n�nay. The boy's trick of sitting down on people's trains was put a stop to by his mother. Sya y nangus�sa nang manga bab�ye. She interrogated a number of women. Nang�tang sya sa �kin nang lim� ng p�so. He made a loan of five dollars from me.

Similarly from: �hit, �ko`, an�k, b�hay, bal�ta`, bar�l, b�ro`, b�yan, b�log, b�ro`, b�hay, bund�k, dam�t, d�kit, gam�t, gup�t, h�bol, h�mon, hing�`, ig�b, �lin, k�in, kumpis�l, lat�`, l�ko, mah�la`, no�d, pag�tan, p�li`, p�lot, sal�kay, sar�wa`, sing�l, s�bok, suls�, s�nog, s�yo`, t�lo, tangh�li`, tiw�la`, um�t, y�ri.

(a) From derived words: ang panghih�mags�kan in the same meaning as paghih�mags�kan (from h�mags�kan, � 377,a); so from kalah�ti` (� 519), kin�in (� 365). See also �� 421,a. 422,a.

(b) From words with prefix hin- (� 518) we may derive, theoretically, the transients with prefix manghin-, though the underlying word in most cases does not exist. For the phonetic irregularities see � 334,a,5.

Sila y nanghimags�k. They came to an armed conflict (bags�k). Hwag k� ng manghigant� sa kanil�, Hw�n; ang kabab�an nang lo�b ay l�lo ng magand�. Don't take revenge against them, Juan; meekness of spirit is more becoming. Mangh�higant� kam� dahil�n sa manga kalupit� ng ginaw� nila sa �min. We will take vengeance on them for the many cruelties they have committed against us. manghinuk� cut the fingernails (kuk�). Nangh�hin�yang sil� sa pagkamat�y ni Del-Pil�r. They were mourning the death of Del Pilar. Malak� ang kanila ng panghihin�yang sa namat�y na b�ta ng si Hw�n, dahil�n sa hind� karany�wa ng tal�no nya. Their grief at little Juan's death was great, on account of his unusual talents. (s�yang). manghining� pick the teeth (ang ting� foreign substance between the teeth). manghinul� clean out the ears (tu-tul� earwax, � 343).

(c) In one instance the root is doubled; its accent shift is due to the meaning of the root: Nanaw�-naw� si P�dro nang m�rinig ny� na sya y n�p�li ng mag�ng b�bo sa lar�`. Pedro could not keep from snickering when he heard that the choice had fallen on him to be clown in the play.

(4) Special static words.

358. A few individual forms of the preceding group have static value; of transients, um�ga morning (� 348) and ang mam�so` a blister (p�so`); of abstracts, ang pagk�in food (beside the act of eating), cf. also pagd�ka, � 265,9. The following are the regular formations of special static words of this type:

(a) Dual collectives with mag-: ang mag�li aunt and niece or nephew. Ang magam� ng si Mary� at si P�dro ay naparo�n sa b�kid. Pedro and his daughter Maria have gone to the country. Ang magas�wa ng P�dro at Hw�na ay naparo�n sa tey�tro. Pedro and his wife Juana have gone to the theatre. Ang magat� ng si Mary� at si Mary�no ay nagsipagpasy�l. Mariano and his oldest sister Maria went for a walk. Sila y magat�. She is his oldest sister. ang magbal�e ng si Hw�n at si Andr�s Juan and Andr�s, whose children have married each other. magbay�w two men, one of whom has married the other's sister. magbil�s two men who have married two sisters (ang bil�s the husband of one's wife's sister). magh�pag two women, one of whom has married the other's brother (each of the two is the other's h�pag). magimp� grandmother and grandchild. magin� mother and child. magk�ya the oldest brother and a younger brother or sister. magn�nay mother and child. magt�tay father and child.

Slightly divergent is mag�nak: it includes the whole family, a given person plus his angk�n (� 379): Nagsimb� ang bo� ng mag�nak. The whole family went to church. ang mag�nak na sina Hw�n Kr�s the Juan Cruz family. Irregular in meaning are also magdam�g and magh�pon, of periods of time.

From a compound word: ang magk�pit-b�hay two neighbors.

From a phrase: Sila y magk�pwa-t�o. They act toward each other as fellow men should (k�puw� t�o).

From a derived word: magama�n uncle and nephew or niece (ama-�n, � 367,a); see also �� 408. 412,a. 490.

(b) mag- r similarly forms explicit plurals: ang magaam� the group of a father with two or more of his children. ang magbabal�e a group of three or more people whose children have intermarried. ang magiin� mother and children. ang magkuk�ya a group of brothers and sisters including the oldest brother. magnan�nay mother and children. magpip�nsan a group of cousins. magtat�tay father and children.

From a compound: magkak�pit-b�hay.

From a derived word: magkakasinglak� (kasinglak�, � 520). See also �� 412,a. 427,d.

(c) mag- r also forms static words denoting a professional agent: ang magaar�ro a plowman, magbibist�y woman who sieves the rice in a mill, magnan�kaw thief.

From oxytone roots also with retraction of accent: ang magbab�yo a rice-pounder, magbib�gas a dealer in hulled rice.

(d) Barytone roots usually shift the accent: ang maghuhug�s a dish-washer, maglalak�d traveller, maglilin�s a cleaner, maglilip�` plasterer, maglulut�` cook; Si Hw�n ay isa ng magpuput�l nang k�hoy. Juan is a wood-cutter; ang magsusul�t a clerk scribe, magsusuy�d a harrower (s�yod a harrow), maguut�ng a habitual borrower. So also from: l�ko`, t�wag.

(e) m�ng- r has the same value. The accent of the prefix can appear only in an open syllable (� 338); ang m�ngingisd�` a fisherman; m�nanalak�b fish-trapper (salak�b an inverted basket used as a fish-trap). So: d�kit, h�mon, h�la`, k�lam, l�gaw, s�kop, s�pa`, tangg�l, tugt�g.

Oxytone roots often have retraction of accent: manggag�mot manggagam�t; manggug�pit manggugup�t; Sya y m�nging�num nang �lak. He is a drunkard; also: mangi�nom (with the prefix kept apart by glottal stop, � 34, and no effect on initial vowel); m�ngangat�m m�ngang�tam; m�nglil�mos; ang m�nan�he` a seamstress (ang tah�` a seam); ang m�nan�nim a planter.

(f) Barytone roots usually have accent shift: ang manghuhug�s a dish-washer, manglalagar�` a wood-sawer, m�mumul�t a gleaner (p�lot); Ang manga m�mumut�l nang k�hoy ay nagsi�hon n� sa bund�k. The wood-cutters have already gone up into the mountains. ang m�nunul�t a scribe, clerk, ang m�ngungut�ng a habitual borrower, a "sponger". So also from: k�yo, t�lo.

(5) Direct passive.

359. The simple direct passive has suffix -in with accent shift of one syllable in the contingent, infix -in- (� 334,b,1) in the actual: put�l-in, p�-put�l-in, p-in-�tol, p-in-�-p�tol. It corresponds to actives with -um- and abstracts with pag- and, to a large extent, also to actives with mag- and abstracts with pag- r. It expresses, transiently, an object viewed as fully affected, taken in by the actor, or created by a simple action.

Irregularities of form are as listed in � 334,c.

In�ko ni Hw�n ang �tang ni P�dro. Pedro's debt was taken over (pledged for) by Juan. In�ala�la ni P�dro ang kanya ng in�. Pedro was thinking of his mother. Hind� nya in�ala�la iy�n. He does not mind that. Hind� nya �alalah�nin iy�n. He won't mind that (� 334,c,3). In��min nya na ginaw� nya iy�n. He admits that he did it. �am�nin nya ang kanya ng kasal�nan. He will own up to his misdeeds. In�angkin nang b�ta ng si Hw�na ang manga laruw�n ni Mary�. Little Juana appropriates Maria's toys. Angkinin m� ang laruw�n. Take the toy for yourself. Pag �ul�n ay arar�hin mo ang punl�an. When the rains come, plow the germinating-plot. In��so nang in� ang kanya ng b�ta`. The mother is running and shouting after her child (�so a dog). In�yap n�min ang ats�ra. We used the mixed pickles as a condiment. (ang �yap condiment). Ang akl�t niya ng kayb�gan mo ng binangg�t ay �ki ng nab�sa. I have read the book of that friend of yours whom you mentioned. Bin�tis nya ang �log. He forded the river. Ang g�lok na y�n ay b�baw�in ko sa iy�, kapag ipinam�tol mo nang kaw�yan. I shall take back this bolo from you, if you use it for cutting bamboo. Ang t�bo` ay bin�log ni Hw�n. Juan turned the dipper (on a lathe). Ang �lo ni Hw�n ay bin�b�log nang kanya ng manga kalar�`. Juan's playmates are fooling him (literally: turning his head). Biny�k ni Hw�n ang kaw�yan. Juan has split the bamboo. Din�ing nya ang isd�`. He laid open the fish. Ang manga isd� ng it� ay din�la niy� sa �log-P�sig. He caught these fish with the net in the Pasig river. Y�n ay �ki ng din�ramd�m. I am very sorry, That's too bad. Dilig�n mo ang manga hal�man. Sprinkle the plants. Dur�in mo ang �ki ng mam�so`. Prick my blister for me. Gin�gabi kam�. We were overtaken by night. Han�pin mo ang magnan�kaw. Look for the thief. Hin�pis nya ak�. He made me sad. Hin�t� ko ang manga b�nga-ng-k�hoy sa manga b�t�`. I distributed the fruits among the children. In�haw nya ang karn�. He roasted the meat. In�sip nya ng magn�kaw sa isa ng tind�han. He thought of stealing from a store. Is�pin mo kung sa�n mo na�wan ang iyo ng sombr�ro. Think where you left your hat. Ang kabut� ng it� ay hind� kin�k�in. One does not eat this mushroom. Ipatip�d mo sa b�t�` ang kin�k�in nya. Make the child be moderate in its eating. Kinap� ko sa kadilim�n ang �ki ng h�g�an. I fell out my bed in the dark. K�nin mo ang akl�t sa b�ta`. Take the book from the child. Hwag m� ak� ng kurut�n. Don't pinch me. Nil�kad n�min ang lah�t nang da�n. We walked all the way. Laruin m� ang b�ta`. Play with the child. Nil�l�nis nya ang m�sa. She is cleaning the table. Nil�song mo b� ang bal�n? Did you go down into the well? Lus�ngin mo ang bal�n. Go down into the well. Nil�l�to niya ang g�lay. She is cooking the vegetables (also: lin�l�to`). Min�mah�l nang manga mag�lang ang b�ta`. The parents love the child. pinal�nsa was ironed (pal�nsa). Pin�na ko ang us�. I shot the stag with an arrow. Hind� nya pin�pans�n iy�n. He doesn't pay any attention to that. Pinat�y ko ang man�k. I killed the chicken. Ang pin�l� nya ng man�k ay matab�`. The chicken she picked out is a fat one. Pin�lit nya ng gumaw� nang p�yong ang al�la`. He forced the servant to make an umbrella. Pitasin m� ang manga b�nga nang mangg�. You pick the mangoes. Pin�tol ni Hw�n ang tanikal�`. The chain was cut by Juan. Pagka pin�tol mo ang l�bid na iy�n ay l�lagpak ang tul�y. When you have cut that rope the bridge will fall. Pag pin�tol mo ang bunt�t nang t�ta` ay mal�pit iya ng mamat�y. If you cut off the puppy's tail, it is likely to die. Pin�p�tol ko ang k�hoy. I was cutting the wood. Put�lin mo ang l�bid. Cut the rope. P�put�lin nya ang b�ho`. He will cut the bamboo. Pin�yat nya ak�. He kept me up late. Hwag m� ng sagas�in, L�kas, ang kain�tan nang �raw sa iyo ng paglab�s sa b�kid. Don't hit upon the hottest part of the day for going out to the field, Lucas. Sin�sint� ni P�dro ang dal�ga. Pedro is in love with the young woman. Ak� y sin�p� nang kab�yo. I was kicked by a horse. Sinukl�y nya ang buh�k nang kanya ng an�k. She combed her child's hair; also: Sinukl�y nya ang kanya ng an�k. Ang g�mit nya ng libr� ay sin�lat ni Daruw�n. The book he uses was written by Darwin. Kung sinunt�k nya ang b�ta` ay suntuk�n mo siy�. If he hits the boy, do you hit him. Sin�suntok ny� ang b�ta`. He hits the boy on the head. Tagpu�n mo ak� sa estasy�n nang tr�n. Meet me at the railroad station. Tanawin m� ang s�nog! Look at the fire! Ang t�bon sa �log ay tinang�y nang �gos. The dam in the river was carried away by the current. Hwag m� ng tanggap�n ang �pa. Don't accept the pay. Taw�gin mo si Hw�n. Call Juan. Tinip�d ni Hw�n ang ibinig�y ko ng s�ging. Juan was saving with the bananas I gave him. Ang d�sa ng kanya ng tin�ti�s ay hind� lubh� ng mabig�t. The suffering he is undergoing is not very severe. Tin�sod ko ang baky�`. I kicked away the sandal. In�na si Hw�n nang huk�m. Juan was dealt with first by the judge. Inus�sa ak� ni Hw�n. Juan questioned me. Ang inus�sa sa �kin ni Hw�n ay kung saan n�ndon ang kanya ng sombr�ro. What Juan asked me was where his hat was. In�tang ko iy� ng salap� ng ibinig�y ko sa kany� kah�pon. I borrowed that money I gave him yesterday. Niw�walis ny� ang alikab�k sa m�sa. She is sweeping the dust from the table (also: win�wal�s). Ang niy�y� ko ng magpasy�l ay si Hw�n. The one I invited to come for a walk was Juan.

Similarly from: �gaw, ak�la`, �kay, akiy�t, al�la`, alint�na, alipust�`, al�s, �mo`, an�naw, �sal, b�lak, bamb�, b�sa, bat�, b�wi`, bigk�s, bigt�, b�lang, bil�, bitb�t, b�hat, b�tas, buw�sit, dal�, dar�s, dikd�k, d�kit, d�kot, g�mit, gam�t, gant�, gaw�`, g�gol, gup�t, gust�, g�tom, h�bol, h�god, hamp�s, h�mon, hant�y, h�ngo`, h�rang, har�p, h�tak, h�la, hil�ng, hin�la`, hint�y, hir�m, hit�t, h�wa`, h�kay, h�li, �big, in�, in�m, kag�t, kalayk�y, k�mot, kant�, k�lam, kumbid�, kumpis�l, l�la, l�ko, l�nod, lo�b, mat�, m�ra, n�kaw, p�lo`, pas�n, p�sok, p�gil, p�ho, pir�so, pir�nsa, puk�l, s�bi, sadiy�`, sag�t, sal�bong, samp�l, sangg�, sapant�ha`, s�lip, sing�l, siy�sat, sump�ng, sund�`, sun�d, s�nog, sung�nga, tag�`, t�kot, talag�, t�lo, tamp�las, t�pos, t�kop, tunt�n, �bos, ug�li`, �lit, w�ka`.

(a) From derived words: In�um�ga sil� sa kanila ng pagsas�lit�an. They were being overtaken by their morning in their conversation (um-�ga, � 358). Si Hw�na ay hinimat�y. Juana was attacked by a fainting-fit (himat�y, � 518).

(b) From root with shifted accent: In�ab�t nang b�ta` ang g�ra. The boy was reaching for his cap.

(c) Accent shift lacking: M�nsanin mo, Hw�n, ang pagin�m nang gam�t. Take the medicine all at one swallow, Juan.

(d) From doubled root, with meaning of repeated action: see is�; barytone root with accent shift: �mo`.

360. A few roots which have actives with mag- form the direct passive from the root with pag- prefixed. On the analogy of other forms (cf. � 369) one should expect this to be the case with roots whose active with mag- stood in contrast with -um- (� 351); this is clearly the case, however, only in pag-is�p-in, pag-�-is�p-in p-in-ag-�sip, p-in-ag-�-�sip: Pinag�sip nya ng magn�kaw sa isa ng tind�han. He laid plans for robbing a store (cf. in-�sip, � 359). The other roots which have pag- in the direct passive are: bar�l, do�p, k�ro`, tap�k.

361. To the active with mag- (1) (� 353) corresponds a direct passive with pag- and accent shift: pag-putul-�n, p-in-ag-put�l, etc. (p�tol): Pinaghat� ko ang manga itl�g na pinatigas�n ni Hw�na. I halved each of the eggs Juana had hard-boiled. Pinagis�p nya ang kahulug�n nang manga s�nyas na n�k�ta nya ng ibin�bigay nang isa ng sund�lo sa isa ny� ng kasamah� ng n�h�le nang ka�way. He figured out the meaning of the signals he saw a soldier make to a comrade who was captured by the enemy. Pinagp�putul nang b�ta` ang sin�lid. The child is cutting the thread to bits. Pagputulin m�, Hw�n, ang manga si�t. Cut out the bamboo-spines, Juan. Pinagusis� nang huk�m ang manga magnan�kaw. The judge cross-examined the robbers. Similarly from k�ha, n�kaw, s�bi, s�pa`, s�nog.

362. Likewise, corresponding to the active with mag- r (� 354), is a direct passive with pag- r; see gaw�`, kag�t.

Passive with pag- (1) r (cf. � 355) from s�pa`.

363. Passive with pag- (1) D (cf. � 356): Pinagsab�-sabi ny� sa ib� t ib� ng t�o na si P�dro ay n�h�li sa pagnan�kaw. He told various people on various occasions, that Pedro was arrested for thievery.

364. The direct passive is made from the root with prefix pang- to correspond to actives with mang- (� 357): pa-mitas-�n, pa-m�-mitas-�n, p-ina-mit�s, p-in-a-m�-mit�s (pit�s). Examples: Inam�tan ko si Hw�n nang pinamil� ko ng manga libr�. I let Juan purchase from me some of the books I had bought up. Pinam�mitas nil� ang manga kamatsil�. They picked the fruits of the tannic acid tree. Pam�mitas�n n�min ang manga b�lak. We shall pick the capoc cotton. Pinam�lot n�min ang manga lagl�g na b�nga. We picked up the fallen betel-fruits. Pinang�tang ko iy� ng salap�` sa kany�. I had to borrow that money you have there from him. Also from no�d.

(6) Special static words.

365. The infix -in- produces static words denoting things which are produced by such and such a process or treated so and so: ang pin�tak each of the small sections into which a rice-field is divided by the irrigation trenches (p�tak divide; as root-word, division). So from b�ta`, hing�, k�in, l�gaw, p�no`, s�ing, s�lid.

(a) With accent shift: inak�y.

(b) A number of roots (here treated as simple) have the form of words with infix -in- (cf. � 333): hin�la`, kin�bang, linamn�m, sinung�ling, tin�pay, tin�la.

366. -in- R: ang in�am� godfather, in�in� godmother; cf. � 412,a.

367. Suffix -in with secondary accent on the first syllable of the underlying word forms static words denoting something which undergoes such and such an action: Ang kalas�ng nang kw�lta sa ib� y p�ra ng isa ng tugt�gin. The clinking of money is for others (than the spender) like music. So from band�, damd�m, ti�s (only here does the S show itself), tungk�l.

(a) Static words with (1) -in, with irregularities (� 334,b), person or animal like something: ama�n uncle; so from in�. Also of things consumed: inum�n drinking water, k�nin (k�in) boiled rice ready to eat.

(b) The same with pang- in pa-na�-hin guest, if from t�o.

(c) (2) -in, collective, of places: bukir�n estate, fields, terrain; lupa�n country, part of the world. Of animate creatures, tendency: gulat�n scary, shy.

From derived word, in the latter sense, with S on the first of three syllables: p�niwala�n credulous (paniw�la`, � 347).

(d) -in with reduplication, from numerals, in the sense of with so many: lilim�hin; from da-law� (� 345), da-dalaw�-hin.

(e) r (2) -in, with irregularity: ka-kan-�n sweetmeat (k�in).

(f) The following roots end in -in (� 333): bay�gin, buh�ngin, dal�ngin prayer, kaing�n, mul�win, salam�n.

(7) Instrumental passive.

368. The instrumental passive corresponding to the active with -um- and, to a large extent, to that with mag-, is formed with the prefix i- (� 334,a,3); the actual taking also the infix -in- (� 334,b,2): i-p�tol, i-p�-p�tol, i-p-in-�tol, i-p-in-�-p�tol. It denotes, transiently, an object given forth, parted from, or used as instrument or the person for whom in such and such an action or process.

Iniyal�s nil� ang h�rang nang da�n. They removed the obstruction on the road. Iy�nib (or: is�nib) mo ang iyu ng ban�g sa kay P�dro. Make your sleeping-mat overlap Pedro's, i. e. Sleep next to Pedro. Ibin�b�gay nang mangkakay� ang dam�t sa nam�mil� sa kany�. The cloth-merchant is suiting the cloth to her customer. Ibin�b�gay ni Hw�n sa kany� ng kal�g�yan ang kanya ng paggast�. Juan adapts his expenses to his situation. Ibinilangg� nang huk�m si Hw�n. The judge has put Juan into prison. Ibin�ngit nya sa lam�sa ang oras�n. He put the clock on the edge of the table. Idaan m� sa b�hay ni P�dro ang b�buy na it�. Leave this pig at Pedro's house as you pass. Ang bant�yan sa p�no nang tul�y ay inih�gis nang manga las�ng na t�o sa �log. The sentry-box at the head of the bridge was thrown into the river by the drunken men. Ih�s� mo ang pang�hit na yt�. Sharpen this razor. Ihin�kay nila nang mal�lim ang pat�y. They dug a deep grave for the dead. �wan mo d�to ang b�ta`. Leave the child here (so: �-�wan will be left, in-�wan was left, in-�-�wan is being left). Inil�la�n ko kay P�dro ang s�ging na it�. I am putting aside this banana for Pedro (also: itin�ta�n). Inil�l�to nya ang g�lay. She is cooking the vegetables (also: ilin�l�to`). Ipinag�tan sya sa dalaw� ng dal�ga. He was placed between two young women. Ipin�yag ko sa hinil�ng nil� ang �ki ng sasaky�n. At their request I let them have my vehicle. Ipin�tol nya ak� nang sin�lid. She cut off some thread for me. Ip�tol mo ak� nang ma�s. Cut some corn for me. Ip�p�tol nya ik�w nang tub�. He will cut some sugar-cane for you. Ang kamp�t na iy�n ay map�purol kapag ipin�tol mo nang k�hoy. That kitchen-knife will grow dull, if you cut wood with it. Kaw�yan ang isin�sah�g ni P�dro sa kanya ng b�hay. Pedro is using bamboo for flooring his house. Pag pin�p�tol ko n� ang li�g nang man�k, ay is�hod mo ang mangk�k na lalagy�n nang dug�`. When I am cutting the chicken's neck, hold under the basin to catch the blood. Isin�le nya si Hw�n. He included Juan. Is�li mo si Hw�n. Take Juan along. Isinamp�y nya sa kanya ng bal�kat ang k�mot. He slung the blanket across his shoulder. Isigang m� ang sin�ing. Put the rice on the fire. Isilid m� sa b�te ang �lak. Put the wine into the bottle. Pagul�n ay isoot m� ang kap�te. When it rains put on the rain-coat. Itin�wag nang magpapataw�g ang b�go ng kautus�n. The crier cried out the new law. Itinay� nya ang b�hay. He erected the house. Itinira ny� sa �kin ang tin�pay. He left the bread for me. It�ru mu sa kany� ang simb�han. Show him the church. It�ru mo sa �kin ang lar�`. Teach me the game. Iwal� mo iy� ng iyo ng sambal�lo ng l�ma`. Get rid of that old hat of yours.

Similarly, from: �lay, �tas, bags�k, bal�ta`, big�y, budb�d, b�hos, bul�d, b�rol, buw�l, d�os, dik�t, dist�no, dugt�ng, g�pos, h�nap, hand�`, hat�d, hint�`, hits�, h�log, kas�l, kaw�g, lab�s, ladl�d, lag�y, lagl�g, l�kad, lak�s, lal�`, lap�g, law�t, lib�ng, ligt�s, l�him, l�lan, luw�`, p�yo, sab�d, s�boy, sag�t, sakd�l, s�nib, sar�, sig�w, s�rmon, s�long, sun�d, ta�n, ta�s, t�go`, t�li`, tan�m, t�ngi`, t�pon, tukt�k, t�loy, t�ngo, �bos, �tos, wis�k.

(a) From root with shifted accent: Iniy�ab�t nya sa �kin ang libr�. He was handing me the book. Iyab�t mo sa �kin ang libr�. Hand me the book.

369. The instrumental passive is made from the root with prefix pag- when it corresponds to an active with mag- which stands in contrast with an active with -um- from the same root (� 351); it is used also to express the instrumental relation more explicitly than the simple form, especially the person for whom. Forms: i-pag-p�-tol, i-pag-p�-p�tol, i-p-in-ag-p�tol, i-p-in-ag-p�-p�tol.

Ito ng b�hay ang ipinagbili k�. This house is the one I have sold (cf. bumil� buy, magbil� sell). Ang �raw nang kapang�n�kan ni Ris�l ay ipinagd�d�wang sa bo� ng Filip�nas. Rizal's birthday is celebrated all over the Philippines. S�no ang ipinagl�l�to mo? Whom are you cooking for? (inil�l�to` in preceding section). Ipagp�tol mo ng�` ak� nang yant�k. Please cut some bamboo for me. Ipagp�p�tol kit� nang tub�. I will cut you some sugar-cane. Ipinagp�tol mo ba ak� nang pamilm�t? Did you cut me a pole for fishing? Ipinagp�p�tol niya ak� nang si�t na g�gaw� ng p�pa. He is cutting me some bamboo reeds for cigarette-holders. Ang gunt�ng na iy�n ay map�purul ag�d, kapag ipinagp�tol mo nang dam�t. Those scissors will get dull very soon, if you keep using them to cut cloth with. Iyo ng k�nin ang gunt�ng, kapag ipinagp�p�tol nya nang k�yo. Take the scissors, if he uses them for cutting cloth. Ang paup� ni Hw� ng s�g�lan ay ipinags�bi sa pul�s nang kanya ng k�pit-b�hay. The gambling party Juan invited was exposed to the police by his neighbor (sin�bi was said). Ipinagsakay k� si Hw�n sa �ki ng karum�ta. I took Juan into my carriage. Ang b�go ng l�yi ay ipinagt�wag ni Hw�n. The new law was called out by Juan. Hind� ko b� ipinag�tos sa iy� ng gaw�n mo it�? Didn't I order you to do this?

Also from: kayil�`, lab�, l�tag, sakd�l, sumb�ng, tak�, tan�ng, tap�t.

(a) From derived words: ipinaghimat�y (himat�y, � 518); Ipinag�bus-l�k�san niya ang pagtakb�. He exhausted all his strength in his running (�bus-l�k�san, � 377,b).

370. i-pag (1), corresponding to mag- (1), � 353: from t�pon; also from derived word ma-y�bang (� 454, cf. � 353,a).

371. i-pag r, corresponding to mag- r (� 354), from tan�ng.

372. The instrumental passive from the root with prefix pang- corresponds to the active with mang-: Ipinangh�rang nila P�dro ang manga bar�l na in�gaw nil� sa manga pul�s nang b�yan. In holding people up Pedro's gang used the guns they had snatched from the police of the district. Ipinam�tol ko nang yant�k ang g�lok. I used the bolo for rattan-cutting. Ipinam�m�tol nya ak� nang kaw�yan. He is cutting bamboo for me. Ipinam�m�tol nya nang kaw�yan ang b�go ng g�lok. He is using the new bolo for bamboo-cutting. Ipam�tol mo nang tub� ang kamp�t na it�. Use this kitchen-knife for cane-cutting. So also: �ko`, bal�ta`.

(8) Special static words.

373. Special static words with prefix i- express the part of something in such and such a direction, or the direction: ib�baw, ib�yo, il�lim, ita�s, itukt�k; with shifted root: ibab�`.

(9) Local passive.

374. The simple local passive, corresponding to the active with -um- and largely to that with mag-, has the suffix (1) -an with the irregularities described in � 334. The forms of the actual mode have also the infix -in-: put�l-an, p�-put�l-an, p-in-ut�l-an, p-in-�-put�l-an. The local passive denotes the thing affected as place in which or the person to whom.

Inab�tan ak� nang ul�n. I was caught by the rain. Ag�han mo ang iyo ng pagpar�to. Make early your coming here, i. e. Come here early. Pagkagup�t nang �ki ng buh�k ay inah�tan nya ak�. When he had cut my hair he shaved me. Alisan m� nang manga tin�k ang �ki ng salaw�l. Take the thorns out of my trousers. Inany�han sil� ni Hw�n na magpasy�l. They were invited by Juan to go for a walk. Ar�lan mo ang manga Kapamp�ngan. Teach morals to the Pampangas. Asnan m� ang d�ing na isd�`. Salt the fish you lay open. Aptan m� nang p�wid ang b�hay. Roof the house with nipa-palm. Aw�tan mo ang manga pana�hin. Sing for the guests. Bak�ran mo ang sag�ngan sa tab� nang �log. Fence in the banana-grove by the river. Bak�ran mo ang b�hay. Put a fence round the house. Binalit�an ko si Hw�n nang manga nangy�ri sa �kin sa laban�n. I related to Juan my adventures in the war. Bantayan m� ang p�lay. Guard the standing rice. Bas�han mo ak� nang manga kw�nto. Read me some stories. Bigasan m� ang tin�la ng man�k. Make the chicken-stew with rice. Si P�dro ang binilh�n ko nang kab�yo ng it�. It was Pedro I bought this horse from. Sa katapus�n ay kanya ng n�pagkil�la ang malaki ng pang�nib na kanya ng bining�tan. In the end he recognized the great danger into which he had betaken himself. Binuks�n ni Hw�n ang pint�`. Juan opened the door. Dinaan�n nang tr�n ang b�boy. The pig was run over by the train. Dinaan�n ko si Hw�n. I called for Juan on the way (and took him with me). Dalh�n mo nang t�big ang kab�yo. Bring water to the horse. Dalian m� ang pagdadala r�to nang libr�. Bring the book here soon. Ang pab�sa sa bis�ta nang San-Ant�nyo ay dinaluh�n nang mar�mi ng t�o. The reading at the chapel of San Antonio was attended by many people. Dinam�han nya ang kin�ha nya ng s�ging. He took many bananas. Dinamuh�n ny� ang dam�ha ng mal�pit sa simb�han. He cut grass on the pasture near the church. Dinap�an nang manga �bon ang sang� nang k�hoy. Birds alighted on the branch of the tree. Dinatn�n kam� nang ul�n. We were overtaken by the rain. Dinil�an nya ak�. She stuck out her tongue at me (ang d�la` the tongue); also: Dil�an mo ang mans�nas. Lick the apple. Hwag m� ng dur�an nang kar�yom ang �ki ng pany�. Don't leave needles sticking in my handkerchief. Hagkan m� si N�nay. Kiss Mother. Hinal�an nang �lak ang g�tas. Some wine was mixed into the milk. Hinampas�n ni P�dro ang mukh� ni Hw�n. Pedro hit Juan in the face with a whip. Ang da�n ay hinar�ngan. The road was obstructed. Has�an mo ang g�lok na it�. Sharpen this bolo. Hintuan m� ang iyo ng pagsusug�l, P�dro, kung �big mu ng yum�man ka. Put a stop to your gambling, Pedro, if you want to get rich. Hin�hug�san niy� ang manga pingg�n par� sa manga bab�ye. He is washing dishes for the women. Hul�han mo nang isd�` ang pal�isd�an. Catch fish in the fish-pond. Ang manga samp�y na dam�t ay hin�pan nang hangin, kany�` nah�log sa l�pa`. The clothes on the line were blown by the wind and fell to the ground. Hin�pan ko ang p�to. I blew the whistle. Hin�pan ko ang ap�y �pang palakih�n. I blew on the fire to make it larger. Inil�gan nya ang simb�han. He kept away from the church. ... ang kab�yo. He got out of the way of the horse. Inlagan m� ang dum�rating na tum�takbo ng kab�yo. Get out of the way of the horse that is coming on the run. Itiman m� ang lub�g nang dam�t. Make the dye of the garment black. In�iyak�n ni Hw�na ang kanya ng namat�y na kayb�gan. Juana is weeping over her dead friend. Hwag m� ng kurut�n, P�dro, ang isd� ng n�sa d�lang. Don't you take a pinch from the fish on the table, Pedro. Hwag m� ng lab�nan, P�dro, ang kapatid m� ng matand�`. Don't oppose your older brother, Pedro. Ang land�s na gaw� ng kaliw�` ay ang iyo ng lak�ran. You must take the path which goes to the left. Lakasan m� ang t�lak sa bangk�`. Push hard on the boat. Lakhan m�, Hw�n, ang piras�hin mo ng matam�s. Break off a big piece of the sugar, Juan. Nilal�man nil� ang h�kay nang pat�y. The grave for the corpse was made deep by them. Ang bant�y nang manga kany�n ay nilay�san ang kanya ng lug�r. The guard of the cannon deserted his post. Ligsihan m� ang pag�lag sa lug�r na iy�n. Get out of that place quickly. Hwag m� ng luksuh�n ang tin�k na iy�n. Don't jump on that spine. Lul�nan mo nang mangg� ang karit�n. Load up the wagon with mangos. Luluran m� si P�dro pagbabab�g niny�. Kick Pedro in the shin when you fight him. Nilus�ngan mo b� si P�dro? Did you help Pedro? Lut�an mo nang big�s ang man�k. Cook some rice in with the (already cooked) chicken. Masdan m� ang bw�n. Look at the moon. Min�masdan k� ang manga nagd�daa ng t�o. I am looking at the people who pass by. Minur�han nya ak� sa pagbibil� nang tal�ng. He made me a low price on the egg-plant. Mur�han mo ang pagbibil� nang laban�s. Sell your large radishes cheap. Ang tangg�pan nang manga sangl�` sa b�hay-sangl�an ni P�dro ay ninak�wan kagab�. The receiving-place of pledges in Pedro's pawn-shop was robbed last night. Nak�wan mo sy� nang kany� ng salap�`. Rob him of his money. Sa pagbubun�` ni Hw�n at ni P�dro si P�dro ay pinaah�n ni Hw�n. Juan caught Pedro by the leg (or: hurt Pedro in the leg) as they wrestled together; but: Pinaanan ny� ang kanya ng kapat�d na nat�t�log. He lay down with his feet toward his sleeping brother. Hwag m� ng paan�n sa iy� ng paghig�` ang kapat�d mo ng nat�t�log. When you go to bed don't lie with your feet toward your sleeping brother. Pinan�wan sya nang pagi�sip. He lost his mind. Patay�n mo nang pits�n ang nil�gaw. Kill a pigeon for the stew. Patisan m� ang isd�` ng it�. Put shrimp-sauce on this fish. Pinay�gan nya ang para� ng it�. He agreed to this plan. Pilik�n mu ang isd�`. Cut the fins off the fish. Pintahan m� ang pad�r na yt�. Paint this wall. Hwag m� ng pintas�n ang dam�t na y�n. Don't find fault with that garment. Pitasan m� nang b�nga ang mangg�. Pick some fruits from the mango tree. Ang pinul�tan nil� nang man�` ay ang bak�ran ni Hw�na. The place where they gathered peanuts was Juana's yard. Pin�pun�san nya ang sah�g. She is scrubbing the floor. Punan m�, P�dro, nang is� ng salap�` ang kw�lta ng ibinig�y mo sa �kin. Add half a dollar to the money you gave me, Pedro. Put�kan mo ang kanya ng salaw�l. Put mud on his trousers. Pinut�lan ko nang usb�ng ang manga kam�te. I cut shoots from the sweet-potatoes. Pin�putlan ny� nang manga sang� ang k�hoy na nabw�l. He is cutting the branches off the tree that was blown down. Put�lan mo nang t�nga ang �so. Cut the dog's ears. Putlan m� nang s�ngay ang kalab�w. Cut the horns of the carabao. P�put�lan ko nang s�ngay ang us�. I shall cut off the stag's horns. P�putl�n d�w nya nang bunt�t ang �so. He says he will cut off the dog's tail. Sinaky�n n�min ang bangk� ni Hw�n. We rode in Juan's canoe. Sakyan m� ang bangka ng it�. Get into this canoe. Hwag m� ng sal�han ang iyo ng mang� pagp�sok sa eskw�lhan. Don't skip going to school, Don't play hookey; but: Sinanglan ny� ang sings�ng. He missed the ring (in the juego de anillo). Hwag m� ng sangl�n ang us�. Don't fail to hit the stag. Sam�han mo si P�dro. Go with Pedro. Sayawan m� kam�, Hw�na. Dance for us, Juana. Sinigaw�n nang p�re` ang kany� ng munisily�. The priest yelled at his sacristan. Sinik�ran nang kab�yo ang karum�ta. The horse kicked at the carriage. Siglan m� nang �lak ang b�te. Fill the bottle with wine. Unt�-unt� mo ng sub�an ang pits�n. Feed the squabs little by little. Sinug�tan sya ni P�dro. He was wounded by Pedro. Sinukl�yan nya ang kanya ng an�k. She combed her child's hair. Sul�tan mo si P�dro. Write to Pedro. Tinab�nan na ni P�dro ang h�kay. Pedro has already filled up the hole. Tagalan m� ang pagk�bitbit nang tabl�. Keep holding the board that way. Tagalan m� ang pagtitira d�to sa �min. Stay here with us a long time. Tagpian m� ang b�ro ng it�. Mend this shirt. Tagpuan m� nang iba ng k�yo ang kaluw�ngan nang s�ya. Fill out (literally: cause to meet) the width of the skirt with other cloth. Tamnan m� nang manga p�no-ng-ny�g ang bak�ran. Plant the yard with cocoanut trees. Tinan�ran nya ang b�hay sa bo� ng magdam�g. He guarded the house all night. Hwag m� ng tanggap�n nang �pa ang kayb�gan ko ng ih�hatid m� sa estasy�n nang tr�n, sapagk�t ak� ang ��pa sa iy�. Don't take any fare from my friend whom you will bring to the railroad station, for I shall pay you. Tapunan m� ang b�te. Cork up the bottle. Hwag m� ng taw�nan si Hw�n. Don't laugh at Juan. Taw�gan mo si Bath�la`. Call on the Lord. Tinayuan ny� nang kam�lig ang bak�ran. He erected a granary in his yard. Tigasan m� ang l�to nang halay�. Cook the jelly hard. Tinirh�n nya ak� nang tin�pay. He left some bread for me. Tirh�n mo ak� nang in�yat. Leave me some molasses; but: Hwag m� ng tirah�n ang b�hay na iy�n. Don't live in that house. Ang b�hay na iy�n ay ang kanya ng tin�tirah�n. That house over there is where he lives. Tinul�nan nya ang pagl�kad. He hurried his pace. Tul�san mo ang tas� nang l�pis. Sharpen the point of the pencil. Untian m�, P�dro, ang ib�bigay m� ng dam� sa kab�yo. Give the horse less grass, Pedro. �up�n nang manga pana�hin ang manga bangk� ng it�. The guests will sit on these benches. Or�san mo ang iyo ng pagk�in. Have your meals at stated times. Ut�ngan mo nang salap� si P�dro. Borrow money from Pedro. O�han mo ang tan�ng. Answer the question in the affirmative. Niw�walis�n niy� ang sah�g. She is sweeping the floor.

Other roots: akm�`, �mot, ap�y, bal�t, b�ya`, b�yad, big�y, bendisiy�n, b�ti, dag�n, retr�to, g�mit, gaw�`, gup�t, halimh�m, hat�d, h�wak, hig�`, hits�, h�kay, h�log, �ngat, kam�t, kant�, lab�s, lag�y, l�lo`, l�pit, l�gaw, ligt�s, lim�s, mul�`, pagakp�k, pal�t, panh�k, p�sok, prub�, punt�, put�k, sab�y, s�boy, sag�sa`, s�kit, sal�kay, silakb�, sub�, s�bok, sun�d, sungg�b, so�t, t�li`, t�ma`, t�nga`, t�ngan, t�bay, tib�`, ting�n, t�bo`, tugt�g, t�lad, t�log, t�long, tungt�ng, umpis�, �pa, �tos, wis�k.

(a) From derived words: Sya y tinagil�ran ni P�dro. Pedro hit him in the side (ta-g�lid, � 523), but: Tinaligd�n ni Hw�n si P�dro pagdada�n nit� sa kanya ng harap�n. Juan turned away from Pedro when the latter came before him. Tinalikd�n ni Hw�n si P�dro. Juan turned his back on Pedro (tal�kod, � 523).

(b) Irregularly without accent shift before the suffix: �ki ng binit�wan (or: binit�wan) ang b�te. I let go my hold on the bottle. Bit�wan mo ang l�bid. Let go of the rope. Dina�nan siy� nang isa ng silakb� nang g�lit. A fit of anger came upon him. ... nang isa ng masam� ng pagi�sip. An evil thought came to him. Din�da�nan sya nang isa ng malak� ng kalungk�tan. A great grief is upon him. ... nang pagkaul�l. He is under an attack of madness. Cf. daan�n, above. Minat�an nang b�go ng t�o ang asw�ng. The young man looked round for the vampire. Mat�an mo ang magnan�kaw. Keep an eye open for the thief. So from: s�rmon.

(c) From root with accent shift (so that the total shift is two syllables): Ang utus�n nang kapit�n ay tinama�n nang b�la. The captain's orderly was hit by a bullet. Ang lul�d ni P�dro ay tinama�n nang b�la. Pedro got shot in the shin. Tinama�n nang kul�g (nang lint�k) ang isa ng p�nu-ng-mangg�. A mango tree was struck by the thunder (by lightning). Tama�n ka nang lint�k! May the lightning strike you! (curse.)

375. The local passive is formed from the root with pag- when it corresponds to an active in which mag- is contrasted with -um- (� 351) or when the local relation, especially of person for whom, is highly explicit: pag-put�l-an, pag-p�-put�l-an, p-in-ag-put�l-an, p-in-ag-p�-put�l-an. Examples: Ang pagsak�y sa kab�yo ay hind� maga� ng pagar�lan kung salb�he ang kab�yo. Riding horseback is not easy to learn if the horse is unruly. Hind� k�ya ni Hw�n ang kanya ng pinag�ar�lan. Juan's studies are too hard for him. Pagb�balik�n kit�. I will come back to you. Pagbalik�n mo ak�. Come back to me. Ang �tang ni Mary� ay pinagbay�ran nang kanya ng kapat�d na bab�ye. Maria's debt was paid off by her sister. Ang �ki ng kapat�d na lal�ki ang pinagbilh�n ko nito ng b�hay. I sold this house to my brother. Napat�d ang l�bid na kanya ng pinagb�biyab�han. The rope on which he was swinging broke. Ang pinaghar�ngan kina Hw�n ay isa ng lug�r na mal�pit sa mangg�han sa da�-ng-Bal�wag. The place where Juan and his company were held up was a spot near the mango-grove on the Baliuag road. Paghar�an mo ng mab�te ang pul� ng it�. Rule righteously over this island. Paghas�an mo nang manga pang�hit ang hasa� ng it�. Use this whetstone to sharpen razors on. Ang pinaghatdan k� nang g�tas ay mal�yo`. The place to which I delivered the milk was a long way off. Sa pas�ga ng it� y wal� ng lug�r na pinagh�hubar�n nang dam�t. At this beach there is no place for undressing. ang pinagibh�n the point of difference, the difference. Paging�tan mo ng dalh�n ang t�bo ng krist�l na iy�n, sapagk�t bak� magk�put�l-put�l iy�n kung hind� ka ma�ngat nang pagdadal�. Carry that glass tube carefully, because it might get smashed if you are not careful about the carrying it. Pinagkabyaw�n nil� ang lug�r na it�. This place is where they pressed sugar-cane. Ang pinagk�kabyaw�n n�min ay isa ng lug�r na mata�s k�y sa tub�han. The place where we press sugar-cane is a place higher than the cane-field. Pagkabyaw�n niny� nang tub� ang b�go ng kaby�wan. Press the cane in the new press. Pagk�byaw�n nil� ang b�go ng tay� ng kaby�wan. They will press sugar-cane in the newly-erected press. Ang hw�taw ang sya m� ng pagk�nan. The Chinese bowl is what you are to eat from. Si P�dro ang pinagk�nan nang manga kasangk�pa ng it�. Pedro is the one from whom we got these tools. Si Mig�l ang pinagk�k�nan nya nang kw�lta ng pangbil� nang kalab�w. Miguel is the one from whom he gets money to buy carabao. Ang pagk�nan mo nang p�lay ay ang s�ko ng may k�lang. The place for you to take rice is the sack that is already broken. Hwag m� ng paglaruw�n, Hw�n, ang kut�ng, sapagk�t bak� mo iy�n m�b�lag. Don't play with the kitten, Juan, for you might inadvertently blind it. Paglarwan m� ang b�la. Play (with the) ball. Ang kut�ng ay n�b�lot sa pinagl�laruw�n nya ng dam�t. The kitten got wrapped up in the piece of cloth with which it was playing. Pagmasdan m� ang bw�n. Look carefully at the moon. Hwag m� ng pagput�lan nang ano m�n ang sangk�la ng iy�n. Don't cut anything on that cutting-block. Pinagsalita�n ni Hw�n ang kany� ng manga b�ta ng kapat�d. Juan gave his little brothers a talking-to.

Similarly: bint�ng, da�n, dar�s, das�l, h�ti`, hin�la`, kat�m, kubl�, pat�y, p�lit, s�bi, silb�, s�si, tagp�`, tip�n, �sap.

(a) From a phrase: pinagsa-ul�n (sa ul�`).

(b) From a derived word: Mang� pinagp�p�tag�nan ko ng gino�! Respected sirs, Dear sirs (in oral or written address).

(c) Irregularly without accent shift: pinagda�nan (da�n), cf. � 374,b.

(d) With extra accent shift, corresponding to active with mag- (1): Pagputul�n mo, Hw�n, nang manga usb�ng ang kalab�sa. Cut a bundle of shoots from the pumpkin, Juan.

As bit�w lacks the accent shift before -an (� 374,b), the form with pag- and shift of one syllable belongs here: Pinagbitiwan ny� ang manga man�k na kanya ng t�ngan. She let go of all the chickens she was holding.

(e) With reduplication of the root, corresponding to the active with mag- r (� 354): pinagsisigl�n (sil�d).

(f) With both extra accent shift and reduplication, corresponding to � 355: Pinagd�dadaguk�n nya ang manga ka�way niy�. He was dealing blows to his enemies right and left (d�gok a blow with the fist).

(g) From doubled root (cf. the active, � 356): pinagt�tul�ng-tul�ngan (t�long).

376. The local passive with pang- corresponds to actives with mang-: pa-mut�l-an, pa-m�-mut�l-an, p-in-a-mut�l-an, p-in-a-m�-mut�l-an.

Sa�n ang pinanggal�ngan mo?--Ang pinanggal�ngan ko ay an b�ya-ng-Mayn�la`. Where have you come from?--I come from Manila. Ang manga pin�tak na kad�tig nang s�pa` ay sya ny� ng pinangg�gap�san (or: sya ny� ng pinam�mut�lan nang p�lay). The sections of the rice-field bordering on the ditch are the ones he is cutting rice from. Pinangitlug�n nang man�k ang kah� ng it�. The hen laid its eggs in this box. Hwag m� ng pamitas�n nang b�nga ang �tis na n�sa tab� nang bal�n. Don't pick the fruits from the atis tree by the side of the well. Siya k� ng pam�mitas�n nang b�nga ang by�bas na n�sa gitn� nang bak�ran. I shall pick fruits from the guava tree in the middle of the yard. Ali ng lug�r ang iyo ng pinamut�lan nang dam�? Which place did you cut grass from? Sinund� ni P�dro ang kapat�d na bab�ye sa b�hay na pinan�nah�an. Pedro fetched his sister from the house where she was working as seamstress. So also from: t�lo, tiw�la`.

(a) With pang-hin- the local passive corresponds to the active with mang-hin- (� 357,b); the reduplication affects the hin- which, theoretically, we may regard as part of the underlying word. "Mag�ral ka ng mab�ti at panghinay�ngan mo ang mahalag� ng panah�n," sin�bi ni Hw�n sa kanya ng an�k. "Study hard and take account of the precious time," said Juan to his son. K�ylan pa kay� pangh�hinay�ngan nang manga t�o ang manga �ni ng ta�n-ta� y n�s�s�r� nang lukt�n o nang t�yot? When will the people at last regret the harvests that are every year destroyed by locusts or by drought? Pinanghinay�ngan nil� ang n�lubog na bangk�`. They were sorry about the canoe that had sunk. Pinangh�hinay�ngan n�min ang mar�mi ng b�hay na gin�gol nang b�yan sa pagtatangg�l sa katw�ran. We regret the many lives lost by the country in the defense of its rights. (s�yang); similarly from gant�: panghigantih�n.

(10) Special static words.

377. With S -an special static words are formed from oxytone roots, without the irregularities described in � 334. In meaning they fall into two types, which, however, are not always clearly distinct.

(a) They express an action by two or more actors, a kind of plural of root words of the type described at � 341,3,a. Ang �l�san nang manga aluw�ge ay sa l�nes nang h�pon. The leaving of the carpenters is fixed for Monday afternoon. ang �n�man a drinking party. Ang �y�kan nang manga b�ta` ay n�rinig ko sa kals�da. I heard on the street the crying of the children. Ang k�lab�gan nang manga nalagl�g na ny�g dahil�n sa malak�s na h�ngin ay n�rinig hangg�ng sa mal�yo ng lug�r. The thud of the cocoanuts that were thrown down by the strong wind was audible for some distance away. Ang k�las�ngan nang manga kwalt� ng lagl�g sa buls� ni Hw�n ay sya ng nak�g�sing kay P�dro. The rattling of the coins falling from Juan's purse was what woke Pedro up. Ang kant�han nang manga �bon ay gin�gaw� nila kung um�ga. The birds sing together in the morning. Ang k�r�tan nil� sa nil�to ko ng isd�` ay lubh� ng madal�s. They often pinched pieces out of the fish I had cooked. Ang lits�nan nila Hw�n ay hind� n�tul�y. The barbecue of Juan and his friends did not come off. Ang luks�han nang manga lukt�n ay toto� ng maiikl�`. The leaps of the small grasshoppers are very short. Ang p�gakp�kan nang manga t�o pagkara�n nang talump�te` ay lubh� ng mah�ba`. The applause of the people after the speech was very long. Ang pint�san ni Hw�na at ni Mary� ay par�ho ng hind� toto�. The criticisms of Juana and Maria make of each other are equally untrue. Ang kany� ng manga lalagy�n nang tuba` ay p�n�a ng lah�t. His containers for the sap are all full. Ang kanila ng s�k�yan sa tr�n ay sa lingg� nang um�ga. They are all to take the train Sunday morning. Naparo�n ak� kagab� sa isa ng s�y�wan. I went to a dance last night. Ang s�g�wan nang manga b�ta` sa kals�da ay nakab�bing�. The shouting of the children on the street is deafening. ang t�h�lan nang manga �so the baying together of the dogs. ang t�y�an a staking, a putting up of stakes (ang tay�` a stake in a bet or game). N�rinig sa isa ng �p�an nang manga Ints�k ang kw�nto ng it�. This story was heard in a gathering of Chinamen.

Similarly, from: kalusk�s, pat�y, pust�, put�k, salit�`, sug�l, takb�, tip�n, tugt�g, ump�k.

From derived word: Ang h�mags�kan sa Filip�nas ay nat�pus n�. The fighting in the Philippines is over. (as though from a form -himags�k, see � 518).

This formation underlies further derivatives, see �� 352,d. 357,a.

(b) The other meaning of the formation S -an is that of an object viewed, rather explicitly (cf. � 380), as the scene of plural action or the place of things. So: ang b�g�san the place where hulled rice is made, threshing floor for rice, rice-mill. Si Hw�n ang b�g�yan nil� nang kanil� ng manga nin�kaw na al�has. Juan is the one to whom they give the jewelry they have stolen. ang b�lang�an a prison (ang bilangg�` a prisoner). Ang kanila ng b�l�han nang p�lay ay sa kam�lig ni Hw�n. The place where they buy rice is in Juan's storehouse. Ang d��nan nang manga sund�lo ay ang land�s na it�. The usual route of the soldiers is this path. ang hamp�san the whipping-bench. Ang manga magkak�pit-b�hay na si Andr�s, Kul�s, at P�dro ay nagt�t�lo tungk�l sa kan�-kanil� ng hangg�han nang bak�ran. The neighbors Andr�s, Nicol�s, and Pedro are disputing about the boundaries of their grounds. Sa pag�tan nang b�ya-ng-Bal�wag at b�ya-ng-San-Mig�l ay m�y-roo ng isa l�mang na hint�an ang manga nagl�lakad. Pedestrians have only one stopping-place between the towns of Baliuag and San Miguel. Si P�dro ay sya ng h�r�man nang salap�` nang manga t�o sa b�yan. Pedro is the one from whom the people in the town borrow money. ang hungk�yan a machine for fanning the pounded rice. Ang isa ng tabur�te l�mang ang ginaw� nila ng l�g�yan nang kanila ng manga sombr�ro, sapagk�t ang sabit�n ay pun� n�. A chair was all they had to lay their hats on, for the hat-rack was already full. Ang l�ng�yan sa �log ay bum�baw. The swimming-place in the river grew shallow. ang l�r�an the playground. Ang l�b�ngan sa manga b�ta` sa manga bap�r na nagl�layag sa d�gat nang Pas�fiko ay lubh� ng malil�nis na lug�r. The play-rooms for children on the steamers that ply on the Pacific Ocean are very neat places. ang ny�gan a cocoanut grove. Ang p�t�yan nang b�buy ay nas�nog. The pork slaughter-house burned down. ang p�t�san a factory for shrimp-sauce (pat�s, made of the small shrimp called h�pon). Ang b�ro ng pun�t-pun�t ay sya ny� ng ginaw� ng tagp�an nang manga ret�so. She sewed the patches all on to the ragged blouse. Ang kanila ng tagp�an ay ang da�-ng-Bal�wag. Their meeting-place is the Baliuag road. ang tany�gan an exhibition, exposition. ang timb�ngan a pair of scales. ang tind�han a shop, store (ang tind� the goods for sale in a store).

Similarly, from: akl�t, bant�y, bigt�, biniy�g, buk�s, bunt�t, das�l, gaw�`, hagd�n, hig�`, huk�m, kabiy�w, kubl�, kul�ng, lib�ng, luks�, mangg�, pint�, pint�, pit�g, punl�`, samp�y, sangl�`, simb�, sah�n, tangg�p, tarangk�, tir�, up�`.

A very few show irregularities: eskw�l-han, pa�-nan, t�to-h�nan the truth (toto�); the secondary accent is lacking in dam�-han, tub�-han; irregular in kump�s�l-an.

From a compound word: �bus-l�k�san (�bos-lak�s).

From a phrase: s�-law�han changeable, fickle, as though from sa law�; for the latter see � 345.

From derived words: ang �num�nan place for drinking-water, water-shelf (inum-�n, � 367,a); ang s�lang�n-an the east (silang-�n, � 379.

378. The formation (1) S -an is made from barytone roots and corresponds in meaning to (a) in the preceding type; the suffix is added as a rule without irregularity.

Ang �b�gan ni Mary� at ni Hw�n ay nat�pus sa pagtatamp�han. The love-affair of Maria and Juan ended through their contrariness. Ang l�y�san nang manga sund�lo ay hind� maamp�t nang kanila ng manga pin�no`. The deserting of the soldiers could not be stopped by their officers. Sa miy�rkules ang l�l�nan nil� sa tr�n. On Wednesday they are to embark on the train. Ang p�l�tan nil� nang kwalt� ay n�hint�` nang m�rinig nil� ang put�k. Their scrambling for money ceased when they heard the crash. ang t�p�nan a meeting.

So: h�yag, h�ni, k�in, k�los, s�ma, t�loy.

Irregular in form is: Ang t�w�nan nila Hw�n ay n�hinto dahil�n sa kanila ng pagk�g�lat. The laughter of Juan's crowd stopped on account of their surprise (t�wa).

Irregular in meaning, as though local instead of plural, is: Ang gul�d na it� ay sya ng s�l�ngan nang �raw. This hill is the place where the sun rises (s�lang).

379. The form from barytone roots corresponding to the type in � 377,b and often also to type a, is: (2) -an, without irregularities: Ang agaw�n nang manga ungg�` ay magul�. The grabbing by the monkeys was confused. ang basah�n a reading-room, library. Bulak�n Bulac�n (name of a province, if from b�lak a cluster of capoc cotton). Ang mali�t na �na ng it� ay sya k� ng duru�n nang manga aspil�. This little cushion is where I stick my needles. ang halu�n a mixing-vessel. ang hugas�n a place for washing dishes. ang hulih�n nang isd�` a fishing-expedition. Si Hw�na ay isa ng bab�ye ng kutuh�n. Juana is a lousy woman. Ang laban�n nang manga T�rkos at Inggl�ses ay kasuluk�yan pa l�mang. The warfare between the Turks and the English is only now taking place. Ang kanila ng lakar�n ay lubh� ng masay�. Their walking party is very merry. Ang kanila ng lusung�n ay hind� nat�pus na mab�te, sapagk�t mar�mi sa manga t�o ay matam�d. Their cooperative scheme did not turn out well, because most of the people were lazy. Ang murah�n ni Hw�na at ni Mary� ay n�rinig nang bo� ng b�yan. The revilings of Juana and Maria were heard by the whole town. Sa b�ya-ng-San-Mig�l ay nangy�re ang isa ng nakaw�n. In the town of San Miguel a robbery took place. Ang tabl� ng it� ay ginaw� ng paku�n nang manga b�ta` sa manga p�ku ng aspil� na kin�ha nil�. The children used this board for hammering in the tacks they had taken. Ang b�tas nang bangka` ay sya ng ginaw� ng pasak�n ni P�dro nang pagk�t. The leak in the canoe was where Pedro calked in the wax. ang putik�n a clay-pit; a person or thing covered with mud. Ang is� ng labang�n ay sy� ng nag�ng silang�n kay Hes�s. Jesus was born in a manger; ang k�tri ng silang�n ni Hw�na the bed in which Juana's children were born. Sya y sugat�n He is wounded; ang sugat�n the wounded (as, after a battle). ang sulat�n a writing-desk. Ang s�long nang b�hay ay sya ny� ng tagu�n nang manga kasangk�pan sa pagaalw�ge. The ground-floor of his house is where he keeps his carpentry tools. Ang kuw�rto ng it� ay sya k� ng tulug�n. This room is my sleeping-place. Ang tulug�n nang b�hay ni Hw�n ay n�sa bubung�n. The sleeping-quarters in Juan's house are on the roof. ang utus�n a servant, a waiter, an orderly.

Similarly: �ral, b�kol, d�hil, h�rang, h�sa`, �haw, �law, k�in, l�to`, s�bit, s�bong, t�pon, t�lis, �lo, �pa, �ras.

With irregularities: h�laman�n garden, flower-pot (hal�man) has secondary accent on the first of three syllables; angk�n the members of a given person's immediate family, not including himself: ang angk�n ni Hw�n Kr�s Juan Cruz' wife and children (from -�nak, cf. mag-�nak, � 358,a); kwayan�n, beside kawayan�n (kaw�yan).

With irregularity and reduplication: ka-kan-�n (-k�in).

380. (1) -an with irregularities forms static words denoting objects by the action for which they are locally used or by the things they are the place of; the local meaning is less explicit, and the object has more fixed identity apart from its local relation than is the case in the preceding forms. This distinction is very clear where both forms occur from the same root (cf. kul�ng, lag�y); it may disappear where only one form is made (sag�ngan, at�san have the same value as ny�gan).

ang at�san a grove of atis trees. Ang asuh�n nang b�hay ni P�dro ay nas�nog. The chimney in Pedro's house burned out. Bigas�n ang kanya ng sin�ing. Her boiled rice has raw rice in it, is not done. Ang kanya ng dam�t ay pulah�n. Her clothes are all red. Sya y is� ng pulah�n. He is a Red, a member of the Red party. ang sil�ngan the east, also Sil�ngan Silangan (name of a town). ang taan�n a fugitive. ang man�k na tal�nan the defeated game-cock; l�to ng tal�nan a dish in which the defeated game-cock is cooked with ginger. Similarly: b�kod, bub�ng, d�lo, gaw�`, hangg�, har�p, kul�ng, lab�ng, lar�`, lik�d, lul�d, pa�, s�ging, tint�ro.

(a) Some roots which begin with l and most of those whose irregularity involves contraction, have reduplication in this form: Ang lalagy�n ko nang libr� ay ang m�sa ng it�. This table is my bookstand. Ang uup� ng it� ay g�gam�tin nang manga pana�hin. The guests will sit on these seats. Ang uup� ng it� ay sa h�re`. This seat is for the king. lulur�n shin. Similarly: hihig�n (hig�`), lalam�nan (l�mon), lalaw�gan (l�wig), sasaky�n (sak�y), titirh�n (tir�).

(b) From derived words: Nap�tol nil� ang p�no-ng-k�hoy sa kalahat�an. They cut the tree at the middle. Nalag�t ang l�bid sa kalahat�an. The rope broke at the middle. (kalah�ti`, � 519). Ang b�tas nang bangk�` ay n�sa tagil�ran. The leak in the canoe is in the side. Nilagy�n ni Hw�n nang tagil�ran ang kanya ng b�hay. Juan put side-walls on his house. (tag�lid, � 523).

381. D -an, with accent shift if the root is barytone, forms words denoting an object which is an imitation or miniature of such and such: ang dagat-dag�tan a lake; ang kab�-kabay�han a play-horse; ang tao-ta�han a manikin, doll; the pupil of the eye; ang baril-bar�lan a toy-gun. Further derivatives from this formation, see � 352,d.

382. Many roots here treated, because felt, as simple, end in -an: bang�n, batal�n, daland�n, hagd�n, hal�man, k�nan, k�pitan, kapit�n, kaw�yan, lar�wan, pag�tan, pakuw�n, pangn�n a hand-basket, pas�gan (P�sig is the name of a river), pingg�n, saguw�n a paddle, sangk�lan, tampal�san, tah�lan.

383. Similar formations with pang- prefixed add the element of meaning present in the transient formations with mang- and pang-; they have secondary accent on the prefix, as though it formed part of the underlying word:

(a) p�ng- -an (cf. � 377): Ang kah� ng it� ay sya ng p�ngitl�gan nang man�k. This box is the place where the hen lays its eggs.

(b) p�ng- (1) -an (cf. � 378): Si Hw�n ay sya ng par�ti ng p�mun�an nang b�sag-�lo. Juan is the one who always starts the fighting.

(c) p�ng- (2) -an (cf. � 379): p�ngaserah�n boarding-place.

II. Secondary groups.

1. Prefix si-.

384. The prefix si- is used only in active transient forms, and is always preceded by mag- or nag-: mag-si-p�tol, mag-s�-si-p�tol, nag-si-p�tol, nag-s�-si-p�tol. In meaning these forms are explicit plurals of the primary active forms. Occasionally the plural value is emphasized by infixation of -ang- into the mag- or nag-.

385. From the simple root the explicit plural with si- corresponds to the primary actives with -um- or, in many cases, with mag-. Nagsi�lag sila sa b�yan nang it� y pas�kin nang manga ka�way. They all fled from the town when the enemy entered it. Ang manga �so ay nags�sil�mon. The dogs are eating. Magsilig�ya kay�. Rejoice, Be glad. Ang manga langg�m ay nags�silipump�n (or: nags�sil�pon) sa n�patay nila ng gagamb�. The ants are crowding all over the spider they have killed. Nags�sip�tol sila ng lah�t nang tub� nang kam� ay dumat�ng. They were cutting sugar-cane when we arrived. Magsip�tol kay� nang tub�. Do you all cut sugar-cane.

So from: akiy�t, al�s, d�law, dal�, dat�ng, h�li, h�say, iy�k, kant�, k�pit, lak�, l�pat, l�lan, p�gil, punt�, pust�, s�yad, tind�g, tugt�g, t�long, t�ngo, uw�`.

(a) Plurality emphasized: Nangagsi�rong ang manga sund�lo. The soldiers retreated. So also from al�s.

386. This formation is made from the root with pag- prefixed when it corresponds to primary actives with mag- in contrast with -um- (� 351). Nags�sipag�ral sil�. They are studying. Magsipag�ral kay�. Study. Ang manga b�ta` ay �yaw magsipagb�his. The children don't want to change their clothes, get dressed up. Ang manga langg�m ay nags�sipag�pon (or: nags�sipagl�pon) nang pagk�in kung tag�raw. The ants store up food in the hot season. Magsipagp�tol kay�, P�dro, nang k�hoy na g�gam�tin sa paglilits�n. Pedro, do you folks cut some wood to be used in the barbecue. "Mags�sipagp�tol d�w sila nang dik�la," ang s�bi ni Hw�na. "They say they are going to cut off the trains of their skirts," said Juana. Napsipagp�tol nang buh�k ang manga Ints�k. The Chinamen cut off their queues. Nags�sipagp�tol nang buh�k ang manga Ints�k na si Y�ng at Ts�ng, nang sila y datn�n ko sa kanila ng tind�han. The Chinamen Yeng and Chang were cutting their queues when I came upon them in their shop. Nagsipagtip�d ang sund�lo. The soldiers economized.

So from: bas�`, das�l, hint�`, lar�`, pasiy�l, s�si, sug�l, takb�, tind�g, yukay�k.

(a) Plurality emphasized: nangagsipagtakb�.

(b) The pag- is used when the underlying word is a derived word: Ang manga sund�lo ng Tag�log ay nagsipaghimags�k. The Tagalog soldiers revolted (-himags�k, � 518). Nagsipagh�mags�kan sil�. They fought each other (h�mags�kan, � 377,a). So from: agaw�n (� 379), -bugt�ngan (� 377,a), laban�n (� 379), takb�han (� 377,a). Cf. � 406.

(c) The same formation with accent shift of the root corresponds to primary actives with mag- (1), � 353. It occurs from: b�lot, l�kad, l�bot.

387. With pang- prefixed to the root, this formation corresponds to the primary active with mang- (� 357). Magsipamangk� t�yo. Let's all go canoeing. Mags�sipamiy�bas kam� sa manga g�bat na mal�pit. We are going guava-picking in the jungles near here. Si P�dro at si Hw�n ay um�hon sa bund�k �pang magsipam�tol nang k�hoy na asan�`. Pedro and Juan went up into the mountains to cut asana. ��hon kam� sa bund�k at mags�sipam�tol kam� nang mul�win. We are going up into the mountains to cut molave.

So from: bar�l, h�na`, hing�`, no�d, tah�mik, t�lo.

(a) With pang-hin-, cf. � 357,b: Sil� y nagsipanghimags�k. They made a revolution.

2. The prefix paki-.

388. The prefix paki-, which forms simple static forms, transients, and abstracts, expresses that the subject of the sentence performs or undergoes the action along with others that were involved in it before,--this either through interference or by favor of someone else.

389. Simple static form: ang pakikin�bang the obtaining of profit (kin�bang) in trade with others; also: holy communion. So pakip�tol, in command (cf. � 341,3,c), cut as a favor.

390. The active transient and the abstract have the forms: maki-p�tol, mak�-ki-p�tol, naki-p�tol, nak�-ki-p�tol, paki-ki-p�tol, i. e. the reduplication affects the syllable -ki-.

Ang kapit�n ay nagpadal� nang isa ng sekr�ta sa l�p� nang ka�way �pang makiramd�m nang kanila ng k�l�san. The captain sent a spy to the enemy's country to spy out (literally: perceive along) their movements. Mak�kik�in ak� kina L�lay. I am going to Lilay's for a meal. Si P�dro ay nakik�in kina Hw�n. Pedro took a meal at Juan's house. Nakip�tol ak� nang dam� sa l�p� ni Mariy�no. I obtained permission to cut grass from Mariano's land. Sila y n�r�ro�n sa b�kid ni P�dro at nak�kip�tol nang dam�. They have gone to Pedro's field and are cutting grass there by his permission. Pumaro�n ka t makip�tol nang dam�. Go and ask them to let you cut some grass. Pakikip�tol d�to ni Hw�n nang dam� ay singil�n mo ang �tang nya. When Juan asks to be allowed to cut grass here, dun him for his debt. Sila y nakis�no kay Mariy�. They had Maria let them live in her house with her.

So: sak�y, s�ma, t�loy, t�log.

(a) With accent shift of the root (� 337): makial�m look after someone, nose into others' affairs (�lam).

391. The root has pag- when the formation corresponds to a primary active with mag- in contrast with -um- (� 351): Nak�kipag�way ang b�ta ng it�, kany�` hind� d�pat pahintul�ta ng madal�s na man�og nang b�hay. As this boy gets into fights, he should not often be allowed to leave the house. Nakipag�way si P�dro. Pedro got into the fight. Nasakt�n si Hw�n sa kanya ng pakikipaglar�`. Juan got hurt when he joined into the game. So from: bun�`, dalamh�ti`, l�ban, tagp�`, �sap.

(a) From derived words: Hwag k� ng makipagl�ng�yan, Hw�n, at bak� ka mal�nod. Don't go swimming with the crowd, Juan, I am afraid you might get drowned. Mak�kipagl�ng�yan ka b�, P�dro? Are you going along swimming, Pedro? Nakipagluks�han si Hw�n nang id�os ang manga lar�`. Juan entered in the jumping-contest when the games were held. Similarly, from: pust�-han, siks�k-an, takb�-han. All these belong under � 377,a. See also � 427,b.

(b) Corresponding to primary active with mag- (1) � 353: Nakipagbab�g si P�dro. Pedro got into a free fight (b�bag).

392. The root has pang-, corresponding to a primary active with mang-: Sya y hind� pinahintul�tan sa kanya ng pakikipam�tol nang tub�. His request to be allowed to cut cane was not granted.

393. In the passive the paki- expresses that the subject undergoes the action along with others, often as a favor on the part of the actor. So direct passive: paki-put�l-in be cut, as a favor on the part of the one who does the cutting; the recipient of the favor is the speaker.

394. In the instrumental passive the meaning is similar; sometimes, however, the instrumental passive is used with the person asking the favor as agent.

Ma�r� mo ng� ng ipakih�log sa kur�yo ang s�lat? Will you please mail my letter for me? (literally: Can my letter please be thrown-along-with-yours or thrown-as-a-favor into the mail by you?). Ipinakih�log ni P�dro ang �ki ng s�lat. Pedro mailed my letter (along with his or as a favor) for me. Ipinak�kih�log ko l�mang kay P�dro ang �ki ng manga s�lat. I am asking Pedro to mail my letters for me; here ipinak�kih�log is not that thrown as a favor, but that asked to be thrown as a favor. Ipak�kip�tol daw ni Hw�n ang buh�k nang al�l� nya ng Ints�k. Juan says he will ask someone to cut his Chinese servant's hair; ipak�kip�tol is here that asked to be cut as a favor, and the relation of asking is the only thing expressed by the instrumental (rather than the direct) passive.

395. The root has pag-, corresponding to � 351: Ipakipagp�tol mo ng�` nang buh�k ang gunt�ng na it�, �pang �ti ng masub�kan ang h�say nang tal�m. Please use this shears in cutting hair, so that we may test the quality of the edge (genuine instrumental passive). Ipak�kipagp�tol daw nya ak� nang b�h�` pag�hon nya sa bund�k. He says he will cut some bamboo for me when he goes up into the mountains. (genuine instrumental passive). Ipinakipagp�tol ak� ni Hw�n nang tub�. Juan had someone cut me some sugar-cane (literally: I was asked to be cut for as a favor). Ipinak�kipagp�tol daw ni Hw�n si P�dro nang lab�ng. Juan says he is having someone cut bamboo-shoots for Pedro.

396. Local passive with paki-: pinakibalit�an was ascertained by the actor getting people to tell him as a favor.

(a) From shifted root: pinakialam�n.

(b) With pag- (cf. � 352): pinak�kipagtakbuh�n.

3. The prefix ka-.

397. Secondary forms with the prefix ka- are of most varied meaning; the principal types express association of two individuals or groups and involuntary action. In accented form the prefix k�- expresses chiefly accidental occurrence. In certain passives associated with this group the prefix itself does not appear.

(1) Simple static forms.

398. Words with prefix ka- denote objects (or groups) standing in such and such a relation to another object (or group). Sya y �ki ng nag�ng kabal�e. He (she) has become my fellow-parent-in-law, i. e. Our children have intermarried; the form ka-bal�e merely makes explicit the element of relation present in the simple word: Si Bant�g ay �ki ng bal�e. Bantug's son (daughter) has married my daughter (son). Ang manga �so ay n�sa kabil� nang b�kod. The dogs are on the other side of the fence (the simple -bil�` does not occur; the idea of other side is always envisaged as relative). Ang b�kid ni Hw�n ay kar�tig nang kay P�dro. Juan's field borders on Pedro's. Ang m�sa ng it� y kak�lay nang kah�n. This table is of the same color as the chest. Si Hw�n ang kal�ban ny Andr�s sa lar� ng d�ma. Juan is Andres' opponent at checkers. Kamat� si Hw�n ni P�dro. Juan and Pedro took to each other from first sight. Ang tagp� nang b�ro ni P�dro ay hind� kamukh� nang b�ro`. The patch on Juan's blouse does not match the blouse. ang �ki ng kapat�d na si Hw�n my brother Juan. ang �ki ng kap�tol na si Hw�n my brother Juan; ang kap�tol nang tub� a piece (broken off) of the sugar-cane. Ang kas�nib nang �ki ng ban�g ay ang ban�g ni Manuw�l. Manuel's sleeping-mat and mine overlap (kas�nib one of two things of which one overlaps the other). wal� ng kasangk�p without accompaniments, trimmings, affixes. Si Mariy�no ang kasunod k� ng lum�l�kad sa kals�da. Mariano was the one who was walking behind me on the street; ang kasunod k� ng naparo�n sa simb�han the one who followed me in going to church (kasun�d one of two persons one of whom is following the other). ang kat�ngo the person one is dealing with, the other party. Si P�dro ang kaug�li nang kanya ng kayb�ga ng si Hw�n. Pedro has the same habits as his friend Juan.

Similarly from: �way, b�yan, biy�k, bun�`, rib�l, har�p, kil�la, kl�se, l�kip, lar�`, pant�y, part�, sabuw�t, s�li, s�lo, s�ma, s�no`, tap�t, timb�`, unt�`, �sap, wal�`.

Divergent in meaning are kat�o (� 255), kagab�, kah�pon (� 259). Cf. also � 520.

(a) From derived words: Sy� y isa k� ng kamag�nak. He is a relative of mine (mag-�nak, � 358,a), and kamakalaw� (� 259, from maka-law�, � 453).

(b) From a phrase: ang kasa-ng-b�hay a person dwelling in the same house with another, a housemate (is� ng b�hay).

(c) From shifted root (� 337): Si Hw�n ay kagal�t ni P�dro at ni Kul�s. Juan is at odds with Pedro and Nicol�s. ang kany� ng kagal�t the person or persons with whom he is at odds. Si P�dro ang nag�ng kasir� ni Hw�n. It is Pedro with whom Juan is angry. Hind� ko katal� si P�r� Hw�n. I don't play winning-and-losing games with Father Juan. Similarly from �lam, s�ma.

(d) The root is reduplicated in a few cases: Si P�dro ang �ki ng kabab�yan. Pedro is my fellow-townsman (beside kab�yan); katut�bo` native, ingrown, inborn, inherited.

399. k�-ka-. With accented reduplication of the prefix these forms emphasize the incompleteness of the correlative object: K�kap�tol l�mang na tub� ang �ki ng n�k�ha. I got only a little piece of the sugar-cane. So also k�kaunt�`.

400. ka- R. With accented reduplication of the underlying word ka- forms words expressing the recent completion of an act; they are used impersonally (� 77) or as conjunctive attributes. Ka��way pa l�mang ni Hw�n sa kanya ng kalar�`. Juan has only just now quarreled with his playmate. Kab�b�ngon ko. I have just got up. Kag�g�ling sa b�yan nang kapat�d ko ng bab�ye. My sister has just come back from town. Kah�higa ko pa l�mang. I had just then lain down. Kal�lar� ku pa l�mang sa b�ta`. I have just finished playing with the child. Kap�p�tol ko pa l�mang nang yant�k. I have only just now cut some rattan. So g�sing, k�in.

(a) ka-pag- R, with the usual value of pag- (� 369, etc.): Kapagp�p�tol l�mang ni Hw�n nang kaw�yan. Juan has just come from cutting bamboo.

(b) ka-pang- R, corresponding to active with mang- (� 357): kapam�m�tol (p�tol).

401. ka- D. With doubling of the root ka- has causative value: it expresses that which causes such and such an involuntary action, specifically, such and such an emotion: Ang dumat�ng na b�lang ay kat�kot-t�kot ang d�mi. The locusts that came were frightful in quantity. So from hiy�`, tak�. Vowel-contraction in k�w�wa` pitiable, piteous (for ka-�wa-�wa`). Slightly divergent in meaning is kar�ka-r�ka (� 265,5).

402. In a different use ka- has the form kay- in some words; these formations express a remarkable degree of a quality; they are used impersonally (� 76), as predicate (� 247), occasionally as conjunctive attributes: ka�lat kay�lat what saltiness! (of water); kay-as�l what blueness! Kat�yog nang p�no-ng-niy�g na iy�n! How tall that cocoanut tree is! Kayunt�` nang ibinig�y nya ng laruw�n sa �kin! How few toys he gave me! So: kay-d�mot, ka-r�mot, ka-r�nong, ka-it�m, kak�nis, ka-l�yo`, ka-munt�`, ka-pul�, ka-tab�`, kay-tip�d.

(a) With reduplication of the root, this form refers to the quality in an explicit plurality of objects: kaiit�m what blackness! (of several things); Kalalam�g nang pa� nang manga b�ta`! How cold the children's feet are!

(b) With doubled root these forms intensify the quality: Kayd�mot-d�mot nang b�ta ng it�! What a terribly stingy child! (kayd�mot, kar�mot what stinginess! ang d�mot stinginess).

403. A few forms with accented ka- prefixed to the root envisage the accidental nature of the reciprocal relation: Ang manga dam�t na it� ay k�siya sa ba�l. These clothes will fit into the trunk. Ak� ang k�sundo` ni P�pe sa pagpapalar�` nang b�sbol sa manga b�ta`. I am at one with Pepe as to letting the children play baseball. H�bang ak� y nagd�da�n, k�taon nam� ng isin�buy nya ang t�big. He threw out the water at the very time, it happened, that I was passing by. ang k�tiw�la` a confidential agent, manager, overseer.

The words k�luluw� and k�puw�`, which resemble this formation, seem to be felt as simple roots and have been so treated here.

(2) Normal transients, abstracts, and special static forms.

404. k-um-a-. An active with -um- is made from ka-�sap as underlying word: Si Hw�n ay kum�ka�sap sa �kin. Juan was talking at me, haranguing me.

405. mag-ka- pag-ka-ka-. Actives with mag- and abstracts with pag- r from underlying words with ka- express a partial affection of the actor or of a group of actors; ka- here has its involuntary force: the actor is not a rational and voluntary agent. Nagkaro�n ako nang trab�ho kan�na ng um�ga, sapagk�t nagpasak�y ak� sa tr�n nang manga kam�tis nang t�tay ko. I was kept busy this morning, for I attended to the shipping by train of my father's tomatoes. Nagkaro�n sya nang g�lit. He harbored ill-feeling. Nagkagul� ang manga Amerik�no sa pagdat�ng nang D�ytsland. The Americans were surprised at the coming of the "Deutschland". Nagkagust� sya ng kum�in nang s�ha`. He conceived a desire of eating grape-fruit. Nagk�kal�pon ang manga langg�m sa p�to. The ants are getting all over the cake. Ak� y nagkam�lay pagkara�n nang il� ng sandal� ng paghihimat�y. I returned to consciousness after a few moments' fainting-spell. Nagkap�lad si Hw�n na makarat�ng d�to ng maluwalh�ti`. Juan was fortunate enough to get back here safe and sound. Ang pakw�n ay nagkas�ra`. The watermelon got partly spoiled. Ang manga s�ging ay nagkas�ra` sa kala�nan nang pagk�t�go` sa lalagy�n. Some of the bananas got spoiled on account of the long time they were kept stored. N�sa simb�han. sil� nang magkas�nog. They were at church when a fire occurred. Twi ng papas�kin ko sa kur�l ang manga kalab�w ay nagk�kawal� sil�. Every time I put the carabao into the corral, they get away.

So: b�kol, hin�g.

406. mag-ka- (1) pag-ka-ka- (1). Accent shift in this formation serves various uses:

(a) It may be due to the root: Si Hw�n ay nagkasak�t noo ng bw� ng nagda�n. Juan had a sickness last month. Si Hw�n ay hind� makap�tol nang k�hoy, sapagk�t mah�n� pa sya dahil�n sa pagkakasak�t. Juan cannot cut wood, because he is still weak on account of his recent illness.

(b) It expresses plurality: Magk�kaput�l ang manga tub�. The sugar-cane will get broken in numbers. Nagkaput�l ang manga tub� sa lak�s nang h�ngin. The sugar-cane broke in quantity under the violence of the wind. Nagk�kaput�l ang manga tub� sa kalakas�n nang h�ngin. Much sugar-cane is breaking under the force of the wind.

So also from l�nod.

(c) The form is really a simple active with mag- from an underlying word of the form ka- (1), � 398,c; three words of this kind occur: Sila y nagkagal�t. They quarreled. ang pagkakagal�t the quarrel. Ang Hap�n at ang Ts�na ay nagkasir�`. Japan and China had a break. Sil� y nagkatal�. They played a winning-and-losing game. Nagkatalu n� ang manga nags�sug�l. The gamblers have lost and won, have finished their winning-and-losing game.

In accordance with � 356, the underlying word is doubled with distributive plural meaning: Sila ng �pat ay nagkag�-kagal�t. The four of them all got angry at one another.

Similarly, an explicit plural with mag-si-pag- is formed (cf. � 386,b): Nagsipagkasir� sil�. They had a falling out.

407. (a) mag-ka- r pag-ka-ka- r. The reduplication of the root expresses repeated action in a form with retraction of accent and irregular insertion of ng after the prefix: Sya y nagk�kangdad�pa`. He kept falling on his face.

(b) mag-ka- D pag-ka-ka- D. Doubling of the root seems a more regular expression of the same value: nagk�kaump�g-ump�g.

408. Special static words with mag-ka- are simply dual collectives with mag- (� 358,a) from underlying words with ka- (� 398): Ang ban�g ni Hw�n at ni P�dro ay magka�nib (or: magkas�nib) sa pagk�l�tag. Juan's and Pedro's sleeping-mats overlap each other as they are spread. ang magkabal�e a pair of persons related by intermarriage of their children (more insistent on the relational element, but practically equal to magbal�e, � 358,a). Ang dalawa ng man�k ay magkabuk�d nang kulung�n. The two chickens were in separate crates. Ang b�kid ni Hw�n at ni P�dro ay magkar�tig. Juan's field and Pedro's border on each other. Si P�dro at si Hw�n ay magkapant�y. Pedro and Juan are of the same height. ang magkapat�d two brothers or sisters, a brother and a sister. ang magkap�tol na si Andr�s at si Rafay�l the brothers Andr�s and Rafael. Magkap�tol kam� ni Hw�n nang b�ro`. Juan and I have blouses made of the same cloth. dalaw� ng b�gay na g�gawi ng magkasun�d two things that are to be done one after the other.

(a) From kabab�yan (� 398,d): dalaw� ng estudy�nte ng magkabab�yan two students from the same town.

409. mag-ka-ka. As the explicit plural corresponding to these duals reduplicates the underlying word (� 358,b), the syllable ka- is repeated in this meaning: ang magkakapat�d a group of three or more brothers and (or) sisters; in the same meaning ang magkakap�tol. So also from: buk�d, s�ma, s�no`.

(a) The form magkabab�yan (� 408,a) rejects the extra reduplication, and is therefore plural as well as dual: tatlo ng estudy�nte ng magkabab�yan three students from the same town.

410. mag-k�- pag-ka-k�-. The transient with mag- and abstract with pag- r from underlying words with k�- have the accidental value of the latter prefix, usually with a dual reciprocal meaning. Sa kabil� ng band� mo ibw�l ang p�no ng iy�n, sapagk�t kung ir� ay ibuwal k� y bak� magk�dagan ang dalawa ng p�no`. Fell your tree in the direction away from me, so that if I fell this one, the two trees won't fall one on top of the other. Magk�k�dag�n ang dalawa ng p�no ng it�, kapag hind� mo ibinw�l sa kabil� ng band� iya ng pin�p�tol mo. These two trees will fall one on top of the other, if you don't make the one you are cutting down fall the other way. Nagk�dagan ang dalawa ng b�ta` nang mah�log sila sa hagd�n. The two children landed one on top of the other when they fell from the ladder. Ilabas m� sa b�kid, Kul�s, ang dalawa ng s�ko ng p�lay na nagk�k�dag�n na n�sa bang�n. Nicol�s, take out to the field the two bags of rice that are lying one on top of the other in the granary. Ang pagkak�iba nang ug�li ni P�dro at ni Hw�n ay g�ya nang pagkak�iba nang t�big at nang ap�y. The difference in character between Pedro and Juan is like the difference between water and fire. magk�hiwal�y part from each other (by force of circumstances, of two people). Ang ikinah�t� nang palay�k ay ang masam� ng pagkak�lagay nit�. What caused the rice-pot to break was the bad way it was placed. magk�m�yaw harmonize. ang pagkak�sab�y the happening at the same time of two events. Sya y nagk�s�la. He sinned (against the moral order, God, etc.) Ang pagkak�s�la kay Bath�la` ay pinar�rus�han sa infiy�rno. Sinning against God is punished in hell. B�bilhin k� ang kab�yo ng iy�n, kung magk�k�sya ang �ki ng kwalt�. I shall buy this horse, if my money is sufficient. Wal� sila ng pagkak�sund�`. The two don't agree on anything. ang pagkak�ta�n the coincidence in time of one event with another, of two events. ang pagkak�tay�` the standing up together (even of more than two people).

(a) Somewhat different are kung magk�bih�ra` at odd times; kung magk�gay�n when things turn out thus, when this is the state of affairs. So also, with static value: Ang magk�bila ng d�lo nang l�pis ay mat�lis. Both ends of the pencil are sharpened.

411. mag-k�- D pag-ka-k�- D. With doubled root plurality is expressed: Nagk�hiw�-hiwal�y ang manga d�hun nang libr�. The leaves of the book came apart. Ang manga gin�gaw� nya ng pang�sip nang manga makabuluh� ng f�tsa nang ist�riya ay ang pagkak�sun�d-sun�d at pag�tan nil�. He remembers the important dates of history by their sequence and their intervals.

(a) With accent shift, from a barytone root: Nagk�putol-put�l ang kataw�n nang t�o ng n�sagas�an nang tr�n. The body of the man who was run over by the train got all mangled. Nagk�k�putol-put�l ang kataw�n nang b�la ng t�o ng m�sagas�an nang tr�n. The body of a person run over by a train is cut to pieces. Magk�k�putol-put�l ang t�bo ng krist�l na iy�n kapag iyo ng ibinags�k. If you drop that glass tube, it will break into a thousand pieces.

412. ka- (1) -in, k-in-a-. The simple direct passive is formed from an underlying derived word with ka- with normal meaning. So from ka-l�ban, ka-�sap.

(a) A special static word corresponding to those in � 366 is ang kin�kapat�d the child of one's godparents (from ka-pat�d).

From it are derived the dual collective (� 358,a) magkin�kapat�d a pair of such, and the plural (� 358,b) magkikin�kapat�d three or more, as a group.

413. i-ka- i-k-in-a-. The instrumental passive with prefix ka- has a specialized meaning: it expresses transiently, an inanimate, or at least irrational and involuntary, object or circumstance which causes such and such an action: and this latter action is in turn also involuntary or out of control of the actor (as, for instance, the ability to do a thing), see � 432 ff.

Ang kawal�n ni Andr�s nang h�nap-b�hay sa b�ya ng it� ay sya ny� ng ikinaal�s. Andr�s' inability to make a living in this town is what forced him to leave. Ang mal� ng any� nang pul�be ay siy� ng ikina�wa` sa kanya ni Hw�n. The bad condition of the beggar was what made Juan pity him. Ang pagsasak�y nang kuts�ro nang manga t�o ng may sak�t na nak�h�h�wa ay sya ng ikinab�w� nang kanya ng pahint�lot. The driver's taking people with contagious diseases into his carriage was what caused his license to be withdrawn. Ang ikinah�rang nang mang� nagl�lak�d ay ang pagk�alam nang manga tulis�n na sil� y may dal� ng kwalt�. What caused the wayfarers to be held up was the robbers' happening to know that they had money with them. Ikinah�te ni Hw�n sa b�nga ang kanya ng las�ta. Juan's knife enabled him to cut the betel fruit. Ang pagkas�la nya sa sings�ng ay ang hind� niya ikinak�ha nang ganti ng p�la`. His missing the ring is what kept him from winning the prize. Y�n ay �ki ng ikinal�lungk�t. I am sorry, I am sorry to hear that. Ang pangungubl� nang manga sund�lo ay sya nil� ng hind� ikinamat�y. The soldiers' keeping in hiding is what saved their lives. Ikinap�tol nang yant�k na pam�lo` ang pagk�p�lu kay Hw�n. The caning Juan got broke the rattan that was used on him. Ikinap�p�tol nang mar�mi ng tub� ang malak�s na h�ngin. The strong wind is making much sugar-cane break. Ikap�p�tol nang manga sang� nang k�hoy ang malak�s na h�ngi ng it�. This strong wind will cause many branches of trees to break off. Ikap�p�tol nya sa manga kaw�yan ang pagg�lang nit�. The aging of the bamboo plants will force him to cut them down. Ang pagkal�nod nang Kast�la` ay ikinat�kot nang tatl� ng magkakayb�gan. The drowning of the Spaniard frightened the three friends. Ang kany� ng pagmamas�d sa manga t�la` sa gab� ay sya ny� ng malak� ng ikinat�tuw�`. His observation of the stars at night is his great source of pleasure.

Similarly, from: bing�, b�hay, b�ti, g�lit, h�ngo`, h�log, k�ya, l�pat, l�gi, t�long, wal�`.

414. i-pag-ka- i-p-in-ag-ka. With pag- this instrumental passive corresponds to the active with magka- (� 405). The reduplication of the durative forms affects the ka-.

Ang ipinagkagusto ny� ng kum�in nang sorb�tes ay ang kain�tan. It is the heat which makes him want to eat ices. Ipagk�kamat�y nang manga man�k ang masam� ng t�big. The bad water will make the chickens die. Ang kalamig�n sa tagul�n ay sya ng ipinagk�kamu� nang t�big sa �log. The cold weather in winter is what makes the water in the river congeal. Bak� ipagkawal� nang manga man�k sa kulung�n ang pagpapap�sok mo do�n niy� ng �so. See that your putting that dog into the enclosure doesn't make the chickens try to get away. Ipagk�kawal� nang b�hag ang pagk�bal�ta` sa kany� nang par�sa ng k�kamtan ny�. The captive's being told of the punishment he will get, will make him try to escape. Ipinagkawal� nya sa k�l�ngan ang pagpapah�rap sa kany�. Their torturing him made him escape from his confinement. Ipinagk�kawal� nya sa b�langg�an ang masam� ng pagpapak�in sa kanya d�to. The bad food they gave him in the jail made him try to escape.

415. Similarly, with accent shift this passive corresponds to the active with mag-ka- (1), � 406,b. Ipinagk�kabal�` (or: ipinagk�kaput�l) nang manga sang� nang k�hoy ang bagy� ng it�. This hurricane is breaking off many branches of trees. Nang ipagkaput�l nang �ki ng manga tub� ang h�ngin ay nalungk�t ak�. When the wind broke down my sugar-cane I was dismayed. Ipinagkaput�l nang manga tub� ang malak�s na h�ngi ng nagda�n. The recent strong wind broke down much sugar-cane.

Similarly: ipinagkasak�t (s�kit).

416. Special static forms with i-ka- are made from the numerals, with occasional contraction, forming ordinals and fractions: ika�nim ik�nim the sixth; ika�pat ik�pat the fourth, a fourth, a quarter; ikalaw� the second; ikalim� the fifth; ikapit� the seventh; ikatl� the third. Cf. � 347,a.

(a) The ordinal corresponding to is� one is however the independent root �na first; half is kalah�te`, � 519.

(b) From phrases, of course, the higher numbers: ikaisa-ng-da�n hundredth; ikaisa-ng-laks�` millionth; ikaisa-ng-l�bo thousandth; ikasa-m-p�` tenth; ikalabi-ng-is� eleventh; ikadalawa-ng-p�` twentieth; ikadalawa-ng-p�-t-is� twenty-first.

417. i-k�- i-k-in-�-. The instrumental passive from the root with accented k�- differs from that with unaccented ka- (� 413) in that the action or occurrence caused is not only involuntary but accidental and entirely out of the control of the actor (see � 458 ff.).

Ang ikin�g�gusto k� sa kayib�gan ko ng si Hw�n ay ang kanya ng maba�t na ug�li`. What makes me have a liking for my friend Juan is his lovable character. Ang ginaw� nya ng paggugup�t sa manga ret�so ng itin�t�go nang kanya ng n�nay ay sya ny� ng ikin�p�lo`. His cutting up the patches his mother was saving is what made it necessary to thrash him. Ang ikin�sakay ny� sa kab�yo ng bara-bar� ay ang kawal�n nya nang iba ng kab�yo. What made him get on the wild horse was his lack of other horses. Ikin�tahol nang �so ang pagk�dap� ni Hwan. Juan's falling down made the dog bark.

So also from: iy�k, p�tag.

(a) Accent shift is due to the root: Ang pagk�tahol nang �so ay sya ng ikin�gising nang nat�t�lug na b�ta`. The barking of the dog was what made the sleeping child wake up. Ik�t�tawa ny� ang iyo ng s�sab�hin. He won't be able to keep from laughing when you say that. Ikin�t�taw� ni Hw�n ang sin�bi ni P�dro. What Pedro said makes Juan laugh in spite of himself.

418. Corresponding to primary actives with mag- contrasted with -um-, and with mang-, we should expect pag- and pang- to be retained before the root in these formations; the only example is: ikin�pagtir�, corresponding to magtir�, in contrast with tumir� (�� 348. 351).

419. ka- (1) -an, k-in-a- (1) -an. The local passive with ka- is used when the action is an involuntary one, especially an emotion, of a rational actor, or when the actor is inanimate or irrational.

Ang hulih�n nang manga kinagal�tan ni Pat�pat ay idin�os nang manga gw�rdiya-sib�l kagab�. The arrest of the people who have incurred Patupat's anger was carried out by the gendarmes last night. Kahiya�n m� ang t�o ng matand�`. Reverence the aged. ang kinahul�gan nang b�ta` the place from which the child fell. Ang bint�na ng iy�n ang sy� ng kah�hul�gan nang b�ta`, pag hind� mo isinar�. The child will fall out of that window, if you don't shut it. Bak� ninyo kalun�ran ang �log, manga b�ta`. See that you don't get drowned in that river, children. Ang kanya ng kal�lun�ran ay ang �log na it�. He will get drowned in this river some day. ang b�hay na kinamatay�n the house where someone died, ang b�hay nang kinamatay�n the house in which someone died, the house of the bereaved family. Kinapatir�n nang l�bid ang lug�r na mal�pit sa d�lo-ng-band�-ng-kaliw�`. The rope broke at a point near the left-hand end. Ang kap�patir�n nang sin�lid ay mal�pit sa buh�l. The place where the thread will break is near the knot there. Kinatak�tan nya ang b�hay na pinagpatay�n sa k�ra`. He was afraid of the house where the priest was killed. Ang kinat�tak�tan nang manga b�ta` ay ang n�no`. The children are afraid of the ghost. Katak�tan niny� ang n�no`. You had better be afraid of ghosts. Kinatamar�n ni Hw�n ang kany� ng paga�ral. Juan became neglectful about his studying. Nang katamar�n ni Hw�n ang kanya ng paga�ral ay mal�pit na sy� ng makat�pos nang kar�ra. When Juan became lazy about his studies, he was already near the end of his course. Kat�tamaran ny� ang kany� ng paga�ral, pag binigy�n mo sy� nang mar�mi ng salap�`. He will be lazy about his studies, if you give him too much money.

Similarly from: buw�sit, �wan, k�ta, wal�`.

(a) With shifted root: Isa ng pul�be ang kina�awa�n ni Hw�n. It was a beggar who aroused Juan's pity.

420. pag-ka- (1) -an, p-in-ag-ka- (1) -an; pag-ka- (2) -an, p-in-ag-ka- (2) -an. Local passives with pag- before the ka- involve a plurality of actors. The durative reduplication affects the ka-; barytone roots have an extra accent-shift.

Ang kin�in nang us� ay malak� ng pinagk�kagustuh�n nang manga Il�ko. The Iloco are very fond of the contents of deers' stomachs. Pinagk�kalipumpun�n nang manga langg�m ang p�to. The ants are swarming all over the cake. Ang pinagkamatay�n nang manga kamb�ng ay ang lug�r na it�. This is the place where the goats perished. Hwag m� ng dalh�n sa bund�k ang manga man�k, sapagk�t iy� y kanil� ng pagk�kamatay�n. Don't take the chickens into the hills, for they would die there.

Barytone roots: Pinagkatakut�n nil� ang b�hay na pinagpatay�n sa k�ra`. They were afraid of the house where the priest was killed. Pinagk�katakut�n nil� ang manga mababags�k na h�yop. They are afraid of wild animals. Hwag m� ng ipamal�ta` ang n�k�ta n�tin d�to, sapagk�t bak� ang lug�r na it� y pagkatakut�n. Don't tell what we have seen here, for this place would be feared. Pagk�katakut�n nil� ang lug�r na it�, pag n�l�man nil� ang nangy�ri ng paghaharang�n d�to. They will be afraid of this place when they know of the hold-ups that occurred here. ang pinagkatalun�n that which was the occasion of winning by many (t�lo).

421. ka- S -an. Special static words, corresponding to those with S -an (� 377) are formed with prefix ka- from oxytone roots; in meaning they are collectives and abstracts of quality: ang kas�y�han gladness; Ang kat�m�ran ni Patr�siyo ay katut�bo` sa kanya ng l�hi`. Patricio's laziness is inborn in his family. So from the roots: ba�t, ban�l, damd�m, dang�l, duw�g, lag�y, lungk�t, luw�ng, mah�l, mal�`, mat�y, pint�s, sangk�p, tungk�l, tuw�`, tuw�d.

Divergent in meaning is ang Kapamp�ngan a Pampanga, if from pangp�ng.

The secondary accent is lacking, irregularly, in kalay�an (lay�`); with contraction in kayil�ngan, kayl�ngan (beside kail�ngan, from il�ng).

(a) This latter word underlies an active with mang-, an abstract with pang- r, and a simple direct passive: nang�ngayil�ngan requires; ang pangangayil�ngan need, necessity; K�kayilang�ni ng magda�n si P�dro r�to b�gu sya umal�s. Pedro will have to come here before he leaves.

(b) From a derived word, with the secondary accent irregularly placed: Boo ng b�yan ay nagd�wang sa kapang�n�kan ni Ris�l. The whole country celebrated Rizal's birthday; also: ang �raw nang kapang�n�kan birthday,--from pangan�k (� 347).

422. ka- (2) -an. Barytone roots have, in the same sense, an accent shift of two syllables, corresponding to � 379. Bo� ng kabahay�n ang n�k�ta n�min sa gitn� nang da�n. We saw a whole set of household goods in the middle of the road; also: ang kabahay�n a house containing several dwellings. Mar�mi sa manga t�o ang nak�k�kil�la nang kanila ng karapat�n, d�tapuwat nakal�l�mot nang kanila ng katungk�lan. Many are the people who know their rights but forget their duties. Ang karam�tan nang p�re` ay nag�ng kasabih�n. The stinginess of the priest is proverbial. Ang katakut�n sa Dy�s ay isa ng kab��tan. Fear of the Lord is a virtue. Ang pagbibig�y nang sigar�lyo ay isa sa manga matatand� ng kaugali�n sa Filip�nas. Giving cigarettes is one of the old customs in the Philippines. ang kawika�n a proverb.

So from ab�la, �raw, b�lo, g�mit, h�log, �big, l�ngit, pay�pa`, s�ra`, t�pos, �tos.

With contraction: kahariy�n, kahary�n (h�ri`), and, if from t�o, kataw�n body.

(a) From the latter word there is an abstract of action, with pang- r: ang pangangataw�n physique (cf. pananam�t, etc., � 357).

423. ka- (1) -an. Corresponding to the formation (1) -an (� 378), the collective-abstracts of this type with ka- have formal irregularities and, where there is any contrast (e. g. mah�l), less explicit and more specialized meaning than the preceding two groups.

ang kaal�tan saltiness (of water). Sa gab� ng it� ang kabil�gan nang buw�n. The fullness of the moon is tonight. Ang kadalamhat�an ay isa ng damd�mi ng hind� n�r�r�pat sa t�o. Grief is an emotion not becoming to a man or woman. ang karun�ngan wisdom. ang kahangal�n foolishness (ang hang�l a fool). ang kaibh�n the difference. ang kalin�san cleanness, cleanliness. ang kamatsing�n monkey-tricks, naughtiness. ang kamur�han cheapness. Saw�` ang kanya ng kapal�ran. His luck is bad. Sa kapanay�n nang ul�n kung tagul�n ay hind� masigl� ang b�yan. The town is not cheerful during the unabated rains of the rainy season. Ang manga t�o y mar�mi ng kasal�nan. People have many sins. ang kasama�n badness. kasawi�n poor position, awkwardness. kasinungal�ngan falsehood, a lie. kasip�gan diligence. Ang desgr�sya ng nangy�ri kay Hw�n ay isa ng hamp�s nang katalagah�n. The misfortune which has come to Juan is a blow of fate. Ang kanila ng pag�lag ay hind� katap�ngan. Their fleeing was not a brave act. ang bo� ng kata�han all mankind. ang katip�nan a meeting, Katip�nan a secret society organized against the Spaniards; a member of this. kayab�ngan pride.

So from: b�ba`, b�baw, big�t, buh�ngin, b�hay, b�ti, dal�s, d�mi, d�mot, d�niw (if karaniy�wan is so to be analyzed), dil�m, ginh�wa, g�bat, h�ba`, h�na`, h�rap, ikl�`, �nit, lak�s, lak�, lam�g, l�pad, l�on, li�t, l�ko, l�nod, lup�t, mah�l, mangm�ng, p�rang, fiy�sta, pul�`, sak�m, sal�t, salb�hi, sal�koy, ta�s, Tag�log, tah�mik, t�kaw, t�kot, tal�no, tampal�san, tangh�li`, t�lin, t�nay, toto�, ul�l, wal�`, y�man.

(a) From a phrase: Iy� y kawala-ng-hya�n ni P�dro. That was a shameless action of Pedro's (wal� ng hiy�`).

(b) From derived words: ang Kakapampang�nan the Pampanga country (Kapamp�ngan, � 421).

ang bo� ng kamagan�kan nina Kr�s, Bant�g, at iba p� the whole relationship of the Cruz's, Bantogs, and so on; ang bo� ng kamagan�kan ni P�dro Vy�la the whole family of Pedro Viola (mag�nak, � 358,a).

ang kapangyar�han power (-pangy�ri, as though by � 347).

424. ka- r (1) -an, ka- r (2) -an. With reduplication of the root and accent shift of one syllable for an oxytone root, of two in barytone roots, ka- and -an form special static words denoting something surprising or provocative of such and such an emotion.

It� y kagagaw�n ni Hw�n! This is some of Juan's work! cf. It� y gaw� ni Hw�n. Juan did this, made this. Ang pagk�upo ni P�dro sa s�g�lan ay kagagaw�n nang isa ny� ng kayb�gan. Pedro's sitting at the gaming-table was the work of one of his fine friends. Ang p�t�ya ng nangy�ri kagab� ay kagagaw�n ni P�dro. The killing which occurred last night was some of Pedro's doing. So: katutur�n a correct outcome (tuw�d).

Barytone roots: Ang katatakut�n nang b�ta` ay ang n�no`. The thing that arouses the child's fear is a ghost. Ang kanya ng katatawan�n ay ang ungg�`. His source of laughter is the monkey. ang salit� ng katatawan�n a jest-word, a funny expression.

425. With secondary accent on the first syllable of the underlying word, ka- and -an form also words denoting one of two reciprocal actors. This is the form for oxytone roots, ang kab�g�yan a person with whom one exchanges gifts. Si Hw�na ay siya ng kab�l�ngan ni Mary�. Juana is the one Maria whispers with. ang kahamp�san one of two who perform mutual flagellation, kah�r�man one of two who borrow from each other. ka�n�man person one drinks with. kak�lab�tan one of two who touch each other. Ang kap�t�yan ni Hw�n ay si P�dro. Juan is engaged in a mortal conflict with Pedro. Ang kap�t�ran ni Hw�na nang sin�lid ay ang kanya ng kayb�ga ng si Mary�. Juana cuts thread with her friend Maria. ang kas�lit�an the person with whom one converses. Si Hw�n ay ka�l�lan ni P�dro. Juan and Pedro fool each other. ang ka�p�an one of two who sit together.

426. Barytone roots add accent shift of one syllable. Ang kah�l�gan nya nang s�ha` ay ang kany� ng kapat�d. The one with whom he takes turns at dropping down grape-fruit from the tree is his brother. ang kah�n�han one of two birds that chirp at each other. ang ka�b�gan one of two who love each other. ang kak��nan one of two who eat together. Si Hw�na ay siya ng kap�t�lan ni Mary� nang kuk�. Juana and Maria cut each other's fingernails. ang kas�l�tan one's correspondent. ang kat�l�nan one's opponent in a dispute.

(a) The shift is due to the root in: Si Mary� ay sy� ng ka�b�tan ni Hw�na nang manga mabang� ng bulakl�k. Maria and Juana hand each other fragrant flowers (as in some ceremony or game).

(b) With contraction and lack of secondary accent: ang kayib�gan, kayb�gan a friend (contrast ka�b�gan above).

(c) In a few instances barytone roots have accent shift of two syllables without secondary accent. Si Mary�no ay kahatak�n ni Kul�s nang l�bid. Mariano is pulling at the rope against Nicol�s. ang kamurah�n one of two who curse at each other (with meaning ordinarily peculiar to the shifted root, � 337). Sum�long at Kasamah�n Sumulong and Company. kasulat�n one's correspondent (equal to kas�l�tan, above). Ang katuru�n ni P�dro ay ang b�ta ng si Hw�n. Pedro and little Juan are pointing at each other.

427. These formations serve as underlying words of a few derivatives:

(a) Active with mag- and abstract with pag- r (� 352): ang pagkakayib�gan the joining in friendship of two people.

(b) Secondary active with maki- from the preceding: makipagkayib�gan win one's way into someone's friendship, become friends with someone.

(c) Dual collective with mag- (� 358,a): Si P�dro at si Hw�n ay magkah�r�man nang sambal�lo at sand�lyas. Pedro and Juan lend each other hats and sandals. magka�b�gan a pair of lovers. magkayb�gan a pair of friends.

(d) Where the dual value of the underlying form is weak, explicit plurals of the preceding with mag- r (� 358,b) occur: ang magkakayb�gan a group of three or more friends. ang magkakasamah� ng si P�dro, si Hw�n, at si Andr�s the party consisting of Pedro, Juan, and Andr�s. ang magkakasamah� ng sina P�dro the party of Pedro and his followers. Ang magkakasamah� ng nagsipagpasy�l ay sina Mary�, Hw�na, P�dro, at Kul�s. The party that went for a walk consisted of Maria, Juana, Pedro, and Nicol�s. Ang magkakasamah� ng napasa h�lo` at napaluw�san ay sin� Mariy�no, P�pe, at Kul�s at sina P�dro, H�lyo, at Andr�s. The groups that went upstream and downstream were, respectively, Mariano, Pepe, and Nicol�s and Pedro, Julio, and Andr�s. Ang tatlo ng man�k na yt� y magkakasamah� ng inihatid d�to, ang ib� y magkakabuk�d. These three chickens were brought here together, the others each by itself.

428. k�- (1) -an, k-in-�- (1) -an. Local passives with k�- denote the place where someone or something happens to be. Hwag k� ng kumib�` sa iy� ng kin�d�roon�n. Don't stir from the spot (where you happen to be). Sa al� ng band� ang kin�d�roon�n nang b�ya-ng-Kam�lig?--Sa band� ng kaliw�`. In which direction is the town of Camalig?--Toward the left. Ang b�ya-ng-Bal�wag ay ang kin�mahal� ng �na ng �na nang p�lay. The town of Baliuag was the first place where rice got dear. Ang k�p�patay�n sa t�o ng iy�n ay ang bigt�han. This man will end on the gallows. Ang b�ya-ng-Bal�wag ang iyu ng k�t�tung�han pag tinunt�n mo ang land�s na iy�n. You will get to the town of Baliuag if you follow that path.

Similarly from: b�ngit, b�rol, kul�ng, lag�y, t�go`, tay�`, tir�, up�`.

Divergent in meaning are kin�buk�san (� 260) and, from a phrase, kin�h�ti-ng-gabih�n (� 260, h�ti ng gab�).

429. pag-k�- (1) -an, p-in-ag-k�- (1) -an. Local passives of this type with pag- reduplicate the k�-; they refer to other local passive relations than place in which; so: pagk�kilanl�n be the occasion of showing something; pagk�syah�n be the container of something that fits in; pagk�sunduw�n, pagk�sundu�n be agreed upon.

430. Special static words with k�- and -an are few and differ in meaning.

(a) Ang k�gal�tan nila Andr�s, Hw�n, at Mariy�no ay nap�w� na. The quarrel between Andr�s, Juan, and Mariano has been appeased; this is no doubt merely a plural with S -an (� 377,a) from the underlying word kagal�t (� 398,c).

It forms the underlying word of a simple active with mag- and abstract with pag- r: ang pagkak�gal�tan a quarrel (of two or more people).

(b) Si P�dro ay k�ib�gan ni Mary�. Pedro is liked by Maria. Sina P�dro, Kul�s, at Hw�n ay sya ng manga k�ib�gan ni Mariy�no. Pedro, Nicol�s, and Juan are the ones whom Mariano likes. This is probably a real special static word corresponding to the transient with k�- (1) -an (� 428).

Derived active with mag-: Nagk�k�ib�gan si P�dro at si Hw�na. Pedro and Juana are in love with each other, have come to like each other.

(c) Ang k�tw�an ay n�hint�` sa pagdat�ng nang isa ng magnan�kaw. The rejoicing was stopped by the coming of a robber. This is, in form at least, a plural with S -an from an underlying -katuw�`, which is not known.

Derived active with mag-: magk�tw�an rejoice together, be merry together.

The same form is seen in k�lingk�ngan; little finger, fifth finger; if this is from a root -lingk�ng.

431. ka- (1) D -an. With doubling of the root and radical accent shift: K�un�-un�ha ng dumat�ng si Hw�n. Juan got there the very first. So: k�hul�-hul�han the very last.

(3) Additional transients, abstracts, and special static forms.

432. The prefix ka- in its involuntary meaning and the prefix k�- in its accidental meaning appear in an additional set of transients and abstracts with maka-, mak�- prefixed for the active, ma-, m�- for the passives, and pagka-, pagk�- for the abstract. The meanings of these forms are most varied; especially in the direct passive, where the involuntary or accidental character of the actor sometimes reaches the point where an actor is entirely left out of view or lacking, and the passive borders closely on active meaning. For this reason it will be convenient to divide the uses into a number of somewhat arbitrarily defined groups. The forms are as follows:

433. The active forms with ka- are: maka-, maka- R, naka-, naka- R; abstract pagka-.

The active expresses an inanimate object or circumstance causing an emotion or feeling; the meaning, then, is the same as in the forms with i-ka- (� 413), except that here the thing causing the emotion is viewed as an actor. Nakab�b�lag ang �law. The light is blinding. Ang gam�t na it� ang nakaginh�wa sa m�y sak�t. This medicine is what relieved the patient. It� y makap�p�w� nang g�tom (�haw, gin�w, �nit, p�god). This will relieve the hunger (thirst, cold feeling, hot feeling, fatigue). Ang �wit nang manga �bon ay nakat�tuw�`. The song of the birds is gladdening. Similarly from: big�t, bing�, b�ti, las�ng, lig�ya, s�ra`, t�kot.

434. The active expresses, further, an inanimate object which has got (in the past) into such and such a condition or position.

Ang bangk�` ay naka�yon sa �gos. The canoe is righted with the stream. Ang pagk�in ay nakahand� n�. Dinner is served. Nakas�bit sa p�ko` ang �ki ng amerik�na. My coat is hanging on the nail. Nakasig�ng ang palay�k nang sin�ing. The rice-pot is on the fire. Hind� ko b�bilh�n ang kab�yo ng iy�n, k�hit na makas�siya ang �ki ng kwalt�. I would not buy this horse, even if my money should be sufficient. Similarly: da�n, law�t, t�li`, t�long.

435. Very similar is the use of the active to describe an animate actor in such and such a position (into which he has got): Nakadap�` ang manga t�o sa kanila ng b�hay h�bang lum�lind�l. The people lay prone in their houses during the earthquake. Si P�dro ay nakah�wak sa tabur�te nang sya y retrat�han. Pedro had hold of a chair when he was photographed. Nakasak�y ang b�ta ng si Hw�n sa �so nang sya y m�k�ta ko sa bak�ran. Little Juan was mounted (i. e. riding) on the dog when I saw him in the yard. Nakatay� si P�dro nang �kin sya ng m�k�ta. Pedro was standing up when I saw him. Nakaup� sya sa bangk�`. He was seated on the bench. So from: ab�ng, hil�ra, �kid, k�pit, luh�d, pang�w, talungk�`, tind�g.

436. The active may denote an animate actor who is able, succeeds in doing so and so; the involuntary element inheres in the matter of ability, which is not dependent on the actor's will: Sa gana ng �kin sya y maka�al�s. So far as I am concerned, he may go. Sa tig�s nang kanya ng lo�b ay wal� ng makab�le`. There is no one (or, under the type in � 433, nothing) can break the firmness of his will. Nakag�gaw�` ang al�l� nang p�yong. The servant is able to make umbrellas. Nakagup�t sya nang makap�l na dam�t. He succeeded in cutting thick cloth. Si P�dro ay hind� makah�wak nang palak�l, sapagk�t masak�t ang kanya ng kam�y. Pedro cannot hold an ax, because his hand is sore. Na��ri ng sya y makahig�`. He may lie down. Hind� ako makahing� nang kwalt� kay Hw�n. I cannot (bring myself to) ask Juan for money. Nakah�log sya nang isa ng ny�g sa kanya ng pagpuk�l sa kump�l. He succeeded in bringing down a cocoanut, in his throwing at the cluster. Ang b�ta` ay hind� makak�in, sapagk�t kum�in sya nang mar�mi ng kakan�n. The child can't eat because he has eaten so many sweets. Si P�dro ay hind� nakap�p�tol nang k�hoy, sapagk�t b�gu ng g�ling sya sa sak�t. Pedro cannot cut any wood, for he has just recovered from sickness. Sa tanty� raw ny� ay makap�p�tol na sya nang k�hoy, sapagk�t sya y malakas n�. He reckons he will be able to cut wood, for he is strong again. Nakas�sakay sy� sa kab�yo. He is able to mount the horse. Ang b�ta y nakas�s�lat n�. The child is already able to write. Hind� ako makas�lat. I can't write. Ang m�y sakit ay nakat�tay� n�. The patient is already able to stand up. Hind� ako nakat�pon nang manga d�hon, sapagk�t wal� ako ng kalayk�y. I was not able to pile up the leaves, because I had no rake. Ang h�le ng isd� ni Hw�n ay nakawal�`. The fish Juan caught got away. Similarly from: akiy�t, bal�k, b�yad, dal�, dat�ng, k�los, k�ha, l�kad, p�sok, sag�t, sig�w, suw�y, tah�l, takb�, tir�, �bos, �sap.

Abstracts: Ang m�kina ay sy� ng dahil�n nang pagkagaw� ni P�dro nang p�yong. The machine is the cause of Pedro's ability to make umbrellas. Ang pagkasak�y ny� sa kab�yo ng bara-bar� ay hind� dahil�n sa kanya ng t�pang, d�tapuwat dahil�n sa mar�mi ng iba ng t�o ng nagsip�gil sa kab�yo. His ability to get on the wild horse was not due to his courage, but to the many other people who controlled the horse. Ang kanya ng pagkat�pon sa manga kalab�w ay nany�ri d�hil sa mar�mi ng t�long. His success in rounding up the carabao was due to much aid.

437. Closely bordering on the preceding type is the active, mostly with the particle n�, expressing the actor of a completed action. Nakaal�s na siy�. He has already (succeeded in going, i. e.) gone away. Nakap�tul n� si P�dro nang k�hoy. Pedro has now finished cutting wood. Si P�dro ay nakap�tul n� nang k�hoy, b�go ko ng inut�sa ng mangig�b. Pedro had already cut the wood, before I asked him to fetch water. Similarly from: b�tas, dat�ng, k�ha, l�mot, t�pos.

The abstract lends itself especially to the use as absolute attribute (� 274): Pagkagaw� nya nang b�kod ay naglas�ng siy�. When he had finished making the fence, he got drunk. Pagkah�rang nang manga tulis�n sa kor�yo ay nagsit�ngo sil� sa bund�k. When the bandits had robbed the mail, they took to the hills. Pagkah�te ni Hw�n nang manga mans�nas ay umal�s sya. When Juan had distributed the apples, he went away. Pagkah�li nang pul�s sa magnan�kaw ay dinala ny� it� sa b�langg�an. When the policeman had caught the thief, he took him to the jail. Pagkapat�y nya sa t�o ng kany� ng hin�rang ay tumakbo sy�. When he had killed the man he had held up, he ran away. Pagkap�tol ni Hw�n nang tah�d nang k�tyaw ay nagdudug�` ang pa� nit�. When Juan had cut the spur of the rooster, its foot kept bleeding. Pagkasak�y sa kab�yo ay naparo�n ak� sa h�laman�n at pumit�s ako nang isa ng pakw�n �pang �ki ng k�nin. When I had had my horseback ride, I went to the garden and picked a melon to eat. Pagkasak�y ni Hw�n sa tr�n ay lum�kad ito ng ag�d. When Juan had got on the train, it soon started to move. Ang pagkas�nog nang b�yan ay ikinalungk�t nang mar�mi. The people grieved at their town having burned down. Pagkatan�w nang ungg�` sa pag�ng ay nagbalik sy� sa p�no-ng-s�ging. When the monkey had looked at the turtle, he went back to the banana tree. Pagkat�wag nang pag�ng sa ungg�` ay sumun�d it� ag�d. When the turtle had called the monkey, the latter came at once. Pagkatay� nya sa kanya ng �p�an ay minul�n nya ag�d ang pagtatalump�te`. When he had stood up from his seat he at once began making his speech. Pagkat�pon mo nang manga bay�bas ay umuw� ka. When you have piled up the guavas, go home. Pagka�na nya sa takb�han ay naghint� sya. When he had got ahead in the running, he stopped. Similarly from: al�s, bendisiy�n, gup�t, h�pon, �sip, k�in, k�ha, lag�k, l�to`, m�sa, s�bi, s�nay, t�pos, t�pon, tup�d.

438. The forms of the direct passive are: ma-, ma- R; na-; na- R.

The direct passive may correspond regularly to the active in � 436, and denote the object directly affected by an action which an actor is able to perform.

Hind� nya mab�sag ang b�te. He did not succeed in breaking the bottle. Sa kalakas�n ni P�blo ay nadala ny� ang kab� ng b�kal. Pablo, with his strength, managed to lift the iron chest. Nadal� nang b�ta` ang k�hoy. The boy managed to carry the wood. Hind� madal� ni P�dro ang kah�n sa kabigat�n. Pedro cannot lift the box; it is too heavy. Hind� ku mag�mit ang p�yong na it�. I can't use this umbrella. Hind� nak�in nang b�ta` ang matig�s na tin�pay na iy�n. The child was not able to eat that hard bread of yours. Nak�ya ko ng buh�tin ang is� ng mali�t na p�no-ng-k�hoy. I managed to lift one small tree. Nak�k�ya ko ang paga�ral nang Inggl�s. I manage to get along with the study of English. Nak�yas ni P�dro ang b�o. Pedro managed to smooth the cocoanut shell. Nal�kad n�min ang lah�t nang da�n. We managed to walk the whole way. Nal�l�pon nang manga langg�m ang kanila ng pagk�in. The ants succeed in amassing their food. Hind� ko mapat�y ang b�ta ng it�. I cannot (get myself to) kill this child. Hind� ko map�tol nang kam�y ang b�kal na it�. I can't break this iron with my hand. Map�p�tol daw ny� ng wala ng t�long ang lah�t nang kaw�ya ng mag�lang. He says he will be able to cut all the old bamboo without any help. Hind� nya mas�ra` ang kand�ro nang pint�`, k�hit na iniy�bus nya ang kanya ng lak�s. He did not succeed in breaking the lock of the door, although he used up all his strength. Nat�talast�s mo b� ang sin�s�bi ko sa iy�? Do you understand what I am saying to you? Similarly: �gaw, akiy�t, ala�la, amp�t, gaw�`, h�ngo`, h�la.

439. Similarly, the direct passive may correspond regularly to the active of the type in � 437 and denote an object directly affected by an action which has been (successfully) completed by an actor.

Na�so ko n� sa boo ng b�yan ang b�ta`. I have hunted and called the child all over town. Nab�lot ko n� ang manga libr�. I have already wrapped up the books. Nab�sa ku n� ang diy�riyo. I have finished reading the paper. Nahamp�s ko n� ang b�ta`. I have already whipped the child. Nah�nap na ny� ang libr�. He has already looked for the book. Napat�y ku n� ang man�k. I have already killed the chicken. Kapag nap�p�tol na ny� ang p�no-ng-k�hoy ay sak� mo hat�kin ang l�bid na nakat�li sa sang� nit�. When he is getting the tree cut, then do you pull at the rope that is tied to the branch. Natip�d nya ang pagk�in nang k�nin. He has been saving of the rice. Nat�pon ko n� ang manga d�hon. I have already heaped up the leaves. Nat�sod ku n� ang baky�`. I have kicked off the sandal. Na�nat ku n� ang balukt�t na k�wad na ibinig�y mu sa �kin. I have straightened the bent wire you gave me. Naus�s� ku n� si Hw�n. I have already questioned Juan. Similarly from: �gaw, gaw�`, �pon, �wan, l�bot, s�kop, siy�sat.

440. We come now to direct passives which do not correspond regularly to any active; these have their own abstracts with pagka-.

The commonest type expresses an object which undergoes or has undergone a process due to an inanimate actor or to no actor in particular; it differs from the simple direct passive in the involuntary and often perfectic nature of the action. Nab�le` ang sang� nang k�hoy. The branch of the tree is broken. Ang t�lis nang l�pis ay nab�le`. The point of the pencil is broken. Hwag m� ng ilagay dy�n ang palat�n, sapagk�t bak� mab�sag. Don't put the plate there, for it might get broken. Ang kanila ng k��nan ay nagamb�la sa pagdat�ng nang manga pul�s. Their dinner-party broke up when the police arrived. Ang boo ng b�yan ay nagul�. The whole town became riotous. Nah�te` ang mans�nas. The apple is in halves. Nalag�t ang l�bid. The rope broke. Ang kanya ng dal�ri` ay nap�so`. His finger is blistered. Napat�d ang l�bid. The rope broke. Ang bat� ng hasa�n ay napir�so. The whetstone went to pieces. Napitas n� ang manga bulakl�k. The flowers have been picked. Nap�p�tol ang manga sang� nang k�hoy sa lak�s nang h�ngin. The branches of the trees are being broken off by the force of the wind. Nap�tol n� ang k�hoy. The tree has been cut down. Nap�tol ang d�lo nang k�hoy. The end of the log is cut off. Nap�tol ang sang� nang k�hoy. The branch of the tree broke off. Nas�yang ang trab�ho ni Hw�n. Juan's work went for naught. Ang b�kid ay nas�ra`. The field is waste. Similarly, from: �ri`, b�go, buw�l, d�lat, g�mon, hin�g, lagl�g, lam�g, l�on, p�wi`, pun�`, pur�l, s�nog, t�pos, �bos, ut�s, wal�`, y�ri`.

The abstract is regular: da�n, hin�g, lag�t, p�sok, s�nog, wal�`.

441. The passive is used, further, to denote the animate performer of an involuntary act, which, then, is looked upon rather as an undergoing than as a performing.

This is the clearest where the subject is undergoing an emotion or sensation: Na�w� si Hw�n sa pul�be. Juan pitied the beggar. Ang b�ta ng si Hw�n ay nad�dung�. Little Juan is bashful. Nagin�w sya sa kanya ng pagpal�go`. He got cold while taking his bath. Ak� y nag�g�tom. I am hungry; isa ng t�o ng nag�g�tom a hungry person. Nah�h�pis siy�. He is sad. Nah�hiy� ka b�? Are you ashamed? Nah�hiy� sya. He is ashamed. Ak� y nail�ng. I was nonplussed, I didn't know what to do. Ak� y na�inip n� nang paghihint�y kay Hw�n. I am impatient with waiting for Juan. Sya y nal�mang sa kanya ng pagb�lang. He got confused in his reckoning. Sya nal�lungk�t. He is sorry. Ak� y na��haw. I am thirsty. So: bag�bag, g�lit, lib�ng, t�kot, tuw�`.

This form is used also of processes of life, especially physiological and morbid: Nalump� sy�. He got lame. Nap�pe sya. He got dumb. So: na�ri` got the ability, nab�o got widowed, nab�hay lived, na�ngay was noisy, nakin�g heard, nal�nod got drowned, namat�y died, nat�log slept.

It is used, finally, in nah�log fell (from a place to the ground), and, strangely enough, for two voluntary actions which consist of a relaxing of the muscles: Sya y nahig�` He lay down. Sya y nah�hig�`. He was in the act of lying down. Naup� sya sa bangk�`. He sat down on the bench. Na�up� sya sa tabur�te. He was in the act of sitting down on the stool.

Further, irregularly, in: Sya y nal�go`. He took a bath. Sya y nan�og. He came down from the house. See � 488,c.

Abstracts: Ang pagka�w� ni Hw�n sa pul�be Juan's pity for the beggar. ang pagkab�ta` one's childhood. ang pagkab�hay ni Hes�s the resurrection of Jesus. Ang pagkag�lat ni Hw�na ay sya ny� ng ipinagkasak�t. Juana's scare was what made her sick. Pagkal�nod nang Kast�la` ay lum�yas ang manga estudy�nte. When the Spaniard had got drowned, the students hurried away. ang kanya ng pagkamat�y his death. ang kanya ng pagkas�la sa sings�ng. his missing the ring. Pagkaup� nya sa bangk�` ay minul�n nya ang pagkukw�nto sa manga b�ta`. When she had sat down on the bench, she began her story-telling to the children. So: �ri`, h�pis, h�log, lit�, l�ko, p�pi, t�kot, t�lo, ul�l.

442. An explicit plural of both active and direct passive is formed by the infixation of -ang- into the prefix.

In the active the syllable after this infix often receives a secondary accent: Nang�kaup� na sil� sa pagk�in, nang kam� ay dumat�ng. They had already sat down to their meal when we arrived. So also from: bit�w, biy�bit.

With reduplication of the ka- instead of root initial: Nang�k�kaup� sil� sa pagk�in. They are able to sit up for their meals.

Direct passive: Ang dinala ny� ng manga man�k ay nangamat�y. The chickens he brought all died. Nangap�tol ang tub� sa lak�s nang bagy�. The sugar-cane broke under the strength of the typhoon. Nangap�p�tol ang karam�han nang tub� nang kasaluk�yan ang bagy�. During the typhoon most of the sugar-cane got broken. So from: bul�k, �wan, l�nod, lungk�t, t�kot, tuw�`.

443. From a compound word, passive: nasawi-ng-p�lad (saw� ng p�lad).

From a derived word, active: makataan�n (taan�n, � 378).

444. Accent shift is due to the root. Si P�dro ay nakaay�w n�. Pedro has left the table. So from �bot, s�kit.

Passive: Naabut ny� ang ilaw�n. He managed to reach the lamp. Hind� nya maab�t ang itl�g. He can't reach the egg. Ang b�ta ng si Hw�n ay nab�bah�y. Little Juan is shy.

Abstract: Pagkaab�t nang b�t� nang kany� ng laruw�n ay tumakb� sya ng ag�d. After reaching for his toys, the boy at once ran.

445. With pag- before the root, this active is made from roots whose primary active has mag-. The reduplication affects either the ka-, or the pag-, or the root initial: mak�-ka-pag- or maka-p�-pag- or maka-pag- R.

Ang b�ta` ay nakapagdal� nang k�hoy. The boy managed to bring the wood. Ang b�ta` ay nakapagd�dal� (or: nak�kapagdal�, or: nakap�pagdal�) nang k�hoy. The boy is able to bring the wood. Nak�kapaglas�ng si �nong, k�hit na sya y hind� bin�bay�an nang kanya ng as�wa na makapagpabil� nang �lak. Anong manages to get drunk, even though his wife does not allow him to have liquor purchased for him. Nakapagp�tol na si Hw�n nang k�hoy. Juan has finished cutting wood. Nakapagp�p�tol n� si Hw�n nang k�hoy. Juan is already able to cut wood. Hind� makapagp�tol nang k�hoy si Hw�n, dahil�n sa s�gat nya sa kam�y. Juan cannot cut wood, on account of the wound on his hand.

Similarly: ant�k, �ral, b�his, ligt�s, m�sa, n�kaw, pasiy�l, s�bi, salit�`, t�go`, tak�.

446. Direct passive: ma-pag-; ma-pag- R or ma-p�-pag-. Hind� ko mapag�yos ang manga dam�t na it�. I can't straighten out these clothes. Map�pag�yos nya ang manga lip�s sa �so ng dam�t na it�. She will be able to fix these out-of-date clothes. Hind� ko mapagk�ro` kung an� ang �big nya ng sab�hin. I couldn't make out what he wanted to say. Nang mapagk�r� ni Hw�n kung an� ang mangy�y�ri, ay hind� nya itin�loy ang kanya ng b�lak. When Juan saw what was going to happen, he did not carry out his plan. Hind� ko mapagk�ro ang kahulug�n nang s�lat na it�. I can't get at the meaning of this letter. Napagtalast�s ko ang manga sin�s�bi mo sa iyo ng s�lat. I understand all you say in your letter. Napagt�talast�s (or: nap�pagtalast�s) k� ang �big mo ng sab�hin. I understand what you mean.

447. maka-pag- (1), cf. � 353. Nang nakapaghanap sy� ay umuw� sya sa kanya ng b�hay. When he had finished searching, he went home. Kung makapaghanap sy� ay �uw� sya. When he has finished searching, he will go home.

448. maka-pang-, corresponding to mang-, � 357. Nak�kapanghir�m kam� nang kwalt� kay �li ng Kul�sa. We can borrow money from Aunt Nicolasa. Mak�kapanghir�m ka ng wala ng s�la kay Hw�n nang isa ng sombr�ro. You will surely be able to borrow a hat from Juan. Nakapang�ngab�yo sya ng patay�`, sapagk�t hind� gulat�n ang kanya ng kab�yo. He is able to ride standing up, because his horse is not given to shying.

Abstract: pagkapang�ko` (�ko`).

(a) The root is reduplicated for plurality: Ang pagkapanghah�rang nila Hw�n ay hind� nila s�na magaw�`, kung hind� sa karam�han nang t�o nila na m�y bar�l. The highway robberies by Juan and his gang could not have been perpetrated by them, if it had not been for the number of them that had guns.

(b) From a derived word: makapangin�in (kin�in, �� 365, 357,a).

449. ma- D; expressive of slow activity: Hind� sya mamat�y-mat�y. He is lingering on the death-bed. Ang p�gakp�kan nang manga t�o ay hind� mat�pus-t�pus. The applause of the people could find no end.

450. In the instrumental passive, which seems to occur only with pag- and pang-, the i- follows the ma-: Ang pagk�t�wag nang k�ra sa manga pul�s ay hind� nya ikinab�te, sapagk�t sil� y k�kaunt� l�mang �pang maipagtangg�l sya sa manga magnan�kaw. The priest's having called in the police did him no good, for they were too few to defend him from the thieves.

With pang-: naipang�ngan�k (an�k, cf. � 357).

451. The local passive has the prefix ma- and the suffix (1) -an.

Namatay�n sina Hw�n. Someone has died in Juan's family. Namatay�n sa b�hay ni Hw�n. There has been a death in Juan's house. Naput�lan si Hw�n nang dal�re` sa pagpapal�kad nang m�kina. Juan got a finger cut off in running the machine. Nap�put�lan nang m�diko ang manga t�o nang kanila ng kam�y o pa� kung kayil�ngan. When necessary, people get their hands or feet cut off by a doctor. Map�put�lan ka nang dal�r�`, pag hind� ka nag�ngat sa iyo ng pagtatrab�ho sa m�kina ng iy�n. You will get your finger cut off, if you aren't careful about the way you work that machine. Nasaky�n ko n� ang kab�yo ng bara-bar�. I have succeeded in mounting the wild horse. Nasky�n ko n� ang bangka ng it�. I have already been in this canoe. Nawal�n nang m�lay ang bab�ye sa kany� ng paghihimat�y. The woman lost consciousness in her swoon.

Similarly: b�li`, buk�s, hal�k, h�rap, l�on, l�mot, luw�t, pat�d, p�lit, s�kit, s�ra`, siy�, s�bok, s�gat, sungg�b, tag�l, tand�`, �bos.

(a) bit�w lacks accent shift: mabit�wan, cf. � 374,b.

452. Local passive with explicative pag-: Hind� n�min mapaglagar�an nang k�hoy ang kab�yo ng k�hoy na ginaw� mo. We cannot saw wood on the saw-buck you have made. Napagput�lan n�min nang kaw�yan ang b�go ng gaw� mo ng kab�yo ng k�hoy. We were able to cut bamboo on the sawbuck you have just made.

453. Special static words resembling the active; the following occur: Si Bant�g ay isa ng t�o ng makab�yan. Bantog is a patriotic man. dam� ng makahy�` the sensitive plant, Mimosa pudica.

Of irregular use are makalaw� (� 262,8), and makatuw�d (tuw�d).

(a) From a word of this kind an active with mag- is derived in: nagm�maka�wa` provoking pity (as though from maka�wa`).

(b) The abstract is like a special static word in: Ang big�s ay sya ng pinakamahalag� ng pagkab�hay nang t�o sa Filip�nas. Rice is the most important staple food in the Philippines. Cf. also pagkar�ka, � 265,9.

454. ma- forms special static words denoting that which by nature or circumstance possesses such and such, usually a quality. Maalikabok n� ang m�sa. The table is dusty already. Ma�sim ang s�ka ng it�. This wine is sour. ang p�no-ng-k�hoy na mab�ba` a low tree; isa ng mab�ba ng t�o a humble person. Ang lab�ng ay mab�baw. The trough of the manger is shallow. Mad�lang ang manga lind�l d�to. Earthquakes are rare here. Sya y isa ng gino� ng mag�lang. He is a polite gentleman. Maginh�wa ang umup� sa s�lya ng it�. This chair is comfortable to sit in. Si Mary� ay isa ng bab�ye ng map�ri. Maria is a decent woman. Maluw�ng ang b�ro ng it�. This blouse is too loose. matam�s sweet, ang matam�s sugar. Matip�d na b�ta` si Hw�n. Juan is a saving child.

The plural is made with ma- r: Ang manga t�o sa b�yan ay mahuh�say sumun�d sa kautus�n. The people of the town are all good law-abiders.

These forms are made from so many roots that the Index will be as convenient as a list.

Derivatives: �� 352,c. 353,a.b. 370. 499,a. 500,b.

(a) Note masiy�do excessive, extreme, as though from a root -siy�do (and so listed), still felt by Mr. Santiago to be from Spanish demasiado.

(b) Accent shift due to the root in masak�t.

(c) From derived words: Ang pagtay� sa bubung�n ay mapang�nib. It is dangerous to stand on the roof. So from kasal�nan (� 423), kabuluh�n (� 422).

455. ma-pag- someone given to doing so and so: Ang in� ni P�dro ay mapagbig�y sa kanya ng manga kaulul�n. Pedro's mother always gives in to his foolishness. Sya y mapagtip�d. He is very economical. So from: gaw�`, kumpis�l, simb�, siy�sat, us�sa`.

(a) From a phrase, probably: Ang t�o ng si Hw�n ay mapagp�ku-m-bab�`. That man Juan is overmodest (p�ko ng bab�` low peg?).

(b) With accent shift: Mapaghun� ang manga kab�yo ng it�, kanya hind� d�pat dalh�n sa laban�n. These horses are given to neighing and therefore should not be taken to war. So also: mapagaw�y.

456. In the same sense, but transitive in value, ma-pang-: mapangg�lat given to surprising or frightening people, mapangh�gis given to flinging things; Ang t�o ng si Hw�n ay mapanghir�m. The fellow Juan is a great borrower. mapanghiy�` given to embarrassing people. mapamuk�l given to throwing things. So from: hil�ng, mat�.

457. In similar meanings, with suffix -in:

(a) ma- S -in: So magust�hin, mas�n�rin.

(b) ma- (2) -in: Ang manga t�o y hind� maibig�n sa pagkak�s�la. People are not fond of sinning.

(c) ma- r (2) -in: matatawan�n easily made to laugh; Sya y matutulug�n. He is a sleepy-head. So also: magugulat�n.

458. The transients with k�- refer to accidental actions. The active has the forms: mak�-, mak�- R, nak�-, nak�- R, but the reduplication sometimes affects the k�- instead of the root initial. The abstract has pagk�-. The meanings are various, much like those of maka-.

459. The active sometimes expresses an inanimate object as the agent of an accidental action: Ang gunt�ng nang manggagam�t ay nak�gupit nang isa ng ug�t na malak�, kany�` namat�y ang kanya ng gin�gam�t. The physician's scissors accidentally cut a large artery, in consequence of which his patient died. Similarly, from g�sing, h�wa.

460. More frequent is a rational actor of an accidental action; as such is viewed any action the exact form of which is out of the actor's control. Si P�dro ay nak�h�wak nang k�wad na m�y elektrisid�d. Pedro got hold of a charged wire. Hind� nya kilal� ang manga kwayan� ng iy�n, kaniy� nak�p�tol sya nang sa iba ng t�wo ng kaw�yan. As he did not know those bamboo-groves, he inadvertently cut some bamboo that belonged to other people. Sundan m� sil� sa kawayan�n, sapagk�t bak� sila nak�p�p�tol nang kaw�ya ng hind� nas�s�kop nang �ti ng l�pa`. Follow them to the bamboo-grove, for they may be cutting some bamboo that is not included in our land. Hw�n, usis�in mo ng mab�ti ang hangg�han nang kawayan�n, b�go ka tumag� nang kaw�yan, sapagk�t bak� ka mak�p�tol nang kaw�ya ng hind� �tin. Juan, find out exactly the borders of the bamboo-grove before you cut any bamboo, for else you might cut some bamboo that is not ours. P�ho ng mak�p�p�tol sil� nang kaw�ya ng hind� sak�p nang l�pa`, kapag hind� mo sila pinakialam�n, sapagk�t ang hangg�han nang l�pa ng iy�n ay lubh� ng bal�-balukt�t. They will surely cut some bamboo not included in the piece of ground, if you don't look after them, for the boundary of the land is very irregular. Nak�t�sod ak� nang isa ng �has. I hit a snake with my foot. Nak�t�log si Hw�n sa b�hay na gib�-gib�`. Juan hit upon a broken-down house as a place to sleep in, was constrained by circumstances to sleep in a broken-down house. Nak�us�s� sya nang nawal� ng kwalt�. It came to her mind to inquire about the lost money. Nak�us�s� sya nang isa ng t�o ng nak��al�m nang l�him. He happened to ask a man who knew the secret. Similarly: bil�, da�n, in�m, k�in, s�lat, tagp�`.

Abstract: In the abstract the element of accident often takes the form of expressing the way something turned out. Lim�ng ang pagk�b�lang nya sa manga itl�g na it�. His count of these eggs has turned out wrong. Ang pagk�gaw� ni Hw�na sa p�yong ay masam�`. The umbrella Juana made turned out poorly. Ang pagk�gup�t sa �lo nang b�ta` ay hind� pant�y-pant�y. The boy's hair-cut isn't (hasn't turned out) even. Ang pagk�h�ti nang mans�nas ay hind� par�ho. The halving of the apple is not exact. Ang pagk��sip nya sa bugt�ng ay hindi t�ma`. His guess at the riddle is not correct. Ang pagk�lagok ny� sa itl�g ay kanya ng pinagsis�han. He repented his having (in a moment of weakness) swallowed the egg. Ang pagk�p�sok ni Hw�n nang tap�n sa b�te ay mal�lim. Juan got the cork too deep into the bottle. Ang pagk�patay sa magnan�kaw ay hind� sinady�`. The killing of the thief was not done on purpose. Ang pagk�patay sa man�k ay masam�`. This chicken has not been slaughtered in the proper manner. Ang pagk�p�tol nang p�long nang k�tiyaw ay hind� sag�d. The cock's comb is not cut off clean. Ang pagk�tahul nang �so ay sya ng inilal� nang sak�t nya sa lalam�nan. The dog's barking made the pain in its throat worse. Ang pagk�tanaw k� sa p�no-ng-k�hoy ay it� y may madidil�w na d�hon. The way I looked at that tree made it seem as if it had yellow leaves. Ang kanya ng pagk�tay�` (or: pagk�tind�g) ay dahil�n sa kanya ng pagk�g�lat. He jumped to his feet because of his surprise. Ang pagk�t�pon nang manga d�ho ng it� ay hind� mab�te. These leaves have not been well heaped up. So from: bendisiy�n, bitb�t, hamp�s, hig�`, p�lo`, t�go`, tir�, up�`.

461. The active may denote a rational actor successful, thanks to outer circumstances, in such and such an action. Nak�hampas ang b�ta ng si Hw�n nang isa ng tutub�. Little Juan succeeded in hitting a dragon-fly with his whip. Nak�h�te si Hw�n nang manga mans�nas. Juan got a chance to divide up the apples. Nak�k�kap� sya nang isa ng palak�`. He has got hold of a frog (as, in grasping for frogs in mud-holes). Nak�p�na ak� nang us�. I hit a deer with an arrow. Nak�t�pun n� ak� nang manga d�hon, nang pumar�n si T�tay. By the time Father got there, I had already had time to get some leaves heaped up. So also: �gaw, hing�`, s�li.

Abstract: Ang pagk�b�hay nang m�diko sa kay Hw�n ay is� ng malak� ng ikinatw� nang kanya ng kabab�yan. The doctor's saving of Juan's life was a cause of great gladness to his fellow-townsmen. Ang pagk�t�wag ny� sa m�diko ng nagligt�s nang b�hay nang kanya ng an�k ay dahil�n sa pagk�g�mit nya nang tel�fono. His chance of calling the doctor who saved his child's life was due to the use he was enabled to make of the telephone. Ang nag�ng pagk�gupit ny� sa makap�l na dam�t ay nangy�re dahil�n sa pagg�mit nya nang gunt�ng nang l�ta. The fact that he was able to cut the thick cloth was due to his using the tin-shears. Ang pagk�hampas ny� sa manga b�t�` ay dahil�n sa kahab�an nang kanya ng pam�lo`. He can hit the children because of the length of his stick. Ang pagk�h�rang kina Hw�n ay sya nil� ng ikinawal� nang kanila ng salap�`. Juan and his party's having been held up was what deprived them of their money. Ang pagk�h�ti nya sa tub� ay hind� mangy�y�re kung gum�mit sya nang mapur�l na g�lok. He would not have been able to slice the sugar-cane down its length (as a game or trick), if he had used a dull bolo. Pagk��sip nya kung an� ang d�pat nya ng gaw�n sa magnan�kaw na n�h�li nya, ay ginaw� nya iy�n ag�d. When he had at last hit upon the idea of what to do with the thief he had caught, he immediately carried it out. Nanghin�yang ang boo ng b�yan sa pagk�patay kay Ris�l nang manga Kast�la`. The whole country mourned over the killing of Rizal by the Spaniards. Ang �mi ng pagk�sakay sa bangk�` ay sy� ng nagligt�s sa �mi ng b�hay. Our having been able to get into the canoe is what saved our lives. Ang pagk�s�nog nang manga magnan�kaw sa b�yan ay pinarus�han nang guby�rno. The thieves' burning the town was punished by the government. Ang pagk�tayo nang isa ng b�hay-p�mahal�a ng bat� ay dahil�n sa pagpapaala�la ni Hw�n nang pang�nib sa s�nog. The fact that a stone government-building came after all to be built, was due to Juan's calling attention to the danger from fire. Anu ng pagk�tipid ni Hw�n! How saving Juan has been! So from: s�bi, t�wag.

462. The active is used of certain acts of sensation whose occurrence is out of the control of the subject: ang nak�k�kil�la, ang nak�k�kil�la one who has got knowledge of a person or thing, has come to know his habits, recognizes his nature. Ang pagk�g�lat ni Hw�na ay sy� ng ikin�taw� nang mar�mi ng nak�k�k�ta. Juana's astonishment amused many who saw it. With kil�la compare nak�ramd�m felt; with k�ta, nak�m�lay, nak�tan�w, and nak�rin�g heard.

Abstract: Mal�naw ang pagk�k�ta ko sa nangy�re. I had a clear view of what took place. So: din�g, mas�d, tan�w.

463. The direct passive has the forms m�-, m�- R, n�-, n�- R.

It may correspond regularly to the active type in � 460, and denote an object undergoing an accidental action of a rational actor.

N��so ko sa boo ng b�yan ang b�ta`, k�hit na hind� ko gust�. I was forced to go shouting after the child all over town, though I didn't like to do it. Hind� mu ba n�b�sa sa diy�riyo ang tungk�l sa s�nog? Haven't you come across the details of the fire in the paper? Bak� mo m�b�sag, Hw�na, iy� ng pinagl�laruwan m� ng kandel�ro. See that you don't break that candlestick you're playing with, Juana. N�dala ny� nang hind� sin�sady�` sa kanya ng pagal�s ang �ki ng p�yong. When he went away he inadvertently carried off my umbrella. N�gamb�la ku ang paga�ral ni Hw�n dahil�n sa �ki ng pagdat�ng na wal� sa �ras. I disturbed Juan in his studying by my untimely arrival. N�g�mit ni Hw�n ang �ki ng, sombr�ro dahil�n sa kany� ng pagmamadal� nang pagal�s. Juan used my hat in the haste of his departure. N�g�sing nya sa kanya ng pagiing�y ang manga b�ta`. What with his racket he woke up the children. N�hamp�s nang hind� sin�sady� ni P�dro ang b�buy nang kanya ng k�pit-b�hay. Pedro inadvertently hit his neighbor's hog with his whip. N��wan din ny� sa �kin ang kany� ng an�k, k�hit na it� y �yaw nya ng gaw�n. She was also forced to leave her child with me, although she disliked to do this. N�pat�y ko nang bar�l-bar�lan ang man�k. I accidentally killed the chicken with my toy-gun. K�nin mo ang mil�n, kung iyu ng gust�, o kay�` ang s�ging, kung sya mo it� ng n�p�p�le`.--N�p�p�li ko ang mil�n. Eat the banana, if you like, or the melon, if you prefer it.--I prefer the melon. N�pitas ny� ang bulakl�k nang hind� sin�sady�`. She picked the flower without intending to. N�p�tol ko nang hind� sin�sady�` ang l�bid na it�. I chanced, without intending it, to cut this string. Bak� mo m�s�ra`, Hw�n, ang pat�go sa iy� ng kw�lta nang iyu ng kapat�d. See to it, Juan, that you don't do away with your brother's money that is entrusted to you. N�us�s� ni Hw�na ang inum�t na sings�ng nang kany� ng kapat�d. Juana happened to inquire for the ring her sister had filched. So from: angk�n, b�lag, b�tas, h�bol, pat�y, p�lot.

464. The direct passive may correspond regularly to the active described in � 461, and denote an object undergoing an action which a rational actor was enabled to perform by virtue of outer circumstances.

Ang �lo ni Hw�n ay n�b�b�log nang kanya ng kalar�`. Juan's playmates are succeeding in making a fool of him (literally: in rounding his head). N�gupit ny� ang makap�l na dam�t. It turned out that he was able to cut the thick cloth. Hind� ku m��pon ang manga kar�yum na nang�s�bug sa l�pa`. I did not succeed in gathering up all the needles that were scattered over the floor. Hind� ko m�patay ang p�sa ng it�. I cannot kill this cat (i.e. its life is tough, it gets away, etc.) Kapag n�p�tol mo ang b�kal na iy�n, ik�w ay makaw�wal�`. If you can get a chance to cut through that iron, you can make your escape. N�p�tol nya ang k�hoy. He got the wood cut all right. Hind� nya m�p�tol ang le�g nang man�k. He couldn't get the chicken's neck cut through. M�p�p�tol na raw ny� ang p�no nang k�hoy na nabw�l. He says he will be in a position to cut through the tree that has fallen. ang kany� ng n�sing�l the money he was able to collect. Similarly, from: b�lot, gaw�`, h�li, k�ha, k�lam, n�kaw, pit�s, s�bi, ta�s, t�wag.

465. Similarly, the direct passive is regularly used to correspond to the active in � 462, of objects of sensation. N�kil�la ko si Hw�n do�n sa s�w�yan. I got acquainted with Juan at that dance. So from: ala�la, din�g, in�, k�ta, m�las, pans�n.

466. Other uses of the direct passive do not regularly correspond to any active, cf. � 440 f.; these have their own abstract with pagk�-.

The direct passive is used to denote an object which has accidentally got into such and such a condition; the actor is either indifferent or entirely lacking. There seems to be no abstract principle clearly separating this form from the passive with na- described in � 440; where position of the object is involved, the accidental form is preferred.

N�b�te ang kany� ng pagkat�kot. His fear reached a high point. Ang kanya ng bangk� y pat�ngo sa band� ng kalun�ran, d�tapuwat pagkara�n nang il� ng sandal�` ay n�iba ang kanya ng band�hin. His canoe was headed toward the west, but after a while his direction changed. Ang �num�nan nang b�hay ay d�pat m�lagay sa lug�r na mal�lim. The shelf for drinking-water of a house should be in a shady place. N�sakay sa tr�n ang ipinahat�d mo ng manga dalangh�ta`. The tangerines you sent have been shipped. N�t�lin ang pagpapadul�s nang b�ta ng si Hw�n sa p�tek. Juan's sliding on the mud got faster and faster (in spite of him).

Similarly from: b�gay, bal�ta`, ba�n, d�pat, do�n, hint�`, h�say, k�pit, lap�g, l�tag, ligt�s, liguw�k, l�pat, lub�g, l�lan, m�na, n�kaw, pag�tan, p�ko`, pat�y, p�tung, s�bog, ta�n, t�bon, t�go`, tal�`, tan�m, ta�n, tay�`, tir�, t�los, �nat.

Abstract: Pagk�sakay nang manga s�ko nang kam�te sa tr�n ay lum�kad it� ag�d. As soon as the bags of sweet-potatoes had been put on board the train, the latter started to move. So from: bal�ta`, g�mit, ib�, l�tag, lib�ng, sar�.

466a. This irregular passive is used also of animate, rational subjects, whose actions, then, are viewed rather as an accidental undergoing; this type is not clearly definable from that with ma- in � 441, except where both forms are used in contrast (-hig�`); the habit with regard to each root is, however, entirely fixed.

In some cases the accidental actor is imaginable: N�aky�t si P�dro sa ita�s nang l�ngit dahil�n sa ginaw� nya ng pagk�pit sa pinalip�d na l�bo. Pedro got carried up into the air owing to his grip on the loosed balloon. N�h�rang sina Hw�n sa da�-ng-Bal�wag. Juan and his company chanced to get held up on the Baliuag road. Hwag k�, Hw�n, pum�suk sa sekr�ta, sapagk�t bak� ka m�hig�` sa ihaw�n, kung ik�w ay m�h�le. Don't go as a spy, Juan, for you might get laid on the gridiron, if you got caught. Similarly: bangg�t, bar�l, bilangg�`, dist�no, h�li, ligt�s, p�li`, tangg�p, t�wag.

Processes of life: Sya y n�bing�. He got deaf. N�b�te si Hw�n sa kanya ng pagkat�kot. Juan was bettered by his fright. Si P�dro at si Mary� ay m�k�kas�l. Pedro and Maria will get married some day. So: himb�ng, l�ko, tah�mik, tin�k, t�to, w�li.

Abstract: Ang pagk�g�lat ni Hw�na sa ma�ngay na put�k nang kany�n ay sya ny� ng ikinabing�. Juana's shock at the loud report of the cannon was what made her deaf. Malak� ang kanila ng nag�ng pagk�g�lat. Their astonishment was great. Ang pagk�s�nog sa manga sund�lo sa lo�b nang b�hay ay nangy�ri d�hil sa pagk�sara nang manga bint�na`. The fact that the soldiers were burned in the house was due to the circumstance that the windows had been closed. Ang pagk�tin�k sa lalam�nan nang b�ta` ay sya ny� ng ikinamat�y. The boy's getting a fishbone into his throat was what killed him. Pagk�tinik nang ungg�` ay sya y nag�lit. When the monkey had got a spine into his foot he got angry. Ang pagk�w�le ni Hw�n sa b�hay ny Andr�s ay dahil�n sa an�k na dal�ga nit�. Juan's being spell-bound in Andres' house was due to the latter's daughter. So: gust�, kas�l, mangh�`.

Movements, especially the resultant position: Sya y n�rap�`. He fell on his face. N�riyan kam� sa iyo ng b�hay kah�pon nang um�ga, d�tapuwat hind� ka n�min dinatn�n. We were at your house yesterday morning, but we did not find you there. N�luhod sya sa kany� ng harap�n. He knelt down in front of her. N�p�pag�tan si Hw�n sa dalaw� ng dal�ga. Juan chanced to get placed between two young ladies. Sila y n��up�`. They are seated. Similarly from: �kap, al�s, b�lot, d�ne, d�to, dul�s, do�n, har�p, kubl�, kul�ng, l�kad, lugm�k, padp�d, panh�k, sak�y, s�sid, tab�, t�go`, tay�`, tir�, tungt�ng.

Abstract: Ang ikin�tahol nang manga �so ay ang pagk�dap� ni Hw�n. What made the dogs bark was Juan's falling on his face. Pagk�sakay ni Hw�n sa tr�n ay lum�kad ito ng ag�d. When Juan was on board the train, it soon started to move. So also: dul�s, kubl�, lag�y, panh�k, sil�d, tab�, tay�`.

467. The passive forms an explicit plural in which -ang- is infixed into the n�-: Tib�yan mo ang manga it�tay� mo ng k�bo sa b�kid, sapagk�t bak� iyo y mang�gib�` kung lumak�s ang h�ngin. Prop up the huts you are going to build in the fields, for otherwise they might break down when the wind gets stronger. Mang�g�gib�` ang manga b�hay na it�, sapagk�t hind� t�ma` ang pagk�tay�`. These houses will break down, because they are not built right. So from: pang�w, s�bog, talungk�`.

468. An irregular form is n�ndon beside n�-ro�n.

469. Accent shift is due to the root: Ang pagpapatah�l ni Hw�n sa kanya ng �so ay nak�t�taw�. Juan's making his dog bark is a funny sight. So �lam, t�loy.

Passive: N�abut ny� sa kany� ng paglulund�g na may t�nga ng pam�lo` ang ilaw�n, kany�` it� y nab�sag. In his climbing with the stick in hand, he accidentally reached the lamp, and so it got broken. Sya y n�bul�g. He went blind. So: g�sing, h�yag, h�li, l�pit, l�yo`, t�loy.

Abstract: Ang pagk�huli nang sus�` ay malak�. The snail was left way behind. Ang pagk�abot ny� sa b�te ay hindi mag�lang. The way he reached for the bottle was not polite. So: �lam, �yaw, g�sing, l�pit, �na.

470. From phrases: Ang pa�nan nang h�g�an ay n�b�band�-ng-kataas�n, d�tapwat d�pat m�banda-ng-ibab�`. The foot of the bed is turned toward the north, but should be turned to the south (band� ng ibab�`, band� ng kataas�n).

From derived words: Passive: N�t�tag�lid ang bangk�`. The boat has a list to one side (ta-g�lid, � 523).

(a) Passives from words with prefix ka- (� 398) are frequent. Ang b�kid ni Hw�n ay n�k�kar�tig nang kay P�dro. Juan's field borders on Pedro's. N�kas�le nya sa kanya ng paglalar�` ang kanya ng p�nsan. He took his cousin for playmate. Si Mary�no ay n�kat�lo ni Hw�n. Mariano was Juan's opponent. Si Nars�so ang l�gi ng n�k�kat�lo ni P�dro sa manga pagtat�lo ng idin�d�os linggo-lingg� sa kanila ng s�m�han. Narcisso is always Pedro's opponent in the debates which they hold every Sunday at their club. Si L�kas ang m�k�kat�lo ko. Lucas will be my opponent. n�k�kat�ngo the person one happens to be dealing with. n�ka�sap be by chance able to be conversed with.

Underlying word non-existent: N�kat�log si Hw�n sa panuno�d nang te�tro. Juan fell asleep while watching the play. Umul�n kagab� at lumam�g, kaniy�` ako n�kat�log nang mahimb�ng. Last night it rained and got cool; in consequence I fell sound asleep, got a sound sleep. Hind� ako m�kat�log. I couldn't get any sleep. Abstract: ang pagk�kat�log.

(b) Explicit plural of the preceding: Nang�k�kat�log sila ng lah�t, nang pum�sok sa b�hay ang magnan�kaw. They had all fallen asleep, when the thief came into the house. Pagpil�tan niny� ng hwag kay� ng mang�kat�log sa inyo ng pagbabant�y sa manga h�yop at iba p� ng �r� nang p�mahala�n. See to it that you don't fall asleep when on guard over the animals and other property of the government. Ngay�n ay mang�k�kat�log sil�, dahil�n sa mal�on nila ng pagpupuy�t gabi-gab�. Now they will be able to sleep, owing to their staying up late night after night.

471. Passive with pag- (cf. � 445): the reduplication affects the pag-. Hind� ko m�pag�way ang tam�s at ang �sim nang limon�da ng it�. I cannot produce a balance of sweet and sour in this lemonade. Sa kala�nan ay n�pagkil�la ni Hw�n ang kanya ng kam�l�an. Finally Juan saw where he was wrong. Hind� nya n�pagk�ro` ag�d kung an� ang g�gawin ny�. He was not able to decide at once what he was going to do. N�p�pagk�r� mo b� ang lah�t nang sin�bi ko sa iy� kah�pon? Are you able to figure out all I said to you yesterday? Hind� ko m�pagk�ro kung an� ang �big nya ng sab�hin. I simply couldn't make out what he was trying to say.

(a) Accent shift is due to the root: �yon sa s�bi nang mar�mi ay m�p�paghuli na r�w ang manga magnan�kaw. According to what people say, the thieves will soon be caught.

472. Passive with pang-: N�panag�nip niya ng n�k�ta nya ang kanya ng am�. He dreamt he saw his father.

473. mak�- D is used in prohibitions: Hwag k� ng mak�l�yas-l�yas! Don't ever run away! So from tungt�ng.

(a) with paki-: Hwag k� ng mak�pakik�in-k�in kung hind� ka in�any�han. Don't ever take a meal with people unless they invite you.

474. The instrumental passive is rare: badiy�, m�ilab�s, m�ip�sok, m�it�ro`.

475. Local passive with m�-.

N�m�masdan k� mul� sa banda ng it� nang bint�na` ang b�hay ni �li ng Mary�. I get a view of Mistress Maria's house from this side of the window. Paging�tan mo ang iyo ng kwalt� sa buls� pagluw�s mo sa Mayn�la`, at nang hwag k� ng m�nak�wan. Look carefully to the money in your purse when you go to Manila, so as not to get robbed. N�pas�kan nya sa kw�rto ang magnan�kaw. In entering the room he came upon the thief. N�put�lan ku nang tah�d ang k�tyaw. I managed to cut the game-cock's spur. N�p�put�lan ko n� nang p�long ang k�tyaw. I am succeeding in cutting off the game-cock's comb. M�p�put�lan daw ny� nang manga p�long ang manga k�tyaw nya ng pangs�bong. He will manage to cut off the combs of his pit game-cocks, he says. N�sagas�an nang tr�n ang isa ng t�o. A man got run over by the train. N�sakyan n�min ang bangk� ni Hw�n. We happened to get into Juan's canoe. Ang kam�t�ya ng m�tagpu�n nang isa ng magnan�kaw ay l�gi ng hind� mab�te. The death a robber meets is usually not good. Bak� mu m�tam�an ang �lu nang b�ta`. See that you don't hit the child's head (and disfigure him).

Similarly: bal�ta`, buk�s, damd�m, dat�ng, gust�, intind�, kam�t, kul�pol, ligt�s, m�lay, p�gil, tan�m, t�log, tump�k, t�to, wis�k.

(a) With contraction of prefix and initial: m�l�man (�lam).

(b) Accent shift lacking: n�mat�an (mat�).

(c) Extra accent shift is due to the root: Kamunt� nang m�tama�n nang kanya ng puk�l ang b�ta`. He nearly hit the child with his throw. Bak� mu m�tama�n ang b�ta`. See that you don't hit the child. So also: n�alam�n (�lam).

476. Local passive with m�-pag-: N�pagh�hinal�an nang k�pitan ang maba�t na si Hw�n. Even honest Juan falls under the mayor's suspicion. N�p�paghinal�an nil� si Kul�s sa pagkawal� nang al�has. They are capable of suspecting Nicol�s in connection with the disappearance of the jewelry. M�p�paghinal�an ka ng kasabuw�t nang manga sund�lo sa bund�k, kapag hind� ka tumah�mik sa b�hay. You will risk suspicion as having connection with the soldiers in the mountains, if you do not stay quietly in your house. Similarly: �lam, bint�ng.

(a) Extra accent shift (plural): m�-pag-alam-�n.

477. Local passive with m�-pang-; the only example lacks accent shift: n�-pang-agin�ldo-han.

478. Local passive with m�- from underlying word with ka- (cf. � 398): n�kagal�tan, m�katuwa�n.

(a) with pagka-, corresponding to an active with magka- (� 405): m�pagkalipumpun�n (lipump�n).

479. Special static words with mak�- are formed from numerals in the sense of so many times: mak��nim six times; mak�law� twice; mak�lim� five times; mak�siy�m nine times. So: mak�il�n several times.

From phrases, the higher numbers: mak�sa-m-p�` ten times.

With irregularities: mak�itl�, mak�yitl� three times; mak��pat, mak��pat four times.

Reduplicated: mak�l�l�bo a thousand times.

4. The prefix pa-.

480. The general sense of the prefix pa- is to denote something caused or ordered to undergo such and such an action. With accent p�- an increase of the action is expressed.

481. The root with prefix pa- denotes an object or person ordered, caused, or allowed to undergo such and such an action. The person caused to undergo may be the same as the person ordering or allowing.

Ang paaky�t ni Hw�na na p�no nang kak�w ay ang n�sa s�lok nang bak�ran. The cocoa-tree Juana ordered climbed is the one in the corner of the yard. Ang panyo ng it� ay paala�la sa �kin niy �li ng Mary� sa an�k nya ng dal�ga. This handkerchief is a souvenir to me from Aunt Maria which she sent by her daughter. Inihand� nang �mi ng kas�ra ang ats�ra ng pap�ya �pang siya n�mi ng mag�ng pa�yap. Our landlady served some pickled papaws for us to use as condiment. Pabal�k ni Hw�n ang l�bru ng it�. Juan sends this book back. It� ang pah�ti` sa �kin ni P�dro. This is what Pedro ordered me to deal out. Ang manga tub� ng it� ay pap�tol sa �kin ni P�dro. Pedro ordered me to cut this sugar-cane. Ang t�o ng it� ang pasak�y ni Hw�n sa karum�ta ko. This is the man whom Juan asked me to take into my carriage. Ang bin�sa ni Hw� ng kautus�n ay pat�wag nang k�ra. The ordinance Juan read was given out for proclamation by the priest. Ang b�hay na yt� y patay� ni Hw�n. Juan had this house built. Pat�pon ni Hw�n sa �kin ang manga ny�g na it�. Juan ordered me to gather up these cocoanuts. Ang pauw� ni Hw�n sa kanya ng in� ay isa ng ma�nam na sings�ng. What Juan sent home to his mother was a beautiful ring.

As conjunctive attribute the word with pa- may express manner: ang da� ng pabal�k sa Bal�wag the road back to Baliuag. Pap�sok sya ng lum�l�kad sa gitn� nang b�hay. He was going farther in toward the inside of the house. Pasak�y sya ng lumuks� sa kab�yo. He jumped on the horse as if mounting to ride. Nang mah�lug ang b�ta` sa k�hoy, ay paup� sya ng lumagp�k sa l�pa`. When the boy fell from the tree, he landed on the ground in a sitting position. Paur�ng sya ng lum�kad. He went backwards.

With movements pa-, reflexive, is often weakened to a mere indication of direction: Paaky�t sa p�n� nang k�hoy ang ungg�` nang sya y ab�tan nang l�bo. The monkey was just climbing the tree, when he was overtaken by the wolf. Pabal�k si Hw�n. Juan is going back. Pat�ngo si Hw�n sa b�ya-ng-Bal�wag. Juan was headed for the town of Baliuag.

Similarly: �lam, bigl�`, bul�ng, gaw�`, h�rang, k�lat, l�gi`, lal�`, punt�, sig�w, t�go`, takb�, talungk�`, tay�`, t�loy.

(a) From a derived word: paita�s (ita�s, � 373).

(b) The peculiar meaning is weakened in some words: ang pa�ga a kind of rice which matures early, ang pakin�bang profit, advantage, ang palab�s a theatrical performance, ang pal�go` a bath, ang pamag�t an appellation, a nickname. So from: bang�`, b�sa, bay�, big�t, da�n, d�sa, h�yag, hint�lot, l�kad, l�gid, l�git, s�kit, tal�m.

(c) With retraction of accent and contraction: p�no (an�).

(d) Irregular: Ang pagk�paroon k� sa b�sbol ay paub�ya` nang �ki ng gur�`. My going to the baseball game was by permission of my teacher (b�ya`).

482. pa- (1) is made from barytone roots when they express manner, or, more especially, direction: Ang bangk�` ay hind� paay�n sa �log. The boat is not headed with the stream. Pahag�s nya ng iniyab�t sa �kin ang akl�t. He handed me the book by tossing it. In�wan nya ng pahar�ng sa da�n ang karit�n. He left the wagon blocking the road. Pahar�ng nya ng inih�gis sa �log ang p�no-ng-s�ging. He threw the banana tree crosswise into the river. Ang paglak� nang l�mat nang pingg�n ay pahat�`. The increase in the crack of the dish is going towards halving it. Ang b�nga ng it� y pahat�` kung mapir�so pagkahin�g. This fruit goes into halves when it breaks on ripening. Similarly: l�him, p�tol.

(a) The accent shift is due to the root and the value of the formation is as in � 481, in: Ang paab�t mo ng s�lat ay tinangg�p ko. I have received the letter you sent to me. Si Hw�n ay isa ng b�ta ng pabay�`. Juan is a neglectful boy.

(b) The accent shift is like that of a root word in: Palig� na ang manga b�ta`. The children are bathed now (pa-l�go`).

483. pa- r, as explicit plural: see �bot.

484. pa- D. The action is repeated at short intervals; the reflexive value is frequent. Sya y lum�l�kad na pahint�-hint�`. He goes on, stopping every little while. Pamal�-mal�` ang kanya ng pagb�lang. His count contains repeated errors. Alam ny� ang manga pas�kot-s�kot sa b�ya-ng-Bal�wag. He knows all the ins and outs of the district of Baliuag. So from: iy�k, l�gid, m�nsan, pasiy�l, t�log.

(a) Accent shift is due to the root: Pat�log-t�log at pagis�ng-gis�ng siy�. He sleeps and wakes by fits and starts. Pataw�-taw� at paiy�k-iy�k siy�. She giggles at one moment and weeps the next.

485. pa-pa- has durative-iterative meaning: Papaal�s sya nang ak� y dumat�ng. He was just going away when I arrived. Papaur�ng sya ng lum�l�kad. He was going backwards. So from lab�s.

(a) pap�no (an�) seems equivalent to p�no (� 481,c).

486. As appears in the example of palig�` above (� 482,b), the forms with pa- are apparently capable of all the modifications that are found in simple roots: Thus:

(a) with prefix pang- (� 347): Pangpak�in sa b�ta` ang g�tas na it�. This milk is for the children's food. Pangpak�in sa pana�hin ang pinatay k� ng t�pa. The sheep I have slaughtered is for serving to the guests. Pangpatuk� sa man�k ang p�lay na it�. These rice-grains are to be given to the chickens to pick (tuk�` the beak of a fowl). So from: dik�t, l�go`.

(b) with ka- R (� 400): Kap�pap�tol ko pa l�mang nang manga k�hoy na it�. I have just had this firewood cut.

(c) with ka-pag- R (� 400,a): Kapagp�pap�tol ko l�mang nang si�t kay Hw�n. I have just ordered Juan to cut up the bamboo spines.

(2) Normal transients, abstracts, and special static words.

487. The root with pa- is sometimes used as a transient contingent punctual, with the value of a reflexive passive; more commonly the form with ma-pa- (� 506) fulfils this function. There are three types:

(a) Genuine reflexive passive: Pa�but ka sa mang� nags�sih�bul sa iy�. Let yourself be overtaken by your pursuers. Paakyat k� kay Hw�n sa ita�s nang k�hoy. Ask Juan to take you up into the tree. Tw� ng pap�suk ak� sa s�ne sa �ki ng k�yang, ay nas�sir�an ang m�kina. Every time I ask my oldest brother to take me to the moving-picture show, something goes wrong with the machine. So: kas�l, lig�w.

(b) Reflexive of interest: one who orders that something undergo such and such an action for him: Paaky�t ka kay Hw�n nang isa ng b�nga-ng-ny�g. Ask Juan to climb for a cocoanut for you.

(c) Reflexive of motion; the pa- has faded value; thus are used the local equivalents of the demonstrative pronouns and a few other words. Par�ni ka. Come here. Tuw� ng aku y paro�n sa kanya ng b�hay ay hind� ku sya in�ab�tan. Every time I go to his house, I fail to find him in.

(d) If the pa- is accented, the action is more intense: P��ga ka nang pagpar�to. Be very early in your coming here.

(e) A contingent durative is formed with pa- R. (a) Pa�akyat ak� kay Hw�n sa ita�s nang k�hoy. I shall ask Juan to take me up into the tree with him. Pap�p�sok ak� sa s�ne sa �ki ng k�yang. I shall ask my brother to take me to the moving-picture show. (b) Pa�akyat ak� kay Hw�n nang isa ng b�nga-ng-ny�g. I shall ask Juan to climb for a cocoanut for me. Pap�p�tol ak� nang buh�k kay Hw�n. I shall ask Juan to cut my hair.

488. For the reflexive of motion (� 487,c) a set of transients and an abstract are formed with -um- and pag-. These also are equivalent to the forms with ma-pa- (� 506).

(a) Regularly from the four roots serving as locals of the demonstrative pronouns. Pumar�ni ka! Come here! Pumar�ne ka sa �ki ng tab�. Come close here to my side.

Mad�lang ang pagpar�to nang manga b�lang. Locusts come here but rarely. P�ho ako ng p�par�to sa alas�ngko. I will surely come here at five o'clock.

P�pariy�n s�na kam�, d�tapuwat nagkaro�n kam� nang malak� ng kaabalah�n, kany� hind� kami n�tuloy. We were coming to you, but we had so much trouble that we did not carry out our intention.

Pagparo�n ko ay s�sab�hin ko sa kany� ang ibinal�t� mo. When I get there I shall tell him what you have told me. Kit� ng dalaw� ay p�paron sa tey�tro. We two are going to the theatre.

(b) Occasionally from lo�b: pumalo�b.

(c) Also the abstracts pagpal�go`, pagpan�og; these form the transient with ma- from the root (� 441); and pagpat�ngo, which forms its transient with -um- from the root.

(d) Plurals: magsipal�go`, nags�sipan�og.

489. mag-pa-, pag-pa-pa-. Active with mag- from the root with pa- denotes one who causes, orders, or allows such and such an action to be performed on something else or (reflexively) on himself.

Nagpa�yap ang �mi ng kas�ra. Our landlady served a relish. Si Hw�n ay nagpab�ya` sa kanya ng tungk�lin. Juan grew lax about his duties. Nagpaby�y si Hw�n nang isd�` sa kanya ng pal�isd�an. Juan had some fish put into his fishpond. Ang m�diko ang nagpaginh�wa sa m�y sak�t. The doctor made the patient feel comfortable. Nagpagup�t ak� sa barb�ro. I had the barber cut my hair. Ang pagpapagup�t ko sa barb�ro ng si Hw�n ay hind� ko lubh� ng gust�. I don't like very much to have my hair cut by barber Juan. Par�ti ang manga pagpapah�rang ni Andr�s sa manga t�o ng nagl�lak�d. Andr�s often orders travellers to be held up. Si P�dro ay nagpah�te sa �kin nang p�lay. Pedro had rice dealt out to me. Ang k�tiw�la y sy� ng nagpah�t� nang p�lay sa manga kasam�. It was the agent who ordered rice distributed to the field-workers. Ang pagpapah�te nang k�tiw�la sa manga lariy� sa manga magkak�pit-b�hay ay hind� iniy�tos nang pangino�n nya ng si Hw�n. The agent's having bricks distributed among the neighbors was not in accordance with the orders of his master Juan. Sya y nagpah�kaw sa kanya ng al�la`. She had her maid put her earrings on her. (h�kaw an earring). Si P�dro ay nagp�pahing�. Pedro is taking a rest (literally: allowing himself to breathe). Ang in� y nagpahub�d (or: nagpahub�d nang dam�t) sa kanya ng an�k. The mother ordered her daughter to undress her. Sya y nagpak�in nang g�lay sa manga pana�hin. She served vegetables to the guests. Sya y nagp�pakas�ra. She keeps a boarding-house. Sya y nagp�palab�s nang lam�k. He is driving out the gnats. Nagp�palab�s nang tey�tro ang s�m�ha-ng-�pera. The opera company is producing a play. Nagpal�go si Hw�n nang kab�yo. Juan bathed some of the horses. ang pagpapal�go` the bathing something or someone. Nagpap�tol si Hw�n nang lab�ng. Juan had some bamboo shoots cut. Nagp�pap�tol kam� nang k�hoy. We are having some wood cut. Ang pagpapap�tol nya sa Ints�k nang buh�k ay hind� sinun�d nit�. When he ordered the Chinaman to cut his queue, the latter did not obey. Ang pagpapasak�y sa tr�n ni Hw�n nang manga kam�tis ay hind� naut�s b�go lum�kad ang tr�n. Juan had not finished having his tomatoes loaded on the train, when the train started. Si Hw�na ay nagpas�kit nang mar�mi ng manglil�gaw sa kany�. Juana caused grief to many who wooed her. Si Hw�na ay nagpasukl�y sa kanya ng al�la`. Juana ordered her maid to comb her hair for her. Ang pagpapasund� nya sa �kin sa al�la` ay ikinag�lit ko. His ordering me to fetch the servant made me angry. Sya y nagp�patal�m nang isa ng g�lok. He is sharpening a bolo. Nagpat�wag ak� nang is� ng kasam�. I had a workman called. Ang pagpapat�wag ko sa manga al�la ay hind� sinun�d nang b�ta ng si Hw�n. Little Juan did not obey my order to him to call some servants. Ang pagpapat�wag nang k�ra sa l�yi ay hindi n�tuluy, sapagk�t binat� nang manga t�o ang magtataw�g. The priest's order that the law be proclaimed was not carried out, for the crier was stoned by the people. Nagpatay� sya nang isa ng k�bo. He had a hut built. Ang pagpapatay� ni Hw�n nang isa ng k�bo ay hind� nat�pus b�go sya n�t�wag sa pagsusund�lo. The hut Juan was having built was not finished before he was called to military service. Nagpatip�d sya sa manga kasam� nang kanila ng pagk�in. He had his workers be sparing with their food. Nagpat�pon si Hw�n nang k�hoy sa kanya ng manga kasam�. Juan ordered his workmen to gather wood. Ang pagpapat�pon ni Hw�n sa manga kalab�w ay hind� sinun�d nang kanya ng k�tiw�la`. Juan's order that the carabao be gathered together was not obeyed by his overseer. Sya y nagpatoto� sa �sap ni Mary� at ni Hw�na. She gave testimony in the lawsuit between Maria and Juana. Si Hw�na ay naparo�n sa �kin at siy� ng nagpatoto� na ik�w ay dumal� sa isa ng sabung�n. Juana came to me and assured me that you had attended a cock-fight. Ang pagpapatoto� ny� ay hind� tinangg�p nang huk�m. The judge did not accept his testimony. Sya y nagpaup�` nang il� ng eskw�la. He had a few of the pupils sit down. Ang pagpapaup� nang ma�stro sa manga eskw�la ay hind� nila sinun�d ag�d. The teacher's order to the pupils to sit down was not promptly obeyed. Magpa�tang ka nang kwalt� sa manga mahih�rap. Lend money to the poor. Nagpauw� ba si Hw�n nang s�lya sa kanya ng in�?--Hind�`. Ang kanya ipinauw�` ay isa ng sings�ng. Did Juan send a chair home to his mother?--No, he sent home a ring.

Similarly: �bot, ala�la, bal�k, ba�n, dal�, dul�s, d�nong, d�sa, gal�ng, g�lit, gand�, gaw�`, h�yag, h�rap, h�li, �sip, iy�k, kil�la, kin�bang, kint�b, k�ta, kul�`, kumpis�l, lag�y, l�kad, lar�`, l�yas, l�yaw, lim�s, l�pas, l�to`, mag�t, m�sa, p�sok, sigl�, singk�w, s�sid, tah�l, tugt�g, t�log, t�los, ul�n.

(a) Plural with magsi- (� 386); nags�sipagpalim�s.

(b) From a derived word: Huwag kay� ng magpaum�ga sa inyo ng pagsas�lit�an. Don't let yourselves be overtaken by the morning in your conversation (um�ga, � 358).

(c) Root with accent shift: Sya y nagpaab�t nang s�lat sa �kin. He had a letter handed to me.

(d) The pa- is accented, expressing extreme degree of action; from shifted root: Nagp�una si Hw�n sa lakar�n. Juan managed to get himself into the very first place in the walking-party. So from: �wan.

(e) Doubled root, shifted: Nagp�una-un� si Hw�n sa lakar�n nang manga magkakas�ma. Juan got himself too far ahead in the boys' walking-party.

(f) Special static word (of the kind in � 358,d): ang magpapataw�g a town-crier.

490. pa- (1) -in, p-in-a. The direct passive from words with pa- denotes the person ordered to do so and so, the thing caused to be so and so.

Padal�ngin mo ang iyo ng pagpar�to. Make your coming here infrequent. Pagka pinap�tol ka ny� nang k�hoy ay sumun�d ka ng ag�d. When he orders you to cut wood, do you obey at once. Pinap�p�tol n�min nang tub� si P�dro. We are having Pedro cut some sugar-cane. Paput�lin mo si Hw�n nang k�gon. Have Juan cut the cugon-weeds. Pap�put�lin n�min kay� nang yant�k. We shall ask you to cut some rattan. Pinatah�l ni Hw�n ang kanya ng �so. Juan made his dog bark. Pinatal�m nya it�. He made this sharp. Pinatay� ni Hw�n sa kanya ng p�lad ang kapat�d nya ng mali�t na si Mary�no. Juan stood his little brother Mariano up on his open hand. Hind� ako pinat�log nang pagtah�l nang �so. The barking of the dog kept me from sleeping. Patul�gin mo ang b�ta`. Put the child to sleep. Pinaup� nya ang manga eskw�la. He had the pupils sit down. Pinaup� ko ang �ki ng bis�ta. I asked my visitors to be seated.

Similarly: al�s, bal�k, bil�, b�tas, d�to, hint�`, in�m, k�in, k�pit, l�kad, l�yas, l�pad, p�sok, tah�n, takb�, t�wad, t�lin, t�loy, unt�`, y�man.

(a) With accented p�-: P�busugin m� ang manga h�yop. Feed the animals till they have had enough. P�hampas�n mo siy�. Whip him harder. Hwag m� ng p�puti�n ang pint� nang b�hay. Don't paint the house too white.

(b) p�- with accent shift: P�dalangin m� ang iyo ng pagpar�to. Come here very rarely.

491. pa-pag- (1) -in, p-in-a-pag-. The direct passive has pag- before the root when it corresponds to simple actives with characteristic mag- (� 351). M�p�pah�mak l�mang ang b�ta ng ito, kapag hind� n�tin pinapag�ral nang sap�t. This boy will turn out a mere good-for-nothing, if we do not make him study enough. Pinapaghub�d nang in� ang kanya ng manga an�k. The mother ordered her children to undress. Pinapagp�tol n�min nang s�ging sina Hw�n. We asked Juan and his people to cut bananas. Papagput�lin mo si Hw�n nang buh�k. Tell Juan to get a hair-cut. Papagp�put�lin nila kam� nang kanila ng manga kaw�yan. They will order us to cut all their bamboo. Pinapagsukl�y ni Hw�na ang kanya ng al�la`. Juana told her maid to comb her (the maid's) hair.

Similarly, from: b�his, hint�`, trab�ho.

(a) From a derived word: Sya y pinapagkalatimb�`. He was forced to do the well-bucket exercise (kalatimb�`, � 519).

(b) With extra accent shift: papagt�tuluy�n (t�loy).

492. With pang-: Par�ti ng pinapangh�h�rang ni Andr�s ang kanya ng manga kamp�n. Andr�s often orders his companions to commit highway robberies. Papanghiram�n mo si P�dro nang l�bid. Have Pedro go and borrow some rope. Papamut�lin mo nang dam� si P�dro. Have Pedro cut grass. Papam�mut�lin sil� ni Hw�n nang dam�. Juan will order them to cut grass.

493. pa-pag-pa- (1) -in, p-in-a-pag-pa-. With both pag- and pa- preceding the root the direct passive with pa- denotes someone caused to cause something: Pinapagpatoto� nang tagapagtangg�l ni Andr�s ang t�o ng si Mariy�no na sy� ng nak�k�ta sa nangy�re. Andr�s' lawyer called as a witness the man Mariano, who had seen the occurrence (cf. magpatoto�, � 489).

494. i-pa-, i-p-in-a-. The instrumental passive with pa- denotes the object ordered, caused, or allowed to undergo such and such an action.

Ipina�lam ko sa kany� ang manga b�ta`. I made known to him the departure of the children with me. Ipinaal�s nila ang h�rang nang da�n. They ordered the obstruction of the road to be removed. Ang ipinadala m� ng s�lat ay tinangg�p ku n�. I have received the letter you sent me. Ang sap�tos na may lap�d na suw�las na yit� ay sy� ng ipinag�g�mit na pangtay�` sa b�ta`. This flat-soled shoe is given children to be used in learning to stand up. Ang may�ma ng taga iba ng b�yan na p�par�to ay ipinah�rang nang p�no nang tulis�n. The rich stranger who was going to come here was held up by order of the chief of the bandits. Ipinah�t� sa �kin ni P�dro ang mans�nas. Pedro ordered me to divide the apples. It� y ipinah�te ni P�dro par� sa �kin. This was ordered by Pedro to be dealt out to me as my share. Isinak�y sa tr�n ang ipinahat�d mo ng manga dalangh�ta`. The tangerines you shipped were put on board the train. Ipina�sip nya sa manga eskw�la ang f�tsa nang paga�way nang manga R�so at Hapun�s sa Port-�rtur. He asked his pupils to think of the date of the fighting between the Russians and the Japanese at Port Arthur. Ipak�ta mo ang d�la` sa manggagam�t. Show the doctor your tongue. Ipinap�p�tol ni Hw�n ang manga k�hoy sa kanya ng bak�ran. Juan is having the trees in his yard cut down. Ipap�p�tol ko ang mangg�s nang �ki ng b�ro`. I am going to have the sleeves of my blouse cut off. Ipap�tol mo, Hw�n, ang iyo ng kuk�. Have your fingernails cut, Juan. Ang ipinasak�y ni T�tay na manga s�ha` sa tr�n ay nangab�lok sa da�n. The grape-fruit Father sent by train got spoiled on the way. Ipinasund� ko kay Hw�n ang m�diko. I told Juan to fetch the doctor. Ipinat�wag ko sa al�la` si Hw�n. I had Juan called by a servant. Ipinatay� ni Hw�n ang b�hay na it�. Juan had this house built. Ipinatip�d nya sa b�t� ang pagk�in nang lans�nes. He made the child eat sparingly of the lansones. Ipinat�pon ni Hw�n sa kanya ng k�tiw�la` ang manga kalab�w. Juan had his agent gather the carabao. Ipinat�luy nya ang pagkant�, k�hit na ma�ngay ang mang� nak�kin�g. He went on with his singing although the audience was noisy.

So: �hon, bal�k, ba�n, bilangg�`, b�tay, d�pit, d�sa, gam�t, gaw�`, gup�t, h�bol, h�yag, hint�`, hint�lot, kas�l, kil�la, l�kad, lib�ng, m�na, pat�y, s�kit, t�pon, uw�`.

(a) Different in meaning is the corresponding form from d�to; it is the primary instrumental passive corresponding to pumar�to, etc. (� 488): Ang pags�kop niy� nang t�u ng makasal�nan ay sya ny� ng ipinar�to. His saving of sinful man is what he came here for.

(b) Accent shift is due to the root: Ipaal�m ka sa kany� ang �ki ng pat�tung�han. Let him know where I am going. Ipinaalam ny� sa �kin ang kanya ng nil�lo�b. He made his intentions known to me. Ipinatul�y ni P�dro ang pagpapatay� nang b�hay. Pedro had them go on with the construction of the house. Similarly: �bot.

(c) With pag- (cf. � 491): ipapag�ral.

(d) With pa- prefixed to the root, the instrumental passive with pa- denotes that ordered to be caused. The only example has radical accent shift: Ipinapatul�y ni Hw�n sa kanya ng k�tiw�la` ang pagtatan�m nang manga kasam�. Juan had his agent order the field-workers to go on with the planting.

495. i-pag-pa-, i-p-in-ag-pa-. When the relation of the object ordered to undergo an action is explicitly that of a thing given forth (� 368), a kind of double instrumental passive is made by prefixing pag- to the pa- (cf. the explicit use of pag- in primary passives, �� 369. 375): Ipinagpah�te` sa �kin ni P�dro ang p�lay. The rice was ordered by Pedro to be dealt out to me. Ang kw�lta ng n�pangagin�ldohan ni Hw�n ay sya ny� ng ipinagpasak�y sa tiyob�bo sa kanya ng kapat�d na mali�t. Juan used his Christmas money to treat his little brother to a ride on the merry-go-round. Ang kautus�n ay ipinagp�pat�wag nang k�ra. The law is being called out by order of the priest.

(a) With additional pa- (as in � 494,d): ipinagpapadal�.

496. i-paki-pa-, i-p-in-aki-pa-. Before a word with pa- the instrumental passive with paki- denotes the thing asked (as a favor) to be caused to undergo such and such an action. Hwag m� ng ipakipap�tol ang p�no-ng-k�hoy, d�tapuwat pakiput�lin mo na m�smo. Don't ask someone else to cut down the tree for me, but cut it down for me yourself. Ipak�kipap�tol ni Hw�n sa iny� ang manga tinib�n sa kanya ng bak�ran. Juan will ask you to have the banana-stumps in his yard cut down. Ipinakipap�tol nya kay Hw�n ang manga dam� sa bak�ran. He asked Juan to have the grass cut in his yard.

(a) The thing asked (as a favor) to be caused to do so and so: Ipinakipak�in l�mang niya ang kanya ng an�k h�bang sya y wal�`. She asked someone else to feed her child while she was away. Ipinak�kipas�so l�mang nya kay Mary� ang kanya ng an�k, sapagk�t wal� sya ng g�tas. She is asking Maria to nurse her child for her, because she has no milk.

497. pa- (1) -an, p-in-a- (1) -an. The local passive with pa- denotes that caused to undergo an action as local object.

Paal�man mo sa kany� kung sa�n ka p�paron. Let him know where you are going. Pinaasuh�n ni P�dro ang manga p�no-ng-mangg�. Pedro smoked (i.e. warmed, so as to speed flowering) the mango trees. Pinabay�an ni Hw�n ang kanya ng manga tungk�lin. Juan neglected his duties. Pabay�an mo sy�. Leave him alone. Ang pagpat�y sa manga magnan�kaw ay hind� pinar�rus�han nang huk�m. The judge does not punish one for killing robbers. Pinahat�an ak� ni P�dro nang p�lay sa k�tiw�la`. Pedro had the agent give me my share of rice. Pinahubar�n nang in� ang manga b�ta`. The mother had her children undressed. Pakingg�n naw� niny� ang �ki ng pagt�wag. Pray give hearing to my call. Pinal�lig�an nang pag�ng ang �log. The turtle bathed in the river. Pinal�lig�an nang bab�ye ang b�ta`. The woman was bathing the child. Hwag m� ng pamal�yan sa mar�mi na ik�w ay mar�mi ng kayam�nan sa b�hay, �pang hwag k� ng nak�wan. Don't let people know that you have many valuables in your house, lest you be robbed. Pinana�gan nya ang b�hay. He went down from the house. Pinaput�lan ni Hw�n nang ta�nga ang kanya ng manga bi�k, �pang hwag m�angkin nang iba ng t�o. Juan had the ears of his little pigs cut, so that they might not be inadvertently taken by anyone else. Pinap�put�lan ni Hw�n nang bunt�t ang lah�t nang kanya ng manga man�k. Juan has all his chickens' tails clipped (for identification). Paput�lan mo nang kaunti` ang mah�b� mo ng buh�k. Have your long hair cut a little. Pap�put�lan ko nang bunt�t ang manga man�k na b�go ng bil�. I shall have the tails clipped of the chickens I have just bought. Ang bangka ng it� ay pinasaky�n ko kay Hw�n. I allowed Juan to ride in this canoe. Pinatun�yan sa �kin ni Hw�n na ik�w ay nags�sug�l. Juan proved to me that you are gambling. Ano ng band� ang kanil� ng pinat�tung�han? What direction are they headed for?

So also: bendisiy�n, dal�, hint�lot, h�rap, do�n, kin�bang, mag�t, m�na, panh�k, s�kit, t�bon, tig�s, wal�`.

(a) Accent shift, due to the root: pabaya�n, equivalent, however, to pabay�an.

(b) p�-: P�ag�han mo ang pags�long. Get away very early. P�in�man mo ang s�lat. Write very neatly. P�itiman m� ang k�lay nang t�big. Make the color of the water very black. Hwag m� ng p�putian ang pint� nang b�hay. Don't put too much white into the paint for the house.

(c) pa- also prefixed to the root: Pinapahat�an ak� ni P�dro nang p�lay sa k�tiw�la`. Pedro told the agent to have me given my share of rice. Pinapahat�an ni P�dro nang p�lay ang manga kasam�. Pedro ordered that the laborers be given their share of rice.

498. Special static words are formed with p�- and -an to denote place or plurality of habitual causative action; barytone roots have accent shift of two syllables, sometimes optionally of one syllable:

Ang mali�t na s�pa ng it� ay sya ng p�biy�yan ni Alf�nso nang malili�t na isd� ng n�h�h�li nya sa �log. This little pool is where Andr�s turns loose the little fish he catches in the river. Ang p�lang�yan nang manga p�to ni Hw�n ay mal�lim. Juan's duck-pond is deep. Ang kanila ng p�tag�lan nang pags�sid ay ginaw� nila sa Sib�l. Their diving-contest took place at Sibol.

ang p�rusah�n penitentiary; hell. ang p�ligu�n bathroom, bathtub.

So also: p�kumpis�lan, p�aral�n, p�hayag�n p�hay�gan, p�mahala�n p�mahal�an.

(a) Derived from these a transient and abstract in mag-: ang pagpap�tag�lan a contesting for endurance.

(3) Transients and abstracts with pa- and ka-.

499. mag-pa-ka-, pag-pa-pa-ka-. The active with mag-pa- (� 489) from words with ka- expresses a reflexive actor: Ang pagpapakah�rap sa paga�ral ay m�y ganti ng p�la`. Exerting oneself at studies has its reward. Nagpakamat�y si L�kas. Lucas committed suicide. Magp�pakamat�y si L�kas. Lucas will commit suicide. ang pagpapakamat�y the act of suicide. So also from: wal�`.

(a) From forms with ma-, in more intensive sense than mag- alone (� 352,c): Ang pagpapakamar�nong serious effort at learning things.

With irregularities of accent, as in � 353,a.b.: Sya y nagpakam�puri. He praised himself very much. Sya y nagpakamayab�ng. He boasted much.

500. pa-ka- (1) -in, p-in-a-ka-. The direct passive with pa-ka- denotes something caused to be too much so and so: Hwag m� ng pakalal�min ang gawi ng h�kay. Don't make the hole you are to dig too deep. Hwag m� ng pakal�lal�min ang h�huk�in mo ng bal�n. Don't make the well you are going to dig too deep. Pinakal�lim ni Hw�n ang h�kay. Juan made the ditch too deep.

(a) The form with p-in-a-ka- occurs as special static word: pinakamah�l most expensive, dearest; pinakam�ra cheapest.

(b) More commonly from words with ma- (� 454): Si Ris�l ay sy� ng naging pinakamar�nong na t�o sa kapulua-ng-Filip�nas. Rizal was the most learned man in the Philippines. pinakamalak�s strongest; pinakamal�nis cleanest. So from: b�ti, h�ba`, halag�, h�say, k�nis.

501. i-k�-pa-, i-k-in-�-pa-. The instrumental passive with i-k�- (� 417) from words with pa- expresses the thing or circumstance causing someone to be made to do so and so. Ikin�paal�s sa kany� sa b�hay ni Hw�n ang kanya ng pangungum�t. His petty thievery caused him to be ordered to leave Juan's house, to be dismissed from Juan's house. Ikin�p�paal�s nila sa kany� ang kanya ng pinaggagaw� ng katampalas�nan sa manga h�yop. His constant cruelty to the animals is forcing them to dismiss him. Ang kaibig�n nya ng m�t�to ay sya ny� ng ikin�paroon sa Esp�nya. His desire to get an education is what made him go to Spain. Bak� mo ik�pah�mak ang iyo ng pagparo�n. I am afraid your going there may cause you to be unfortunate. Ik�p�pah�mak nya ang kanya ng pagsusund�lo. His military service will cause him to fall into bad ways.

(a) With pag- either before or after the k�- a voluntary actor is implied who is caused to make someone or something do or be so and so. Ang ipinagk�pasak�y ni Hw�n sa kanya ng m�y sakit na kapat�d sa tr�n sa lug�r nang sa karum�ta ay ang katul�nan nang tr�n. What made Juan have his brother ride on the train rather than in a carriage was the speed of the train. Nagpa�sip sya sa kanya ng manga eskw�la nang manga para� ng ik�pagp�palak� nil� sa kanila ng akl�tan. He had his students think of means that would help them to make their library (get) larger.

502. pa-ka- (1) -an. Local passive with pa- (� 497) from a word with ka- (� 398): pinakawal�n was allowed to go free.

503. ka-pa- (1) -an. Local passive with ka- (� 419) from a word with pa- (� 481): kap�patung�han the place one will be headed for.

(a) Static words with ka-pa- -an are forms with ka- -an from words with pa-:

With S (� 421): Si Hw�n ang kap�tag�lan ni Mary�no sa pags�sid sa t�big. Juan contends with Mariano in staying under water as long as possible.

With S (1), (� 423); accent irregularly placed: Ang b�ta ng si P�dro ang sya ng k�pakit�an ni Mary� nang kany� ng larw�n. Little Pedro is the child to whom Maria showed her toys and who showed her his.

With (2), (� 422): Ang kapabaya�n nya sa manga tungk�lin ay sy� ng malak� nya ng kapint�san. His neglectfulness of his duties is his great fault.

504. maka-pa-. With maka- in the usual meanings (� 433 ff.) a few transients are made from words pa-. Nakapahing� sa l�lim ang manga kalab�w. The carabao rested in the shade (irrational actor). Bay�an mo ng makapahing� ang manga dal� mo ng kalab�w b�gu ka bumal�k sa b�kid. Let the carabao that brought you rest before you go back to the country. Makap�pahinga n� ang manga h�yop b�go sya dumat�ng. The carabao will have rested before he arrives. So from: do�n, l�go`.

505. Commoner is maka-pag-pa- (corresponding to mag-pa-); the abstract has pagkapa-. Nakapagpap�tol na ak� nang k�hoy na g�gam�tin ko sa bo� ng tagul�n. I have already had wood cut for the entire rainy season. Si L�lay ay nak�kapagpap�tol nang k�hoy sa al�l� ni K�ka`. Lilay has permission to order Kika's servant to cut the wood. Hind� ako makapagpap�tol nang tub� kay Hw�n, sapagk�t mar�mi sya ng trab�ho sa ib�. I cannot have Juan cut sugar-cane, because he has already too much work to do for other people. Mak�kapagpap�tol ak� nang lab�ng, kung iy� ng gust�. I can have some bamboo-shoots cut, if you wish.

So from: bil�, k�nis, t�pon.

506. The passive with ma- from words with pa- varies in meaning, owing chiefly to the various values of words with pa-.

(a) Genuine passive: Hind� nya napahin�g ang manga s�ging. He did not succeed in getting the bananas to ripen. Mapah�hiram mo ba ak� nang lima ng p�so ng gint�? Can you let me borrow five dollars gold? Napap�sok ko sa kur�l ang manga kalab�w. I succeeded in bringing the carabao into the corral. Napat�talim ni P�dro ang mapur�l na g�lok. Pedro is able to sharpen dull bolos. So from: al�s, punt�, s�boy, t�log.

(b) Reflexive passive: Ang m�y sakit ay napadap�` sa manga nag�al�g� sa kany�, sapagk�t sya hind� makak�los. The sick man had the people who were caring for him lay him on his face, because he could not move. Napag�sing si Hw�n sa kanya ng kapat�d sa �ras nang alaskw�tro nang um�ga. Juan had his brother wake him up at four o'clock in the morning. Napap�sok ak� sa s�ne sa �ki ng k�yang. I asked my oldest brother to take me to the moving-picture show. Mapap�p�sok.... I shall ask to be taken in. Sil� y napat�t�long. They are asking for help. So: �lam, hat�d, taw�d.

(c) Reflexive of interest: Napaakiy�t ak� kay Hw�n nang isa ng b�nga-ng-ny�g. I asked Juan to climb for a cocoanut for me. Napap�tol sil� nang k�hoy. They asked to have wood cut for them. Napap�p�tol ang manga an�k nang kanila ng kuk� kay N�nay. The children ask Mother to cut their fingernails. Napap�p�tol ak� nang g�gawi ng p�pa kay Hw�n. I am asking Juan to cut me some wood for a cigarette-mouthpiece. Napatil�d ak� nang tub� kay N�nay. I asked Mother to slice me some sugar-cane.

(d) Movement: Napab�ngit sya sa malaki ng pang�nib. He got into a very dangerous situation. Napar�ne sa tabi k� ang b�ta`. The child came up close to me. Ang magkayb�ga ng si P�dro at si Mary�no ay naparo�n sa Mayn�la`. The two friends, Pedro and Mariano, have gone to Manila. Sya y napa�o. He assented. So from: d�to, lo�b, sal�mat, t�ngo. Also from the derived word luw�san: napaluw�san.

507. Instrumental passive only in: maipabar�l.

508. Passive with m�- (� 463 ff.) from words with pa-. Bumit�w ang b�t� sa l�bid, kany� n�parap�` ang kany� ng kahatak�n. As the child let go of the rope, the one who was pulling against him fell on his face. N�par�to si Hw�n sa kany� ng pagtatag�` sa manga tikt�k. Juan happened to come here in his hiding from the spies. N�p�par�to sya ng madal�s. He often gets round here. M�p�par�to raw sy� sa b�ya ng it�. He will get round to our town, he says. N�pah�mak sya sa ginaw� nya ng pagsusug�l at pagsas�bong. He became good-for-nothing through his gambling and cock-fighting. N�p�pah�mak ang b�ta ng si Hw�n, dahil�n sa lub�s na pagpapal�yaw sa kany� nang kanya ng manga mag�lang. Little Juan is getting spoiled through his parents' complete indulgence. Hwag k� ng duw�g, Hw�n, at nang hw�g ka ng m�pah�mak l�mang sa iyo ng pagsusund�lo. Don't be a coward, Juan, so that you may not merely come to misfortune through your military service. M�p�pah�mak l�mang ang b�ta ng it�, kapag hind� n�tin pinapag�ral nang sap�t. This boy will turn out a good-for-nothing, if we don't make him study enough. Hind� n�pahin�g na ma�ga ni Hw�n ang manga s�ging. Juan didn't get his bananas ripe early enough. Hind� nya n�pahin�g ang manga s�ging, sapagk�t na�bus ag�d. He did not get his bananas ripe, because they were all eaten up too soon. Si P�dro ay n�p�pahing�. Pedro is resting. N�patay� si P�dro dahil�n sa kanya ng pagk�g�lat. Pedro leaped to his feet in his surprise. Dahil�n sa kanya ng pagk�g�lat ay n�paup� siya. In his surprise he fell into his chair.

So from: g�lat, halakh�k, hits�, iy�k, kas�l, lag�y, lagp�k, luks�, sig�w, tind�g.

(a) Plural with -ang-: Ang manga kalab�w ay nang�p�pahing�. The carabao are resting. So: nang�pamangh�`.

(b) Accent shift: N�pagis�ng si Hw�n sa kalakas�n nang put�k nang bar�l. The report of the gun was so loud that Juan woke up. So: t�wa.

(c) Abstract, of movements, pagk�pa-. Ang d�hil nang kanya ng pagk�par�to ay ang panining�l. What brought him here was the collecting of debts. Ang pagk�pal�go nang kab�yo ay marum�. The horse has not been bathed clean. So from: al�la`, do�n.

(d) With mak�- D (� 473) from -par�to: Hwag k� ng mak�par�-par�to. Don't you ever come round here!

509. Instrumental passive, m�-i-pa-, from: dal�, kil�la, k�ta, t�los.

510. Local passive, m�-pa- (1) -an. M�p�parus�han kit�. I shall have to punish you. So: kin�g.

511. Special static words with n�-pa-ka- denote something having a high degree of such and such a quality. Ang s�kit na iyo ng ipinar�r�sa sa �kin ay n�pakabig�t. The grief you cause me is very severe. N�pakab�te ang kanya ng pagkat�kot. Her fear reached a high degree. Ang sak�y na t�o nang kuts�ro sa karum�ta ay n�pakatab�`. The man the driver has taken into his carriage is very stout. So also: ikl�`.

(a) From a phrase: n�pakawala-ng-hiy�`.

5. The prefix pati-.

512. pati- before a root expresses that such and such a movement (of one's own person) is suddenly performed.

513. With mag- it denotes the voluntary performer. Barytone roots seem to have accent shift. Ang b�ta y nagpatihig�` sa sah�g. The child suddenly lay down on the floor. Nagpatihul�g si P�dro sa bint�na` sa isa ng pagsump�ng nang kanya ng pagkal�ko. Pedro suddenly threw himself from the window in an attack of his madness. Nagp�patihul�g si Hw�n sa hagd�nan kung sin�sump�ng nang kalok�han, kaniy�` sya y itin�li nil� sa isa ng hal�gi nang b�hay. They tied Juan to one of the posts of the house, because when he is assailed by a fit of insanity he throws himself down the stairs. Magp�patihul�g daw sya mul� sa itukt�k nang kanya ng b�langg�an �pang sya y makataan�n. He says he will throw himself from the roof of his prison so as to make an escape. Sya y nagpatiluh�d. He suddenly knelt down. Ang pagpapatiluh�d nang b�ta` ay sya ng nakasak�t sa kanya ng t�hod. The boy's throwing himself on his knees is what injured his knee.

514. The passive with m�- denotes the involuntary performer. N�p�patihig�` ang b�wat m�dul�s sa lug�r na it�. Every one who slips at this place falls on his back. Hwag k� ng magpadul�s, sapagk�t bak� ka m�patihig�`. Don't slide, for you might fall on your back. Sya y n�patiluh�d. He fell, landing in a kneeling position. N�patiup� sya sa kanya ng pagk�dul�s. He fell into a sitting position when he slipped. N�p�patiup�` ang b�wat t�o ng magda�n sa lug�r na it�, dahil�n sa madul�s na l�mot nang l�pa`. Everyone who comes through this place falls and lands in a sitting position, owing to the slippery moss on the ground.

III. Irregular Derivatives.

(1) Transients and abstracts of the particles sa and -ging.

515. The particle sa has transient forms as follows:

(a) A normal transient: with p�-sa, p�-p�-sa, n�-sa, n�-s�-sa. N�sa simb�han sil�. They are (were) at church. N�s�sa simb�han sil� nang mangy�re ang s�nog. They were at church when the fire occurred. Nang p�sa simb�han sil�.... When they went to church.... P�p�sa simb�han sil�. They will go to church.

Plural: Nang�sa simb�han sil�. They are (were) at church.

(b) An accidental passive (of movement): m�-pa-sa, m�-p�-pa-sa, n�-pa-sa-, n�-p�-pa-sa-; abstract: pagk�-pa-sa. Nang m�pasa simb�han sil� ay mal�lim n� ang gab�. When they got to the church, it was already late at night. M�p�pasa simb�han sil� sa gab�. They will strike the church at nightfall. ang pagk�pasa simb�han a chance coming upon the church.

516. The (transient) forms of -ging are ma-g�ng, ma-g�-ging, na-g�ng, na-g�-ging; abstract: pa-gi-g�ng. Magp�p�tol daw nang buh�k ang Ints�k na si Y�ng pagig�ng biny�gan nya. The Chinaman Yeng says he will have his queue cut when he gets baptized.

(2) Odd affixes.

517. ba- seems to appear in ba-las�ng.

518. hin-, with irregular nasalization of initials, in one simple derivative: Ang kanya ng himat�y ay hind� nala�nan. Her fainting-fit did not last long (mat�y). -himags�k (bags�k) does not occur, but underlies many derivatives, especially maghimags�k (� 352,c) and h�mags�kan (� 377,a). Many such underlying forms can be postulated from the various transients with manghin- (� 357,b).

(a) With r: ang hintut�ro` the forefinger (t�ro`).

519. kala- in ang kalah�te` a half; ang kalatimb�` dipping on the heels and rising, hands holding opposite ears (as trick or imposed as a punishment), from h�ti` and timb�` a well-bucket; these have various further derivatives, see Index.

520. kasing- having such and such a quality in common with something else; hence partly equivalent with ka-: Kasingk�lay nang �ki ng b�ro` ang kanya ng salaw�l. His trousers are of the same color as my blouse. Ang b�la ng it� ay kasinglak� nang itl�g. This ball is the same size as an egg. Si Hw�n ay kasingpant�y ni P�dro. Juan is of the same height as Pedro.

521. mala- (Spanish ?) derogatory: ang malasuts�t a young lout, a half-grown boy (literally: a bad whistler).

522. pala- expresses extreme tendency to such and such an action:

(a) pala- S -in, from oxytone roots: Sya y isa ng palabint�ngin. He is very distrustful. Ang manga isd� y palab�l�kin sa tag�raw. Fish easily spoil in the hot season. ang palalungk�tin a melancholy person, palap�t�kin a fowl given to cackling, palasumb�ngin tattle-tale, palasuts�tin one who is always whistling, palatunt�nin one who is always trying to follow up his stolen property, palatuw�in palatw�in one who is easily amused.

From root with shifted accent: palas�k�tin person who is always getting sick. Irregularly: palah�n�hin an animal given to neighing, chirping, etc.

Lack of secondary accent: palaiy�kin a cry-baby.

(b) pala- (2) -in, from barytone roots: palagalit�n a hot-head, palagising�n a poor sleeper, palagutum�n one who is always getting hungry, palagulat�n nervous person, palahilaw�n a kind of rice that is hard to cook through; Palaputul�n ang manga tingt�ng nang wal�s na yt�. The fibres of this broom are very brittle. palatakut�n a timorous person.

(c) pal�- -an the place for such and such a thing: ang pal�isd�an a fish-pond, pal�sings�ngan the ring-finger, the fourth finger, pal�tunt�nan a set of rules, rules of order.

523. ta- in ta-g�lid the side; with retraction of accent: -tal�kod.

524. tag- in names of seasons: tag�raw, tagul�n, the two Philippine seasons; ang taglam�g cold weather, the (American) winter. With accent-shift: tagin�t the hot season.

525. taga- person whose duty it is to do so and so, especially upon some particular occasion: ang tagaal�s nang gwarnisy�n nang kab�yo the one detailed to unharness the horses, tagab�lang accountant, counter, taga�kid sa gawa�n nang l�bid the one who rolls up a rope in the rope-factory; Ik�w ay tagain�m l�mang. Your job here is only to drink; so: tagak�in one whose only duty is to eat. Tagap�tol nang k�hoy ang katungk�lan niy�. He is delegated to cut wood. tagas�lat the one who does the writing; tagatah�` one who does the sewing. So from: h�li, suls�.

(a) With pag-: tagapagbig�y, tagapagtangg�l.

(b) With pag-pa- one whose duty it is to oversee the doing of so and so: ang tagapagpaal�s nang tap�n nang manga b�te head bottle-opener; tagapagpain�m sa fiy�sta bartender at a fiesta; Isa ng tagapagpain�m ay isa ng tagapagbig�y nang inum�n sa manga h�yop o manga b�ta`. So: ang tagapagpak�in who gives food to animals or children, tagapagpal�go` who bathes children or horses, tagapagpas�lat head writer, tagapagpatoto� witness.

526. tara-, tra- is felt to be a prefix in: ang t�o ng tarab�ko, trab�ko a bald-headed person, felt as derivative from b�ko smooth, unripe cocoanut.

527. -�ro (Spanish) as suffix of agent; final vowel (or vowel plus n or glottal stop) is lost: bangk�ro, sabung�ro, sip�ro (sip�ros, plural); from derived word: Katipun�ros (ka-tip�n-an, � 423); from compound word: b�sag-ul�ro a brawler, ruffian (b�sag-�lo).

(3) Pronoun forms.

528. The various forms of the pronouns and objectivizing particles show some regular derivation.

(a) n- with irregularities, for disjunctive forms: n-ang, n-i (si), n-in� n-il� (sin� sil�), n-�no (s�no), n-ir�, n-it�, n-iy�n, n-o�n (iy�n, ya�n); n-it� (kit�), n-iy� (siy�), n-il� (sil�). From the prepositive form: n-�tin, n-�min, n-iniy�.

Similarly, the particle naw�`, root �wa` pity.

(b) ka- for local and prepositive forms: ka-y (si), k-in� (sin�); from the disjunctive form: ka-n�no, ka-nit�, ka-niy�. ka-nil�.

(c) With si compare s�-no, with ang, a-n�.

(d) Local equivalents of the demonstrative pronouns (treated as separate roots): d-�ne (ir�), d-�to (it�), d-iy�n, d-o�n.

(e) Words of manner with ga-: ga-�no, g�-no (an�), ga-y�n (iy�n). From disjunctive forms: ga-nit�, ga-niy�n, ga-no�n. Cf. also g�ya like.

Of similar formation: Ang but� nang hal�ma ng it� y gab�til nang p�lay. The seed of this plant is as large as a grain of rice (b�til a kernel of grain).

(f) sa�n (for sa an�?) is felt as a simple word.

III. LIST OF FORMATIONS.

The formations with irregular affixes (515 ff.) have been omitted from this list.

The following regular features have been ignored:

(1) Prefixes beginning with n-; these are the actual-mode forms of prefixes beginning with m-, and are treated in the same paragraphs as the latter.

(2) Forms with doubling or reduplication of the root; also those with accented reduplication (of root or prefix) expressing durative aspect; these are treated in the same paragraphs as the corresponding forms without reduplication.

(3) Secondary accent, when not peculiar to prefixes.

(4) Variations in position of accent.

The numbers refer to paragraphs.

A. FORMS WITHOUT PREFIX.

(1) No affix: 332. 336. 338. 341-346. 348. 358.

(2) Suffix only: -an 31. 334,c. 374. 377-381. -anan 377,b. -han, -hanan see -an. -hanin, -hin see -in. -in 334,c. 359. 367. -inan 377,b. -nan see -an. -nin see -in.

(3) Infix only: -in- 334,b,1. 359. 365. 366. -in- -um- 359,a. -um- 348. 349. 358.

(4) Infix and suffix: -in- -an 374. -um- -in 359,a.

B. FORMS WITH PREFIX.

i- 31. 334,a,2.b,2. 368. 373. i- -in- 368. ika- 413. 416. ik�- 417. ik�pa- 501. ik�pag- 418. ik�pagpa- 501,a. ikin ... see ik ...; the -in- expresses actual mode. ini- see i- -in-. ipa- 494. ipag- 369-371. ipag- -an- 369,a. ipagka- 414. 415. ipagk�pa- 501,a. ipagma- 370. ipagpa- 495. ipaki- 394. ipakipa- 496. ipakipag- 395. ipang- 372. ipapang- 394,c. ipin ... see ip ...; the -in- expresses actual mode.

ka- 31. 76. 77. 179. 183. 334,a,2. 398. 400-402. k�- 403. ka- -an 419. 421-426. k�- -an 428. 430. 431. ka- -anan 423,b. ka- -anin 421,a. ka- -in- 412. k�ka- 399. 404. kamag- 398,a. kamag- -an 423,b. kamaka- 398,a. kapa- -an 503. k�pa- -an 503,a. kapag- 400,a. 486,c. kapang- 400,b. kapang- -an 421,b. 423,b. kap�pa- 486,b. kay- see ka-. kina- 412. kina- -an 419. kin�- -an 260. 503. kin�- -anin 421,a. kinapa- -an 503. kuma- 404. ma- 438 ff. 444. 449. 454. m�- 463 ff. 469. ma- -an 451. m�- -an 475. ma- -in 457. mag- 34. 334,a,1. 350. 353-356. 358. mag- -um- 352,c. mag- -an 352,d. mag- -in 352,d. 358,a. magka- 405. 408. 409,a. magk�- 410. 411. magka- -an 427,a,c. magk�- -an 430. magkaka- 409. magkaka- -an 427,d. magkin�ka- 412,a. magma- 352,c. 353,a. magm�- 353,b. magmaka- 453,a. magpa- 489. magp�- 489,d,e. magpa- -um- 489,b. magp�- -an 498,a. magpaka- 499. magpakama- 499,a. magpakam�- 499,a. magpapa- 489 f. magpati- 513. magsi- 385. magsipa- 488,d. magsipag- 386. magsipag- -an 386,b. magsipagka- 406. magsipagpa- 489,a. magsipang- 387. m�i- 474. maipa- 507. m�ipa- 509. maipag- 450. maipang- 450. maka- 433 ff. 444. 453. mak�- 458 ff. 469. 473. 479. m�ka- 470,a. maka- -an 443. 454,c. m�ka- -an 488. makapa- 504. makapag- 445. 447. makapagpa- 505. mak�paki- 473,a. makapang- 448. makapang- -in 448,b. maki- 390. makipag- 391. makipag- -an 391,a. makipagka- -an 427,b. makipang- 392. mang- 334,a,4. 357. 358. m�ng- 358,e. f. mang- -in 357,a. manga- 442. mang�- 467. manga- -an 421,a. mangagsi- 385,a. mangagsipag- 386,a. mangaka- 442. mang�ka- 442. 470,b. mang�pa- 508,a. mapa- 506. m�pa- 508. m�pa- -an 510. mapag- 446. 455. m�pag- 471. mapag- -an 452. m�pag- -an 476. m�pagka- -an 488,a. n�paka- 511. mapang- 454,c. 456. m�pang- 472. m�pang- -an 477. m�pati- 514. pa- 207. 481-484. 487. p�- 487,d. 515,a. pa- -an 497. p�- -an 497,b. 498. pa- -in 490. p�- -in 490,a,b. pag- 34. 274. 334,a,1. 348-356. pag- -an 352,d. 375. pag- -anan 375,b. pag- -in 352,c. 360-363. pag- -um- 352,c. pagka- 274. 404. 433, ff. 444. 453,b. pagk�- 274. 458 ff. 469. pagka- -an 420. pagk�- -an 429. pagkaka- 405. 406. 407,a,b. pagkak�- 410. 411. pagk�ka- 470,a. pagkaka- -an 427,a. pagkak�- -an 430,a,b. pagk�pa- 508,c. pagkapag- 445. 447. pagk�pag- 471. pagkapang- 448. pagkapang- -in- 448,b. pagmama- 352,c. 353,a. pagmam�- 353,b. pagpa- 488. pagpapa- 489. pagpap�- -an 498,a. pagpapa- -um- 498,b. pagpapaka- 499. pagpapakama- 499,a. pagpapakam�- 499,a. pai- 481,a. paka- -an 502. paka- -in 500. paki- 389. paki- -an 396. paki- -in 393. pakiki- 390. pakikipag- 391. pakikipag- -an 391,a. pakikipagka- -an 427,b. pakikipang- 392. pakipag- -an 396,b. panu- see pang-. pang- 334,a,4. 347. 357. pang- -an 376. p�ng- -an 383. pang- -in 357,a. 364. 367,b. p�ng- -in 367,c. panganga- -an 421,a. 422,a. pangpa- 486,a. papa- 485. p�pa- 488. papa- -an 497,c. papag- -in 491. 491,b. papagpa- -in 493. papang- 492. pau- see pa-. pin... see p...; the -in- expresses actual mode. puma- 488.

INDEX OF WORDS.

The words are arranged by roots, in accordance with the speech-feeling, so far as ascertainable. The forms d�ne, d�to, diy�n, do�n have, however, been given separate places.

In using the index the sound-variations described in � 334 should be kept in view. The forms are given with fullest accentuation and vocalism (iy for y, uw for w after consonant), regardless of actual occurrence. For e see i, for o see u. Foreign r is under d, f under p, v under b.

The brief indication of meaning after each form ignores shades of meaning that would require long definitions; so especially factors of involuntary or completed action and of ability (ka-, maka-, ma-) and of accident or ability due to external causes (k�-, mak�-, m�-).

The references to occurrence have been limited by considerations of space; the numbers refer to page and line; when in heavy type, to paragraphs of the Grammatical Analysis.

The following abbreviations are used: arch.: felt as archaic. C.: Chinese. disj.: disjunctive form. E.: English. excl.: exclusive. id.: the same meaning. incl.: inclusive. intr.: English definition to be taken in intransitive sense. loc.: local. n.: name. pl.: the Tagalog form is an explicit plural. prep.: prepositive. S.: Spanish [11]. tr.: English definition to be taken in transitive sense.

A

a- see an�, ang.

ab� ah 151(14).

abak� S. hemp 237(37).

-ab�la: pagab�la a bothering; see Corrigenda. nangab�la made trouble 239(29). kaabalah�n trouble 302(14).

-ab�ng: umab�ng watch for 226(23). um�ab�ng is lying in wait 64(41). nakaab�ng is on guard 48(12).

�bito S. vestment 98(20).

ab�ynte-kuw�tro S. twenty-fourth 110(11).

ab�bot belongings 118(23).

-�bot (a) overtake: ab�tan be reached 92(19). 299(38). inab�tan was overtaken 52(42). 84(34). 250(30). in�ab�tan is being reached 301(34). pa�bot let oneself be overtaken 301(21). paa�bot pl. 46(11). nagpa�bot let himself be overtaken 52(28). --(b) with accent-shift; reach for, take: umab�t reach for 231(5). 237(20). reached for 231(6). um�ab�t reaches for 62(14). pagab�t a reaching for 231(7). nag�ab�t is handing 237(17). pagaab�t a handing 237(19). inab�t was taken 30(10). in�abot is being reached for 246(3). iyab�t be handed 249(13). iniyab�t was handed 30(13). 106(21). iniy�ab�t is being handed 249(12). ka�b�tan one of two who hand to each other 278(4). maab�t he reached 286(28). ma�ab�t will be reached 20(27). naab�t was reached 286(27). pagkaab�t a reaching for see Corrigenda. n�ab�t was reached 296(13). pagk�ab�t a reaching for see Corrigenda. paab�t caused to be handed 300(23). nagpaab�t caused to be handed 304(21). ipinaab�t was caused to be handed 52(11).

-�ga: um�ga morning 50(40). 62(36). 66(25). 120(19). 163(23). 190(24). 241(39). 262(5). in�um�ga is being overtaken by morning 245(42). magpaum�ga let oneself be overtaken by morning 304(18). ag�han be done early 250(30). ma�ga early 312(27). pa�ga early rice 300(3). p��ga be very early 301(36). p�ag�han be done very early 308(36).

ag�d soon 32(22). 42(31). 48(26). 265(1). ag�d-ag�d immediately 36(5). 48(37.40). 265(1).

�gaw that snatched 220(17). ag�w snatched 222(16). um�gaw snatched 226(24). in�gaw was snatched 250(11). agaw�n a grabbing together 260(3). pagaagaw�n a scrambling 108(25). nags�sipagagaw�n are scrambling 108(24). na��gaw can be seized 40(8). mak��gaw seize 108(31).

agin�ldo S. Christmas present; as n. 118(6). n�pangagin�lduhan was given as a Christmas present 298(26). 307(21).

�gos stream 16(3). um��gos is streaming 44(42).

�guwa-bind�ta S. holy-water 96(28).

�has snake 120(21).

-�hit: pang�hit razor 232(17). nang�hit did shaving 167(2). inah�tan was shaved 250(32).

-�hon: um�hon go up 116(18). went up 226(25). um��hon is going up 110(20). ��hon will go up 263(26). pag�hon a going up 226(27). nagsi�hon went up, pl. 118(13). ipina�hon was caused to go up 120(16).

ak�la` opinion 20(8). 98(15). 271. pangak�la panuk�la` thought 16(9). 224(40). 226(1). nagak�la` thought, planned 24(17). 50(13). inak�la` was thought 18(17.24). in�ak�la` is being thought 11(86). -�kap: n���kap is embracing 66(40).

-�kay (a) lead: um��kay is leading 22(31). in�kay was led 26(36). (b) with accent-shift inak�y young of animal 102(20). 247(13).

�kin prep. and loc. of ak�: my, me, by me 165. 169. 182.

-akiy�t: umakiy�t climb 22(39). climbed 16(15). �akiy�t will climb 22(36). pagakiy�t a climbing 24(6). nags�siakiy�t are climbing 108(31). �akiyat�n will be climbed 16(15). makaakiy�t be able to climb 108(28). maka�kiy�t will be able to climb 22(37). maakiy�t be able to be climbed 16(13). n�akiy�t got carried up 295(3). paakiy�t ask to be climbed with or for; caused to be climbed or climbed for; climbing up 106(14). 299(6.37). 301(22.29). pa�akiy�t will ask to be climbed with or for 301(38). 302(1). napaakiy�t asked to be climbed for 311(37).

akl�t book 154(28). akl�tan library 210(12). See b�hay.

-akm�`: inakma�n was prepared for 70(29).

ak� I 16(17). 152(14). 63. Cf. �kin, ko.

�ko` person relieved 220(19). pang�ko` 233(35). mang�ko` promise 44(13). in�ko` was pledged for 220(19). 243(31). ipinang�ko` was promised 34(10). pagkapang�ko` a having promised 44(22). 287(29).

ala�la souvenir, present 72(37). 221(3). pangala�la memory 116(24). alalah�nin be minded 104(33). �alalah�nin will be minded 243(34). in�ala�la is being remembered 243(32). naala�la was remembered 202(36). n�ala�la was recalled 30(16). 72(23). 100(13). n��ala�la is remembered. m�ala�la be recalled 86(3). paala�la caused to be given as a souvenir 299(8). pagpapaala�la a causing to be remembered 292(22).

-al�ga`: nag�al�ga` is attending to 311(28).

alag�d assistant 114(12).

al�has (S.) jewelry 102(24).

�lak wine, liquor 221(6).

-alala see ala�la.

-�lam (a) know: m�l�man be known 22(35). 298(9). m�l�l�man will be known 42(37). n�l�man was known 26(32). n�l�l�man is known 24(32). m�pagal�man be generally known 60(35). pa�lam causing himself to be known (as leaving) 183(17). ipina�lam was caused to be known (as leaving) 32(9). 306(4). paal�man be made known 308(3). pa�al�man will be made known 42(35). napa�lam caused himself to be known (as leaving) 54(12) --(b) with accent-shift: al�m known 300(32). makial�m interfere 58(42). 264(18). pinakialam�n was looked after 265(32). 290(32). kaal�m accomplice 267(1) and Corrigenda. nak��al�m knows 42(14). pagk�al�m a knowing 82(9). 272(6). n�alam�n got known 118(1). 298(14). m�pagalam�n get generally known 118(42). 298(24). ipaal�m be given out to be known 307(3). ipinaal�m was given out to be known 307(4).

alas�ngko S. five o'clock 180(7).

alas�s S. six o'clock 122(6).

alaskuw�tro S. four o'clock 172 (42). mag�alaskuw�tro will be four o'clock 66(34).

alastr�s S. three o'clock 66(32).

�lat salty 218(37). ka�lat kay�lat what saltiness 267(34). kaal�tan saltiness 267(27).

-�lay: iniy�lay was offered 16(5).

alikab�k dust 245(26). maalikab�k dusty 289(1).

�li aunt, madam 118(14). 151(36). 59. 256. mag�li aunt and niece or nephew 242(1).

al�la` servant, domesticated 54(7). 62(32). alil�in be domesticated 106(40). pagk�paal�la` a making a servant of oneself 104(2).

al�n which? 22(37). 48(18.25.36). 97. al�n-al�n pl. 97.

alint�na in spite 277. inalint�na was paid attention to 88(29).

al�pin slave 90(36).

-alipust�`: alipusta�n be mistreated 72(39).

al�s go away 192(36). umal�s go away 52(22). went away 20(36). �al�s will go away 192(2). pagal�s a going away 108(22). nags�sial�s are going away 114(27). nangagsial�s went away, pl. 120(39). inal�s was removed 30(10). iniyal�s was removed 248(6). alis�n be removed from 250(33). �l�san a going away together 257(23). nag�l�san went away together 236(14). nag��l�san are going away together 96(15). ikinaal�s was the cause of going away 271(41). makaal�s be able to go away 78(11). maka�al�s will be able to go away 42(38). 281(25). nakaal�s has gone away 282(21). pagkaal�s a having gone away 80(3). m��al�s will be removed 96(34). papaal�s going away 300(39). pinaal�s was caused to go away 32(34). pina�al�s is being caused to go away 64(23). ipinaal�s was caused to be removed 70(4). 306(5). mapaal�s be able to be caused to go away 122(21). ikin�paal�s was the cause of ordering to go away 310(5). ikin�p�paal�s is the cause of ordering to go away 310(8). tagaal�s remover 315(33). tagapagpaal�s head remover 316(1).

alitaptap firefly 40(15).

Alf�nso S. n. 309(6).

-als� S.: pagaals� a raising 70(2).

alt�r S. altar 96(17).

aluw�gi (S.) carpenter 56(35). pagaaluw�gi carpentry 58(2).

am� father 30(26). 59. magam� father and child 242(2). magaam� father and children 242(27). ama�n uncle 247(26). magama�n uncle and nephew or niece 242(25). in�am� godfather 247(17).

�min prep. and loc. of kam�: our, us, by us excl. 165. 169. n�min disj. of us, by us 163. um�min confessed 226(28). �am�nin will be owned up to 243(36). in��min is being owned up to 243(35).

Am�rika S. America 189(29).

amerik�na S. European coat 281(5).

Amerik�no S. American 56(30).

-amp�t: maamp�t be able to be stopped 46(8). 259(30).

-�mo` (S. ?): in�mo` was caressed 84(32). inam�-am�` was repeatedly caressed 86(4).

�mong (S.) sir, Father 20(37). 50(40).

-�mot sell, of other than professional merchant: um�mot sold 226(30). inam�tan was sold to 246(41).

an see an�.

-�nak: mag�nak family 165(17). 242(17). kamag�nak relative 54(22). 266(34). kamagan�kan clan 112(26). 277(14). angk�n one's family 112(19). 260(39).

an�k son, daughter 30(25). pangan�k infant 54(6). kapang�n�kan birth, birthday 275(43). pangangan�k a giving birth 220(24). naipang�ngan�k has just been born 36(16). 288(4).

Andr�s S. n. 26(30).

And�y S. short-n. 208(1).

�ni harvest 191(32).

-�nib: pang�nib danger 46(15). mapang�nib dangerous 289(21). um�nib make one's sleeping-mat overlap 226(30). iy�nib be made to overlap 248(7). magka�nib overlapping each other 269(38).

�nim six 52(44). 67. pang�nim number six 225(38). ika�nim ik�nim sixth 273(17). mak��nim six times 298(32).

-an�naw: inan�naw was scrutinized 66(19).

aniy�ya invitation 219(28). inaniy�han was invited 250(34). in�aniy�han is being invited 203(26).

aniy�` aspect 20(12). nag�aniy�` is behaving 40(40). pagaaniy�` behavior 108(33).

antim�no S. beforehand 20(39). 262(1).

ant�k sleepiness 84(14). nag�ant�k is sleepy 231(42). nakapag�ant�k causes to get sleepy 108(8).

an�, an what? what kind of? 18(6). 22(21). 97. 179. 190. 264. an�-an� pl. 114(16). 97. nangan� did what? 239(29). p�no how? 155(21). 300(8). pap�no how? 18(11). 301(1). ga�no g�no how great? 28(2). 316(28). 190. 247. See also sa�n.

an�nas S. custard-apple, Anona reticulata L. 76(19).

�nong S. short-n. 286(38).

ang the, a 45. 61-71. 75. 78. 108. 109. 115. 116. 119. 126. 130-133. 161. 168. 196. 246. 248. 253. nang disj. the, a, of the, by the; when 45. 119. 116-194. 253. 317(2). 340. 341 (3,d).

-angk see -�nak.

angk�n appropriated 60(20). umangk�n appropriate 226(32). angkin�n be appropriated 62(6). 243(39). inangk�n was appropriated 16(8). in�angk�n is being appropriated 243(37). m�angk�n get appropriated 308(20).

�pat four 24(37). 67. ��pat only four 116(16). �pat-�pat four at a time 223(41). pang�pat number four 225(36). ika�pat ik�pat fourth 82(16). mak��pat mak��pat four times 298(36).

�frika S. Africa 189(4).

-apt see at�p.

ap�y fire 22(6). inapuy�n was inflamed 94(29) and Corrigenda.

�ral doctrine 140(31). 223(23). um�ral arch. teach morals 233(22). mag�ral study 18(7). 209(13). mag��ral will study 217(28). nag�ral studied 30(5). nag��ral is studying 90(31). 233(22). paga�ral a studying 28(3). magsipag�ral study pl. 262(34). nags�sipag�ral are studying 38(5). ar�lan be taught morals 250(36). aral�n study-room 238(6). pagar�lan be learned 168(1). pinagar�lan was studied 18(14). pinag�ar�lan is being studied 255(4). makapag�ral be able to study 34(33). pinapag�ral was caused to study 305(19). ipapag�ral be used for causing to study 88(11). p�aral�n school 26(32).

ar�ro S. plow 232(2). pagaar�ro a plowing 232(1). magaar�ro plowman 242(38). arar�hin be plowed 243(40).

�raw sun, day 16(11). 66(1). See also madal�`, kalah�ti`. �raw-gab� day and night 94(31). 257. 331. �raw-�raw every day 58(7). 331. kaaraw�n holiday 110(17). tag�raw sunny season 34(27). 315(29).

ar�y ouch 151(15).

�ri` that owned 42(2). 220(22). See also m�y. nag��ri` owns 40(17). paga�ri` possession 62(24). 102(31). ma�ri` be possible 168(18). ma��ri` will be possible 16(27). 46(12). na�ri` was owned, became possible 104(12). 285(29). na��ri` is possible 152(18). pagka�ri` possibility 80(30).

aritm�tika S. arithmetic 82(1).

�rmas arm�s S. arms 106(26). 235(4).

arsub�spo S. archbishop 96(10).

art�sta S. artist 90(10).

�sa expectation 72(7). 209(24). pag�sa hope 56(19). 76(13).

-�sal: in�sal conduct 34(24).

asan�` (S. ?) a tree, Pterocarpus Indicus Willd. 263(25).

as�wa husband, wife 30(39). 34(5). magas�wa take a wife 78(38). married couple 30(25). 242(4). mag�as�wa will take a wife 232(2). nagas�wa took a wife 80(6). pagaas�wa the taking a husband or wife 80(27). 92(9).

�sim sourness 297(10). ma�sim sour 289(1).

as�n salt 30(11). asn�n be salted 250(37).

aspil� S. pin 260(7.21).

�so dog 18(8). in��so is being chased 243(41). na�so has been chased 284(9). n��so got chased 292(42).

as� smoke 64(33). asuh�n chimney 261(10) and Corrigenda. pinaasuh�n was smoked 308(4).

as�kal S. sugar 198(31).

as�l S. blue 122(2). kayas�l what blueness 267(35).

asuw�ng vampire 34(30). magasuw�ng-asuw�ngan play vampire 237(9). mag�asuw�ng-asuw�ngan will play vampire 237(7). nagasuw�ng-asuw�ngan played vampire 34(26).

at t and; for, that, though 15. 20. 37. 45. 49. 213. 289. 306. 312. 317.

�tas that prompted 98(33). iniy�tas was enjoined 54(42).

ata�l S. coffin 116(1).

at� (C.) oldest sister 59. 256. magat� oldest sister with brother or sister 242(5).

�tin prep. and loc. of t�yo: our, us, by us, incl. 165. 169. n�tin disj., of us, by us 163.

at�p roofing 118(27). pangat�p shingle 224(40). apt�n be roofed 250(38).

�tis custard-apple, Anona squamosa L. 76(20). at�san grove of �tis trees 261(10).

ats�ra sour preserves 163(17). 299(11).

�wa` (a) pity 46(22). k�w�wa` piteous 80(12). 267(29). ikina�wa` was the cause of pitying 272(1). na�wa` pitied 285(16). pagka�wa` a pitying 285(40). nagm�maka�wa` is calling forth pity 44(11). 288(36). (b) accent shifted: aw�` overcome by pity 222(17). kaawa�n be the object of pity 182(39). kina�awa�n is the object of pity 275(1). naw�` pray 47. 225.

-�way: nag��way is fighting 232(4). paga�way a fighting 306(18). nakipag�way fought along 264(24). nak�kipag�way fights along 264(21). ka�way enemy 18(11). ka��way there has just been quarreling 267(12). mapagaw�y quarrelsome 186(33). m�pag�way be matched 297(10).

�wit song 280(39). aw�tan be sung to 250(38). mag�w�tan sing together 183(11). nag��w�tan are singing together 236(27).

ay y is; then 15. 20. 37. 45. 49. 89. 119.

�yap condiment 244(2) and Corrigenda. nang�yap ate relishes 239(31). in�yap was used as a condiment 244(1). pa�yap given to be used as a condiment 299(12). nagpa�yap served a relish 302(28).

�yaw (a) not desired 30(5.37). 40(30). 239. 267. pag�yaw unwillingness 226(32). (b) accent shifted: umay�w refused, left the table 231(12). pagay�w refusal 94(17). 231(9). nakaay�w has left the table 286(25). pagk�ay�w dislike 70(13).

�yon according to 40(3). 278. um�yon agreed 30(4). naka�yon has come to be in accordance 281(3). paay�n conforming 300(13).

�yos formation 48(4.15) 90(11). mapag�yos be able to be straightened 287(6). map�pag�yos will be able to be put into shape 287(7).

B(V)

b� interrogative particle 47. 215. 223. 229. 299.

-b�ba` (a) bum�ba` became low 226(35). kabab�an lowness, south 62(15). 163(26). 241(19). mab�ba` low, humble 104(27). 289(2). (b) Accent shifted: bab�` low; come down 223(16) and see p�ko`. bumab�` descended 36(35). ibab�` south 56(24). 163(26). See also band�.

-b�bag: b�b�bag will fight 226(37). nagb�bab�g are fighting each other 237(25). pagbabab�g a fighting together 252(14). nakipagbab�g fought along 264(37).

-b�baw: bum�baw became shallow 258(40). ib�baw top surface 66(28). kabab�wan shallowness 88(30). mab�baw 88(26). 220(8).

bab�yi bab�i female, woman 30(32). 163(13). nagbab�-babay�han played woman 237(14).

b�boy pig 36(13).

-badiy�: n�ibadiy� got spread abroad 24(33).

bag� really? 22(21). 47. 216. 290. 219. 317(3).

-bag�bag: nabag�bag grew uneasy 120(37).

-b�gal: mab�gal slow 18(4).

b�gay thing, circumstance 28(1). 36(22). b�gay-b�gay various things 116(33). ibin�b�gay is being adapted 248(9). n�b�b�gay is suitable 78(34).

bagiy� hurricane 273(8).

-bags�k: ibinags�k was dropped 271(24).

-bags�k: mabags�k violent 42(3). 44(30). mababags�k pl. 102(19). maghimags�k come to violence 314(27). naghimags�k came to violence 236(5). nagsipaghimags�k revolted, pl. 263(12). nanghimags�k resorted to violence 241(18). nagsipanghimags�k pl. 263(30). h�mags�kan internal warfare 258(13). 314(28). nagh�mags�kan fought each other 236(23). nagsipagh�mags�kan pl. 263(13). paghih�mags�kan internal warfare 52(42). 116(12). panghih�mags�kan id. 241(11).

b�go new; before 18(37). 36(32). 291. kab�b�go newly 54(6). nab�b�go has been changed 64(35).

bah�` flood 98(17). 110(23). bum�bah�` there is a flood 110(19). pagbah�` a flooding 110(21).

bah�gi part 82(17).

bahagiy� slight 201(21).

b�hay (a) house 34(21). See also k�pit, t�nod. b�hay-akl�tan library-building 210(11). b�hay-b�ta` womb 210(23). b�hay-g�ya` womb of animal 210(24). b�hay-p�hayag�n newspaper-office 210(25). b�hay-p�mahal�an government building 292(21). B�hay-pan�ki place-n. 210(25). b�hay-pint�han paint-house 210(26). b�hay-sangl�an pawnshop 252(22). b�hay-t�l�yan inn 112(38). bah�y-bah�y various houses 52(15). 110(36). magb�hay build a house 232(5). pamam�hay household 70(26). kabahay�n house containing several dwellings 120(3). furnishings of a house 276(5). --(b) Accent shifted: bah�y tame, shy 222(19). nab�bah�y is shy 286(29).

ba�t good conduct 165(1). kab��tan kindness, virtue 74(41). maba�t well-behaved 84(11). mababa�t pl. 34(35).

b�ka S. cow 112(40).

b�kal iron 201(30). 220(5).

bak�s mark, in: bak�s-s�gat mark of a wound 46(6).

bakasiy�n S. vacation 26(35).

-bak�l: bak�l-bak�l uneven 220(2).

b�kit why? 18(7). 236.

bakiy�` sandal 245(20).

b�kod fence 266(6). pangb�kod used in making a fence 225(2). bak�ran be fenced in 250(40). yard, grounds 34(38).

b�kol open bamboo basket without handle 74(5).

b�la any 186(18). 271(22). 66. 132.

b�la S. bullet 52(36).

balah�bo fur 212(18).

bal�e person whose son or daughter one's daughter or son has married; old friend 207(35). 266(5). magbal�e two people whose children have intermarried 242(8). 269(42). magbabal�e pl. 240(28). kabal�e one's bal�e 266(2). magkabal�e two fellow bal�e 269(40).

b�lak plan 287(11). bin�lak was planned 18(34).

b�lang locust 267(27).

bal�t skin, shell 16(18). 30(10).

b�li S. matter, harm 52(6). 42(5). balat�n be peeled 200(24).

b�li` break 219(29). ipinagk�kabal�` is the cause of breaking in numbers 273(7). makab�le` be able to break 281(26). nab�le` was broken 284(32). nab�b�le` is interrupted 104(4). mabal�an be broken in 70(18). nabal�an was broken in 62(27).

-bal�k: bumal�k come back 66(17). 233(17). came back 20(40). b�bal�k will come back 32(27). bum�bal�k is coming back 66(24). magbal�k come back to 233(18). nagbal�k came back to 72(11). 283(4). pagbalik�n be come back to 255(5). pagb�balik�n will be come back to 32(28). 255(5). makab�bal�k will be able to go back 56(31). pabal�k going back 299(13.27.39). pagpapabal�k a causing to go back 48(20). pinabal�k was caused to go back 68(41). ipinab�bal�k is being sent back 48(7).

bal�kat shoulder 48(19).

bal�ta` that reported; famed 34(29). 36(2). magbal�ta` relate 42(24). nagbal�ta` related 118(35). pamamal�ta` a relating of stories 102(12). ibal�ta` be reported 88(39). ibinal�ta` was reported 32(8). ipamal�ta` be related 275(18). ipinamal�ta` was related 22(27). binalit�an was narrated to 250(42). pagbab�lita�n a reporting by many 102(13). pinakibalit�an was ascertained by report 102(42). 265(30). n�bal�ta` got related 46(18). n�b�bal�ta` gets related 48(26). pagk�bal�ta` a getting narrated 272(42). m�balit�an be learned by report 56(18). n�balit�an was learned by report 38(12).

Bal�wag place-n. 173(9). See b�yan, da�n.

bal�bad casoy, Anacardium occidentale L. 76(20).

balukt�t crooked 218(38). bal�-balukt�t variously bent 290(33). bumalukt�t bend; bent 226(39). 233(25). magbalukt�t bend in quantity 233(24). pagbabalukt�t a bending 48(15).

bal�n a well 24(37).

-b�lot: bum�lot roll up 226(40). 233(27). magb�lot roll up in quantity; wrap oneself up 233(26). magbal�t roll up variously 52(21). nagbal�t rolled up variously 52(35). nagsipagbal�t pl. 118(13). nab�lot has been wrapped up 284(10). nab�b�lot is wrapped up 36(39). n�b�lot got wrapped up 198(8). 255(40).

bamb� club 70(17). pangbamb� club for beating 225(2). nangb�bamb� is beating 239(32). bambuh�n be beaten 70(29). binamb� was beaten 72(10).

-ban�l: kab�n�lan act of piety 78(33).

ban�yad gentle 48(17).

b�nda S. band, orchestra 48(31). b�nda-ng-m�sika band of music 48(30).

band� direction 18(22). band� ng ibab�` south m�band�-ng-ibab�` get turned towards the south 296(21). band� ng kaliw�`, k�nan see d�lo. band� ng kataas�n north n�b�band�-ng-kataas�n is turned toward the north 296(20). band�hin direction headed for 294(24).

band�la` S. flag 234(14).

ban�g sleeping-mat 62(35).

bant�y watcher 80(18). bant�y-p�lay rice-guard 228(17). bant�y-pint�` door-keeper 78(31). magbant�y stand guard 38(14). pagbabant�y a guarding 36(18). bantay�n be guarded 251(2). bant�yan sentry-box 248(16).

Bant�g family-n. 165(17).

bang�n granary 270(33).

-bangg�t: binangg�t was mentioned 90(23). n�bangg�t got mentioned 50(11).

bangk�` canoe 20(3). mamangk�` go boating 28(12). magsipamangk�` pl. 263(21). nam�mangk�` is boating 20(2). nags�sipamangk�` pl. 98(17). pamamangk�` a boating 239(32). pagbabangk�an boating-party 112(13). bangk�ro boatman 80(34). 316(11).

bangk�y corpse 46(30).

b�ngko S. banking-house 227(18).

bangk�` S. bench 30(29).

-bang�`: mabang�` fragrant 278(15). pabang�` perfume 222(38).

-b�ngon: nagb�b�ngon is getting up 70(36). kab�b�ngon there has been getting up 267(13).

bap�r S. steamship 56(24).

-bar�: bar�-bar� unruly 273(37).

bar�ha S. cards 173(3).

bar�so S. arm 138(31).

barb�ro S. barber 24(35).

bar�l gun 36(20). nagsipamar�l went shooting, pl. 28(25). pamamar�l a shooting 230(9). pinagb�bar�l is being shot 56(26). bar�l-bar�lan toy-gun 261(35). 293(18). maipabar�l be caused to be shot 52(23). 312(9). n�bar�l got shot 56(29).

b�riyo S. district of a town 70(11).

b�ro` blouse 205(20). magbar�` put on one's clothes 237(26). pamam�ro` clothing 110(33).

-b�sa: pagb�sa reading 227(3). bin�sa was read 299(18). bin�b�sa is being read 172(6). bas�han be read to 251(2). basah�n reading-room 137(16). mab�sa be able to be read 186(2). nab�sa has been read 244(3). 284(11). m�b�sa get read 52(12). n�b�sa got read 86(19). 293(2). pab�sa gospel-reading ordered by a communicant 251(13).

-bas�`: nags�sipagbas�` are getting themselves wet 110(23). nakabas�` caused to be wet 201(22).

b�sag a breaking, in: b�sag-�lo a head-smashing, free-for-all fight 262(7). b�sag-ul�ro ruffian 316(13). bas�g broken 30(10). mab�sag be broken 30(8). 283(21). 284(35). nab�sag has been broken 296(14). m�b�sag get broken 293(4).

-bast�`: nagbast�` packed up 232(5). pagbabast�an a packing up together 118(17).

b�so S. drinking-glass 137(39).

b�ta` boy, girl 30(33). See also b�hay. bin�ta` young man 90(28). pagkab�ta` childhood 86(22). 285(41).

batal�n platform of house 72(14).

Bath�la` God 54(42). 59.

-b�tis: nagb�b�tis is fording 104(42). bin�tis was forded 244(4).

bat� stone 30(7). 220(4). binat� was stoned 303(30).

b�o cocoanut-shell 108(32). 163(13).

b�o widower, widow 163(29). 256. nab�o was widowed 80(29). 285(29).

ba�l S. box, trunk 268(8).

b�on provisions 28(27).

-ba�n: pagbaba�n a burying 54(29). m�ba�n get buried 54(17). magpaba�n cause to be buried 54(24). ipinaba�n was caused to be buried 54(30).

b�wal forbidden 218(39).

b�wang garlic 36(22).

b�wat every 24(40). 48. 66. 132. 246.

-b�wi`: b�baw�in will be taken back 244(4) and Corrigenda. ikinab�wi` was the cause of being taken back 272(3).

-b�ya` (a) bay�an be permitted 46(37). 48(13). binay�an was permitted 78(31). bin�bay�an is being permitted 286(38). paub�ya` permitted 300(9). magp�pab�ya` will be neglectful 106(32). nagpab�ya` was neglectful 302(29). pabay�an be left alone 308(7). pinabay�an was left alone, not interfered with 168(23). 169(42). 308(6). (b) Accent shifted: pabay�` neglectful 300(25). kapabaya�n neglectfulness 310(39). pabaya�n be permitted 52(8). 237(29). 308(34).

bay�bas see biy�bas.

b�yad payment 54(9). b�yad-�tang debt-payment 178(29). bay�d paid 222(22). magb�yad pay 54(23). nagb�yad paid 232(6). b�bay�ran will be paid to 54(29). binay�ran was paid 54(11). bin�bay�ran is being paid for 74(3). pagbay�ran be settled with 54(32). pagb�bay�ran will be settled for 58(27). pinagbay�ran was settled for 255(6). pinagb�bay�ran is being atoned for 74(21). makab�b�yad will be able to pay 114(41).

b�yan town, district 22(27). See also k�pit, t�o. b�ya-ng-Bal�wag the town of Baliuag 20(3). b�ya-ng-Kam�lig 92(15). b�ya-ng-Mal�los 38(5). b�ya-ng-Marik�na 96(38). b�ya-ng-Mayn�la` 256(30). b�ya-ng-San-Mig�l 50(14). bay�n-bay�n various towns 50(8). nam�m�yan is dwelling in a town 50(34). kabab�yan fellow-townsman 60(12). 267(3). 291(37). magkabab�yan two or more fellow-townsmen 26(31). 270(10.17). makab�yan patriotic 288(30).

bay�w wife's brother, sister's husband 54(8). magbay�w two men, one of whom has married the other's sister 242(9).

-b�yo: ib�yo far side 80(36).

-bay�: pangbay� pestle 225(3). magbay� pound rice 232(7). magbab�yo rice-pounder 242(40).

bay�gin a tree, Pterospermum 237(39).

bay�ng palm-leaf sack 74(5).

b�bas jester 98(30).

bib�g mouth 30(20).

Biga� place-n. 116(25).

big�s hulled rice 104(15). magbig�s hull rice 232(8). magbib�gas rice-dealer 242(41). bigas�n be supplemented with rice 251(3). containing uncooked rice 261(10). b�g�san rice-mill 203(3). B�g�sa-ng-Sum�long-at-Kasamah�n Rice-Mill of Sumulong and Company 210(34).

big�t weight 226(36). kabigat�n heaviness 158(12). nakab�big�t is making heavy 32(10). mabig�t heavy, grave 58(34). mabibig�t pl. 118(22). pabig�t weighting 110(7). n�pakabig�t too severe 313(10).

big�y that given 220(24). big�y-lo�b favor 210(27). pagbibig�y-lo�b a doing favors 60(23). 235(26). nagbig�y gave 76(35). nagb�big�y is giving 60(38). pagbibig�y a giving 50(30). ibig�y be given 42(43). ib�big�y will be given 16(28). ibinig�y was given 20(14). ibin�big�y is being given 40(11). bigy�n be given to 26(2). b�bigy�n will be given to 74(42). binigy�n was given to 32(15). b�g�yan receiver 258(22). kab�g�yan one of two who give to each other 277(36). mapagbig�y over-indulgent 289(25). tagapagbig�y hander-out 315(41).

-bigk�s: nagb�bigk�s is pronouncing 231(24). bin�bigk�s is being pronounced 98(38).

bigl�` suddenly 82(40). pabigl�` in sudden manner 68(10).

bigt� strangled 223(24). bumigt� strangled 227(3). pagbigt� a strangling 227(4). nagbigt� strangled himself 233(29). pagbibigt� a strangling oneself 233(29). bigtih�n be strangled 22(22). bigt�han gallows 279(19).

b�ha cigarette-stub 205(21).

b�hag captive 233(1).

bih�sa` skilled 46(12).

bih�ra` seldom, rare 40(26). 42(21). 72(29). 106(39). 110(29). 112(13). magk�bih�ra` occur at odd times 114(27). 271(9).

b�his that donned 220(26). bih�s dressed up 222(23). nagb�his dressed himself up 232(10). nagb�b�his is dressing himself up 32(37). 96(21). magsipagb�his dress up, pl. 262(35). makapagb�his have dressed oneself 96(24). pinapagb�his was ordered to dress himself 32(14).

bi�k young pig 72(36).

-bil�`: kabil�` other side 16(23). 266(6). magk�bil�` be on both sides 16(7). 271(11).

b�lang number 24(5). bil�ng counted 222(24). pagb�lang a counting 285(24). b�bil�ngin will be counted 24(4). mab�lang having a number 114(1). pagk�b�lang count 291(2). tagab�lang counter 315(34).

bilangg�` prisoner 258(24). ib�bilangg�` will be put into prison 100(28). ibinilangg�` was put into prison 248(12). b�langg�an prison 201(31). n�bilangg�` got jailed 38(2). 198(1). ipab�bilangg�` will be caused to be put in prison 100(15).

bil�s wife's sister's husband 242(11). magbil�s two men whose wives are sisters 242(10).

bil�o large flat basket 74(5). 108(17).

bil� that bought 308(26). bil� nang bil� keeps buying 177(8). pangbil� used for buying 255(34). bumil� buy 120(19). pagbil� a buying 223(21). magbil� sell 249(22). nagbil� sold 233(30). nagb�bil� is selling 233(31). pagbibil� a selling 252(19). namil� bought in quantity 239(33). nam�mil� is shopping 249(9). b�bilh�n will be bought 203(18). binil� was bought 163(40). pinamil� was bought in quantity 246(41). ipagbil� be sold 98(36). ipinabil� was sold 249(21). ipinagb�bil� is being sold 74(8). binilh�n was bought from 251(5). pinagbilh�n was sold to 255(8). b�l�han market 258(24). ikabil� be the cause of buying 186(10). nak�bil� happened to buy 56(38). m�b�bil� will get bought 203(37). pabilh�n be caused to buy 34(5). makapagpabil� be able to cause to be bought 286(39).

b�lin commission, errand 221(27).

-bilm�t: pamilm�t used as fish-pole 249(28).

b�log circle 112(2). bil�g rounded, round 222(25). bum�log turned on a lathe 227(6). nam�log turned 188(26). bin�log was turned 244(5). bin�b�log is being turned 244(6). kabil�gan roundness 38(17). 152(17). 276(27). n�b�b�log gets turned 293(36). pabil�g in a circle, spherically 46(40). 48(4). 110(41).

-bendisiy�n S.: magbendisiy�n give blessing 96(26). nagb�bendisiy�n is blessing 98(3). pagbebendisiy�n a blessing 54(32). bin�bendisyun�n is being blessed 114(19). pagkabendisiy�n a having blessed 64(29). pagk�bendisiy�n a having chanced to bless 56(8). pabendisyun�n be caused to be blessed 54(17).

bend�ta S.: holy 96(25).

-biniy�g: nagb�biniy�g is baptizing 98(2). biny�gan person baptized 314(20).

bint�na` S. window 70(30).

bint�ng suspicion 36(29). nagbint�ng suspected 38(24). pagbintang�n be suspected 20(9). pinagbintang�n was suspected 16(21). n�p�pagbintang�n gets suspected 20(35). palabint�ngin given to suspicion 315(7).

bing� deaf 86(23). 167(8). ikinabing� was the cause of being deaf 295(17). nakab�bing� causes deafness 219(42). n�bing� got deaf 295(12).

b�ngit edge, brink 180(34). bum�ngit went to the brink 227(7). ibin�ngit was put on the edge 248(13). bining�tan was approached up to the brink 251(7). kin�b�bing�tan is been on the brink of 52(31). napab�ngit go to the brink 312(2).

birt�d S. occult quality 60(10).

b�ro` joke 220(27). pangbib�ro` a joking 40(39).

bir�ke S. blow-gun bullet 212(31).

b�sbol E. baseball 48(2). nagb�b�sbol is playing baseball 135(28).

bis�g arm, stick 70(28). 84(10).

bis�ta S. visitor, visitors 305(5). chapel 251(13).

b�siyo S. vice 163(21). 221(14).

bist�y sieve 74(5). magbibist�y screener 242(38).

bit�k crack 32(5).

-bit�w: binit�wan was let go of 66(34). 254(24). mang�kabit�w relax their hold 78(15).

-b�tay: ipab�tay be caused to be hanged 52(6).

bitb�t that carried by a part of it 122(2). binitb�t was carried 52(37). pagk�bitb�t the way of holding 253(24).

-bit�w: bumit�w let go 174(22). bit�wan be let go of 76(10). 254(25). binit�wan was let go of 44(22). pinagbitiw�n was variously let go of 256(16). mabit�wan be let go of 44(21). 288(23).

bit�ka intestine 38(30).

bit�ke (S.) blow-gun bullet 212(31).

biy�bas bay�bas S. guava, Pisidium guayava L. 236(17). 256(38). 283(11). mags�sipamiy�bas will go guava-picking, pl. 263(22).

-biy�bit: nangakabiy�bit were hanging 34(28).

-biy�bo: pagbibiy�bo swinging the feet 232(11). pinagb�biyab�han is being swung on 255(10).

-biy�k: biniy�k was split 244(7) Corrigenda. kabiy�k half, side 112(40).

Biy�rnes-S�nto Biyernes�nto S. Good Friday 20(1).

biy�tiko S.: viaticum 98(3).

biy�y that given liberty in a closed space 220(27). nagbiy�y set loose 232(13). nagpabiy�y caused to be set loose 302(20). p�biy�yan place for giving temporary liberty 88(26). 309(6).

Viy�la S. family-n. 277(16).

b�bo clown 241(34).

-bub�ng: bubung�n roof 38(22).

bubuw�t a kind of mouse 224(27).

-budb�d: ibinudb�d was strewn 32(18).

bugt�ng riddle 222(3). nags�sipagbugt�ngan tell each other riddles 114(32).

bug�k rotten, crazy 218(40).

buh�ngin sand 68(4). kabuhang�nan beach 68(4).

-b�hat: bum�hat lifted 189(34). buh�tin be lifted 283(29).

b�hay life 18(10). See also h�nap. buh�y alive 92(19). nam�m�hay is leading a life 104(27). pamum�hay way of living 30(30). ikab�b�hay will be the means of living 34(25). kabuh�yan livelihood 32(12). mab�b�hay will live 58(30). nab�hay lived 285(29). nab�b�hay is living 72(17). pagkab�hay a coming to life; staple food 285(41). 288(38). pagk�b�hay a lucky bringing to life 291(36).

b�ho` slender bamboo, Dendrocalamus 18(3).

buh�k hair 24(31).

buh�l knot 274(29). magbuh�l tie a knot 232(14).

-b�hos: ibin�hos was poured 30(20).

b�kas tomorrow 88(13). 262(2). kin�buk�san when the next day came 48(41). 190(27). 279(24).

buk�s opened 223(26). bum�buk�s is opening, intr. 227(10). magbuk�s open, tr. 228(35). pagbubuk�s an opening, tr. 26(31). buks�n be opened 78(30). binuks�n was opened 78(31). b�k�san aperture 84(43). mabuks�n be opened 86(1). 120(21). n�buks�n came open 22(2). 188(9).

b�kid field, estate, country 38(8). 74(1). 90(7). bukir�n estate, fields 92(35).

b�ko unripe cocoanut 316(8). tarab�ko trab�ko bald-headed 316(7).

buk�d beside, in addition to 54(5). 279. magkabuk�d two separately 269(43). magkakabuk�d pl. 279(9).

-b�kol: bukul�n covered with bumps 62(26). nagk�kab�kol is getting bumps 62(16).

b�la S. ball 46(38).

-b�lag (a) nakab�b�lag is causing blindness 280(35). m�b�lag get blinded 255(38). (b) Accent shifted: bul�g blinded, blind 22(29). n�bul�g went blind 296(16).

b�lak cluster of capoc cotton 247(2). Bulak�n place-n. 110(13). 260(5).

bulakl�k flower 189(2).

-bul�d: ibinul�d was pushed off 26(7).

buls� S. purse 112(21).

-b�lo: kabuluh�n importance 42(15). makabuluh�n important 271(16). 289(23).

bul�k rotten 218(40). nangabul�k became rotten, pl. 306(27). palab�l�kin easily decaying 315(8).

-bul�ng: kab�l�ngan one of two who whisper together 277(38). pabul�ng in whispers 114(5).

bund�k mountain 116(18). See also pa�. namund�k took to the mountains 52(38). pamumund�k a living in the mountains 52(42).

bunt�s pregnant 36(17).

bunt�n heap 116(34).

bunt�t tail, train 240(41). 244(40). 253(8). bunt�tan tail-end 72(3).

-bun�`: nagbun�` wrestled 66(32). nagb�bun�` is wrestling 86(40). pagbubun�` a wrestling 252(25). nakipagbun�` engaged in wrestling 66(27). kabun�` person with whom one wrestles 66(34).

-b�not: bun�t plucked up 225(26). cocoanut-fibre 221(11). bum�not plucked up 227(11). nagbun�t plucked up in quantity 237(27).

b�nga fruit; betel-fruit 16(15). 247(3). b�nga-ng-k�hoy fruit of a tree 36(1). magb�nga bear fruit 16(12).

bung�nga` maw 212(35).

bungb�ng piece of unsplit bamboo 110(31).

-b�rol: ibin�b�rol is being laid in state 112(30). kin�b�bur�lan is being lain in state in 114(4).

bus�bos slave 90(36).

b�ses S. voice 74(19).

B�stos S. place-n. 100(12). See also l�pa`.

bus�g satiated 223(27). p�busug�n be well fed up 305(10).

b�tas hole, hollow space 86(11). 104(10). b�tas-kar�yom needle's-eye 22(27). bum�tas make a hole 86(5). bin�tas was pierced 106(20). makab�tas have made a hole 86(8). nab�tas has been perforated 86(8). n�b�b�tas gets perforated 106(37). pinab�tas was caused to make a hole 86(9).

b�te S. bottle 120(22).

b�ti goodness 218(23). but�han be done well 220(10). ikinab�ti was the cause of improvement 287(43). kabut�han excellence, advantage 58(2). 62(3). makab�b�ti will cause to improve 28(35). nakab�b�ti causes to be well 226(33). mab�ti good, well 16(9). mabub�ti pl. 102(5). n�b�ti got better, reached a high point 294(22). 295(12). pinakamab�ti best 230(10). n�pakab�ti extreme 313(11).

botik�riyo S. apothecary 54(2).

b�til kernel of grain 316(33). gab�til as large as a grain 316(31).

-b�to S.: bum�to voted 227(13).

but� bone, seed 42(5). 108(7).

bo�` bu�` whole, entire 34(29). 66. 98. 261.

-buw�l: nagbuw�l felled 199(25). 232(14). ibuw�l be felled 178(33). ibinuw�l was felled 270(27) nabuw�l has been felled 253(4). 294(5).

buw�n moon, month 38(18). 110(13).

buw�s interest on money 227(18).

buw�sit repulsive 98(16). 219(1). binuw�sit was annoyed 58(26). kin�b�buwis�tan is being abhorred 94(27).

D(R)

da�n ra�n hundred 52(43). 17. 134.

da�n way, road 32(3). da�-ng-Bal�wag road to Baliuag 220(3). magda�n pass by 68(7). nagda�n passed by, past 24(40). 76(36). nagd�da�n is passing by 26(11). pagdada�n a passing by 254(20). ida�n be left on the way 248(15). dinaan�n was run over, was called for on the way 251(9). 254(29). dina�nan was assailed 254(25). din�da�nan is being assailed 254(27). pinagd�daan�n is being gone through 30(30). 82(7). pinagda�nan was traversed 32(24). 256(10). d��nan usual route 258(26). nagd�d��nan are passing on the way 234(31). makara�n have passed 16(11). nakara�n has passed 18(38). pagkara�n a having passed 24(11). nak�ra�n nak�da�n came upon 18(32). para�n manner, means 42(12).

dag�` rat 84(20).

-dag�n: dinagan�n was lain upon 44(38). magk�dag�n be one on top of the other 270(24). magk�k�dag�n will be one on top of the other 270(26). nagk�dag�n were one on top of the other 270(30). nagk�k�dag�n are one on top of the other 270(33). nagk�k�dag�n-dag�n pl. 108(24).

d�gat sea 110(19). dag�t-dag�tan lake 261(34).

d�gok blow with the fist 256(23) pinagdadaguk�n was variously struck at 84(21) and Corrigenda. pinagd�dadaguk�n is being variously struck at 256(22).

d�hil cause 16(4). 78(33). 143(15). 206(10). 280. dahil�n cause 22(6). 280. nagd�dahil�n is alleging as cause 187(10).

d�hon leaf 16(9). nagd�d�hon is putting out leaves 232(16).

d�ing that laid open 250(37). da�ng laid open 222(29). din�ing was laid open 244(7).

-da�ng: dum�da�ng is complaining 40(41).

-d�ka: pagd�ka immediately 18(42). kar�ka-r�ka at once 207(20). 267(30). pagkar�ka at once 288(40). 265(5.9).

d�la fishnet 240(7). din�la was caught with the net 244(8).

dal� that borne 34(22) 38(27.34). dumal� bear up 233(16). dum�dal� is bearing up 227(14). magdal� bring, carry 106(32). 233(17). nagdal� brought 28(27). nagd�dal� is bringing 48(33). 72(35). 233(32). pagdadal� a bringing 251(12). dalh�n be carried 32(2). d�dalh�n will be carried 34(4). dinal� was carried 56(24). din�dal� is being carried 40(19). dalh�n be carried to 251(11). makad�dal� will be able to carry 178(39). nakapagdal� was able to bring 286(35). nakapagd�dal� nakap�pagdal� nak�kapagdal� is able to bring 286(36). madal� be able to be carried 16(4). 283(25). mad�dal� will be able to be carried 34(31). nadal� was able to be carried 283(22). n�dal� got carried off 293(6). nagpadal� caused to be carried, sent 264(3). pagpapadal� a sending 48(17). ipadal� be sent 22(19). ipinadal� was sent 90(32). 306(7). ipinad�dal� is being sent 74(6). ipinagpapadal� were repeatedly sent 58(25). 307(26). pinadalh�n was sent to 58(6). m�ipadal� get sent 58(19).

dal�ga young woman 36(26).

dalamh�ti` grief 219(31). pagdadalamh�ti` a grieving 74(13). pakikipagdalamh�ti` a grieving along 112(26). kadalamhat�an grief 276(28).

daland�n orange 76(20).

-d�lang: dum�lang became infrequent 26(10). mad�lang infrequent 289(4). padal�ngin be made infrequent 304(35). p�dalang�n be made very infrequent 305(14).

dalangh�ta` tangerine 294(28).

-dal�ngin: panal�ngin prayer 94(33).

-dal�s: dum�dal�s is growing frequent 68(16). kadalas�n frequency, frequently 40(40). 186(22). 262(4). madal�s frequent 46(24). 269(1).

d�law visitor 112(29). dum�law paid a visit 64(9). dum�d�law pays a visit 112(36). nags�sid�law pl. 112(25). pagd�law a visiting 86(28).

dalaw� see -law�.

dal�` hasten 221(41). d�l�-d�li` very quickly 34(1). 224(13). dali�n be done quickly 251(12). madal�` quick, soon 94(28). 102(11). 166(16). madal� ng �raw: nagm�madal�-ng-�raw it is dawning 235(21). --magmadal�` be quick 34(9). magm�madal�` will hurry 235(38). pagmamadal�` a hurrying 293(11).

dal�ri` finger 185(21).

-dal�: dumal� come for a purpose, to aid 34(1). 38(11). 304(1). nags�sidal� are coming 114(36). daluh�n be succored 58(39). dinaluh�n was attended 100(18). 251(14).

d�ma S. checkers 266(12).

-dam�g: magdam�g the whole night 190(35).

damd�m feeling 102(16). 219(32). dumamd�m felt 227(15). 233(37). magdamd�m feel oneself hurt 233(34). din�ramd�m is being regretted 82(9). 244(10). damd�min feeling, emotion 276(29). makiramd�m spy out 264(4). karamd�man illness 207(31). nak�ramd�m felt 68(3). 292(32). nak�r�ramd�m is feeling 42(43). n�ramdam�n was felt 201(26). n�r�ramdam�n is being felt 70(6).

d�mi multitude 112(21). 267(27). dum�mi grew in number 60(32). dinam�han was made numerous 251(15). karam�han numerousness, majority 34(33). 198(9). 66. 132. mar�mi many 20(13). 28(27). 69. 71. 99. 110. 138.

dam�t garment, cloth 52(22). 169(2). pananam�t clothing 32(33). 219(14).

dam� ram� grass 76(28). See also kalab�w, p�no`. dinamuh�n was cut grass from 251(16). dam�han grass-field 18(33). 259(17).

d�mot stinginess 268(5). kayd�mot kar�mot what stinginess 268(5). kayd�mot-d�mot what great stinginess 268(4). karam�tan stinginess 34(18). mar�mot stingy 60(22). marar�mot pl. 112(8).

-d�niw?: karaniy�wan karaniy�an usual, usually 36(15). 40(9). 262(6).

dang�l honesty, honor 218(26). kar�ng�lan honoring 90(13).

-dap�`: dumap�` lay down on his face 227(17). nagd�dap�-dap�an pretends to fall on his face 108(18). nagkangdad�pa` sustained repeated falls on his face 70(35). 269(29). nagk�kangdad�pa` is falling repeatedly on his face 269(31). nakadap�` is prone 281(12). n�rap�` fell on his face 295(30). Corrigenda. pagk�rap�` a falling on one's face 295(39). napadap�` had himself laid on his face 311(27). n�parap�` fell on his face 312(11).

d�pat necessary, fitting 22(1). 36(9.20). 268. karapat�n due, right 276(8). mar�pat deserving 80(20). n�r�r�pat is appropriate 80(13). 276(29).

Rafay�l S. n. 270(5).

-d�pit: pagd�pit a calling for 114(39). ipinad�d�pit is being caused to be called for 114(18).

-d�po`: dum�po` struck, landed 16(31). pagd�po` a hitting, landing 64(31). 68(16). dinap�an was landed on, was hit 96(28). 251(18).

dar�s adze 58(14). pagdar�s a chopping with the adze 60(3). daras�n be trimmed with the adze 58(17). dinar�s was trimmed with the adze 58(32). pinagdaras�n was variously hewn off 58(17).

Daruw�n E. family-n. 245(9).

-das�l (S.): magdas�l say prayers 78(37). nagd�das�l is saying prayers 64(36). nags�sipagdas�l pl. 114(30). pagdadas�l a praying 104(4). pinagd�dasal�n is being prayed in 104(17). d�s�lan rosary 76(43).

d�tapuwat but 16(4). 318. 322.

d�ti formerly; since long ago 44(23). 64(18). 262(3). par�ti often 18(8). 30(28). 262(12).

-d�tig: kad�tig kar�tig bordering on, next to 256(32). 266(9). magkar�tig bordering on each other 270(2). n�k�kar�tig borders on 296(27).

-dat�ng: dumat�ng arrive 18(37). arrived 20(14). nagsidat�ng pl. 118(34). 232(1). dum�rat�ng is arriving 18(35). d�rat�ng will arrive 52(2). pagdat�n an arriving 48(12). 56(25). datn�n be reached 56(32). dinatn�n was reached 46(3). din�ratn�n is being reached 64(7). kar�rat�ng there has been arriving 151(31). makarat�ng have arrived 82(38). 100(1). nakarat�ng has arrived 34(21). m�datn�n be come upon 88(36).

-d�os: pagdad�os a performing 20(5). id�os be performed 264(32). idin�os was performed 274(15). idin�d�os is being performed 92(24). 114(29).

d�w r�w he says, they say 17. 47. 217.

-d�ya`: magd�d�ya` will cheat 18(24).

d�yap the lime 76(20).

d�` not 38(17). 237. 239. 301.

-rib�l S.: karib�l rival 46(21).

dibd�b the chest 212(9).

-dikd�k: dikdik�n be crushed 16(25).

dik�n mat on which dishes are set 221(32).

dik�t blaze 220(30). pangparik�t kindlings 158(10).

-dik�t: idinik� was pasted 52(10).

dik�la S. (de cola) train 262(41).

d�la` tongue 251(21). 306(21). dil�an be licked 251(22). dinil�an was shown the tongue (as insult) 251(20).

-d�lat: nad�lat came open 24(24).

-dil�w: madidil�w yellow, pl. 291(19).

-dil�g: pangdil�g implements for sprinkling 225(4). nangd�dil�g is sprinkling 239(34). pangdidil�g a sprinkling 239(35). dilig�n be sprinkled 244(11).

dil�m darkness 36(5). dumil�m it grew dark 52(29). pagdil�m a growing dark 36(32). kadilim�n darkness 72(1). madil�m dark 40(15).

Del-Pil�r S. family-n. 241(25).

rel�s S. watch 137(41).

dim�niyo S. demon 40(5).

d�n r�n also, again 18(16). 17. 47. 218. 221. 227. 238. 239. 262(11).

dind�ng, see dingd�ng.

d�ne r�ne loc. of ir�: here 316 (27). 17. 47. 263. n�r�rin� is here 74(21). par�ne come here 301(33). pumar�ne come here 302(8). napar�ne came here 312(3).

-din�g: mak�rin�g hear 24(18). nak�rin�g heard 20(19). 292(33). m�rin�g be heard 28(19). n�rin�g was heard 20(41). n�r�rin�g is being heard 114(12). pagk�rin�g a hearing 18(13). 176(41).

dingd�ng dind�ng wall 62(20).

Ris�l S. family-n., Rizal 275(43).

desgr�siya S. misfortune 276(39).

-dist�no S.: idinist�no was assigned to the parish 96(2). n�dist�no got assigned 50(9).

ret�so S. patch 239(10).

-retr�to S.: retrat�han be photographed 281(14).

d�to r�to loc. of it�: here, hither; to him 16(4). 18(22). 316(27). 17. 47. 263. 280. n�r�rit� is here 70(26). 184(36). 203(6). pum�par�to comes here 204(18). p�par�to will come here 302(11). 306(11). pagpar�to a coming here 203(5). pin�par�to is being sent here 104(20). ipinar�to was come here for 307(1). napar�to came here 44(9). nap�par�to comes here 191(16). m�par�to get here 184(35). m�p�par�to will get here 312(15). n�par�to got here 312(13). n�p�par�to gets here 312(15). pagk�par�to a getting here 313(1). mak�par�-par�to never come here 313(3) Corrigenda.

-d�wang: nagd�wang celebrated 275(43). pagdir�wang a celebrating 90(13). ipinagd�d�wang is being celebrated 110(12). 249(23).

diy�n riy�n loc. of iy�n: there, thither, from there 182(27). 316(27). 17. 47. 263. n�riy�n went there, was there 191(14). p�pariy�n will go there 302(13).

diy�riyo S. newspaper 284(11).

Diy�go S. n. 100(40).

Diy�s S. God 64(4). 182(40). 59.

-dugt�ng: idinugt�ng was said in continuation 80(28). 102(19).

dug�` blood 22(8). nagdudug�` bled profusely 88(28). 282(38). pagdudug�` a bleeding 46(8).

-d�kit: dum�kit carved 88(8). pangdud�kit sculpture 90(3). mangdud�kit mandur�kit carver, sculptor 86(18). 104(8). duk�tin be carved 90(11). din�kit was carved 90(9).

-dukl�y: nagd�dukl�y-dukl�y keeps blurting out 114(15).

dokt� S. learned man 168(9).

-d�kot: idin�d�kot is being scooped out 110(2).

d�lang low table 252(1).

-dul�s: madul�s slippery 313(41). m�dul�s slip 313(35). pagk�dul�s a slipping 313(39). magpadul�s let oneself slide 313(36). pagpapadul�s a letting oneself slide 294(29).

d�lo end 16(7). d�lo-ng-band�-ng-kaliw�` left-hand end 274(28). d�lo-ng-band�-ng-k�nan right-hand end 211(1). dul�han end part, back yard 34(38).

Roman�smo S. Romanism 56(14).

-dum�: pagdum� defecation 42(4). marum� dirty 94(7). 219 (36).

Don-Nas�riyo S. n. 116(26).

d�nong knowledge 28(15). kar�nong what wisdom 173(42). karun�ngan wisdom 276(30). mar�nong wise, knowing, knowing how to 16(1). 26(1). 269(8). pagmamar�nong a pretending to be wise 167(29). pagpapakamar�nong a making oneself wise 309(24). pinakamar�nong wisest 309(40). marur�nong pl. 48(10). nagpar�nong caused to be educated 90(40).

-dung�: nagd�dung� is shy 285(17).

d�ro` stitch 224(1). dur�in be pricked 244(1). dur�an be stuck into 251(22). a spit 221(8). duru�n place for sticking 260(6).

-d�rog: din�rog was crumbled 32(18).

d�sa suffering 245(18). pagdud�sa a suffering 76(24). par�sa punishment 16(28). nagp�par�sa is causing to suffer 42(9). pagpapar�sa a causing to suffer 42(16). ipinar�r�sa is being caused to be suffered 313(10). parus�han be punished 16(22). par�rus�han will be punished 16(24). pinarus�han was punished 292(19). pinar�rus�han is being punished 222(18). 233(1). 308(8). p�rusah�n place of punishment 74(21). 309(12). m�p�parus�han will get punished 22(5). 313(6).

ros�riyo S. rosary 104(4). magros�riyo pray a rosary 104(17).

R�so S. Russian 306(19).

do�n ro�n ron loc. of iy�n: there; to him, to it 18(40). 38(17). 316(27). 17. 47. 263. dumo�n go there 20(26). magkaro�n get, have 96(3). nagkaro�n got, had 24(35). 52(30). 268(25). kin�d�roon�n is been in 74(33). 90(18). 279(13). n�ro�n n�ndon got there, is there 36(33). 193(15). 39. 468. n�r�ro�n is there 42(36). 74(12). 264(10). paro�n go there 301(33). pumaro�n go there 20(15). went there 76(27). p�paro�n will go there 88(13). 207(30). 302(18). pagparo�n a going there 72(40). 302(16). parun�n be gone to 70(34). pinaroon�n pinaron�n pinarun�n was gone to 46(4). 138(37). ikin�paro�n was the cause of going there 310(11). makapar�n be able to go there 100(16). naparo�n went there 20(23). 312(5). pagk�paro�n a getting there 300(9).

-do�p: pinagd�do�p were brought together (hands) 96(8).

duw�g coward 312(22). kaduw�gan cowardice 116(14).

duw�nde S. dwarf, elf 30(24).

D�ytsland E. n. of a ship 268(29).

G.

-ga�n: maga�n light, easy 48(2). 255(2).

ga�no, see an�.

gab� night, evening 36(2). See also �raw. gab�-gab� every night 62(38). 331. gin�gab� is being overtaken by night 244(12). kagab� last night 190(15). 259.

g�ga madwoman 44(25).

gagamb� spider 262(23).

-g�lang: mag�lang polite 237(19). 289(5).

-g�law: pagg�law a moving 192(20).

g�ling coming from 40(5). 193(18). nangg�ling came from 193(22). nangg�g�ling is coming from 193(22). pinanggal�ngan was come from 256(30). pinangg�gal�ngan is being come from 32(30). kag�g�ling there has just been coming from 267(14).

gal�ng skill 58(6). gumal�ng got well 54(10). magal�ng skilful; well 46(29). 269(2). magagal�ng pl. 94(32). pagpapagal�ng a causing to get well 42(22).

g�lit (a) anger 22(15). ikag�lit be the cause of anger 195(39). ikinag�lit was the cause of anger 303(24). kinagal�tan was the object of anger 274(15). kinag�gal�tan is the object of anger 40(36). nag�lit got angry 16(20). nag�g�lit gets angry 106(28). pagkag�lit a getting angry 176(39). n�kagal�tan happened to be the object of anger 52(40). 298(28). magpag�lit cause to get angry 98(32). palagalit�n hot-head 315(18). --(b) Accent shifted: gal�t angry 177(39). kagal�t at odds 266(39). nagkagal�t had a falling out 269(19). pagkakagal�t a falling out 155(27). 269(19). nagkag�-kagal�t got angry at each other, pl. 269(25). k�gal�tan quarrel 236(36). 279(34). pagkak�gal�tan a quarreling together 222(42). 279(39).

-gamb�la`: nagamb�la` was disturbed 284(36). n�gamb�la` was unintentionally disturbed 293(8).

g�mit that used 46(39). gam�t used, second-hand 183(15). gum�mit use 58(14). used 94(4). gum�g�mit is using 202(17). pagg�mit a using 56(37). gam�tin be used 161(20). g�gam�tin will be used 234(22). gin�mit was used 60(26). gin�g�mit is being used 40(35). gam�tan be used on 58(16). kagamit�n use, employment 36(23). 120(15). mag�mit be able to be used 20(5). 74(7). 283(26). nag�mit was able to be used 230(14). n�g�mit was accidentally used 293(10). pagk�g�mit the way of using, chance ability to use 240(3). 291(40). ipinag�g�mit is being caused to be used 306(9).

gam�t medicine 54(9). panggam�t means of curing 46(14). gumam�t cure 46(13). gum�gam�t is curing 46(16). paggam�t a curing 42(15). manggagam�t manggag�mot physician 28(24). 44(28.30). 243(10). panggagam�t curing 42(25). gamut�n be treated 46(23). ginam�t was treated 46(4). gin�gam�t is being treated 290(13). ipinagam�t was caused to be treated 54(8).

-g�na S.: gum�g�na is earning 227(18).

gan� concern 98(6). 281(25). 198.

gand� beauty 70(11). magand� beautiful 48(15). 152(3). magagand� pl. 72(19). nagp�pagand� is causing to be beautiful 48(18).

ganit�, see it�.

ganiy�n, see iy�n.

gant� that given in return 90(12). 200(33). 272(11). gant� ng p�la`: gumant�-ng-p�la` return favors 231(14). gumant� act in retaliation 227(19). manghigant� take vengeance 24(25). 241(19). mangh�higant� will take vengeance 241(21). gantih�n be given return for 58(9). panghigantih�n be the object of vengeance 40(38).

g�no, see an�.

gano�n, see iy�n.

-g�pang: gum�g�pang is crawling 18(3). pagg�pang a crawling 18(4).

-g�pas: pangg�pas kind of knife 225(5). gum�pas cut, slice 227(20). pinangg�gap�san is being cut from 256(32).

-g�pos: igin�pos was tied down 58(31).

-gast� S.: paggast� a spending 248(11).

g�stos S. expense 54(27).

g�tas milk 175(1).

gaw�` that done 54(20). 74(8). 240(34). 277(24). gumaw�` do, make 244(35). paggaw�` a making, doing 86(10). 202(36). gaw�n be done, made 24(17). g�gaw�n will be made, done 32(6). 104(1). ginaw�` was done, made 20(36). gin�gaw�` is being done, made 44(3.9). pinaggagaw�` was variously done 310(8). ginawa�n was done to 74(40). 76(3.6). g�w�an workshop 58(41). gawa�n factory 315(35). kagagaw�n surprisingly, illicitly done 277(23). nakagaw�` succeeded in making 86(7). nakag�gaw�` is able to make 281(28). magaw�` be able to be done 30(6). 56(2). mag�gaw�` will be able to be done 18(20). 74(27). nagaw�` has been done 54(40). nag�gaw�` can be done 102(30). pagkagaw�` a having made, ability to make 282(10.28). mapaggaw�` given to doing 98(31). m�gaw�` chance to be done 238(36). pagk�gaw�` the way making turned out 291(3). pagaw�` ordered to be made 104(11). nagpagaw�` caused to be made 104(8). ipinagaw�` was caused to be made 104(15).

gaw�` direction 163(28). 193(28).

g�ya like 18(8). 316(30). 272.

gay�n, see iy�n.

gib�` broken-down 225(9). gib�-gib�` tumble-down 290(36). mang�gib�` collapse, pl. 296(3). mang�g�gib�` will collapse 296(5).

g�las energy, enterprise 48(32).

-g�lid: tag�lid side 315(27). tumag�lid turned the side to 231(17). pagtag�lid a moving side-ways 192(20). 231(17). tinagil�ran was hurt in the side 254(18). tinaligd�n was turned the side to 254(19). tagil�ran side wall, side part 261(29). n�t�tag�lid is inclined to one side 296(24).

gin�w cold feeling 280(38). nagin�w got cold 285(17).

g�liw respected 219(3).

-ginh�wa: guminh�wa became comfortable 227(20). gum�ginh�wa is getting comfortable 227(21). kaginhaw�han comfort, bliss 72(20). nakaginh�wa caused to be comfortable 280(36). maginh�wa comfortable 289(6). nagpaginh�wa caused to be comfortable 302(32).

g�ning Miss, Mrs. 256.

gint� gold 311(20).

gino� Mr., gentleman 54(37). 100(30). 219(3). 289(5). 256.

-g�ng 48. 250. 516.: mag�ng become 18(26). 314(18). mag�ging will become, take place 18(28). 94(23). nag�ng became, occurred 18(31). 36(38). 144(23). nag�ging is becoming, arising 42(5). 62(14). pagig�ng a becoming 314(19).

-g�sing (a) awaken, tr.: kag�g�sing there has been awakening 184(12). mak�g�sing accidentally awaken 62(11). nak�g�sing awakened 257(32). n�g�sing was accidentally awakened 293(12). napag�sing caused himself to be awakened 311(30). --(b) With accent shifted: wake up, intr.: ikin�gis�ng was the cause of waking up 158(9). m�gis�ng wake up 18(39). m�g�gis�ng will wake up 18(37). n�gis�ng woke up 38(21). pagk�gis�ng a waking up 62(18). pagis�n-gis�ng waking up now and then 300(36). n�pagis�ng woke up 312(39). palagising�n fitful sleeper 315(19).

gitn�` middle 16(7). 24(38).

gr�po S. group 90(25).

g�bat jungle 18(2). kagub�tan jungle country 118(40).

gubiy�rno S. government 92(32). 200(18).

-g�gol: gin�gol was spent 257(14). gin�g�gol is being spent 112(22).

g�lang age 38(6). 56(33). pagg�lang a growing ripe 272(22). mag�lang old, mature; parent 32(6). 283(39).

-g�lat: gulat�n scary 247(32). pagkag�lat a getting scared 285(42). pagk�g�lat astonishment 36(38). mapangg�lat given to scaring 289(36). magugulat�n jumpy 62(7). 290(4). n�pag�lat was astonished 30(22). 58(8). palagulat�n nervous person 315(20).

g�lay vegetable 72(36).

-gul�: nagkagul� was surprised 268(29). magul� confused 237(2). nagul� became confused 284(38). nag�gul� is confused 52(29).

gul�d hill 226(25).

g�lok bolo 38(27).

-g�mon: n�g�g�mon is trailing 98(20).

gunt�ng shears 26(2).

gup�t a cutting with scissors, hair-cut 219(13). panggup�t used for cutting, scissors 225(5). gumup�t cut 26(15). naggugup�t cut to bits 238(33). nagg�gugup�t is cutting to bits 238(34). paggugup�t a cutting to bits 273(33). manggup�t cut hair 26(1). nanggup�t did hair-cutting 167(2). manggugup�t manggug�pit hair-cutter 24(34). 243(11). panggugup�t hair-cutting 26(19). ginup�t was cut 60(6). gupit�n be sheared 26(3). nakagup�t was able to cut 281(29). pagkagup�t a having cut 250(32). nak�gup�t accidentally cut 290(12). n�gup�t chanced to be cut 293(38). pagk�gup�t a chance cutting 291(4.42). nagpagup�t allowed himself to be sheared 302(33). pagpapagup�t an allowing oneself to be sheared 302(34). ipinagup�t was caused to be cut 180(11).

g�ra S. cap 246(4).

gur�` teacher 80(40).

gust� S.: desired, liked 16(29). 52(22). 267. paggust� a desiring 18(21). gustuh�n be desired 114(41). nagkagust� conceived a desire 268(31). ipinagkagust� was the cause of desiring 272(33). ikin�g�gust� is the cause of liking 273(31). pinagk�kagustuh�n is being liked by many 275(7). magust�hin fond 110(1). 289(42). pagk�gust� a coming to desire 24(1). 92(36). m�gustuh�n happen to be liked 74(2). n�g�gustuh�n is liked 209(25).

g�tom hunger 28(32). gut�m hungry 76(8). gut�min be assailed by hunger 28(28). nag�g�tom is hungry 285(19). palagutum�n one who easily gets hungry 315(19).

guw�rdiya-sib�l guw�rdiya-siv�l S. gendarme, gendarmerie 20(20).

guwarnisiy�n S. harness 315(33).

g�ya` young of animal, calf 210(24). See b�hay.

H.

h�ba` length 56(39). hum�ba` grew long 38(30). kahab�an length 192(22). mah�ba` long 120(2). pinakamah�ba` longest 58(11). mahah�ba` pl. 18(15).

hab�gat spring wind 227(40).

h�bang while, during 16(2). 292.

-h�bol: nags�sih�bol are pursuing 301(21). pagh�bol a pursuing 84(27). panghah�bol a chasing 116(7). hab�lin be pursued 18(10). hin�bol was pursued 88(24). hin�h�bol is being pursued 68(19). n�h�h�bol gets pursued 18(8). ipinah�bol was caused to be pursued 76(10). ipinah�h�bol is being caused to be pursued 72(32).

hagd�n ladder 270(31). hagd�nan stairway 106(11).

-h�gis: nagh�gis tossed 48(8). inih�gis was tossed 16(30). 248(17). mapangh�gis given to flinging 289(36). pahag�s with a toss 300(14) and Corrigenda.

-hagk, see hal�k.

-h�god: hum�h�god is stroking 98(21). hin�god was stroked 84(10).

Hag�noy place-n. 110(24).

-hakb�ng: h�hakb�ng will take a step 70(1). paghakb�ng a stepping 68(29).

-h�kot: paghah�k�tan a carting together 118(17).

halag� price 54(23). mahalag� dear 36(14). 234(41). pinakamahalag� most valued 42(1). 288(38). mahahalag� pl. 116(2).

-halakh�k: n�pahalakh�k burst into laughter 68(26).

hal�man garden-plant 72(36). h�laman�n garden, flower-pot 74(14). 260(38).

halay� S. jelly 253(38).

hal�ge post 64(23).

hal�k kiss 94(12). humal�k kissed 227(22). hagk�n be kissed 251(24). hinagk�n was kissed 94(10). mahagk�n be able to be kissed 92(26).

halimb�wa` example 48(23). 62(10). 265(2).

-halimh�m: hin�halimhim�n is being brooded on 102(18).

h�lo` that admixed 220(35). h�l�-h�lo` confused 50(15). hinal�an was mixed with 251(24). hin�hal�an is being given an admixture 108(6). halu�n mixing-vessel 260(8). pinah�hal�an is being caused to be given an admixture 108(7).

h�los almost 110(25). 265(3).

h�mak unfortunate, no-account 219(3). ik�pah�mak be the cause of coming to grief 310(12). ik�p�pah�mak will be the cause of coming to grief 310(14). m�pah�mak come to grief 312(22). m�p�pah�mak will become good-for-nothing 312(24). n�pah�mak came to grief 312(17). n�p�pah�mak is getting spoiled 312(19).

hamp�s whipping, whip 220(37). 221(42). hamp�s-l�pa` vagabond 211(4). maghamp�s-l�pa` be a vagabond 235(27). panghamp�s used as a whip 225(8). humamp�s hit with a whip 227(24). naghamp�s whipped himself 233(38). nagh�hahamp�s is whipping about 238(36). manghamp�s whip people 239(38). hampas�n be whipped 184(8). hinampas�n was struck with a whip 251(25). hamp�san whipping-bench 258(27). kahamp�san one of two who perform mutual flagellation 277(39). nahamp�s has been whipped 284(12). nak�hamp�s happened to hit 291(27). n�hamp�s was accidentally hit with a whip 293(14). pagk�hamp�s a chance hitting 62(17). 292(3). p�hampas�n be whipped harder 305(11).

h�mon a challenge 52(25). mangh�h�mon will challenge 48(24). manghah�mon challenger 48(29). hin�mon was challenged 48(32). hin�h�mon is being challenged 18(21).

h�nap that sought 76(23). h�nap-b�hay livelihood 271(40). magh�h�nap-b�hay will work for a livelihood 193(32). 235(30). hum�nap seek 74(23). pagh�nap a seeking 227(25). magh�nap earn 32(11). 233(39). paghah�nap the earning one's living 60(16). 102(7). maghan�p seek in quantity; search 237(28). paghahan�p a searching 52(29). han�pin be sought 92(12). 244(13). hin�nap was sought out 16(22). hin�h�nap is being sought 76(18). ih�nap be looked for 30(32). paghahanap�n a searching through a place 52(34). nah�nap has been sought 143(36). makapaghan�p have searched 287(20). nakapaghan�p has searched 287(18). pinahan�pan was ordered to be sought in 52(15).

hand�` a serving food 114(34). maghand�` serve 112(29). nagh�hand�` is serving 114(9). ih�hand�` will be served 237(36). inihand�` was served 299(11). inih�hand�` is being served out 62(36). nakahand�` is served 183(22). 281(4).

-hant�y: hantay�n be awaited 32(26). hinant�y was awaited 50(37).

hang�d aim, goal 46(36).

hang�l fool 276(31). kahangal�n foolishness 276(31).

-hangg�: hangg�han boundary 258(29). hangg�n limit 22(6).

hangg�ng until, up to 16(12). 68. 293.

h�ngin wind 118(31).

-h�ngo`: pagh�ngo` a rescuing 78(10). hin�ngo` was rescued 88(36). ikah�h�ngo` will be the means of rescuing 74(42). mah�ngo` be able to be rescued 74(23). mah�h�ngo` will be able to be rescued 78(2). nah�h�ngo` is being rescued 78(12).

h�pis grief 38(11). hin�pis was grieved 244(14). nah�h�pis is sad 285(20). pagkah�pis a grieving 74(25).

h�pon afternoon 18(39). 190(23.31). magh�pon whole day 112(9). 262(8). kah�pon yesterday 152(13). 172(6). 259. pagkah�pon a having supped 104(16).

Hap�n S. Japan 269(20).

Hapun�s S. Japanese 306(19).

h�rang obstruction 220(39). pangh�rang used as an obstruction 225(8). hum�rang held up 227(26). pagh�rang a holding up 198(21). nagh�rang made an obstruction 233(41). paghah�rang an obstructing 233(42). nangh�rang held people up 239(38). panghah�rang highway robbery 239(40). hin�rang was held up 282(36). ipinangh�rang was used in holding up 250(10). hinar�ngan was obstructed 251(27). pinanghar�ngan was the place of holding up 255(11). harang�n hold-up 197(9). paghaharang�n a holding up together 275(22). ikinah�rang was the cause of being held up 272(6). pagkah�rang a having held up 282(29). pagkapanghah�rang a having practised highway robbery 287(30). n�h�rang got held up 295(6). pagk�h�rang a chance holding up 292(5). pah�rang caused to be held up 197(10). pahar�ng crosswise 300(15). pagpapah�rang a causing to be held up 302(36). pinapangh�h�rang is being caused to practise highway robbery 305(22). ipinah�rang was caused to be held up 306(11).

har�p front 228(25). hum�har�p is facing 96(7). h�har�p will be present 96(18). hinar�p was faced 20(37). harap�n place in front of 24(37). kahar�p facing 98(21). n�har�p came to face 72(2).

hard�n S. garden 72(19).

h�ri` king 24(29). nagh�h�ri` is ruling 24(30). paghar�an be ruled 255(14). pinagh�har�an is being ruled 24(32). kahariy�n kingdom 24(36). 276(18).

-h�sa`: has�` sharpened 202(30). paghah�sa` a sharpening 232(16). ih�sa` be sharpened 248(19). has�an be given a sharp edge 251(28). paghas�an be sharpened on 255(15). hasa�n whetstone 255(15).

-h�tak: pagh�tak a tugging 78(8). hat�kin be pulled at 284(16). kahatak�n one of two who tug against each other 186(38).

h�ti` divide; that divided; mid- 222(1). h�ti ng gab�: nagh�h�ti-ng-gab� it is midnight 84(19). 235(24). kin�h�ti-ng-gabih�n was at midnight 38(21). 279(25). hat�` divided 222(31). pangh�ti` used for dividing 225(11). hum�ti` divided, halved 227(29). nagh�ti` distributed 234(1). paghah�ti` a distributing 234(3). naghat�` divided up, divided in quantity 237(30). paghahat�` a dividing in quantity 237(32). nangh�ti` shared orders 239(41). panghah�ti` a sharing orders 239(42). hin�ti` was divided 16(7). 244(4). pinaghat�` was divided in quantity 246(20). paghat�an be shared 28(34). ikinah�ti` was the cause of breaking in two 270(39). of being able to divide 272(9). nah�ti` has been divided 284(39). pagkah�ti` a having divided 282(31). nak�h�ti` chanced to divide 291(29). pagk�h�ti` a chance dividing 291(6). 292(8). pah�ti` ordered to be divided 299(14). pahat�` tending to halve 300(18). nagpah�ti` caused to be divided 302(38). pagpapah�ti` a causing to be divided 302(41). ipinh�ti` was caused to be divided 306(13). ipinagpah�ti` was caused to be divided up 307(19). pinahat�an was caused to be given his share 308(9). pinapahat�an was caused to be caused to to be given his share 308(41). kalah�ti` half 80(24). 273(21). 314(32). kalah�ti-ng-�raw half-day 118(26). kalah�ti-ng-�ras half-hour 66(36). magk�kalahat�` will be half through 104(17). 238(22). pangangalah�ti` a being halfway 24(6). 241(13). kalahat�an middle 261(27).

-hat�d: naghat�d conveyed 56(26). nagh�hat�d is conveying 98(3). paghahat�d an escorting 114(39). ihat�d be conveyed 34(6). ih�hat�d will be conveyed 104(28). inihat�d was conveyed 20(26). inih�hat�d is being conveyed 20(4). h�hatd�n will be conveyed to 175(1). hin�hatd�n is being conveyed to 190(10). pagh�hatd�n will be delivered to 20(9). pinaghatd�n was delivered to 255(16). pinagh�hatd�n is being delivered to 179(8). ipinahat�d was caused to be conveyed 294(28). napahat�d had himself conveyed 52(37).

h�tol advice 30(4). nagh�h�tol advises 74(30).

-h�wa: nak�h�h�wa is contagious 272(3).

h�wak that grasped 66(35). hum�wak took hold 78(7). pagh�wak a taking hold 227(31). hinaw�kan was taken hold of 66(26). makah�wak be able to take hold 22(22). nakah�wak has taken hold 281(14). nak�h�wak got hold of 290(18).

-h�yag (a): pah�yag that published 48(37). nagp�pah�yag causes to become public, announces 48(35). pagpapah�yag an announcing 90(22). ipinah�yag was caused to become public, was announced 56(6). p�hay�gan p�hayag�n newspaper 48(27). 236(41). See b�hay. --(b) with accent shift: h�y�gan public affair, public 236(37). n�hay�g got widely known 60(11).

h�yop animal; carabao 28(26).

-hig�`: paghig�` a going to bed 64(6). hin�hig�n is being slept on 102(26). h�g�an bed 244(22). hihig�n couch 62(12). kah�hig�` there has just been lying down 267(15). makahig�` be able to lie down 281(33). nakahig�` has lain down 86(39). nahig�` lay down 38(17). 285(34). nah�hig�` is in the act of lying down 285(35). m�hig�` get laid 295(8). nagpatihig�` suddenly lay down 313(20). m�patihig�` fall on one's back 313(37). n�p�patihig�` falls on his back 313(35).

hig�nte S. giant 32(31).

-hig�t: mahig�t with an excess 118(16).

-higp�t: mahigp�t firm, strict 42(40). mahihigp�t pl. 122(5).

h�kaw ear-ring 303(3). nagpah�kaw caused himself to be adorned with ear-rings 303(2).

-h�la: hum�h�la is dragging 118(20). pagh�la a dragging 118(22). hin�la was dragged 16(3). hin�h�la is being dragged 100(23). mah�h�la will be able to be dragged 80(27).

-hil�mos: panghil�mos water for washing hands 62(36).

hil�w raw 28(31). palahilaw�n kind of rice 315(20).

hil�ng request 219(34). humil�ng requested 186(18). hinil�ng was asked for 16(27). hin�hil�ng is being asked for 52(8). mapanghil�ng given to demanding 42(7).

h�l�ra S. row 34(20). makahil�ra be in single file 110(41). nakahil�ra is in single file 122(2).

-himb�ng: mahimb�ng sound, deep 296(39). n�himb�ng fell sound asleep 84(19).

h�na` weakness 18(7). hum�na` became weak, slow 227(34). nagh�na` made gentle 234(5). nangh�na` slackened up 240(2). nags�sipangh�na` are getting weak 108(28). kahin�an weakness, slowness 22(39). mah�na` weak, slow 22(33). mahih�na` pl. 149(20).

hin�la` suspicion 40(23). paghihin�la` a suspecting 84(39). hinin�la` was suspected 30(23). hin�hin�la` is being suspected 18(20). pinagh�hinal�an is the object of suspicion 40(21). m�pagh�hinal�an m�p�paghinal�an will get suspected 38(19). 298(19). n�pagh�hinal�an nap�paghinal�an gets suspected 298(15).

hind�` not, no 16(4). 152(7). 228. 237. 239. 301. 319. 340.

-hinh�n: mahihinh�n respectable, decent, pl. 94(11).

hint�y wait 206(1). maghint�y wait 153(4). naghint�y awaited 26(13). 30(14). nagh�hint�y is awaiting 48(12). paghihint�y a waiting 285(23). hinint�y was awaited 120(37).

hint�` a stopping; stop 22(26). 222(2). stopped 223(28). maghint�` stop 170(3). magsihint�` pl. 184(22). naghint�` stopped, ceased 18(3). 283(13). nagh�hint�` stops 110(36). nags�sipaghint�` pl. 112(5). ihint�` be stopped 104(19). hintu�n be ceased from 251(28). hinintu�n was ceased from 122(22). hint�an stopping-place 258(32). m�hint�` come to an end 60(37). n�hint�` got stopped 259(34). pahint�-hint�` stopping at intervals 300(30). pinahint�` was caused to stop 26(2). pinapaghint�` was caused to cease 84(31). ipinahint�` was caused to be stopped 241(1).

-hint�lot: pahint�lot a permit 116(2). 272(4). ipinah�hint�lot is being permitted 54(18). pahintul�tan be given permission 264(22). pinahintul�tan was given permission 264(39). pinah�hintul�tan is being given permission 122(6).

hin�g ripe 34(28). nagk�kahin�g are in part getting ripe 36(1). nahin�g got ripe 16(13). pagkahin�g a getting ripe 300(19). napahin�g was able to be caused to ripen 311(20). n�pahin�g came to be caused to ripen 312(27).

-hing�: hum�hing� is breathing 20(8). hining� breath 40(28). 228(29). makapaghing� be able to breathe 68(20). magpahing� rest 54(11). nagp�pahing� is resting 303(3). makapahing� be able to rest 311(2). makap�pahing� will have rested 311(4). nakapahing� has rested 310(43). nakap�pahing� has just rested, is rested 206(1). n�p�pahing� is resting, of animals 312(31). nang�p�pahing� pl. 312(37).

hing�`: paghing�` a requesting 227(35). manghing�` beg 34(18). nanghing�` begged 32(20). nags�sipanghing�` are begging 112(5). manghihing�` begger, beggar 112(16). makahing�` be able to ask for 281(33) mak�hing�` get by asking 32(22).

hip, see -�hip.

h�pag husband's sister, (woman's) brother's wife 242(13). magh�pag two women, one of whom is married to the other's brother 242(12).

h�pon kind of shrimp 259(6).

-hir�m: h�hir�m will borrow 227(36). manghir�m borrow 240(5). panghihir�m a borrowing 221(5). hinir�m was borrowed 174(22). h�r�man person borrowed from 258(34). kah�r�man one of two who borrow from each other 277(39). magkah�r�man two who borrow from each other 278(35). mak�kapanghir�m will be able to borrow 287(24). nak�kapanghir�m is able to borrow 287(22). mapanghir�m given to borrowing 289(37). papanghiram�n be caused to go and borrow 305(34). mapah�hir�m will be able to be caused to borrow, will be able to be lent to 311(21).

h�rap misery 22(5). 50(29). hir�p wearied 62(25). magh�h�rap will suffer 46(18). paghih�rap suffering 44(24). kahir�pan hardship 62(4). mah�rap difficult, poor 22(32). 36(19). 269(3). mahih�rap pl. 54(22). nahir�pan was pained, wearied 118(22). nah�hir�pan is being pained 44(12). nagp�pah�rap is causing to suffer 22(10). pagpapah�rap a causing to suffer 46(14). 273(1). pagpapakah�rap a taking pains 309(20). pah�hir�pan will be caused to suffer 44(10). 100(15).

Hes�s S. Jesus 285(42).

-hit�t: hitit�n be puffed at 66(13).

-hits� (S. ?): ihin�hits� is being tossed up 48(5). hinitsah�n was tossed to 48(7). n�pahits� got thrown upward 84(3).

hits�ra S. appearance 40(13). 106(11). 116(33).

-h�wa`: hin�wa` was slashed 20(33). 203(37).

-hiwal�y: maghiw�-hiwal�y part, separate, pl. 183(11). naghiwal�y parted (two persons) 88(17). naghiw�-hiwal�y pl. 26(34). 102(40). nagh�hiwal�y are parting 40(18). magk�hiwal�y go apart (two involuntary actors) 270(38). magk�k�hiw�-hiwal�y will part, pl. 26(32). nagk�hiw�-hiwal�y went apart, pl. 271(14).

hiy�` shame 72(12). 90(39). kahiy�-hiy�` arousing shame 58(13). kahiya�n be revered 274(18). makahiy�` given to embarrassment 288(31). nah�hiy�` is ashamed 285(20). mapangh�y�` given to embarrassing 289(38).

heyugraf�ya hewgraf�ya S. geography 82(1).

hub�d naked 223(29). maghub�d undress oneself 232(19). pinagh�hubar�n is being undressed in 255(18). nagpahub�d had himself undressed 303(5). pinapaghub�d was caused to undress himself 305(21). pinahubar�n was caused to be undressed 308(11).

h�gas dish-washing 219(36). nagh�h�gas is washing 114(7). maghuhug�s dish-washer 242(42). manghuhug�s id. 243(14). hin�hug�san is being washed 251(30). hugas�n place for dish-washing 260(8).

h�kay hole, ditch 24(38). huk�y hollowed 104(9). hum�kay dig 24(37). 152(32). dug 179(26). h�huk�yin h�huk�in will be dug 309(34). ihin�kay was dug for 248(19). hinuk�yan was dug up 179(27).

huk�m judge 18(26). h�k�man court of justice 54(31). paghuh�k�man session of court 54(34).

-h�la`: hum�la` predicted 277(37). mangh�la` tell fortunes 240(6). manghuh�la` fortune-teller 206(16).

h�li (a) that caught 220(41). 282(6). pangh�li means of catching 52(27). hum�li catch 108(5). 165(34). pagh�li a catching 108(3). nags�sih�li are catching 102(1). nangh�h�li goes catching 106(39). 240(6). panghuh�li a catching in quantity 106(24). manghuh�li catcher 56(20). 110(6). hul�hin be caught 52(16). 68(9). hin�li was caught 20(20). 84(31). hul�han be caught from 251(32). hulih�n a catching by many 260(9). pagkah�li a having caught 282(33). m�h�li get caught 52(22). 70(19). 102(3). n�h�li got caught 16(22). 44(16). n�h�h�li is getting caught, is caught 28(29). 309(7). nagpah�li allowed himself to be left behind 68(36). tagah�li catcher 165(34). --(b) Accent shifted: hul� late; last 20(30). 28(18). 222(31). panghul� last 226(10). k�hul�-hul�han very last 40(27). 280(17). m�hul� be late 235(39). m�h�hul� will be left behind 18(18). n�hul� was last 118(34). pagk�hul� a being left behind 18(31). 296(18). m�p�paghul� will all be caught 198(12). 297(20).

H�liyo S. n. 279(5).

Hol� S. Sulu 120(18).

h�lo` source, upstream 279(4).

-h�log: ih�log be dropped 168(19). ih�h�log will be dropped 64(43). hul�gan be dropped to 16(17). h�hul�gan will be dropped to 16(19). ipakih�log be dropped along 265(6). ipinakih�log was dropped along 265(9). ipinak�kih�log is being asked to be dropped along 265(10). ikinah�log was the cause of falling 74(38). kah�hul�gan will be fallen from 158(30). kinahul�gan was fallen from 274(19). kah�l�gan one of two who drop to each other 278(6). kahulug�n meaning 30(18). 120(24). nakah�log caused to drop 281(34). mah�log fall down 299(32). mah�h�log will fall down 22(12). nah�log fell down 24(7). pagkah�log a falling down 24(18). magpatihul�g throw oneself down 206(23). magp�patihul�g will throw himself down 313(28). nagpatihul�g threw himself down 313(21). nagp�patihul�g throws himself down 313(24).

h�ni chirp 197(21). hum�ni purred 84(1). h�n�han chirping together 202(21). kah�n�han one of two that chirp at each other 278(8). mapaghun� given to neighing 289(31). palah�n�hin given to neighing, chirping 315(15).

H�niyo S. June 110(11).

hungk�y winnowed 223(30) naghungk�y winnowed 232(21). hungk�yan winnowing-machine 258(36).

H�rdan S. Jordan 106(6).

hurn� S. oven 212(36).

h�say excellence 58(1). nags�sih�say are getting well 108(36). mah�say in good shape, excellent 46(5). 108(12). 269(4). pinakamah�say most excellent 28(38). mahuh�say pl. 196(22). n�h�say got well 44(24).

hust� S. just suited 108(40).

h�ta S. iota 30(16).

huw�g not, do not 20(13). 234. 239. 240.

Huw�n S. n. 20(2).

Huw�na S. n. 173(25).

huw�taw (C?) Chinese bowl 255(30).

huw�s S. judge 54(37).

huw�ting (C?) lottery 229(26).

I(E).

ib� other 22(10). 66. 98. 132. 251. 314. ib� t ib�: nakapag�ib�-t-ib� is able to alter 36(10). pinagibh�n was differed in 255(19). pagkak�ib� a being different 46(39). 276(31). n�ib� got different 294(24) n��ib� changes 50(17). pagk�ib� a being different 110(17).

�big liked, desired 20(18). 267. pag�big a desiring, loving 60(25). 64(4). in�big was desired, loved 18(15). 40(16). in��big is being desired, loved 92(20). �b�gan mutual love 259(28). mag�b�gan loved each other 236(29). nag��b�gan are loving each other 236(29). pagi�b�gan a loving each other 90(6). kaibig�n desire, affection 140(2). 168(38). ka�b�gan one of two who love each other 94(18). 140(2). 278(9). magka�b�gan two who love each other 42(30). 278(36). kayib�gan friend 16(5). 139(41). 278(17). magkayib�gan pair of friends 22(30). 278(37). magkakayib�gan pl. 26(30). 278(40). pagkakayib�gan a being friends 24(28). 278(30). makipagkayib�gan make friends with 40(6). 278(31). nakipagkayib�gan made friends with 86(30). k�ib�gan person loved 279(41). nagk�k�ib�gan are loving each other 90(32). 280(4). maibig�n fond of 96(39). 110(15).

�bon bird 197(21).

-�gi`: ma�gi` accurate 28(5).

ig�b that dipped 220(42). umig�b dip out 227(38). mangig�b fetch water 282(24).

Igor�te S. Igorote 110(33).

-�haw: ih�w roasted 222(32). mag�haw roast, tr. 232(21). in�haw was roasted 244(16). ihaw�n gridiron 295(9).

-�hip: um��hip is blowing 227(39). hin�pan was blown on 251(33).

ik�w thou 18(10). 47. 63. 182. See iy�, k�, m�.

-�kid: naka�kid is coiled up 120(21). taga�kid roller 315(35).

-ikl�`: kaikli�n shortness 192(21). maiikl�` short, pl. 24(31). n�pakaikl�` very short 221(17).

�lag go away 151(39). um�lag get out of the way 56(20). nagsi�lag got out of the way, pl. 118(34). um��lag is running away 116(7). pagi�lag a getting away 116(27). panging�lag an avoiding 102(2). 118(43). 240(8). il�gan inlag�n be avoided 238(42). inil�gan was avoided 251(37). in�il�gan is being avoided 36(22).

il�n a few; how many? 16(11). 66. 98. �il�n only a few 38(9). 48(28). mak�il�n several times 44(39). 298(33).

il�ng uncanny 40(9). pagil�ng a tricking 227(41). kail�ngan kayil�ngan necessity 58(16). 275(35). 288(12). nang�ngail�ngan requires 108(2). 275(38). pangangail�ngan a needing 236(32). 275(39). k�kailang�nin will be necessitated 275(39). kin�kail�ngan is being necessitated 46(11). 82(38). nail�ng was nonplussed 285(21).

-�lap: mai�lap wild, pl. 28(25).

�law light, lamp 122(5). ilaw�n lamp 286(27). ma�law illuminated 72(6).

elektrisid�d S. electricity 290(19).

-�lin: panging�lin performing of ceremonies 112(18).

�log river 16(2). �log-P�sig Pasig river 244(9).

Il�ko S. Iloko 275(8).

impiy�rno, see infiy�rno.

empl�yo S. employment 92(32).

imp� grandmother 59. 256. magimp� grandmother and grandchild 242(13).

in� mother 30(27). 151(22). 59. magin� mother and child 242(14). magiin� pl. 242(30). inah�n female 238(40). in�in� godmother 247(17).

-�nam: ma�nam handsome, pleasant 18(14). 269(5). p�in�man be made very pretty 308(37).

ind�` grandmother 59. 256.

-in�p: na�in�p is impatient 285(22).

�nit heat 134(19). in�t heated, angry 167(9). 222(33). um�nit became hot 227(42). nag�nit heated; grew angry 24(22). nag��nit is heating 234(6). kain�tan heat 118(20). ma�nit hot 50(9). mai�nit pl. 96(29). and Corrigenda. tagin�t hot season 152(20). 315(11). and Corrigenda.

iniy� prep. and loc. of kay�: your, you, by you, pl. 165. 169. niniy� disj., by you, of you, 163.

-inlag, see �lag.

infiy�rno impiy�rno S. hell 22(6).

entabl�do S. platform 98(40).

-intind� S.: n�intindih�n was understood 50(6).

Ints�k Chinese 56(34).

-in�: inin� was paid attention to 68(6). n�in� got noticed 100(3).

-in�m: umin�m drank 228(2). pagin�m a drinking 163(21). magiin�m drink much 206(26). m�nging�nom mangi�nom boozer 243(11). inin�m was drunk 230(11). inum�n drinking water 247(27). �num�nan water-shelf 259(22). �n�man drinking-party 257(25). ka�n�man one of two who drink together 277(40). mak�in�m accidentally drink 88(34). pina�in�m is being caused to drink 200(18). tagain�m one whose only duty it is to drink 315(36). tagapagpain�m one whose duty it is to give drink 316(2).

in�yat molasses 253(40).

-�ngat: nag�ngat was careful 288(13). nag��ngat is being careful 48(13). pagi�ngat a being careful 62(14). ing�tan be done carefully 227(31). paging�tan be given due care 255(20). ma�ngat careful 40(22).

�ngay noise 32(30). pagiing�y a making much noise 293(13). na�ngay made a sound 285(30). ma�ngay make a sound 106(5). noisy 295(16).

Inggl�s Inggl�ses S. English 155(24). 260(11).

ingkant�do S. enchanted 84(16).

engkantad�r S. enchanter 84(38).

ingk�ng grandfather 59. 256.

ip� rice-hulls 120(22).

-�pat, see �pat.

-�pon: nags�sipag�pon are gathering up 262(37). ma�pon have been gathered 34(12). na�pon has been gathered 60(32). m��pon get gathered 293(39).

ir� this 163(36). 64. nir� disj., of this, by this 316(18). 166. See also d�ne.

is� s� one, a 16(3). 67. 248. 261. 314. is� ng b�hay: kas�-ng-b�hay housemate 68(22). 266(37). is� ng da�n: ikais�-ng-da�n hundredth 273(22). is� ng laks�: ikais�-ng-laks�` millionth 273(23). is� ng l�bo: ikais�-ng-l�bo thousandth 273(23). is� ng p�`: pangs�-m-p�` number ten 225(40). ikas�-m-p�` tenth 212(38). 273(24). mak�s�-m-p�` ten times 64(19). �is� only one 36(20). is�-is� one by one 32(23). 76(19). 265(4). nagis�-is� acted one by one 239(16). inis�-is� were taken one by one 76(15).

isd�` fish 88(26). m�ngingisd�` fisherman 243(6). pal�isd�an fishpond 315(24).

�sip thought, intelligence; think 88(15). 159(29). 184(15). 222(2). pang�sip means of thinking 271(15). um�sip think 228(3). thought out 96(19). 100(15). pag�sip a thinking out 228(4). mag�sip take thought 200(23). 234(7). nag�sip took thought, planned 207(20). 233(8). pagi�sip a planning; thinking-power, reason 44(25). 98(34). 234(9). 252(31). 254(27). magis�p think of various things 237(33). nagis�p thought about, ransacked his mind 102(43). nag�is�p is variously thinking of 202(42). pagiis�p a searching through one's mind 30(16). is�pin be thought of 166(11). in�sip was thought of 170(4). pinag�sip was planned 246(14). pinagis�p was variously thought out 246(21). pagka�sip a having thought out 193(31). pagk��sip a chance thinking out 291(7). 292(11). nagpa�sip caused to be thought out 310(21). ipina�sip was caused to be thought of 306(18).

eskuw�la S. pupil 304(5). eskuw�lhan school 90(3).

Esp�niya S. Spain 80(40).

isp�rito S. spirit 66(23).

Est�dos-Un�dos S. United States 46(33).

estasiy�n S. station 116(20).

estudiy�nte S. student 26(29).

estop�do S. stew 182(2).

ist�riya S. history 271(6).

it�m black 36(40). itim�n be made black 251(40). kait�m what blackness 151(27). kaiit�m pl. 267(41). mait�m black 36(12). p�itim�n be made very black 308(37).

itl�g egg 28(31). pinangitlug�n was laid into 256(35). p�ngitl�gan place where eggs are laid 262(4).

it� yit� this, the latter, he, it 16(32). 64. nit� disj., of this, by this 20(34). 166. ganit� in this manner 26(7). 190. See also d�to.

-�wan: �wan (for i-�wan) be left 32(3). 140(3). ��wan will be left 248(21). in�wan was left 32(25). 44(42). in��wan is being left 248(22). kinaiw�nan was left in 237(34). na�wan has been left 32(27). nanga�wan pl. 120(33). n��wan got left 293(16). nagp�iw�n caused himself to be left 50(38). 304(26).

-iy�k: umiy�k weep, cry 186(35). um�iy�k is weeping 22(24). nags�siiy�k pl. 114(15). pagiy�k a weeping, crying 100(1). 228(6). in�iyak�n is being wept for 251(42). �y�kan a crying by many 100(4). 257(26). nag�y�kan wept together 32(8). ikin�iy�k was the cause of weeping 30(37). paiy�k-iy�k weeping at intervals 300(38). pagpapaiy�k a causing to cry 100(7). n�paiy�k burst into tears 90(20). palaiy�kin cry-baby 315(17).

iy�n y�n that 20(9). 64. niy�n disj., of that, by that 157(32). 166. ganiy�n in that manner 20(12). 102(22). 190. See also diy�n.

iy� y� prep. and loc. of ik�w: by thee, thee, thy 16(28). 165. 169.

iy�n y�n yo�n ya�n that, you, the former 16(9). 64. niy�n no�n disj., of that, by that, 34(27). 38(8). 50(27). 166. gay�n gano�n in that manner 18(19). 190. 238. 239. magk�gay�n happen thus 46(17). 271(10). See also do�n.

Eyur�pa Yur�pa S. Europe 82(2). 221(37).

K.

k� thou, enclitic form of ik�w 47. 63. 182.

kabaliyer�sa S. stable 181(39).

kab�n box; dry measure of 75 litres, equal to 25 sal�p; twenty-five 220(38). 228(36).

kab�yo S. horse 60(30). 288(25). See kinamatay�n. nang�ngab�yo is riding horseback 240(9). kab�-kabay�han hobby-horse 261(34). nakapang�ngab�yo is able to ride horseback 287(26).

kabiy�w: kumabiy�w press sugar-cane 228(6). kaby�wan cane-press 255(28). pagkabyaw�n be used to press cane in 255(27). pagk�kabyaw�n will be used to press cane in 255(28). pinagkabyaw�n was the place of pressing cane 255(24). pinagk�kabyaw�n is the place of cane-pressing 255(25).

kabuluh�n, see -b�lo.

kabut� mushroom 244(19).

-kag�t: pagkag�t a gnawing 36(4). 86(6). kinag�t was gnawed 76(9). kin�kag�t is being gnawed 106(30). pinagkakag�t was variously gnawed 84(24).

k�hit although; no matter; any 18(11). 22(3). 28(21). 48. 68. 248. 253. 264. 290. 294.

kah�n S. box 84(42). 120(20).

k�hoy wood; tree 32(33). 34(28). 58(1). See b�nga, pir�so, p�no`.

-k�in: kum�in eat 24(1). ate 16(16). kum�k�in is eating 42(8). k�k�in will eat 28(39). pagk�in an eating; food 28(33). 241(40). 254(5). nang�ng�in makes his food of 36(13). k�nin be eaten 293(20). boiled rice 72(34). kin�in was eaten 32(16). contents of stomach 275(7). mangin�in graze 18(33). 241(13). nang�ngin�in is grazing 18(2). pangingin�in a grazing 18(4). makapangin�in have grazed 18(36). kin�k�in is being eaten 36(15). kakan�n sweetmeats 108(6). nagk�kakan�n makes sweetmeats 236(7). pagk�nan be eaten from 255(30). k��nan eating-party 284(36). pagkak��nan an eating together 108(21). kain�n kakan�n dining-room 114(6). 230(12). makik�in eat along 192(40). mak�kik�in will eat along 264(6). nakik�in ate along 264(7). kak�k�in there has been eating 175(8). kak��nan one of two who eat together 278(9). makak�in be able to eat 94(30). 281(37). nak�in was able to be eaten 283(27). pagkak�in a having eaten 108(27). mak�k�in happen to eat 108(9). mak�pakik�in-k�in ever eat along 297(26). pangpak�in served as food 112(29). nagpak�in caused to be eaten 303(6). pagpapak�in a causing to eat 112(39). pak�nin be caused to eat 72(33). ipinakipak�in was asked to be caused to eat 307(37). tagak�in one whose task is merely to eat 315(37). tagapagpak�in one who is to serve food 316(4).

kaing�n a clearing 118(40).

kak�w S. cocoa 299(6).

k�ki S. khaki 122(2).

kalab�sa S. pumpkin 76(15).

kalab�w (S.) carabao 70(38). kalab�w-ram� grass-carabao, wild carabao 230(9).

kalab�t a touch 201(26). kak�lab�tan one of two who touch each other 277(41).

kalab�g a thud 24(4). kumalab�g fell with a thud 24(9). k�lab�gan thud of many objects 257(27).

kal�kal merchandise 236(31).

kal�may rice-paste 56(16).

kal�n stove, brazier 74(5).

kalas�ng clink 247(21). k�las�ngan clink of many objects 257(31).

-k�lat: pak�lat caused to be rumored 118(10).

k�law owl 18(29).

kalayk�y rake 225(25). kinalayk�y was raked 166(22).

k�lingk�ngan, see -lingk�ng.

kaliw�` left-hand 90(26). See band�.

kals�da, see kars�da.

k�luluw� soul 72(26). 268(15).

-kalusk�s: kumalusk�s pattered 228(6). k�lusk�san a pattering by many 84(20).

kam�lig storehouse 253(37). Also as place-n., see b�yan.

kam�tis (S.) tomato 268(26).

kamatsil� S. a tree, Pithecolobium dulce Benth. 247(1).

kam�y hand 22(9). nagk�m�yan shook hands with each other 234(10).

kamb�ng goat 112(40).

kam� we, excl. 20(38). 63. See �min.

kamis�ta S. shirt 122(2).

-kam�t: nagkam�t gained 232(22). k�kamt�n will be received 272(42). m�kamt�n get obtained 40(5). n�kamt�n got obtained 62(3).

kamp�na` S. church-bell 80(26).

kamp�t kitchen-knife 174(22).

kamp�n S. comrade 305(33).

-k�mot: kin�mot was scratched 84(2).

kam�te S. sweet-potato 253(2).

k�nan right-hand 90(26). See band�.

kand�ro S. lock 283(40).

kandid�to S. candidate 209(24).

kand�la` S. candle 50(29).

kandel�ro S. candlestick 293(5).

kanil�, see sil�.

kan�na a little while ago 22(17). 50(40). 262(5).

kan�no, see s�no. --kanit�, see kit�. --kaniy�, see siy�.

kaniy�` therefore 20(13). 241. 295. 297. 324.

kaniy�n S. cannon 252(9).

kaniyun�ro kaniyun�ros S. cannoneer 200(18). See trab�ho.

k�nser S. cancer 204(11).

kant� S. song 208(6). kumant� sing 110(32). kum�kant� is singing 228(8). nags�sikant� pl. 110(38). pagkant� a singing 112(3). nagk�kant� sings 112(2). kantah�n be sung 110(38). kinant� was sung 208(7). kantah�n be sung for 204(29). kant�han song in chorus 112(4). nagkant�han sang in chorus 200(20).

-kap�`: kumap�` felt out 228(9). kum�kap�` is groping for 228(10). nangap�` caught with his hand 240(10). kinap�` was groped out 244(21). nak�k�kap�` has come to be grasping 291(31).

kap�g when, if 187(12). 248(31). 48. 296. 300. 304.

-kap�l: makap�l thick 86(7).

Kapamp�ngan, see pangp�ng.

k�pit that held; a hold 66(29). k�pit-b�hay neighboring house, neighbor 38(10). 56(35). 211(5). magk�pit-b�hay pair of neighbors 242(22). magkak�pit-b�hay pl. 38(9). k�pit-b�yan neighboring town; person from the next town 46(7). 60(12). 211(7). pagk�pit a holding on 295(4). nagsik�pit took hold, pl. 78(11). nakak�pit has taken hold 64(22). n�k�k�pit is clinging 78(15). pakap�tin be caused to take hold 78(2).

k�pitan S. mayor 98(38).

kapit�n S. captain 254(34).

kap�te S. rain-coat 161(20).

k�puw�` fellow-; equally 36(39). 249. k�puw� t�o: magk�puw�-t�o two fellow-men 242(23).

karaniy�wan, see -d�niw.

k�rang covering of wagon or boat 118(21).

kar�yom needle 224(1). See b�tas.

kar�ra S. course 167(27).

kar�ta S. wagon 100(23).

karit�n S. cart 38(17).

karnab�l S. carnival 237(8).

karn� S. meat, beef 114(11).

kars�da kals�da S. street 201(22). 257(26).

karum�ta S. carriage 52(36).

kar�sa S. float 234(13).

kas�l (S.) wedding 219(38). married 54(19). 223(31). pagkakas�l a uniting in marriage 90(34). ikinas�l was united in marriage 94(29). m�kas�l get married 92(26). m�k�kas�l will get married 295(14). pagk�kas�l a getting married 94(35). pakas�l get married 168(16). ipakas�l be caused to be united in marriage 92(17). ipinakas�l was caused to be united in marriage 92(24). m�pakas�l get married 90(41).

kasaluk�yan, see -sal�koy.

kasapuw�go S. match 193(7).

kas�ra S. landlady 302(28). nang�ngas�ra eats in a boarding-house 240(11). p�ngaserah�n boarding-place 38(4). 262(9). nagp�pakas�ra keeps a boarding-house 303(8).

Kast�la` S. Spanish, Spaniard 28(3).

kat�m a plane 56(38). kumat�m use the plane 58(10). m�ngang�tam planer 56(34). pinagkatam�n was variously planed off; shavings 56(40).

kataw�n, see t�o.

kath�` that composed 221(2).

k�tiyaw fighting-cock 238(3).

k�tre S. bedstead 62(38).

katutur�n, see -tuw�d.

k�wad wire 284(22).

-k�wag: ikin�wag was shaken 78(14).

k�wal herd, troop 106(26). 116(6).

kaw�le` frying-pan 114(10).

k�w�wa`, see �wa`.

kaw�yan bamboo 34(37). See pant�y. kawayan�n kwayan�n bamboo-grove 260(42). 290(20).

k�wit pruning-knife 240(12). mang�wit prune; get tired of 240(12). nang�ng�wit is getting tired of 104(18).

kay, see si.

k�y k� than 16(9). 281.

k�ya ability, means 56(4). 226(35). 255(3). nang�ng�ya has mastery 240(14). ikak�ya be the cause of ability; means 54(22). mak�k�ya will come within the ability 16(16). nak�ya came within the ability 283(29). nak�k�ya comes within the ability 283(30).

kay�` else 40(5). so that 48(11). 47. 219. 297. 317(4). 321.

-k�yas: kay�s smoothed 222(34). kum�yas smoothed 228(11). nak�yas was able to be smoothed 283(31).

-kayil�`: ipinagkayil�` was lied about 60(18).

k�ylan k�lan when? 70(18). 92(2). 39. 262(7). (13). 317(5).

k�yo cloth 249(34). mangkakay� cloth-dealer 248(9).

kay� you, pl. 63. See iniy�.

kib�` least sound or movement 44(42). kumib�` make the least sound, budge 279(13). made the least sound, budged 44(5). pagkib�` a making the least sound or movement 104(25).

K�ka` (S.) short-n. (Francisca) 311(11).

K�ko` (S.) short-n. (Francisco) 50(36).

-kil�la: kilal� familiar 290(19). kumil�la make acknowledgement 90(40). kakil�la person with whom one is acquainted 60(23). pagk�kilanl�n be used as an advertisement 58(18). 279(28). nak�k�kil�la nak�k�kil�la is acquainted with 167(30). 276(8). 292(28). n�kil�la was perceived, got known 70(38). 104(2). m�pagkil�la be found out 40(20). 66(38). n�pagkil�la was realized 50(32). n�pagk�kil�la is being recognized 44(34). 52(1). nagpakil�la caused to be known 168(34). nagp�pakil�la is causing to be known, showing 44(24). pagpapakil�la a showing 52(25). ipakil�la be caused to be known 58(5). ipinakil�la was caused to be known 64(40). ipinak�kil�la is being shown 88(8). m�ipakil�la come to be shown 68(32).

-k�los: pagk�los a moving, intr. 44(35). 66(35). k�l�san concerted movement 264(4). makak�los be able to move 311(28).

kin�, see sin�.

kin�bang profit 263(39). pakikin�bang profit; holy communion 263(38). pakin�bang advantage 300(3). nagpakin�bang caused to profit, gave holy communion 98(4). pak�kinab�ngan will be profited from 94(26).

-kin�g: kumin�g trembled 42(41). 64(27).

-kin�g: makin�g hear 20(16). 30(17). mak�kin�g will hear 96(11). nakin�g heard 285(30). nak�kin�g is hearing 22(21). 96(5). pakingg�n be listened to 20(29). 308(12). pinakingg�n was listened to 50(27). n�pakingg�n happened to be heard 46(24).

k�nis skill 56(37). 102(22). kak�nis what cleverness, how clever? 102(14). mak�nis smooth, skilful 102(9). pinakamak�nis most skilful 102(14). makik�nis pl. 118(29). nakapagp�pak�nis is able to make smooth 58(14).

-kint�b: nagp�pakint�b is causing to shine, polishing 114(8).

-kingg, see kin�g.

-k�sig: mak�sig lively 78(23).

-k�ta: kum�ta find, earn 30(33). kum�k�ta is finding 30(37). pagk�ta an earning 60(37). magk�ta see each other (two actors) 234(10). magkik�ta pl. 28(1). 239(5). nagk�ta saw each other 203(40). kinakit�an was the place of seeing, was seen in 36(32). mak�k�ta happen to see, find 30(26). 66(6). mak�k�k�ta will happen to see 30(36). nak�k�ta happened to see 16(2). 40(27). nak�k�k�ta happens to see 292(31). m�k�ta get seen 30(25). 32(38). m�k�k�ta will be seen 22(37). n�k�ta got seen 20(24). 32(31). n�k�k�ta is getting seen 20(21). 26(4). pagk�k�ta a chance seeing 38(18). 80(12). 292(35). k�pakit�an one of two who show each other 310(36). nagp�pak�ta causes to be seen, shows 48(14). ipak�ta be shown 48(33). 306(21). ipinak�ta was caused to be seen, was shown 30(38). 34(18). m�ipak�ta come to be shown 28(15).

kit� thou and I; thou by me 16(19). 18(21). 63. 182. nit� disj., by, of thee and me 163. kanit� prep. and loc., thy and my, thee and me, by thee and me 227(17). 165. 169.

kit�` chicken 238(9).

kl�se S. class, school 26(36).

krist�l S. glass 255(21).

kristiy�no (Chinese brogue: kilistiy�no) S. Christian 58(39).

Kr�sto S. Christ 20(4).

kr�s S. cross; also as family-n. 20(24). 242(20). nagkur�s crossed himself 64(29). nagk�kur�s is crossing himself 64(5).

k� disj. of ak�: of me, by me 47. 163. 182.

k�ba` hump; hunchback 22(29).

-kubl�: nagkubl� concealed himself 94(5). nagk�kubl� is hiding (intr.) 232(23). pagkukubl� a hiding 186(14). nang�ngubl� is staying concealed 108(20). 240(16). pang�ngubl� a staying concealed 272(14). pinagk�kublih�n is being hidden in 94(8). kubl�han hiding-place 36(33). n�k�kubl� is in hiding 108(33). pagk�kubl� a being in hiding 108(23).

k�bo hut 118(27).

k�gon nipa, Imperata arundinacea 118(27).

-k�ha: kum�ha took 50(38). kum�k�ha is taking 112(7). k�nin be taken 202(10). kin�ha was taken 30(7). 84(25). kin�k�ha is being taken 74(26). pinagk�kuh� is being variously taken 74(7). pagk�nan be taken from 255(35). pagk�k�nan will be taken from 222(35). pinagk�nan was taken from 255(31). pinagk�k�nan is being taken from 255(33). ikinak�ha was the cause of taking 272(11). makak�k�ha will be able to take 56(40). nakak�ha has taken 90(24). nakak�k�ha succeeds in taking 54(4). pagkak�ha a completed taking 52(36). m�k�ha get taken 34(9). n�k�ha chanced to be taken 58(11). 267(7).

kuk� fingernail 234(23). manghinuk� cut the fingernails 241(24).

k�lam magic principle 40(11). mangkuk�lam sorcerer 40(1). See m�diko. kin�lam was bewitched 42(29). kin�k�lam is being bewitched 40(41). n�k�k�lam is bewitched 42(6).

k�lang lack 201(10). kul�ng made incomplete 222(35). nagk�k�lang is at fault 96(40).

-kul�pol: n�k�kulap�lan is encrusted 110(35).

Kul�s (S.) n. (for Nicol�s) 258(28).

Kul�sa (S.) n. 287(23).

k�lay color 171(21). kak�lay of the same color 266(10). kasingk�lay id. 314(37).

kulil�ng small bell 225(22).

k�lera S. cholera 42(3).

-kul�`: kum�kul�` is boiling, intr. 74(24). nagpakul�` caused to boil 96(20).

kul�g thunder 254(36).

kulug� wart 228(30).

-kul�ng: k�l�ngan place of imprisonment 86(4). kulung�n cage, crate 238(41). kin�k�kulung�n is the place of accidental imprisonment 86(5). n�k�kul�ng is imprisoned 84(42).

-kumbid� (S.): kinumbid� was summoned 20(19).

kompaniy� S. company 221(20).

-kumpis�l (S.) magkumpis�l go to confession 98(22). pagkukumpis�l a going to confession 98(12). nangumpis�l practised going to confession 98(28). nang�ngumpis�l goes to confession 56(13). kin�kumpis�l is being given confession 98(7). kump�s�lan confession 98(24). mapagkumpis�l given to going to confession 98(11). nagp�pakumpis�l gives confession 98(3). pagpapakumpis�l a giving confession 98(5). p�kumpis�lan confessional 96(37).

kump�l cluster 281(35).

kumpusisiy�n S. composition 90(15).

kumust� S. como est�? 230(39).

k�mot blanket, sheet 36(39).

-kun, see--k�ha.

kung when, if, whether 16(6). 45. 298-301.

kongkristiy�nos S., see kapat�d.

k�piya S. copy 52(10).

k�ra S. priest 50(3).

kur�l S. corral 268(42).

korb�ta S. necktie 163(36).

kur�pot stingy 112(16).

kor�yo S. mail 168(19).

-k�ro`: pinagk�k�ro` is being considered 82(24). mapagk�ro` be able to be divined 287(10). napagk�k�ro` is able to be divined 52(19). m�pagk�ro` get figured out 20(18). m�p�pagk�ro` will get figured out 182(20). n�pagk�ro` got figured out 297(13). n�p�pagk�ro` is divined, is understood 297(15).

kor�na S. crown 26(24).

-kur�s, see kr�s

-kur�t: kumur�t pinch 228(13). mangur�t pinch people 240(16). kurut�n be pinched 244(24). kurut�n be pinched from 251(43). k�r�tan a pinching by many 257(35).

k�sa` of its own accord 225(20).

kus�na` S. kitchen 114(9).

kosin�ro S. cook 114(1).

kut�ng kitten 255(37).

kuts�liyo S. table-knife 114(9).

kuts�ro S. driver 272(2).

k�to head-louse 225(16). See pamat�y. kutuh�n lousy person 260(10).

kuw�ko cigar-holder 220(34).

kuwalt� kuw�lta kuw�rta (S.) money 30(33). 141(27).

kuw�rto S. room 84(23).

-kuwayan, see kaw�yan.

-kuw�nta S.: pagkuw�nta a counting 223(6).

kuw�nto S. story 66(3). pagkukuw�nto a story-telling 286(5).

k�ya k�yang (C.) oldest brother 46(22). 118(15). 59. 254. magk�ya oldest brother with brother or sister 242(14). magkuk�ya pl. 242(30).

L

la�n that reserved 221(3). inil�la�n is being reserved 248(22).

-lab� S. ipagl�lab� will be washed for 174(40).

l�ban against 22(15). 282. lum�ban complete 60(40). lab�nan be opposed 60(36). laban�n war 251(1). nags�sipaglaban�n are fighting each other 122(15). paglalaban�n a fighting, war, battle 116(27). makipagl�ban engage in a contest 48(23). pakikipagl�ban an engaging in a contest 116(29). kal�ban opponent 266(11). kin�kal�ban is being opposed 60(38).

laban�s (S.) large radish 252(21).

lab�ng trough 289(3). labang�n manger 260(25).

lab�s the outside 52(38). lumab�s went out 52(34). lum�lab�s is going out 74(1). paglab�s a going out 245(3). maglab�s bring out 234(11). ilab�s be brought out 270(32). nil�labas�n is being come out at 42(14). nagl�l�b�san are going out together 236(16). m�ilab�s get taken out 110(4). palab�s theatrical performance 300(4). papalab�s going out 96(30). nagp�palab�s is bringing out, presenting 303(9).

lab� added to ten, -teen 58(12). 135. labi ng is�: panglab�-ng-is� number eleven 225(40). ika-lab�-ng-is� eleventh 273(24).

l�bis excessive 172(40).

lab�ng bamboo-sprout 172(25).

-ladl�d: iniladl�d was dropped 104(36).

lagabl�b blaze 231(6).

-lag�nap: lumag�nap circulated, intr. 34(29).

lag�ri` a saw 187(13). manglalagar�` food-sawer 243(17). mapaglagar�an be able to be sawed on 288(24).

lag�y situation, condition 46(8). 90(35). ilag�y be placed 108(12). inilag�y was placed 220(17). inil�lag�y 108(42). nilagy�n was put onto, was covered 30(11). 261(30). nil�lagy�n is being put into, is being filled 108(39). l�g�yan place where things are put 193(36). 258(38). lalagy�n receptacle 96(25). 261(22). pagkak�lag�y a placing, position 270(40). kin�l�lagy�n is the place of putting 38(32). 88(5). kal�g�yan position, state 34(34). 176(35). m�lag�y get placed 294(26). pagk�lag�y chance placing, position 100(20). nagpalag�y caused to be placed 24(39). m�palag�y chance to stay in a position 22(14).

l�gi` frequently 60(27). 62(15). pal�gi` id. 62(10).

-lagk�t: malagk�t sticky 221(26).

lagl�g that falling 247(3). 257(31). il�lagl�g will be dropped 24(3). inilagl�g was dropped 32(24). nalagl�g fell down 257(28).

lagn�t fever 94(30).

lagp�k a falling down 58(35). lumagp�k come down on, land 46(38). came down 299(32). l�lagp�k will fall down on 244(39). paglagp�k a falling down onto 48(22). n�p�palagp�k is falling down onto 108(19).

-lag�`: malag�` dense 24(31).

-lag�k: pagkalag�k a having swallowed 30(20). pagk�lag�k a chance swallowing 291(9).

-lag�t: malag�t break off, intr. 40(28). nalag�t broke off 261(27). pagkalag�t a breaking off 112(31).

lah�t all 26(12). 66. 132. 145. 174. lah�t-lah�t all the various things 74(35).

l�hi` family, race 275(29).

l�kad a going, an errand 221(4). lak�d on foot 223(17). lum�kad go, walk 18(7). went 283(1). lum�l�kad is walking 115(15). pagl�kad a going 66(18). nagl�kad drew on foot 234(13). paglal�kad a drawing on foot 234(12). maglak�d walk about 122(7). nagl�lak�d is walking about, journeying 22(31). 66(9). nags�sipaglak�d pl. 58(40). paglalak�d a walking, journeying 66(15). 84(4). maglalak�d traveler 242(43). lak�rin be traveled over 118(26). nil�kad was walked over 244(24). lak�ran be gone to, be gone on 70(6). 252(4). nilak�ran was travelled on 32(19). nil�lak�ran is being walked on 22(33). lakar�n walking-party 260(13). makal�l�kad will be able to walk 104(31). nakal�l�kad is able to walk 34(8). nal�kad was able to be walked over 283(33). n�l�kad chanced to walk 177(17). pal�kad course 50(6). pagpapal�kad a causing to go 288(9). pinal�kad was caused to walk 68(41). ipal�kad be caused to go 118(19).

lak�s force 44(6). See �bos. lumak�s grew strong 76(39). inilak�s was made louder 42(41). lakas�n be done with strength 252(5). kalakas�n strength, loudness 182(23). malak�s strong, loud 18(23). 269(6). pinakamalak�s strongest 309(41). malalak�s pl. 18(15).

lak� size 66(12). lumak� grew larger 56(9). nagsilak� pl. 90(5). paglak� a growing larger 300(17). lakh�n be made big 252(6). kalakh�n greatness, most 44(29). 60(39). malak� large 18(18). 69. 99. 110. 138. malalak� pl. 34(38). ik�pagp�palak� will be the means of causing to grow larger 310(22). kasinglak� of the same size 314(39). magkakasinglak� several of the same size 120(3).

l�kip: kal�kip having the same cover, enclosed with 173(28).

laks�` million 134. See is�.

-l�ko`: magl�ko` peddle 232(23). maglalak�` peddler 226(23).

-l�la: nil�la was woven 46(40).

-lal�`: inilal�` was the cause of getting worse 291(17). palal�` getting worse 92(10).

lal�ki man, male 30(31).

l�lim depth 218(27). il�lim under side 20(28). nilal�man was done deeply 252(7). mal�lim deep 18(39). pakalal�min be made too deep 309(33). pakal�lal�min will be made too deep 309(34). pinakal�lim was made too deep 309(35).

l�lo` more 24(27). 147. 242. nilal�an was exaggerated 98(5).

-lam, see -�lam.

lam�n flesh, muscle, contents 18(15). 48(1). See pir�so.

l�mang only 28(33). 47. 220. 227. 243.

l�mat crack 300(17).

-lamb�t: malamb�t soft 163(14).

lam�g cold 118(31). lumam�g became cold 296(39). l�lam�g will become cold 183(16). kalalam�g what coldness, pl. 268(1). kalamig�n coldness 272(36). malalam�g cold, pl. 219(32). taglam�g cold weather 315(30).

lam�sa S. table 114(9).

-lamp�s: lum�lamp�s is getting excessive 54(27).

lam�g bruised 62(28). nagl�lam�g is getting bruised 62(15).

lam�k gnat 303(9).

-l�mon: lum�l�mon is feeding, intr. 228(14). nags�sil�mon pl. 262(21). lalum�nan throat 88(28).

land�s path 252(3).

lans�nes S. fruit of Lansium domesticum Jack. 306(32).

lant� withered 76(36).

langg�m ant 202(20).

lang�s oil 74(24).

l�ngit sky, heaven 22(2). kalangit�n heavenly regions 104(24).

-lang�y: lumang�y swim 28(21). swam 82(33). l�ng�yan swimming-place 258(40). makipagl�ng�yan go along swimming 264(28). mak�kipagl�ng�yan will join the swimming party 264(30). p�lang�yan place where something is allowed to swim 309(8).

-l�pad: lap�d widened 306(8). kalap�ran wideness 70(40). mal�pad wide 92(35).

-lap�g: inilap�g was placed on the ground 106(16). inil�lap�g is being placed on the ground 36(41). n�l�lap�g is lying on the ground 114(43).

l�pis S. pencil 223(8).

-l�pit (a) lum�pit came near 26(19). lum�l�pit is coming near 64(19). pagl�pit a coming near 66(25). nilap�tan was approached 24(22). mal�pit near 44(27). malal�pit pl. 110(18). --(b) With accent-shift: m�lap�t get near 100(27). m�l�lap�t will be near 120(7). n�lap�t got near 98(40). pagk�lap�t a having got near 46(28).

lar�wan image 20(4).

lariy� (S.) brick 302(41).

lar�` game; play 46(32). 241(34). magl�lar�` will play 232(24). naglar�` played 232(24). nagsipaglar�` pl. 86(31). nagl�lar�` is playing 46(36). nags�sipaglar�` pl. 46(35). paglalar�` a playing 48(5). laru�n be played with 244(25). l�r�an play-ground 139(41). laruw�n toy 84(6). paglaruw�n be used as a plaything 255(37). pinaglaru�n was played in 48(41). pinagl�laruw�n is being used as a plaything 255(40). makipaglar�` play along 88(20). pakikipaglar�` a playing along 264(25). kalar�` playmate 86(33). kal�lar�` there has been playing 267(16). palar�` public games 204(20). pagpapalar�` an allowing to be played 268(9).

las�ng drunken 108(32). naglas�ng got drunk 282(28). paglalas�ng a getting drunk 190(15). nakal�las�ng makes drunk 108(8). nak�kapaglas�ng is able to get drunk 286(38). balas�ng an intoxicant plant, Anamirta cocculus 108(7). 314(23).

las�ta (S.) knife 207(6).

l�ta tin; can 223(26). 292(2).

-lat�`: panglalat�` extreme fatigue 66(33).

-l�tag: ipinagl�l�tag is being spread for 62(35). n�l�l�tag is lying stretched out 92(22). pagk�l�tag a chance spreading 269(39).

lat�n S. Latin 28(23).

-l�on: kala�nan duration, length 32(1). 86(11). nal�on took long 34(20). 70(37). nal�l�on takes long 108(27). mal�on long, taking long 34(25). 108(35). 69. 110. 138. nala�nan lasted long 36(33). 38(12). 54(13).

law�, see sa. dalaw� two 16(25). 224(22). 67. dalaw� ng p�`: pangdalaw�-ng-p�` number twenty 225(41). ikadalaw�-ng-p�` twentieth 273(24). dalaw� ng p� t is�: ikadalaw�-ng-p�-t-is� twenty-first 273(25). d�dalaw� only two 84(30). 224(32). dal�-dalaw� two by two 224(10). pangalaw� number two 226(7). dadalaw�hin having two 54(5). ikalaw� second 24(15). makalaw� second day, day after tomorrow 180(4). 204(18). 288(33). kamakalaw� day before yesterday 166(42). 266(35). 259. mak�law� twice 98(1). 262(8).

-l�wak: mal�wak broad 28(26). 72(18).

-l�wig: lalaw�gan province 110(13). lalaw�ga-ng-Pamp�ngga Pampanga province 210(28). mal�wig roundabout 240(32).

-law�t: naglaw�t hung out, tr. 232(26). ilaw�t be hung out, down 78(1). inilaw�t was hung down 78(6). nakalaw�t hung down 38(29).

-lay�`: kalay�an liberty 56(31).

l�yag a sail 228(17). lum�yag sailed, voyaged 228(16). nagl�lay�g sails back and forth 258(42).

l�yas get away 222(4). lum�yas go away 100(8). went away 228(18). l�l�yas will go away 181(28). nilay�san was deserted 252(9). l�y�san a deserting by many 259(30). mak�l�yas-l�yas ever run away 297(24). pagpapal�yas a driving away 36(23). palay�sin be driven away 84(22). pinal�yas was driven away 72(11). pinal�l�yas is being driven away 72(31).

-l�yaw: pagpapal�yaw a causing to be fulfilled 312(19).

-l�yo` (a): kal�yo` what farness, how far? 70(5). mal�yo` distant, far 28(26). malal�yo` pl. 82(37). --(b) With accent-shift: m�lay�` be far away 32(19). 34(11). n�l�lay�` is far away 80(37).

l�ban except 70(12). 114(23). 283.

-lib�ng: paglilib�ng an amusing 116(37). l�b�ngan place for amusing 258(42). malib�ng be diverted 204(30). nalib�ng became engrossed 70(22). ipinal�lib�ng is being caused to be amused 116(37).

-lib�ng: paglilib�ng a burying 114(21). inil�lib�ng is being buried 112(30). l�b�ngan burial-ground 114(21). pagk�lib�ng a chance burying 114(25).

librer�ya S. library 227(36).

libr� S. book 90(29).

l�bo thousand 48(28). 52(43). 134. See is�. l�bo-l�bo a thousand at a time 100(18). mak�l�l�bo a thousand times 50(28). 298(38).

-l�bot: lum�bot took a walk 228(20). nagl�bot carried about 234(14). naglib�t went on his errands 70(20). nagl�lib�t is going about 34(30). nags�sipaglib�t pl. 110(27). paglilib�t a going about 68(2). nal�bot has been gone round to 76(24).

-l�gaw: pagl�gaw a courting 46(21). manglil�gaw manlil�gaw wooer 42(27). 70(10). nil�lig�wan is being courted 70(14).

-lig�w: palig�w allowing himself to be led astray 32(13).

-lig�ya: magsilig�ya rejoice, pl. 262(21). nakal�lig�ya is gladdening 202(21).

-ligd, see -g�lid.

-l�gid: pal�gid round about 16(20). 26(8). pal�gid-l�gid all around 32(33). 38(19).

ligs� speed 218(30). ligsih�n be done quickly 252(10). maligs� quick 44(37). nagm�maligs� acts quickly 235(41).

-ligt�s: nagligt�s saved 291(39). nagl�ligt�s saves 18(9). pagliligt�s a saving 96(19). iligt�s be saved 88(30). niligtas�n was escaped from 22(28). makapagligt�s be able to save 94(34). m�ligt�s get saved 92(8). 96(4). n�ligt�s got saved 122(18). m�ligtas�n get escaped from 50(30).

l�go` bathe, intr. 222(4). mal�go` bathe, intr. 28(14). 191(38). mal�l�go` will bathe 191(30). nal�go` took a bath 76(37). 285(38). nal�l�go` is bathing 16(2). 32(31). pal�go` bath 300(4). palig�` bathed 300(26). pangpal�go` used for bathing 183(23). pagpal�go` a bathing, intr. 40(18). 76(38). 302(20). magsipal�go` bathe, intr. pl. 28(12). 302(23). makapal�go` have bathed 32(37). pagk�pal�go` a chance bathing 313(2). p�ligu�n bathroom, bathtub 309(12). nagpal�go` caused to bathe, bathed, tr. 181(36). 303(11). pagpapal�go` a bathing, tr. 303(12). pinal�lig�an is being caused to bathe, given a bath 308(14). is being bathed in 308(13). tagapagpal�go` one whose duty it is to bathe, tr. 316(5).

-liguw�k: m�liguw�k get spilled 174(6).

l�ham letter 154(4).

l�him secret 24(32). 40(33). lih�m kept secret 36(22). inil�him was kept secret 118(41). palih�m secretly 70(14).

li�g neck 135(17). 201(10).

-li�t: kaliit�n smallness 34(2). 118(1). mali�t small 40(14). malili�t pl. 34(36).

leksiy�n S. lesson 187(24).

lik�d back 24(26). 68(4). likur�n rear 48(16). 68(11). -tal�kod 315(27). tumal�kod turned the back 231(18). pagtal�kod a turning the back 231(18). tinalikd�n was turned the back to 254(21).

L�lay (S.) short-n. 264(6).

l�lim shade 310(43). mal�lim shady 294(27).

lim� five 56(33). 67. panglim� number five 225(37). lilim�hin having five 86(21). 247(36). ikalim� fifth 273(18). mak�lim� five times 298(33).

-l�mang: lim�ng confused 291(1). nal�mang became confused 285(24).

limon�da S. lemonade 297(10).

lim�s alms; ceremonial gift 112(6). maglim�s give alms 78(37). manglil�mos alms-seeker 112(10). limus�n be given alms 112(7). nil�limus�n is being given alms 72(31). nagp�palim�s is asking for alms 72(30). nags�sipagpalim�s pl. 110(28). 304(17).

-l�mot: nalim�tan was forgotten 208(7). nal�lim�tan is forgotten 92(2). nakal�l�mot has forgotten 276(8).

-linamn�m: malinamn�m tasty 16(18).

-l�naw: mal�naw clear 38(18). 116(38).

lind�l earthquake 289(14). lum�lind�l there is an earthquake 281(12).

-l�nis: lum�nis get clear 228(21). nagl�nis cleaned 181(38). nagl�l�nis is cleaning 182(31). maglilin�s cleaner 242(43). lin�sin be cleaned 238(6). nil�nis was cleaned 56(39). nil�l�nis is being cleaned 244(26). kalin�san cleanness 276(32). pinakamal�nis cleanest 310(1). malil�nis clean, neat, pl. 259(1).

lint�k lightning 254(37).

lingg� (S.) Sunday 50(11). lingg�-lingg� every Sunday 96(4).

-lingk�ng: k�lingk�ngan little finger 280(13).

l�pa` a smearing, plastering 196(24). pangl�pa` used for plastering 225(12). maglilip�` plasterer 242 (43).

-lip�d: lum�lip�d is flying 88(23). pinalip�d was caused to fly 295(5).

-l�pas: lip�s elapsed, evaporated 222(38). 287(7). magpal�pas allow to elapse 26(39). nagpal�pas allowed to elapse 92(3). nagp�pal�pas allows to elapse 74(12). 90(7).

-l�pat: lum�pat change one's abode, move 88(43). moved 118(39). 228(23). nags�sil�pat are changing their abode 122(13). ikinal�pat was the cause of moving 116(26). m�l�l�pat will go over 46(2).

-l�pol: lip�lin be exterminated 24(36).

-lipump�n: nags�silipump�n are swarming over 262(22). pinagk�kalipumpun�n is being overrun by many 90(19). 276(9). m�pagkalipumpun�n get overrun by many 106(28). 298(30).

-l�pon: nags�sl�pon are swarming over 262(22). nags�sipagl�pon are gathering up 262(37). nagk�kal�pon is getting all over 268(32). nal�l�pon has been, is able to be gathered together 98(38). 283(34).

-lit�w: lumit�w bobbed up 78(7).

-lits�n S. paglilits�n a pig-roasting 262(39). lits�nan pig-roasting party 257(37).

-lit�: pagkalit� a having become confused 72(9).

-liwal�w: magliwal�w be idle, loaf 240(23). pagliliwal�w an amusing oneself, pleasure 96(39).

liw�nag illumination 66(1). lumiw�nag became light 201(37). maliw�nag bright 66(37).

liy�b flame 66(16).

l�yi S. law 234(36).

lub�y cessation 100(1). naglub�y ceased 66(35). nagl�lub�y ceases 58(21).

lubh�` very 46(33). 147. malubh�` intense 46(7). 78(25).

l�bid rope 186(38).

-lubl�b: nagl�lubl�b is splashing about 110(25).

l�bo S. wolf 299(38).

l�bo (S.) balloon 138(31).

lub�g immersion, dyeing 251(41). lumub�g went under 78(17). n�lub�g got sunk 257(12). n�l�lub�g is immersed 78(13).

lub�s complete 40(2). 312(19).

lug�r S. place 20(27).

-l�gaw: magl�gaw prepare rice-broth 232(27). nil�gaw rice-broth 252(32).

-l�gi: ikinal�gi was the cause of losing money 239(43).

-l�git: pal�git handicap 60(38).

-lugm�k: n�l�lugm�k is sunk (in an emotion) 92(4). 114(14).

-l�ha`: lum�l�ha` is shedding tears 94(31).

-luh�d: lumuh�d kneel down 228(24). knelt down 228(25). nakaluh�d has knelt down, is on his knees 112(1). n�luh�d knelt down 295(33). n�l�luh�d is kneeling 22(24). nagpatiluh�d suddenly knelt down 313(29). pagpapatiluh�d a suddenly kneeling down 313(31). n�patiluh�d fell on his knees 313(38).

L�kas S. n. 104(20).

luks� jump over 222(5). lumuks� jumped 16(21). pagluks� a jumping 60(14). luksuh�n be jumped onto 252(11). luks�han jumping by many 257(38). nakipagluks�han took part in a jumping-contest 264(31). nak�kipagluks�han takes part in a jumping-contest 204(19). pakikipagluks�han a jumping with others 62(1). n�p�paluks� involuntarily jumps up 62(10).

lukt�n locust 191(32).

l�ko S. crazy 80(31). panglol�ko a fooling 108(3). nil�l�ko is being fooled 50(32). kalok�han insanity 313(25). pagkal�ko a fit of insanity 313(22). n�l�l�ko is fooled 106(1).

l�lan that loaded onto a vehicle; an embarking 100(32). 118(18). 219(40). nagsil�lan embarked, pl. 118(24). il�lan be put on a vehicle 20(38). inil�lan was put on a vessel 56(24). lul�nan be laden 252(12). l�l�nan an embarking by many 259(32). m�l�lan get put in a vehicle 20(11).

L�leng (S.) short-n. 134(31).

lul�d shin 254(35). lulur�n be hit on the shin 252(13). the shin 261(25) Corrigenda.

l�ma` worn-out, old 171(4).

lumb� cocoanut-shell drinking-cup 74(5).

lump� lame 219(5). nalump� became lame 285(28).

l�mot moss 313(41).

lund�g a leap 48(16). lumund�g leaped 70(39). paglulund�g a leaping about 296(13).

l�nes S. Monday 180(5).

-l�nod: lun�rin be drowned 16(25). kalun�ran be drowned in 274(22). west 18(22). 163(27). kal�lun�ran will be the place of drowning 274(23). magkalun�d have drownings 112(13). mal�nod get drowned 264(29). nal�nod got drowned 28(22). nangal�nod pl. 88 (31). pagkal�nod a drowning 88(30). 272(23).

lungg�` lair, hole 84(29).

-lungk�t: ikinalungk�t was the cause of regret 32(37). 88(17). ikinal�lungk�t is the cause of regret 80(30). 272(13). kalungk�tan melancholy 92(5). nalungk�t became sad 90(34). nangalungk�t pl. 34(23). nal�lungk�t is sorry 285(25). palalungk�tin given to grief 315(9).

l�pa` land, ground, earth 16(4). 24(4). 46(38). See hamp�s. l�pa-ng-B�stos ground of Bustos 100(9). l�pa-ng-San-Ildep�nso ground of San Ildefonso 100(34). lupa�n land, country 56(17).

-lup�t: kalupit�n cruelty 74(20). malup�t cruel 44(30). malulup�t pl. 20(32).

l�song aid 231(42). lus�ngin be gone down into 244(27). nil�song was gone down into 244(27). nilus�ngan was gone to the aid of 252(15). lusung�n mutual aid 260(14).

lus�ng mortar 16(25).

l�to` a cooking; that cooked 182(33). 221(8). magl�to` cook 114(3). nagl�to` cooked 182(1). nagl�l�to` is cooking 108(6). maglulut�` cook 243(1). lut�in be cooked 134(19). nil�to` was cooked 257(35). nil�l�to` lin�l�to` is being cooked 244(28). inil�l�to` ilin�l�to` is being cooked 181(18). 248(24). 249(25). ipinagl�l�to` is being cooked for 249(24). lut�an be cooked with 252(15). lutu�n kitchen 114(6). pagkal�to` a past cooking 108(10). nagp�pal�to` causes to be cooked 108(6).

lo�b inside; spirit, will, opinion 36(5). 40(25). 90(40). See big�y. lo�b-lo�b modest opinion 98(26). nil�lo�b is being intended 307(5). pumalo�b go into the inside 42(10). 302(19). napalo�b got into the inside 104(15).

-luw�, see k�luluw�.

-luw�`: inil�w�` is being spat out 40(28).

-luw�g: maluw�g loose, not well fixed 92(38).

-luwalh�ti`: maluwalh�ti` in good shape 268(36).

-luw�ng: kaluw�ngan looseness, width 253(27). maluw�ng loose, too wide 289(8).

-luw�s: lumuw�s go down-stream 56(21). pagluw�s a going down-stream 297(34). napaluw�san went down-stream together 279(4). 312(8).

luw�t long duration 173(39). maluw�t long 40(31). 62(22). 269(7). magmaluw�t take much time 236(2). nagmaluw�t acted slowly 236(1). naluwat�n took long 84(8).

M.

(see also B, P).

m, see na.

m�` Uncle, Don, Mr. 256.

mab�lo a tree and its fruit Trichodesma zeylanicum 34(40).

madl�` populace 24(33).

-mag�t: pamag�t title 86(19). 300(5). pamagat�n be given a name 42(21). pinam�magat�n is being given a name 168(8).

mag�ging, mag�ng see -g�ng.

mah�l dear 22(11). pagmamah�l a holding dear 72(38). min�mah�l is being held dear 62(34). kam�h�lan highness, majesty 26(23). kamahal�n dearness, high price 186(9). kin�mahal�n was got dear in 279(17). pinakamah�l dearest 309(38).

-mah�la`: nam�mah�la` is ruling 122(4). p�mahala�n p�mahal�an government 56(15). See b�hay.

ma�s S. maize 248(29).

ma�stro may�stro S. master, teacher 88(12).

m�kina S. machine 203(2).

-m�las: n�m�las got perceived 36(38). 38(19).

m�lay consciousness 288(18). nagkam�lay became conscious 268(33). nak�m�lay happened to notice 188(10). n�mal�yan got noticed 42(39). pamal�yan be caused to be noticed 308(15).

mal�` bad 34(24). 271(42). kam�l�an wrongness 297(12). pamal�mal�` repeatedly wrong 300(31).

Mal�los place-n. 110(24). See b�yan.

m�ma` uncle, sir 151(35). 59.

m�may�` m�miy�` soon 262(9).

m�n too, as well 16(18). 47. 221. 227. 248. 262.(7).(10).(13). 219. 317(3).(5).

m�na that inherited 40(5). n�m�m�na is inherited 40(11). ipam�na be bequeathed 40(30). ipinam�m�na is being bequeathed 40(31). paman�han be bequeathed to 40(33).

man�` peanut 76(16).

man�ka` (S.) doll 40(14).

Manik�s S. family-n. 209(24).

mans� S. spot 191(14).

mans�nas S. apple 182(27).

-m�no S.: nagm�m�no kisses the hand 56(14).

man�k hen, cock, chicken 38(30). 72(36). nagman�k-man�kan played rooster 237(10).

Manuw�l S. n. 228(16).

mang� plural sign 16(8). 143(16). 48. 251.

mangg� S. mango 34(40). See p�no`, mangg�han mango-grove 255(11).

mangg�s S. sleeves 306(24).

-mangh�`: pagk�mangh�` a getting astonished 60(5). nang�pamangh�` were astonished 52(18). 312(38).

mangk�k (C.?) bowl 248(35).

mangm�ng ignorant 94(39). kamangmang�n ignorance 82(24).

m�p�pasa, m�pasa, see sa.

Marik�na S. place-n. See b�yan.

Mariy� S. n. 70(11).

Mariy�no S. n. 54(1).

M�rkes S. family-n. 189(43).

Mark�ta S. n. 92(29).

-mas�d: nagm�mas�d is observing 100(21). pagmamas�d an observing 272(25). masd�n be looked at 20(32). min�masd�n is being looked at 252(17). pagmasd�n be observed 255(42). pinagmasd�n was scrutinized 18(4). pagk�mas�d a chance looking at, a glancing 168(33). m�masd�n get looked at 88(7). m�m�masd�n will get looked at 96(16). n�m�masd�n is visible 297(32).

masiy�do, see -siy�do.

Mas�n S. freemason 56(12).

mat� eye 20(27). See pil�k. mat�-mat� trellis-work 223(41). min�mat� is being looked down on 30(3). mat�an be looked round for 254(31). minat�an was looked round for 254(30). kamat� congenial at sight 266(12). mapangmat� given to looking down on people 18(19). n�mat�an got espied 36(3).

-mat�y: ikam�mat�y will be the cause of dying 94(28). ikinamat�y was the cause of dying 186(15). ipagk�kamat�y will be the cause of a part dying 272(34). kinamatay�n was died in 38(23). Kinamatay�-ng-kab�yo place-n. 221(30). pagk�kamatay�n will be died in by some 275(13). pinagkamatay�n was died in by some 275(10). kam�t�yan death 94(34). mamat�y die 40(32). mam�mat�y will die 32(1). 62(26). namat�y died 16(11). nangamat�y pl. 286(16). nam�mat�y is dead 74(11). pagkamat�y a dying 22(3). 40(27). mamat�y-mat�y be able to die off 287(37). namatay�n was died from 38(9). nam�matay�n is died from 112(19). magp�pakamat�y will commit suicide 309(23). nagpakamat�y committed suicide 309(22). pagpapakamat�y suicide 309(24). himat�y fainting-fit 314(25). nagh�himat�y is fainting 236(6). paghihimat�y a fainting 159(6). himatay�n be attacked by a fainting-fit 208(5). hinimat�y was attacked by a fainting-fit 246(1). ipinaghimat�y was the cause of fainting 88(32). 250(3).

mats�ng young monkey 110(9). kamatsing�n monkey-tricks 276(32).

m�y m� there is; having; about 16(8). 48. 69. 110. 138. 252. 331. m�y �ri`: nagm�m�-�ri` has ownership 40(13). m�y-ro�n same as m�y 18(25). 69. 110. 331.

-m�yaw: magk�m�yaw harmonize 102(13). 270(41).

may�stro, see ma�stro.

Mayn�la` place-n. 50(2). See b�yan.

m�diko S. physician 30(2). m�diko-ng-mangkuk�lam witch-doctor 42(21).

Mig�l S. n. 255(33).

mil�gro S. miracle 74(32). nagm�mil�gro is working a miracle 104(23).

milagr�so S. miraculous 74(29).

m�le-nobisiy�ntos-d�s S. 1902 34(27).

mil�n S. melon 76(16).

m�nsan once 16(2). 22(34). 39. 42. 262(10). m�nsanin be done all at once 246(5). pam�nsan-m�nsan once in a while 68(10).

m�sa S. table 173(26).

m�sa S. mass 50(37). magm�sa say mass 96(26). nagm�m�sa says mass 96(4). pagmim�sa a saying mass 96(18). pagkam�sa a having said mass 98(19). makapagm�sa be able to say mass 96(14). magpam�sa have mass said 72(29). nagpam�sa had mass said 72(25). pagpapam�sa a having mass said 80(25).

m�smo S. himself 46(18). 72(29). 265(7).

m�ting E. meeting 236(18).

miy�rkules S. Wednesday 259(32).

mo disj. of ik�w: by thee; of thee 47. 163.

mukh�` face 24(23). kamukh�` of the same appearance 266(14).

mul�` from 16(7). 284. magmul�` start from 32(7). 284. minul�n was begun 283(9).

mul�win a tree, molave, Vitex littoralis Decne 263(27).

mul�` again 18(35). 20(17). 148.

m�na previously, first 40(6). 47. 222.

mund� S. world 50(18).

Mund� (S.) short-n. 96(38).

munisiliy� S. sacristan 253(16).

munis�piyo S. town-hall 36(42).

munt�` little 174(6). kumunt�` what almost-ness 174(4).

m�ra (a) cheap 219(7). min�ra was scolded 90(38). mur�han be done cheaply 252(20). minur�han was sold too cheaply 252(19). pagmum�r�han a making things cheap 236(31). kamur�han cheapness 276(33). pinakam�ra cheapest 114(41). --(b) With accent-shift: nagmur� cursed 32(38). murah�n mutual reviling 260(16). magmurah�n revile each other 236(34). magm�murah�n will curse each other 203(39). nagm�murah�n are reviling each other 236(35). pagmumurah�n a mutual reviling 236(37). kamurah�n one of two who curse at each other 278(22).

m�ra` unripe 22(38).

m�sika S. music 48(31). See band�.

m�siko S. musician 110(31).

-mu�`: ipinagk�kamu�` is the cause of partial hardening 272(37).

muw�ng information 82(6).

N

(See also D, S, T.)

na ng m attributive 15. 20. 37. 45. 49. 119. 122-159 and Syntax, passim.

n� already 18(39). 47. 223. 224. 226. 227. 229. 242. 244. 341(3,c). 342. 437.

nag�ging, see -g�ng.

-nag�nip: panag�nip dream 225(13). nanag�nip dreamt 240(21). nan�nag�nip is dreaming 240(20). pananag�nip a dreaming 240(17). n�panag�nip was dreamt 297(22).

nag�ng, see -g�ng.

n�kaw that stolen 221(9). num�kaw stole 32(39). pagn�kaw a stealing 104(1). magn�kaw commit theft 170(4). 244(17). nagn�kaw did some stealing 155(41). pagnan�kaw thievery 38(2). magnan�kaw thief, robber 36(29). nak�win be stolen 102(24). n�nak�win will be stolen 32(35). nin�kaw was stolen 32(36). nin�n�kaw is being stolen 102(24). pinagnak�w was variously stolen 120(32). nak�wan be stolen from 234(8). ninak�wan was stolen from 252(22). nakaw�n robbery 178(37). nakapagn�n�kaw is able to commit thefts 102(17). m�n�kaw get stolen 102(27). n�n�kaw got stolen 102(27). m�nak�wan chance to be stolen from 24(3). n�n�nak�wan chances to be stolen from 102(20).

nam�n on the other hand, however 22(32). 47. 224.

n�min, see �min.

n�nay mother 116(17). 59. magn�nay mother and child 242(15). magnan�nay pl. 242(31).

n�ndon, see do�n. --nang, see ang.

Nars�so S. n. 296(30).

n�sa, n�s�sa, see sa. --n�tin, see -�tin.

-n�og: man�og come down from one's dwelling 264(23). nan�og came down 38(16). nan�n�og is descending 100(25). pan�og come down 151(40). pagpan�og a descending 302(20). mags�sipan�og will descend, pl. 108(13). nags�sipan�og are descending 106(29). pinana�gan was come down from 308(18).

naw�`, see �wa`. --ni, see si.

n� S. nor; any, and, and not 22(22). 48. 68. 253. 319.

nil�, see sil� and sin�. --nin�, see sin�. --niniy�, see iniy�. --n�no, see s�no.

ningn�ng glow 40(16). nagn�ningn�ng glows 40(15).

nir�, see ir�. --nit�, see kit�. --nit�, see it�. --niy�, see siy�. --niy�n, see iy�n. --niy�ya`, see y�ya`.

niy�g cocoanut 24(1). See p�no`, niy�gan cocoanut-grove 259(3).

niy�n, see iy�n.

nob�la S. novel 86(19).

n�biyo S. fianc� 92(31).

n�no` ghost 34(32).

-no�d: nan�no�d is looking on 48(36). nags�sipano�d pl. 48(29). panuno�d a looking on 296(37). panoor�n be looked at 108(29). pinan�no�d is being looked at 108(32).

no�n, see iy�n.

Ng

(See also K.)

ng, see na.

ng�` indeed, please 40(21). 47. 226. 229.

ng�lan name 156(11). pang�lan id. 26(16).

ngay�n now, today 28(7). 262(11). 302.

-ngit�`: ngum�ngit�` is smiling 228(26). n�ng�ngit�` is asmile 92(28).

-ngiy�w: ngumiy�w mewed 84(27).

ng�nit but 30(6). 320. 322.

P (F)

p� still, yet, more 24(16). 47. 226. 243. 248. 314.

pa� foot, leg 18(15). Pa�-ng-bund�k place-n. 118(25). pinaah�n was caught by the leg, hurt in the leg 252(25). paan�n be turned the feet to 252(29). base, foot 98(40). pinaan�n was turned the feet to 252(27). pa�nan base, foot 90(30).

P�blo S. n. 283(22).

pad�r S. wall 52(11).

-padp�d: n�padp�d was cast by chance 96(2).

pag when, if 32(13). 45. 300. 303.

pagakp�k applause 219(41). pagakpak�n be applauded 197(36). p�gakp�kan applause by many 257(40).

pagig�ng, see -g�ng.

pag�tan place between, interval 258(31). 271(17). pumag�tan took position between 228(26). pamamag�tan an acting as means 24(33). 38(34). ipinag�tan was placed between 248(25). n�p�pag�tan is between 171(21).

pagk� as soon as, after, when 181(27). 48. 296. 300. 304. 306.

pagk�t wax 221(11).

p�god weariness 76(1). pag�d tired 66(33).

pag�ng turtle 16(1).

P�ho` place-n. 120(11).

p�in bait 108(14). pagpap�in a catching with bait 108(39).

p�kay purpose, aim 50(33).

p�ko` nail 218(38). p�ko ng bab�`: mapagp�ko-m-bab�` over-modest 289(28). paku�n nailing-place 260(20). n�p�p�ko` is nailed 20(24).

pakuw�n watermelon 203(37).

pal� but otherwise 209(25). 47. 228. 301.

p�la` gift, prize, favor 90(12). See gant�.

p�lad palm of hand 106(37). See kasama�n, kasawi�n, saw�`. nagkap�lad had good fortune 34(3). 78(38). nagk�kap�lad has the good fortune 40(24). kapal�ran fortune 60(17).

palak�` frog 228(11).

palak�l hatchet 240(5).

pal�nsa pl�nsa (S.) flat-iron 212(32). 227(42). pinal�nsa was ironed 244(30).

pal�siyo S. palace 26(26).

palat�n S. dish 193(3).

p�lay rice, standing or in hull 163(19). See bant�y, t�nod.

palay�k earthenware pot 74(5).

palibh�sa` for the reason, because 54(20). 265(8).

pal�t exchange 148(26). pinalit�n was supplanted 104(12).

p�lo` hit, strike 183(25). pam�lo` club, cudgel 70(16). pal�in be caned 195(35). ikin�p�lo` was the cause of getting thrashed 273(34). pagk�p�lo` a thrashing that was got 272(16).

p�long comb of rooster 291(16).

fam�liya S. family 54(4).

Pamp�ngga S. place-n. 173(9). See lalaw�gan, prov�nsiya.

p�na` arrow 228(28). pum�na` shot an arrow at 228(28). pin�na` was shot with an arrow 244(31). nak�p�na` chanced to hit with an arrow 291(32).

panah�n time 34(25). 50(5). 52(32).

-p�naw: pum�naw departed 228(29). pum�p�naw is departing 92(25). pagp�naw a departing 114(17). pinan�wan was parted from 92(27).

pan�y constant 72(20). 82(6). kapanay�n continuance 276(34).

-panh�k: pumanh�k entered (a dwelling), went up into (a house) 38(27). 72(8). pum�panh�k is entering 106(9). pinanhik�n was entered 175(41). m�panh�k get in 106(15). pagk�panh�k a getting in 72(9). pinapanhik�n was caused to be entered 52(14).

pan�ki bat 210(26). See b�hay.

paniy� S. handkerchief 147(1).

pans�n noticeable 219(8). pansin�n be paid attention to 46(1). p�pansin�n will be minded 96(35). pinans�n was paid attention to 20(41). 94(2). pin�pans�n is being paid attention to 54(19). n�p�pans�n gets noticed 100(19).

pant�y leveled 223(32). pant�y-kaw�yan height of a bamboo-plant 218(28). pant�y-pant�y even, all level 118(30). 291(5). kapant�y of the same height 173(28). magkapant�y both of the same height 270(3). kasingpant�y id. 104(6). 315(1).

p�no, see an�. --panuk�la`, see ak�la`.

pan�t bald-headed 219(10).

-pang�w: nakapang�w is pilloried 110(5). nang�p�pang�w have got into the pillory 110(9).

pangino�n master 62(39). 86(31). 226(3).

pangk�t group, team 46(34). 76(21). 110(31). pangk�t-pangk�t group by group 110(30).

pangn�n hand-basket 261(40).

pangp�ng bank of stream 28(13). Kapamp�ngan Pampanga 189(23). Kakapampang�nan the Pampanga country 277(12).

pap�no, see an�. --p�pasa, see sa.

pap�ya S. papaw 163(18).

pap�l S. paper 50(39).

p�ra like 36(12). 67. 275.

par� p�ra S. for 90(11). 286. 288.

p�rang forest 62(29). kapar�ngan wooded regions 82(36).

p�ri` S. priest, Father 20(4). 256.

par�ho S. equal 257(42). par�-par�ho all equal 40(13). 224(1).

Par�s S. Paris 220(31).

part� S. part 82(21). kapart� share 16(6).

-par�: par�-par� butterfly 88(24).

p�sa, see sa.

pas�` bruise 62(27).

p�sak that calked with 221(10). pasak�n calking-place 260(23).

pas�n that carried on the shoulders 98(36). pum�pas�n carries on the shoulders 22(32). p�pasan�n will be carried on the shoulder 104(34). pinas�n was carried on the shoulder 104(38).

Pas�fiko S. Pacific 259(1).

P�sig the Pasig; see �log.

pas�gan beach 16(4).

-pasiy�l (S.): magpasiy�l take a walk 32(2). magsipagpasiy�l pl. 32(13). magp�pasiy�l will take a walk 232(28). mags�sipagpasiy�l pl. 32(15). nagpasiy�l took a walk 182(7). nagsipagpasiy�l pl. 279(1). nakapagpasiy�l was able to take a walk 200(14). papas�-pasiy�l walking about at intervals 96(6).

-pasiy�nsiya S.: magpasiy�nsiya rest content 56(8).

-pas�yo S.: nagp�pas�yo forms a procession 48(40).

pask� S. Easter; Christmas 220(24).

past�l (S.) herdsman 116(7).

p�so` a burn 220(1). pas�` burnt; pottery 222(40). pum�so` burned 228(30). mam�so` a blister 241(39). 244(12). nam�so` scorched 240(21). nap�so` has been burned 284(41).

-p�sok: pum�sok go in, enter 78(30). went in 30(17). 38(31). 50(19). pum�p�sok enters 42(13). p�p�sok will go in 192(5). pagp�sok a going in 42(12). 96(26). pas�kin be violently entered 262(19). pin�sok was illicitly entered 237(41). pin�p�sok is being penetrated 118(30). pinas�kan was entered 36(36). makap�sok be able to enter 74(31). makap�p�sok will be able to enter 22(4). nakap�sok was able to enter 80(2). 116(21). pagkap�sok a having gone in 38(32). pagk�p�sok the way of getting put in 291(11). m�ip�sok get put in 108(41). n�pas�kan chanced to be come upon in entering 297(37). pap�sok going in; asking to be taken in; ask to be taken in 204(22). 299(29). 301(24). pap�p�sok will ask to be taken in 301(40). pagpapap�sok a causing to enter 272(39). papas�kin be caused to enter 72(26). 80(30). mapap�p�sok will ask to be taken in 311(34). napap�sok caused himself to be taken in; was able to be caused to enter 311(23.32).

-p�tag: ikin�p�tag chanced to be the cause of staying quiet 116(11).

pat�k a drop 96(29).

pat�y dead person 20(8). 38(25). pamat�y used for killing 225(15). pamat�y-k�to louse-killer, thumb 225(15). pumat�y (arch. mat�y) kill 231(2). pagpat�y a killing 227(4). patay�n pata�n be killed 84(22). p�patay�n p�pata�n will be killed 28(20). 44(16). pinat�y was killed 244(33). patay�n be killed for 252(32). pinagpatay�n was killed in 274(31). p�t�yan mortal combat; slaughter-house 190(15). 259(3). kap�patay�n will be the place of killing 279(18). kap�t�yan one of two who kill each other 277(42). mapat�y be able to be killed 283(35). napat�y has been killed 284(14). pagkapat�y a having killed 282(35). m�pat�y get killed 36(19). 293(42). m�p�pat�y will get killed 18(12). n�pat�y got killed 26(12). 38(3). 84(28). pagk�pat�y a chance killing 291(12). 292(15). ipinap�pat�y is being caused to be extinguished 122(6).

pat� also, even 110(34). 112(20). 68. 305.

pat�d a breaking, an interruption 42(4). 44(42). 58(1). broken 223(33). pumat�d break, tr. 228(31). kapat�d broken from the same piece; brother, sister 32(8). 266(16). kapat�d-kongkristiy�nos brother-Christians 50(22). 210(16). magkapat�d two brothers or sisters, brother and sister 46(20). magkakapat�d pl. 270(14). kin�kapat�d child of one's godparents 271(30). magkin�kapat�d two people, one of whom is the child of the other's godparents 271(31). magkikin�kapat�d pl. 271(32). kap�patir�n will be the place of breaking 274(29). kinapatir�n was the place of breaking 274(27). kap�t�ran one of two who break together 277(43). mapat�d break off, cease 60(9). napat�d broke off 78(16). napatir�n was broken in, suffered a fracture 88(28).

pat�s shrimp-sauce 259(5). patis�n be spiced with shrimp-sauce 252(33). p�t�san cannery for shrimp-sauce 259(5).

p�tiyo S. court-yard 98(20).

Patr�siyo S. n. 275(28).

patr�liya S. patrol 122(20).

p�to S. duck 116(38).

patumangg�` regard, consideration 22(24).

-p�tung: n�p�p�tung is placed on 116(1).

Pat�pat derisive n. 50(3).

-p�wi`: paw�` allayed 222(42). nakap�p�wi` will allay 28(35). 280(37). nap�wi` has subsided 279(34).

p�wid nipa fibre 30(37).

-p�wis: pum�p�wis is sweating 22(8).

-p�yag: pum�yag consent 30(5). consented 18(29). pum�p�yag consents 228(34). ipin�yag was granted 248(26). pinay�gan was agreed to 252(33).

pay�pa` tranquil 219(11). kapayapa�n tranquility 116(9).

p�yo advice 52(24). ipin�yo was suggested 28(36).

p�yong umbrella 166(27).

P�dro S. n. 20(2).

p�gil that restrained 134(28). pig�l under control 223(1). nagsip�gil controlled, pl. 282(14). pig�lin be brought under control 66(23). n�pig�lan got restrained 66(17). 100(36).

-p�hit: pum�p�hit turns round 68(10).

p�ho surely 18(11). pin�ho was ascertained 44(33).

pikl�t scar 219(9).

p�knik E. picnic 235(34).

p�ko S. a pick 58(33).

-p�li`: pum�li` chose 228(34). mam�li` choose out 16(24). nam�li` selected 186(20). pin�li` was chosen 244(34). m�p�li` get chosen 241(34). n�p�p�li` is preferred 293(21).

pil�k fin, lash 210(30). Corrigenda. pil�k-mat� eyelash 210(30). Corrigenda. pilik�n have the fins removed 252(34).

p�ling side, proximity 90(8).

Fel�pe S. n. 208(1).

Filip�nas S. the Philippines 40(2). See kapulu�n.

-p�lit: pum�lit effected by trying hard 228(37). pum�p�lit is trying hard 228(35). pagp�lit a trying hard 64(1). nagp�lit tried very hard 44(5). 50(14). nagp�p�lit tries very hard 44(20). 234(17). nagp�pum�lit is making an extreme effort 168(14). 235(32). pil�tin be striven for 18(17). 184(35). pin�lit was compelled 244(35). pagpil�tan was striven for 297(2). nap�pil�tan is compelled 112(28).

pel�ta S. ball 48(11).

p�nsan cousin 39. 42. magpip�nsan group of cousins 242(32).

pint� S. paint, painting 219(12). pintah�n be painted 252(35). pint�han place for paint; see b�hay.

pint�s that found fault with 221(13). pintas�n be found fault with 252(36). pint�san mutual fault-finding 257(42). kapint�san reprehensible quality 310(40).

pint�` door 78(30). See bant�y. pint�an doorway 22(2).

pingg� carrying-pole 158(12).

pingg�n dishes 114(7).

p�pa S. cigarette-mouthpiece 249(29).

P�pe S. short-n. 279(5).

p�pe dumb 86(23). nap�pe became dumb 285(28). pagkap�pe dumbness 86(23).

pip�no S. cucumber 76(16).

pip�t stone-sparrow 197(21).

p�ras S. pears 189(16).

pir�so (S.) piece broken off pir�so-ng-k�hoy piece of wood 56(38). pir�so-ng-lam�n piece of meat 108(42) Corrigenda. piras�hin be broken off 252(6). mapir�so go to pieces 300(19). napir�so went to pieces 284(42).

pir�nsa (S.) flat-iron 212(32). pinir�nsa was ironed 223(4).

P�ro (S.) n., for P�dro. 138(28).

p�so S. peso, half-dollar 102(38).

-pit�g: p�t�gan respect 118(9). pinagp�p�tag�nan is being respected 256(8).

p�tak section 247(11). pin�tak section of rice-field 247(10).

-pit�s: pumit�s pick, pluck 22(35). picked 282(40). pitas�n be picked 244(36). p�pitas�n will be picked 22(37). pam�mitas�n will be picked selectively, in quantity 247(2). pinam�mit�s is being gathered 246(42). pitas�n be picked from 252(37). pamitas�n be gathered from 256(36). pam�mitas�n will be gathered from 256(38). nagp�t�san picked together 236(17). napit�s has been picked 284(43). n�pit�s got picked 293(22). n�p�pit�s is picked 24(16).

pit�k fillip 225(14). pamit�k single rein 72(1). pumit�k give a fillip 228(37).

P�tra S. n. 240(29).

f�tsa S. date 271(16).

pits�n S. pigeon 252(32).

p�to S. small flute, whistle 227(39).

pit� seven 20(5). 67. pit� ng p�`: pamit�-ng-p�` number seventy 225(42). pamit� number seven 225(38). ikapit� seventh 32(4).

piy�no S. piano 167(21).

fiy�sta piy�sta S. fiesta 98(35). 137(37). kapiyest�han holiday 110(11).

pl�nsa, see pal�nsa.

Prans�sko S. n. 50(20).

presid�nte S. magistrate 38(1).

-prub� S.: prubah�n be proved 52(3). p�prubah�n will be proved 52(4).

prov�nsiya S. province 50(1). prov�nsiya-ng-Pamp�ngga Pampanga province 210(29).

p�` deferential particle 20(37). 47. 229.

p�` ten 38(6). 134. See is�, dalaw�, etc.

p�gad nest 228(9).

-pukp�k: pamukp�k mallet 90(30). pum�pukp�k is pounding 228(38).

puk�l a throw 106(36). pagpuk�l a throwing 281(35). magpupuk�l throw repeatedly 238(38). pin�puk�l is being thrown at 112(8). mapamuk�l given to throwing things 289(39).

pul� red, redness 147(1). pulah�n all red 261(12). kapul� what redness 173(40).

Polik�rpiyo S. family-n. 189(43).

pol�s S. policeman 34(26).

p�lpito S. pulpit 20(28).

pul�` island 255(14). kapulu�n kapuluw�n archipelago 24(30). kapulu�-ng-Filip�nas the Philippine archipelago 56(24).

pul�be beggar 72(30).

p�long crowd 229(13).

p�lot that picked up 221(15). nam�lot gathered up 32(23). m�mumul�t gleaner 243(17). pinam�lot was picked up selectively, in quantity 247(3). pinul�tan was picked up in 252(38). p�l�tan a scramble 259(33). n�p�lot got picked up 62(30). n�p�p�lot gets picked up 40(8).

pul�t honey 174(7).

-p�nas: nagp�p�nas is scrubbing 232(29). pin�pun�san is being scrubbed 252(40).

p�nit small hole, tear 169(2). pun�t-pun�t full of small holes 259(6).

-punl�`: punl�an germinating-plot 243(40).

puns� ant-hill 66(1).

punt� S. direction of going 106(2). nagsipunt� went to, pl. 116(18). p�punt� will go to 193(24). nags�sipunt� are going to 108(1). pagpunt� a going toward 104(35). 106(4). 116(20). puntah�n be gone to 40(9). pinuntah�n was gone toward 32(20). papunt� towards 84(36). napap�punt� is able to be directed 48(10).

p�no` head: of wood (i. e. tree) 16(8). of grass (i. e. blade) 76(31). of bridge 248(16). stem end of fruit 203(38). chief 306(11). beginning 50(15). p�no-ng-dam� blade of grass 76(29). p�no-ng-k�hoy tree 34(39). p�no-ng-mangg� mango-tree 254(37). p�no-ng-niy�g cocoanut-tree 22(34). p�no-ng-s�ging banana-tree 16(3). p�no-ng-s�ha` grape-fruit-tree 36(34). pin�no` chief, official 56(27). 116(22). p�mun�an initiator 262(7).

pun�` filled, full 36(40). 76(30). pun�n be completed, be added to 252(41). p�n�an all full 118(21). 258(1). napun�` became full 26(9).

purg� S. purge 230(11).

purgat�riyo S. purgatory 50(17).

p�ri honor, respectability 94(12). See kasira�n. nagp�ri an honoring 48(38). 60(9). nagpurih�n praised one another 236(39). nagp�purih�n are praising one another 236(41). map�ri honorable 289(8). nagm�pur� praised himself 238(25). nagm�m�pur� is praising himself 238(25). pagmam�pur� praising oneself 238(26). nagpakam�pur� praised himself much 309(28).

Port-�rtur S. Port Arthur 306(19).

-pur�l: mapur�l dull 225(6). map�pur�l will get dull 248(31).

p�sa` cat 84(1).

pust� S. a bet 60(29). nagsipust� made a bet, pl. 60(34). pust�han a betting together 60(33). 102(40). nakipagpust�han entered into a bet with 102(34).

p�so` heart 218(24).

-put�k: nagp�puput�k is cackling much 238(40). p�t�kan cackling by many 238(10). palap�t�kin given to cackling 315(10).

f�tbol E. football 46(35).

put�` white 219(12). p�puti�n be made too white 305(12). p�puti�n be made very white 308(39).

p�tik mud, clay 86(37). put�kan be made muddy 253(1). putik�n muddy place, person, thing; clay-pit 166(19). 260(24). map�tik muddy 110(14).

p�to cake, bun 32(15).

put�k crash, report 259(34). pumut�k made a crash; there was a crash 64(31). pin�putuk�n is reached by a crash 106(33).

p�tol a cut; that cut 220(2). 221(16). p. nang p. cuts and cuts 222(10). put�l cut 223(3). put�l-put�l all cut up 224(16). pam�tol used for cutting 225(16). pum�tol cut 154(4). 199(27). 226(26). magsip�tol cut, pl. 262(26). nagsip�tol cut, did cut, pl. 190(22). pum�p�tol is cutting 228(39). nags�sip�tol pl. 262(24). p�p�tol will cut 228(40). mags�sip�tol pl. 191(8). pagp�tol a cutting 196(34). magp�tol cut several things, cut on oneself 228(21). magsipagp�tol pl. 262(38). magp�p�tol will cut 234(21). mags�sipagp�tol pl. 262(41). nagp�tol cut 234(24). nagsipagp�tol pl. 263(2). nagp�p�tol is cutting 202(14). nags�sipagp�tol pl. 263(3). pagpup�tol a cutting 234(19). magput�l cut variously or repeatedly, cut up 237(37). magp�put�l will cut 237(38). nagput�l cut 237(40). nagp�put�l is cutting 237(42). nagp�puput�l is cutting to bits 239(9). magpuput�l cutter 243(1). mam�tol cut selectively, in quantity, or as occupation 220(21). magsipam�tol pl. 263(24). mam�m�tol will cut 240(29). mags�sipam�tol pl. 263(26). nam�tol cut 240(27). nam�m�tol is cutting 240(27). m�mumut�l cutter 243(18). pamum�tol a cutting 240(23). put�lin be cut 244(42). p�put�lin will be cut 58(27). 207(5). pin�tol was cut, cut off, stopped 38(34). 44(26). 154(10). pin�p�tol is being cut 58(36). 248(34). pagputul�n be cut up 246(27). pinagp�put�l is being cut up 246(25). ip�tol be cut for 248(29). ip�p�tol will be cut for 248(29). ipin�tol was cut for or with 154(15). 175(31). 248(28). ipin�p�tol is being cut for or with 181(15). 202(6). ipagp�tol be cut for 249(26). ipagp�p�tol will be cut for 249(27). ipinagp�tol was cut for or with 249(28). ipinagp�p�tol is being cut for or with 249(29). ipam�tol be used for cutting 250(17). ipinam�tol was used for cutting 250(13). ipinam�m�tol is being cut with or for, in quantity 187(13). 250(14). put�lan putl�n be cut from 253(5). p�put�lan p�putl�n will be cut from 253(7). pinut�lan was cut from 118(28). 154(20). pin�putl�n is being cut from 60(1). 253(3). pagput�lan be cut on 256(1). pagputul�n be cut from variously 256(13). pinamut�lan was cut from selectively or in quantity 158(10). 256(40). pinam�mut�lan is being cut from 256(33). nagputul�n cut together 236(43). pakip�tol that cut with others or as a favor 184(3). 263(40). makip�tol cut by permission 264(12). mak�kip�tol will cut along with others 206(11). nakip�tol cut by permission 264(8). nak�kip�tol is cutting by permission 264(10). pakikip�tol a cutting by permission 264(13). pakikipam�tol a cutting, as occupation, by permission 264(39). pakiput�lin be cut as a favor 264(43). ipakip�tol be cut as a favor 184(1). ipak�kip�tol will be asked to be cut 265(13). ipakipagp�tol be cut with as a favor 265(19). ipak�kipagp�tol will be cut for as a favor 265(23). ipinakipagp�tol was asked to be cut for 265(25). ipinak�kipagp�tol is being asked to be cut for 172(26). 265(28). kap�tol piece; brother, sister 16(5). 266(16). magkap�tol two such 270(5). magkakap�tol pl. 270(16). k�kap�tol only a piece 267(6). kap�p�tol there has just been cutting 267(17). kapagp�p�tol there has just been cutting of several things 267(20). kap�pam�tol there has just been cutting in quantity 267(23). magkaput�l get broken in numbers 182(22). magk�kaput�l will many of them get broken 269(10). nagkaput�l got broken in numbers 269(11). nagk�kaput�l is breaking in numbers 269(13). magk�put�l-put�l break into many pieces 255(21). magk�k�put�l-put�l will break into many pieces 271(23). nagk�put�l-put�l broke into many pieces 271(19). nagk�k�put�l-put�l gets mangled 271(21). ikap�tol be the cause of breaking 158(12). ikap�p�tol will be the cause of breaking or involuntary cutting 272(19). ikinap�tol was the cause of breaking 272(15). ikinap�p�tol is the cause of breaking 272(17). ipagkaput�l be the cause of breaking in numbers 273(9). ipinagkaput�l was the cause of breaking in numbers 273(11). ipinagk�kaput�l is the cause of breaking in numbers 273(7). kap�t�lan one of two who cut together 278(10). makap�tol be able to cut 269(7). makap�p�tol will be able to cut 281(41). nakap�tol has cut 282(22). nakap�p�tol is able to cut 281(39). map�tol have been cut, be able to be cut 38(35). 60(4). 283(37). map�p�tol will be able to be cut 283(38). nap�tol has been cut, was cut 261(26). nangap�tol pl. 286(17). nap�p�tol has just been cut, is cut 284(15). 285(1). nangap�p�tol pl. 286(19). pagkap�tol a having cut 282(37). makapagp�tol be able to cut several things 286(43). nakapagp�tol has cut 286(41). nakapagp�p�tol is able to cut 286(42). maput�lan be cut from 185(21). map�put�lan will be cut from 288(13). naput�lan was cut from 288(9). nap�put�lan is cut from 288(10). napagput�lan was able to be cut on 288(26). mak�p�tol chance to cut 290(28). mak�p�p�tol will chance to cut 290(30). nak�p�tol chanced to cut 24(34). 290(20). nak�p�p�tol is by chance cutting 290(23). m�p�tol get cut 294(3). m�p�p�tol will get cut 294(5). n�p�tol got cut 293(24.43). 294(2). n�p�p�tol gets cut, is cut 201(30). pagk�p�tol the way cutting got done 291(15). m�put�lan get cut from 238(2). m�p�put�lan will get cut from 297(41). n�put�lan got cut from 297(38). n�p�put�lan gets cut from 297(39). pap�tol that caused to be cut 299(15). paput�l transversely 166(21). kap�pap�tol there has just been causing to cut 301(11). kapagp�pap�tol there has just been causing to cut several things 301(13). pap�p�tol will ask to have cut 302(2). magpap�tol cause to be cut 225(1). magp�pap�tol will cause to be cut 191(6). nagpap�tol caused to be cut 303(13). nagp�pap�tol is causing to be cut 303(14). pagpapap�tol a causing to be cut 303(15). paput�lin be caused to be cut 304(39). pap�put�lin will be caused to cut 304(40). pinap�tol was caused to cut 153(23). pinap�p�tol is being caused to cut 304(37). papagput�lin be caused to cut on oneself 305(23). papagp�put�lin will be caused to cut several things 305(24). pinapagp�tol was caused to cut 181(27). pinapagp�p�tol is being caused to cut 181(16). papamut�lin be caused to cut selectively, in quantity, or as occupation 305(35). papam�mut�lin will be caused to cut 305(36). ipap�tol be caused to be cut 306(25). ipap�p�tol will be caused to be cut 306(23). ipinap�tol was caused to be cut 204(10). ipinap�p�tol is being caused to be cut 306(22). ipakipap�tol be asked to be caused to be cut 307(29). ipak�kipap�tol will be asked to be caused to be cut 307(32). ipinakipap�tol was asked to be caused to be cut 307(34). paput�lan be caused to be cut from 308(24). pap�put�lan will be caused to be cut from 308(25). pinaput�lan was caused to be cut from 308(19). pinap�put�lan is being caused to be cut from 308(22). makapagpap�tol be able to cause to be cut 311(12). mak�kapagpap�tol will be able to cause to be cut 311(15). nakapagpap�tol has been caused to be cut 311(8). nak�kapagpap�tol is able to cause to be cut 311(10). napap�tol asked to be cut for 311(38). napap�p�tol asks to be cut for 311(40). palaputul�n brittle 315(21). tagap�tol person whose duty it is to cut 315(32).

po�k place, district 40(2).

po�n lord, saint 104(5). 182(40). pin�po�n is being worshipped 189(3).

-puw�`, see k�puw�`.

-p�yat: nagp�yat staid up, watched 232(30). nagpuy�t repeatedly staid up 238(1). pagpupuy�t a repeated staying up 297(7). nam�m�yat keeps from sleeping, keeps up 240(31). pin�yat was kept up late 245(2).

S.

sa loc. particle 16(2). 45. 49. 195-212. 306. 515. sa law�: s�-law�han fickle 94(1). 259(20). sa ul�`: pagsa-ul�n be returned to 62(12). 72(13). pinagsa-ul�n was returned to 44(25). 256(7). n�sa is in 18(22). 314(7). nang�sa pl. 118(35). n�s�sa is being in 36(16). 44(1). p�sa go to 20(18). 314(9). p�p�sa will go to 314(10). m�pasa get to 94(4). m�p�pasa will get to 314(15). n�pasa went by chance 116(30). 279(4). n�p�pasa comes by chance to 106(26). pagk�pasa a chance coming to 60(21). 314(16).

s�, see is�.

sa�n loc. of an�: where? to what? 42(14). 64(37). 316(34). 264.

-sab�d: isinab�d was said in interruption, was thrust in 102(22).

-sab�y: sab�y-sab�y all at the same time 224(2). sinabay�n was accompanied 82(32). pagkak�sab�y a happening at the same time 270(42).

s�bi that said 24(8). 74(36). 198(12). 276. sab�-sab� chance talk 116(10). 120(9). nags�bi said 26(14). 36(29). nagsipags�bi pl. 26(5). nags�s�bi is saying 156(40). pagsas�bi a saying 155(24). sab�hin be said 30(15). 50(24). s�sab�hin will be said 20(11). 30(14). sin�bi was said 16(17). sin�s�bi is being said 96(9). pinagsab� was variously said 156(13). pinagsab�-sab� was repeatedly said 246(34). ipinags�bi was told about 249(35). pinagsab�han was told, was ordered 20(15). 32(26). kasabih�n proverb 276(11). pagkas�bi a having said 70(28). makapags�bi be able to tell 52(9). nakapags�bi was able to tell 76(25). m�s�s�bi will get said 92(37). pagk�s�bi a getting said 80(1). 100(36).

-s�bit: sabit�n clothes-rack 258(38). nakas�bit is hanging (from a nail, peg, etc.) 281(4).

-s�bog: nags�bog strewed 16(20). n�s�s�bog is lying scattered 90(30). 108(19). nang�s�bog got scattered, pl. 293(40).

sab�n S. soap 184(34).

-s�bong: pangs�bong used for cock-fighting 297(42). pagsas�bong cock-fighting 312(17). sabung�n cockpit, cock-fight 304(1). sabung�ro cock-fighter 98(21). 316(11).

-sabuw�t: kasabuw�t accomplice 298(19).

s�boy a sprinkling 68(3). sum�s�boy is splashing, intr. 228(41). pags�boy sprinkling 68(40). nags�s�boy is scattering 68(9). isin�boy was sprinkled 268(11). sin�sab�yan is being sprinkled at 68(24). nap�pas�boy falls scattering 70(4).

sadiy�` that come for 38(26). 78(28). 221(18) magsadiy�` go for one's purpose 74(28). nagsadiy�` went for his purpose 74(33). sinadiy�` was done intentionally 233(36). sin�sadiy�` is being done intentionally 62(13). 98(32).

sag�d close-cropped 219(13).

-sag�sa`: sumag�sa` knock, jostle 229(1). sagas�in be hit upon, be conflicted with 245(3). sinagas�an was bumped into 22(24). nags�gasa�n jostled each other 237(1). pagsas�gasa�n a jostling each other 237(1). m�sagas�an get run into 271(22). n�sagas�an got run into 297(43).

s�ging banana 16(8). See p�no`. sag�ngan banana-grove 250(40).

sagits�t sizzling 114(10).

sag�t that answered 26(23). 44(15). sumag�t answer 44(10). answered 26(1). sum�sag�t answers 44(2). sinag�t was given an answer 191(41). isinag�t was said in reply 16(18). makasag�t be able to answer 76(4). nakasag�t was able to answer 68(21).

saguw�n a paddle 261(41). sumaguw�n paddled 229(1). pagsaguw�n a paddling 82(12).

sah�g flooring, floor 114(43). isin�sah�g is being used as flooring 248(32).

-s�hod: sum�hod hold under 229(1). is�hod be held under 248(34).

-s�ing: mags�ing cook rice dry 232(30). sin�ing ration of rice, not yet served 229(8).

sak�` then, afterwards 52(30). 68(21). 243.

-sak�l: pagsak�l choking 227(5).

sakat�ro S. grass-cutter 96(2).

sak�y person carried in a vehicle 80(36). pangsak�y used for riding or driving 225(18). sumak�y mount, ride 72(1). mounted 52(37). sum�sak�y is mounting, is getting on or in (a vehicle) 229(2). pagsak�y mounting, riding 70(40). 167(41). nagsak�y took into a vehicle 234(25). pagsasak�y a taking into a vehicle 272(2). isinak�y was put on a vehicle 306(16). ipinagsak�y was taken into a vehicle 249(37). saky�n be embarked in 253(10). sinaky�n was ridden in 253(9). sin�saky�n is being ridden in 82(32). s�k�yan embarkation by many 258(3). sasaky�n vehicle 219(35). nak�kisak�y embarks along with others 98(18). ikin�sak�y was the cause of chance mounting 273(36). nakasak�y has mounted, is mounted 100(23). 281(15). nakas�sak�y is able to mount 281(43). pagkasak�y a past mounting, ability to mount 282(12.39). nasaky�n was able to be mounted 228(16). n�sak�y got put on a vehicle 294(28). n�s�sak�y is in a vehicle 114(22). pagk�sak�y a chance mounting or riding 292(17). 294(36). 295(41). n�saky�n got mounted 298(1). pasak�y that caused to be taken into a vehicle 299(17). in riding position, astride 299(30). nagpasak�y caused to be put on a vehicle 268(25). pagpapasak�y a causing to be put on a vehicle 303(17). ipinasak�y was caused to be put on a vehicle 306(26). ipinagpasak�y was caused to be used for riding 307(21). pinasaky�n was caused to be mounted 308(28). ipinagk�pasak�y was the cause of causing to ride 310(18).

sakd�l accusation 54(36). isinakd�l was charged 56(12). ipinagsakd�l was accused 54(31).

-sak�m: kasakim�n selfishness 28(34). 74(20).

s�kit (a) grief 223(20). pas�kit suffering caused 42(43). nagpas�kit caused suffering to be undergone 303(20). ipinas�kit was caused to be suffered 22(7). pinas�sak�tan is being caused to suffer 40(40). --(b) Accent shifted: sak�t pain, sickness 30(28). 42(3). 223(18). sumak�t hurt, injure 188(30). sin�sakt�n is being hurt 60(1). 70(15). nagkasak�t got sick 54(7). 78(24). pagkakasak�t a getting sick 269(8). ipinagkasak�t was the cause of getting sick 273(14). nakasak�t cause injury 313(32). masak�t sore 40(41). 281(31). masakt�n be hurt 206(24). mas�sakt�n will be hurt 204(2). nasakt�n got hurt 264(25). palas�k�tin one who easily gets sick 315(14).

s�ko S. sack 104(15).

-s�kop: sak�p included 290(31). pags�kop an including, a saving 306(42). m�nan�kop savior 20(33). nas�s�kop is included, is under control 116(31).

s�la failure, offense 38(2). sum�la fail, miss, 64(42). failed 229(4). sal�han be omitted, skipped 253(11). sangl�n be missed 253(14). sinangl�n was missed 253(12). nagk�s�la sinned against 271(1). pagkak�s�la a sinning against 290(1). kasal�nan sin 20(32). 98(7). makasal�nan 22(1). 74(22). 289(22). pagkas�la a having missed 272(10). 286(3).

salak�b fish-trap 243(7). m�nanalak�b fish-trapper 243(7).

-sal�kay: pagsal�kay an attacking 122(10). pananal�kay a repeated attacking 122(23). sinalak�yan was attacked 122(9).

salak�t rain-hat of palm-leaves 212(22).

salamangk� S. sleight-of-hand trick 202(37).

sal�mat thanks 16(32). 152(4). magpasal�mat give thanks, thank 160(15). napasal�mat was thankful 88(16).

salam�n glass, looking-glass, eye-glass 60(7). 238(39). n. of dog 147(22).

salap�` money; half-dollar 30(27). 252(41).

sal�t needy 219(14). kasalat�n lack 239(35).

salaw�l trousers 122(1).

-salays�y: isinalays�y was narrated 38(5).

salb�hi S. savage, brutal; brute 44(4). 50(17). 70(25). kasalbah�han brutality 54(28).

-s�li: is�li be taken along, be included 248(37). isin�li was included 248(36). kas�li participant 22(18). 48(5). n�kas�li got taken as companion 296(28). mak�s�li chance to take part 114(28).

salit�` word, speech 18(13). 20(41). magsalit�` speak 28(39). 80(37). nagsalit�` spoke 104(19). pagsasalit�` a speaking 80(40). pananalit�` manner of speaking 44(35). 50(15). pinagsalita�n was spoken to 76(3). s�lit�an conversation 32(7). 44(20). mags�lit�an converse 114(5). nags�s�lit�an are conversing 86(32). pagsas�lit�an a conversing 28(11). 64(10). 88(3). kas�lit�an one of two who converse together 278(2). makapagsalit�` be able to speak 50(14).

-s�lo: kas�lo fellow-partaker 42(8).

-sal�bong: sinal�bong was met 18(40). 66(19).

s�lok dipper; basket 229(6). sum�lok dip out water 229(6).

-sal�koy: kasaluk�yan present, at the same time 36(40). 260(11).

sal�p a dry measure; see kab�n.

s�ma (a) come along, go along 182(26). 222(5). sum�ma go along 32(13). 66(30). went along 140(19). s�s�ma will go along 84(12). pags�ma a going along 104(30). pagsas�ma a going together 54(18). is�ma be taken along 84(32). isin�ma was taken along 86(28). sam�han be gone with 253(14). sinam�han was gone with 186(20). s�sam�han will be gone with 68(34). s�m�han society, company 296(32). s�m�ha-ng-Sum�long the Sumulong Co. 210(30). s�m�ha-ng-�pera opera company 303(10). makis�ma go along with 202(23). kas�ma companion 30(9.22). 50(39). 273. magkakas�ma group of three or more companions 28(25). 48(39). --(b) With accent-shift: sam� act as partners 223(20). kasam� field-worker, peon 72(32). 86(22). kasamah�n partner 108(32). 210(35). See Sum�long. magkakasamah�n group of three or more 207(41). 278(40).

sam�` badness, injury 218(31). kasama�n badness, injuriousness 276 (37). kasama�-ng-p�lad bad fortune 42(28). masam�` bad, hurtful, ugly 40(14). 50(7). 58(39).

sambal�lo (S.) hat 137(42).

samp�l a slap 24(23). sinamp�l was slapped 24(22).

samp�y that hung across 251(33). nagsamp�y hung across, tr. 232(31). isinamp�y was hung across 248(38). samp�yan clothes-line 223(33).

Sam-P�dro S. St. Peter 72(27).

s�na in that case, then 34(17). 74(23). 47. 230.

San-Ant�niyo S. place-n. 34(29). See t�o.

s�nay practice 46(16). san�y practised 46(24). pasas�nay a drilling 116(29). pagkas�nay a past practising 46(23).

San-Vis�nte S. place-n. 220(40).

sandal�` moment, while, short space of time 18(6). 24(11).

sand�liyas S. sandals 278(35).

sand�k cooking-dipper of cocoanut-shell 74(5). sumand�k dipped out 229(8).

sanh�` cause 190(16).

-s�nib: sum�nib make one's sleeping-mat overlap 229(8). is�nib be made to overlap 248(7). kas�nib overlapping 266(18). magkas�nib two that overlap 269(38).

San-Ildep�nso S. place-n. 100(10). See l�pa`.

San-Mat�yo S. place-n., see b�yan.

San-Mig�l S. place-n. 50(9). 116(6). See b�yan.

s�nto S. saint 98(15). 104(15).

S�ntos S. family-n. 209(26).

sant�l fruit and tree of Sandoricum Indicum L. 34(40).

sang� bough 34(28). 118(28).

-sangg�: sum�sangg� is warding off 106(36). sin�sangg� is being warded off 106(35).

Sang-Huw�n S. St. John 104(6). 110(10).

sangk�lan chopping-block 256(1).

sangk�p accompaniment 221(22). kasangk�p id. 266(20). kasangk�pan utensil, tool, appurtenances 58(2.33). 74(6).

-sangl, see s�la.

sanl�` pledge 252(22). sangl�an place for pledges, see b�hay.

s�pa` pond 88(26).

sapagk�t because 20(17). 201(36). 306.

-sapant�ha`: sinapant�ha` was conjectured 38(25).

sap�t sufficient 305(19).

sap�tos S. shoes 32(35).

-s�pit: sum�pit arrived, came 62(24).

-sar�: pangsar� instrument for closing 225(19). sum�sar� closes, intr. 225(20). pagsasar� a closing, tr. 26(36). isinar� was closed 80(1). pagk�sar� a chance closing 80(17).

-sar�p: masasar�p tasty, pl. 34 (39).

s�ri` s�r�-s�ri` various 48(15). 74(31).

sar�le self; own 48(33). 62(12). 72(13). 137. 169. 175.

sar�wa` moist; fresh 184(9). nanar�wa` got fresh 76(40).

sats�t tonsure 106(21).

saw�` awkward 219(15). 276(33). saw�-ng-p�lad unlucky 211(8). nasaw�-ng-p�lad became unlucky 54(3). kasawi�n awkwardness 276(37). kasawi�-ng-p�lad bad fortune 94(37).

s�ya S. dress, skirt 240(41).

-say�: kas�y�han gladness 275(27). masay� gay 80(15). 92(28).

-s�yad: magsis�yad get wearied, pl. 118(20).

s�yang that regretted 219(16). nanghin�yang grieved 292(14). nangh�hin�yang is mourning 241(24). panghihin�yang a mourning 241(26). panghinay�ngan be regretted 257(6). pangh�hinay�ngan will be regretted 191(31). pinanghinay�ngan was regretted 257(12). pinangh�hinay�ngan is being regretted 257(13). nas�yang went for naught 285(5).

-say�w: sumay�w dance 110(32). danced 186(18). sum�say�w is dancing 112(2). pagsay�w a dancing 112(4). nags�say�w is performing a dance 110(38). sayaw�n be danced before 253(15). sinayaw�n was danced to 186(21). s�y�wan dance by many; ball 112(5). 186(19). 258(4).

si siy particle of names 20(2). 45. 58. 62. 78. 126. 162. 196. ni disj., of, by 45. 162. kay loc., to, for 45. 196.

Sib�l place-n. 118(26).

sib�yas S. onions 76(17).

sig�` bonfire 66(16).

-sig�ng: isig�ng be put on the fire 248(39). nakasig�ng is cooking 281(6).

sigar�liyo S. cigarette 227(1).

sig�w that cried 221(23). sumig�w yelled 24(21). s�sig�w will yell 24(19). pagsig�w a shouting 42(41). nagsisig�w kept shouting 16(31). 44(40). nags�sisig�w screams continually 40(42). pagsisig�w a continual shouting 16(26). 44(26). isinig�w was cried out 24(13). 68(39). sinigaw�n was yelled at 253(16). s�g�wan a shouting by many 258(5). mags�s�g�wan will yell together 236(18). pagsis�g�wan a yelling together 48(37). nakas�sig�w is able to cry out 84(25). pasig�w in a shout 70(24). n�pasig�w involuntarily gave a shout 88(27).

-sigl, see sil�d.

-sigl�: masigl� cheerful 276(35). magpasigl� cause to be cheerful 112(11).

sig�ro S. no doubt 18(24). 80(39).

si�t spines at base of bamboo-cluster 246(27).

-s�kad: sum�kad kicked at 229(9). nags�sik�d kicks repeatedly 238(3). nags�sisik�d is kicking much and repeatedly 239(11). sinik�ran was kicked at 253(17).

s�kat ray of light 66(22). sum�s�kat is shining 78(4).

-sik�p: sumik�p became narrow 229(10). nagsik�p grew crowded 234(27). masik�p crowded 98(39).

sekr�ta S. spy 168(5).

-siks�k: sumiks�k crowded his way 229(13). nags�siks�k is stuffing 234(29). nak�kipagsiks�kan takes part in the crowding 98(41).

s�ko elbow 48(19).

s�ko, see ts�ko.

-s�kot: pas�kot-s�kot nooks and corners 300(33).

sil� they 18(27). 63. nil� disj., by them, of them 16(7). 163. kanil� prep. and loc., their, by them, them 18(26). 165. 169. kan�-kanil� prep. and loc., their various, their respective 26(37). 165. 169.

sil�, see sin�.

silakb� a flare, leap 231(6). 254(26). sumilakb� flared up 229(14). sin�silakbuh�n is being welled up in 22(15).

-s�lang: s�l�ngan place of rising 259(41). silang�n place of child-birth 260(26). s�lang�nan east 163(27). sil�ngan east; place-n. 163(27). 261(13).

-silb� (S.): magsilb� serve 40(7). pinags�silbih�n is being waited on 64(12).

s�le S. chile pepper 76(16).

sil�d small room 84(39). 114(13). sumil�d get into a small space 104(34). isil�d be put in 248(40). sigl�n be filled 138(5). sinigl�n was filled 20(17.34). sin�sigl�n is being filled 20(6). pinagsisigl�n was variously filled 118(7). 256(20). pagk�sil�d a chance putting away 104(37).

-s�lip: sin�lip was peeped at 106(20).

s�liya S. chair 234(12).

s�long ground-floor, space under platform of house 260(29).

-simb�: magsimb� go to church 78(37). nagsimb� went to church 242(18). nags�simb� goes to church 56(13). simb�han church 20(15). mapagsimb� devout 98(10).

sin� sil� pl. particle of names 48. 60. 62. 162. 196. nin� nil� disj., of, by 48. 162. kin� loc., to, for 48. 196.

s�nag ray 66(36).

s�ne S. cinematograph 204(22).

sin�las S. sandals 70(1).

s�niyas S. signals 246(22).

-sint�: pagsint� a proffering love 229(16). sin�sint� is being loved 245(5).

s�ntimos S. centimos, cents 222(37).

s�no who? 97. 167. s�no-s�no pl. 97. 131. n�no disj., of whom? by whom? 167. 168. kan�no prep. and loc., whose? by whom? 168. 169. kan�-kan�no pl. 168. 169.

sinung�ling mendacious 219(17). nags�sinungal�ng tells lies 238(5). kasinungal�ngan falsehood 276(38).

-sing�l: panining�l a dunning 313(1). singil�n be dunned for 264(14). sin�sing�l is being claimed 54(23). n�sing�l got collected 294(7).

singkam�s (S.) Pachyrizus angulatus Rich. 76(16).

-singk�w: nagpasingk�w caused to be hitched up 52(35).

sings�ng ring 102(2). pal�sings�ngan the ring finger 315(25).

s�pa` that kicked away; football 46(32). pags�pa` a kicking 48(15). m�nin�pa` football-player 48(24). sip�in be kicked away 84(9). sin�pa` was kicked away 24(45). 84(3). pinagsip�` was variously kicked 84(43). pinagsisip�` was variously and repeatedly kicked 84(21). sip�ro football-player 316(11). sip�ros pl. 48(24).

-s�pag: kasip�gan diligence 276(38). mas�pag diligent 64(14). masis�pag pl. 34(35).

-s�ra` (a) nagkas�ra` got partly spoiled 268(37). nakas�s�ra` causes ruin 235(27). mas�ra` be able to be destroyed 283(40). nas�ra` was destroyed; deceased 78(5). 285(7). nas�sir�an gets damaged 301(24). m�s�ra` get destroyed 293(26). n�s�s�ra` gets destroyed 191(32). --(b) Accent shifted: sir�` destroyed 223(3). kasir�` opponent in anger 266(42). magkasir�` break with each other 24(28). nagkasir�` had a falling out 269(20). nagsipagkasir�` pl. 269(28). kasira�n ruin 94(12). kasira�-ng-p�ri injury to honor 94(16).

serb�siyo S. service 62(35).

s�rmon S. sermon 20(16). isin�s�rmon is being preached about 50(16). sin�s�rmunan is being preached to 50(13).

-s�si: mags�si repent 20(31). magsipags�si pl. 22(2). pagsis�si a repenting 22(25). pinagsis�han was repented 291(9).

-s�sid: sum�sid stay under water 168(41). pags�sid a staying under water 309(10). n�s�s�sid is submerged 88(35). pagpapas�sid a causing to dive 116(38).

s�taw the cow-pea, Vigna catjang Endl. 76(16).

siy� he, she; that which 47. 63. 106. niy� disj., by him, of him, 47. 163. kaniy� prep. and loc., his, by him, him 165. 169. k�siy� sufficient 268(8). magk�k�siy� will be sufficient 271(4). pagk�siyah�n be a sufficient container 52(13). makas�siy� will be adequate 281(7). nasiyah�n got what corresponded to it 66(21). nas�siyah�n gets what corresponds to it 112(26).

-siy�do (S. demasiado) :masiy�do excessive 54(19). 289(17).

siy�m nine 38(6). 67. pangsiy�m number nine 225(38). mak�siy�m nine times 298(33).

siy�sat that inquired into 203(5). nagsiy�sat inquired 28(2). 203(2). pagsisiy�sat an inquiring 66(21). maniy�sat pry into 240(33). siniy�sat was interrogated 64(34). nasiy�sat has been inquiring into 199(32). mapagsiy�sat inquisitive 40(20).

siy�mpre S. always 262(13).

siy�te-pal�bras S. Easter Mass 20(29).

sub�lit but 322.

-sub�: sumub� boiled over, intr. 52(12). sinubh�n was boiled over in 54(30).

s�bo` mouthful 221(24). pagsus�bo` a feeding 219(15). sub�an be fed 253(19).

-s�bok: nan�n�bok is spying 40(24). sub�kan be watched for, put to a test 68(8). 102(34). sinub�kan was put to a test 56(39). sin�sub�kan is being spied on 40(22). masub�kan be able to be tested 265(20).

-sug�l (S.): nags�sug�l is gambling 269(22). nagsipagsug�l gambled, pl. 190(34). pagsusug�l a gambling 251(29). s�g�lan gambling-party 174(29).

s�gat a wound 20(8). sum�gat wounded 20(38). sinug�tan was wounded 253(20). sugat�n wounded person, the wounded 20(39). 260(28). nagsugat�n wounded each other 237(3). masug�tan be able to be wounded 36(21).

s�ha` grape-fruit 34(40). See p�no`.

s�hol a bribe 72(39).

s�ka` wine set to sour, vinegar 289(2).

s�kat proper, fitting 58(18). 98(24). 268.

sukl�y comb 229(19). sumukl�y combed 229(18). nagsukl�y combed himself 234(30). sinukl�y was combed 245(7). sinuklay�n id. 253(21). nagpasukl�y caused himself to be combed 303(22). pinapagsukl�y was caused to comb himself 305(26).

s�lat that written, letter 52(10). sul�t written 199(30). sum�lat write 140(18). wrote 50(39). s�s�lat will write 138(11). sum�s�lat is writing 146(5). pags�lat a writing 140(29). pagsusul�t a writing in quantity 238(5). panun�lat id. 240(35). magsusul�t clerk, scribe 243(2). m�nunul�t id. 243(20). sin�lat was written 154(8). 245(9). isin�lat was put into writing 94(22). 184(35). sul�tan be written to 154(19). sulat�n writing-desk 217(13). kas�l�tan kasulat�n correspondent 278(12. 24). makas�lat be able to write 282(2). nakas�s�lat is able to write 282(1). nak�s�lat happened to write 176(38). tagas�lat writer 315(39). tagapagpas�lat overseer of writers 316(5).

-s�lid: sum�lid spin thread 229(19). sin�lid thread 184(4).

sulihiy� the weave 48(1).

sul�ras S. joists 234(43).

-suls� (S.): manuls� darn 169(2). tagasuls� darning-woman 169(1).

sul�` torch 90(26).

s�lok corner 52(33). 64(22). sul�k-sul�k nooks and corners 64(21).

s�long go ahead 151(39). sum�long push ahead 229(19). also as family-n. (Sum�long at kasamah�n: see b�g�san). pags�long a pushing on; a going away 88(41). 308(36). is�s�long will be pushed forward 58(3). isin�s�long is being pushed ahead 230(3).

s�man steamed rice in banana-leaves 227(1).

sombr�ro S. hat 137(41).

sumb�ng complaint 96(12). nagsumb�ng brought a charge 100(21). ipagsumb�ng be complained of 96(35). ipinagsumb�ng was complained of 38(1). 96(10). palasumb�ngin tattle-tale 315(10).

-sump�ng: pagsump�ng attack, fit 313(22). sinump�ng was overcome 18(36). 84(14). sin�sump�ng is being overcome 108(27).

sund�lo S. soldier 52(23). nagsund�lo became a soldier 183(2). pagsusund�lo military service 303(34).

-sund�`: sumund�` fetch 229(21). pagsund�` a fetching 229(22). sinund�` was called for 256(41). sin�sund�` is being called for 104(23). k�sund�` agreeing 268(9). nagk�sund�` agreed with each other 168(16). pagkak�sund�` an agreeing with each other 271(5). pagk�sundu�n pagk�sunduw�n be agreed upon 278(30). pinagk�sundu�n was agreed upon 32(2). nagpasund�` caused to be fetched 92(23). pagpapasund�` a causing to be fetched 303(23). ipinasund�` was caused to be fetched 306(28). ipinas�sund�` is being caused to be fetched 88(19). 92(16).

sunt�k blow on the head 229(24). pagsunt�k a striking on the head 229(23). suntuk�n be struck on the head 245(10). sinunt�k was struck on the head 245(10). sin�sunt�k is being struck on the head 245(11).

-s�no`: nakis�no` dwelt along, dwelt with 264(15). kas�no` fellow-guest 118(15). magkakas�no` pl. 118(18).

-sun�d: sun�d-sun�d following on one another 72(25). sumun�d follow, comply, obey 52(24). 100(27). followed 231(6). sum�sun�d is following 38(7). 46(19). pagsun�d a following 38(10). 94(24). sund�n be complied with 92(8). sinun�d was complied with 303(16). sin�sun�d is being complied with 62(37). 66(13). isinun�d was taken next, was made to follow 76(18). sund�n be followed 240(23). sinund�n was followed 22(25). 36(36). sin�sund�n is being followed 68(23). kasun�d following another 266(21). magkasun�d two, one of whom follows the other 42(29). 270(8). pagkak�sun�d-sun�d a following one on the other 271(6). mas�n�rin obedient 94(20).

s�nog a burning up, conflagration 122(18). 156(10). sun�g burnt 66(41). 223(4). panun�nog a setting fire to, a burning 122(12). sun�gin be burned up 122(20). pinagsun�g was variously burned up 122(10). magkas�nog have a fire 268(41). nas�nog has been burned 172(39). 259(4). pagkas�nog a past burning 197(34). 283(2). pagk�s�nog a getting burned 292(19). 295(19).

s�nong that carried on the head 108(16).

sung�nga` a blow on the mouth 212(37). s�sungang�in will be struck on the mouth 174(37).

s�ngay horn 24(29).

-sungg�b: sinunggab�n was seized 46(27). 58(22). sin�sunggab�n is being seized 108(34). masunggab�n have been taken hold of 110(2). nas�sunggab�n is able to be seized 110(8).

s�pot bag 34(5).

sorb�tes S. sherbet 272(33).

s�so breast, nipple 212(11). ipinak�kipas�so is being asked to be caused to take the breast 307(38).

sus�` snail 18(1).

suts�t a whistling 197(22). sum�suts�t is whistling 229(24). malasuts�t a young lout 315(3). palasuts�tin one who always whistles 315(11).

so�t that worn 70(1). iso�t be put on 248(41). soot�n be got into 104(11).

-suw�y: pagsuw�y a disobeying 54(3). makasuw�y be able to disobey 94(21).

suw�las S. soles 306(8).

suw�ldo S. pay 26(27).

-s�yo`: pags�yo` a bribing 92(38). panun�yo` a propitiating by bribes 72(34).

s�yod a harrow 243(3). magsuy�d harrower.

T.

t, see at.

ta�n that set apart 221(3). itin�ta�n is being reserved 248(24). taan�n fugitive 261(14). magtaan�n flee 237(4). makataan�n be able to flee 286(24). 313(29). n�t�ta�n is reserved 80(13).

ta�s height 218(13). ita�s upper part, north 36(27). 163(25). paita�s upward 48(6). itina�s was raised 88(34). kataas�n north 163(25). mata�s high 64(12). n�ta�s got raised up 78(8).

-tab�`: tumab�` grow stout 206(27). katab�` how fat 42(5). matab�` fat, stout 244(34). n�pakatab�` very fat 313(12).

tabak�ra S. tabati�re 220(25).

tab�ko S. cigar 66(12). nagt�tab�ko is smoking a cigar 66(19).

tab� side; step aside 32(31). 152(1). n�tab� got to the side of 74(14). pagk�tab� a getting to the side of 94(8).

tabl� S. board 34(37).

t�bo` dipper 222(27).

t�bon dam 245(14). nagt�bon dammed up 232(32). pagtat�bon a damming up 179(39). tinab�nan was dammed up 253(22). n�t�t�bon is covering, is piled over 120(22). pinatab�nan was caused to be filled 26(10).

tabur�te S. chair 24(39).

tadt�d chopped up 20(7). pagtatadt�d a chopping up 114(10). and Corrigenda.

tag� tig� coming from 56(23). 48. 254.

-tag�`: tumag�` hew, chop 290(27). tinag�` was chopped 44(39).

tag�l length in time, endurance 168(41). tagal�n be done long 253(23). matag�l long-enduring, patient 104(26). natagal�n was able to be endured in 62(6). p�tag�lan contest of endurance 309(10). pagpap�tag�lan a contesting for endurance 48(22). 309(17). kap�tag�lan opponent in a contest for endurance 310(32).

Tag�log Tagalog 50(15). 58(6). Katagal�gan the Tagalog country 50(23).

tag�lid, see -g�lid.

tagp�` a patch 266(4). tagpi�n be mended 253(26). tagp�an place of patching 259(7). kat�tagp�` there has just been mending 175(9).

tagp�` a meeting 220(3). magtatagp�` meet each other, pl. 102(4). nagtatagp�` met each other 26(39). tagpu�n be met by appointment 245(12). tagpu�n be joined up 253(26). pagt�tagpu�n will be met in 26(34). tagp�an meeting-place 106(9). mak�kipagtagp�` will meet another 98(26). mak�tagp�` happen to meet 66(5). 92(14). nak�tagp�` happened to meet 18(2). 36(8). m�tagpu�n get met with 106(25). n�tagpu�n got met with 34(20). 92(15).

t�go` that put away 221(25). magt�go` hide oneself 32(35). magtag�` keep oneself in hiding 56(19). nagtag�` kept himself in hiding 56(21). pagtatag�` a staying in hiding 312(13). it�go` be hidden 40(25). itin�t�go` is being put away 273(34). tagu�n place for safe-keeping; hiding-place; hiding 52(35). 120(10). 163(22). kin�t�tag�an is the place of concealment 118(43). makapagt�go` be able to hide oneself 52(32). n�t�t�go` is hidden 24(31). 34(11). pagk�t�go` the way of storing 268(39). pat�go` given for safe-keeping 293(26).

-tah�n: magtah�n cease 232(33). nagtah�n ceased 106(7). t�h�nan abode 66(24). patahanin be caused to cease 100(2).

-tah�`: manah�` sew, patch 169(2). pananah�` sewing as occupation 240(36). m�nan�hi` seamstress 243(14). pinan�nahi�n is the place where sewing is done 256(42). tagatah�` person appointed to sew 315(39).

tah�d spur of rooster 238(3).

tah�lan girder 227(15).

tah�mik quiet 102(4). 114(4). tumah�mik become quiet, quiet down 44(17). became quiet 44(25). 122(23). nanah�mik quieted down 240(37). nagsipanah�mik pl. 36(5). katahim�kan quietness 116(9). matah�mik quiet 34(35). 120(38). m�tah�mik get quiet 40(42).

tah�l a bark 62(8). tum�tah�l is barking 229(25). pagtah�l a barking 305(2). pagtatah�l a barking at 234(31). t�h�lan a baying together 258(7). nagt�h�lan bayed together 190(17). ikin�tah�l was the cause of barking 273(38). nakatah�l has barked, was able to bark 191(2). 198(18). pagk�tah�l a chance barking 158(8). pagpapatah�l a causing to bark 296(10). pinatah�l was caused to bark 304(41).

ta�nga t�nga ear 110(35).

-tak�: pagtatak� a being surprised 64(16). 232(34). ipinagt�tak� is the cause of surprise 66(4). katak�-tak� exciting wonder 36(26). nakapagt�tak� causes wonderment 36(24).

takb� a run 70(40). tumakb� run 18(18). ran 18(39). tum�takb� is running 251(39). t�takb� will run 18(35). pagtakb� a running 18(9). pagtakb�-takb� a running about at intervals 231(22). nagt�takb� runs (as repeated occurrence) 108(16). nagsipagtakb� ran, pl. 84(29). nangagsipagtakb� id. 116(13). pagtatakb� a running 88(25). nagt�tatakb� is running wild 62(13). 238(42). takb�han a running together 60(27). 116(5). nagtakb�han ran together 22(26). nagsipagtakb�han pl. 96(30). nagt�takb�han are running together 86(40). 106(34). pagtatakb�han a running together 18(1). 96(17). makipagtakb�han join in a race with 18(21). nak�kipagtakb�han joins in a race 60(26). pinak�kipagtakbuh�n is being run with 60(29). 265(33). makatakb� be able to run 18(16). patakb� on the run 68(18). 72(8). pinatakb� was caused to run 70(39).

tak�p cover 172(15). pangtak�p used as cover 94(15).

t�kot fear 20(6). tak�tin be frightened 50(33). nagt�tak�t-tak�tan pretends to be frightened 108(15). kat�kot-t�kot terrifying 267(27). ikinat�kot was the cause of fearing 272(23). katak�tan be feared 36(9). kinatak�tan was feared 274(30). kinat�tak�tan is being feared 42(18). pagkatakut�n be feared by many 275(19). pagk�katakut�n will be feared by many 275(21). pinagkatakut�n was feared by many 275(15). pinagk�katakut�n is being feared by many 36(30). katak�tan timidity 116(14). katakut�n reverence 276(11). katatakut�n terrifying 34(32). 277(30). nakat�t�kot is causing fear 66(12). mat�kot be afraid 20(13). nat�kot grew afraid 58(23). nangat�kot pl. 36(6). nat�t�kot is afraid 36(7). pagkat�kot a being afraid 72(9). palatakut�n easily frightened.

t�la` star 272(25).

-tal�`: n�tal�` got fixed 116(24).

talag� by fate, by nature, once for all 98(33). 116(16). tinalag� was resolved upon 46(23). katalagah�n fate 276(40).

-t�las: mat�las keen, clever 234(9).

-talast�s: nat�talast�s is able to be understood 284(2). napagtalast�s was entirely understood 287(14). napagt�talast�s nap�pagtalast�s is entirely understood 287(15).

-t�li`: pan�li` used for tethering, tying up 225(21). nagt�li` tethered 232(35). itin�li` was tethered 313(25). tinal�an was tied up 104(37). nakat�li` is tied 284(16).

-t�lik: tum�lik became close 88(2). mat�lik intimate 22(30). 52(17).

-tal�kod, see lik�d.

tal�m cutting-edge 221(36). patal�m cutting instrument 36(19). nagpatal�m caused to be sharp, sharpened 44(36). nagp�patal�m is sharpening 303(25). pinatal�m was made sharp 304(42). napat�tal�m is able to be made sharp. 311(24).

tal�no (S.?) intelligence 60(16). katalin�han id. 50(6). matal�no intelligent 36(28).

-t�lo (a): nagt�t�lo is contending 46(34). pagtat�lo a contending 296(31). man�lo be victorious 52(8). nan�lo won 48(36). nan�n�lo is victorious 62(2). nags�sipan�lo pl. 118(5). panan�lo victory 56(30). m�nanal� victorious, victor 48(38). 62(1). tal�nin be defeated 46(37). t�tal�nin will be defeated 18(24). tal�nan defeated, loser 18(42). 148(22). 163(7). pinanal�nan was won 60(33). kat�l�nan one of two who are opposing each other 278(12). pinagkatalun�n was won in by many 60(27). 275(23). pagkat�lo a being defeated 52(7). m�kat�lo turn out to be the opponent 168(28). m�k�kat�lo will be an opponent 30(2). n�kat�lo was the opponent 296(29). n�k�kat�lo is the opponent 296(31). --(b) Accent shifted: katal� opponent in winning-and-losing game 266(43). nagkatal� played a game 269(21). pagkakatal� a winning-and-losing 48(21).

talump�ti` oration 98(38). nagt�talump�ti` is making a speech 98(41). pagtatalump�ti` a speech-making 236(39).

-tal�n: tumal�n jumped down 88(29). nagtal�n jumped down 28(21). 70(30). 72(13).

tal�ng egg-plant 76(16).

-talungk�`: nakatalungk�` has squatted down 98(19). 112(1). nang�t�talungk�` are in squatting position 108(29). patalungk�` in squatting position 220(9).

t�ma` (a) a hit, correct 152(7). 220(5). tum�ma` hit 24(23). 229(26). tam�an be hit and destroyed or disfigured 238(39). m�tam�an get hit and disfigured 298(5). --(b) Accent shifted: tam�` hit 223(5). tama�n be hit in some part 106(38). tinama�n was hit 24(25). 38(21). m�tama�n get hit in some part 36(21). 298(11).

-tam�d: katamar�n be neglected 274(36). kat�tamar�n will be neglected 274(39). kinatamar�n was neglected 274(34). kat�m�ran laziness 18(36). matam�d lazy 260(15).

tam�s sweetness 297(10). matam�s sweet, sugar 198(31). 252(6).

-tamn, see tan�m.

-tampal�san: tinampal�san was roughly handled 94(14). katampalas�nan roughness 310(9).

-tamp�: pagtatamp�han mutual contrariness 259(28).

-tam�: magtam� partake 78(39). nagt�tam� is partaking 112(20).

-tan�w: tuman�w take into view 90(39). tanaw�n be observed 108(21). pagkatan�w a having looked 283(4). nak�tan�w chanced to espy 28(13). 72(5). pagk�tan�w a chance espying, the way of seeing 18(34). 108(16). 291(19).

-tand�`: tum�tand�` is getting old 229(27). matand�` old 38(6). matatand�` pl. 114(31). matanda�n be able to be remembered 24(5). nat�tanda�n is able to be remembered 20(25). 28(5). 116(19).

tanikal�` chain 244(38).

tan�m that planted 221(26). panan�m used for planting 86(32). nagt�tan�m is planting 86(38). pagtatan�m a planting 307(13). m�nan�nim planter 243(15). it�tan�m will be planted 16(6). tamn�n be planted in 253(28). n�t�tan�m is planted 76(31). n�t�tamn�n is planted in 34(39).

taniy�g much regarded 219(18). pagtataniy�g an exhibiting 90(16). tany�gan exhibition 259(9). pagtatany�gan the making an exhibition 90(9).

tans�` copper 230(14).

tantiy� S. calculation, guess 281(41).

t�nod watchman t�nod-b�hay house-watchman 210(31). t�nod-p�lay rice-guard 210(31). tum�nod guarded 229(27). nagt�nod stood guard, formed a guard 207(41). tinan�ran was guarded 253(30).

tan�ng that asked, question 56(5). 68(21). tuman�ng asked (with quotation or thing asked about) 44(8). 82(13). 106(10). 229(29). nagtan�ng put questions, asked (with indirect quotation) 82(3). 234(34). nagt�tan�ng is putting questions 234(33). tinan�ng was inquired of 26(1). itinan�ng was asked 26(3). 30(30). ipagtan�ng be asked about 74(26). ipagtatan�ng be repeatedly asked about 98(23).

-t�nga`: tinang�an was threatened 100(13).

t�ngan grasp; that grasped 66(38). 108(41). tinangn�n was grasped 42(39).

tang�y that carried along 70(3). nagt�tang�y is carrying along 68(28). tinang�y was carried along, washed away 82(34). tin�tang�y is being borne along 16(3).

tangg�p that received 221(27). tumangg�p received 76(25). tanggap�n be accepted 48(25). 245(16). t�tanggap�n will be accepted 52(25). tinangg�p was received, accepted 58(9). 219(29). tanggap�n be taken from 253(31). tangg�pan receiving-place 252(21). n�tangg�p chanced to be accepted 42(28).

-tangg�l: pagtatangg�l a defending 257(14). m�nanangg�l attorney 116(25). maipagtangg�l be able to be defended 288(1). tagapagtangg�l attorney 305(40).

-tangh�`: tumangh�` wonder 229(30).

tangh�li` noon 30(29). manangh�li` eat the noon meal 204(26). katanghal�an middle part of day 26(14). 120(38).

-t�ngi`: itin�ngi` was refused 60(29).

-tangl�w: pagtangl�w an illuminating 66(36).

-tang�`: tumang�` consented 16(6). tum�tang�` consents 229(31).

t�pang courage 36(31). katap�ngan bravery 276(41). mat�pang courageous 42(19). 66(2).

tap�t space in front 189(1). ipinagtap�t was owned up 90(32). katap�t facing 48(7).

tap�k a tap 220(7). pinagt�tap�k is being petted 84(10).

-t�pon: it�pon be cast away 30(36). 62(23). itin�pon was cast away 62(30). ipinagtap�n was variously cast away 120(40). tapun�n place for throwing away 205(21). nagpat�pon caused to be exiled 56(27). ipat�pon be caused to be cast out 56(17). pagkapat�pon a having caused to be banished 120(18).

tap�n S. stopper, cork 166(17). tapun�n be corked 253(34).

-t�pos: tap�s ended 30(19). tap�sin be ended 236(18). tin�pos was ended 56(6). katapus�n end, cessation 24(1). 50(18). 114(33). makat�pos have finished 88(3). 167(26). mat�pos come to an end 50(37). 82(3). nat�pos ended 236(37). pagkat�pos a having ended 44(37). 52(4). mat�pos-t�pos be able to come to an end 287(39).

tar� come along 207(35).

tarab�ko, see b�ko.

-tarangk�: t�rangk�han gateway 32(17).

-tar�to S.: pagtar�to a treating 44(31).

tas� (S.) point 254(2).

t�tal splinters 58(17).

t�tay father 120(17). 122(17). 59. magt�tay father and child 242(16). magtat�tay pl. 242(33).

tatl�, see -tl�.

t�o person, human being 20(7). t�o-ng-b�yan townsperson 50(17). t�o-ng-San-Ant�niyo person of San Antonio 34(31). pana�hin guest 247(29). 250(39). t�o-ta�han manikin; pupil of the eye 88(8). 135(22). kat�o persons 42(6). 255. kata�han mankind 135(21). kataw�n body 20(33). 276(19). pangangataw�n physique, body 18(14). 36(11).

-ta�b: pagtata�b a tipping over, tr. 82(32).

ta�n year 26(36). ta�n-ta�n every year 191(32). k�ta�n at the same time 104(18). nagk�ta�n happened at the same time 84(37). 94(6). pagkak�ta�n a happening at the same time 271(6). n�t�ta�n comes at the same time 110(22).

t�wa (a) laughter 68(27). t. nang t. keeps laughing 206(35). tum�wa laughed 18(23). tum�t�wa is laughing 229(31). pagt�wa a laughing 100(37). tum�t�wa-t�wa laughs at intervals 231(23). taw�nan be laughed at 186(34). t�w�nan laughter by many 259(37). katatawan�n laughable, laughing-stock 24(17). 167(30). --(b) Accent shifted: tum�taw�-taw� snickers, giggles at intervals 231(28). nanaw�-naw� kept snickering 241(33). ik�taw� be the cause of laughter 185(23). ik�t�taw� will be the cause of snickering 274(2). ikin�taw� was the cause of laughter 292(31). ikin�t�taw� is the cause of snickering 274(4). nak�t�taw� causes irrepressible laughter 108(28). matatawan�n easily made to laugh 290(3). pataw�taw� snickering at intervals 300(38). n�pataw� burst out laughing 120(28).

-t�wad: pat�taw�rin will be pardoned, excused 184(19).

t�wag a call; name 50(10). 64(18). pangt�wag pan�wag used for calling 225(22). tum�wag call 18(27). called 32(39). tum�t�wag is calling 64(5). pagt�wag a calling 64(42). nagt�wag announced 234(36). pagtat�wag an announcing 234(37). nagtaw�g called in numbers 238(7). nagt�taw�g is calling in numbers 238(7). pagtataw�g a calling in numbers 238(11). nagt�tataw�g is calling much and variously 239(12). magtataw�g town-crier 303(30). man�wag summon 240(38). taw�gin be called 78(1). tin�wag was called 16(5). tin�t�wag is being called 40(32). itin�wag was called out, was called for 42(31). 44(28). 248(42). ipinagt�wag was called out 249(39). taw�gan be called to 253(36). pagkat�wag a having called 283(6). m�t�wag get called 46(21). n�t�wag got called 303(34). pagk�t�wag a chance calling 291(39). pat�wag caused to be called out 299(19). nagpat�wag caused to be called 303(26). pagpapat�wag a causing to be called 303(27). magpapataw�g town-crier 248(42). ipinat�wag was caused to be called 52(13). 54(25). ipinagp�pat�wag is being caused to be called out 307(24).

-taw�d: tumaw�d cross 106(4). crossed 68(2). napat�taw�d is causing himself to be taken across 80(35).

tay�` stakes 258(8). t�y�an a staking by several 258(8).

t�yo we, incl. 63. Cf. �tin and t�.

tay�` stand up 222(7). erected 223(35). pangtay�` used for setting up, for standing up 225(24). 306(9). tumay�` stood up 204(27). pagtay�` a standing up 289(21). magtay�` set up, erect 203(2). nagtay�` erected 234(40). pagtatay�` an erecting 234(22). it�tay�` will be set up 296(2). itinay�` was erected 248(43). tinayu�n was built in 253(36). pagkak�tay�` a standing up together 98(39). 271(7). kin�t�tayu�n is being stood on 98(40). nakatay�` is upright 110(41). nakat�tay�` is able to stand up 282(3). pagkatay�` a having stood up 283(8). n�t�tay�` is standing 34(38). 50(26). pagk�tay�` a chance standing up or erecting 104(19). 291(21). patay�` caused to be erected 299(20). in standing position 287(26). nagpatay�` caused to be erected 303(32). pagpapatay�` a causing to be built 303(33). pinatay�` was caused to stand up 304(43). ipinatay�` was caused to be erected 306(30). n�patay�` jumped to his feet 312(31).

-t�yog: kat�yog what tallness 267(35).

t� (t�yo?) come along 207(35).

te�tro, see tey�tro.

-tib�`: tumib�` cut down bananas 229(34). tinib�n trunk of banana-tree after fruit has been gathered 184(2).

-t�bay: tum�bay grew firm 24(27). tib�yan be propped 296(2). mat�bay firm 18(20). 64(36).

tig�, see tag�.

tig�s hardness, hard 219(20). 281(26). tigas�n be done with hardening 253(38). matig�s hard 283(27). pinatigas�n was made hard 237(31).

-t�gil: nagt�gil ceased 201(37).

-ti�s: tin�ti�s is being endured 223(18). t��sin hardship 62(21).

tikt�k spy 312(14). tumikt�k spied 36(31).

tikuw�s lowered at one end 223(35). pagtikuw�s a getting out of balance 192(22). nagtikuw�s tilted 234(42).

-til�d: tumil�d split, cut up 229(35). tinil�d was split 46(40). napatil�d asked to be sliced for 311(43).

tel�fono S. telephone 291(40).

timb�` well-bucket 314(34). tumimb�` drew in a bucket 229(36). kalatimb�` squatting on heels 314(32). nagkalatimb�` squatted on heels 196(37). pinapagkalatimb�` was caused to squat on heels 305(29).

-timb�ng: timb�ngan scales 259(10). katimb�ng equal 42(6) and Corrigenda.

tin�pay bread 32(17).

tind� (S.) goods for sale 259(11). tind�han store, shop 170(4).

-tind�g: nagsitind�g stood on end, pl. 66(16). nagtind�g stood up 26(25). nagsipagtind�g pl. 96(29). nakatind�g is on his feet 38(33). 90(25). pagk�tind�g a chance standing up 291(21). n�patind�g jumped to his feet 202(1).

tinid�r S. table-fork 114(8).

tin�g voice 86(25). 114(11).

tin�k spine, splinter, fish-bone 16(20). 250(34). n�tin�k got a splinter 16(21). pagk�tin�k the getting a splinter 295(23).

-tint�ro: S.: tinter�han ink-stand 180(33).

tin�la stew 163(18).

ting� foreign substance between the teeth 241(29). manghining� pick one's teeth 241(29).

-ting�n: tuming�n watch 18(26). pagting�n an observing 229(37). tingn�n be looked at 64(26). tiningn�n was looked at 18(13). tin�tingn�n is being looked at 106(34).

-tingk�d: matingk�d intense 147(1).

tingt�ng fibre, bristle, straw 315(21).

-tip�n: pinagtipan�n was appointed as meeting-place 104(39). t�p�nan a meeting by appointment 102(11). nagt�p�nan made an appointment to meet each other 26(34).

-tip�d: pagtip�d a being economical 229(37). nagtip�d saved 235(2). nagsipagtip�d pl. 236(6). pagtitip�d a saving 235(1). tinip�d was economized in 245(17). kaytip�d what savingness 174(1). natip�d has been economized in 284(18). matip�d economical 298(9). mapagtip�d given to saving 289(26). pagk�tip�d a chance saving 292(25). nagpatip�d caused to be economized 303(36). ipatip�d be caused to be economized in 244(20). ipinatip�d was caused to be economized 306(31).

-t�pon: tip�n gathered 223(6). pangt�pon used for gathering 225(26). pagt�pon a gathering 229(39). magt�pon store up 235(5). nagt�pon stored up 235(5). nagt�t�pon stores up 202(19). pagtit�pon a storing up 235(3). t�p�nan meeting 259(35) Corrigenda. katip�nan a gathering; n. of a secret society 116(27). Katipun�ros members of the Katipunan 116(32). nakat�pon succeeded in gathering 282(4). nat�pon has been gathered 284(19). pagkat�pon ability to gather, a having gathered 282(16). 283(10). nak�t�pon chanced to gather 291(33). pagk�t�pon a chance gathering 291(23). pat�pon that caused to be gathered 299(21). patip�n into a heap 166(23). nagpat�pon caused to be gathered 303(37). pagpapat�pon a causing to be gathered 303(39). ipinat�pon was caused to be gathered 306(32).

t�pus S. typhoid 223(19).

-tir�: tumir� dwelt, staid 229(41). magtir� dwelt 54(12). nagtir� dwelt 50(4). nagt�tir� is dwelling, stays 38(8). 114(27). pagtitir� a staying 36(25). 54(13). nagt�tumir� keeps staying 112(27). itinir� was left 249(1). tirah�n be dwelt in 253(40). tin�tirah�n is being dwelt in 253(42). tirh�n be left for 253(39). tinirh�n was dwelt in, was left for 118(3). 253(38). t�r�han dwelling 16(32). 24(38). titirh�n home, house 118(27). ikin�pagtir� was the cause of dwelling 120(6). kin�tirh�n was lived in 120(42). makatir� be able to stay 52(39). m�tir� remain, get left 192(38). m�t�tir� will have to remain 187(26). n�tir� got left, dwelt 28(31). 56(30). n�t�tir� is left, dwells 26(28). 28(33). pagk�tir� a chance staying 116(25).

-t�sod: tin�sod was kicked away 245(20). nat�sod has been kicked away 284(20). nak�t�sod accidentally hit with the foot 290(35).

-tiw�la`: tiwal�` persuaded, convinced 104(40). paniw�la` belief 40(3). maniw�la` believe 68(29). naniw�la` believed 106(19). nan�niw�la` believes 40(7). 52(1). paniniw�la` a believing, faith 34(32). 40(2). p�niwala�n credulous 116(9). paniwal�an be given credence 52(6). k�tiw�la` confidential agent, manager 268(13).

tiy� S. aunt 59. 256.

tiy�n womb 36(16).

tiy�nak goblin 68(1).

tey�tro te�tro S. theatre 148(27).

tiyob�bo S. merry-go-round 307(21).

-tl�: tatl� three 24(18). 67. tatl� ng gab�: pagtatatl�-ng-gab� a three-nights' celebration 114(28). tatl� ng p�`: pangatl�-ng-p�` number thirty 226(9). tatl�-tatl� three by three 224(1). pangatl� number three 226(8). ikatl� third 273(19). mak�itl� mak�yitl� three times 298(36).

trabahad�r S. laborer 82(25).

trab�ho S. labor 30(26). trab�ho-ng-kaniyun�ro artilleryman's work 155(22). magt�trab�ho will work 138(30). nagtrab�ho worked 90(14). pagtatrab�ho a working 82(7). pinapagt�trab�ho is being caused to work 72(33).

trab�ko, see b�ko.

tr�n S. train 116(21).

Ts�ng C. n. 263(4).

ts�ko s�ko S. custard-apple, Achras sapota L. 34(40).

Ts�na S. China 269(20).

tub�` sap 258(1).

t�big water 16(31).

t�bo S. tube 255(20).

tub� sugar-cane 181(15). tub�han cane-field 237(41). 259(18).

t�bo` that grown; profit 189(24). 232(22). tum�bo` grew 16(12). t�t�bo` will grow 16(9). tinub�an was grown up in, was grown on 26(39). 204(10). katut�bo` inborn 38(13). 267(4).

-tud, see -tuw�d.

tugt�g that played, piece of music 186(21). tumugt�g play music 166(3). tum�tugt�g is playing music 110(37). nags�situgt�g pl. 110(32). m�nunugt�g musician 112(3). tugt�gin music 247(22). tin�tugtug�n is being played for 48(30). tugt�gan piece of music by several performers 112(4). pagtutugt�gan a playing together 110(40). pagpapatugt�g a causing to be played 80(26).

t�hod knee 48(19).

tuk�` beak 230(2). tumuk�` pick with the beak 230(2). pangpatuk�` given to pick 301(8).

tuks� joke 195(39).

-tukt�k: tumukt�k knocked 78(26). tum�tukt�k is knocking 155(37). pagtukt�k a knocking 78(27). itinukt�k was knocked 30(7). itukt�k top, ceiling 62(15). 118(21).

-t�kop: tin�kop was covered with the hand 100(2).

tul�` connected 186(40). tul�-tul�` coherent 44(35).

-t�lad: tul�ran be limited 74(23).

t�lak push 252(5). tum�lak pushed at; went away 230(3). 235(10). nagt�lak pushed 235(9).

tul�y bridge 163(12).

-tul�: tutul� ear-wax 224(22). manghinul� clean the ears 241(30).

-t�lin: magt�lin go fast 167(35). nagt�t�lin is hurrying 68(16). tinul�nan speed 310(19). mat�lin swift 18(8). 60(31). n�t�lin got faster 294(29). pinat�lin was caused to hurry 72(4).

t�lis point 284(33). tul�s pointed 223(7). tul�san be sharpened 254(1). tulis�n bandit 120(1). mat�lis pointed 271(12).

t�log sleep 220(8). tum�log slept in 64(38). tum�t�log sleeps in 64(37). pagt�log a sleeping 230(7). tin�tul�gan is being slept in 62(39). 190(12). tulug�n sleeping-place 260(32). makit�log sleep along with 122(14). mat�log go to sleep 64(5). 84(18). nat�log went to sleep 18(36). 38(20). 84(39). nat�t�log is asleep 18(38). 38(28). 62(9). matutulug�n sleepy-head 290(4). nak�t�log happened to sleep in 290(36). m�kat�log chance to fall asleep 296(41). mang�kat�log pl. 297(3). mang�k�kat�log will fall asleep pl. 192(14). n�kat�log fell asleep 296(37). nang�k�kat�log are asleep 296(43). pagk�kat�log a falling asleep 62(22). m�tul�gan get slept in 84(17). pat�log-t�log sleeping by fits and starts 300(36). nagpat�log caused to sleep 62(8). patul�gin be caused to sleep 305(3). pinat�log was caused to sleep 36(18). 84(38). mapat�log be able to be caused to sleep 64(2).

t�long help 32(39). t�t�long will help 32(11). nags�sit�long are helping 114(2). tul�ngan be assisted 234(19). pinagt�tul�ng-tul�ngan is being done by haphazard helping 106(29). pagtutulung�n a mutual assisting 237(4). ikat�long be the means of helping 60(23). nakat�long contributed 94(37). nakat�t�long is contributing 112(11). napat�t�long is asking to be helped 311(35).

-t�los: pagtut�los an offering up 50(29). n�t�t�los is set up 66(41). nagpat�los caused to be set up 72(29). n�ipat�los was caused to be set up 80(26).

-t�loy (a): itin�loy was gone on with 287(11). tinul�yan was staid with 116(35). t�l�yan place of lodging; see b�hay. nakit�loy asked to stay with 148(31). pat�loy caused to go on; going on 60(3). 70(34). pinat�loy was caused to stay on 84(38). ipat�loy be caused to go on, be continued 88(43). ipinat�loy was continued 20(41). 66(18). 84(3). ipinat�t�loy is being continued 108(20). --(b) With accent-shift: tul�y further 28(12). 34(8). 47. 231. n�tul�y chanced to continue, got continued 207(31). 237(5). 240(18). papagt�tuluy�n will be caused to go on 88(14). ipinatul�y was caused to be gone on with 96(31). 307(6). ipinapatul�y was caused to be caused to be gone on with 307(12).

tump�k correct 219(20). m�tumpak�n get ascertained 70(32).

t�nay true 66(7). 82(31). katun�yan truth, truly 30(15). 82(5). 265(6). pinatun�yan was caused to be realized 308(29).

-tunt�n: t�tuntun�n will be followed 34(14). tinunt�n was followed 34(21). palatunt�nin querulant 315(11). pal�tunt�nan set of rules 315(26).

t�no S. tone 207(4).

tungk�l about, concerning 30(16). 52(25). 287. 288. tungk�lin concern, duty 96(40). katungk�lan duty, office 52(41). 110(32).

tungt�ng a stand 221(31). t�tunt�ng will set foot on 70(26). 100(29). tin�tuntung�n is being stood on 100(25). mak�tunt�ng-tunt�ng ever set foot on 100(8). m�tunt�ng happen to stand on 68(4).

-t�ngo: tum�ngo went toward 230(8). nagsit�ngo pl. 282(30). kat�ngo person dealt with 266(25). k�t�tung�han will turn out to be the place gone toward 279(20). n�k�kat�ngo is being dealt with 68(14). pat�ngo towards 18(40). 20(3). 48(6). 285. pagpat�ngo a going towards 120(7). 302(21). pat�tung�han will be headed for 90(43). 307(4). pinat�tung�han is being headed for 72(6). 308(30). kap�patung�han will be the place headed for 26(33). 310(28). napat�ngo went toward 102(42).

-tung�: itinung� was bent over 74(16).

t�pa sheep 112(40).

-tup�d: pagtup�d a fulfilling 96(39). pagkatup�d a having fulfilled 233(35).

T�rkos S. Turks 260(10).

torn�liyo S. screw 92(38).

t�ro` that pointed out, a teaching 186(32). 221(32). tur�` extended, stiff 223(8). pan�ro` pointer 225(27). magt�ro` teach 232(36). nagt�t�ro` is teaching 232(38). pagtut�ro` a teaching 88(14). nagt�tur�` is pointing out variously 238(14). panun�ro` a pointing things out 240(39). it�ro` be pointed out, be shown 182(43). 249(2). katuru�n one of two who point at each other 278(25). m�it�ro` get taught 90(1). hintut�ro` forefinger 42(14).

turump� S. spinning-top 227(6).

t�ta` puppy 244(40).

t�to perception, care 166(36). m�t�to get educated 168(14). n�t�to got taught 178(4). m�tut�han get learned 196(35). n�tut�han got learned 28(2). 50(24).

tutub� dragon-fly 291(28).

toto� true 104(23). 116(2). t�toh�nan actuality 94(21). 259(16). katotoh�nan truth 26(5). 68(32). nagpatoto� testified, affirmed 303(42). pagpapatoto� a testifying 304(3). pinapagpatoto� was caused to testify 305(40). tagapagpatoto� witness 20(13).

to�d stump 16(23).

tu�s care 46(29).

tuw�` joy, gladness 46(5). 76(41). glad 80(15). ikinatuw�` was the cause of joy 26(25). ikinat�tuw�` is the cause of being glad 272(26). k�tw�an a rejoicing together 120(25). magk�tw�an rejoice together 280(11). nagk�k�tw�an are rejoicing together 120(26). nakat�tuw�` causes pleasure 280(40). natuw�` became glad 24(27). nangatuw�` pl. 34(23). m�katuwa�n happen to be liked 40(39). 298(28). palatw�in easily pleased 315(13).

tuw�` every time, whenever 58(3). 60(40). 244. 300. 307. 317(5).

-tuw�d: pagtutuw�d a reckoning 232(39). katuw�ran the right 56(7). 100(38). 257(14). katutur�n right outcome 76(21). makatuw�d have figured out; consequence 56(15). matuw�d correct 44(26). 50(14).

t�yot drought 191(32).

U (O).

o S? or 16(25). 45. 321.

� oh 76(34). 80(12). 151(15).

�, see �o.

-ubr� (S.): umbr� took effect, was suitable 230(11). pagubr� a taking effect 108(35). mag�ubr� will suit 235(11).

�bos exhaustion �bos-lak�s exhaustion of strength 18(39). 22(16). �bos-l�k�san exhaustion of strength by several 96(29). ipinag�bos-l�k�san was done with exhaustion of strength 250(4). in��bos is being used up 112(9). iniy�bos was expended 283(41). naka��bos is able to use up 112(40). na�bos was used up 312(29). naub�san was exhausted of 32(19).